UC-NRLF 


$B    bOS    ^55 


German  Composition 


8gor«3na«gK>»iymi^i^ 


PAUhVMAcon 


^S\ 

m 

"^^ 

M 

!^ 


GIFT  or 

«1 


olslQjl*^  -%  <S»M-^ 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION 


BY 

PAUL   VALENTINE   BACON 


jDcr  2)eutfd^c  tft  gelct^rt,  tuenn  er  fetn  2)cutfc^  tjcrfte^t. 

—  ©oct^c. 


ALLYN    AND    BACON 

Boston  Neijj  gork  Cfjfcago 


COPYRIGHT.  1913.  BY 
PAUL  VALENTINE  BACON. 


::> 


•  •  •>  ,    •     •• 


NoTtoooti  9tm« 

.1.  8.  Cuwhlnsr  Co.  —  Berwick  A  Smith  Co. 

Norwood,  Mms.,  U.S.A. 


THE  AMERICAN   TEACHER 
OF   GERMAN 


335658 


VOit  btc  bcutfd^e  5prad?c  pcrftei^t  unb  ftubicrt 
bcfinbet  fid?  auf  bcm  JHarftc,  mo  allc  Hationcn  il^rc 
Waxtn  anbieten,  cr  fptdt  ben  DoImetfd?er,  inbcm 
er  fid?  felbft  berctd?crt. 

—  Letter  from  Ooethe  to  Carlyle,  July  20th,  1827. 


PREFACE. 

This  book  is  the  result  of  a  conviction  that  in  the  study 
of  German  too  little  emphasis  is  laid  on  the  meanings  of 
words.  When  we  use  a  wrong  gender,  case,  or  mood,  Ger- 
mans rarely  misunderstand  us,  but  when  we  use  a  wrong 
word,  they  often  get  no  idea  whatever.  Emphasis,  there- 
fore, is  here  put  on  distinctions  in  the  meanings  of  common 
words,  though  forms  and  syntax  are  not  neglected. 

Above  all,  the  book  aims  to  be  practical.  The  ideal  way  to 
teach  German  composition  is  to  use  nothing  but  German  in 
the  classroom.  But  this  presupposes  pupils  who  are  pre- 
pared to  "think  in  German,"  and  such  students  have  al- 
ready reached  a  state  of  proficiency  far  beyond  the  scope  of 
this  volume,  which  is  intended  as  a  practical  step  toward  an 
ideal  goal. 

The  treatment  does  not  claim  to  be  exhaustive.  As  in 
the  case  of  my  German  Grammar,  I  have  clung  to  the  belief 
that  a  thorough  discussion  of  important  things  furnishes  a 
better  foundation  for  future  work  than  less  intensive  study 
spread  over  a  wider  field.  Though  not  made  for  the  pur- 
pose of  forcing  the  "direct  method"  upon  teachers,  this 
Composition  —  like  the  German  Grammar  and  "Im  Va- 
terland ''  —  readily  lends  itself  to  the  use  of  German  in  the 
classroom. 

A  partial  list  of  the  books  used  in  preparing  the  Composi- 
tion will  be  found  in  the  Teachers'  Handbook,  but  in  the 
treatment  of  many  words  and  constructions,  especially  where 
no  book  sufficed,  I  have  drawn  not  only  on  my  own  experi- 
ence, but  also  on  that  of  many  German  friends. 

vii 


Viii  PREFACE. 

Thanks  are  due  first  to  my  former  teachers,  Fraulein 
Anna  and  Fraulein  Minna  Sannemann,  of  Hannover,  who 
went  over  the  manuscript  with  critical  care.  A  like  service 
was  performed  by  Dr.  Romer,  of  the  Herderschule,  Char- 
lottenburg.  Dr.  Zingler,  of  the  Werner  Siemens  Realgymna- 
sium,  Schoneberg-Berlin,  and  Dr.  Schindler  of  the  Annen 
Realgymnasium,  Dresden.  Valuable  help  on  points  of  de- 
bated usage  was  received  from  Dr.  Gropp,  of  the  Siemens 
Realgymnasium,  Charlottenburg.  Besides  these,  I  wish  to 
thank  Dr.  Martin  Hartmann,  of  Leipsic,  for  permission  to 
use  his  name  in  connection  with  his  letter-writing  exchange ; 
Professor  Schrader,  of  the  University  of  Breslau,  for  exam- 
ining my  drawing  of  the  Indo-European  languages;  Pro- 
fessor Richard  M.  Meyer,  of  the  University  of  Berlin,  for 
suggestions  in  regard  to  Chapter  IV,  Part  II;  Professor 
Wilhelm  Victor,  of  Marburg,  for  explaining  his  attitude  on 
certain  disputed  points  in  phonetics ;  Professor  Sievers,  of 
Leipsic,  for  lending  the  weight  of  his  authority  to  some 
statements  which  might  otherwise  seem  presumptuous;  and 
Dr.  Max  Walter,  of  Frankfort,  for  taking  valuable  time  to 
explain  and  demonstrate  the  method  he  employs  so  success- 
fully. To  Fraulein  Hedwig  Klatt,  of  Berlin,  I  am  doubly 
indebted,  not  only  for  valuable  suggestions  upon  the  entire 
book,  but  for  generous  permission  to  use  the  results  of  her 
remarkable  researches  in  teaching  pronunciation. 

The  anatomical  drawings  in  Chapter  III,  Part  II,  are  by 
Miss  Blair,  of  the  Harvard  Medical  School. 

P.  V.  B. 

Apbil,  1918. 


PLAN  OF  THE  BOOK. 

Part  I,  containing  thirty-six  chapters,  is  for  study. 

Each  Chapter,  except  the  Eeviews,  has  four  parts  :  (1)  Ger- 
man Story,  (2)  Syntax,  (3)  Notes,  (4)  Exercises. 

(1)  The  Story  furnishes  the  foundation  for  conversation 
or  "direct  method"  work,  and  illustrates  the  Syntax  and 
Notes  which  follow.  In  connection  with  the  Historical 
Notes  the  stories  give  a  sketch  of  German  history. 

(2)  The  Syntax  furnishes  discussion  and  further  illustra- 
tion of  the  constructions  treated  in  the  chapter. 

(3)  The  Notes  offer  a  detailed  and  definite  explanation  of 
word  difficulties. 

(4)  The  Exercises  (a)  review  the  Syntax  and  Notes  by 
questions,  (ft)  furnish  Colloquial  Idioms  for  memorizing, 
and  (c)  give  three  sets  of  Idiomatic  Exercises  to  be  written 
in  German,  the  last  of  the  three  being  a  connected  story. 

Every  fourth  chapter  is  devoted  to  Review,  as  are  also  the 
last  four  chapters,  making  twelve  reviews  in  all.  They 
contain  Questions  and  Exercises,  with  a  note  on  some  idio- 
matic particle  like  bod)  or  IDO'^L 

Quotations  from  the  Classics,  some  four  hundred  in  num- 
ber, acquaint  the  pupil  with  the  leading  names  in  German 
literature.  These  citations  include  those  which  one  hears 
most  frequently  in  the  conversation  of  cultured  Germans. 

Pictures  and  Historical  Notes  serve  two  purposes.  For 
those  who  wish  to  use  them,  they  furnish  excellent  material 
for  conversation  and  "  direct  method  "  work.  For  those  who 
do  not  care  to  do  this,  they  make  good  "breathing  spaces  " 
in  the  lesson. 

ix 


X  PLAN  OF  THE  BOOK, 

Part  II,  containing  five  chapters,  is  for  reference. 

Chapter  I  gives  forms  and  suggestions  for  letter  writing. 
It  should  be  consulted  whenever  the  teacher  wishes  to  vary 
the  regular  exercises  by  work  on  letters. 

CJiapter  II  furnishes  illustrations  and  explanations  of  the 
more  common  ways  in  which  German  words  are  derived  and 
combined.     It  may  be  used  either  for  study  or  reference. 

Chapter  III  gives  some  of  the  delicate  distinctions  be- 
tween English  and  German  pronunciation.  It  should  be 
used  discreetly,  and  only  by  those  teachers  who  make  a 
point  of  accurate  work  in  speaking.  Even  by  these,  only 
one  thing  —  Assimilation,  the  Glottal  Catch,  and  so  on  — 
should  be  treated  at  a  time. 

Chapter  IV  contains  an  outline  sketch  of  the  history  of 
the  German  language,  including  a  very  brief  statement  of 
Grimm's  Law.  It  should  be  used  only  for  reading  and 
reference,  not  for  study. 

Chapter  V  includes  (1)  a  few  words  spelled  alike  in  both 
languages,  not  treated  in  Part  I,  (2)  a  list  of  abbreviations, 
familiarity  with  which  will  help  a  pupil  in  his  German  read- 
ing, and  (3)  about  one  hundred  current  idioms  which  can 
scarcely  be  called  literary,  but  a  knowledge  of  which  will  be 
of  advantage  to  those  who  are  planning  to  go  to  Germany. 

Vocabularies  and  Index  are  especially  complete.  The  for- 
mer contain  specific  reference  to  the  sections  where  the 
words  are  discussed,  while  the  latter  includes  not  only  the 
syntactical,  but  the  historical,  ai-tistic,  and  literary  matter  of 
the  book. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Illustrations xiii 

Drawings  and  Maps xv 

German  Equivalents  for  Grammatical  Terms      .        .        .     xvi 

PART  I. 

CHAPTER 

I.  Word  Order  — Inverted.     2)ie  ^ermaTtn8f(i)Iad)t      .        .        1 
II.   Transposed  Order.    Simple  Tenses.    S)eutf(^e  Sreue       .        7 

III.  Transposed  Order.     Compound  Tenses.     2)ietrid^  oon 

iBern .      15 

IV.  Review,    ^cnn 22 

V.   Word  Order.    Position  of  nic^t,    tarl  hex  ©ro^c  in  ber 

@ci)ule 24 

VI.  Word  Order.     Position  of  Adverbs.     2)cr  ^oknbsbogen  32 

VII.  Word  Order.    Position  of  Objects,    ^einrid^  ber  ^ogler  39 

VIII.    Reviewo    9Zot^. 46 

IX.   The  Modal  Auxiliaries.     Simple  Tenses,      .^aifer  Otto 

ber  3)ritte  in  ber  @ruft  tarig  beg  ©ro^en.     ...  48 
X.   The  Modal  Auxiliaries.    Compound  Tenses.     !Die  'D^o- 

(anbjaufen 56 

XI.  Two  Infinitives  with  Other  Verbs  than  Modals.     f^rieb= 

rid)  ajotbart 64 

XII.   Review.    SBo^I 72 

XIII.  Prepositions  with  the  Dative.     2)ie  SSeiber  t)on  2Beiiig= 

berg 74 

XIV.  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative.    S)er  @angcrfrteg  auf 

ber  SSariburg 84 

XV.   Prepositions  with  either  Dative  or  Accusative.    9Zurn= 

berg 92 

XVI.   Review.    <Btiion 102 

XVII.  Inseparable  Verbs.     S)te  i8ud)brucferfun[t       .        .        .106 

xi 


Xii  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

OBAPTEB  PA»« 

XVIII.    Separable  Verbs.    ?l(brc(!)t  Dflrer  .        .        .113 

XIX.   Common  Prefixes.    ?utl)cr  unb  bcr  Xeufet  .        .121 

XX.   Review.    Ubcr^aupt 128 

XXI.   ^obcn  and  fcin  as  Auxiliaries.    2)ic  U^rcn  ^aifcr  ^arl8 

bcs^ttnften 130 

XXII.   English  Verbals  translated  by  German  Infinitives. 

Xex  '3)rct{3ifljat)rige  ilrieg 139 

XXIII.  English  Infinitives  and  Verbals  translated  by  German 

Clauses.     Xet  ©rofec  ^urfurft 148 

XXIV.  Review,    ^a 166 

XXV.   The  Passive  Voice,    ^ricbrid)  bcr  ®ro^e  unb  tie  2Binb= 

mut)(c 168 

XXVI.  Adjectives.    J^riebrid)  bcr  ©rofec  unb  Saftjtngtou.        .  167 
XXVII.   Use  of  Tenses.    @octl)C  unb  ed)iUcr     .        .        .        .^76 

XXVIII.   Review.    ^01^ ...  186 

XXIX.   The  Subjunctive.    S]?eetl)ODen       .        .        .        .•       .  188 

XXX.   Subjunctive  and  Conditional,     ^buiflln  2vii\t      .        .  196 

XXXI.   Special  Subjunctives.     3)q8  gronffurtcr  ^arlomcnt     .  206 

XXXII.   Review.    3war,  ^^lUcrbing^ 212 

XXXIII.  Review  of  Chapters  i-8.     StSmortf  unb  baS  35eutfd)e 

mid) 214 

XXXIV.  Review  of  Chapters  9-16.     Golfer  Sll^clm  bcr  ®ro§f  .  219 
XXXV.   Review  of  Chapters  17-24.    2)cutfd)c  2Bif|cnfd)Qft        .  224 

XXXVI.  Review  of  Chapters  25-32.    2)cutf(^cr  ^anbcl      .        .  228 

PART   II. 

I.   Composition  of  Letters 236 

II.   Composition  of  Words 242 

III.  Composition  of  Sounds.    Phonetics     ....  266 

IV.  Composition  of  the  German  Language                           .  278 
V.   Miscellaneous,    i.  Identical  Words.    2.  Abbreviations. 

3.  Slang 289 

German-English  Vocabdlart  awd  Word-Index  .297 

English-German  Vocabulary  and  Word-Index                      .  330 

Special  Index 355 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

The  Imperial  House  of  Parliament         ....        Frontispiece 

PAGE 

1.  Teutoburg  Forest.    The  Hermann  Monument        ...  2 

2.  Trier.    The  Palace  of  the  Roman  Emperors           ...  8 

3.  Trier.    The  Porta  Nigra,  or  Black  Gate         ....  13 

4.  Ravenna.    Tomb  of  Theodoric 15 

5.  Charlemagne,  from  a  painting  by  Albrecht  Diirer  ...  24 

6.  Aachen.     The  Cathedral 30 

7.  Rolandseck.    The  Arch  of  Roland 33 

8.  Quedlinburg.    The  Cathedral 39 

9.  Blankenburg.    The  Regenstein '    .  44 

10.  Aachen.     The  Vault  of  the  Cathedral  and  the  Coronation 

Chair 49 

1 1 .  Goslar.     The  Palace  of  the  Emperors 53 

12.  Bremen.     Roland .  57 

13.  Halle.     Roland 61 

14.  Kyffhauser.    The  Monument  to  Emperor  William  I       .        .65 

15.  Kyffhauser.     Barbarossa 67 

16.  Bad  Reichenhall.     Barbarossa 70 

17.  Weinsberg.     Fortress  Weibertreu,  seen  from  the  town   .        .  74 

18.  Weinsberg.     Fortress  Weibertreu,  seen  from  a  neighboring 

hill 79 

19.  Fortress  Weibertreu.    The  Octagonal  Tower          ...  82 

20.  Eisenach.    The  Singers'  Hall  at  the  Wartburg       ...  84 

21.  Eisenach.    The  Wartburg 87 

22.  Nuremberg.     The  Pegnitz  and  the  Walls       ....  92 

23.  Nuremberg.     Statue  of  Hans  Sachs 97 

24.  Nuremberg.    The  Women's  Gate 100 

ziii 


XIV  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PAOK 

25.  Mayence.    Statue  of  Gutenberg  and  the  Cathedral        .        .     105 

26.  Portrait  of  Albrecht  Diirer,  painted  by  himself        .        .        .114 

27.  Nuremberg.    The  House  of  Albrecht  Diirer  .        .        .        .117 

28.  The  Wartburg.     Luther's  Room 121 

29.  The  Wartburg.     Inner  Court 124 

30.  Martin  Luther,  painted  by  his  friend,  Lucas  Kranach     .  127 

31.  Charles  V,  painted  by  Titian 131 

32.  Rothenburg 139 

33.  Coburg 143 

34.  Berlin.   Statue  of  the  Great  Elector 149 

35.  Potsdam.    The  Mill  at  Sans  Souci 159 

36.  Potsdam.    Sans  Souci,  the  Palace  of  Frederick  the  Great     .     163 

37.  Berlin.     Statue  of  Frederick  the  Great 169 

38.  Weimar.     Statue  of  Goethe  and  Schiller        .        .        .        .177 

39.  Weimar.     Goethe's  Garden  House 181 

40.  Bust  of  Schiller,  in  the  Library  at  Weimar     .        .        .        .184 

41.  Portrait  of  Beethoven 188 

42.  Wagner 190 

43.  Bust  of  Goethe,  in  the  Library  at  Weimar      .        .        .        ,195 

44.  Portrait  of  Queen  Luise,  in  the  Gallery  at  Cologne         .        .197 

45.  Frankfort.    Church  of  St.  Paul,  where  the  Parliament  met  .    205 

46.  Ernst  Morltz  Arndt,  member  of  the  Frankfort  Parliament      .    207 

47.  Ludwig  Uhland,  member  of  the  Frankfort  Parliament   .        .211 

48.  Rudelsburg.    Statue  of  Bismarck  as  a  Student      .        .        .214 

49.  Bismarck,  from  a  photograph 217 

50.  Coblentz.     Monument  to  Emperor  William  1  .        .        .    219 

51.  Moltke 222 

52.  Roentgen,  discoverer  of  the  X-ray 224 

53.  Mommsen,  one  of  Germany's  great  historians        .         .        .  226 

54.  Hamburg.    The  Harbor 228 

55.  Barmen-Elberfeld.    The  Hanging  Railway    ....  230 

56.  Kiel.    The  Canal,  with  the  Battleship  CfiarUs  the  Great         .  231 


DRAWINGS  AND  MAPS. 

PAGE 

Facsimile  of  Intimate  Letter 236 

Facsimile  of  Friendly  Letter 238 

Facsimile  of  Formal  Letter    . .241 

Figure!.     Position  of  Tongue  for  letter  i 258 

Figure  2.     Position  of  Tongue  for  letter  a 258 

Figure  3.     Position  of  Tongue  for  letter  u 259 

Figure  4.     Diagram  of  Tongue-positions  for  German  vowels         .  259 

Figure  5.     Position  of  Tongue  for  letter  I 270 

Figure  6.     Position  of  Tongue  for  trilled  t   .      .  .        .         .         .271 

Figure  7.     Position  of  Tongue  for  uvula  t 271 

Figure  8.     Diagram  of  Indo-European  Languages        .    -    .         .  279 

Figure  9.     Diagram  of  Grimm's  Law 281 

Map  of  German  Dialects to  follow  282 


XV 


GERMAN   EQUIVALENTS   FOR 
GRAMMATICAL  TERMS. 

The  letter  (of  the  alphabet),  ber  :53uc^'ftabe. 
The  vowel,  ber  ^oM,  or  ber  (gelbft'laut. 
The  consonant,  ber  5lonfonant',  or  ber  iO^it'laut. 
The  sentence,  ber  ^a^. 

The  subject,  ba^  (Subjeff;  the  predicate,  bo^  "iprdbifaf. 
The  main  clause,  ber  §aupt'f a^. 
The  subordinate  clause,  ber  9f?e'benfa^. 
The  parts  of  speech,  bie  $Re'beteUe. 
The  article,  ber  5lrti'fe(,  or  ba^  ®efd)(ec^t«'n)ort. 

Definite,  beftimtnt';  indefinite,  un'befttmmt. 
The  noun,  ba«  ^ub'ftantio,  or  ba«  §aupt'wort. 

First,  second,  third  class,  er'fte,  gtuei'le,  brit'te  ^^(affe. 
The  pronoun,  ba«  ^iprono'men,  or  ba«  giir'iDort. 
The  adjective,  ba«  5lb'ie!tit),  or  ba«  (5i'Qentc^aft<<lDort. 
The  numeral,  ba«  S^utuera'Ie,  or  ha^  ^a^'xvoxt. 
The  adverb,  ba^  5(bt»erb',  or  bai<  Um'ftanb«tt)ort. 
The  verb,  ba«  i8er'b(um),  or  bad  ^eit'ttjort. 

Strong,  ftarf ;  weak,  fc^tuac^ ;  separable,  trcnn'bar  ;  in- 
separable, un'trennbar  ;  transitive,  tranfitio';  intran- 
sitive, intranfitio'. 
The  preposition,  bie  ^J^rapofition',*  or  bod  3?er()Qlt'nidH)ort. 
The  conjunction,  bie  ,Sionjunftion',  or  bad  ^in'betvort. 
The  interjection,  bie  Qnterjcftion',  or  bad  5(ud'rufung<MiHnt. 
The  gender,  bad  ^efd)Ied)t':  masculine,  monn'lid) ;  feminine, 

lueib'ttd) ;  neuter,  fadj'Iid). 
The  number,  bie  3al)l'form. 
Siugular,  ber  2iiuvihu',  or  bie  (5in'^a()(. 
Plural,  ber  ^tUu'ral,  or  bie  lV(ii)r'^al)l. 


GBAMMATICAL    TERMS.  XVH 

The  case,  ber  i^alt  (pi.  bie  gal'te). 
The  nominative,  ber  ^lo'minatit) ;   genitive,  ber  ©e'ttitit) ; 
dative,  ber  X)a'ttt) ;  accusative,  ber  5lf  fufatit). 

The  inflection,  bie  ^te'guTtg  ;  to  decline,  befUnte'ren, 

The   declension,   bie    ^e!(tnatton';    strong,    ftarf;    weak, 

f(f)tt)a(^ ;  mixed,  gemtfd^t. 
To  conjugate,  fottjugte'ren ;  conjugation,  bie  Conjugation'. 

The  comparison,  bie  Comparatton',  or  bie  (Stei'gerung ;  to 
compare,  ftei'gern ;  positive,  ber  *i|3o'fittt) ;  comparar 
tive,  ber  Com'paratit) ;  superlative,  ber  @u'per(attti. 

The  tense,  ha^  Xent'pu^,  t>k  ^eif form ;  present,  t>a^  ^rci'* 
fen^;  past,  ba^  Qm'ptv\dt;  future,  ba^  gutur'  (ba^ 
er'fte  gutur');  perfect,  t>a^  ^erfeff ;  past  perfect,  ba^ 
^(u^'quamperfeft ;  future  perfect,  ba^  ^tDei'te  gutur'; 
simple,  compound,  ein'fac^,  ^ufam'mengefe^t. 

The  mode,  ber  SJlo'bu^  ;  indicative,  ber  3^n'bt!atit) ;  subjunc- 
tive, ber  Con'juncttD ;  imperative,  ber  -3m'peratit> ; 
infinitive,  ber  3^^'P^^tit) ;  participle,  ba^  '^artictp'. 

The  accent,  ber  Xon ;  raising  and  lowering  of  the  voice,  bie 
gebung  unb  Senfung  ber  (gtimme. 

Position,  order,  bie  (gtedung,  bie  Orbnung. 

Word  order,  bie  SKortfoIge  ;  inverted  order,  bie  3^nt)erfton'- 

Page,  bie  (Seite  ;  line,  bie  3^i(e,  bie  dtti\}t  (row). 

Note.  —  Properly  the  foreign  terms  should  have  the  accent  on  the 
last  syllable ;  but  in  the  language  of  the  schoolroom  the  accent  has 
been  shifted  from  the  meaningless  ending  to  the  distinctive  part  of  the 
word. 


PART  I. 

CHAPTER  I. 
WORD  ORDER  — INVERTED. 

Pie  ^ermannsfd^Iad^t 

1.  S3or  tJtelen,  uteten  ^a^ren  gab  e^  in  1)eutf(^(anb 
noc^  feme  ©tcibte.  !t)te  atten  Deutfc^en  tDo^nten  mitten  in 
grogen  SBcitbern,  Unter  if)nen  lebte  bamaf^  ein  tapferer 
§e(b,  germann,  ben  bie  9f^omer  ^Irminiu^  nannten*  Qn 
biefer  ^eit  ^errfc^te  in  ^f^ont  f aifer  5Iuguftu^.  ^a  er  bie 
^eutfc^en  miUtme^fiii— njoflte,  fanbte  er  feinen  gelb^errn 
SBarug  gegen  fie. 

liefer  fnc^te  ben  ^einb  im  Xeutoburger  SBalbe,  aber 
§ermann  trartete  nid)t  anf  il)n;  er  griff  bie  9?dnter  an 
unb  bernic^tete  beina^e  ba^  gan^e  rt^mifc^e  §eer.  !5)a^  wav 
ba«  erfte  ^at,  ha^  bie  ^dmer  in  :t)entfc^(anb  gefc^fagen 
tDnrben.  511^  bie  9^ac^ric^t  baoon  nac^  9^ont  getangte,  rief 
taifer  5(ugnftu^  an^:  „^d)  SSaru^,  iSarn^,  gib  mir  nteine 
gegionen  toieber!" 

Syntax. 

2.  Inverted  Order.  —  In  the  inverted  order  the  verb 
or  auxiliary  comes  before  the  subject.  The  rest  of  the 
sentence  has  the  normal  order.  Inverted  order  is  used 
not  only,  as  in  English,  in  interrogative  and  imperative 
sentences,  but  also  in  declarative  sentences  when  intro- 
duced by  some  element  other  than  the  subject.  Eng- 
lish sometimes  inverts  a  declarative  sentence,  as  in. 
Here  comes  the  bride.     But  English  may  also  say,  Here 


'.s!;ma^  composition. 


[§2. 


1.  The  Hermann  Monument  in  the  Teutoburger  Forest. 

the  bride  eomes^  while  German  cannot  follow  this  latter 
order,  \)\\\  must  invert. 

(1)   (Miniaii   is   very  partial   to  the  inverted  order. 
Often  wlitji  o  an  English  declarative  sentence  begins  with 


Chap.  1.]  WOUDOEDEB  —  INVERTED.  8 

the  subject,  German  starts  with  some  other  element. 
Where  we  say,  I  saw  the  emperor  in  Potsdam  yesterday^ 
a  German  would  probably  use  one  of  the  following 
sentences,  according  to  what  he  wanted  to  emphasize  : 
©eftern  ):)Qiht  \6)  in  ^ot^bam  ben  ^aifer  gefe^en,  or,  !Den 
^atfer  ^be  id)  geftern  in  ^ot^bam  gefe^en,  or,  ^n  "ipot^bam 
^abe  ic^  geftern  ben  ^aifer  gefe^en. 

(2)  Special  care  should  be  taken  to  invert  the  main 
subject  and  verb  when  the  sentence  begins  with  a  sub- 
ordinate clause. 

If  I  havenH  a  knife^  I  canH  carve. 

^ctttt  itl)  feitt  aJJcffcr  ^abc,  fann  it^  ntrl)t  fjl)tteibctt.  — ^itlern. 

When  I  was  still  a  boy,  I  thought  of  nothing  but  stories  of  magic 
and  wonders, 

^l§  tt^  no(^  etn  ^naht  toav,  bai^tc  td|  an  nic^tS  aW  an  S^^^^^' 
unb  SButtbcrgcf (^ii^tcn.  —  §  e  i  n  e. 

Notes. 

3.  Historical  Note.  —  Hermann  the  Liberator  was  a  German 
prince  who  had  served  as  a  youth  in  the  Roman  army.  He 
tried  to  unite  the  German  tribes  so  as  to  drive  the  Romans  out 
of  Germany,  and  after  the  victory  in  the  Teutoberg  Forest  (9  a.d.), 
the  Romans  did  remain  for  a  time  west  of  the  Rhine.  But  the 
German  chiefs  were  jealous  of  each  other  and  of  Hermann.  They 
betrayed  his  wife  Thusnelda  to  the  Romans  to  be  led  in  chains 
through  the  streets  of  Rome  in  the  "  triumph  "  of  the  Roman  gen- 
eral Germanicus.  And  finally  they  murdered  Hermann  (21  a.d.) 
when  he  was  in  his  thirty-seventh  year.  In  the  story  in  §  1,  the 
Germans,  bic  ©ertnaneTt,  are  referred  to  as  „bie  2)eittfd^en/'  though 
this  term  is  of  later  origin  (about  800  a.d.). 

4.  English  ago  is  usually  'oox  with  the  dative  case. 
A  week  ago  I  bought  this  book. 

f&ox  ctttcr  9®o(i^c  Ijabc  id)  btc§  S3ttd^  gcfauft. 

Long  years  ago  there  lived  a  man  in  the  East. 

f&9x  graucn  ^tt^rcit  UW  tin  'Mann  m  Often.  — $?ejfing. 


4  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§  7. 

Note.  —  When  ago  is  used  with  a  form  of  the  verb  to  6e,  German 
generally  uses  I)cr  following  an  adverb  or  the  accusative. 
It^s  a  long  time  ago.     (gg  ift  langc  l^er. 
That  is  fifty  years  ago. 
2)a8finb  nun  fiinfgig  3a^rc  I)cr.  — SSltbcnbrud). 

5.  When  denoting  extent  of  time,  English  for  is  rendered 
in  German  by  the  accusative  of  time.  This  is  often  followed 
by  the  adverb  (ang. 

For  three  hours^  for  a  whole  month. 

^rci  Stiittbctt  (tang),  ctnctt  ganjcn  SUionat  (tang). 

And  so  he  sat  for  many  days,  sat  for  many  years. 

Uttb  fo  fa^  cr  tiictc  Xagc,  fa^  tttcF  '^a\^xt  lang.  —  ©t^iirer. 

Note.  —  Unmodified  words  expressing  time  are  united  with  long 
and  written  as  adverbs  (not  with  a  capital)  :  for  hours,  for  days,  for 
weeks,  for  months,  for  years,  ftunbentang,  tagelang,  tt)od)en(ang,  mona= 
telang,  ja^relang. 

6.  English  to  live  has  two  German  equivalents :  too^nen 
and  Uhtn. 

(1)  SSo^nen  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)  is  used  in  the  sense  of  to- 
dwell,  to  reside. 

I  live  on  Charles  Street,    ^r^  wo^nc  in  bcr  ^orfftro^e. 

She  lived  a  long  time  here  in  Sorrento. 

(5ic  Xjai  (augc  ^icr  in  Sorrento  gcwo^nt.  —  ^t\)\t. 

(2)  Seben  (reg.,  aux.  l^aben)  is  used  in  the  sense  of  to  he 
alive,  to  exist, 

Man  lives  not  by  bread  alone. 

^cr  9Kcttfd)  tcbct  ttid|t  oom  SBrot  allciu.  —  33ibel,  matt,  4,  4. 

He  didn't  live  like  others,    ©r  lebtc  ttit^t  Wic  aubere*  —  ^  c  H  e  r. 

7.  English  to  look  for,  to  hunt  for,  is  fu(^en  (reg.,  aux. 
I)aben)  with  the  accusative.  Think  of  the  English  word 
seek,  and  do  not  use  filr. 

miat  are  you  looking  for  9    SBafil  fur^Ctt  8ie  ? 

And  I  had  no  idea  of  looking  for  anything. 

Unb  md)t!$  su  fu(t)cn,  bad  war  mein  8inn.  ~  @  o  e  1 1^  e. 


Chap.  1.]  WORD   ORDER  —  INVERTED.  5 

8.  English  to  wait  for  is  tnarten  auf  (reg.,  aux.  '^abetl)  with 
the  accusative.     Never  say  irarten  fiir. 

We  waited  for  you  for  half  an  hour. 

995ir  ^abcn  cine  Ijalbc  ©titttbc  auf  i»t(^  (or  ®ic)  gcttiartct. 

But  now  I  wonH  wait  any  longer  for  him! 

3(ticr  ic^t  ttiart^  ii^  iiod^  m^t  laitgcr  auf  tl|tt !  —  ®  e  r  ft  a  d  e  r. 

9.  English  no,  not  a,  not  any,  is  fctlt*  ^td^t  ein  means  not 
one  and  is  used  only  in  emphatic  cases;  even  then  feitt  eittjig, 
not  a  single,  is  preferable. 

Haven't  you  a  pencil  ?    ^abctt  Sic  f ctnctt  93(ctfttft  ? 
He  hasnH  made  a  single  mistake. 
@r  \\ai  fctncn  eittjtgctt  %t\\Ux  gcmarfjt. 
Who  doesnHjind  any,  doesnH  need  to  furnish  any. 
9Ber  fctnc  ftnbct,  braudit  audi  f ctttc  abjultcfent.  —  @  t  o  r  m . 
He  did  not  speak  a  single  word.  —  ©r  ^pvad)  !cttt  cinjigc^  995ort. 

—  .t'  e  b  b  c  f . 

Exercises. 

10.  (a)  1.  Decline:  ber  grof^e  Salb,  ettt  ta|)ferer  vtSelb, 
teine  ®tabt,  ba^  erfte  33^a(.  2.  G^ii;e  ^/ie  principal  ^mrts  of: 
geben,  (eben,  nennen,  fenben,  fc^lagen,  rufen. 

{h)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  1  illustrate  the  inverted 
order?  2.  When  must  German  invert  a  declarative  sen- 
tence which  does  not  need  to  be  inverted  in  English  ? 
3.  Find  examples  of  the  inverted  order  among  the  quota- 
tions in  §§  4,  5,  and  8.    Find  in  §  4  an  illustration  of  §  6,  2. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.     Memorize:  1.  3Ba^  [ui^ftbu? 

2.  3Sor  jnjei  3^a^ren  ^abe  t(^  in  ber  ^arlftra^e  geiuo^nt. 

3.  Sarten  (Ste  boc^  ni^t  (anger  auf  mtc^ !  4.  ^c^  ^atte 
feine  ^di.  5.  :r)a^  tDar  aber  (ange  ^er.  6.  ^c^  ^abe  etne 
ganje  ©tunbe  gearbettet. 

11.  (a)  1.  A  year  ago  we  lived  on  (tn  ber)  Hermann 
Street.       2.  For  two  hours  he  looked  for  his  friend.       3.  We 


6  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§11. 

have  waited  for  you  for  hours.  4.  Augustus  lived  many 
years  ago.  5.  For  a  whole  week  we  didn't  have  a  lesson 
((Stunbe).       6.    But  that  was  long  ago. 

(6)  1.   For  a  whole  year  they  lived  on  Winter  Street. 

2.  Augustus  lived  in  Rome,  but  that  was  many  years  ago. 

3.  For  days  I  looked  for  an  interesting  book,  but  I  didn't 
find  one.  4.  Will  you  wait  a  moment  for  me  ?  5.  Many 
years  ago  Germany  did  not  have  a  single  large  city. 
6.  What  are  you  waiting  for  (ttjorauf)?  Are  you  looking 
for  something  ? 

(c)  Hermann  the  Liberator.  —  1.  Many  centuries  ago 
(there)  lived  in  Germany  a  brave  hero,  Hermann.  2.  At 
that  time  (§  1,  line  4)  the  Germans  did  not  have  cities ; 
they  lived  in  huts  in  the  forest.  3.  When  the  Emperor 
Augustus  wanted  to  subjugate  the  Germans,  he  sent  his 
general  Varus  against  them.  4.  Hermann  was  at  that 
time  twenty-five  years  old,  but  he  was  already  the  German 
leader.  5.  For  days  Varus  looked  for  him,  but  Hermann 
did  not  wait  for  him;  he  attacked  Varus  and  almost  anni- 
hilated his  army.  6.  That  was  nineteen  centuries  ago, 
but  the  Germans  will  never  forget  Hermann  the  Liberator. 


CHAPTER   II. 
WORD   ORDER  — TRANSPOSED.     SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Peutfd?e  Creue. 

12.  Der  rbmifc^e  ^tftorifer,  Xacttu^,  er^ci^It,  ba^  tm  erften 
^a^r^unbert  na(^  ^^riftM  etnige  ©efanbte  be^  T)eut[d)ett 
SSolfe^  nad)  9f?om  gingen.  !Dort  bat  man  fie,  mit  in^  ^o(of= 
feum  ^u  ge^en,  urn  fic^  bie  ^ampffpiek  anpfe^en.  T)a  fie 
unter  ben  rdmifc{)en  (Senatoren  einige  SJZcinner  fa^en,  tk 
ni^t  Corner  n)aren,  fragten  fie  i^re  greunbe,  tDer  biefe  Sente 
ba  feien. 

9}^an  fagte  i^nen,  eg  iraren  grentbe,  bie  fi(^  bnrc^  i^re 
Xreue  gegen  ^om  an^ge^eic^net  flatten.  T)a  gingen  bie 
T)entfc^en  an  ben  Ort,  tt)o  biefe  3}^anner  fagen,  nnb  fe^ten 
fic^  3U  i^nen.  „3Benn  e«  Saffen  ^u  fitf)ren  ober  Xreue 
^u  fatten  gilt,"  fagten  fie  ben  $Ri3mern,  „fo  iibertrifft  !ein 
aJienfc^  bie  T)entfc^en." 

Syntax. 

13.  Transposed  Order.  —  Simple  Tenses.  —  With  simple 
tenses  in  the  transposed  or  dependent  order,  the  verb 
is  put  at  the  end  of  the  clause.  This  order  is  followed 
in  all  dependent  clauses,  that  is,  in  those  introduced  by 
a  relative  or  by  a  subordinating  conjunction  (aU,  ha, 
ba§,  h)eit,  njenn,  n)0,  etc.).  Whenever  one  of  these 
introductory  words  occurs,  drop  all  thought  of  the  verb 
till  every  other  word  in  the  clause  is  translated,  be- 
cause, except  for  the  verb,  the  order  is  normal. 


GERMAN   COMPOSITION, 


[§14. 


I  found  them  when  I  put  the  empty  baskets  back  in  the  boat. 
^^  fttttb  ftc,  al§  id)  bic  Iccrcit  tiirbc  wicbcr  in  bic  S3ar!c  fc^te. 

—  ^c^fe. 
/am  thankful  for  the  severest  criticism,  if  it  is  only  to  the  point. 
5d)  bin  battfbar  fiir  bic  frfjarfftc  ^riti!,  wcnn  ftc  imr  faj^Iic^  bkibt. 

—  SBiSmarrf. 
Notes. 

14.  Historical  Note.  —  In  the  two  centuries  after  the  „§cnnann«- 
f(f)tad)t"  the  Romans  extended  their  power  beyond  the  Rhine  and 
organized  ithe  province  Germania.    Thus  relations  between  Romans 


2.    Ruins  of  the  Palace  of  the  Roman  Emperors  at  Trier. 


and  Germans  became  more  intimate;  Germans  often  went  to 
Rome,  and  Romans  built  theatres  and  palaces  in  Germany.  Of 
these  buildings  the  best  remains  are  at  Trier,  the  residence  of  sev- 
eral Roman  Emperors.  But  the  Germans  never  adopted  Roman 
civilization.  Tacitus  in  his  "  Germania  "  gives  us  a  vivid  picture 
of  German  life  and  customs,  the  simplicity  of  which  he  contrasts 
most  favorably  with  the  luxury  of  the  effeminate  Romans. 


Chap.  2.]  TBANSPOSEB   OBDEB.  9 

15.    The  English  verb  to  ask  is  usually  btttctl  or  fragcn* 

(1)  bitten  (bat,  gebeten,  aux.  ^aben)  means  to  beg,  to 
ask  for. 

(a)   To  ask  for  something  is  translated   by  bittetl  Uttl. 
Both  verb  and  preposition  take  the  accusative. 

May  I  ask  you  for  another  glass  of  water  9 
^arf  id)  @ic  urn  ttod)  cm  (^U^  SBoffer  Witn  ? 
I  do  not  ask  for  my  life. 
^^  bittc  nidjt  urn  mein  Scben.  —  @  (^  i  U  e  r. 

(6)  To  translate  the  English  phrase,  to  ask  some  one  to  do 
something,  use  bitten  with  a  phrase,  not  a  clause. 

She  asked  him  to  loaitfor  her.     @tc  hat  i^tt,  auf  fie  5tt  ttiartctt, 

I  ask  you  not  to  drag  it  (the  communication)  out  too  long. 

^dj  bittc  Sic,  bicfctbc  (bic  SUlitteilung)  ni(^t  ju  longc  au^5ubcl|uctt. 

—  greljtag. 

2^ote.  —  53itte  (for  tcf)  bitte)  is  used  for  English  if  you  please,  and 
also  for  you  are  welcome  in  answer  to  thank  you  (banfe). 

(2)  i^ragen  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)   means   to  inquire,  to   ask 
(a  question).     It  takes  the  accusative  or  two  accusatives. 

(a)  To  ask  if  or  ask  whether  is  fragen  ob,  followed  by  a 
clause,  not  a  phrase. 

Did  yoM  ask  me  something  9    ^abcn  Sic  tttit^  ctttia^  ficfragt  ? 

iJe  asked  her  if  she  could  go  along. 

@r  fragtc  fie,  ob  fie  mitgcljett  fonnte. 

J  also  will  ask  you  one  thing. 

3t^  Will  cttc^  and)  citt  SSort  fragcm  —  S3 1  b  c  t,  2Jfatt.  21,  24. 

(5)  To  translate  ^o  ask  about  or  asZ:  a/^er  something,  use 
fragen  nac^  with  the  dative. 

They  asked  after  his  health.    Sic  fragtctt  naU)  feincr  ©cfunbljeit. 

Then  I  asked  about  my  indebtedness. 

^a  fragt^  it^  nadf  bcr  St^utbigfeit,  —  U t)  ta  n  b. 

]}^ote.  —  (a)  Remember  that  fragen  always  takes  the  accusative  of 
the  person  to  whom  the  question  is  put,  while  fagen,  to  say  to,  to  tell, 


10  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  17. 

always  has  the  dative  of  the  person  to  whom  the  statement  is  made. 
Compare  fragten  fie  iljre  greunbe  (§  12,  1.  6)  and  jagten  fte  ben  9tomcrn 
(§  12,  1.  12). 

(&)   To  ask  (put)  questions  is  ^ragen  ftcUen  with  the  dative. 

Now  Twill  ask  you  a  question  or  two. 

^c^t  ftcU^  id)  ^Ijitcii  citt  paav  f^ragcn. 

A  fool  asks  more  questions  than  a  hundred  wise  men  can  answer. 

©in  ^avv  ftcUt  me^r  ^^ragcn,  al^  ^unbcrt  SSctfc  beantwortcn  fonncn. 

—  @prid)n)ort. 

16.  The  English  adverb  there  is  usually  bort  or  ba. 
These  adverbs,  ba  and  bort,  should  never  be  used  for  the 
factitive  there  in  expressions  like  thei-e  are,  there  was,  and 
so  on. 

(1)  T)OVt  is  used  for  more  distant  places  than  ha,  or  when 
the  speaker  wishes  to  be  more  definite.  English  over  there 
is  always  bort. 

I  don't  sec  anything  over  there.    Xovt  fc^^  id)  ntdjt^. 

The  fairest  maiden  is  sitting  so  wondrous  up  there. 

%\t  fd|ijttftc  ^ungfrau  fi^ct  bort  obcu  ttiunberbar.  —  ^  e  i  n  c. 

(2)  ^a  is  generally  used  in  cases  where  no  particular 
place  is  specified. 

There  they  were  without  [an]  umbrella. 

^a  marcn  fie  ol)nc  5Rc0cnfd)irm. 

There  stood  poor  Hans  thunderstruck. 

%a  ftaub  ber  ttrmc  ^aw^  wic  bom  Conner  gcrii^rt.  —  ip  i  ( ( e  r  n. 

17.  The  German  ba  has  several  other  common  uses. 

(1)  !^a,  {and)  then,  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence 
to  keep  a  narrative  lively. 

And  then  it  broke  out  afresh,    ^o  fltng  c^  ttiicbcr  (o«i. 

And  then  Mariette  went  out  and  wept  bitterly. 

^a  flittfl  ^ilWaricttc  l)iimu<<  uiib  loctntc  bittcrlid).  — Sfdjoffe. 

(2)  ^a,  here,  is  less  detinite  than  l)ier.  It  refers  especially 
to  one's  being  at  homey  or  hack,  having  arrived. 


Chap.  2.]  TRANSPOSED   ORDER.  11 

Is  Miss  Fisher  here,  please  f    S3ttte,  tft  fjraittcttt  f^ifdjcr  btt  ? 

Fm  glad  yoiCre  here  again. 

0:2  frcut  mid),  ha^  Sic  ttJiebcr  ba  finb. 

.Here  /  am  again,    ^a  bin  id)  ttiicbcr.  —  §  e  b  b  c  I. 

(3)  '^a,  as,  is  a  conjunction  and  is  followed  by  the  de- 
pendent order.     It  is  used  when  as  gives  a  reason. 

As  it  is  late,  ice  must  go. 

^a  t§  ft^ott  f^rit  ift,  miiffcn  toir  fort. 

As  he  wasnH  here  by  eleven  o''clock,  he  wonH  come. 

^tt  tx  hx^  df  Ul)r  nid)t  ba  war,  bleibt  cr  axi^,  —  @  e  r  ft  ci  cf  e  r. 

18.  English  to  sit  (doivn)  has  two  translations  in  German  : 
fi^cn  and  ftc^  fc^ctt. 

(1)  (St^en  (fag,  gefeffen,  aux.  ^aben)  means  to  sit,  to  be  in 
a  sitting  posture.  The  place  where  is  indicated  by  a  prepo- 
sition with  the  dative. 

Where  did  you  sit  ?    SSo  I)abctt  @ic  flcfcffctt  ? 

/  was  sitting  on  a  mountain.     '^^  fa^  ailf  cittCttt  S3crgc,  —  ®  r  it  n. 

(2)  (gic^  fe^en  (reg.,  aux.  l^aben)  means  to  sit  down,  to  put 
oneself  into  a  sitting  posture.  The  place  where  (whither)  is 
indicated  by  a  preposition  with  the  accusative.  The  idea 
of  ^notion  towards  something  is  often  strengthened  by  the 
particle  ^in* 

Where  shall  I  sit  ? 

2Bo  f oU  it^  mid)  l)ittfc^ctt  ?  or,  933ol)itt  foil  id)  mid)  f c^cn  ? 

Here  he  sat  down  in  the  armchair  by  the  window. 

^icr  f c^tc  cr  fid)  in  bcit  Scl)nftttl)l  ati)^  fjcnftcr,  —  @  t  o  r  m. 

19.  English  man  is  usually  rendered  by  bcr  SOlcnfd^  or 
bcr  SO^ann.     Never  use  matt  (§  57). 

(1)  !Der  Sy^ettfcf)  (be^  SJ^ettfc^ett)  is  used  in  the  general 
sense  of  person,  human  being  (Latin  homo). 

Man  proposes,  God  disposes. 

^cr  SJlcnf d)  bcnft,  @ott  Icttft.  — @prid)tt)ort. 


12  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  21. 

Man  errs  as  long  as  he  strives. 

e^  hrt  bcr  aWcnfd),  folang^  cr  ftrcbt.  —  @  o  c  t  ^  c. 

(2)  '^tv  Wlann  (bte  SJ^dnner)  is  used  for  man  as  distin- 
guished from  woman  (Latin  vir).  It  is  also  the  common 
word  for  husband,  ber  (^atte  and  ber  @ema^(  being  more 
formal. 

He  was  a  real  man.    dr  toav  tin  center  SJJatttt. 

YoM  German  men,  say  no,  you  German  women,  join  in  ! 

^^r  bctttfd)Ctt  Mmntx,  rufct  ncin,  i^r  bctttfd)Ctt  IJrttucn,  ftimmct 
ettt !  —  2)  a  "^  Ti. 

T!^e  husband,  the  protection  and  refuge  of  the  wife;  the  wife,  the 
ornament  of  the  husband,  '^cr  SSlann  bciS  993ctbc^  @t^u^  unb  ^ort, 
bai8  295cili  bc^  ajiatmc^  3icr.  — ^reiligrat^. 

Exercises. 

20.  (a)  1.  Decline  :  ettt  romtfc^er  (Senator,  bte  beutfcf)e 
Saffe,  eittige  Seute,  ba^  erfte  3<a^r^unbert.  2.  (?a'e  ^/ie 
principal  parts  of :  gel)en,  fe^ett,  [eitt,  ^aben,  fi^en,  fe^en, 
bitten. 

(h)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  12  illustrate  the  transposed 
order?  2.  What  is  the  part  of  a  transposed  sentence 
that  makes  most  trouble  ?  3.  Find  illustrations  of  the 
transposed  order  in  §§17  and  19.  4.  Point  out  in  §  12 
three  different  uses  of  'tio.,  5.  Find  an  example  of  §  17, 1 
in  §  15,  2 ;  of  §  19,  1  in  §  6,  2 ;  of  §  19,  2  in  §  4.  6.  Find 
in  §  17  one  sentence  illustrating  both  §  17,  2  and  §  17,  3. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize  :  1.  ^arf  id}  VLXtl 
3^r  ^n^  bitten?  2.  Sa«  \)ahcn  ®ie  mid)  gefragt? 
3.  3rf)  fage  3I)nen,  e«  tft  ntdjt  \>a.  4.  5Ber  Wxit  nod) 
gragen  ftellen?  5.  ^itte,  fe^en  (2ie  fid)  bovt  biiitcn! 
6.  3<e^t  bin  id)  ttJteber  ba! 

21.  (a)  1.  He  asked  if  Miss  Fisher  were  here.  2.  I 
asked  the  man  to  sit  down.        3.   As  he  wasn't  sitting  at 


Chap.  2.] 


TRANSPOSED   ORDEB. 


13 


his  own  seat,  the  teacher  asked  him  to  sit  down  over  there 
(§  18,  2).  4.  And  then  we  asked  the  man  a  couple  more 
questions.  5.  As  she  asked  so  courteously  for  the  book, 
we  told  her  (§  15,  2,  Note  a)  that  she  could  have  it. 
6.   Did  you  ask  after  her  health  ? 

(5)  1.   For  hours  the  man  sat  there  in  (an)  the  same  seat. 
2.    If  you  are  looking  for  his  house,  why  don't  you  ask  some 


3. 


The  Porta  Nigra,  or  Black  Gate,  at  Trier. 
Roman  ruin  in  Germany. 


■The  most  imposing 


one  the  number  ?  3.  The  teacher  asked  so  many  ques- 
tions, that  the  pupil  asked  him  to  stop.  4.  As  you  are 
here  again,  I  will  ask  you  to  sit  down  over  there.  5.  He 
asked  me  what  I  wanted,  and  I.  asked  him  for  his  knife. 
6.  No  man  can  answer  all  the  questions  [which]  a  child 
asks. 


14  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [|  2L 

(c)  T7ie  Germans  in  Rome.  —  1.  Many  years  ago  the  Ro- 
mans asked  some  Germans  to  see  the  combats  in  the  Colo- 
seum.  2.  There  the  Germans  saw  some  men,  who  were 
fitting  among  the  Eoman  senators,  but  who  were  not 
Romans.  3.  When  the  Germans  asked  their  friends  who 
these  men  were,  they  were  told  (\aQtt  man  i^nen)  that  these 
people  were  strangers.  4.  They  had  distinguished  them- 
selves by  their  fidelity  to  the  Romans.  5.  Then  the  Ger- 
mans went  over  there  and  sat  down  by  (ju)  the  strangers. 
6.   They  said  that  no  man  excelled  the  Germans. 


CHAPTER   III. 

WORD  ORDER  — TRANSPOSED.    COMPOUND  TENSES. 
Dtetrtd?  t>on  Bern. 

22.  5t(te  beutfc^e  ^agen  er3a{)Ien,  ba§  ^tetric^  Hon  -Q3ern 
aUe  anberen  tonige  befiegt  ^abe.  ^J^orf)  anbere  (Sagen  er- 
^(i^ten  t)on  Siegfrieb,  ber  ben  T)rac^en  erfd)(ng.    !Da  beibe 


4.  The  Tomb  of  Theodoric  at  Ravenna. — The  most  important 
Gothic  monument  in  existence.  The  roof  is  hewn  from  a  single 
huge  rock  and  weighs  nearly  a  million  pounds. 

^elben  hx^tv  in  jebem  ^'antpfe  gefiegt  fatten,  fnrrf)tete  fic^ 
ber  eine  nic^t  t)or  bent  anberen. 
!l)te  f(^i3ne  ^riemt)t(be^  bie  53rant  (Siegfrieb^,  fagte  i^rent 

15 


16  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§24. 

SSerfobten,  bag  er  mit  :t)tetric^  fdmpfen  fode.  (giegfrieb  n)ar 
unt)ertt)unbbar,  ireU  er  fic^  im  T)xa6)tnhlut  gebabet  ^atte,  aber 
^Dietric^  fc^Iug  i^n  fo  ^eftig,  baj?  er  oI)nmdrf)tig  ^u  ^riem- 
^t(ben^  gitgen  nieberfan!  unb  nun  alfo  ber  ^efiegte  n)ar. 
^ietrid^  fd)en!te  i^nt  ba^  Seben  unb  fet)rte  mieber  unbefiegt 
in  feine  §etmat  guritcf. 

Syntax. 

23.  Transposed  Order  —  Compound  Tenses. — With  com- 
pound tenses  in  the  dependent  order,  the  auxiliary  is 
put  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  whether  it  is  an  auxiliary 
of  tense  (f)aben,  fein,  irerben)  or  of  mode  (burfen,  fbnnen, 
and  so  on).  The  infinitive  or  participle  comes  just 
before  the  auxiliary. 

(1)  As  the  auxiliary  is  the  element  that  tells  mode, 
tense,  voice,  person,  and  number  and  so  gives  definite- 
ness  to  the  sentence,  it  is  appropriate  that  it  should 
occupy  a  more  emphatic  place  —  the  end  position  — 
than  infinitive  or  participle.  Thus  German  clauses  are 
always  periodic.  (German  generally  uses  the  past  tense 
in  narrative,  but  in  §  22  the  perfect  is  used,  the  better 
to  illustrate  compound  tenses.) 

He  said  that  he  would  come.    @r  fagtc,  ba^  cr  fommcn  luitrbe. 
What  is  once  printed  belongs  to  the  whole  world  for  all  time. 
aSttiS  ciumal  gcbrutft  ift,  jjcljort  bcr  ganjcn  9Bc(t  auf  cniiflc  S^itcn. 

—  Vefjiug. 
It  was  a  branch  that  he  had  fastened  to  a  dead  tree. 

e§  war  cin  %\i,  ben  cr  an  cincn  biirren  ©aunt  gcbunbcn  ^attc. 

—  @  r  i  m  ni. 

Notes. 

24.  Historical  Note.  —  Theodoric  the  Great  was  ruler  of  the 
East  (joths,  a  German  tribe  living  on  the  Danube.  lie  led  his 
people  across  the  Alps  to  settle  in  Italy,  and  in  490  a.d.  won  a 


Chap.  3.]  TRANSPOSED   ORDER.  17 

great  battle  at  Verona  (53crn)  which  left  Northern  Italy  in  his 
hands.  He  established  his  capital  at  Ravenna  and  was  recognized 
as  the  greatest  of  the  German  cliieftains.  After  his  death  (526) 
the  Gothic  power  fell  away  before  the  Lombards,  who  were  in  turn 
to  give  way  to  the  more  powerful  Franks,  by  whom  the  first  Ger- 
man Empire  was  to  be  founded.  But  Theodoric  of  Verona, 
S)ietri{^  Don  33ent,  has  always  been  a  central  figure  in  German 
legend. 

25.  English  to  be  afraid  of  is  ft(^  f  iirt^tCtt  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben) 
trnr  with  the  dative. 

He  was  afraid  of  the  dog.    (£r  fur(i|tctc  fid^  tior  bcm  ^mibc, 

I  am  afraid  of  no  one  but  you. 

^t^  fiirj^tc  mid)  nit^t,  tior  fctttcm,  at§  nnv  oor  Mr.  — §et)  fe. 

26.  English  so  has  two  common  German  renderings:  fo 
and  alfo. 

(1)  As  an  adverb  of  manner  or  degree  in  the  sense  of 
thus,  so  is  German  fo.  (So  is  also  used  to  translate  the  first 
as  in  comparisons,  like  as  good  as,  fo  gut  (tt>te),  as  far  as,  fo 
votit  (lt)ie). 

I  meant  it  so.    ®o  ^bc  ir^^!§  gcmcittt 
The  concealer  is  as  bad  as  the  stealer. 
^cr  ^c^lcr  ift  fo  f djlimm  ttiic  bcr  ®tc!^(cr.  —  @^ric^tt)ort. 
But  everything  that  drove  me  to  it  was  oh  !  so  good,  so  dear. 
^o(^  aMt^  ttiaS  mid^  ba^u  trieb,  ^r>it !  mar  fo  gut,  at^ !  tout  fo  (teb. 

—  @oetl)e. 

(2)  In  the  sense  of  then  (therefore),  so  is^ usually  German 
alfo,  which  never  means  English  also. 

So  you  will  come  at  ten.    Sie  fommcn  ttlfo  urn  scljn. 

So  we  can  be  as  dilatory  as  we  icish. 

Wiv  fottitcn  a(fo  fo  tticitlaufig  fcitt,  mic  tt»ir  tooUcn.  — ®d)tUer. 

Note.  —  For  thafs  so,  just  so,  thaVs  true,  thaVs  right,  German 
uses  the  adverb  ebcu. 


18  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  I§  29. 

27.  English  to  conquer  is  fiCQCn  or  ficflCflClt.  Both  are 
weak  verbs  and  take  ^abeit  as  auxiliary,  but  fiegen  is  in- 
transitive. So  when  conquer  is  transitive,  befiegen  must  be 
used.     53efiegen  never  means  besiege  (belagerti). 

The  Germans  conquered  (won).     "Die  Dcutft!)cn  fteQten. 
The  Germans  conquered  the  Romans. 
Die  Dctttfd)cn  befiegten  bic  JRiimer. 

Yo^i  must  conquer  or  fall ;  conquered  by  one  is  conquered  hy  all. 
Dtt  mu^t  fiegett  ober  fallen ;  befiegt  bon  etnem  ift  bcftegt  bon  alien. 

—  @d)itler. 

28.  English  to  tell  has  two  common  translations  in  Ger- 
man :  crgafilcn  and  fagcm 

(1)  (Srjci^Ien  (reg.,  aux.  '^aben)  means  to  relate,  and  is 
used  chiefly  of  telling  stories  or  relating  events. 

You  told  us  an  interesting  story. 

®ic  ^aben  nn^  eine  intereffante  ©efr^id)te  erjoljlt* 

7'Z/  tell  you  a  funny  tale. 

^d)  wiU  end)  erjolilen  ein  9JJard)en  gar  ft^nnrrig.  — Surger. 

(2)  i^agen  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)  is  used  in  less  formal  cases 
for  to  tell  somebody  (dat.)  something  (ace.)  or  to  tell  somebody 
(dat.)  to  do  something  (clause). 

What  shall  I  tell  him  ?    9Ba^  foU  id)  il)m  fagen  ? 

Please  tell  him  to  come  here. 

$itte  fagen  8ie  it)m,  '^a^  er  ^ierber  fommen  foU. 

You  didnH  tell  her  of  my  visit  ? 

Dn  l)aft  \\)x  nidjt  )iif>\\  meincm  iBcfud)  gefagt  ?  —  5 1  o  v  in. 

29.  English  the  one(s)  has  three  common  renderings  in 
German. 

(1)  As  a  demonstrative,  especially  before  the  relative 
(ber  or  It)e(c^er),  theoyie  is  usually  translated  by  the  demon- 
strative ber,  bic,  bad.  The  relative  cannot  be  omitted  in 
German, 


Chap.  3.]  TRANSPOSED   ORDER.  19 

Is  John  the  one  you  mean  f    ^ft  ^oljattn  tstx,  bctt  ®!C  mcilicn  ? 
I  am  the  one  who  huilt  it.     ^d^  bin  i>er,  bcv  C^  bautc. 

—  Ap  a  u  p  t  in  a  n  n. 
Woe  to  the  one  who  (tells)  lies.     293cl|^  bem,  ber  lugt* 

—  @  r  i  It  p  a  r  3  e  r. 

Note. — In  more  formal  style  berjenige  (biejeuifle,  baSienige,  gen. 
begjcnigeu,  etc.)  may  be  used  for  the  one  (loho)  instead  of  ber.  It  is 
rare  in  conversation. 

(2)  For  one,  the  one  in  contrast  with  one  or  more  others 
(anbere)  German  uses  ber  etne. 

One  translated  loell,  the  other  didnH. 
^er  ctttc  \)ai  gut  iiberfe^t,  ber  anbcrc  m^i, 
■     The  one  was  a  head  taller  than  the  other. 
^cr  cine  war  eiuen  ^opf  grii^er  at§  ber  anbere.  —  SBilbenbruc^. 

(3)  For  one  following  an  English  adjective,  as  the  7ieiv 
one,  German  uses  simply  the  inflected  adjective  following 
the  definite  article.  It  must  have  the  gender  of  the  noun  to 
which  it  refers. 

That  isnH  my  hat ;  mine  is  the  little  one. 

^a^  ift  mein  ^nt  mdjt ;  ber  Heine  geprt  inir. 

I  had  a  comrade ;  youUl  not  find  a  better  one. 

^dj  Ijatt^  einen  ^amcraben,  cincn  bcffern  finbft  bn  nit  (nidjt). 

—  U()(onb. 

30.   English  other  is  usually  anbcr  or  noc§  ein. 

(1)  5lnber  (-er,  -e,  -e^)  means  other  when  used  in  the  sense 
of  different. 

Bring  me  another  cup  ;  this  is  cracked. 
©ringen  @ie  ntir  eine  anbere  %n\\t ;  biefe  Ijat  einen  S^rnng. 
He  can  go  some  other  time. 
@r  !ann  ein  anbre§  WaX  (or  ein  anbermat)  geljcn. 
What  you  donH  want  done  to  you,  donH  do  another. 
938a§  bn  nidjt  ttiiUft,  baj?  man  bir  ixV,  ba^  fitg^  and)  feinent  anbern 
jn.     [The  ' '  golden  rule  "  in  German]  —  ®  |)  r  i  (^  lu  o  r  t. 
/ cannot  do  otherioise.    I^d)  fann  nid)t  anber^.  —  V u t  de r. 


^0  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [5  31. 

jV'oie.  —  English  else  is  usually  anber  in  positive  statements,  jonft  in 
questions. 

To-morrow  he  xoill  begin  something  else. 
aiiorgen  fcingt  er  tiwa^  anbcre^  an.  — Xt)oma. 
What  else.,  by  the  Styx  9     There  is  nothing  else  f 
2Ba«  jonft,  bcim  @tt) j ?    9^i(i|t8  anbcrS  gibt'8.  —  1 1  e  i  ft. 

(2)  9^orf)  ein  means  other  in  tlie  sense  of  one  more  of  the 
same  kind.  9^od)  should  always  be  used  in  asking  for  more 
of  anything. 

Bring  me  another  cup  of  coffee  ;  it  tastes  fine. 
a3ntt8en  ®ic  mtr  no(^  ctnc  %a^t  toffee ;   er  fd)merft  ttortrefflid) 
(compare  §  30,  1,  first  example). 

He  can  go  once  more  {one  more  time). 

@r  fanu  nod)  einmat  geljen  (compare  §  30,  l,  second  example). 

Another  bite.,  and  ifs  done. 

9lottf  cinen  Si^  fo  ift'g  geft^c^en.  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

Exercises. 

31.  (a)  1.  Decline:  }eber  ^ampf,  bie  alte  beutfd)e  ^age, 
ba?^  !Drad)enb(ut.  2.  Give  the  ^mndpal  parts  of :  erfd)(agen, 
nieberftnfen,  fc^enfen,  juritdfe^ren. 

(h)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  22  illustrate  the  transposed 
order  for  compound  tenses  ?  2.  When  does  an  English 
verb  come  at  the  end  of  a  subordinate  clause  ?  3.  Find 
illustrations  of  the  transposed  order  in  §  30.  4.  Find  an 
example  of  §  30,  1  in  §  29,  2.  5.  Find  in  §  26  one  exam- 
ple which  illustrates  both  §  26,  1  and  §  26,  2.  6.  Memo- 
rize the  last  examples  in  §  29,  1  and  §  30,  1. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize  :  1.  ^llfo  fiird)te 
bid)  nic^t !  2.  ^omm  bo^  fo  fd)nel(  \mt  mdglid) !  3.  ^c^ 
l)ab'  e^  i^m  fd)on  flefagt.  4.  !Dcr  cine  xot\%  t^,  ber  anbere 
nid)t.  5.  @eben  (2ie  mir,  bitte,  nod)  cinen  :33of;cn  *=Papier. 
6.   3c^  ()abe  gtoei  §iite ;  ber  a(te  ift  gran,  ber  neue  fdjiuarj. 


Chap.  3.]  TRANSPOSED    OBDER,  21 

32.  (a)  1.  I'm  not  afraid  of  any  man  (§§9  and  19,  1). 
2.  A  saga  tells  that  Siegfried  had  usually  won,  but  Dietrich 
conquered  him.  3.  I  told  him  that  I  had  been  looking 
for  something  else.  4.  The  Germans  were  not  so  much 
afraid  of  the  Romans  after  Hermann  had  conquered  them. 

5.  She  told  me  that  she  would  bring  another  book.       6.  The 
one  told  the  other  that  he  did  not  mean  it  so. 

(b)  1.  Did  you  tell  him  to  (ba§  er  ,  .  .  fottte)  bring  an- 
other cup  of  tea?  2.  This  is  my  old  hat,  but  I  have 
another  one.  3.  The  teacher  told  us  that  this  exercise 
would  not  be  so  hard  as  the  other  one.  4.  If  it  is,  he 
will  give  us  another  easier  one.  5.  Perhaps  he  will  tell 
us  a  story,  how  Dietrich  conquered  Siegfried.  6.  The 
one  was  not  so  much  afraid  as  the  other. 

(c)  Siegfried  and  Dietrich,  —  1.  An  old  saga  tells  us  that 
Siegfried  had  always  conquered  when  he  fought.  2.  So 
Kriemhilde  told  him  to  conquer  Dietrich.  3.  The  one 
was  not  afraid  of  the  other.  4.  But  Dietrich  struck  Sieg- 
fried so  hard  that  he  sank  down  unconscious.  5.  These 
two  heroes  are  the  ones  of  whom  we  have  heard  so  often. 

6.  Siegfried  is  the  younger  one,  Dietrich  the  older  one. 


CHAPTER   IV. 
REVIEW. 

33.  The  Germans  use  the  particle  bcnn  in  almost  every 
spoken  question.  It  is  not  translated  in  English.  When 
it  would  otherwise  come  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  it  is  often 
followed  by  etgentltc^,  really. 

What's  that  ?    SBa^  tft  beuit  ba§  ? 

Where  are  you  going  f    9!Bol)iu  flcljcn  8ic  bcnn  etflcnt(id)  ? 

Beally  ?    Hoio  so  ?    Ifoic  so  ? 

393al)Htd)?    29Sicfobcnn?    ^ic  bcnn  fo '?  — ?efiing. 

Why  does  he  have  to  go  to  Capri  9 

SBarum  mn^  cr  bcnn  nad)  6a^ri  ?  —  1?  e  i)  f  p. 

Exercises. 

34.  (a)  1.  Explain  in  detail  the  inverted  and  trans- 
posed orders.  2.  Illustrate  each  with  sentences  of  your 
own  making  and  also  with  quotations  from  the  authors 
cited  in  the  text. 

(6)  1.  Make  a  list  of  the  different  classes  of  nouns  that 
have  already  appeared  in  the  German  stories.  2.  Make  a 
list  of  the  classes  of  strong  or  irregular  verbs  that  have 
already  been  used  in  the  German  stories. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioins.  Memorize:  1.  ^ilnio  ift  betin 
ba«?  2.  Ser  ift  benn  fertifl?  3.  So  UHil)nen  2ie 
benn  etf^entlic^?  4.  Sffier  I)at  benn  noc^  eine  i^-rai^e  '^n 
fte((en?  T).  ^\{{t,  moKen  etc  un<J  bic  (<»^efcf)tcf)te  er3a^(en? 
().   Sa^  fud)en  v^ie  benn,  ein  anbrei<  ^nd)  ? 

22 


Chap.  4.]  REVIEW.  23 

35*  (a)  1.  If  she  asks  for  another  sheet  of  paper,  why 
don't  you  give  it  to  her  ?  2.  I  haven't  the  book  of 
which  (lt)ot)on)  you  told  us.  3.  Where  is  the  one  I  asked 
for  (iDorum)  ?  4.  He  was  so  afraid,  that  the  other  man 
conquered  him.  5.  So  I  told  them  that  they  shouldn't 
ask  any  more  (§§9  and  30,  2)  questions.  6.  For  a  whole 
hour  we  waited  for  the  man,  while  (ind^rettb)  he  was  look- 
ing for  his  money. 

(b)  1.  It  was  many  weeks  ago  that  you  told  us  the  story 
of  Hermann.  2.  As  long  as  (folancje)  my  father  lived, 
we  lived  on  (in  ber)  Charles  Street.  3.  xVs  the  boy  told 
the  teacher  he  was  sick,  the  teacher  did  not  ask  him  any 
questions.  4.  A  week  ago,  as  the  boy  didn't  have  any 
money,   he  asked    his  father   for   a    quarter   (ettie    3}lar!). 

5.  Please    sit    over    there    where    I    can    see    you   better. 

6.  So  he  told  her  that  he  did  not  want  to  ask  any  ques- 
tions. 

(c)  1.  I  told  him  that  one  or  the  other  must  conquer. 
2.  Please  give  me  another  pen ;  haven't  you  a  good 
one  ?  3.  This  isn't  the  one  I  asked  for ;  this  is  an 
old  one.  4.  In  another  saga  they  (man)  tell  how  Die- 
trich had  conquered  Siegfried.  5.  He  was  afraid  of  the 
teacher  who  asked  him  such  hard  questions,  so  he  sat  very 
quiet  in  his  seat.  6.  jSTo  man  can  ask  so  many  questions 
as  a  child. 


CHAPTER   V. 


WORD    ORDER.     POSITION   OF   mttjt 

Karl  6er  ©rofe  in  6er  Sd^ule. 

36.   tarl  ber  @rof?e  be{)errfc^te  beina()e  bie  ^an'^^t  (5f)riften* 
^ett,  aber  er  fonnte  faunt  (efen  unb  fc^reiben.    311^  er  iilter 

murbe,  tpimfd)te  er  t^aii 
nacf)^ul)olen,  wa^  er  in 
feiner  3uc\enb  nid)t  ge* 
ternt  I)atte.  3lber  feiner 
fd)meren  ,f)anb  tt)o(Ite  ei< 
nic^t  neliniien,  bie  feinen 
iBuc^ftaben  ,^u  mac^en. 
5U^  er  an  feine  ^ugenb 
bacf)te,  in  ber  er  ba^ 
9?eiten  nnb  ged^ten  fo 
Ieid)t  gelernt  I)atte,  mngte 
er  fenfgen. 

„Sa^  !ann  id^  bafnr/' 
fac^te  er,  Mf>  nieine  .'panb 
nid)t  an  bie  Ieid)te  geber, 
fonbern  an  bavj  fdjmere 
^djmert  gen)o()nt  ift! 
3lber  ma^  unrb  man  non 
einem  ,Shii|er  benfcn,  ber 
feinen  9lamen  nid)t  fd)rei= 
ben  fann?"  "Tod)  brand)- 
te  ^aifer  ,^ar(  feinen  '3iamcn  nid)t  mit  ber  gebcr  3n  fd)reiben, 

24 


5.  Charlemagne.  —  From  a  painting 
by  Albrecht  Diirer  in  the  Germanic 
Museum  at  Nuremberg. 


Chap.  5.]  POSITION   OF  ^fJic^t*  25 

benn  er  i^at  if)n  mit  feinen  3:aten  in  \)a^  S^nd)  ber  ^eiten 
gefc^rteben. 

Syntax. 

37.  Position  of  mrf|t  —  When  nti^t  modifies  the  whole 
clause,  it  comes  at  or  near  the  end.  In  main  clauses 
with  simple  tenses  it  comes  at  the  end  (e),  except  that  a 
separable  prefix  follows  it  (a).  In  main  clauses  with 
compound  tenses  it  comes  just  before  the  participle 
or  infinitive  (5).  In  subordinate  clauses  it  comes  just 
before  tlie  verb,  whether  simple  or  compound  (c) ;  with 
infinitive  phrases,  just  before  git  (c?). 

(a)  I  won't  admit  that.    ^a§  gcbe  id)  ntdjt  gu. 
(&)  I  haven'' t  seen  him  the  last  few  days. 

^d)  Ijabc  il)n  in  bicfctt  Jc^tcit  Xa^m  ttid)t  gcfcljctt, 
(c)   He  looked  as  if  he  hadnH  understood. 

(5r  fol)  att)§,  a(^  ob  cr  nidjt  ucrftanbcit  ^tte. 
{d)  They  don't  wish  to  go.    @ie  ttiiinfcljcn  nid)t  ju  gdien. 
(e)   jy<?  couldn't  see  the  wood  for  the  trees. 

©r  f o!|  ben  SBaJb  bor  (outer  Siiumen  nid)t.  —  @^rirf)tt)ort. 

^o^e.  —  The  above  rule,  and  in  fact  most  rules  for  German  order, 
are  special  cases  of  the  general  principle  that  in  the  predicate  of  a  Ger- 
man sentence  the  more  important  parts  come  last.  Of  course,  there 
are  exceptions,  but  it  is  interesting  to  apply  this  rule  to  the  many 
apparent  peculiarities  of  German  order.  The  negative  is  naturally, 
with  the  exception  of  the  verb,  the  most  important  element  in  the 
predicate  ;  hence  its  position. 

(1)  When  nic§t  does  not  modify  the  whole  clause,  it 
stands  just  before  the  particular  word  or  phrase  it 
negatives. 

You  gave  it  to  me,  not  to  him.    Sic  l)aben  ei§  ntir,  ni^i  \\)m  gegeben. 
Who  himself  is  not  farther  than  you,  can't  bring  you  any  farther. 
9Ber  felbft  ntrfjt  weiter  tft  al§  ^vi^  ber  !ann  bid)  and)  nidjt  meiter 
bnngen.  —  9i  ii  cf  e  r  t. 


26  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§40. 

Notes. 

38.  Historical  Note.  —  After  the  death  of  Theodoric  (526)  the 
power  of  the  Goths  declined,  and  later  another  German  tribe,  the 
Franks,  gained  the  supreinacy.  Of  the  Franks  the  greatest  was 
Charles  the  Great  or  Ckarlemaf/ne,  as  he  is  also  called  (768-814). 
(In  this  book  the  dates  of  rulers  are  usually  those  of  their  reigns.) 
He  occupies  as  important  a  place  in  German  history  as  Dietrich 
von  Bern  does  in  German  myths.  The  last  great  figure  in  a  long 
line  of  powerful  Frankish  kings,  he  extended  the  Frankish  king- 
dom to  include  France,  Germany,  and  part  of  Italy,  and  on  Christ- 
mas Day,  800,  the  Pope  at  Rome  crowned  him  Emperor  of  the 
Germans,  the  so-called  Revival  of  the  Roman  Empire  in  the  West. 
But  this  glory  was  of  short  duration.  In  843,  only  twenty-nine 
years  after  his  death,  his  realm  fell  to  pieces,  never  again  to  be 
united  in  its  entirety. 

39.  English  to  helj)  has  two  common  German  renderings. 

(1)  To  help  in  the  sense  of  to  assist  is  !^elfen  (^a(f,  ge= 
^olfen,  aux.  ^aben),  followed  by  the  dative. 

Will  you  please  help  me  ?    SBittc,  ttioUcit  3tc  mir  I|effen  ? 

I  canH  help  you,  child,    ^d)  foiin  bir  ttit^t  ^clfen,  ^inb.  —  Ap  e  i)  f  e. 

(2)  The  English  idiom  help  it  is  rendered  by  bafiir.  For 
the  negative  either  nicf)t  or  ntd)tv5  may  be  used. 

I  couldn't  help  it.    '^d)  foimtc  iiidjt  bafiir. 

He  caiiH  help  it.    ^tx  faitii  ttiditfi*  bafiir.  —  S  i  I  b  e  u  b  r  u  d). 

Note.  —  When  the  English  idiom  help  is  followed  by  a  verbal  in  -ing 
{he  can't  help  crying),  German  usually  says  simply  to  have  to,  miiffen. 

I  couldn't  help  believing  it.     3cf)  mu^te  cS  glaubcn. 

40.  English  to  want  (to),  to  ivish  (to),  has  two  German 
equivalents :  tOoUcn  and  hjunfc^cn* 

(1)  SSotten  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben,  pres.,  ic^  Wiii,  bu  \mii\t)  means 
will,  intend  to,  or  ivant  to.  It  is  less  definitely  a  wish  than 
U)iinfd)en  and  is  followed  by  the  infinitive  without  ^u. 


Chap.  5]  POSITION   OF  ^xdjt  27 

He  imnted  to  go  home.    @r  ttioUtC  itad)  ^nufe  flcljcn. 
WonH  you  take  off  your  wraps?    23SoUcn  (Sic  ttidjt  ttblcgctt? 
/  will  not  —  will  not  hear. 
^d)  wiU  ntct)t  —  Witt  tttti)t  Ijoreit.  —  ^auptmann. 

(2)  5Biin|d)en  is  used  for  the  definite  expression  of  a  wish 
for  something.  It  denotes  an  immediate  desire,  and  is 
rather  rare  in  conversation.  For  purposes  of  variety  it 
may  replace  iDoKen,  but  it  is  really  more  formal,  to  desire, 
while  IDottett  is  more  to  ivant. 

What  do  you  wish  ?    2Ba^  ttJUttfd)cn  Sic  ? 

I  wish  for  a  hall  for  my  birthday  ! 

3um  (^cbiirt^tag  ttJiinfdjc  id)  mix  cinctt  S8aU» 

It  is  easy  to  icish  for  too  much. 

Wan  wiinf djct  Icid)t  jum  Ubcrftu^,  —  U  f)  ( a  n  b. 

41.  English  to  think  of  is  benfcn  (barf)te,  gebad)t,  aux. 
^aben)  with  an  or  Don. 

(1)  !l)enfen  an  (with  the  accusative)  means  to  think  of 
in  the  sense  of  to  consider,  to  remember. 

I  didn't  think  of  that,    ^avatt  l)abc  iti)  m(i)t  gcbad)t. 

The  gallant  man  thinks  last  of  himself. 

^er  brotic  Wlann  bcn!t  an  fi(^  fclbft  ^ntt^U  —  @  (i)  i  U  e  r. 

Note.  —  For  I  shouldnH  think  of  (such  a  thing),  German  says: 
(Sg  fdltt  mir  (gar)  nid)t  cin,  It  doesn't  occur  to  me. 

What  are  you  thinking  of?    2Ba^  fdllt  bir  etn  ?  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

(2)  "^enfen  t)on  (with  the  dative)  means  to  think  of  only 
in  the  sense  of  to  have  an  opinion  of 

What  do  you  think  of  him  ?    2Ba^  bctt!ctt  @tc  boit  il)m  ? 

That's  what  she  thinks  of  me  !    So  bcnft  fic  bott  ttttr !  — ^  r  e  t)  t  a  g. 

42.  In  English  to  get  is  used  in  countless  ways.  Its 
three  chief  German  equivalents  are  Befommen,  fjolcn,  and 

tticrben* 


28  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  (§43. 

(1)  :53e!otnTnen  (befatn,  befommen,  aux.  ^aben)  means  to 
get  in  the  sense  of  to  receive,  to  secure.  It  never  means  to 
become  (trerben). 

What  did  you  get  for  Christmas  ? 

933a§  Ijaft  bu  ju  SScilittttdjtCtt  befommeit  ? 

He  wonH  get  anything  from  us  old  people,  either. 

Sott  tttt§  5tltett  bc!ommt  cr  aud|  nid)t^.  —  ®  t  o  r  m. 

(2)  ^f)o(en  (reg.,  aux.  l^aben)  means  to  get  in  the  sense  of 
to  go  and  get,  to  fetch. 

You  must  get  some  more  paper.     @tc  IttuffCtt  nod)  ^a^ter  ^olcit. 

WeUl  go  into  the  forest  and  get  wood. 

9Btr  ttJoUcn  in  \>tn  2Bttlb  gc!|cn  nnb  ^0(5  bolcn.  —  @  r  i  m  m. 

(3)  SBerben  (ttjurbe,  gett)orben,  aux.  fein)  means  to  get  only 
in  the  sense  of  to  become. 

It's  getting  terribly  hot  here.     ,f)ter  Wtrb  t^  furd)tbar  Ijci^. 

It  is  getting  stiller  in  the  streets. 

SttUcr  ttJirb  c^  ouf  ben  Btva^crt.  —  tome  r. 

43.  The  English  conjunction  but  has  two  German  equiva- 
lents. 

(1)  5lber  is  generally  used  for  but,  in  the  sense  of 
however. 

He  was  poor,  hut  proud.    @r  War  arm,  obcr  fto(,v 
They  icere  not  tired,  but  we  asked  them  to  be  seated. 
<Bic  maren  ntd)t  miibe,  aber  ttiir  baten  fie,  fid)  an  fc^cn. 
For  many  are  called,  but  few  are  chosen. 
^enn  bide  finb  berufen,  aber  wenige  finb  aui^ertua^Iet. 

—  53tbcl,  ajJott.  20,  16. 

Note.  —  In  the  second  example  above,  though  a  negative  precedes 
hut,  no  contrast  or  alternative  is  indicated.  ':}tber  may  follow  the 
subject  or  even  the  verb  and  object. 

The  adverb  hut  is  nur  ;  nothing  but  is  iiid)t^  Q.U. 

But  I  loon't  do  it.    3c^  aber  tuc  e«  uid)t,  or,  3d)  tiic  c<5  nbor  iud)t. 


Chap.  5]  POSITION  OF  91^^  29 

We  live  but  once  [in  the  world'\. 

Man  Uht  nur  einmal  in  bcr  28e(t  —  @^ri(i)tt)ort. 

One  is  desperately  little  when  one  is  nothing  but  honest. 

'Sflan  ift  DeqtDeifelt  irenig,  weim  man  titd)tg  alg  e^dic^  ift.  —  !^ e f fi n 0. 

(2)  @onbern,  in  the  sense  of  but  instead,  but  rather,  is 
used  only  to  indicate  an  alternative  after  a  negative. 
He  was  not  poor,  but  rich. 
@r  ttJor  ntdjt  arm,  fonbertt  rcirt). 
But  she  didnH  go  past,  but  stopped. 
%bev  fie  ging  nit^t  tfothci,  fonbcrtt  bticb  ftctjcn.  —  3  j  d^  o  f  f  e. 

Exercises. 

44.  (a)  1.  Decline:  ^ar(  ber  (^roge,  (tarl^  be^  ©rofeen), 
bte  (eid}te  g^^^^^  ^<J^  f(^tt)ere  ©c^mert.  2.  6^/ve  «/ie  prin- 
cipal parts  of :  (efett,  benfen,  f(i)reiben,  nai^()o(en,  brauc^en. 

(b)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  36  illustrate  the  position  of 
nic^t?  2.  Give  the  general  principle  for  order  in  the 
predicate  of  a  German  sentence.  3.  Does  the  general 
principle  apply  to  transposed  order?  To  inverted  order? 
4.  Learn  the  last  example  before  the  Note  in  §  37,  in  §  41, 1, 
and  in  §  43,  1,  and  the  last  example  in  §  43,  1,  Note. 

(c)  Co7iversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  .^d)  !ann  TttC^t 
baf iir!  2.  "iBo  iDoKen  ®ie  benn  ^in?  3.  (5r  \)(ii  aber 
ni(f)t  baratt  gebac^t.  4.  Sa^  faltt  bit  benn  ein  ?  5.  ©o(e 
nid)t  ba^  rote  ^uc^,  fonbern  '^a^  branne.  6.  ^ttte,  mein 
gerr,  ma^  tDUnfd)en  ©ie? 

45.  (a)  1.  As  he  would  not  get  his  books,  the  teacher 
did  not  help  him.  2.  She  got  quite  red,  but  she  could 
not  help  it.  3.  I  was  not  thinking  of  the  long  saga,  but 
of  a  shorter  one.  4.  What  were  you  thinking  of,  when 
you  helped  that  pupil  ?  5.  I  didn't  help  him,  but  his 
little  brother.  6.  If  she  didn't  want  to  help  him,  I 
couldn't  help  it. 


30 


GERMAN   COMPOSITION. 


»45. 


SB 

tB' •i.M.J^'W^ 

^S 

r^ 

1   j 

"     -  ■  "                 ,  :* 

./J 

The  Cathedral  at  Aachen.— The  Carolingian  part  of  the  church, 
under  which  Charlemagne  was  buried. 


Chap.  5.]  POSITION   OF  ^\^t  31 

(b)  1.  What  do  you  think  of  this  hat?  Isn't  it  what 
you  wished?  2.  I  can't  help  it  if  you  did  not  get  a 
good  one.  3.  She  didn't  want  that  little  hat,  but  a 
big  black  one.  4.  I  did  not  think  of  that,  but  of  some- 
thing else.  5.  What  did  you  get  for  your  (^um)  birth- 
day? 6.  It's  getting  very  warm  here,  but  I  cannot 
help  it. 

(c)  Charlemagne.  —  1.  When  Charles  the  Great  became 
Emperor,  he  wanted  to  learn  to  write.  2.  His  friends 
helped  him  and  got  a  pen  and  paper,  but  his  hand  wasn't 
used  to  the  pen,  but  to  the  sword.  3.  He  wished  that 
he    had    thought    of    it    oftener,    when    he    was    young. 

4.  "I    can't   help    it,"   he    said,   and   he   got  quite   angry. 

5.  "What    will    they    (man)   think    of    me?"    he   asked. 

6.  But   Charles   the   Great  did  not  write  his  name  upon 
paper,  but  in  history. 


CHAPTER   VI. 
WORD  ORDER.     POSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 

Der  Kolanbsbogen. 

46.  ^axl  ber  ^roge  ^atte  etnen  ^effen,  ber  9?oIanb  l^ie^, 
unb  ber  gem  an  alien  gelbgitgen  teilna^m.  ^f^olanb,  ber 
noc^  nic^t  t)er^eiratet  inar,  n>olIte  nac^  feiner  dlMk^v  Don 
einem  gelb^ug  nac^  (Spanien  hk  fc^dne  §Ubegunb  f)eiraten. 
^^  tierging  Idngere  ^txt,  utele  Malt  famen  ^oten  Dom 
^rieg^fd)anplat^e,  aber  !etn  etnjtge^  SJ^al  l)orte  man  tUm^ 
t)on  il)nt.  -3a,  eine  3^^^^^^9  W^^  ^^^^  i^^  foQ'^^  f»r 
tot,  benn  man  ^atte  t^n  iiberall  uergeben^  G^fnc^t.  <Setne 
treue  ^raut  jeboc^  iDartete  (ange  anf  i^n ;  enblicf)  ging  fie 
traurig  in  ein  ^lofter. 

9?olanb  !el)rte  aber  fdjIie^Uc^  boc^  gurlicf  unb  Iiat  bann 
iiberall  tiergiwifelt  feine  -^raut  gefudjt.  31U  er  l)drte, 
bag  fie  9^onne  geioorben  fei,  baute  er  ein  Bd)io^,  oon  mo 
au^  er  auf  i^r  ^lofter  ^inabfdjauen  Jonnte.  i^on  biefem 
(Sd)(o§  ftel)t  je^t  nur  noc^  ein  ein^,iger  ^ogen.  Ten 
nennt  man  ben  ^?olanb^bogen. 

Syntax. 

47.  Position  of  Adverbs.  —  A  single  adverb  has  the 
same  position  in  the  sentence  as  nic^t.  When  two  or 
more  adverbs  occur  together,  they  follow  the  order 
(1)  time,  (2)  place,  (3)  manner.  (Think  of  the  num- 
ber of  letters  in  those  three  words  :  4,  5,  and  6.)  Ad- 
verbial  phrases  also  follow  this  same  order.     This  is 

32 


Chap.  6. J 


POSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 


33 


7.    Roland's  Arch  on  the  Rhine.  —  Some  of  the  famous  Seven  Moun- 
tains are  seen  in  the  distance. 


only  another  phase  of  the  general  principle  for  order 
in  the  predicate,  §  37,  Note. 

We  looked  for  the  hook  to-day  eagerly  everywhere , 
9Bir  Ijobctt  ba^  83ttd)  Ijcutc  iiberaU  cifrig  gcfurfjt. 


34  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§49. 

He  hasn't  been  therefor  so  long. 

er  tft  fo  langc  md)t  bort  flcwcfcn.  —  5  r  e  t)  t  a  g. 

Owe  o/«en  hears  in  the  distant  wood  a  muffled  ringing  from  above. 

9Katt  ^8rct  oft  im  fcritcn  "ii&tiWi,  tjon  obculjer  ctn  bum^fc^  fiautcn. 

—  Ut)(anb. 

(1)  When  an  adverb  modifies  an  adjective  or  another 
adverb,  it  stands  immediately  before  the  word  it  qualifies. 

It  is  most  probable.     &§  ift  ^OtI)ft  tt>al)rftI)Ctuntf). 

Pm  much  better  now.     ^e^t  ficl)t  C^  mir  t»icl  bcffer. 

The  mills  of  God  grind  slowly,  but  they  grind  exceeding  small. 

^ottt^  ^ut)fen  ma^Ien  (angfam,  ma^ien  abcr  treffltd)  !letn. 

—  !?ogau. 

Notes. 

48.  Historical  Note.  —  In  the  battle  of  Tours  (732)  the  Franks, 
commanded  by  the  grandfather  of  Charlemagne,  drove  the  Mo- 
hammedans (Moors)  from  Southern  France  back  into  Spain  and 
thus  saved  Europe  to  Christianity.  But  the  Moors  remained  in 
Spain  until  the  year  America  was  discovered  (1492).  All  through 
the  Middle  Ages,  until  the  time  of  the  Crusades  to  the  Holy  Land 
(1095),  pious  knights  used  to  go  to  Spain  to  fight  the  Moors.  Of 
these  knights  the  most  famous  is  Roland,  about  whom  an  interest- 
ing group  of  legends  has  grown  up  similar  to  those  of  Dietrich 
von  Bern  and  Siegfried.  Some  of  these  tell  how  Roland  was 
killed  at  Roncesvalles  in  the  Pyrenees  on  his  return  from  one  of 
these  campaigns.     Still  others  tell  the  story  as  it  is  given  here. 

49.  English  to  be  called,  to  be  named,  is  rendered  in  Ger- 
man by  ncnncn  and  ()ct^ctt» 

(1)  Bennett  (nannte,  fjenannt,  aux.  ^aben)  is  used  both 
actively  and  passively  for  to  call,  while  t)ei§en  has  usually 
only  a  passive  meaning. 

Elsewhere  they  call  him  a  hero. 

5(nbcrcin>o  ncmit  moii  il)it  ciucu  .S?c(bcit.  —  ^  ii  b  c  v  in  a  u  ii. 

I  must  call  this  inadii'ss. 

^ic^  mufe  id)  3Bal)HJiuu  iicimcn.  —  a>  a  u  p  t  m  a  u  a. 


Chap.  6.]  POSITION  OF  ADVERBS.  35 

(2)  geigen  (^teg,  ge^eigen,  aux.  l)aben)  is  used  chiefly 
for  my  name  is,  your  name  is,  and  so  on. 

What's  your  name,  please  9    S8tttc,  ttiic  I)ei^en  'Bit  ? 

His  name  was  Charles.     @r  l)ie^  ^orl. 

Were  I  cautious,  my  name  ivould  not  be  Tell. 

933ar^  ^  bcfonttcn,  l)ic|'  id)  ni^^^t  bcr  S^cU.  — @(f)illcr. 

iVb^e. — In  the  classroom  to  be  (translated)  is  regularly  rendered 
by  ^ei^en. 

What  is  that  in  German  f    2Bic  ^ei^t  baS  auf  bcutfd)  ? 

WJiat  is  the  whole  passage  ?    3Sie  ^ei^t  bie  ganje  ©telle?  —  ^effing. 

50.  The  English  word  time  has  several  German  trans- 
lations. 

(1)  !©ie  ^txt  is  used  in  the  general  sense  of  duration  of  time. 

The  times  are  hard.     l5ic  ^txitn  ftnb  fd)tticr» 

I  have  no  time  to  be  tired,    ^d)  ^abc  fcinc  ^txi,  tnitbc  Jtt  f citt. 

—  taiferSBiltjelml. 

(2)  (Sine  3^it^^^9^  ^sed  only  in  the  accusative  case,  is 
the  regular  equivalent  of  English  for  a  time.     Compare  §  5. 

For  a  time  Hived  in  Hermann  Street. 

@ittc  Bcttlang  I|ttbc  id)  in  bcr  ^crmannftra^c  gctt)ol)nt. 

For  a  time  he  walked  up  and  down  in  his  room. 

@r  ging  ciitc  ^citlang  in  fcincm  3i»tntcr  auf  unb  uiebcr.  —  >e  t  o  r  m. 

Note.  —  Do  not  confuse  this  with  a  long  time,  which  German  ren- 
ders simply  by  the  adverb  lange. 

Hooked  for  it  a  long  time.    3(i)  ))<xbz  eg  tange  gejurf)t. 
Durer's  answer  was  a  long  time  coming. 
2)iirer8  Stnttuort  blieb  lange  aug.  —  §iUeru. 

(3)  !^a^  3)ia(  (bie  9}^a(e)  is  used  to  denote  a  particular  time. 

ril  be  glad  to  go  some  other  time. 

(gin  ottbcrcig  9Wa(  (also  written  eitt  onbcrmat)  gcljc  id^  gem. 

She  was  wrong  both  times.    Sic  \^at  fid)  bctbc  Wlalt  gctrrt. 

Because  he  had  given  in  the  first  time  he  had  to  also  for  the  second 
time.  993ci(  tx  ba§  crftc  9Jltt(  ttttd)gc8cbctt  Ijattc,  fo  mu^tc  cr  c§  aud) 
sum  smcitcn  9JlaI.  —  @  r  i  m  in. 


36  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§  51. 

Note.  —  Sometimes  is  always  jutuetlen.  Once,  twice,  three  times, 
and  so  on  are  einmal,  ^Wtimal,  brcimor,  and  so  forth.  How  many 
times  is  ttJtc  oft. 

Sometimes  I  eat  four  times  a  day.    3"^^^^^"  ^\U  ^  Diermot  toglid). 

Hoio  many  times  have  you  been  in  Germany? 

SSic  oft  itiaren  @ie  fc^on  in  3)eutfd)ta:ib  ? 

07ice  doesnH  count.     (Sinmat  ift  feinmat.  —  ®pric^tt)ort. 

(4)  What  time  is  it  ?  is  SietJtel  Uf)r  ift  e^?  or  2Bie  fpat 
ift  e^?  O'clock  is  also  translated  by  U^r.  As  in  the  case 
of  English  o^clock,  U^r  is  omitted  when  it  is  not  exactly  the 
even  hour. 

What  time  is  it  ?    It  is  ten  o'^clock. 

SBtcoicI  Ul)r  ift  ciS  ?  or,  g^ic  f^St  ift  c^  ?    ©§  ift  5cl)n  UI|r. 

(At)  what  time  must  we  be  there  ? 

Urn  mictiicl  U!)r  miiffcii  n>tr  fd|on  ba  fcitt  ? 

It  was  Jive  o'' clock  in  the  afternoon. 

@^  war  fitttf  U^r  iiat^mittog^.  —  ^  i  H  e  lu  r  o  n. 

Note.  —  In  telling  the  quarter  and  half  hours,  German  reckons 
toward  the  coming  hour.  Thus  quarter  past  twelve  becomes  ettt 
iUertct  txn^\  half  past  twelve,  \)(dh  cin^.  In  quarter  to  one,  German 
counts  the  hour  three  quarters  gone,  and  says  brci  S^icrtel  Ctllfii. 
Minutes  are  expressed  as  in  English,  Uor  or  nad^  the  hours. 

(5)  To  have  a  good  time  is  fief)  (gut)  amitfieren.  Never 
say  eine  gute  ^txt  ^aben. 

Did  you  have  a  good  time  ?    ^aft  bit  bid)  (|ut  nmitficrt  ? 
Yes,  I  had  a  splendid  time,    ^a,  id)  I)abc  mid)  Vrfld)tuoU  amiificrt. 
He'^s  having  as  good  a  time  as  a  pug  dog  in  a  table  drawer  (that  is, 
he  is  bored  to  death). 

(Sr  amiificrt  fid)  mic  bcr  9Ko^^  im  2:ifd)!aftcn.  —  ®prid)tt)ort. 

51.  English  to  marry  is  translated  in  German  by  tier= 
l^ctratcn  and  f)ctratcn. 

(1)  33ert)eiraten  (reg.  insep.,  aux.  ^aben)  is  the  commoner. 
It  means  to  give  in  marriage  {to,  mit).     The  adjective  mar- 


Chap.  6.]  POSITION   OF  ADVERBS.  37 

7'ied  is  always  tier'^etratet,  never  ge'^eiratet.     To  get  married 
(to)  is  the  reflexive  \i(i)  t)er^eiraten  (mtt). 

You  are  engaged ;  when  do  you  get  married  f 

^crfobt  fittb  Sic  f  j^oit ;  manit  wcrbcti  ®tc  fid^  ticrl)eiratctt  ? 

She  married  her  daughter  to  a  count. 

©ic  Ijat  iljrc  Xod^tcr  mit  eittcm  (SJrafcit  t»er^ciratct, 

^e  i/?as  never  married.    (Sr  ttiar  tttc  ticr^ctratct  —  §  e  t)  j  e. 

(2)  §eiratett  (reg.,  aux.  I^aben)  is  used  actively  of  both 
man  and  woman. 

He  (she)  married  her  (him).     @r  (fic)  I)Ot  ftc  (tl|n)  {JCl^CtratCt. 

Julia,  the  daughter,  married  a  land-owner. 

Sttlcrl  (dialect),  bie  %o^itx,  \\ai  cinctt  (SJut^beft^cr  ge^eirotct. 

—  9{  0  j  e  g  g  e  r. 

Exercises. 

52.  (a)  1.  Decline:  eitt  9^effe,  feine  treue  ^raut,  fetn 
einjtge^  30la(,  biefe^  (S(l)to6-  2.  6r^^'e  ^/^e  principal  parts  of: 
t)erl)eiratett,  fatten,  fommen,  fte^en,  ^tnabfe^en. 

(h)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  46  illustrate  the  position  or 
order  of  adverbs  ?  2.  What  is  the  simplest  way  to  re- 
member the  order  of  adverbs  ?  3.  In  what  way  is 
this  rule  a  phase  of  the  general  principle,  §  37,  Note  ? 
4.  Find  an  example  of  the  order  of  adverbs  or  adverbial 
phrases  in  §  50,  2. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  SSte  !^ei^t  ha^ 
auf  beutfc^,  auf  englifc^?  2.  (Ste  fagen,  (Ste  fatten  feine 
3eit?  3.  3ft  S¥  greunb  tjer^eiratet?  4.  Stetjtet 
Uf)r  ift  e^?  T)rei  ^tertef  ^e^iti*  5.  Sir  ^abett  uM  |)rad)t^ 
t)o((  amltfiert.  6.  '^k^  ift  bag  le^e  SJ^at,  bag  td)'^  3^nen 
fage. 

53.  (a)  1.  What  was  her  name  before  he  married  her  ? 
2.   Her  name  was  Margaret,  but  after  she  was  married,  her 


38  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [i  S3. 

husband    called   her    Gretchen.         3.  We   looked   for   the 

glove   for   a  long   time   over-  there.  4.    He   asked   you 

politely  twice,  what  time  it  is.         5.  At  quarter  to  nine 

we  are  sometimes  here  at  school.  6.   The  last  time  I 
went  to  the  theatre  I  had  a  fine  time. 

(6)  1.  This  is  the  last  time  that  I  shall  ask  you  what 
that  is  in  German.  2.  What  do  they  call  a  woman 
who  has  married  once,  but  is  no  longer  (mel)r)  married  ? 
3.  It  is  now  nearly  ten  o'clock,  and  you  tell  me  that  you 
hadn't  any  time !  4.  Did  you  have  a  good  time  when 
you  lived  for  a  time  in  Charles  Street  ?  5.  The  first 
time  that  we  lived  there,  we  wanted  to  stay  there  a  long 
time.  6.  I  looked  for  a  friend  eagerly  for  a  long  time, 
but  did  not  find  a  single  person  (§  19,  1)  whom  I  knew. 

(c)  The  Kniglit  Roland.  —  1.  The  nephew  of  Charlemagne, 
named  Roland,  wanted  to  marry  a  beautiful  girl  called 
Hildegund.  2.  The  last  time  that  he  took  part  in  a 
campaign,  she  waited  for  a  time  for  him.  3.  They  told 
her  he  was  dead,  but  she  thought  so  much  of  him  that  she 
never  thought  of  marrying  another.  4.  As  she  got  no 
news  of  him  for  months,  she  finally  went  sadly  into  a  con- 
vent. 5.  For  a  long  time  no  man  knew  that  Roland 
lived.  6.  When  he  finally  returned,  no  one  could  help 
it,  that  Hildegund  had  not  waited  for  him. 


CHAPTER   VII. 
WORD  ORDER.    POSITION  OF  OBJECTS. 

^etnrtd?  bet  Pogler. 

54.  511^  tontg  tonrab  ftarb,  fannten  bie  beutfc^en  giirften 
nur  einen  SD^ann,  §eittrtc^  tjon  (Sarfifen,  ber  ftar!  genug  tuar. 


8.    The  Castle  Church  at  Quedlinburg. — The  tomb  of   Henry  the 
Fowler  is  beneath  the  grating  in  the  foreground. 

fic^  auf  bent  Zi)vom  gu  befiaupten.  ®o  be[c^(o§en  fie,  biefem 
§er^og  bie  ^'rotte  an^,ubieten.  ^etnrirf)  befanb  fi(^  batnat^  auf 
bem  33oge(fang,  unb  er  n^ugte  nod)  ni^t^  t)on  feiner  SSat)L 

39 


40  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§56. 

5l(^  fic^  t^tn  bie  I'lberbrtnoer  ber  :^otfc^aft  nd^erten, 
fd)eu(^ten  fie  bte  33dge(  tneg.  T)a  rief  @einric^  :  „3Ba^  njotten 
bie  fitter  benn?  T)ie  gerren  t)erberben  mir  htn  Qanjen 
^ogetfang."  5(ber  al^  man  i^m  fagte,  bag  er  ^um  tonig 
erlDa^It  tt)are,  rief  er  au^  :  „T)u  gabft  mir  einen  guten  gang, 
§err  ®ott,  it»ie  bir'^  gefcittt."  (Seitbem  nennt  man  it)n 
„§einrid^  ben  iBogler." 

Syntax. 

55.  Order  of  Objects.  —  The  order  of  objects  in  Ger- 
man is  like  the  English  order.  A  single  object  fol- 
lows immediately  after  the  verb.  Of  a  direct  and 
indirect  object,  the  indirect  (dative)  usually  precedes 
when  both  are  nouns,  and  follows  when  both  are  pro- 
nouns. When  one  object  is  a  pronoun  and  the  other 
a  noun,  the  pronoun  precedes. 

I  gave  the  boy  my  book,    ^d)  Ijabc  bcm  ^nabcn  mcin  ^\\d^  flCficbcn. 

He  gave  it  to  his  sister.    (Sr  I)at  c§  fcincr  Sd)Wcftcr  flcficbcii. 

She  gave  it  back  to  me.    Bit  l)ttt  c^  mir  suriirfflcgcbcu. 

He  told  me  so  to-day,  himself. 

©r  fclbft  Ijot  c^  mir  ^cutc  gcfagt.  —  ^  r  e  t)  t  o  g. 

Note.  —  In  the  sentence,  /  gave  my  brother  the  book,  if  you  want 
to  emphasize  to  whom  you  gave  the  book,  you  say  :  3cl)  l)abc  ba8  53ud) 
mcinem  S3ruber  gegcben.  But  if  you  want  to  emphasize  tchat  you  gave 
your  brother,  you  say:  ^d)  ^abe  meincm  33rubcr  baS  53ud)  gcgcbcu. 
Compare  this  with  the  general  principle,  §  37,  Note. 

Notes. 

56.  Historical  Note.  — In  less  than  a  hundred  years  after  the 
death  of  Charles  the  Great,  his  empire  had  not  only  separated  into 
the  two  great  divisions  later  to  be  known  as  France  and  (Germany, 
but  even  the  title  of  Emperor,  borne  for  a  time  by  the  kings 
of  Germany,  had  fallen  into  disuse  (809).  However,  the  idea  of 
the  Empire  had  not  died  out,  and   it  was  revived   later  by  the 


Chap.  7.)  POSITION   OF  OBJECTS.  41 

Saxon  kings  of  Germany.  The  first  of  this  family,  Henry  the  Fowler 
(919-936),  extended  the  eastern  boundaries  of  Germany,  built 
strongholds  on  the  frontier,  and  beat  back  the  Hungarians.  This 
work  of  extension  and  defence  was  carried  on  by  his  son  Otto  I 
(936-973).  In  the  battle  of  the  Lech/eld  (955)  Otto  defeated  the 
Hungarians  so  decisively  that  they  never  again  invaded  Christen- 
dom, but  instead  accepted  Christianity  and  later  became  a  part  of 
the  Empire.  Having  now  united  the  different  parts  of  Germany, 
Otto  felt  powerful  enough  to  lead  an  army  into  Italy  and  to 
restore  the  Empire  under  the  name  of  "  The  Holy  Roman  Empire 
of  the  German  Nation"  (962). 

57.  The  German  man  must  not  be  confused  with  ber 
3}Zann  (§  19,  2).  ^an  is  used  to  translate  the  impersonal 
use  of  they,  we,  one,  you,  in  expressions  like  they  say,  07ie 
often  hears,  and  so  on.  It  begins  with  a  small  letter  and  is 
always  singular.  It  has  for  the  possessive,  feitl,  for  the 
dative,  etnem,  and  for  the  accusative,  einen. 

They  say  the  man  cannot  live. 

aWait  fagt,  bcr  9Jlann  fonnc  ntt^t  (cben. 

Hoio  do  you  get  to  the  station  f 

SBic  fommt  matt  ttad)  bcttt  Saljttl)of  ? 

They  sat  down  at  the  table,  Elizabeth  at  Beinhardfs  side. 

Wm\  fc^tc  fid)  ait  ben  Xifrf),  ©Hfabctli  m  DfJcin^arbt^  Seitc, 

—  <S  1 0  r  m. 

58.  English  to  know  has  three  German  translations : 
toiffcn,  fcnncn,  and  fiinncn* 

(1)  i£3iffen  (iDU^te,  geiDugt,  \6)  iueig,  aux.  ^aben)  means 
to  have  knowledge  of.  It  has  to  do  with  acts  of  the  mind. 
The  forms  of  the  present,  bu  IDet^t,  etc.,  must  not  be  con- 
fused with  forms  of  H)ei§en,  to  whiten,  and  tceifen,  to  direct. 

He  didn't  know  that.     ^a§  ttltt^tc  er  mti)t 

I  do  not  know  what  it  means. 

^H}  ttici^  tttdjt,  ttia§  foU  t§  bebctttcn.  —  §  e  i  n  e. 


42  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§59. 

(2)  ^ennen  (fannte,  gefannt,  aux.  ^aben)  means  to  be 
acquainted  with.  It  usually  has  to  do  with  what  the  eye 
can  see. 

DonH  you  know  him  f    Bennett  8ic  il)tt  bcnn  ntt^t  ? 

He  does  not  know  you  ;  hut  I  do. 

@r  fcnnt  VxH)  m^i,  ir^  abcr  fcnuc  biji^,  —  @c^ titer. 

(3)  Stinnett  (fonnte,  gefonnt,  ic^  fann,  aux.  ^aben),  aside 
from  its  regular  use  as  an  auxiliary,  to  he  able,  can,  is  also 
used  as  a  transitive  verb  meaning  to  know  how  to  do,  to  be 
master  of.  It  applies  to  what  one  has  learned  to  do,  and  is 
used  in  this  sense  chiefly  of  languages. 

I  don't  know  {can't  speak)  English,    ^d)  frtitn  fcin  GngUfd). 
He  knoivs-  German,    ^tv  fanii  ^Ctttflt).  —  §  e  b  b  e  (. 

Note.  —  (rt)  Good  illustrations  of  the  difference  between  tuifjcn  and 
fbnnen  are  shown  in  the  following  sentences  : 

SSiffen  ift  gut,  bod)  fonnen  ift  beffer.  —  @  c  i  b  e  I. 

2)a«  ^l^ubUfiim  (public),  ha^  ift  ein  SD'Jann, 

2)er  aUe§  \m\^  unb  gar  nic^t^  faun.  —  2.  ijRobert. 

(h)  One  of  the  best  illustrations  of  the  difference  between  fennen 
and  fonnen  is  the  following  sentence  referring  to  the  paintings  in  the 
Sistine  Chapel  at  Rome  : 

The  chapel  I  know  right  loell^  I  know  the  paintings  almost  by  heart. 
2)ie  ^apelle  fenne  id)  red)t  gnt,  id)  fann  bie  ©emdibe  fa  ft  answenbtg. 

—  ©oet^e. 

(c)  The  following  sentence  illustrates  the  difference  between 
fennen  and  roiffen : 

Give  me  your  names,  I  wan^  to  know  you,  I  want  to  know  what  you 
were,  ^f^ennt  end)  nitr,  id)  will  end)  fennen,  id)  tinll  luiffen,  wa^  iljr 
ttjar't.  —  @  r  i  U  p  a  r  J  c  r. 

59.  English  then  has  three  common  German  renderings  : 
t>a\m,  hamate,  ha.    Never  translate  then  by  benn  (§  33). 

(1)  ^ann  always  looks  to  future  time  with  reference  to 
what  has  just  been  said.     It  is  almost  like  next. 


Chap.  7.]  POSITION   OF  OBJECTS.  43 

miere  shall  we  go  then  ?    2Bo  ttJoUctt  to'xx  batttt  ^ttt  ? 

And  then  —  my  father —  vihat  did  he  do  then  ? 

Uttb bann  —  mcin 85atcr  —  ttia§,  wa^ tat cr tsunn ?  —  ©ubermann. 

(2)  'Damal^  always  refers  to  a  point  in  the  past.  It 
should  be  used  where  at  that  time  can  be  substituted  for 
then  in  the  English  sentence. 

Then  the  Germans  were  still  heathen. 
%\t  ^Ctttfdjeit  toarctt  bamal^  nod)  ^ctbcn. 
You  were  still  a  child  then. 
X)tt  ttiarft  nod)  citt  ^iitb  bama(§»  —  §  e  i)  f  e. 

(3)  T)Ci  has  the  meaning  theyi  chiefly  in  a  narrative,  where 
it  adds  life  and  is  usually  translated  and  then.     See  §  17,  1. 

Exercises. 

60.  (a)  1.  Decline:  ber  beutfd)e  gitrft,  man,  etn  9J?ann, 
bte  ^otfc^aft,  ber  ^oge(.  2.  Give  the  principal  parts  of: 
fennen,  tierberben,  anbieten,  ermci^ten,  tt)iffen. 

(b)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  54  illustrate  the  order  of  ob- 
jects ?  2.  Does  thjB  order  of  objects  in  German  differ  from 
the  English  order  ?  3.  Apply  the  general  principle,  §  37, 
Note,' to  each  illustration  of  the  order  of  objects  in  §§  54 
and  55.  4.  Find  in  §  43,  1,  Note,  three  illustrations  of 
§  57.  5.  What  is  the  difference  between  X)ann  l^aben  tDXV 
un^  gut  amitfiert  and  :Dama(^  ^aben  tt)ir  un^  gut  amltfiert? 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^onueu  ^\t 
gut  T}tViiW'  2.  Da^  meig  x^  ntc^t.  3.  T)ainal^ 
fannte  ic^  i^n  noi^  ntc^t.  4.  Wan  tuetg  ntc^t  ttnmer,  ma^ 
man  tDeiJ.  5.  :t)ann  tt)irb  man  e^  beffer  (efen  fbnnen. 
6.  Stffen  ®ie,  ob  fie  tf)n  fennt? 

61.  (a)  1.  Sometimes  one  doesn't  know  what  to  give 
children  for  (ju)  Christmas.  2.  The  children  sat  down 
on  a  bench,  and  the  man  told  them  a  long  story.        3.   Three 


44 


GERMAN   COMPOSITION. 


[§61. 


years  ago  he  lived  for  a  time  in  Brown  Street,  but  I  did  not 
know  him  then.  4.  I  know  a  man  who  knows  German 
and  French.  5.  He  asked  for  my  German  grammar 
and  I  gave  it  to  him.  6.  But  he  gave  it  back  to  me 
because  he  knows  German  so  well. 

(b)  1.  He  couldn't  help  it  that  he  didn't  know  any 
(§  9)  German  then.  2.  Another  time  I'll  work  harder 
(fletfttger)  and  then  I'll  know  it  better.         3.   We  have  a 


The  Regenstein  near  Blankenburg.  —  A  picturesque  ruin  of  one 
of  the  many  castles  built  by  Henry  the  Fowler. 


good  time  in  [the]  school,  when  we  know  the  questions  the 
teacher  asks.  4.  He  knew  her,  but  she  didn't  know  it 
then.  5.  After  some  (einiger)  time  he  asked  her  to  marry 
him  and  then  they  got  married.  6.  They  say  they  got 
many  presents  and  lived  for  a  time  in  a  beautiful  house. 


Chap.  7.]  POSITION   OF  OBJECTS.  45 

(c)  Henry  the  Fowler. — 1.  They  say  Konrad  knew  that 
Henry  was  then  the  strongest  prince  in  Germany.  2.  So 
he  asked  the  other  German  princes  to  choose  Henry  [gum] 
king.  3.  When  they  gave  him  the  crown,  he  was  not 
yet  called  emperor,  but  only  king.  4.  But  he  thought 
of  the  Empire,  when  he  gave  the  kingdom  to  his  son. 
5.  We  know  his  son,  who  was  named  Otto,  as  the  man  who 
after  some  time  restored  the  Empire.  6.  That  was  nearly 
a  thousand  years  ago,  but  they  still  call  him  "  Otto  the 
Great." 


CHAPTER   VIII. 
REVIEW. 

62.  The  particle  nod^  is  used  in  German,  aside  from  its 
regular  meaning  of  still,  more,  yet,  whenever  the  idea  of  yet 
or  more  enters  a  sentence.  It  occurs  mostly  in  negative 
sentences  and  is  not  usually  translated  in  English. 

Who  else  ?    993cr  fonft  nod)  ? 

He  has  never  been  in  Germany.     @r  toat  nod)  nic  ttt  '^CUtfdjtonb. 

But  he  didnH  begin  at  once.    (Sr  fing  abcr  nodi  nidjt  glcid)  an. 

—  S  i  I  b  e  n  b  r  u  d). 

Exercises. 

63.  (a)  1.  Explain  in  detail  the  position  of  nic^t;  of  a 
single  adverb.  2.  When  two  or  more  adverbs  occur,  in 
what  order  do  they  come?  3.  Do  these  rules  for  posi- 
tion seem  to  conform  to  the  general  principle  (§  37,  Note)  ? 
Explain  how.  4.  Does  the  rule  for  objects  seem  to  con- 
form to  the  general  principle  (§  37,  Note)  ?  5.  Explain 
how  in  each  of  the  different  combinations  of  noun  and 
pronoun  objects.  6.  What  is  the  difference  between 
^6)  ergd^Ite  meinem  :53ruber  bie  (5^efd)ic^te  and  3cft  er5at)lte 
bie  ©efc^ic^te  meinem  ^ruber? 

(6)  1.  Make  a  tabulated  list  of  the  classes  of  nouns  that 
have  occurred  thus  far  in  the  stories,  and  add  the  new 
ones  in  their  proper  class  as  you  go  on  through  the 
book.  2.  Do  the  same  for  the  classes  of  strong  or  ir- 
regular verbs. 

46 


Chap.  8.]  REVIEW,  47 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Me^norize:  1.  ^^  bin  nod^ 
m6)i  ferttg.       2.  :DamaI^  \)aiit  er  noc^  nte  baran  gebac^t. 

3.  Sir  ^aben  noc^  !eine  ^inte  befommen.  4.  :Da^  ift  noc^ 
range  (%  a  good  deal)  nic^t  ric^tig.  5.  2Bo((en  ®ie  un^ 
noc^  einmat  fagen,  toxt  H^  auf  beutfc^  (leigt?  6.  2Ber 
fonft  nod)  it)i((  noc^  Sragen  ftetten? 

64.  (a)  1.  Who  else  knows  what  this  is  in  German? 
2.  We  had  never  had  such  a  good  time  as  then.  3.  She 
doesn't  know  what  the  teacher  will  ask  her.  4.  I  couldn't 
help  it  that  he  wouldn't  help  me.  5.  They  say  that  a 
German  general  named  Moltke  knew  seven  languages. 
6.   I  get  envious  when  I  think  of  it. 

(h)  1.  I  fear  you  have  but  a  short  time  to  get  the  other 
books.  2.  She  did  not  know  him  then,  but  after  some 
time  they  got  married.  3.  Then  her  husband  wanted  to 
live  over  there,  but  he  didn't  tell  her,  so  she  didn't  know  it. 

4.  Can  you  (§  57)  get  paper  and  pens  here,  or  must  you 
look  for  them  down  town  (in  ber  (Stabt)  ?  5.  I  don't 
know,  but  I  will  ask  if  they  are  here;  then  you  won't 
have  to  (miiffen)  wait  so  long  for  them.  6.  We  couldn't 
help  (§  39,  2,  ^ote)  thinking  of  you,  when  we  were  having 
such  a  good  (fo  gut)  time. 

(c)  .1.  I  know  but  little  German ;  will  you  please  help 
me?  2.  I  shouldn't  think  (§  41,  1,  Note)  of  asking  the 
same  question  twice.  3.  She  didn't  want  to  get  a  pencil, 
but  a  pen.  4.  In  Germany  they  know  how  to  have  a 
good  time.  5.  She  did  not  know  any  foreign  languages. 
6.  Before  he  knew  her  well  he  called  her  Miss  Smith  for  a 
time ;  then  she  told  him  her  name  was  Margaret. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.     SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Katfer  (Diio  ber  Dritte  in   ber  ®ruft 
Hatis  5es   ^rofen, 

65.  ^er  junge  ^aifer  Dtto  ber  dritte  tvoUtt  einft  m  bie 
®ruft  ^axi^  be^  ©rogeti  p  Sloc^en  f)mabftetgenr  33ergeben«^ 
uerfuc^te  man  il)n  baDon  abpbrtngen.  „3Sa^  fumntert  mid) 
bie  Df^u^e  ber  ^oten?"  fagte  er,  nnb  er  (ie^  bie  @rnft  offnen. 
X)a  fag  anf  golbenem  X^rone  bie  ^eic^e  ^axi^  be«  ®rogen, 
t)or  ber  ber  tiefbeluegte  Dtto  nieberfniete. 

%U  er  nad)  einiger  ^cxt  fortge()en  woUtt,  jtuang  i^n  ein 
unn)iberfte()(irf)er  !Drang,  tin  golbenem  ^reug  Don  ^art^feruft 
3U  reigen.  Da  fie(  bie  lOeid)e  in  @tanb  ^nfammey  T)k^c 
%at  n?arf  einen  (Sc^atten  anf  fein  gan^e^  fpdtejj^  l^eben. 
Unb  nad)bem  Otto,  ber  nic^t^  ^ebentenbe^  gefdjaffen  l)at, 
geftorben  mar,  mngte  man  feine  JBeic^e  Don  3^talien  nad) 
5Iac^en  bringen,  tueit  er  neben  ^ar(  bem  ®rogen  begraben 
n)erben  woUtt ;  „Denn/'  fagte  er,  „ber  Xatenlofe  foU  beim 
^atenreic^en  rnften." 

Syntax. 

66.  The  Medals  in  Simple  Tenses.  —  In  simple  tenses 
(present  and  past)  the  modals  throw  the  infinitive  to 
the  end  of  the  sentence.  With  them  the  infinitive  never 
takes  p.  Modals  are  rarely  used  alone  as  in  English 
he  can^  you  must.  They  should  be  followed  by  ed  or 
by  some  object.     In  a  negative  sentence  of  this  sort,  e« 

48 


Chap.  9.]  MODALS  —  SIMPLE   TENSES. 


49 


10.   The  Coronation  Chair  of  the  Emperors  in  the  Cathedral 
AT  Aachen.- 


may  be  omitted  ;  ntc^t  is  then  thought  of  as  completing 
the  modal. 

Shall  I  show  it  to  him  ?    @oU  id)  e§  tl)m  ^cigcn  ? 

I  cannot,  hut  you  can.    I^d)  fautt  m^i,  ®ic  abcr  fbttitcit  c§. 


50  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§68. 

But  he  couldn't  and  wouldn't  say  more. 

^oi!^  mc^r  fonntc  er  utrt>  ttiolltc  cr  itti^t  fogctt.— 3fd)of  fc. 

Belief  is  eternal^  its  form  is  earthly ;  we  may  improve  it,  yes,  we 
ought  to.  X)cr  ©loub^  tft  cttitg,  irbtfd)  tft  bic  f^orm ;  ftc  burfcn  ttiir 
bcrbcff crit,  ja,  tt)ir  f oUcif  !§.  —  9i  a  u  p  a  d). 

Bm^  he  wanted  by  all  means  to  have  it,  and  they  had  to  call  Cinder- 
ella. @r  woUtc  c§  abcr  burt^auiS  ^abcn,  unb  ^f(^en)iutte(  mu^te 
ficntf en  iucrbcn.  —  @  r  i  m  m. 

Note.  —  The  syntax  of  the  German  rnodals  is  simple  and  uniform. 
English  modals  are  defective  ;  but  the  German  have  full  conjugations. 
When  we  say,  /  could  speak  German,  we  may  mean  that  we  used  to 
he  able  to  formerly,  or  that  we  might  be  able  to  if  it  were  not  so  hard. 
English  has  but  the  one  word,  could,  for  both  these  meanings,  for 
both  past  and  conditional.  German  would  say  for  the  past,  35or 
jtranjig  3af)ren  fonntc  \6)  3)eutf(^  f)}red)en ;  for  the  conditional :  3d) 
fonnte  3)cutfd)  fprec^cn,  trcnn  c8  nid^t  fo  fd^wer  ttJdre.  So  we  might 
almost  say  that  the  difficulty  with  German  modals  is  with  the  English  ! 
At  any  rate  the  exact  meaning  of  the  English  expression  must  be 
analyzed  before  it  can  be  put  into  German. 

Notes. 

67.  Historical  Note.  —  Just  as  the  descendants  of  Charles  the 
Great  had  failed  to  keep  his  realm  intact,  so  the  heirs  of  Otto  the 
Great  were  unable  to  cope  with  the  difficulties  which  beset  the 
Empire.  Otto  II.  reigned  but  ten  years,  and  Otto  III.  (983-1002) 
was  only  three  years  old  when  his  father  died.  During  his 
minority  his  mother  and  grandmother  ruled  for  him  and  the 
power  and  independence  of  the  nobles  grew,  thus  foreshadowing 
another  breaking  up  of  the  Empire.  Otto,  although  intellectually 
so  brilliant  that  he  was  called  the  "wonder  of  the  world,"  was 
young  and  impractical,  and  neglected  Germany  to  dream  of  the 
restoration  of  Rome  as  a  world  capital,  where  he  was  to  rule  in 
oriental  splendor,  liut  his  dream  was  impossible;  he  accom- 
plished nothing,  and  died  in  the  midst  of  defeat. 

68.  English  to  ham  is  rendered  in  German  not  only  by 
^ahtn,  but  by  fcin,  muffen,  and  loffcn. 


Chap.  9.]  MODALS  —  SIMPLE   TENSES.  51 

(1)  §aben  (^atte,  ge^abt,  aux.  ^aben)  denotes  possession 
and  is  also  an  auxiliary  of  time,  like  the  English  to  have. 

What  have  you  there  9    SSa§  l)oft  bit  bciltt  ba  ? 

/  have  enjoyed  earthly  happiness  ;  I  have  lived  and  loved. 

Stij  ^abe  gcnoffcn  '^a^  irbift^c  (^\M ;  id)  l)abc  gcicbt  \in'i>  geUcbet. 

—  @  d)  i  n  e  r. 

(2)  (gein  (mar,  gemefen,  aux.  fetn)  is  used  for  to  have  only 
as  the  auxiliary  for  intransitive  verbs.  For  a  full  treat- 
ment see  §  166. 

Have  you  been  sick?    @tttb  @tc  franf  getticfcn  ? 

The  sun  had  not  yet  risen. 

%xt  Sonne  mar  nod)  nidjt  anfgcgangcn,  —  §  e  t)  f  e. 

(3)  English  often  substitutes  to  have  to  for  must.  This 
substitution  may  take  place  in  the  present ;  it  must  occur 
in  the  past  and  future,  as  English  has  no  form  of  must  for 
these  tenses.  When  to  have  to  in  English  means  must, 
German  uses  miiffen  (mu^te,  gemu^t,  aux.  ^aben).  Com- 
pare also  §  39,  2,  Note. 

7'to  sorry^  hut  we  have  to  go. 

@§  iVLi  mtr  (cib,  abcr  ttiir  miiffen  ge^en  (or  miiffen  fort)* 

You  will  have  to  translate  it  twice. 

(Bit  wcrbcn  e§  aweimaf  iiberfc^en  miiffen. 

No  Oh  !  or  Ah  !  helped  her.,  she  (the  rose)  just  had  to  stand  it. 

^alf  il)m  boi^  fein  SGSei)  nnb  5(d),  mn^V  t^  eben  (eibem  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

(4)  iOaffen  (Heg,  gefaffen,  aux.  ^aben)  is  used  for  to  have 
in  the  sense  of  to  cause  to  he  {done  or  made). 

You  must  have  that  made,    ^a^  miiffen  @ie  mad)en  taffen, 

Francisca,  have  the  carriage  drive  around  ! 

^^ranji^f tt,  lo^  ben  SBagen  borf a^rcn.  — :?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 

The  baron  had  had  it  loritten  up  so. 

@o  Ijatte  e^  ber  S3aron  anff d)reiben  (affen,  —  9?ofegger. 

Note. — The  infinitive  after  laffen  is  translated  active  when  a 
personal  direct  object  follows  taffen,  and  passive  when  the  personal 
object  is  indirect  (dative). 


52  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§69. 

He  is  having  his  son  build  a  house. 

@r  Id^t  fcinen  @o^n  ein  §au8  bauen. 

He  is  having  a  house  built  for  his  son. 

(5r  la^t  feinem  @o^ne  ein  §au§  bauen. 

/  am  having  my  daughter  make  a  dress. 

3d)  laffe  meine  2;oc^ter  ein  ,t(eib  madjen. 

I  am  having  a  dress  made  for  my  daughter. 

3d)  Iaf[e  meiner  Soc^ter  ein  ^(eib  madjen. 

Are  you  having  the  children  read  the  book  aloud  ? 

iBaffen  @ie  tie  tinber  ba«  33ud)  oortefen? 

Are  you  having  the  book  read  aloud  to  the  children  ? 

i^affen  @ie  ben  ^inbern  ba«  33ud)  oorlefen? 

69.  English  shall  and  ivill  have  three  common  German 
eqLuivalents  ;  ttjcrbcn^  fotten,  and  ttiottcn. 

(1)  SSerben  (iDurbe,  geiDorben,  aux.  fein)  is  the  future 
auxiliary.  It  is  used  only  when  in  English  shall  and  iviU 
have  simple  future  meanings,  whether  in  declarative  sen- 
tences or  questions.     Compare  §  42,  3. 

I  shall  not  be  there.    ^^  tucrbc  md|t  ba  fein. 
Will  she  come  to-day  ?    SSirb  fic  Ijcutc  fommctt  ? 
But  nothing  loill  come  of  it. 
@)§  mirb  bot^  nid)tg  borau^  mcrben.  —  Storm. 

(2)  (gotten  (foUte,  gefoKt,  id)  fo((,  aux.  Ijabeti)  means  s/io// 
only  in  the  sense  of  ought  to,  to  be  asked  to  or  ordered  to.  It 
never  means  will.  With  foHen  the  necessity  or  intention 
depends  on  some  one  besides  the  subject. 

Shall  he  help  you  ?    (Do  you  want  him  to  ?) 

8oU  cr  ^l)ncn  I|c(fcu  ? 

Shall  we  read  on  ?     (Do  you  want  us  to  ?) 

@oUcn  ttiir  mcitcrlcfcn  ? 

TAoz<  .s/t«?<  7io«  steal.     (Somebody  else  forbids  it.) 

^u  foUft  nid)t  ftcljicn.  —  S3 i b e t,  2  m^\t  22,  15. 

r/ie  JJnion  (newspaper)  shall  be  sold,     (/will  sell  it.) 

^ic  Uttiott  f oU  ucrfauft  werbcn.  —  J^  r  e  t)  t  a  q. 


Chap.  9.] 


MODALS — SIMPLE  TENSES. 


53 


11.   The  Imperial  Palace  at  Goslar. — A  favorite  residence  of  the 
early  emperors. 


(3)  3Ko(len  (iDottte,  getnodt,  ic^  toilt,  aux.  ^ben)  means 
will  in  the  sense  of  want  to  (see  §  40,  1).  It  is  especially 
common  in  questions.  With  tDoKen,  the  desire  or  intention 
depends  upon  the  subject. 

He  won't  pay  attention.     (He  does  not  want  to.) 

©r  wiU  nidjt  auf^affcn. 

Shall  we  read  on  ?    (Do  we  want  to  ?) 

SBoUctt  mir  ttjcitcrlcfctt  ? 

Will  you  please  pass  the  butter  f     (Do  you  want  to  ?) 

Sittc,  njoUctt  Sic  itttr  bic  83utter  rci(^cn  ? 

If  I  wanted  to  do  what  I  should^  I  could  do  all  I  wanted  to. 

SSctttt  i(^  wotttc,  ttiai^  i^  foUtc,  Imnf  \^  aUc§,  ma^  tii)  tuoUtc, 

Note.  —  SBotten  means  shall  only  in  questions  in  the  first  person 
plural.  SSoUen  trir  is  much  commoner  than  foUen  tt)ir.  When  in 
doubt  as  to  how  to  translate  shall  we,  use  joUen  h)tr  only  when  you 
can  say  are  we  to.     Otherwise  use  iroUen  tt)ir. 


54  GERMAN   COMPOSlflON.  [§  71. 

(4)  Summary.  —  (a)  The  simple  future  auxiliary,  whether 
expressed  in  English  by  shall  or  will^  whether  in  declarative 
sentences  or  questions,  is  always  in  German  some  form  of 
tperben. 

(6)  Intention  is  expressed  by  iroKen  when  the  question 
rests  with  the  subject  of  the  verb,  by  fotten  when  it  depends 
upon  some  person  or  thing  besides  the  subject. 

(c)  In  general  when  in  English  you  can  substitute  a  form 
of  is  going  to,  use  iDerben ;  a  form  of  want  to,  use  tt)o((en ; 
and  a  form  of  ought  to,  use  foKett. 

Exercises. 

70.  (a)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  65  illustrate  uses  of 
the  modals  ?  2.  What  causes  the  chief  trouble  when 
we  translate  English  modals  into  German  ?  3.  Find 
illustrations  of  the  use  of  modals  in  §  15,  2,  a,  §  15,  2,  h, 
Note  h,  §  26,  2,  §  27,  §  28,  1,  §  30,  1  (two  examples),  §  33, 
§  39,  1  and  2,  §  40,  1,  §  42,  2,  §  49,  1,  §  50,  3,  and  §  58,  1 
and  3.  The  frequency  of  these  illustrations  shows  how 
common,  and  so  how  important,  is  the  use  of  modals. 
4.  Find  in  §  68,  3  an  illustration  of  §  39,  1.  5.  Memorize 
the  last  example  in  §  69,  3. 

{h)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^\i  er  C\t' 
gangen,  ober  ift  er  nod)  ba?  2.  Soden  (2ie  "ba^  macf)en 
laffen?        3.   2Bo(Ien  xo\x  ^eute  abenb  m^  XI)eater  gel)en? 

4.  ^Berbett    bie    anberen    I)eute    abenb    im    Xf)eater    fein? 

5.  (Sod  i(^  einen  neuen  ^Injng  mad}en  laffen?        6.  ^a, 
ba«  mUffen  (Ste. 

71.  (a)  1.  Shall  we  sit  down  over  there  and  tell  the 
little  girl  a  story  ?  2.  Shall  I  ask  you  some  more  ques- 
tions ?         3.    Will  he  have  to  have  a  new  suit  ?         4.    Yes, 


Chap.  9.]  MOBALS — SIMPLE  TENSES.  55 

he  will  have  to  have  a  new  one  made.  5.  Has  he  gone 
to  the  tailor,  or  will  he  come  home  first?  6.  Will  you 
tell  me  what  to  do  (§  69,  2)  ? 

(5)  1.  The  next  time  I  shall  have  to  have  a  better  suit 
made.  2.  When  he  had  been  in  Germany  for  a  time,  he 
had  to  have  a  new  one  made.  3.  Shall  we  wait  for  the 
others  or  will  you  look  for  them  ?  4.  Mr.  Brown,  shall 
we  translate  the  next  page  for  to-morrow?  5.  He  shall 
not  marry  her;  they  will  be  unhappy.  6.  Will  you 
please  tell  me  how  I  shall  get  all  these  books  ? 

(c)  TJie  Third  Otto.—l.  Shall  I  tell  you  the  story  of 
Otto  the  Third,  or  shall  we  read  it  ?  2.  After  Otto  had 
had  the  vault  of  Charles  the  Great  opened,  he  returned  to 
Italy.  3.  He  was  not  afraid  of  the  Italians,  but  he 
had  to  conquer  them  to  maintain  himself  on  the  throne. 
4.  After  he  died,  they  (§  57)  carried  his  body  to  Aachen 
and  buried  him  beside  Charlemagne.  5.  If  you  read 
history,  you  will  learn  how  long  he  lived.  6.  Will  you 
do  that,  or  shall  I  have  to  tell  you  [it]  ? 


CHAPTER   X. 
THE   MODAL  AUXILIARIES.    COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Pie  Kolanbfdulen. 

72.  3m  'J)^itte(a(ter  ()atten  bie  beutfc()en  2t'dhte  nur  iDenige 
^ecf)te.  3^^^ft  burften  fie  !ein  (^eric()t  fatten;  t>a^  fonnte  nur 
ber  ^onig  tun.  5lber  fpciter  braucf)ten  bie  taifer  t)dufig  @e(b, 
njenn  fie  ^rieg  fit()ren  luoKten,  unb  ba  I)aben  fie  oft  an  bie 
@tabte  9?ec^te  t)erfaufen  miiffen,  urn  ba^  ®elb  ju  er^alten. 
T)ie  ^itrger  gaben  i()r  (^elb  gern  fitr  t>a^  ^t6)t,  eigene  ©eric^te 
fatten  ju  biirfen. 

5(uf  biefe  Seife  I)aben  fic^  t)iele  ©tobte  t)oin  faiferlii^en 
©eric^t  befreien  !dnnen,  unb  fie  l)oben  a(^  (Sinnbilb  biefer 
i^rei^eit  auf  bem  9J?ar!tp(a^  ba^  ^tanbbilb  eineS  riefigen 
9^itter^  errid)ten  bitrfen.  @oIc^  ein  9?iefenftanbbi(b  fann 
man  ^eute  nod)  in  i?ie(en  beuifc^en  (Stcibten  fe^en.  ^Man 
nennt  e^  eine  9?olanbfdu(e  ober  blo^  einen  9^o(anb. 

Syntax. 

73.  The  Modals  in  Compound  Tenses.  —  Compound 
tenses  of  the  modals,  when  not  used  with  another  verb, 
are  regular. 

I  couldn't,    ^d)  Ijalic  c§  tttdjt  gcfonnt. 

/  have  sung  ivhat  I  ought  to. 

9Bo^  ittj  flcfoUt  (tjalic),  ^ab^  id)  flcfuitgcn.  —  lUjIanb. 

(1)  When  used  in  compound  Un%eB  with  another  verh^ 
the  past  participle  of  German  modals  has  the  same 
form  as  the  infinitive.     This  participle  with  infinitive 

66 


Chap.  10.]        MODALS — COMPOUND   TENSES. 


57 


12.  The  Roland  at  Bremen. 
,,HoIanb  bcr  Htcf  am  Hatt^aus  3u  Bremen."  — Hiicfert. 


58  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  (J  75 

form  always  follows  the  main  verb  ("  two  infinitives  "), 
exactly  the  reverse  of  the  English  order. 

Bid  you  want  to  go  f    ^abctt  @ic  gcljctt  tooUeit  ? 

We  had  to  stand  for  half  an  hour. 

Sine  ^albc  ©tunbc  l)abcn  tair  ftcljcn  ittiiffcn.  —  X  f)  o  m  a. 

I  haven'' t  yet  been  able  to  bid  you  loelcome. 

^d)  ^abe  bid)  nod)  nic^t  miUfommcn  ^ci^cn  fonncn.  —  Ji? effing. 

(2)  In  the  dependent  order  the  tense  auxiliary  C^aben 
or  lt)erben),  instead  of  standing  at  the  end  of  the  clause, 
comes  just  before  the  two  or  more  infinitives. 

I  think  that  ive  shall  have  to  go. 

^d)  glaubc,  ba^  ttiir  wcrbcn  octjcn  miiffcn. 

He  said  that  he  could  not  do  it. 

@r  fagtc,  ^a^  cr  t^  uidjt  l)abc  tun  fonncn. 

You  know  that  you  wanted  to  have  me  murdered. 

^f}x  to\%  ta^  i\}V  mid)  l)abt  ermorbeit  (affcu  tuoUcn.  —  ®  d)  i  ( ( e  r. 

Notes. 

74.  Historical  Note.  —  One  of  the  greatest  influences  In  medieval 
and  modern  history  is  the  growth  of  the  towns.  In  Germany  they 
originated  under  Henry  the  Fowler  as  fortified  places  for  markets 
and  fairs,  and  grew  rapidly  in  importance.  Soon  they  began  to 
secure  by  war  and  purchase  "  charters  of  liberties,"  which  gave 
them  their  own  courts  and  often  municipal  freedom  (exemption 
from  imperial  taxation).  They  were  called  free  cities  of  the  Empire, 
and  a  Roland  statue  was  the  emblem  of  this 'independence.  Later 
most  of  these  cities  belonged  to  a  powerful  league,  the  Hansa  or 
Hanseatic  league,  whose  flag  floated  for  centuries  over  a  majority 
of  the  ships  in  the  North  Sea.  Three  of  these  free  cities,  Ham- 
burg, Bremen,  and  Liibeck,  entered  the  German  Empire  in  1871 
on  a  basis  of  equality  with  the  other  states  of  the  present  German 
Empire. 

75.  English  7nay  is  variously  rendered  in  German. 

(1)  T^iirfett  (burfte,  geburft,  id)  barf,  aux.  f)aben)  is  used 


Chap.  10.]         MODALS  —  COMPOUND    TENSES.  59 

when  may  denotes  permission,     ^iirfett  never  means  dare 
(magen). 

You  may  go  now.    ^c^t  burfett  Sic  gcl)Ctt. 

May  people  go  through  here  ?    ^arf  matt  \)itr  burd)0C^Ctt  ? 

But  if  I  may  ask  a  favor,  I  ask  just  one  thing. 

^oc^  barf  \ii)  bitten,  bitt^  id)  citt§,  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

(2)  ^annen  (fontite,  gefottnt,  tc^  !ann,  aux.  ^ben  ;  not  to 
be  confused  with  fenneti,  §  58,  2)  and  mogen  (moc^te,  gemo(i)t, 
\6)  mag,  aux.  ^aben)  are  used  for  may  chiefly  with  to  he. 

That  may  he.    ^a§  fatttt  fcitt,  or  ba^  tttag  fcin* 
It  may  he.    @§  titag  fcitt.  —  g  r  e  t)  t  a  g. 

Note.  —  The  commonest  meaning  of  fonnen  is  English  can,  to  he 
ahle.    9}iogeti  is  commonly  used  for  to  like.     See  below,  §  76. 

(3)  Where  perhaps  can  be  used  in  English  instead  of 
may,  or  where  may  is  emphasized,  indicating  doubt,  titel^ 
(etcf)t  is  generally  used  in  place  of  an  auxiliary  to  translate 
may. 

It  may  rain  to-morrow.     25icUcir!)t  rcgttct  C§  Ittorjjctt. 
We  may  be  too  late.     SicUcitI)t  fottttttett  ttiir  jtt  fpat. 
These  people  may  have  speculated  carelessly,  may  be. 
^icfc  Scute  Ijabctt  bicUcidjt  (eitt)tfittttig  f^cftiticrt,  tttag  fcitt. 

—  33  i  g  m  a  r  (f . 

(4)  Summary.  —  When  denoting  permission,  may  is  al- 
ways some  form  of  blirfen.  When  it  denotes  possibility 
{perhaps),  German  uses  t)tettet(^t.  Other  uses  are  practically 
limited  to,  That  may  he,  which  German  renders :  ^a^  !ann 
feitt,  or  less  frequently,  !Da^  mag  fetti.. 

76.    English  to  like  has  three  common  German  renderings. 

(1)  M^^xl  (mod)te,  gemoc^t,  ic^  mag,  aux.  ^aben)  is 
employed  for  most  uses  of  English  to  like  with  a  direct 
object.  (S^ern  ^aben  may  also  be  used.  Compare  §  76,  2 
below. 


60  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§77. 

Don't  you  like  Tannhduser? 

Wi^tn  ®tc  Xotttt^aufcr  itidjt?  or  ^ahtn  Sic  Xann^dufer  nic^t  gem? 

You  don't  like  her  any  more? 

^u  magft  fie  mm  itit^t  me^r ?  —  ^au^tmaniu 

Father  likes  you,  too. 

9Kcitt  Sttter  l)at  ©ut^  auti^  gem.— ©erftad er. 

(2)  Where  English  has  to  like  followed  by  an  infinitive, 
/  like  to  sing,  German  uses  simply  the  finite  verb  with  the 
adverb  gem,  /  sing  gladly.  @ertt  is  compared:  Iteber, 
rather,  to  like  better  to,  to  prefer  to;  am  (tebften,  to  like  best  to. 

Do  you  like  to  study  German?    Scnictt  @ic  gern  ^cutfr^  ? 
She'd  rather  play  the  piano.    @ic  f  pictt  licber  5?ttttiiet. 
I  like  best  to  sing.    ^^  fingc  am  Ucbftcn, 
/ don't  like  to  do  it.    ^d)  ixC^  ttid)t  gem.  —  ^thhtX. 

(3)  befallen  (gefiet,  gefallen,  er  gefadt,  aux.  ^aben), 
always  with  the  dative,  is  used  where  English  can  use  a 
form  of  to  please  in  place  of  like. 

How  did  you  like  the  play? 
SSic  Ijat  ^^nett  ba§  8d)oiM>ie(  gefallen  ? 
He  doesn't  seem  to  like  that.    1)a§  f(^eint  iljiit  ttit^t  ju  gcfaUett. 
Annie  of  Tharau  is  the  girl  Hike. 
^nndjen  Hon  Xljarou  ift,  bic  mir  gefaUt.  —  '^ai^. 
Note. — Never  use  g(ci(^en  (gUd),  gefllid)en,  aux.  !)abcn,  always  with 
the  dative)  for  to  like,     ©leic^cn  means  to  be  like,  to  look  like,  never 
to  like. 

He  looks  like  his  father.    (Sr  glcic^t  fcinem  SSater. 

My  heart  is  just  like  the  sea. 

aJJein  ^erg  glcic^t  gan^  bem  3iJ^eere.  —  §  e  I  n  e. 

(4)  Summary.  —  SJiijgen  and  gern  (()aben)  are  used  inter- 
changeably for  to  like.  When  English  like  means  not  so 
much  fondness  for  as  pleasure  in,  that  is,  when  it  can  be 
rendered  by  to  be  pleased  with,  German  uses  gefallen. 
@(eid)en  is  never  used  for  to  like. 

77.  English  to  do  has  two  common  German  renderings  ; 
mac^en  and  tun* 


Chap.  10.]        MODALS  —  COMPOUND   TENSES,  61 


13.   The  Roland  at  Halle. 

„5u  f^allc  auf  bcm  ITTarft, 

Da  ftct^t  cirt  grower  Hiefe."  — f^cine. 


62  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§78. 

(1)  DJ^ad^en  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)  contains  an  idea  of  definite 
accomplishmeyit,  of  making  something.  It  is  a  bit  more  con- 
crete than  tun. 

You've  done  a  fine  job !    ^a  l^aft  btt  ctttjai^  SdjiJnc^  gcmadjt ! 

-He  (^iVfw'«  do  that.    %n^  \)at  cr  tttd)t  gcmad)t. 

WArt^  caw  ?)e  done  is  being  done. 

'iQaii  btt  gcmad)t  werbcn  tann,  wirb  gcmadjt.  —  ^  i  8  tn  a  r  cf . 

Note.  —  Xun  can  be  used  in  all  the  above  cases,  but  mac^eu  is 
preferable. 

(2)  Xun  {{(xtf  getan,  aux.  I^aben)  can  be  used  in  most 
cases  for  English  to  do.  It  must  be  used  when  do  replaces 
another  verb. 

Children,  what  are  you  doing  ?     Yo%i  mustnH  do  that ! 

^ittiJcr,  ttitt§  mttrf)t  (or  M)  tljr  bcnn  ba  •?    ^a§  ntii^t  iljr  nid)t  turn 

It  is  forbidden  to  smoke  here.,  but  they  do  it  just  the  same. 

&§  ift  ticrbotctt,  l|icr  ju  raud)cn,  abcr  man  tut  c§  borij. 

Whatsoever  ye  would  that  men  should  do  to  you,  do  ye  even  so 
to  them.  %Uc§  itttii,  ttia§  il)r  moUt,  ba|  cud|  bic  ficutc  tun  foUcti, 
bag  tut  iljr  iljuen.  —  « i  b  e  r,  99?  a  1 1.  7,  12. 

JVbie.  — As  auxiliary  in  the  indicative  or  interrogative,  do  is  ren- 
dered in  German  by  the  simple  verb.  In  the  imperative,  emphatic  do 
is  usually  bod). 

Do  you  play  the  piano  ?    @pic(en  'Bit  ^(oDier? 

Yotir  hands  donH  look  it. 

©ure  §anbe  fel)eti  nic^t  tanad;)  aue.—@er  ft  defer. 

Oh  !  do  see  !  do  see  ! 

Ot) !  feljen  Bit  bod) !    @et)en  @te  bod) !  —  i^  e  fj  i  ii  g. 

Exercises. 

78.  (a)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  72  illustrate  compound 
tenses  of  modals  ?  2.  What  is  the  chief  difference  be- 
tween compound  tenses  of  English  and  German  modals 
when  not  followed  by  another  verb  ?  3.  Does  the  "  two 
infinitives"  construction  seem  to  conform  to  the  general 
principle,  §  37,  Note  ?         4.   Verify  with  the  last  example 


Chap.  10.]         MODALS — COMPOUND   TENSES.  63 

in  §  73,  1  the  rule  about  reversing  the  English  order  of 
the  verbs  in  translating  into  G-erman.  5.  Find  in  §  75,  1 
an  illustration  of  §  15, 1. 

(6)  Conversational  Idioins.  Memorize  :  1.  §aben  @te  e^ 
nic^t  tun  fdnneti?       2.  g^^ein,  ic^  ^abe  e§  nirf)t  gefonnt. 

3.  !Darf  i(^  3f)nen  ^elfen?  3d)  in'  e^  gem.  4.  !4:)a^ 
^uc^  gefallt  mir,  aber  id)  mag  ben  §e(ben  ntc^t.  5.  !Da^ 
!ann  fein,  aber  Dtel(eid}t  irerben  ©ie  ein  beffere^  finben  !bn^ 
nen.        6.  (gr  fann  nic^t  bafitr,  bag  er  feinem  ^ater  g(ei(^t. 

79.  (a)  1.  May  I  ask  if  yon  will  wait  for  us?  2.  It 
may  be  that  we  shall  be  able  to  have  a  good  time.  3.  I 
may   go   to   the   theatre ;  how    did    you    like    the    play  ? 

4.  I  liked  "  William  Tell "  very  much  ;  I  like  to  go  to  the 
theatre.  5.  She  likes  to  sing  ;  has  she  been  able  to  hear 
the  opera?  6.  I  don't  know  a  single  soul  (§§9  and  19, 1) 
who  looks  like  me. 

(b)  1.  He  may  be  able  to  think  of  the  right  word. 
2.  May  I  ask  you  to  sit  down  there  and  tell  us  the  story 
of  Siegfried?  3.  She  likes  to  tell  stories  to  the  pupils, 
but  she  doesn't  know  any  German.  4.  In  the  theatre 
they  always  know  it,  if  the  public  likes  the  play.  5.  May 
we  ask  you  if  you  like  Wagner's  operas  ?  6.  I  don't 
like  this  suit ;  I  shall  have  to  have  a  new  one  made. 

(c)  The  Old  German  Cities.  —  1.  May  I  tell  you  of  the 
German  cities  in  the  Middle  Ages?  2.  You  may  not 
like  these  .old  stories,  but  I  like  to  tell  them.  3.  In  the 
Middle  Ages  many  German  cities  had  wanted  for  a  long 
time  to  get  their  freedom.  4.  That  is  to  say  (ba^  ^^ifet), 
they  wanted  to  be  able  to  hold  their  own  courts.  5.  The 
emperors  had  to  sell  them  these  rights,  because  the  emper- 
ors had  to  have  the  money.  6.  That  was  a  long  time  ago, 
but  some  German  cities  still  have  the  same  rights  as  then. 


CHAPTER   XT. 

THE   ''TWO  INFINITIVES"   CONSTRUCTION  WITH 
OTHER  VERBS  THAN  THE  MODALS. 

^riebrid?  Kotbart. 

80.  (g^  war  einmal  ein  beutfd)er  ^atfer,  griebric^  9?otbart 
genannt,  ben  bie  ^eutfc^en  tne^r  a(^  a((e  anberen  ^aifer 
liebten,  unb  t)on  be[fen  gtdnjenben  Xaten  audj  bie  ^adjWtit 
t)te(  \)at  reben  ()dren.  ©r  tpar  ein  fietjreidjer  .f)eerfiif)rer  nnb 
man  Ijat  i()n  oft  an  ber  Spit^e  feiner  flitter  in  ben  £ampf 
;^ief)en  fet)en.  T^od)  ftarb  er  Diet  jn  frii^  fiir  fein  ii^aterlanb  ; 
er  ertranf,  aH  er  im  britten  ^iren^^uiie  nac^  bem  .^eiligen 
I'anbe  jog. 

i)la6)  feinent  Xobe  fe()nten  fic^  bie  "Deutfc^en  nac^  i^rem 
fiegreic^en  ^aifer,  menn  e<5  ^rieg  gab.  ;I)arou^  entftanb 
n)ot)(  bie  (Sage,  ba|l  er  nirf)t  tot  fei,  fonbern  im  .Qijff^dnfer 
:^erg  fd)(iefe,  nnb  iDieberfommen  miirbe,  irenn  bie  ^Deutfc^en 
bereit  feien,  fic^  gn  uereinen.  (2ieben  l)nnbert  ^a^re  fpdter  ift 
ba^  bentfd)e  9f?eid)  t)on  ^in)e(m  bem  (Srften  nnb  :^i^marcf  nen 
gegrUnbet  iDorben,  nnb  an^  !Danfbar!eit  I)at  ba^  bentfd)e  i>oIf 
feinem  ^aifer  auf  bem  "  ^t)ff()dnfer "  ein  X)en!ma(  erric^ten 
(affen,  an  beffen  (So(fe(  ^aifer  9totbart  bargeftettt  ift,  une  er 
gerabe  ani  bem  ®d;(afe  ertuad^t. 

Syntax. 

81.  Two  Infinitives  with  Other  Verbs  than  Modals.  — 
Besides  the  modal  auxiliaries  the  commonest  verbs  that 
take  an  infinitive  without  5U  are  :  braud)en,  to  need  ;  fit^* 
(en,  to  feel ;  l)ei§en,  to  hid  ;  ^etfen,  to  help  ;  l)bren,  to  hear  ; 

64 


Chap.  11.] 


TWO   INFINITIVES.'' 


65 


14.   The  Monument  on  Kyffhausek.  —  The  ruin  in  the  distance  is  all 
that  remains  of  a  castle  Barbarossa  built  here. 


taffen,  to  let;  (e^ren,  to  teach;  lernen,  to  learn;  mac^en, 
to  make;  and  fe^en,  to  see.  Besides  the  regular  past 
participle  these  verbs  mai/  have  a  past  participle  with 
infinitive  form,  when  used  with  another  infinitive. 
Saffen  is    the   only   one   whose    past    participle    must 


6Q  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§83. 

have  the  infinitive  form    when  used  with  another  in- 
finitive. 

T/iey  were  learning  to  read.     ®te  Icmteit  Icfctt. 

She  taught  me  to  speak  German. 

Sic  ))ai  mid)  ^cutfd)  fprettjcn  Icljrcn  (or  gc(c!)rt). 

I  saw  him  go.    ^t^  Ijabc  'x\)\\  gcl)cn  fcljcn  (or  gcfcljcn). 

Didn't  you  have  him  come  ?    .^abctt  @tc  \\)\\  ntd)t  fommctt  laffcn  ? 

/  heard  a  sicJde  rustle. 

^d)  \}'6tV  eitt  Stttjlcttt  rauf d)cit.  —  i^  o f  f « li e b. 

You  made  me  sweat  with  a  vengeance. 

^l)r  l^aht  mt(^  wcibfic^  fdjttii^cn  madjcn.  —  @  o  e  t  ^  e. 

Notes. 

82.  Historical  Note.  — Vor  a  century  and  a  half  (1002-1152) 
after  the  death  of  Otto  III,  the  different  German  Emperors  wasted 
time  and  armies  in  fruitless  campaigns  against  the  armies  of 
the  popes  in  Italy.  In  1152  Frederick  of  Hohenstaufen,  called 
Barharossa  (from  the  Italian  for  red  heard),  came  to  the  throne. 
He  brought  the  glory  of  the  German  Empire  to  its  highest  point 
and  was  considered  the  most  powerful  ruler  in  Christendom.  But 
like  his  predecessors  he  wasted  northern  energy  to  subdue  a 
southern  land ;  six  times  he  led  across  the  Alps  armies  whose 
vitality  Germany  needed  for  itself.  In  those  times  all  emperors 
were  irresistibly  drawn  to  Italy,  and  we  cannot  blame  Frederick 
for  neglecting  Germany.  His  genius,  valor,  and  renown  have 
made  him  the  darling  of  the  German  people.  His  descendants, 
like  himself,  waged  fruitless  war  with  the  papacy  for  nearly  a 
century,  and  the  last  of  the  proud  Hohenstaufen  line,  Konradin, 
was  executed  at  Naples  in  1268. 

83.  English  a.s  and  than  are  usually  rendered  by  Ger- 
man hjic  or  at^. 

(1)  In  comparisons  tt)ie  means  as  and  alS  means  than. 
The  first  correlative  an  in  expressions  like  «.s  good  as,  as  far 
as,  and  so  on  is  fo  (§  26,  1).     Just  as  is  ebenfo. 

He  is  not  >>s  sfmng  as  you.    (^t  ift  tttd)t  fo  ftarf  ttiic  bu. 
lam  older  than  she.    ^d)  bin  filter  nlc*  fie. 


Chap.  11.] 


TWO  INFINITIVES. 


67 


15.    Barbarossa.  —  As  represented  on  the  base  of  the  Kyffhauser 
Monunaent. 


You  can  go  just  as  well  as  I.    @ic  fonncn  cbcnfo  gut  8cl)cn,  wic  id). 
Who  has  less  than  he  desires  m^ist  know  that  he  has  more  than  he 

is  worth.    2Ber  mcnigcr  \)at,  al^  cr  begc^rt,  mu^  wiffcn,  ba^  cr  mc^r 

f^at,  al§  cr  wort  ift.  —  1'  i  d)  t  e  n  b  e  r  g» 


68  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§84. 

(2)  5l(^  is  preferable  to  luie  for  as,  when  as  is  a  conjunc- 
tion of  past  time  (not  of  reason.  See  §  17,  3).  ^ie  is 
oftener  used  with  the  present. 

Just  as  he  began  whispering,  the  teacher  looked  at  him. 
%i§  tv  eben  anftng  p  flitftern,  fal)  il|n  ber  fie^rer  an. 
And  as  he  sits  and  listens,  the  flood  divides. 
Unb  mte  tx  fi^t  unb  mie  er  kufd^t,  teilt  fi(^  bie  ^Int  empor. 

—  @oetl)e. 

84.  English  when  has  three  common  German  equivalents  : 
aU,  tomn,  and  toann. 

(1)  5l(^  regularly  translates  when  with  past  tenses.  But 
never  use  a(^  if  whe7i  can  be  replaced  by  ivhenever. 

I  knew  Mm  when  he  was  a  child. 

^d)  t)abe  il|tt  gcfaunt,  aW  cr  nod)  ^inb  ttiar» 

But  loheu  she  saw  the  knife,  she  had  to  believe  it. 

%htx  a\^  fie  ba^  ^cffcr  fal|^  t^a  mu^tc  fie^£(  mo^r  g(auben. 

—  Ap  i  n  e  r  n. 

(2)  $Benn  translates  (a)  ?t7ien  with  the  present  or  future 
and  (h)  whenever  witli  all  tenses.  With  a  subordinate  clause 
in  past  time,  use  Jt)enn  if  the  word  always  can  be  inserted 
in  the  main  clause  without  changing  the  meaning. 

(a)    When  you  are  through,  leVs  go. 
SBetitt  btt  fcrtijj  bift,  (o^  m\^  fort. 
When  they  are  gone,  Pll  go  and  buy  some  more. 
9Bcnn  fie  511  @nbc  fiiib,  geV  id|  «ub  faufe  ueue.  —  ^  e  ij  f  c. 

(6)    When  Dietrich  fought,  he  always  won. 
SBenn  ^ictrid)  ffim^jfte,  fo  fiegte  cr  immer. 

When,  as  a  youth  you  used  to  sing,  you  never  got  to  the  end  ! 

3fanbeft  bu  olisi  ^iingting  bod),  nicnn  bu  fangft,  bocJ  @nbc  iiic ! 

—  .^blberltiu 

(3)  SKann  is  used  for  when  as  interrogative. 

When  does  the  train  leave  f    SBaitlt  fol)rt  bcr  ^Mfl  flb  ? 

And  when  will  the  day  come  f 

Uub  toanu  toirb  bcr  Xag  fommcu  ?  —  %  r  c  i)  t  a  g. 


Chap.  11.]  '' TWO  INFINITIVES.'''  69 

Note.  —  It  is  better  to  avoid  tiie  use  of  toann  in  the  general  sense 
of  when(ever),  although  it  used  to  be  common  and  we  read  it  often. 

85.  English  there  is  (are)  is  rendered  in  German  in  two 
ways  :  c§  gtfit  and  e;^  tft» 

(1)  (S^  gibt  (e^  gab,  e^  ^at  gecjeben),  with  the  accusative, 
is  used  in  general  cases  when  no  definite  place  is  mentioned. 
(5^  is  never  omitted. 

There  is  no  such  thing.     'J)a§  gibt  e§  nid^t. 

Well,  ichaVs  up  ?    9iutt,  ttia§  gtbt^^  ? 

There  were  no  railroads  a  hundred  years  ago. 

25or  l|Uttbcrt  ^o^rcn  \)ai  c^  fctnc  ©ifcttbaljncn  gcgcbcit* 

And  there  aren't  any  witches. 

Uttb  ^cjcn  gibt  c§  ttid|t.  —  "p  a  u  ^  t  m  a  n  u. 

(2)  (5^  tft,  e^  finb  (e^  tt)ax,  e^  ift  gertjefen),  with  the  nomi- 
native, is  used  for  cases  where  a  definite  thing  is  mentioned, 
usually  in  a  definite  place.  The  verb  agrees  in  number 
with  the  nominative  which  follows  it.  ^^  is  omitted  in  the 
inverted  or  transposed  order. 

There  were  three  mistakes  in  this  exercise. 
@§  marctt  brci  f^c^tcr  tit  bicfcr  5(ufgabc,  or  ^it  btcfcr  Stttfgabc 
warctt  brci  f^e!)(er» 

There  is  only  one  thing  that  can  save  us. 
@^  ift  ttitr  cittc^,  ttJO§  ttn^  rettctt  f attit»  —  ©(filter. 
In  my  father'' s  house  [there']  are  many  mansions. 
Stt  itteiitcS  ®atcr§  ^attjg  jtttb  uiele  SBo^mtttgctt. 

—  iBibct,  3ot).  14,  2. 

Note.  —  This  similar  use  of  e8  as  grammatical  subject  extends  to 
other  words  than  fein,  and  is  commoner  in  German  than  in  English. 

There  came  three  fellows  across  the  Bhine. 
©«  ^oflen  brei  33itrf(^e  n)ol)t  iiber  ben  '^i)em.  —  U^Ianb. 
Men  talk  and  dream  much  of  better  future  days. 
S8  reben  unb  traumen  bic  9)icnf(^en  diet  oon  befferen  fiiufttgen  2^agen. 

—  ©d^iUcr. 


70 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§87, 


Exercises. 

86.  (a)  1.  Which  sentences 
in  §  80  illustrate  "two  infini- 
tives "  ?  2.  What  is  the  only 
verb  besides  the  modals  that 
must  have  its  past  participle  in 
the  infinitive  form  when  used 
with  another  infinitive? 
3.  Find  in  §  83,  1  an  illustra- 
tion of  §  58,  1,  in  §  83,  2,  of 
§  18,  1,  in  §  85,  2,  Note,  of  §  19, 
1.  4.  Memorize  the  last  ex- 
ample in  §  85,  2,  Note. 

(p)  Conversatio7ial  Idioms. 
Memorize  :  1.  §aben  (2ie  i^m 
liberfetjen  ()e(fen?  2.  (Sr  \)Cii 
t)te(  beffer  lefen  (ernen,  a(§  ^ie. 
3.  3Kann  ()aben  ^ie  ben  grauen 
9?ocfTnacI)en(af)'en?  4.  SSa« 
gibt'^?  (5«  ift  nic^t«  ^ter. 
5.  ($^  gibt  50^enfd)en,  bte  md)t 
finiien  (ernen  itjoden.  6.  ($i? 
finb  feine  3ef)(er  in  biefer 
5lufgabe. 

87.  (a)  1.  As  he  had  not 
been  able  to  do  his  work,  he 
sat  down  and  waited  for  his 
friend.        2.    His    friend  was 


16.  Barbarossa. — As  he  probably 
really  looked.  From  a  carefully 
executed  contemporary  sculpture 
in  a  Bavarian  monastery. 


Chap.  11.]  '' TWO   INFINITIVES."'  71 

not  so  old  as  he,  but  he  liked  to  help  him.  3.  As  they 
were  sitting  in  the  garden,  an  old  man  told  them  a  story. 
4.  When  there  are  mistakes  in  my  exercise,  I  have  to  ask 
the  teacher  questions.  5.  Whenever  he  had  to  learn 
to  read  a  new  German  story,  he  did  not  know  what  to  do. 
6.  There  were  three  old  men  in  the  house,  and  they  did 
not  like  to  hear  us  sing. 

(h)  1.  I  like  this  book  better  than  that  red  one,  but  not 
so  well  as  the  other  blue  one.  2.  When  you  have  learned 
to  read  these  books,  you  will  know  German.  3.  When- 
ever I  made  a  mistake  the  teacher  asked  if  there  were 
difficulties  in  the  exercise.  4.  There  are  four  mistakes 
in  this  exercise ;  next  time  you  have  to  do  better.  5.  What 
are  you  doing  ?  Don't  you  know  that  you  mustn't  do  that  ? 
6.  When  he  had  heard  the  boys  sing  for  a  time,  he  told 
them  that  he  liked  it. 

(c)  Emperor  Redbeard.  —  1.  We  have  often  heard  the 
teacher  tell  of  Barbarossa.  2.  There  have  been  many 
German  emperors,  but  we  hear  more  of  Frederick  the 
First  than  of  the  others.  3.  He  is  the  one  who  did  so 
much  for  the  Empire.  4.  His  enemies    were  afraid  of 

him  whenever  they  had  to  fight  against  him.  5.    When 

he  conquered  them,  he  wanted  to  go  to  the  Holy  Land. 
6.    But  he  was  drowned  there  in  a  river. 


CHAPTER   XII. 
REVIEW. 

88.  The  particle  tool^I  is  used  in  German  whenever  the 
idea  of  probability  enters  a  sentence.  It  may  be  translated 
in  English  by  perhaps^  maybe,  I  think,  by  a  question,  or  by 
almost  any  expression  indicating  uncertainty. 

He's  sick,  I  think.    @r  ift  n)oI|(  fratif . 

Yoii  arenH  prepared  to-day,  are  you  ? 

<B\t  fittb  ^ctttc  w^\\{  tttd|t  oorberettet  ? 

Maybe  I  shall  stay  a  long  time  to-day  in  Capri. 

:^d)  blcibc  I|eutc  woljl  (ong^  ouf  Gapri.  — §ct)fc. 

Note.  —  2So{)t  rarely  means  well,  except  as  a  predicate  adjective 
applying  to  health.  As  an  adverb  n^cll  is  gut ;  as  an  exclamation, 
nun. 

Well,  did  he  dn  it  icell?  ^Jhiu,  t)at  ev  (^  n^it  nfi"fld)t  ';* 
He  felt  as  well  in  this  quiettide  as  a  fish  in  the  water. 
©8  ging  i^m  fo  wo^l  in  bicfcr  Ungcftbrt^eit  wic  cincm  j^ifd)  im  SBaffer. 

—  teller. 

Exercises. 

89.  (a)  1.  Add  to  your  tables  of  declensions  and  con- 
jugations the  new  nouns  and  verbs  in  §§  65,  72,  and  80, 
and  review  this  table  at  each  Review  Lesson.  2.  Name 
the  commonest  verbs  that  7)iay  take  the  "two  infinitives" 
construction  when  their  past  participle  follow^  an  infinitive. 
8.  Name  the  seven  verbs  that  must  take  the  "two  infini- 
tives" construction  when  their  past  participle  follows  a  verb. 

(h)  1.  Illustrate  in  German  sentences  four  different 
meanings  of  English  have;  three  of  English  shall;  two  of 

72 


Chap.  12.]  REVIEW.  73 

English  will.         2.    Illustrate  in    German  sentences   three 
meanings  each  of  English  as,  may,  when,  and  to  like. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  !^arf  id)  Utn 
noc^  einen  53ogen  papier  bitten?  2.  !l)a^  mogen  @ie  iDo^t 
ntc^t  fo  gem  wit  ba^  anbere.  3.  X)a  biefer  Slnjug  3^nen 
nidjt  gefadt,  fo  merben  (Sie  einen  nenen  ntac^en  (affen  miiffen. 

4.  gr  ^at  ba^  SJ^dbc^en  tt)of)(   nod)  ntc^t    fennen  gelernt. 

5.  3[Ba^  gibt'ei?    Sa^  madien  ®ie  benn  ba?       6.   Pollen 
rvix  {e^t  ettpa^  anbere  tnn?    Qa,  gem. 

90.  (a)  1.  May  I  have  another  sandwich  ?  2.  Shall  we 
learn  to  write  German  now,  or  what  shall  we  do  ?  3.  I 
do  not  like  Wagner's  "  Tannhauser ''  so  well  as  his  "  Sieg- 
fried." (Express  the  verb  in  three  ways.)  4.  It  may 
be  that  you  will  hear  him  sing,  but  I  do  not  know.  5.  We 
may  like  this  book  better  than  the  other,  when  we  learn  to 
read  well.         6.   I  asked  him  when  he  would  probably  do  it. 

(b)  1.  When  I  heard  the  boy  sing,  I  liked  him  better  than 
the  man.  2.  There  were  many  mistakes  in  his  exercises, 
whenever  he  w^rote  them.  3.  Shall  I  ask  him  if  we  may 
sit  down  over  there  ?  4.  Shall  we  look  for  a  bench  on 
which  (tDorauf)  we  may  sit?  5.  As  you  like  this  book 
as  well  as  the  other,  I  should  think  (bdc^te  ic^  Voolji)  you 
would  read  it  faster.  6.  Will  you  please  tell  us  when 
you  want  to  have  that  coat  made  ? 

(c)  1.  Whenever  we  asked  them  what  they  were  doing, 
they  told  us  nothing.  2.  If  you  want  to  have  a  good 
suit,  you  will  have  to  have  it  made.  3.  We  may  like  him 
better  than  now  when  we  get  acquainted  (learn  to  know) 
with  him.  4.  May  I  pass  you  the  bread  or  do  you  like 
rolls  better  (tteber)  ?  5.  Shall  we  buy  this  dress  or  shall 
we  have  something  made  ?  6.  He  does  not  know  when 
he  learned  to  speak  German. 


CHAPTER   XIII. 
PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  DATIVE. 

Die  IDeiber  von  IPeinsberg. 

91.   X)te  ffeine  (Btabt  SBetoberg  in  Slirttemberg  murbe  im 
gttjaiften   3al)r^unbevt   oon   tciniG    tonrab    belagert.    (Sic 


17.  The  Ruin  of  the  Fortress  Weibertreu. 
city  of  Weinsberg. 
74 


As  seen  from  the 


Chap.  13]  PREPOSITIONS   WITH  DATIVE,  75 

letftete  fo  ^artnddtgen  Stberftanb,  bag  tonrab  nac^  etniger 
3ett  in  3orn  geriet.  (5r  fd)n)or,  bet  ber  Ubergabe  ber  Stabt 
alle  aJ^cintier  gu  tbten,  bte  grauen  jebocf)  au^  ber  Stabt  ab^te^en 
au  (affen  unb  t^nen  au  ertoben,  i^r  teuerfte^  (^ut  mit^u* 
nel^men. 

511^  Sem^berg  fi(^  enbltc^  narf)  (anger  :53eragernng  ergeben 
mugte,  ba  (nben  bte  granen  t^re  SJ^anner  anf  ben  9^it(fen  nnb 
gtngen  mit  i^nen  au^  ber  (Stabt.  'A^it  ^ift  geftel  bent  ^ontg 
nic^t,  aber  er  fagte :  „(gine^  ^dntg^  Sort  foK  man  ntc^t 
bre^en  nnb  benteln,"  nnb  er  i^at  fie  rn()ig  gte()en  (affen.  5(nf 
biefe  Seife  famen  bie  granen  mit  i^ren  9}?annern  g(ii(f(ic^ 
bat)on.  (Seit  ber  3^tt  n)irb  bie  ^nrg  ^n  Sein^berg  uon  atlen 
l^enten  „bie  SBeibertren"  genannt. 

Syntax. 

92.  Prepositions  with  the  Dative.  —  The  commonest  prep- 
ositions with  the  dative  are  ;  an^,  anger,  bei,  mit,  nac^, 
feit,  bon,  p. 

9?ar^  btr  ft^mnc^t^  ir^,  jti  btr  ctF  tj^,  bn  gcHcbte  Cuettc  bu ! 
9ttt§  bir  ft^o^f^  irf),  Bci  bir  WJcir  trf|,  fc^^  bent  @^icl  ber  SBcflett  p; 
aWtt  bir  ft^crj^  tt^,  tiou  bir  lertt^  i^  fetter  bitrr^  ba)§  iJcbcn  njottctt, 
^(ngclat^t  tJon  ^'rit^Ung^btumctt  uttb  begrit^t  tion  ^iar^tioattcn. 

—  dlamUv, 

Note.  — The  general  principle  for  Word  Order  (§  37,  Note)  applies 
also  to  prepositional  phrases.  A  prepositional  phrase  follows  directly- 
after  the  particular  word  it  modifies  :  5Bein8berg  in  SSiirttenxberg.  In 
adverbial  phrases  the  order  is  usually  the  same  as  for  adverbs: 
(1)  time,  (2)  place,  (3)  manner.  See  §  47.  But  usually  German 
puts  one  of  these  phrases  first  and  throws  the  sentence  into  the 
inverted  order.  See  §2,  1.  For  histance,  He  was  at  home  in  the 
evening  in  a  good  humor,  would  probably  be  translated,  %m  3lbenb 
trar  er  jot  ^aufc  bei  gutcr  i^aunc. 


76  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§95. 

Notes. 

93.  Historical  Note.  —  The  siege  of  Weinsberg  (1140)  is  typical 
of  the  incessant  conflicts  in  Germany  in  the  Middle  Ages.  The 
whole  country  was  split  into  principalities,  duchies,  and  walled 
towns,  each  indejjendent  of,  and  frequently  at  war  with,  the  others. 
This  was  the  time  of  the  picturesque  castles  with  their  "  robber 
barons,"  of  whom  Bryce  says :  "  These  petty  tyrants,  whose  boast 
was  that  they  owed  fealty  only  to  God  and  the  Emperor,  showed 
themselves  in  practice  equally  regardless  of  both  powers." 

94.  %n^  generally  denotes  source.  It  has  two  commou 
English  renderings. 

(1)  5lu^  regularly  means  from,  out  of. 

rmfrom  America,    ^d)  bin  ott§  5(mcrtfa. 

A  fairy  tale  from  olden  timfs,  I  can't  get  it  out  of  my  head. 

©in  Wax&^tn  oii^  altcit  ^txitvi,  ba^  fommt  mir  itirtjt  au^  bcm  Sinn. 

—  .^  c  i  u  c. 

(T)  5lU^  is  used  for  English  of  in  such  expressions  as : 

What  has  become  of  him  ?    9®ai§  ift  an^  i!)m  flcttorbcit  ? 

Spring  weaves  a  net  of  colors,  sounds,  odors. 

^er  f^ritl)liug  ftricft  ein  92e^  auS  ^artien,  XHntn,  Xitftciu 

—  9{ucfcrt. 

95.  Set  has  several  meanings.  It  is  never  used  with  the 
passive  to  translate  English  by  (toon,  §  99,  2). 

(1)  In  showing  position  near  or  by,  bei  means  not  so  near 
as  an  and  neben. 

The  Battle  of  (near)  Leipzig.    *^tc  ®d)(a(i^t  bet  Seip^ig. 

Near  Anderyiach  on  the  Bhine  lies  a  deep  sea. 

!8ci  ^nbcniad)  am  JRljcittc  Itcgt  cine  tiefc  See.  — g.  ©djlegct. 

(2)  :Q3ei  is  also  used  to  introduce  a  condition  or  circum- 
stance (like  the  Latin  ablative  of  attendant  circumstance). 
In  this  use  bei  generally  means  in,  tvith,  or  when  there  is. 


Chap.  13.]  PEEP08ITI0N8    WITH  DATIVE.  77 

Thus,  Qf^  fc^tafe  bei  offenem  genfter,  means,  I  sleep  with  the 
window  open,  not,  /  sleep  by  an  open  window,  ^ti  Xifc^  does 
not  mean  near  the  table  (am  Zx\d}),  but  at  table,  that  is  dur- 
ing a  meal. 

In  this  weather  ;  with  such  a  throng. 

S3et  btefcm  SScttcr ;  bci  ctncm  fofdjeu  (SJebrangc. 

You  canH  see  a  thing  in  this  light. 

S3ci  bicfcm  fiidjt  fann  man  gar  ntii^t^  fcljcn. 

In  icy  rain  and  winds. 

S3ci  cifigcm  OfJcgctt  unb  2SSitt&cn.  —  33  ii  r  g  e  r. 

(3)  ^et  is  also  used  for  English  with  in  expressions  like : 

I  live  with  the  Fishers,     ^c^  ttJOljttC  bci  ^if  d)cr§. 

Have  you  any  money  with  you  f    fatten  @ie  (^c(b  bei  fid)  ? 

How  goes  it  with  you  at  home  f 

Wu  ocljt^sf  bei  bir  311  ^m^  ?  —  §  a  u  p  t  m  a  n  ii. 

96.  S!JJtt  is  usually   English   ^mth,   but   it   is  sometimes 
^  used  for  other  English  prepositions. 

All  at  once  there  he  stood.    W\i  eiuem  9JJa(c  ftaitb  er  be. 
rm  not  engaged  to  him.     S^)  bin  tti(^t  mit  il)m  tJerlobt. 
Ood  is  with  us  and  we  with  him. 
(^fiii  ift  m\i  m\^  unb  toxx  mit  il|m.  —Corner. 

97.  9la^  is  akin  to  nci\)t,  near,  and  most  of  its  uses  can 
be  traced  to  this  meaning. 

(1)  It   regularly   denotes   motion  toward   or   to  a  place. 
(See  ju,  §  100.) 

We  went  to  Berlin.    993tr  fuljrett  na(^  S3er(itt. 

He  went  home.     Nothing  came  of  it. 

@r  ging  nat^  ^an^.    '^a  warb  nit^t^  brau^.  —  Berber 

(2)  9flad^  translates  English  after  both  for  time  and  place. 

After  the  Emperor  came  the  Crown  Prince. 
9lot^  bcm  ^aifcr  fam  ber  ^ron^nns^ 


78  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  99 

After  work  Ws  good  to  rest. 

9iac^  bcr  3(rbcit  ift  gut  niVn.  —  ?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 

(3)  ^aii)  also  means  according  to  (by,  in).     In  some  cases 
it  may  follow  its  object. 

Every  one  according  to  his  taste,     ^cbcr  ttttrf)  fctncitt  ©efd^lttttcf. 

lie  knows  me  only  by  {according  to  my)  name. 

Gr  fcnttt  ttttd)  mir  bcm  ^'Jamcn  uad)* 

Read  to  us  according  to  your  mood,  according  to  your  pleasure. 

Sic§  wtt§  naj^  Saunc,  nad)  Suft,  —  @  d)  1 H  e  r. 

98.  @cit  has  two  English  renderings. 

(1)  When  used  with  a  word  meaning  a  particular  time 
or  event,  fett  is  translated  since. 

I've  been  waiting  since  ten  o^ clock.     Scit  jcljlt  Ul)r  tuartc  \^  ft^on. 
Since  that  hour  my  body  has  been  wasting  away. 
@cit  jcncr  @tutti>c  tjerjeljrt  fid)  mciu  Scib.  —  ip  e  i  n  e. 

(2)  When  feit  is  used  with  an  expression  denoting   an 
extent  of  time,  it  is  usually  translated /or  or  in. 

IhavenH  seen  him  for  (or  in)  weeks. 
Sd)  l)abc  il)tt  fcit  a33od)en  nit^t  gcfcljctt. 
Fve  been  wandering  for  years. 
^d)  ttianbrc  f d)ou  fcit  ^aljrcn.  —  %  ^  d)  ( e  g  c  {. 

99.  !S8on  usually  denotes  source,  but  less  definitely  than 

(1)  Its  commonest  meaning  is  from. 

We  are  going  from  here  to  Cologne. 

993ir  fa^rctt  uon  !)tcr  nad)  f^'oUt, 

The  brooklets  spring  from  the  monutitins. 

^tc  $ad|Iein  boit  ben  Scrgcn  f^jriiigcii.  —  CS  i  rf)  e  ii  ^  o  v  \  f. 

(2)  55on  is  always  used  for  by  with  the  passive  voice  to 
tell  the  agent.     Never  use  bei,  y.j^ii 


Chap.  13.]  PREPOSITIONS    WITH  DATIVE. 


79 


18.   The  Weibertreu  from  a  Neighboring  Hill.  —  Notice  the  rectangu- 
lar vineyards  from  which  Weinsberg  receives  its  name. 


The  sentence  was  first  translated  by  a  girl. 

^cr  @a^  Wttrbc  jucrft  tion  ctncm  SOlabdjcn  iibcrfc^t. 

You  want  to  get  beaten  by  an  old  soldier. 

(Bit  ttioUctt  ft(^  tJOtt  cittern  alUn  Wlititav  fd)tagctt  laffctt. 


•greljtag. 


(3)  3$on  is  used  for  many  translations  of  English  of. 


80  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  lOO. 

He  is  a  friend  of  mine.     @r  ift  citt  ^'tCUttb  tton  ttltr, 

Frederick  of  Hohenstanfen  was  Emperor  of  Germany. 

^ricbridi  tion  .t>oI|enfta«fcn  mar  ^aifcr  non  '^cutfrtitanb. 

They  sing  of  spring  and  love.,  of  blissful.,  golden  time. 

<B\t  fingctt  t)Ott  2ctt5  «nb  Sicbc,  uon  fcfgcr  golbncr  3cit.  —  U  ^  I  a  n  b. 

iV^o^e. —  (a)  When  in  English  of  is  a  sign  of  apposition  or  of 
measure,  t>on  is  omitted  in  German. 

The  month  of  June.,  the  city  of  Dresden.,  a  glass  of  water. 
!Der  Momi  3unt,  bie  @tobt  2)regben,  ein  @la8  2Ba[fer. 
In  the  beautiful  month  of  May. 
3m  n)unberfd)onen  9Honat  9Wai.  —  §  e  i  n  e. 

(6)  In  expressions  where  of  seems  very  closely  connected  with  the 
preceding  word,  as  tired  of  in  spite  of  because  of  don  cannot  be 
used  ;  the  genitive  must  be. 

In  spite  of  the  weather  we  went.    Xro^  beS  SBctterS  gingcn  \v'\x. 

O,  I  am  tired  of  the  turmoil. 

^d|,  ic^  bin  be«  Srelben^  ntube.  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

100.   3tt  lias  various  renderings  in  English. 

(1)  For  English  to^  p  is  used  with  persons  (contrast 
nad)  with  places,  §  97,  1)  and  with  places  where  there  is  a 
definite  purpose  or  object  involved,  or  where  no  motion  is 
indicated. 

Go  to  your  mother!    @el|  ju  bcincr  SDJuttcr! 

Pm  going  to  bed.     ^(^  gcljc  5tt  83ctt. 

He  came  home  to  his  parents.     @r  fain  \\ti^  «^anfc  5tt  fctncn  (Sltcm. 

This  street  leads  to  the  station,    ^icfc  Strafe  filljrt  jum  SJa!|n^of. 

She  sang  to  him.,  she  spoke  to  him. 

®ic  fang  5U  il|m,  fie  f^rad)  5u  il)m.  —  @  o  e  t  Ij  c. 

(2)  3u  usually  means  at  with  names  of  cities  and  in  a 
few  idioms. 

His  patience  is  at  an  end.     ^c^t  ift  fciuc  OJcbulb  JU  (?nbc. 
At  Qucdlinburg  in  the  cathedral  7'esounds  the  clang  of  bells. 
3u  DttcblinbHtfl  im  ^omc  crtflnct  ©(orfcunanfl.  —  iDhlUer. 


Chap.  13.]  PREPOSITIONS   WITH  DATIVE.  81 

(3)  ^u  means  for  in  phrases  like  the  following : 

We  always  have  soup  for  dinner. 

Snm  aUittagcffeit  Ijobcti  ttJtr  immer  Buppt. 

You  are  too  proud  for  submissiveness,  I  for  falsehood. 

^tt  bift  5tt  ftolj  jur  ^cniut,  id)  jur  fiiigc.  —  ^djilUv, 

(4)  In  idioms  p  is  variously  translated  : 

Afoofu,  on  horseback,  in  a  carriage. 

Om^  o/  i^e  window,  in  at  the  door. 
3ttm  ?^cttftcr  Ijtttou^,  jur  ^^iir  I)crcttt. 
Count  Bichard  came  along  on  foot. 
©raf  9flir^arb  f  am  p  f^u^  bal)cr»  —  U  ^  I  a  n  b. 

iVb^e. — English  too  is  translated  by  511  when  it  modifies  another 
adverb  or  an  adjective,  by  auc^  when  it  modifies  a  whole  clause  (as 
English  a?so) . 

Is  is  too  warm  for  you  ?    3ft  e«  3^uen  ;;u  rt)arm? 

/  think  so,  too.    !Da6  glaub'  id)  oitc^. 

Ah,  he  sleeps  too  long  a  time.     %(i),  ex  jrf)Idft  ju  lanqe  ^e\\. 

--  ^  a  n  e  r  ^  ( c  b  c  n. 

Exercises. 

101.  (a)  1.  Illustrate  with  sentences  the  different  Ger- 
man equivalents  for  English  at.  2.  Illustrate  with  sen- 
tences the  German  equivalents  for  English  to.  3.  For 
English  with  and /or  (§§  5,  8,  15,  1,  a,  98,  2,  and  100,  3). 

(b)  1.  Find  in  §  15,  1,  6  an  example  of  §  100,  4,  Note ; 
in  §  15,  2,  Z>  of  §  97,  2;  in  §  27  of  §  99,  2;  in  §  28,  2  of 
§  99,  3.  2.  Find  in  §  33  an  illustration  of  §  97,  1 ;  in 
§  41,  2  of  §  99,  3 ;  in  §  47  of  §  99,  1 ;  in  §  50,  3  of  §  100, 3. 
3.  Find  in  §  76,  3  an  illustration  of  §  99,  3 ;  in  §  85,  2,  Note, 
of  §  99,  3. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize :  1.  ^et  folc^em 
SBetter  mug  man  gu  $aufe  btetben.  2.  9}?etner  S[RetnuTi(j 
nad)  ift  e^  3U  wcit,  su  guf?  3U  ge^en.      3.  ($r  ift  au^  ^Itnerifa^ 


82 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§  102. 


abcr  er  njo^nt  bet  einer  beutfrfien  gatniUe.  4.  ^a6:)  3e()n 
9Jitnuten  ge^en  n)ir  oon  ^ter  nac^  §aufe.  5.  ^c^  toaxtt 
fc^on  fett  jtDiJlf  U^r  auf  bid).  6.  T)a«  trirb  oon  ben  anberen 
t)iel  beffer  getan  tDerben. 


102.  (a)  1.  According  to  his  story  ((grja^(ung)  he  was 
from  Linden  near  (§  95,  1)  Hannover.  2.  What  has 
become  of  the  dress  that  you  had  made  by  my  tailor? 
3.  Since  last  fall  we  have  lived  (use  pres.  tense)  with  [the] 
Browns.  4.  In  (§  95,  2)  such  a  crowd  it  is  hard  to  walk 
home  from  the  theatre.        5.   It's  after  half  past  ten ;  I'm 

going    to    bed.  6.    What 

did  you  get  from  your  father 
for  your  (iise  def.  art.)  birth- 
day? 

(b)  1.  For  (§  98,  2)  three 
days  he  has  stayed  (use  pres.) 
at  home  with  (§  95,  3)  his 
parents.  2.  In  (§  97,  3)  my 
opinion,  we  ought  to  go  home 
with   you   after   the    theatre. 

3.  Tell  us  of  the  man  who 
told  you  he  was  from  Berlin. 

4.  Since  last  fall  I  have  lived 
(pres.)  in  Schoneberg  near 
(§  95,  1)  Berlin.  5.  In 
such  weather  I  like  to  stay 
at  home  with  my  friends. 
6.  Did  I  tell  you  of  my  new 
clothes   that   were    made   by 

your  tailor  for  (§  100,  3)  two  hundred  marks  ?  * 

(c)  Tlie  Women  of  Weinsberg.  —  1.  According  to  an  old 
story  the  city  of  Weinsberg  was  besieged  by  Konrad   of 


i 

•V.  ♦* 

^.»'*, 

■'■                    ■-"'.V"'  '"^ 

19.  The  Octagonal  Tower  of 
Weibertreu. — This  is  the 
highest  part  of  the  ruin;  it 
stands  near  the  center  of  the 
park. 


Chap.  13.]  PREPOSITIONS    WITH  DATIVE.  83 

Hoheustaufen.  2.  After  a  long  siege  the  fortress  near 
Weinsberg  had  to  surrender.  3.  Konrad  told  the  people 
that  the  women  might  (§  75,  1)  come  out  of  the  fortress 
with  all  that  they  could  carry.  4.  When  the  messenger 
with  this  message  came  to  the  women,  they  went  out  of  the 
fortress  on  foot  with  their  husbands  on  their  (def.  art.) 
backs.  5.   The   ruin   of    the   fortress   is   now   a   park. 

6.  When  I  asked  a  girl  by  whom  it  was  kept  up,  she  told 
me :  "  By  the  women  of  Weinsberg." 


A 


CHAPTER   XTV. 
PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

Der  Sdngerfricg  auf  6er  XPartburg. 

103.  ^t^  gegett  ha^  ^nbe  be^  WxtteMttx^  befc^aftigten 
fic^  bie  beutfc^en  fitter  t)iel  mtt  ber  X)ic^t!unft.  :5}iefe 
T)tc^ter  fangen  i^re  !i^teber  unb  iDurben  be^^alb  yj^innefdnger 
genannt.  :Der  Sanbgraf  Hermann  t)on  Xl)urmgen,  ber  auf 
ber  SBartburg  iDoljnte,  \}atU  eine  befonbere  iBoriiebe  fiir  biefe 


20.  The  Singers'  Hall  at  the  Wartburg. — Scene  of  the  Singers' 
Contest.  On  the  wall  of  the  raised  alcove  at  the  back  are  written  the 
songs  of  the  principal  contestants. 

84 


Chap.  14.]         PREPOSITIONS    WITH  ACCUSATIVE.  85 

SfJltntte [anger  unb  jetc^nete  fic^  burc^  gro^e  ®aftfrei^eit  gegen 
fie  au§. 

Qm  3a^re  1204  tjeranftaUete  er  ben  Befannten  ^^anger- 
!rteg"  auf  ber  SKartburg,  an  bem  atk  bebeutenben  SJ^inne- 
fdnger  teilna^men^  diner  fuc^te  ben  anberen  in  fetnen 
ii^iebern  ^n  ubertreffen.  ®egen  t>a^  (5nbe  be§  gefte^  trat 
ein  fc^tanfer  danger  anf,  ber  fo  tpnnbertioK  fang,  ha^  man 
il)m  ben  "ipret^  guer!ennen  mu^te.  '^a^  irar  SSalt^er  tion 
ber  il^oge(n)etbe,  o^ne  3^^^f^^  ^^^  beliebtefte  t)on  aden  Winnt^ 
fangern.  3?on  it)m  fc^rteb  etn  befannter  T)tc^ter  fpater: 
„$err  Saltier  t)on  ber  3SogeItt)eibe,  njer  ben  Dergage,  tdf 
nttr  (eibe." 

Syntax. 

104.  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative. — ^The  common- 
est prepositions  with  the  accusative  are  :  bt^,  burcf),  fitr, 
gegen,  o^ne,  urn,  lt)tber. 

5(tt  cinctt  ^rcuttb. 

'^nv^  bid)  ift  iiic  SBcIt  mir  fdjijit,  oljuc  bid)  miirb^  id)  fie  ^affcn ; 
^i\v  bid)  (cb^  id)  jjattj  aUcin,  urn  bid)  t»iU  id)  gertt  crbtaffctt, 
^cgctt  bid)  foU  fein  5Bcr(cumbcr  mtgcftroft  fid^  jc  bcrgel)tt» 
aSibcr  bid)  fein  g^cinb  fid)  maffncu  ;  it^  mitt  bir  5«r  ©cite  ftcl)tt. 

—  9^  a  m  I  e  r. 
Notes. 

105.  Historical  Note.  —  The  Minnesanger  (SD^innc,  love)  began  to 
flourish  under  the  Hohenstaufen  Emperors.  These  minstrels  were 
usually  well  born,  sometimes  of  noble  birth,  and  they  attached 
themselves  to  the  great  lords,  whose  guests  they  entertained.  In 
return  the  great  lords  honored  and  rewarded  them ;  in  fact, 
Walther  von  der  Vogelweide  (1160-1230)  received  an  estate  (fief) 
from  Emperor  Frederick  11.  Though  Latin  was  still  the  official 
language  of  church  and  state,  the  everyday  tongue  was  German 
(Middle  High  German),  and  in  this  the  Minnesanger  composed 


86  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  108. 

their  songs.  The  tale  in  §  103  is  not  absolutely  true.  There  are 
many  conflicting  stories ;  the  most  authentic  account  of  the 
"  Sangerkrieg "  says  that  Wolfram  von  Eschenbach  won  through 
Walther's  help. 

106.  Prepositions  with  it  (them)  and  which. 

(1)  When  referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  ba'(r)  is  used 
with  prepositions  instead  of  a  pronoun :  with  it,  bamit ;  for 
it,  bafiir  ;  out  of  it,  barau^  ;  against  it,  bagegett. 

(2)  When  referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  tt)O'(r)  is 
used  with  prepositions  instead  of  an  interrogative  or  relative : 
after  which,  tvouad) ;  of  what,  n)ot)on  ;  through  which,  iDOburc^  ; 
about  what,  itjoruttt  ? 

Note.  —  Stumer,  bi§,  and  o^nc  do  not  combine  with  ba  or  \vo,  and 
tt)ibcr  does  not  combine  with  hjo.  With  these  a  form  of  bcrjelbc  is 
generally  used  for  the  personal  pronoun  and  a  form  of  hjcl(^er  for  the 
relative  or  interrogative. 

107.  83t^  is  used  alone  and  with  other  prepositions. 

(1)  When  used  alone  bt§  usually  refers  to  time  and 
means  till  or  until. 

ril  wait  for  you  till  twelve  o'' clock. 

^&\  wartc  auf  bir^  bt^  jwiitf  Uljr. 

Until  this  day,  oh,  was  that  good,  was  it  reasonable  9 

SiiS  bicfctt  Xajj,  o  war  ba^  gut,  wor'^  biUig?  — @cI|iUcr. 

(2)  In  connection  with  other  prepositions  bi6  often  refers 
to  space  and  means  as  far  as. 

ril  go  along  as  far  as  the  corner.     S?i^  tttt  btc  @rfc  gc^^  id)  mtt. 
And  lo,  I  am  with  you  alway,  even  unto  the  end  of  the  world. 
Unb  fie^e,  i(^  bin  bet  eu(^  aUc  ^age,  btS  an  ber  9Be(t  @nbc. 

«lbel,  aWatt  28,  20. 

108.  ^ur(3^  is  practically  always  English  throughy  and  as 
such  presents  no  special  difficulties. 


Chap.  14.]         PBEPOSITIONS   WITH  ACCUSATIVE. 


87 


21.    The  Wartburg  at  Eisenach. — The  most  famous  and  interesting 
castle  in  Germany. 


The  river  remains  turbid  that  has  not  gone  through  a  lake,  the 
heart  troubled  that  has  not  passed  through  woe. 

^cr  f^ltt^  hUiht  tvnh,  ber  ttit^t  burd^  cincit  <Sce  gcgangcn,  ha§ 
^ers  uttlautcr,  bajg  nir^t  burd)  ctn  938c^  gcgangctt*  —  @  o  e  1 1)  c. 

109.  gw^^  is  used  regularly  for  English,  for  and  in  a  few 
other  expressions. 

(1)  i^nt  may  translate  many  meanings  of  for. 

Is  that  for  me  9    ^ft  btt§  fiir  ttttd)  ? 

TFi^ai  do  you  take  me  for  f    SSofiir  I)a(tcn  @tc  mid)  ? 

^wd  wow:  ?/ow  y^ave  good  precepts  enough  for  to-day. 

Unb  nutt  \\(iU  t^r  fiir  bicfctt  ^ag  ^vAt  Scljrctt  gcnug,  —  @  t  o  r  m. 


88  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  ill. 

(2)  In  idioms  the  meaning  of  fUr  varies. 

Day  by  day,  year  by  year,  piece  by  piece. 

XaQ  fitr  Xa^,  ^a\}v  fitr  ^a\)v,  BtM  fiir  Stiirf. 

Are  you  interested  in  music  9    ^ntcrcfficrcn  Sic  fid)  fiir  SWufif  ? 

0,  Fm  an  ardent  admirer  of  Wagner. 

3tdj,  id)  fd^tndrmc  fitr  SBagner* 

Man  by  man  to-day  weUl  redden  the  iron  with  blood. 

SBir  tuoUen  ^tuit  Wann  fitr  Waww  tttit  '^Xvii  '^a^  @ifen  riitctt. 

—  Strnbt. 

110.  ©cgctt  usually  means  against  or  fo,  toward. 

(1)  The  meaning  against  is  usually  literal  or  concrete. 

^e  ran  against  the  door.     Gr  ratttttc  fiCflCIt  bic  J^iir. 

/«  rai>>  she  held  her  met  hands  against  her  burning  rherks. 

Umfonft  t)telt  fte  bie  ttaffett  ^dttbe  de^en  bie  brennenbcn  SBanoen. 

~  ''O  C  I)  j  f . 

(2)  (?^egen  means  toward,  to,  usually  in  a  figurative  or 
abstract  sense. 

He  arrived  tovmrd  evening.    (Sr  ift  flcnctt  5(bcttb  nuncfommcn. 

Toward  friends  be  modest,  toward  yourselves  be  strong  and  firm. 

^cgctt  f^rcunbc  fcib  bcfd)ctbcn,  gegcn  citd)  fetb  ftrcng  uitb  fcft. 

—  .^"^  e  V  b  c  r. 

111.  Ultt  usually  means  around,  for,  or  at. 

(1)  When  um  is  used  for  around,  about,  the  adverb  '^erum 
may  follow  the  object  of  um. 

He  went  around  the  garden.     @r  gtltfl  ttm  bcit  ©ttrtcit  (Ijcrttm). 
Bound  about  the  light,  white  house  gardens  were  laid  out. 
Um  bttiS  lctd)tc,  wci^c  ^an^  l|critm  marctt  ©ortcn  aitgclcgt. 

—better. 

(2)  Utn  meaning  for  is  usually  figurative. 

We  donHplay  for  money.    9Bir  f^tetcit  nid)t  ttm  @c(b. 

IdonH  care  for  any  one.    ^d)  ftlmittcrc  mid)  ttiit  fctttctt.  —  ^ct)f  c. 

Note.  —  In  German,  to  compete  at  anything  is  to  do  it,  um  bie  2Bctte, 
for  a  wager ;  to  row  a  race,  um  blc  SSctte  rubcrn ;  to  run  a  race,  um 
bte  SBcttc  (aufcn. 


Chap.  14]         PBEPOSITIONS    WITH  ACCUSATIVE.  89 

(3)  Um  meaning  at  is  confined  to  expressions  of  time  : 

At  lohat  time  loill  you  come?    Uttt  ttltCDtel  UI|r  foitttticn  @tc  ? 

So  it  was  at  eight,  so  at  nine,  so  at  ten  o'' clock. 

@o  toav  t§  ttttt  ac^t,  fo  um  ncun,  fo  nm  $cl|tt  XL^v.  —  @  e  r  ft  a  c!  e  r. 

112.  SBiber  differs  nowadays  from  gegett  in  that  it  is 
used  only  in  a  figurative  sense.  Hence  it  is  much  less 
common  than  gegetl.  In  the  literal  use  of  against,  see 
gegen,  §  110,  1. 

He  did  it  against  his  will.    @r  I)at  c§  ttJibcr  fctitcn  SSSiUcn  gctait. 

Thoii  shalt  not  bear  false  witness  against  thy  neighbor. 

^u  foUft  nii^t  fttlfr^(cg)  Bcugni^  rcbcn  mibcr  bciuctt  Mrfjften. 

^  — 33ibel,  2  moU,  20,  16, 

113.  English  all  is  usually  rendered  in  German  by  gatlj 
or  att* 

(1)  ©anj  is  used  only  in  the  sense  of  entire,  the  whole, 
taking  all  as  a  unit.  As  an  adverb  it  means  quite,  in  the 
original  sense  of  entirely.  Before  neuter  names  of  cities  or 
countries  it  is  indeclinable. 

All  Berlin  was  astir.    @an5  S3cr(ttt  War  auf  ben  93ctttcn» 
I  dreamed  all  night,     ^d)  ^ttbc  btc  gaitjc  9lati}t  gctrftumt. 
Are  you  quite  well  again?    @tttb  @ic  Wtcbcr  Qatl^  toof^l? 
For  every  whole  work  one  needs  a  whole  man. 
3u  jcbem  ganjcn  aScrf  ge^ort  tin  ganger  aWann.  — 9tu(f  ert. 

(2)  5l((  is  used  for  all  in  other  cases,  usually  referring  to 
each  and  every  one  of  a  group.  It  may  be  indeclinable 
before  ber,  btefer,  or  a  possessive. 

7s  that  all  9    ^ft  t^^^  ^V^t^  ? 

7/iave  read  all  these  books,    ^d^  Ijabc  aU(e)  btcfe  83ii(^cr  gclcfcn. 

All  good  things  come  in  threes  {of  all  good  things  there  are  three'). 

WXtx  guten  ^ingc  finb  bret.  —  ®|)rid)rtJort. 

If  he  only  had  half  of  all  the  blows  ! 

^Mt  cr  nur  crft  bte  ^alftc  uoit  alien  ben  Srf)Iogen!  — ^effing. 


90  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§115. 

Exercises. 

114.  (a)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  103  illustrate  the  use 
of  prepositions  with  the  accusative  ?  2.  Make  sentences 
illustrating  the  uses  of  at  and  for  as  treated  in  §§  109 
and  111.  3.  Find  in  §  15,  1,  a  an  illustration  of  §  111, 
2 ;  in  §  26,  1  and  in  §  39,  2  of  §  106,  1. 

(b)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  !Da^  a((e^  tat 
er  tDiber  fetnen  SStKen.  2,  ^egett  ge^n  U^r  f)abe  ic^  bie 
gauge  (Sette  Uberfe^t.  3.  ^^  intere[ftere  mtc^  fiir  bie 
beutfc^e  £)per,  aber  ic^  fc^tDarme  fiir  ^eet^ot)en.  4.  $?efen 
@te  h\^  iMX  niit^ften  *Sette!  5.  Urn  bret  U^r  fu^r  \&j  burc^ 
bie  ^i(x\ii  bi^  an^  Xor.  6.  giir  bic^  iDlirbe  ic^  um  bie  gauge 
Sffielt  reifeu, 

115.  (a)  1.  We  all  went  on  foot  through  the  deep  wood 
as  far  as  (to)  the  little  village.  2.  Shall  we  begin  at  eight 
o'clock  or  toward  nine  ?  3.  We  (§  57)  have  to  answer 
questions  against  our  will  all  the  time.  4.  Hermann 
fought  against  Varus  till  late  in  the  evening.  5.  Round 
about  them  lay  all  their  dead  friends.  6.  Will  you 
please  ask  for  some  more  ink  for  me  ? 

(p)  1.  All  the  city  voted  for  him  against  the  old  man. 
2.  For  heaven's  sake,  don't  go  through  the  wood  at  mid- 
night. 3.  All  right  (fc^ou),  I  will  go  around  the  wood 
as  far  as  (to)  the  gate.  4.  At  what  time  did  he  get  it  for 
you?  5.  Have  you  any  objections  {literally,  anything 
against  it)  if  we  go  through  your  garden?  6.  He  sat 
all  day  and  thought  of  the  stories  we  had  told  him. 

(c)  The  Singers'  Contest  at  the  Warthurg.  —  1.  Toward 
evening  on  a  beautiful  day  in  the  year  1204,  one  could  hear 
songs  resound  through  the  Wartburg.  2.  It  was  the 
Minnesingers,  who  were  singing  for  a  prize.         3.   Around 


Chap.  14.]         PREPOSITIONS    WITH  ACCUSATIVE.  91 

the  wide  hall  there  were  (§  85,  2)  chairs  and  benches  on 
which  (§  106,  2)  all  the  guests  could  sit.  4.  All  the 
evening  the}^  sang,  and  there  was  (§  85, 1)  a  beautiful 
wreath  for  the  best  singer.  5.  Some  voted  for  Walther, 
and  some  against  him.  6.  We  (§  57)  do  not  know 
exactly  who  got  the  wreath. 


^^ 


CHAPTER  XV. 

PREPOSITIONS  WITH   THE    DATIVE    OR    ACCUSATIVE 

Icurnberg. 

116.  Unter  atten  beutf^en  <Stdbten  mirb  man  in  ^liirnberg 
am  metften  an  ha^  Wxtttlaittv  ertnnert.  S^  Uegt  auf  betben 
Ufern  ber  ^egni^,  bie  ^tutfi^en  ben  atten  v^dufern  ba^infliegt. 
^od)  je^t  umj^eben  bie  alten  geftung^mauern  bie  ^tabt,  unb 
Winter  i^nen  fie^t  man  bie  alten  @ebaube  emporranen.    Unb 


1 

m. 

^^^ 

1^^ 

MLjffmi 

■9^ 

'  -^'-  ^^P77^lV.3Hh 

^^^^^r 

^liHH^K^j^H 

j^^l 

■BK^-i^MME 

'^^^^r^n 

^^^Kfl| 

^^E^^^SI 

■y 

mH| 

HRRi  3h^i^||r3 

M 

^^IKi^'  'i^^^^^^^^B 

22.  The  Pegnitz  at  Nuremberg.  —  Notice  the  fortifications  and  the  way 

the  wall  with  its  covered  passage  is  carried  over  the  river. 

02 


Chap.  15.]       PBEP08ITI0NS    WITH  TWO   CASES.  93 

toenn  man  ^eute  auf  ben  ^oben  be^  aften  —  {e^t  trocfenen 
—  geftung^graben^  ^inunterblid t,  fie^t  man  ©ebiifc^  nnb 
^(umen  bort. 

§ier  in  bte[er  tntereffanten  (BtaU  blii^te  im  3Jiitte(a(ter 
bte  ^nnft.  §ter  matte  t^or  me^r  a(^  t)ter  ^nnbert  3^^^^^^ 
5l(bre^t  X)urer ;  ()ier  fangen  bie  3)Zetfterfanger ;  l^ter  ma^te 
ber  gutmiitige  §an^  (Bad)^  @i^n^e  nnb  @ebtc^te,  beibe  nac^ 
SO^ag,  nnb  ^ter  gengen  nod)  ^ente  bie  fd)5nen  -^anten  beg 
WxtttMttH  t)on  bem  ^nnftfinn  nnb  bem  9?ei(^tnm  ber 
:^iirger  9^urnberg«^. 

Syntax. 

117.  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative.  —  The 
prepositions  which  take  either  dative  or  accusative 
are ;  an,  anf,  l^inter,  in,  neben,  itber,  nnter,  t)or,  gnjtfcfien. 
They  take  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  question,  where  ? 
too?  and  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  question 
whither?  n)o^tn?  In  other  words,  the  end  or  direction 
of  motion  is  indicated  by  the  accusative ;  rest  or  the 
place- of  motion  by  the  dative. 

He  walked  into  the  room. 

@r  ging  in  ba^  ^twiner  (direction  of  motion) . 

He  walked  up  and  down  in  the  room. 

@r  ging  in  bem  ^t^mcr  mtf  unti  ab  (place  of  motion). 

He  sat  in  the  room. 

©r  fa^  in  bem  Btmmer  (rest). 

I  stood  on  high  mountains  and  looked  into  the  deep  valley. 

^d)  ftanb  auf  Ijo^en  23ergen nnb  f al)  tn§  tief c  Xal  —  ^ o If 8 It e b. 

(1)  The  above  rules  apply  only  in  concrete  cases. 
In  figurative  uses  —  that  is,  when  neither  rest  nor  motion 
is  expressed  —  these  prepositions  usually  take  the 
accusative.  3ln,  anf,  and  itber  are  the  most  common  in 
figurative  use.     Review  §§8  and  41,  1. 


94  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  119. 

They  laughed  at  my  story.    @tc  Ijabcn  ubcr  mcinc  ®cf(l)td)tc  gclad)t. 
DonH  count  on  what  is  in  the  future^  don'' t  figure  on  what  has  been 
promised ;  don't  complain  about  what  has  been  lost,  and  donH  think 
of  what  has  been  broken. 

3lttf  MttftigciS  redone  nid^t,  \xnts  ^mV  ni(l)t  ouf  SBcrf|)rod)nc^ ;  !(ag^ 
Mm  ^ttUxMt^  tttt^t  unb  bcttr  nx^i  aw  ^txhxodi^nt^.  —  9iucfert. 

Notes. 

118.  Historical  Note.  —  Nuremberg  received  its  freedom  from 
Frederick  II  in  1219.  From  that  time  on,  the  busy  city,  freed 
thus  from  political  interference,  built  up  a  flourisliing  trade. 
Safely  guarded  by  massive  walls  and  wide  moats,  its  prosperous 
burghers  devoted  their  time  not  only  to  commerce  but  to  litera- 
ture and  art  as  well.  Thus  Nuremberg  came  to  be  the  industrial 
and  artistic  centre  of  Germany,  the  home  of  many  Mastersingers. 
These  Mastersingers  were  so  called  because  .they  learned  poetry  as 
a  trade.  This  poetry  was  made  according  to  fixed  rules,  and  these 
had  to  be  mastered  by  the  apprentices,  who  later  became  journey- 
men, and  finally  masters.  Thus  poetry  became  a  trade  like  car- 
pentry or  shoemaking,  and  the  masters  of  it,  instead  of  being 
master-carpenters  or  master-shoemakers,  were  master-singers^ 
bie  3)^eifterjanger. 

119.  5(n  has  several  English  renderings. 

(1)  In  indicating  position,  an  means  to  or  at  (the  side  of). 
It  suggests  closer  proximity  than  bet  and  neben. 

I  wrote  on  the  blackboard,    ^dj  fdjricb  ait  bic  S9?aitbtnfcf. 

I  wrote  at  the  blackboard,     ^c^  fd|ricb  aw  bcr  ifi^anbtafcl. 

The  mother  sat  by  the  fire ;  a  boy  stood  at  her  knees,  two  daiighters 
pressed  up  close  to  her.  ^\t  ,t>nM^fratt  fa^  am  ^'Cucr ;  ctn  ^nabc  fianb 
an  il)rcn  ^ntcn,  jwci  X^H^itx  braitfltcn  fid)  ait  fie  Ijcrait.  — @oetl)f. 

(2)  The  commonest  verbs  with  which  an  is  used  in  close 
connection  are:  benfen,  to  think  of;  (^tauben,  to  believe  in; 
fic^  fietDiJl)nen,  to  get  used  to;  fid)  erinnern,  to  remember;  and 
fd^retben,  to  write  to.  Notice  that  they  contain  an  idea  of 
mental  motion  toivards;  hence  the  accusative. 


Chap.  15.]      PEEPOSITIONS    WITH  TWO   CASES.  95 

I  must  lorite  to  my  mother,    ^d)  mu^  an  tticitte  SWuttcr  fd^rctliett. 

So  I  think  of  my  distant  love. 

So  bctt!^  id)  ait  tncin  fcrnc^  fiicli*  —  ^  a  u  f  f. 

Note.  —  Some  verbs  take  an  with  the  dative.  The  commonest  are  : 
3tt)eifeln,  to  doubt ;  fterben,  to  die  (of)  ;  orbeiten,  to  work  {at) ;  and 
leiben,  to  suffer  (from). 

(3)  When  used  with  adjectives,  an  usually  means  m; 
arm  an,  poor  in;  xdd)  an,  rich  in;  k^m  an,  lame  in.  Here 
it  takes  the  dative. 

There  sat  a  proud  king,  rich  in  land  and  victories. 
^ort  fa|  citt  ftoljcr  tiinig,  an  iiaitb  nnh  (Sicgcn  rcid^.  — Utjtanb. 
Strong  in  mind,  tveak  in  body,  sits  the  aged  Kaiser  Budolf 
^iaxl  an  (SJcift,  an  Scibc  fr^wad),  fi^t  ber  grcifc  ^aifcr  IHttbolf, 

—  ^'  e  rn  e  r. 

Note.  — For  am  with  the  superlative  see  §  218,  1.  In  special  cases 
an  varies  both  in  meaning  and  in  the  case  it  takes. 

On  Tuesday,  in  the  evening,  in  the  morning,  on  the  first  of  January. 

%m  2)tcngtag,  am  3lbenb,  am  9)Jorgen,  am  erften  3anuar. 

In  the  sky,  am  §immel  (im  §immet  means  in  heaven). 

Ifs  my  turn  now.     3e^t  ift  bte  9tci^e  an  mir. 

A  bird  by  its  song,  a  man  by  his  gait,  a  fool  by  his  words,  we  recog- 
nize everywhere  (at  all  places). 

(Sinen  SSoget  am  @ang,  einen  9JJann  am  ®ang,  einen  2^oren  an  ben 
SBorten  erfennt  man  an  alien  Orten.  —  ©pri^mort. 

120.   5(uf  has  several  English  translations. 

(1)  When  denoting  position,  auf  means  upon,  on  top  of. 

We  were  sitting  on  a  bench.    2®ir  fa^Ctt  auf  ctttcr  S3attf, 
We  sat  down  on  a  bench.    2Bir  fc^tcn  ttn§  auf  cine  S3ttn!. 
My  glance  fell  upon  the  captain,  whose  eyes  rested  upon  the  boy. 
Wtxn  S3Itrf  fid  auf  bctt  ^au^ttnantt,  bcffcn  ^tugcn  auf  bem  ^nabcn 
ttt^tctt.  —  SBitbenbrud). 

(2)  The  commonest  verbs  with  which  auf  is  used  are: 
antmorten,  to  answer,  reply  to;  ^offen,  to  hope  for;  ^ord^en, 
to  listen  to;  rec^nen,  to  count  on;   fid)  tjertaffen,  to  rely  on; 


96  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  121. 

ad)ttn,to  pay  attention  to;  tvavttn,  to  wait  for.     With  these 
it  takes  the  accusative. 

You  can  count  on  me.    @ic  fonnctt  auf  midj  rcd)nctt. 

I  listened  to  the  field-song. 

^d)  !l)ord)tc  auf  ben  ^clbgcfang.  — 2;iecf. 

(3)  The  commonest  adjectives  with  which  auf  is  used  are 
ftolg,  proud  of;  bbfe,  angry  at;  neibtft^,  envious  of;  auf- 
tnerffatn,  mindful  of.     Here  it  takes  the  accusative. 

He  was  proud  of  his  voice.    @r  ttiar  ftolj  auf  fciuc  8timme. 
I  was  right  angry  at  myself  for  not  being  able  to  be  angrier  at  you. 
S^  uiar  re(t)t  bof^  auf  mi(^,  ba^  id^  auf  ($u(^  nit^t  bofer  merbcn 
foutttc.  —  @  0  e  1 1)  e. 

iVb^e.  —  (a)  In  many  special  cases  auf  means  in  or  at  with  the 
dative  and  to  with  the  accusative.  Chief  of  these  are  :  auf  bcm  or 
bag  ?anb,  m  or  to  the  country ;  auf  bcr  or  bic  ^oft,  a«  or  to  the  post- 
office  ;  auf  bent  or  bcu  S3aU,  at  or  to  a  ball  {dance)  ;  auf  bem  or  ben 
53al)nl)of,  at  or  to  the  station ;  auf  bcr  or  bie  Uuioerfttat,  at  or  to  the 
university  (of  students  ;  of  professors,  aw.)]  and  auf  bem  or  baS  ®^IoB, 
at  or  to  the  castle. 

(b)  Other  comjnon  uses  to  which  no  definite  rule  applies  are : 
In  German,  auf  beutfd^  ;  in  this  way,  auf  biefe  SBeije ;  at  any  rate, 
auf  allc  ^dlle ;    by  no  means,  auf  feiueu  gall ;  for  to-morrow,  auf 
morgeu ;  for  next  week,  auf  na(i)fte  Sod)e ;   abroad  {on  travels),  auf 

9leijeu. 

/t  can  oijZy  be  said  in  Greek. 

@«  tafjt  fic^  uur  auf  griedjifd)  jageu.  —  SS  i  e  t  a  u  b. 

121.  3^11  usually  means  in  when  used  with  the  dative,  and 
into  with  the  accusative.  In  a  few  expressions  its  meaning 
varies. 

I  was  in  town,  in  church,  in  school,  in  the  theatre. 

^d)  war  in  bcr  8tabt,  tn  bcr  ^ird|c,  in  bcr  8d|u(c,  tm  ^Ijcatcr. 

I  am  going  to  town,  to  church,  to  school,  to  the  theatre. 

Sd)  0c^c  in  bic  @tabt,  in  bic  ^ird)C,  in  bic  ®d)ufc,  ini^  Xl)catcr. 

Whom  God  wishes  to  show  .special  favor,  lie  sends  into  the  tcide 
world;   to  him  he  shows  his  wonders  in  mountain,  loood,  .stream,  and 

field.    aScm  Q^oit  ttJiU  rcdjtc  (iJunft  crnicifcn,  bcu  fdjicft  cr  in  bie 


Chap.  15.]       PREPOSITIONS    WITH   TWO   CASES. 


97 


23.    Hans  Sachs'  Statue  at  Nuremberg. 

tocitc  995c(t,  bcm  ttittt  cr  fciuc  SBunbcr  wcifcit  in  Serg  mtb  ^ait>  unb 
Strom  ttttb  ?^c(ii,  —  (S  i  d)  e  ii  b  o  r  f  f. 

Note.  —The  expressions  jur  ^irc^e,  jur  @d)ute  suggest  regular  at- 
tendance with  a  purpose,  while  the  above  use  with  in  refers  usually 
to  a  particular  act.     See  §  100,  1. 


98  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  125. 

122.  9le6en  means  beside,  but  not  so  near  as  an.  As  we 
seldom  wish  to  specify  so  closely  in  English,  an  and  neben 
may  be  used  interchangeably  in  most  cases  referring  to 
places. 

Who  sits  by  you?    SBcr  ft^t  ncbctt  ^luntn  ? 

Close  beside  the  inn  stood  the  old  church. 

^icl)t  ttcbcn  bcm  26trt§I)aufc  ftanb  bic  aitt  ^ird)c.  —  ©crftarfer. 

123.  iibcr  is  used  literally  and  figuratively. 

(1)  When  used  literally  iibet  means  over,  above,  across. 

Over  all  hilltops  is  rest.    Ubcr  alien  dJi^fcIn  ift  JRu^.  —  @  0  c  1 1)  e. 

With  arms  crossed  over  her  breast  she  stepped  down  aci'oss  the 
court.  Wlit  iibcr  bcr  ^ruft  gcfrcujten  3lrmcn,  fdjntt  fie  uber  ben  ^of 
Ijinttb,  —  (Storm. 

(2)  Figuratively  liber  usually  means  about,  and  takes  the 
accusative. 

What  were  you  talking  about  ?    SBornber  f^rad)en  ®te  ? 
'"''One  can  laugh  about  all  that  now,'''  he  continued. 
„Uber  \ia^  aUe§,"  fnljr  tx  fort,  „fonn  man  je^t  Jadjcn." 

—  SBilbcnbrucf). 

Note.  —  liber  is  also  used  for  by  way  of,  in  3(i)  fa^rc  iiber  ^Berlin. 
It  means  from  in  such  expressions  as :  a  week  from  to-day,  a  year 
from  to-day,  Ijeutc  iiber  ad)t  %(i^t,  t)eute  iiberS  (or  iiber  ein)  3a^r. 

124.  Untcr  means  under  or  among. 

I  have  that  among  my  books,    ^a^  l^abe  id)  nnter  meinen  IsBiirfjern. 

Neither  do  men  light  a  candle  and  put  it  under  a  bushel,  but  on  a 
candlestick.  Wnn  fjiinbet  and)  nidjt  ein  fiid)t  an  unb  fc^t  t^  nnter 
eincn  8d)effe(,  fonbcrn  anf  eincn  iiend)ter.  —  ^  i  b  c  I,  3JZ  a  1 1.  5,  15. 

126.  f8ot  is  used  literally  meaning  before  and  figuratively 
in  various  meanings. 

(1)  Literally  tior  is  used  with  both  dative  and  accusative 
and  means  before,  in  front  of. 


Chap.  15.]      PREPOSITIONS   WITH   TWO   CASES.  99 

We  rode  in  front  of  the  castle.  993ir  rtttett  t)or  ba§  @d^to^. 
By  the  spring  in  front  of  the  gate  there  stands  a  linden  tree. 
Sim  Srumictt  tior  bcm  %r>xt  \i(i  \it\)i  ein  iiinbcubaum.  — aRiiUer, 

(2)  Figuratively  t)or  is  used  with  the  dative  in  many 
senses,  usually  with  expressions  implying  a  certain  state 
of  mind.     See  also  §§4  and  25. 

She  got  red  with  anger.    (Sic  ttiurbe  rot  tior  ^^xxt, 

I  warn  you  of  the  danger,    ^t^  ttiarnc  bit^  tior  bcr  (IJcfaI)r» 

Tou  jump  for  joy.    ^u  I)tt^f  eft  \a  tior  ^rcubctt,  —  d  ^  a  m  i  j  f  o. 

Exercises. 

126.  (a)  1.  Find  in  §  4  an  illustration  of  §  121 ;  in  §  8 
of  §  120,  2;  in  §  13  of  §  121;  in  §  18,  2  of  §§  119,  1  and 
121.  2.  Find  in  §  23,  1  an  illustration  of  §  120,  3,  Note 
h  and  §  119,  1;  in  §  25  of  §  125,  2;  in  §41,  1  of  §119,  2;  in 
§  50,  2  of  §  121.  3.  Find  in  §  85,  2  an  illustration  of 
§  121 ;  in  §  85,  2,  Note,  of  §  123,  1 ;  in  §  88,  Note,  of  §  121. 

{h)  1.  In  the  illustrations  in  §  126,  a,  above,  give  the  case 
following  each  preposition  and  the  reason  for  it.  2.  Illus- 
trate with  sentences  the  uses  of  at,  to,  and  for  in  this 
chapter. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize  :  1.  !^a^  ift  rtc^tig  ; 
®ie  fdnnen  [ic^  barauf  Derfaffen.  2.  5luf  feinen  gait  tPoHen 
iDtr  iiber  ^o^ton  fa^ren.  3.  5(uf  ber  UniDerfitat  mu^  man 
Dor  aden  1)ingen  an  bte  5lrbeit  benfen.  4.  ^6)  ):)(xht  m\6) 
noc^  nic^t  baran  getDi5^nt.  5.  gr  n)ar  fo  b5fe  auf  mic^, 
\>(x^  er  rot  t)or  3^^^  tfurbe.  6.  5luf  morgen  tt)o((en  xoxx 
bie  (Seite  101  lefen. 

127.  (a)  1.  He  was  sitting  at  the  window  on  a  bench. 
2.  I  sat  down  beside  her  in  an  arm  chair.  3.  What  are 
you  laughing  about?  4.  I'm  not  laughing;  I'm  trem- 
bling with  anger.         5.   Among  all  the  books  in  the  library 


100 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§  127. 


there  is  nothing  about  the  singers'  contest  at  the  Wartburg. 
6.   On  the  first  of  July  I'm  going  to  the  country. 

(b)  1.    I  am   used  to  paying  attention  to  ray  teachers. 

2.  Are  you  afraid  of  ghosts,  or  don't  you  believe  in  them? 

3.  We  went  across  the  street  and  sat  down  in  front  of  the 


24.   The  Wall  and  Moat  at  Nuremberg. 


old  house  beside  the  church.  4.  At  any  rate  she  will 
not  be  very  angry  at  us.  5.  We  sat  by  the  spring  in 
front  of  the  gate  and  listened  to  the  birds  under  the  trees. 
6.  A  week  from  Monday  (§§  119,  3,  Note,  and  123,  2,  Note) 
we  shall  be  on  that  high  mountain. 

(c)  A  Letter.  (See  §  296,  Note.)  —  1.  Dear  Mother :  Here 
we  are  in  Nuremljerg,  where  we  are  constantly  reminded  of 
the  Middle  Ages.         2.   AVe  arrived  early  in  the  morning 


Chap.  15.]       PREPOSITIONS    WITH   TWO   CASES,  101 

and  went  across  the  old  moat,  under  the  gate  between  the 
beautiful  buildings,  and  listened  to  the  river  which  flows 
through  the  town.  3.  Then  we  went  to  the  old  castle 
by  way  of  the  market,  where  on  market  days  there  is  much 
in  which  you  would  be  interested.  4.  In  front  of  the 
castle  is  a  very  deep  well,  and  beside  a  church  is  a  little 
tavern  called  the  "  Bratwurstglocklein."  5.  When  one  is 
travelling  in  Germany  one  ought  above  all  to  visit  Nurem- 
berg. 6.  You  can  depend  upon  it  that  you  will  be  wild 
about  it.     Your  loving  daughter. 


'i^''^.^i' 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
REVIEW. 

128.  The  particle  fc^on  is  used  in  German  not  only  to 
translate  English  already,  but  in  other  cases.  See  also 
§  228,  2. 

(1)  Whenever  the  idea  of  already  enters  a  sentence, 
German  uses  f(^on.  It  is  not  necessarily  translated  in 
English. 

Have  you  been  in  Germany?    SBarctt  Sic  fd|on  in  T)Ctttf(I)Iani)  ? 
/  have  translated  twice,    ^d)  l)abc  fd)on  jwctmat  iiberfc^t. 
He  had  gone  out  of  the  room. 
@r  war  f djon  an^  bcr  ©tube  gcgattgcn,  —  2B  i  I  b  e  n  b  r  u  rf). 

(2)  (Scroti  is  also  used  when  the  sentence  contains  an 
idea  of  future  accomplishment.  It  may  be  translated  in 
English  by  all  right  or  rieverfear, 

ril  he  there  on  time,  all  right. 

^d)  iDcrbc  fdjoit  pr  rcd)tctt  3ctt  ba  fcin. 

He'll  pass,  never  fear.     @r  ttJtrb  fd)Ott  licrfc^t  Wcrbcm 

We'' II  find  the  others  all  right. 

2Bir  fittbcn  btc  anbcrcn  fd)Ott.  —  ®  t  o  r  m. 

You  shall  hear  nothing  further  from  me,  never  fear. 
^tt  f oUft  f c^ott  ntt^tiJ  lotcbcr  bott  mir  l|iircn.  —  §  c  t)  j  e. 

Exercises. 

129.  (a)  1.  Make  a  table  of  all  the  German  equivalents 
for  English  at  that  have  been  treated  in  Chapters  XIII, 
XIV,  and  XV  and  illustrate  them  with  sentences.        2.  Do 

102 


Chap.  16.]  REVIEW.  103 

the  same  for  the  German  equivalents  of  English  to.  3.  For 
the  German  equivalents  of  English  for. 

(b)  1.  Apply  the  general  rule  for  order  (§  37,  Note)  to 
prepositional  phrases.  Illustrate  with  one  or  more  sen- 
tences. 2.  How  does  German  translate  it  and  which  fol- 
lowing a  preposition?  Illustrate  with  sentences.  3.  Are 
there  any  exceptions  to  the  preceding  answer?  If  so,  give 
them  with  illustrative  sentences. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  iBitte,  tDarten 
(Ste  einen  Slugenbltd  auf  mid^ ;  ic^  tuerbe  fc^on  baran  benfeti. 

2.  5Baren  (Ste  fc^on  auf  bem  ^anbe?  3.  §aben  ®te 
etma^  bagegen,  itjenn  tc^  burc^  -3^ren  (Garten  ge^e?  4.  Sir 
^aben  frf)on  t)te(e  ^Vdm  auf  morgeu  iiber  ac^t  Xage.  5.  5lu 
mem  ift  bte  9f^et^e?  6.  5luf  feiuen  gad  bltrfen  @te  fo 
barauf  autttjorten. 

130.  (a)  1.  All  these  people  are  from  Schoneberg  near 
Berlin.  2.  In  such  weather  we  ought  not  to  go  afoot  as 
far  as  to  the  castle.  3.  We  stayed  all  summer  in  a  little 
village  beside  a  broad  lake.  4.  Among  all  my  friends 
there  aren't  any  to  whom  I  write  year  by  year.  5.  This 
man  was  so  angry  at  the  other  that  he  went  across  the 
street  every  time  he  met  him  (begegueu  with  dat.). 
6.  Who  is  to  blame  (@^u(b  baran)  that  you  did  not  write 
to  your  mother  on  Sunday  ? 

(6)  1.  We  climbed  onto  the  mountain  by  way  of  a 
narrow   path   between   two   large   rocks.  2.   Above   all 

(§  125,  2)    she  wishes   a   dress   of   silk  for  her  birthday. 

3.  When  he  came  back  to  his  friends  he  hadn't  any  money 
with  him.  4.  In  my  opinion  we  cannot  go  from  here  as 
far  as  to  the  castle  before  seven  o'clock.  5.  In  such  rain 
I  go  out  of  the  house  only  against  my  will.         6.   At  four 


104  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  130. 

o'clock  we  shall  go  across  the  river  and  before  five  we  shall 
be  up  (oben)  on  top  of  the  mountain. 

(c)  1.  At  Nuremberg  there  were  many  old  houses  in 
which  we  were  all  interested.  2.  Toward  sunset  I  went 
across  a  wide  river  where  I  rested  till  night.  3.  After 
dinner  will  you  go  to  town  with  me  by  way  of  the  old 
church?  4.  A  week  from  (§  123,  2,  Note)  to-day  I'll 
write  to  you  about  my  trip  to  Berlin.  5.  Have  you  any 
objections  (anything  against  it)  if  I  go  with  you  from  the 
hotel  as  far  as  to  the  post-office  ?  6.  We  must  wait  for  him 
till  to-morrow,  as  he  has  all  the  money  for  us  with  him. 


CHAPTER   XVII. 
INSEPARABLE  VERBS. 

Die  Bud^brucferfunft. 

131.  Urn  ba^  3a^r  1450  erfanb  ^^o^ann  (Gutenberg  in 
9)2ain3  bie  ^uc^bruderfunft,  bie  fii^  f(f)ne((  iiber  ganj  !5)eutfi^^ 


25.  Statue  of  Gutenberg  at  Mainz.  —  In  the  background  rises  the 
famous  Mainz  Cathedral,  historically  one  of  the  most  interesting  in 
Germany. 

105 


106  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§  133. 

latib  t)erbrettete.  Wan  etnpfanb  em  (eb^afte^  ^ntereffe  fiir 
bie  neuen  ^itc^er,  unb  ber  ^eruf  eine^  ^ucf)brucfer^  erfc^ten 
toieten  aU  fe!)r  tjerlocfenb. 

ObH)of)(  btefe  llunft  ntd)t  in  ^^iirnberg  entftanb,  fo  trat 
biefe  (Stabt  boi^  fe^r  balD  an  bie  ^pii^e  be^  ^uc^I)anbe(^. 
§ier  ht^a^  5lnton  ^^berger  bie  cjrdjte  "Druderei  in  gan^ 
(Suropa,  benn  er  befrfiaftigte  ^unbert  @efe((en  mit  ber  ^ebie= 
nung  feiner  Dierunb3rt)an3ig  ^reffen.  ^i^  1504  ^atte  er 
liber  gtDei^unbert  ^er!e  gebrudt,  unb  um  fie  gu  oerfaufen, 
burc^reiften  feine  3lgenten  gang  !Deutfd)(anb. 

Syntax. 

132.  Inseparable  Prefixes.  —  The  commonest  insepa- 
rable prefixes  are  be,  em^,  ent,  er,  ge,  ntig,  t)er,  ger*  They 
are  never  accented ;  in  fact,  in  ordinary  conversation 
they  are  pronounced  only  as  "grace  notes."  Verbs 
compounded  with  these  particles  are  conjugated  exactly 
like  their  corresponding  simple  forms,  except  in  tenses 
with  the  past  participle.  They  form  the  past  participle 
without  the  prefix  ge:  befe^fen,  befaf)!,  befo^Ien;  erga^Ien, 
ergii^fte,  ergd^ft. 

,  Let  him  who  possesses  learn  to  lose. 
393cr  befi^t,  ber  Icrnc  bcrlicrcn.  —  @  d)  i  1 1  c  r. 

And  there  is  no  neio  thing  under  the  sun. 

Mttb  gcfdjicljt  ttid)tfii  Is^icucci  uutcr  ber  Sonne. 

—  33ibcl,  ^rebiqer  @  a  torn  on  is  1,  9. 
Duty  fulfilled  is  always  still  felt  as  debt. 
erfiiUte  *^flid|t  em|)finbet  fic^  immer  no(^  a\&  ®d|u(b.  —  @oet^e. 

Notes. 

133.  Historical  Note.  —  After  the  fall  of  the  Hohenstaufens, 
the  next  great  imperial  family  was  the  house  of  Habsburg. 
Rudolph,  the  first  of  the  line  (1273-1291),  abandoned  the  Italian 
policy  of  his  predecessors  and  devoted  his  energies  to  Germany. 


Chap.  17.]  INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  107 

He  insisted  that  all  official  documents  and  proclamations  be 
written  in  German  (instead  of  Latin  as  heretofore)  and  thus 
helped  to  develop  the  German  language.  But  the  greatest  boons 
to  the  German  tongue  were  to  be  the  invention  of  printing  and  the 
Protestant  Reformation.  When  manuscripts  had  to  be  laboriously 
copied  by  hand,  books  were  rare,  nor  were  they  of  the  kind  to 
appeal  to  the  people.  But  Gutenberg's  invention  brought  them 
within  reach  of  all,  while  Luther's  writings  furnished  matter  of 
compelling  interest. 

134.  It  must  be  clearly  understood  at  the  outset  that  it  is 
impossible  to  give  a  definite  meaning  in  all  cases  to  insep- 
arable prefixes.  The  following  notes,  which  partially  cover 
the  commonest  uses,  may  help  students  to  acquire  some 
feeling  for  the  more  important  meanings. 

135.  S3e=  has  usually  one  of  three  meanings. 

(1)  It  may  merely  strengthen  a  simple  verb :  befe^en,  to 
look  at  {carefully),  bebeuten,  to  mean  (exactly),  be^alten,  to 

keep. 

What  does  that  mean  ?    933a§  Bcbcutct  btt§  ? 

ril  visit  yon  this  very  week. 

^d\  bef ud)c  end}  in  bief cr  SBodjc  nod).  —  ^et}\t. 

(2)  ^t^  may  mean  to  provide  ivith  the  thing  indicated  by 
the  root  of  the  verb:  befratt^ett,  to  provide  with  a  wreath; 
befletben,  to  provide  with  clothes;  befc^irmen,  to  provide  with 
protection;  bebedetl,  to  (provide  with  a)  cover. 

Keep  your  hat  on,  sir  {cover  yourself). 

S3cbcrfett  @tc  fid),  rttctn  ^crr. 

Do  you  leant  happiness  made  happy,  reward  rewarded  9 

893oUt  \\)x  ba^  QMM  bcgtiirft,  ben  ^ii\)\x  htU\\\\i ?  —  ^auptmann. 

(3)  :53e'  may  simply  make  transitive  an  intransitive  verb : 
ftagen,  to  complain  —  beflagen,  to  mourn;  ftegen,  to  win  — 
beftegen,  to  conquer;  reifen,  to  travel  —  bereifen,  to  travel 
through,  to  "do";  tDeinen,  to  weep  —  belDeitien,  to  bemoan, 


108  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  137. 

weep  for;  ga^fen,  to  pay  out  money — beja^fen,  to  pay  some- 
body; antnjorten,  to  (make)  answer —  beotlttDorten,  to  answer, 
reply  to. 

Why  don't  you  answer  ?    993arum  ontttiortctt  @ic  md|t  ? 

IcanH  answer  the  question.    '^^  fatttt  btc  f^raflc  md)t  beanttuorten. 

To  make  war  on  oneself  is  the  hardest  fight,  to  conquer  oneself  the 
finest  victory.  @id|  fclbft  bcfncflcit  tft  bcr  fdjttierftc  ^ricg ;  ftc^  fclbft 
beftegen  ift  bcr  frfjonftc  ®icg,  —  ?  o  g  a  lu 

136.  ©nt=  usually  has  one  of  two  kindred  meanings. 

(1)  It  denotes  the  becoming,  the  beginning  of  an  action, 
often  in  a  figurative  sense :  etltfte^en,  to  arise  (figurative, 
begin  to  starid)  ;  entbretttiett,  to  flame  up  (figurative,  begin  to 
bum)  ;  entbUi^en,  to  blossom  out  (begin  to  bloom). 

He  is  afiame  with  love  for  her.    @r  ift  mit  fiicbc  p  i^r  etttbrannt. 

There  arose  a  great  hubbub. 

@§  entftanb  ctn  gro^c^  ^aW^,  —  3S  i  I  b  e  n  b  r  u  d). 

(2)  From  this  idea  of  passing  into  another  state  comes  the 
idea  of  separation',  which  is  now  the  commoner  meaning: 
entlaufen,  to  run  away;  enterben,  to  disinherit;  ent5te!)en,  to 
draw  away;  etttne'^men,  ^o  take  from.  Compare  bemdffem, 
to  water,  with  entluaffem,  to  drain. 

Many  quotations  are  taken  from  Goethe's  works. 

SBtcIc  Bittttc  fiitb  6JoetI|e^9!Bcrfctt  enhtommctt. 

A?id  when  itfiees.,  belief  also  flees  away. 

Uttb  flic^t'^,  cntflicl|t  bcr  ©laubc  oud).  —  ^  a  u  p  t  m  a  n  n. 

Note.  —  Before  f,  ent=  becomes  cmp^ :  em^fc^lcn,  to  recommend ; 
cm^ftnbcn,  to  feel;  cm|3fangen,  to  receive;  but  in  all  these  cases  it  has 
lost  its  original  meaning. 

He  is  received  with  joy  in  the  springtime. 

6r  n)irb  im  IVnj  mlt  lUift  cmpfangen.  —  9^  u  a  1  i «. 

137.  G^r=  comes  from  an  old  root  meaning  out ;  hence,  to 
the  end,  thoroughly.     Compare  English  tired  out.     It  usually 


Chap.  17]  INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  109 

contains  the  idea  of  finality,  accomplishment,  sometimes 
success;  ermitbett,  to  tire  out;  erfinnen,  to  recall  (think  out)  ; 
erfinben,  to  invent  (find  out) ;  erretd)en,  to  reach  (out  and  get)  ; 
erfennen,  to  recogriize  (know  thoroughly). 

I  shouldn't  have  recognized  you.    ^rf)  IjSttc  @tc  bot^  ttit^t  erfattttt. 
But  finally  he  let  himself  he  persuaded  after  all. 
©ttblir^  lic^  cr  fit^  obcr  bot^  crbittcn*  —  ®  t  o  r  m. 

138.  @C=  meant  originally  completeness,  or  a  being  together, 
but  its  meaning  is  almost  entirely  lost,  except  that  it  occurs 
regularly  as  the  prefix  to  the  past  participle. 

Pm  glad  to  do  it.    @§  tft  gcnt  gcfr^eljctt* 

Enjoy  what  God  has  allotted  to  you ;  be  glad  to  do  without  what 
you  have  not.  ^enic^c,  ttitt^  bit  %t^ii  Iieff^ieben,  ctttbcl)rc  gem,  ttia^ 
bunid)tl)aft  — ©ellert. 

139.  S'Jlift^  means  defective,  false,  had,  ivrong:  mi^Oer^ 
fte^en,  to  misunderstand  ;  tnigtingen  (from  gelingen,  to  suc- 
ceed) ,  to  fail. 

I  misunderstood  that,    ^a^  I)abc  i(^  mi^ticrftanbcn. 

And  a  councilman  of  Breisach  abuses  his  {Durer''s)  favorite  pupil 

like  a  rascal!    Uttb  cin  ^(ii^\)txv  tJon  S3rcifa(^  mipanbclt  fcinen 

fiicbltttg^ft^tilcr  ttiic  cincn  Sc^uft !  —  §  i  U  e  r  n. 

140.  ^tt'  is  the  most  puzzling  of  the  prefixes,  but  it 
usually  has  one  of  three  meanings. 

(1)  The  old  root  meaning  is  on,  to  the  end:  tjerge^ett,  to 
X>ass  (of  time,  to  go  on  to  the  end);  t)er^(Ien,  to  die  away 
(of  sound,  to  sound  to  the  end);  t)erfd)(tngen,  to  swallow 
(entirely). 

How  the  time  flies !    2Btc  ft^ncU  ticrocl)t  bic  ^^xi ! 

The  last  tones  have  died  away.    %\t  Ic^tCtt  Xdnc  fittb  bcr^ttttt 

—  S^antijjo. 

(2)  Thus  t)er*  comes  to  mean  beyond  the  end,  into  a  dif- 
ferent or  opposite   state :    Dera^tetl,  to  despise  (ac^tett,  to 


110  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  142. 

honor);  t)erbieten,  to  forbid  (gebieten,  to  bid) ;  Derlernen,  to 
unlearn  ((emett,  to  learn) ;  t)er!aufen,  to  sell  (faufen,  to  buy). 

Betrayed  and  sold.    ScrratCtt  unb  Ocrfauft,  —  @prid)tt)ort. 
It  is  easy  to  put  things  out  of  tune,  but  not  every  one  can  put  them 
in  tune,    ^erftitttmett  ift  ltiti)t,  ahtv  ftimmen  fann  nt(^t  jeber. 

—  S3brnc. 

(3)  So  tjer*  comes  finally  to  have  the  meaning  not 
necessarily  opposite,  but  just  wrong,  false.  In  this  sense 
it  is  often  reflexive:  fic^  t)erfel^en,  to  see  wrong;  firf)  t»er- 
f  pred^en,  to  misspeak,  to  say  wrong  ;  t)er!ennen,  to  mistake  for 
some  one  else;  t)erfiif)ren,  to  lead  astray;  t)erbre^en,  to  twist, 
to  give  a  wrong  meaning  to. 

Excuse  me,  I  misspoke  I    SJcr^ctljCtt  Sie,  id)  ^abc  mi^  Uerf^roi^ett* 
DonH  sit  about  too  long,  don't  lie  around  too  much,  donH  fly  too 

high.    S^erft^^  bid)  ux^i,  tjcdicg^  V\&\  nid)t,  ^u  \!^f>&i  l|inou§  Dcrflicg^ 

bid)  ntd)t»  —  (S  d)  e  f  f  e  (. 

Note.  —  But  there  are  countless  words  with  t)er=  to  which  none  of 
these  meanings  can  be  traced.  Nor  can  one  foretell  the  meaning  of 
\}tX'  in  any  given  case.  For  instance,  ad^tcn  means  to  esteem  and  cl^ren 
means  to  honor,  but  t)crad)ten  means  to  despise,  while  tjcrc^rcn  means 
to  honor  exceedingly.  So,  too,  tterfpred^en  means  to  promise,  ftd) 
Oerfpre^en,  to  misspeak  ;  berfjeben  with  the  dative,  to  forgive,  with  the 
accusative,  to  give  away.     Read  again  §  134. 

141.  ^tX'  regularly  means  separation,  destruction,  to  pieces : 
^tVYti^tXlf  to  tear  to  pieces;  itrhvcdjCXlf  to  break  to  pieces ;  ger* 
ftOren,  to  destroy  (disturb  to  pieces). 

I  smashed  my  cup.    ^d)  I)abc  mciuc  Xaffc  5crbrod)Cit» 

The  halls  are  destroyed.    1)ic  fallen  finb  jcrftijrt,  —  lU)  I  a  n  b. 

Exercises. 

142.  (a)  1.  Point  out  the  illustrations  of  inseparable 
prefixes  in  §  131.  2.  Explain  those  that  can  be  explained 
according  to  the  Notes  in  this  chapter.  3.  In  what 
way  do  inseparable  verbs  differ  from  simple  verbs  ? 


Chap.  17]  INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  Ill 

(6)  1.  Find  and  explain  according  to  the  Notes  (§§  134- 
141)  the  examples  of  inseparable  verbs  in  the  following 
sections :  §  15,  2,  b,  Note  b,  §  23,  1,  §  27,  §  28,  1,  §  43,  1. 

2.  In   §  51,   1,    §  58,   1,   §  66,    §  69,   2,    §  73,   2,   §  76,   3. 

3.  In  §  92,  §  100,  2,  §  104,  §  113,  1,  §  117,  1,  §  119,  3,  Note, 
§121. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  (^te  l^abetl  e§ 
n)o^(  t)ergeffen,  ober  ^aben  ^k  e^  tni^tierftanben?  2.  ^er* 
3eif)en  (Ste  mtr;  icf)  ^abe  mic^  Derfproc^en.  3.  @^  gefc^ie^t 
(serves)  i^m  re^t,  enterbt  gu  tuerben.  4.  3<(^  empfinbe 
ein  (eb^aftee  ^ntereffe  bafiir.  5.  ^ijnnen  (Ste  fic^  nt^t 
erinnern,  itja^  ba^  bebeutet?  6.  Senn  @ie  ba^  be^atten, 
fo  miiffen  (Sie  me^r  beja^Ien;  ic^  hjitrbe  e^  tierfaufen,  U)enn  e^ 
mtr  ge^drte. 

143.  (a)  1.  He  didn't  succeed  in  remembering  what  the 
sentence  meant.  2.  Don't  tear  up  that  piece  of  paper ; 
keep  it  to  cover  your  German  grammar.  3.  There  arose 
such  a  noise  that  one  could  hardly  recognize  one's  own 
voice.  4.  Have  you  heard  to  whom  the  big  house  be- 
longs ?  5.  I  misunderstood  the  waiter  and  paid  him  too 
much.  6.  I  can  recommend  these  chairs;  they  are  of 
oak  and  you  can't  break  them  easily. 

(b)  1.  The  thief  succeeded  in  getting  away  with  a  great 
deal  of  (t)ie()  money.  2.  The  man  complained  of  his 
loss,  but  later  he  forgot  it  entirely.  3.  Kriemhilde  re- 
ceived Siegfried  and  crowned  him  with  a  wreath,  when  he 
reached  Worms.  4.  It  often  happens  that  pupils  who 
have  forgotten,  claim  (bel)aupten)  that  they  misunderstood 
the  question.  5.  If  you  twist  the  sentence  so,  I  cannot 
help  (§  39,  2,  Note)  misspeaking.  6.    The  time  passed 

so  rapidly  that  we  did  not  succeed  in  reaching  the  top  of 
the  mountain. 


112  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  143. 

(c)  John  Gutenberg.  —  1.  When  Gutenberg  invented  the 
art  of  printing,  people  did  not  feel  any  particular  interest 
in  it.  2.  They  paid  him  very  little  and  he  did  not 
succeed  in  showing  others  what  his  invention  meant. 
3.  But  when  they  recognized  its  importance  there  arose 
great  competition.  4.  In  Nuremberg  the  biggest  print- 
shop  belonged  to  Anton  Koberger.  5.  Only  a  little  time 
passed  before  thfe  art  of  printing  had  spread  over  all  Ger- 
many. 6.  And  we  must  not  forget  that  we  owe  this  to 
Gutenberg. 


CHAPTER   XVIII. 
SEPARABLE  VERBS. 

2llbred?t  Purer* 

144.  T)er  groBte  beutfc^e  ^itnftler  bee  Wxtttlalttr^,  ^U 
hxtd)i  !Durer,  ^at  fic^  burc^  feitie  n)unbert)o(Iett  ©emcilbe 
auegejetc^net.  5l(e  ^iingling  hjanberte  er  nad)  ^talten  aM, 
n)o  er  titele  Orte  befuc^te  unb  ftc^  an  ben  bebeutenbften  (Bt'dU 
ten  ber  ^unft  eifric;  in  ber  SO^alerei  itbte.  5^a^  eintger  ^tit 
!el)rte  er  in  fein  33ater(anb  ^nrltd  nnb,  aU  er  in  ^f^iirnberg 
eintrof,  ^eic^nete  fic^  feine  ^unft  burc^  i^re  griftf)e  unb, 
':)?aturtreue  aue.  ($r  irurbe  t)om  ^aifer  aj^a^imitian  freunblic^ 
oufgenommen,  befam  aber  !eine  ©tettuncj. 

^eine  (^emcilbe  finben  n)ir  in  alien  bebeutenben  ©aterien, 
aber  nirf)t  nur  ale  SO^aler  fc^ci^en  mir  i^n  fo  ^o^»  @elten  ^at 
fic^  ein  9J^a(er  gu  gteirfjer  ^eit  auc^  bur^  folcfje  tjorgiigli^en 
fupferftidie  unb  ^ot^fc^nitte  auege^eic^net,  \vit  !5)itrer  ee 
getan  ^at.  Unb  abgefel)en  mn  alt  feiner  funftlerifc^en  ^e* 
beutung  mar  er  au^  ein  angefe^ener  ^itrger  t)on  ebtem 
(Sf)ara!ter,  auf  ben  gan^  !i:)eutfc^Ianb  mit  ^ec^t  ftof^  fein  !ann 
unb  ftol^  ift. 

Syntax. 

145.  Separable  Prefixes.  —  The  Separable  Prefixes  in- 
clude all  tliose  not  inseparable,  that  is,  all  except  those 
mentioned  in  the  last  chapter.  They  may  be  (1)  prepo- 
sitions, as  an  and  aue  in  an^ie^en,  to  put  on;  aue^ie^en, 
to  take  off;  (2)  adverbs,  as  ^in  and  Dorbei,  in  ^inge^en, 

113 


114  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§  145. 


26.    Portrait  of  Albrecht  Durer.  —  Painted  by  the  artist  himself. 


Chap.  18.]  SEP AB ABLE   VEBBS.  115 

to  go  {away)  ;  tiorbeige^en,  to  go  hy,  to  pass  ;  or  (3)  nouns, 
as  $au^,  in  ^au^^atten,  to  keep  house;  ^iaii,  in  ftattfinben, 
to  take  place* 

146.  German  is  partial  to  separable  verbs,  especially 
in  conversation.  If  two  verbs  have  the  same  meaning 
and  one  is  separable,  this  one  is  usually  preferred  in 
talking,  though  the  other  may  be  used  regularly  in 
more  formal  language.  For  instance,  one  sees  signs  on 
doors  :  „T)k  ^iir  fc^Uegt  t)on  fetbft,"  and  in  trains  :  „^xttt 
bie  Znv  nid)t  ju  offnen,  bet)or  ber  3ug  pit,"  and  in  theatres  : 
„^te  ^orftellung  (performance)  begtnnt  um  oc^t  U^r." 
But  in  conversation  Germans  say  regularly  :  „SKolIen 
@ie  bttte  bie  Xiir  jumai^en?"  „(gr  mac^te  ba^  genfter  auf," 
„SSann  fctugt  bie  33orfte((ung  an?" 

147.  Separable  verbs  have  three  peculiarities. 

(1)  For  simple  tenses  (present  or  past)  in  independent 
clauses  the  prefix  is  put  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  except 
that  a  complementary  infinitive  follows  it. 

It  now  begins  to  dawn.    @^  fangt  tttttt  an,  ju  taQtn*  —  g  o  u  q  u  e. 

The  people  is  aroused,  the  storm  breaks  loose. 

^a^  S5otf  ftc^t  auf,  ber  Sturm  Wx^t  to^»  —  Corner. 

(2)  For  simple  tenses  in  dependent  clauses  the  prefix 
is  attached  to  the  verb,  just  like  an  inseparable  prefix. 

He  is  not  so  stupid  as  he  looks. 

er  ift  nidjt  f o  t>nmm,  wic  cr  au§ftel)t.  — @:pri(^tt)ort. 

Who  doesnH  go  ahead,  goes  back. 

893cr  ttid)t  tJorangcljt,  Ummi  swriirf.  —  @  o  e  t  ^  e. 

(3)  For  compound  tenses,  whether  in  dependent  or 
independent  clauses,  the  prefix  precedes  the  verb  and 
is  attached  to  it.     When  the  infinitive  with  ju  is  used, 


116  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  149. 

gu  (like  ge  in  the  past  participle)  comes  between  prefix 
and  verb. 

iShe  stopped  reading  aloud.    Bit  l)at  oufgc^iirt,  tiorjurcfen. 

A  thing  put  off  is  never  done. 

5lttfgcfd)otiCtt  ift  ttidjt  aufgcljobcn.  —  ®^ric^tt)ort. 

Though  time  may  have  flown,  memory  never  yields. 

^ft  bic  3cit  autt^  tjingcfioncn,  bic  ©rinncrung  ttictdjct  nic.  —  U t) la n b. 

Notes. 

148.  Historical  Note.  —  After  the  death  of  Rudolph  of  Hahshurg 
(1291),  half  a  dozen  different  families  furnished  emperors,  but  in 
1438  the  crown  fell  again  to  the  Habsburgs  and  from  then  on 
remained  in  that  family.  The  most  interesting  and  romantic  of 
the  Habsburgs  was  Maximilian  I  (1493-1519),  "the  last  of  the 
knights,"  the  patron  of  Diirer  (the  Kaiser  Max  in  Hillern's  ^o^er 
al^  bie  ^irc^e).  Under  him  a  noble  effort  was  made  to  reconstruct 
the  Empire  and  to  modernize  Germany,  but  it  failed  because  of 
the  petty  jealousies  among  the  German  states,  of  which  there  were 
at  that  time  between  three  and  four  hundred. 

149.  ,§tn  and  f|cr»  Nearly  all  German  verbs  of  motion 
are  compounded  with  the  adverbs  l)tn  and  ^er  to  denote 
direction  of  motion. 

(1)  §in  means  motion  away  from  the  speaker,  \)tx  motion 
toward  the  speaker. 

There  he  goes,    ^a  gcl|t  cr  l)tn. 

Is  she  coming  across  >•    i^ommt  fie  Ijcritticr  ? 

Whither  thou  goest,  I  will  go. 

993o  btt  l)ingcl)cft,  tta  miU  id)  au^  l)iugcl)ett,  —  33ibel,  $RutI)  l,  16. 

(2)  §in  unb  l^er  means  to  and  fro,  hither  and  thither,  and 
is  usually  treated  as  an  independent  adverb,  rather  than  as 
a  separable  prefix. 

He  ran  hither  and  thither.    @r  tft  l)in  unb  l)cr  gclaufcn. 
Wretched  thoughts  tore  him  hither  and  thither. 
^ammertiolle  (^ebanlcn  riffcn  i^n  l)in  unb  ^er.  —  (^  r  e  t)  t  a  g. 


Chap.  18.] 


SEPARABLE   VERBS. 


117 


27.    Albrecht  Durer's  House  in  Nuremberg. 


118  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  150, 

Note.  — The  difficulty  with  l^in  and  l^cr  lies  in  the  fact  that  in  Eng- 
lish we  have  no  equivalent  word  to  translate.  The  idea  is  contained 
in  our  verb,  but  German  adds  a  word  of  direction,  which  we  forget  to 
use  when  we  put  our  English  thoughts  into  German.  But  especially 
with  ge^en  and  fommen  it  is  easy  to  get  the  habit  of  using  ^tn  and  ^cr. 
These  phrases  should  be  practised  till  they  become  second  nature. 

Come  up,  come  over,  come  here. 

fommen  @te  ^erauf,  fommen  ®ic  ^eriiber,  fommen  @te  l^ierl^cr. 
Go  up,  go  across,  go  out. 

®elien  @le  f)inauf,  ge!)en  @ie  f)miiber,  gel^en  @ic  l^tnauS. 
He  came  no  one  knows  whence,  he  loent  no  one  knows  whither. 
©r  fam,  unb  niemonb  meife  ttjo^cr ;  er  ging,  unb  niemanb  roeife  tt)oI)tn. 

—  Jcjfttig. 

150.   English  place  has  several  German  renderings. 

(1)  ^er  Ort  (bie  Orte  or  bte  Orter)  is  used  for  a 
definite  place  in  a  broad  sense,  as  one  might  refer  to  a  city, 
a  field,  or  any  large  space. 

That  is  a  pretty  place.    'iSai^  ift  citt  ^iibft^cr  Ort. 

This  truth  changes  according  to  time  and  place. 

^icfc  933al)rl|eit  mcri^fclt  nnrfi  3cit  unb  Oxt  —  53  i« m a  r  cf. 

(2)  '^tx  ^lci%  (bie  ^rS^e)  usually  means  (a)  public  square, 
(6)  room,  in  the  sense  of  space,  (c)  a  seatf  at  the  theatre  or 
in  a  similar  place.     It  rarely  means  place. 

{a)  I  saw  him  in  the  Paris  Square. 

^(^  I)obc  tl|n  auf  bcm  ^arifcr  ^lo^  jjcfcl|cn. 

That  spreads  abroad  through  streets  and  square. 

^aS  bringt  in  btc  393citc  burd)  ©affcn  unb  ^la^.— U^tanb. 

(6)  Have  you  room  enough  f    .^abctt  <3ic  ^tn^  flcnufl  ? 
There^s  room  for  us  both  in  the  sea. 
(&^  ift  ^ta^  fiir  wnS  bctbc  im  9Kccr.  — $e^fe* 

(c)  Is  this  seat  taken  ?    ^ft  bicfcr  ^(a^  bcfcgt  ? 
Young  L.  stood  erect  in  his  seat. 
^o«  flcinc  2.  ftonb  nufrcdit  ouf  fciitcm  ^lo<?. 

—  SBilbeubruc^, 


Chap.  18.]  SEPARABLE   VERBS,  119 

N^ote.  —  In  poetry,  ber  9laum  is  regularly  used  for  roonu'm  the  sense 
shown  in  (&). 

Give  room  [make  way'] ,  ye  peoples.  @ebt  9laum,  i^r  35otf  er.  —  3)  a  I)  n. 
In  the  smallest  hut  there  is  room  for  a  happy  loving  pair. 
SfJaum  ift  in  ber  ficinften  ^iitte  fitr  ein  gliidtid)  Uebenb(e«)  ^aar. 

—  ©(^itlcr* 

(3)  jDie  'Stette  means  p/ace  in  a  narrow  ^qh^q,  d^  particular 
place,  more  as  English  uses  spot. 

I donH  understand  this  place  (passage). 

^tcfc  ©telle  tjerftel)e  idj  ttid)t. 

7  s/iowZd  rfo  lY  on  the  spot.    ^(^  tatc  t^  auf  bcr  @tcUe,  —  ^  r  e  t)  t  a  g» 

(4)  ^te  (Stedutig  means  place  in  the  sense  of  position, 
either  an  actual  position,  a  figurative  one,  or  a  job. 

The  maid  doesnH  like  her  new  place. 

^ie  neue  StcUuttfl  gefaUt  ber  9Kagb  tttd^t 

I  fear  that  the  ministers  have  got  into  an  awkward  place. 

^tt)  furi^tc,  i»a^  bic  9Jltitiftcr  lit  cine  fri)iefc  ©tellung  geraten  ftttb. 

—  ^i^morcf. 

Exercises. 

151.  (a)  1.  What  are  the  three  peculiarities  of  separable 
verbs  ?  2.  Which  of  these  three  peculiarities  is  illus- 
trated by  each  of  the  examples  of  separable  verbs  in  §  144  ? 
3.   Give  sentences  illustrating  all  the  uses  of  f)m  and  l^er. 

(b)  1.  Find  separable  verbs  in  the  following  sections : 
§  9,  §  15,  1,  b,  §  19,  2,  §  30,  1,  and  Note,  §  43,  1,  §  50,  2, 
Note,  §  62,  §  68,  4,  §  92,  §  111,  1.  2.  Which  of  the  three 
peculiarities  of  separable  verbs  does  each  of  the  sentences 
in  Question  (b)  1  illustrate  ? 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^attgetl  ©ie 
hodj  ntd^t  an,  U^  id)  aufge^ort  ^be!  2.  ^omtnen  (Bit 
fjerein;  t)ter  ift  noc^  t)iel  ^(a^.  3.  (5r  lief  ^in  unb  ^er, 
aber  er  fonnte  ben  Ort  nic^t  finben.        4.  ^c^  "i^aht  brei 


120  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§  152. 

^la^e  fiir  STann^aufer ;  troden  @te  tnttge^cn?  5.  2Bo 
ge^ftbu^tn?  ©^  ift  noc^  nic^t  3ett  an;jufangen.  6.  ^omm 
bod)  i)tv  unb  ^trf  mix ;  i^  tjerfte^e  biefe  ©telle  nic^t. 

152.  (a)  1.  As  I  sat  down  in  (auf)  my  seat,  the  teacher 
began  to  talk.  2.  There  he  goes  ;  when  do  you  think  he 
will  come  back  ?  3.  Eead  on  (meiter) ;  this  is  not  the 
place  where  the  exercise  stops.  4.  Come  here  and  look 
at  (anfel^en)  this  picturesque  little  square.  5.  How  do 
you  like  your  new  place,  and  when  does  your  work  begin  ? 
6.  I  shouldn't  think  (§  41,  1,  Note)  of  beginning  before 
Monday. 

(b)  1.  The  dog  ran  hither  and  thither  in  (auf)  the 
square.         2.  Where  are  you  going  and  when  do  you  arrive  ? 

3.  If  you  will  come  here  I  will  tell  you  of  my  new  place. 

4.  Is  this  the  place  where  you  want  to  have  your  house 
built  ?  5.  I  shouldn't  think  of  it  (§  41,  1,  Note)  ;  there 
isn't  room  enough  here.  6.  We  went  to  and  fro  and 
looked  for  a  more  comfortable  seat. 

(c)  Oerman  Picture  Oalleries. — 1.  When  one  begins  to 
speak  of  the  galleries  in  Germany,  it  is  hard  to  stop. 
2.  There  is  no  room  here  to  tell  of  all  the  places  where 
we  can  look  at  beautiful  paintings.  3.  The  best  are  prob- 
ably (tDO!^()  in  Berlin,  Dresden,  and  Munich  ;  these  places 
are  especially  distinguished  for  (bur(^)  their  galleries. 
4.  Every  year  great  art  exhibitions  take  place,  where 
countless  pictures  are  brought  together.  5.  The  Germans 
are  so  interested  in  art  that  thousands  go  (§  149,  1)  to  visit 
these  exhibitions.  6.  There  are  usually  so  many  people 
there  that  there  is  hardly  room  enough  to  look  at  the 
pictures. 


CHAPTER   XIX. 
COMMON  PREFIXES. 

Cutl}er  unb  6er  Ceufel. 

153.  TO  ^Jlaxtin  Sutler  ^rofeffor  an  ber  Unit)erfitat  gu 
Sittenberg  n)ar,  wurbe  er  iDegen  feiner  (Sc^riften  uerfolgt. 
5lber  feme  greunbe  unterftit^ten  i^n  unb  brac^ten  i^n  ^eim(irf) 
auf  ber  Sartburg  unter.    !Dort  fu^rte  er  feinen  ^lan  burc^, 


28.    Luther's  Room  at  the  Wartburg.  —  Sight-seers  are  said  to  have 

carried  away  the  inky  plaster  as  souvenirs. 

121 


122  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  154. 

ba^  9^eue  ^eftament  ou§  bem  ©ried^ifc^en  tn^  T)eutfc^e  gu 
iiberfe^en. 

2l(^  Sutler  auf  ber  $3artburg  bei  btefer  5lrbeit  luar,  ^at  er 
f{(^  fo  iiberarbeitet,  bag  er  tt)i(be  ^rugbilber  fat).  (5ine^ 
5lbenb^  gtaubte  er,  ber  Xeufet  fei  ba  unb  mode  i^n  umftricfen. 
T)a  trarf  ^ut^er  fein  XmtenfaB  bem  Xeufel  an  ben  llopf. 
^er  ^eufet  tjerfc^njanb,  aber  ber  glecf  an  ber  Sanb,  too  bie 
^inte  ^inf^ri^te,  ift  noc^  ^eute  ^u  fe^en. 

Syntax. 

154.  Common  Prefixes.  —  The  four  prepositions  burc^, 
iiber,  urn,  and  unter  may  be  separable  or  inseparable. 

(1)  They  are  separable  when  both  prefix  and  verb 
are  used  in  their  natural  meaning.  The  verbs  are  then 
often  intransitive,  take  the  same  auxiliary  as  the  simple 
verb,  and  have  the  accent  on  the  prefix.  Like  other 
separable  verbs,  they  take  ge-  in  the  past  participle  be- 
tween prefix  and  verb. 

(2)  The  prepositions  are  inseparable  when  used  in  a 
figurative  sense  or  one  not  exactly  literal.  The  verbs 
are  then  usually  transitive,  have  '^aben  as  auxiliary,  and 
take  the  accent  on  the  root  of  the  verb,  not  on  the 
prefix.  They  do  not  take  ge*  in  the  past  participle. 
The  inseparable  use  is  much  commoner  than  the  sepa- 
rable. 

One  who  is  already  soaked  through  boldly  lets  himself  get  rained  on. 

O^ne  8it)eu  burdjregnen  Vd^t  ber  ft(^,  ber  fd)on  gattj  burd^na^t. 

—  ©prlc^njort. 
He  only  wishes  to  instruct  you,  not  to  convince  you. 
9tnt  unterweifen  wiU  er  bid),  nidjt  ilberwetfen.  —  U  t)  ( a  n  b. 
No  one  who  doesnH  convince  himself  will  be  convinced  by  you. 
9liemanb,  ber  ftd|  nid|t  felbft  uberjeugt,  tuirb  oon  bir  Ubcr^cugt 
ttjerbcn.  —  ^^3 1  a  t  e  u. 


Chap.  19.]  COMMON  PREFIXES.  123 

Note. — When  the  preposition  has  an  object,  the  verb  cannot  be 
classed  as  separable.  3rf)  bin  burc^  ©eutfc^Ionb  gereift,  /  traveled 
through  Germany,  is  a  sentence  with  a  simple  verb  and  preposition. 
Scf)  ^abe  S)eutfrf)Iaitb  burrf)reift,  /  toured  Germany,  has  an  inseparable 
verb.  3c^  bin  bur(^gereift,  /  traveled  through,  illustrates  a  separable 
verb. 

I  translate  the  sentence.    3d^  iiberfe^c  ben  ©ai?  (inseparable). 

/  put  (ferry)  my  friend  across. 

3c^  'i^^e^  mcinen  ^rennb  iiber  (separable). 

I  put  (ferry)  my  friend  across  the  river. 

3c()  fct^e  meinen  ^reunb  iiber  ben  gln^  (simple  verb  and  preposition). 

3cf)  ^cibe  ben  @atJ  iiberfe^t  (inseparable). 

3d)  ^abe  meinen  ^reunb  iibergefe^t  (separable). 

3rf)  ^ciht  meinen  ^reunb  iiber  ben  gUi^  geje^t  (simple  verb). 

Notes. 

155.  Historical  Note.  —  Martin  Luther  is  known  as  the  "father 
of  the  modern  German  language."  Under  Emperor  Maximilian, 
efforts  were  made  to  establish  an  official  German  court  language 
in  place  of  the  many  existing  dialects.  All  official  documents  and 
proclamations  were  issued  by  the  imperial  chancery,  the  office  of 
the  Emperor's  chancellor,  in  the  language  of  Middle  Germany. 
But  this  language  was  by  no  means  common  till  the  popularity 
of  Luther's  works  spread  it  broadcast  through  the  land.  Luther 
wrote  :  "  I  have  no  certain,  special,  peculiar  language  in  German  ; 
I  use  the  common  German  tongue,  that  the  people  of  both  upper 
Germany  and  lower  Germany  may  understand  me.  I  speak  the 
official  Saxon  language  (i(^  rebe  naci)  bet  fdrf)fifd)en  cantjelet)  [tanjlei]) 
which  all  princes  and  kings  in  Germany  follow."     See  map,  p.  282. 

156.  The  phrase  into  German  is  usually  rendered  by 
W  ^CUtfd^C,  while  in   German  may  be   auf  beutfc^   or  tm 

What  is  that  in  German  ? 

9Bic  I)ct^t  t>a§  anf  bcittf^  (or  tm  ^cutfdictt)  ? 

Please  put  that  into  German. 

Bittt,  ilbcrfe^ctt  @ic  U§  in§  ^cutfd^c* 


124 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§  157. 


In  German  ice  lie  when  loe  are  polite. 
^m  ^ctttfd^cn  (iigt  man,  wcttit  man  I)oflid)  ift.  —  @  o  c  1 1)  e. 
In   German  ^'' world''''    is  a   woman,  in  Latin   she''s  a  man    (bic 
SBelt ;  mundus,  masc). 

5(nf  bctttf j^  ift  SBcIt  ctn  SBcib,  latcinifd)  ift  fie  'Mann.  —  ?  o  p  a  u. 


29.   The  Outer  Court  at  the  Wartburg.  —  Luther's  room  was  in  the 
building  at  the  left  centre. 

157.  English  to  think  may  have  various  German  render- 
ings.    See  §  41. 

(1)  ®(auben  and  meinen  (both  reg.,  aux.  ^aben)  are  the 
commonest.  They  translate  think  in  the  sense  of  to  have  a 
belief  (ber  ®(aube)  or  an  opinion  (bie  3[J?einimg).  yj?etnen 
often  implies  not  only  having  an  opinion,  but  telling  it.  In 
the  expression,  to  think  so,  so  is  either  omitted  entirely  in 
German  or  is  rendered  by  ba^  or  e^. 


Chap.  19.]  COMMON  PREFIXES.  125 

Do  you  think  it  will  rain  ?  I 

(SJIaulictt  ®ic  (or  tneinctt  @te),  ba^  c§  rcgnctt  mirb  ? 

Tes,  /  i^i/iA;  &o. 

Sn,  ba^  glaubc  t(^,  or  ba§  ntcinc  trfj,  or  simply :  ^i^  gfaubc  or  id| 
tneinc. 

"  Believing''''  and  "  thinking^''  deceive  many  a  one. 

©taubcn  unb  aWcittcn  bcttritgt  rnattttig  etnctt,  —  @prici)tt)ort. 

I donH  think  so.  In  the  whole  village  they  think  that  there'' s  some- 
thing up  there  that's  uncanny.  1)a§  glttttb^  tti^  nidjt,  Wlan  ittcittt  m 
gttttsctt  2)orf,  c§  f ei  ba  obcu  ctttJOig  nit^t  gc^cuer,  —  ^au^tmattn. 

iVbJ6.  —  (a)  ©louben,  io  believe  a  person,  regularly  takes  the  dative 


Kot  one  believes  me,  every  one  believes  the  blind  man. 

Sflidjt  einer  gtaubt  mlr,  jebcr  gtaubt  bem  SSUnben,  — @uberntann. 

(6)  In  the  sense  of  believing  a  thing,  glauben  always  takes  the  ac- 
cusative : 

DonH  believe  everything  you  hear, 
@laub'  nic^t  gleic^  oUeg,  tt)a§  bu  tjbrft.  —  2B  i  e  I  a  n  b. 
(c)  ©lauben,  «o  believe  in,  takes  an  with  the  accusative.    See 

§  119,  2. 

Believe  in  the  power  of  honor. 

©taub'  an  bie  ©eiralt  ber  @^re.  —  W.  2B,  @  d)  I  e  g  e  I. 

(2)  T)enfen  (bac^te,  gebarf)t,  aux.  ^ben)  indicates  ^nen^a? 
action  or  concentration.     See  §  41. 

Did  you  think  of  that  ?   ^abctt  ®ic  barait  gcbadjt  ? 

/'ve  never  thought  about  thinking. 

^j^  ^abc  ttic  ilbcr  ba§  ^citfcn  gcbadjt  —  @  o  e  1 1)  c, 

(3)  In  the  sense  of  to  think  of,  to  consider,  usually  with  two 
objects,  German  uses  finbett  or  ^alten  fitr.  They  must  be 
used  only  where  the  English  j^nd  or  consider  could  be  used. 

I  think  him  a  dunce.    ^(1)  Ijattc  iljtt  filr  cittCtt  ^ummfo^f, 
DonH  you  think  that  beautiful  f    f^ittbCtt  Sie  ba§  nid)t  ft^Ott  ? 
I  always  thought  myself  a  man  of  honor. 
^d)  Ijabc  m\^  immcr  fiir  cincn  Wann  tion  @^rc  gc^altcn, 

—  gret)tag, 


126  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§169; 

I  Exercises. 

158.  (a)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  153  illustrate  common 
prefixes?  2.  Write  two  sentences  to  show  that  the 
separable  use  of  the  common  prefixes  is  just  like  other 
separable  verbs.  3.  Write  two  sentences  to  show  that 
the  inseparable  use  of  the  common  prefixes  is  like  other 
inseparable  verbs. 

(6)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^d)  bin  feft 
itberjeugt,  bag  (Ste  e^  Itberfe^en  fonnen.  2.  X)u  bift  ganj 
bur^ndgt ;  bu  mugt  bi(^  gleic^  umjie^en.  3.  Qd)  g(aube, 
ba^  foKten  wix  nod)  nid)t  unterne^men.  4.  Qa,  ba^  meine 
i(^  auc^,  benn  e^  tft  t)ie(  ju  fc^irer.  5.  Senn  @ie  e§  nic^t 
in^  !Deutfd)e  itberfe^en,  fo  fomnten  @ie  n)o!)(  nic^t  bnrcf). 
6.  3<ci^  glaube,  er  ^dlt  fic^  fiir  Diet  beffer,  a(^  er  ift ;  meinen 
(Ste  ni(^t? 

159.  (a)  1.  If  he  won't  ferry  us  across,  we  shall  have 
to  go  around.  2.  You  can't  get  around  it ;  you  must 
translate  these  sentences.  3.  I  think  he  has  carried  out 
what  he  has  undertaken.  4.  We  don't  think  this  book 
very  hard;  we  don't  overwork.  5.  When  I  undertake 
something  hard,  I  do  not  like  to  be  interrupted.  6.  Will 
you  please  look  through  this  exercise  and  see  if  I  have 
translated  it  right  ? 

(b)  1.  He  was  thoroughly  (feft)  convinced  that  he  could 
carry  out  what  he  had  undertaken.  2.  I  think  you 
translated  the  last  sentence  wrong  (fa(fc^).  3.  Shall  we 
ferry  you  across  or  are  you  going  around?  4.  I  think 
him  a  German  professor;  didn't  you  think  so,  too?  5.  She 
interrupted  me  to  ask  me  to  look  through  her  exercise. 
6.  I  don't  think  you'll  overwork  if  you  translate  these 
sentences. 


Chap.  19.] 


COMMON  PREFIXES. 


127 


(c)  Luther  and  the  German  Language.  —  1.  Many  years 
ago  Emperor  Maximilian  undertook  a  unification  of  the 
many  German  dialects 
(SDIunbarten)  into  a 
common  language. 
2.  He  was  supported 
by  his  Chancery, 
which  thought  the 
German  dialects  too 
complicated.  3.  The 
work  of  the  Emperor 
was  often  interrupted 
by  the  quarreling 
nobles,  who  were  not 
interested  in  the  Ger- 
man language.  4.  So 
this  work  was  carried 
out  only  (erft)  after 
Luther  translated  the 
Bible.  5.  Luther's 
works  include  (umf  af - 
fen)  many  other  writ- 
ings besides  the  trans- 
lation of  the  Bible, 
but  people  (§  57)  think 
his  translation  of  the  Bible  his  best  work.  6.  And,  more 
than  his  other  works,  his  Bible  united  the  German  dia- 
lects. 


30.    Martin  Luther.  —  From  a  portrait 
painted  by  his  friend,  Lucas  Cranach. 


CHAPTER   XX. 
REVIEW. 

160.  The  particle  uber^aupt  is  used  to  strengthen  general 
statements.  It  is  usually  translated  in  English  by  at  all  or 
anyway. 

That  isn't  right  at  all.    Xa§  tft  iibcrljau^t  ntdjt  ridjtig. 

Do  you  know  him  at  all  f    ^crtttCtt  @ic  iljit  bciitt  uberl)att|Jt? 

But  who  could  think  such  a  thing  anyway  ? 

5(ber  wcr  fonntc  fo  ctttia^  ulicrl)att))t  bcnfcn ?  —  SSitbenbruc^. 

Exercises. 

161.  (a)  1.  Give  a  list  of  the  mseparaftZe  prefixes ;  of  the 
common  prefixes.  2.  What  is  the  only  difference  between 
inseparable  verbs  and  simple  verbs  ?  3.  In  what  three 
ways  do  separable  verbs  differ  from  simple  verbs  ?  4.  Do 
verbs  with  common  prefixes  have  the  peculiarities  of  both 
separable  and  inseparable  verbs  ?  6.  When  do  simple 
verbs  resemble  verbs  with  common  or  separable  prefixes  ? 
(§  154,  2,  Note.) 

(b)  1.  From  the  illustrations  in  §  142,  6,  choose  the  two 
quotations  which  please  you  best,  and  learn  them  by  heart. 

2.  Of  the  illustrations  in  §  151,  b,  learn  by  heart  the  two 
which  you  like  best. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  (5^  fottt  tnir 
gar  nic^t  ein,  biefe^  §ote(  ^u  empfel)(en.  2.  3<d)  glaube, 
e§  tft  iiberl)aupt  !ein  ^(a^  mel)r  ba;    tM^  meinen   ^Sie? 

3.  3[Ba^  benfen  ®ie  bauon  iiberl)aupt?       4.  3i^eun  3ie  nidjt 

128 


Chap.  20.]  REVIEW.  129 

itberfe^en  f()nnen,  fo  fc^fagen  (Ste  boc^  tm  SSbrterbuc^  nac^f 

5.  3c^  ^alte  e^  fiir  unmogl^,  btefe  ^egel  ju  mtgt)erftel)ett. 

6.  T)a^  !ommt  barauf  an 

162.  (a)  1.  The  dog  ran  hither  and  thither,  but  he 
didn't  go  around  the  little  lake.  2.  I  do  not  think  these 
exercises  hard  at  all,  but  I  do  not  understand  all  the  rules 
in  this  book.  3.  Did  you  misspeak,  or  did  I  misunder- 
stand the  question  ?  4.  I  like  my  new  place,  but  I  do 
not  think  it  so  good  as  the  other.  5.  Open  your  book, 
stand  up,  and  translate  the  next  page.  6.  I  can't;  I  have 
forgotten  what  the  first  word  means. 

(b)  1.  That  is  not  the  right  place;  begin  with  the  next 
line.  2.  Wait  till  he  stops  and  sits  down  in  (auf)  his 
seat.  3.  I  think  we  must  wait  for  the  teacher;  don't 
you  think  so  too?  4.  He  claims  there  is  no  room  on 
that  bench ;  what  do  you  think  ?  5.  Believe  me,  there 
aren't  any  good  places  at  all  in  that  office.  6.  I  don't 
think  him  as  clever  as  he  looks  (au^fet)en) ;  what  do  you 
think  ? 

(c)  1.  He  paid  too  much  for  the  suit  he  had  made. 
2.  Come  here  and  I  will  tell  you  how  the  prisoner 
escaped  from  prison.  3.  The  poor  child  didn't  know 
where  it  came  from  or  where  it  was  going.  4.  I  think 
there  isn't  any  better  place  where  we  could  spend  the 
summer.  5.  I  don't  think  that  he  misspoke  when  he 
translated  that  sentence;  he  didn't  understand  what  it 
meant.  6.  We  began  at  quarter  to  nine;  don't  you 
think  it  is  almost  time  to  stop  ? 


CHAPTER  XXI. 
^aBCtt   AND    ©citl    AS    AUXILIARIES. 

Die  UI?ren  Katfer  Karls  bes  ^iinften. 

163.  taifer  ^art  V.  ^atte  ^tDet  U^ren,  bie  niemat^  gleicf) 
gtngen.  S^  tft  t^m  ntemal^  gelungen,  bie  beiben  ^um  gleidjen 
ric^tigen  @e{)en  ^u  bringen,  obwo^I  er  ba^  peigig  tjerfuc^te. 
(Sbenfo  ift  e^  il)m  mit  feinem  D^^eic^e  ergangen,  ba§  au^ 
!Deutfc^(anb  unb  ^panieti  beftanb.  (S^  h)ar  fd)H)er,  biefe 
©taaten  auf  gteic^e  Seife  ^u  regiereti-  (5ine^  Xage^  be^' 
gegnete  i^m  ein  greunb,  ber  tDU^te,  \>a^  bie  U^ren  nicf)t 
gleic^  gittgen. 

jDiefer  ^^reunb  fagte  bem  ^aifer:  ,,Senn  e^  bir  nic^t 
getungen  ift,  ^mei  Heine  Ul)rett  in  gteic^em  @ange  ^u  erl)alten, 
mie  fannft  bn  I)offen,  (gpanien  nnb  ^eutfd)(anb  mit  g(eicl)en 
(^efe^en  ^n  regieren?  Xrenne  (ieber  bie  beiben!"  „J^vl  I)aft 
recl)t,"  fagte  ^axi,  unb  er  ift  bent  '^att  feine^  greunbe^  gefolgt. 
Qn  X)eutfcf|(anb  ift  nac^  i^nt  fein  ^ruber  J^*evbinanb  auf  ben 
Z^xon  gefommen  ;  ben  9^eft  feinem  9^eid)e«^  \)at  er  feinem 
(Sot)ne  'ipiiilipp  gegeben.  dx  felbft  ^at  fid)  t)on  ber  ^egierung 
jurlicfgeaogen. 

Syntax. 

164.  .^aBcn  and  fctn  as  Auxiliaries.  —  As  auxiliary, 
^ben  usually  indicates  verbal  action,  while  fein  is  used 
to  indicate  the  condition  following  such  action.  This 
general  rule  applies  to  most  of  the  following  morej 
detailed  statements. 

130 


Chap.  21.]       ^ahtU   AND   ©citl   AS  AUXILIARIES.  131 


31.    Emperor  Charles  V.  —  From  a  painting  by  Titian. 


132  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  166. 

165.  ^ahtn  is  used  with  (a)  all  transitives,  (5)  all 
reflexives,  (c)  all  modals,  (^)  all  impersonals  except 
gelingen,  gef(^e^en,  and  glucfen,  and  (e)  many  intransi- 
tives.  These  last  include  especially  those  denoting  no 
change  in  position,  like  !f)angen,  to  hang^  (eben,  to  live^ 
liegen,  to  lie,  ru^en,  to  rest,  fc^(afen,  to  sleep,  fi^en,  to  sit, 
fte^en,  to  stand,  iDo^nen,  to  dwell,  ^raten,  to  roast,  foc^en, 
to  boil,  and  raurfjen,  to  smoke,  take  ^aben  whether  used 
with  or  without  an  object. 

(a)  I  have  seen  him.    ^(!^  Ijabc  il)tt  gcfcl^Ctt. 

(6)  Have  you  had  a  good  time  ?    ^obeu  @ic  fid)  gut  amiificrt  ? 

(c)  ITe  hasn't  been  able  to  do  it.    @r  Ijttt  C§  nitl)t  tun  fiJUUCU. 

(d)  I  was  glad  that  it  rained. 

@§  ))<ki  mid)  gcfrcut,  ba^  c§  flcrcfluct  I)at. 

(e)  ffoio  Zowfir  have  you  slept  9    29Bie  lougc  !)ttbctt  8ic  gcfi^lafen  ? 
She  has  stood  there  long  enough. 

<Bk  I)at  ian^t  Qtnm  ^^  geftanben. 
Live  as  you  will  wish  to  have  lived,  when  you  die. 
ficbc,  ttJic  bu,  ttjcnu  bu  ftirbft,  tt>iinfd)cn  wtrft,  gdcbt  ju  I)abe«. 

—  ©eUert. 

166.  Sein  is  used  with  (a)  all  intrattsitives  that 
denote  change  of  position  or  condition,  (^)  fein,  to  he, 
and  bleiben,  to  remain,  and  (c)  the  impersonals  gelingen, 
to  succeed,  gefc^el^en,  to  happen,  and  glitcfen,  to  have  good 
luck,  to  succeed. 

(«)  She  has  gone  home.    (Sic  ift  nad^  ^^aM\c  gcgnugcu. 

He  has  become  very  angry.     Gr  ift  fcl)r  bijfc  gouurbett* 
{b)   I  have  never  been  in  Germany. 

^d)  bin  no(^  uic  in  X>cutfd)(oub  gcmcfen. 

They  have  stayed  a  long  time.     Sic  ftub  (angc  gcblicbcn. 
(c)  I  have  succeeded  well.    @§  ift  mir  gut  gclungcu  (gcgliirft). 

It  happened  according  to  Wodan's  command. 

(B^  ift  gcfd)cl)cn  nad)  aSobnn^  ^cbot.  —  SS  a  u  m  b  a  d). 
Note.  —  Two  common  English  transitives,  to  follow  (folgen),  and 
to  meet  by  chance,  to  happen  upon  (begcgncn),  are  intransitives  in 


Chap.  21.]      ^aBctl  AND  ©ettl  AS   AUXILIARIES.  133 

German  and  take  fciti  and  the  dative.  German  Bcfolgen  and  treffeii 
correspond  exactly  to  follow  and  meet,  and  take  ^aben  and  the  ac- 
cusative. 

Have  you  followed  my  advice  ?    ®inb  ®ie  tneinem  ^aU  gefotgt? 

How  often  have  I  met  him  on  my  walks! 

2Bic  oft  bin  ic^  i^m  auf  mcinen  ©pasicrgottgeit  begcgnet ! 

—  2Bitbenbrud). 

167.  Some  intransitives  may  take  either  ^ahtn  or  fetm 

(1)  When  indicating  the  goal  of  the  act,  they  take 
fein. 

/  traveled  to  Berlin.    I^J*)  ^itt  nad)  83crUtt  flcrcift. 

He  has  ridden  to  town.    @r  ift  ttt  bic  Stobt  gctittcit. 

We  rowed  to  the  shore.    W\x  fittb  att§  Ufcr  gcrubcrt. 

In  this  he  has  gone  too  far.    (£r  tft  ^icrbci  ju  ttictt  gcgangcit. 

—  @d)iner. 

(2)  When  indicating  simply  the  verbal  action^  not 
the  goal,  they  take  ^ben. 

7  have  traveled  for  Allyn  and  Bacon. 

^d)  ^abc  fitt  5(Ut)n  ttnb  S3acott  gctrctft» 

TTe  Aas  r«V/^e/i  till  he  is  tired.    (£r  Ijat  gcrittctt,  bt§  cr  tttiibc  ift. 

We  have  rowed  for  two  hours.    298ir  Ijabett  ^ttJct  Stunbcn  gcrubcrt 

I  never  rode  like  that.    <Bo  l)ab^  tt^  ttic  gertttctt,  —  @  o  c  t  ^  e. 

Note.  —  Of  course  when  these  verbs  are  used  transitively,  even 
when  they  indicate  the  goal  of  the  action,  they  take  f)aben. 

I  rode  my  horse  to  town.    3cl)  \)aht  metn  ^ferb  in  btc  @tabt  geritten. 
He  drove  us  to  the  station.     (Sr  l)at  ung  nad)  bem  S3o^nl)of  gefaljren. 

Notes. 

168.  Historical  Note.  —  Charles  V  (1519-1556),  grandson  of 
Maximilian  I,  inherited  Austria  from  his  father,  and  Spain  and 
the  Netherlands  from  his  mother.  When  he  was  chosen  Emperor, 
the  former  glories  of  the  Empire  seemed  to  be  revived  in  his  vast 
domains.  In  1547,  a  year  after  the  death  of  Luther,  Charles 
emerged  victorious  from  a  religious  war  and  stood  for  a  brief 
space  at  the  very  zenith  of   his  power,  the   mightiest  ruler  in 


134  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§170. 

Christendom.  But  the  religious  struggles  which  he  strove  to  stop, 
kept  on,  and  disturbances  in  various  quarters  of  his  wide  realm 
wearied  him  of  worldly  cares,  so  that  in  1556  he  withdrew,  leaving 
to  his  brother  Ferdinand  I  Austria  and  the  Habsburg  possessions, 
and  to  his  son  Philip  the  Netherlands,  Spain,  and  the  Spanish 
possessions  in  the  New  World. 

169.  German  U^r  has  two  common  English  equivalents. 

(1)  It  regularly  means  watch  or  dock.  When  confusion 
between  these  two  might  arise,  bie  Xafc^enu^r  is  used  for 
wcUch, 

Where  is  the  clock?    I donH  see  it. 

SSoiftbicU^r?    ^tl)  fcljc  ftc  ittr^t 

The  clock,  it  tells  the  hour. 

^ic  U^r,  ftc  jcigt  bic  8<unlic.  —  ©ritt^orjcr. 

(2)  U^r  is  used  for  English  time  or  o'clock  in  telling  time 
(see  §  50,  4). 

What  time  is  it  ?    SBtCtiict  Ul)r  tft  t^  ? 

At  three  o^clock  we  mounted  our  horses. 

Urn  brci  Ul|r  fc^tcit  mir  nn2  ju  ^fcrbc.  —  ?  i  t  i  c  n  c  r  o  n. 

Note.  —  The  hour  is  always  bie  @tunbe,  which  also  means  the 
lesson.    Never  use  U^r  for  hour. 

We  waited  for  him  two  hours. 

SSir  Ifahtn  groct  ©tiinben  auf  it)n  geniartet. 

/  will  give  you  a  lesson  daily. 

^d)  njcrbc  S^ncn  tagticf)  cine  @tunbc  geben. — SBlIbenbruc^. 

170.  German  Bcibc  has  two  peculiarities. 

(1)  When  used  with  an  article,  a  possessive,  or  a  demon- 
strative, it  comes  between  this  and  its  noun. 

I  have  both  books,    ^d)  Ijabc  beibc  S^tid^cr. 

/  have  both  the  (or  my)  books. 

^(^  ^abc  bie  (or  meine)  bcibcn  93iic^cr. 

Both  the  parents  have  gone  out. 

^ic  bcibctt  ©Item  ftnb  ^tnaudgegangen.  —  (J  f)  a  m  i  f  |  o. 


Chap.  21.]      ^ahtU  AND  8cttt   AS  AUXILIARIES,  135 

(2)  In  referring  to  two  actions  or  two  things  that  are 
thought  of  as  belonging  together,  German  uses  beibe^  for 
botJi.     It  can  never  be  used  for  persons. 

Did  he  sing  or  play  f — Both  I 

^di  cr  gcfiutgctt  obcr  gcf^tcU  ?  —  JBciticS ! 

Both  are  right.     Sctbc^  tft  rii^tig, 

/  am  pleased  that  both  spring  from  your  hands. 

^(^  bitt  tjcrgttugt,  ba^  bcibc^  m^  bcinctt  ^anbctt  fftttUt,  —  3R  o  r  i  f  c. 

Note.  —  (a)  2)ie  beiben  is  usually  used  for  the  two  in  referring  to  a 
definite  pair. 

The  stepmother  and  the  two  sisters  were  frightened. 

S)ie  @tiefmutter  unb  bie  beiben  @(i)tt)eftern  erfc^rofen.  — ©rtmm. 

(6)  When  in  doubt  as  to  which  form  (beibeS  or  beibe)  to  use,  a 
safe  rule  is  to  use  atlc  beibe,  which  is  correct  for  persons,  things,  or 
actions.  It  may  be  substituted  for  beibe6  or  beibe  in  nearly  all  the 
examples  in  (1)  and  (2). 

Who  possesses  that  does  not  need  both. 

SBer  bag  befi^t,  braud)t  atte  beibe  nic^t.  —  §cbbcl» 

171.    English  tp  meet  has  two  common  German  renderings. 

(1)  The  commoner  is  treffett  (traf,  getroffett,  er  trtfft,  aux. 
^aben),  also  as  reflexive,  fic^  treffen.  It  generally  means  to 
meet  by  appointment,  intentionally. 

Did  you  meet  him  f    ^abctt  @ic  tl)tt  gcttoffctt  ? 

Where  shall  we  meet  each  other  ?    293o  ttioUctt  ttih  tttt0  trcffctt  ? 

Pd  meet  many  old  friends  and  comrades  there. 

^d)  ttiiirbc  t>tc(c  a(tc  f^rcuttbc  unb  ^amcrabctt  bort  treffcn* 

—  ^retjtag. 

(2)  In  the  sense  of  to  meet  by  chance,  to  run  across,  Ger- 
man generally  uses  begegnen  (reg.  insep.,  aux.  fein),  with  the 
dative.     See  §  166,  Note. 

I  just  met  your  sister  in  Broad  Street. 

Sd)  bitt  cbeti  ttt  bcr  Srcitcn  ©tra^c  ^^rcr  (S(l|tticftcr  bcgcgnct. 

In  the  coiirt  the  coachman  met  him. 

2(ttf  bcm  ^ofc  bcgcgttctc  i^nt  bcr  tutft^cr.  —  @tortn. 


136  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§173. 

Note.  —  To  meet  in  the  sense  of  to  get  acquainted  with  is  fenncn 
lernen.  The  regular  remark  in  Germany  when  one  is  introduced  is 
Very  agreeable,  \el)V  angenefjm.  The  common  forms  of  introduction 
are  ; 

Have  you  met  Mr.  Brown  ?    ^oben  @ie  §errn  33raun  fennen  gclernt? 
May  I  present  you  to  my  sister  ?  or  May  I  acquaint  you  ? 
3)arf  i(^  ®tc  meiner  @c^tt)efter  tiorftcUen?  or  :5)Qrf  id)  bic  §crren 
(bic  ^errfd)aften,  when  of  different  sexes)  befannt  madden  ? 

172.  English  right  is  rendered  in  German  in  two  ways. 

(1)  dltd^t  is  used  (a)  for  all  cases  of  7Hght  as  distinguished 
from  left  and  (b)  for  the  expression  to  be  right  when  refer- 
ring to  persons.  In  the  latter  case  it  is,  used  only  with  the 
verb  '^ahtn. 

(a)  I  hurt  my  right  foot,    ^d^  l^obc  mir  ben  rerfjtcn  ?^u§  ticrlc^t. 

Let  not  thy  left  hand  know  what  thy  right  hand  doeth. 

®o  (a^  bcittc  Htifc  ^anb  ittdjt  miffctt,  mag  bic  rcd|tc  iwi. 

—  33iber,  gjJatt.  fi,  3. 
(ft)  ^771  /  nV/i«  ?    ^nb^  ti^  rct^t  ?    (Never,  S3in  id)  rcrf)t  ?) 

Yes,  you  are  right,    ^a,  '^a  ^rtft  bit  rcd|t.  —  .s)  a  u  p  t  m  a  n  n. 

(2)  9?ic^ttg  is  used  for  right  in  the  sense  of  correct.  It  is 
used  generally  with  fein  and  of  things. 

7s  this  sentence  right  f    ^ft  btcfcr  8rt^  rtd)tt(|  ? 

2%a«  isw'«  r?(7/i«  {doesnH  happen  right). 

^ag  gcljt  nirf)t  ridjtig  ju.  —  ?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 
JVofe.  —  A  common  expression  for  that  is  right,  especially  in  re- 
ferring to  number,  paying  bills,  counting  change,  and  so  on,  is :  !5)a8 
ftimmt  (that  is  in  tune). 

173.  English  hard  is  variously  rendered  in  German. 

(1)  As  an  adjective  in  the  sense  of  hard  to  the  touch,  the 
opposite  of  soft,  hard  is  ^art. 

This  pencil  is  too  hard,    ^tcf cr  S?Ictftift  tft  511  l)art. 

He  is  girt  from  top  to  toe  in  hard  steel. 

©r  tft  tiont  Wivhel  biS  sur  So^f  in  fatten  Staljl  flcfdjitaUt 

—  U^ranb. 


Chap.  21.]      ^ttBctt   AND  Scttl  AS  AUXILIABIES.  137 

(2)  As  an  adjective  in  the  sense  of  difficult,  hard  is  fc^lDer. 

This  exercise  is  not  hard,     '^icfc  3(ttfgttlie  tft  tttt^t  ft^ttJCr» 

7i(  may  have  been  hard  for  the  old  man, 

@d|tt)cr  mog  e^  bcm  grcif eu  SWanitc  gcmcfctt  fcin*  —  9fl  o  f  e  g  g  e  r. 

(3)  As  an  adverb,  in  the  sense  of  industriously,  hard  is 
fleigig. 

ro?«  m?/s«  study  harder.     Sic  tttiiffctt  ftci^igcr  Icmctt* 

But  they  worked  all  the  harder. 

%\>tx  bcfto  flcv^tgcr  arbcttctcn  fie,  — better. 

(4)  As  an  adverb  in  the  sense  of  vigorously,  hard  is  ftarf. 

It  rained  very  hard.     (g§  regttctc  jc^r  ftarf. 

The  old  man  smoked  harder. 

^cr  3l(tc  raud)tc  ftarfcr,  —  2Bi(benbrui^. 

Exercises. 

174.  (a)  1.  Explain  by  the  rules  in  §  164  to  §  167  the 
uses  of  !^aben  and  feiu  in  §  163.  2.  Apply  the  general 
rule  in  §  164  to  the  special  cases  in  §§  165,  166,  and  167. 

3.  Give  German  sentences  illustrating  two  common  verbs 
which  take  fein  and  the  dative  when  their  English  equiva- 
lents take  have  and  a  direct  object. 

(6)  1.  Find  examples  of  the  auxiliary  '^abetl  in-§  6, 1,  §  28, 
2,  §  51,  2,  §  68,  1  and  4,  §  73, 1  and  2,  §  81.  2.  Find  illus- 
trations of  the  auxiliary  fein  in  §  30,  2,  §  68,  2,  §  128,  1, 
§  140,  1,  §  147,  3,  §  150,  4.  3.  Under  what  phase  of  the 
rules  in  §§  164-167  does  each  of  the  above  examples  belong? 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^^  moc^te  fie 
fennen  (ernen.  Sotten  <Ste  mic^  tjorfteden?  —  (Se^r  ange= 
ne^m!  2.  Sa^  tft  benn  gefdje^en?  ^c^  \)(\ht  m6){^ 
ge^drt.       3.  ^c^  bin  ben  beiben  eine  (Stnnbe  lang  gefolgt. 

4.  (gie  ^aben  rec^t;  ber  ®a^  tft  nd)tig.  5.  ^^c^  {)atte 
bentfc^e  ^tunben,  aber  ba^  58nc^  tear  ju  fc^mer.  6.  (gte 
^cihtn  tt)o^(  nic^t  flei^ig  genug  gearbeitet.  —  ^a,  ba^  fttmmt! 


138  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [5176. 

175.  (a)  1.  It  was  very  hard,  but  we  succeeded  in  trans- 
lating both  the  sentences  right.  2.  We  had  followed 
them  for  two  hours  when  it  began  to  rain  hard  (§  173,  4). 
3.  During  all  the  lesson  the  two  girls  were  right  every 
time  they  translated.  4.  If  you  work  hard,  your  exer- 
cises will  be  right.  5.  Have  you  decided  at  what  time 
we   shall  meet   [each   other]?  6.   Have  you   met   my 

brother  ?     May  I  present  him  to  you  ? 

(b)  1.  I  gave  him  both  my  pencils;  he  said  one  was 
too  hard,  but  the  other  was  just  (gerabe)  right.  2.  Two 
hours  ago  we  met  them  both  in  (auf  bem)  Harvard  Square. 
3.  In  the  last  lesson  you  weren't  right  a  single  time,  but 
both  these  sentences  are  right.  4.  Is  this  exercise  hard 
or  long?  Both.  5.  You  have  slept  a  long  time;  now 
you  must  study  ((emen)  hard.  6.  If  you  had  followed 
my  advice,  the  work  would  not  have  been  so  hard. 

(c)  Charles  the  Fifth.  —  1.  Emperor  Charles  was  right 
when  he  followed  his  friend's  advice.  2.  He  had  not 
succeeded  in  ruling  both  his  kingdoms  well.  3.  He 
worked  hard,  but  it  was  too  hard  for  him.  4.  He  had 
lived  a  long  time  in  Germany  and  in  Spain.  5.  Of  the 
two  he  liked  Spain  best,  so  he  retired  there  (§,149,  1). 
6.  In  history  it  has  often  happened  that  the  ones  who  work 
hardest  succeed  least. 


CHAPTER   XXTI. 

ENGLISH  VERBALS  TRANSLATED  BY  GERMAN 
INFINITIVES. 

Der  6retgtgjdl?rtge  livK<$. 

176.  %u6)  na6)  bent  ^obe  ^axU  be^  giinften  fe^en  tvh  bte 
^eutfc^en  iiber  bte  D^eOgtott  ftrettett^  Qm  Qa^xt  1618  hxad) 
ettt    geltjalttger    Sitrgerfrieg    au^.      1)tefer    brei^tg    ^'a^re 


32.  The  Walls  and  Towers  of  Rothenburg. — This  picturesque  city 
was  taken  by  General  Tilly  in  the  Thirty  Years'  War,  but  the  walls 
were  not  demolished. 

139 


140  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  178. 

bauerttbe  ^ampf  ift  ber  furrf)ter(ti^fte  in  ber  c^an^en  Seltc^e^ 
[c^tc^te.  Um  fic^  ^u  er()a(ten,  fingen  bie  §eere  on,  bie  armen 
:53auern  au^gu^lunbern.  !Dtefe  fu^ren  eine  3^^t^^^9  f<^^^ 
ba^  ^anb  ju  bebauen,  aber  nur,  um  e^  tt)ieber  t)on  ben  §eeren 
t)ern)uftet  gu  fe()en.    !Da  tDurben  fie  felber  9^duber. 

!t)ie  §a(fte  ber  ^et^olferung  ^Tieutfc^Ianb^  ift  bantat^  tjer^ 
nic^tet  njorben,  unb  ein  ganje^  (^efd)(ec^t  ift  derange marfif en, 
o{)ne  in-  ^ir^e  ober  <Sc^u(e  ^u  ge{)en.  T)k  ein^ige  ^efrf)afti^ 
gung  lt)ar  ber  ^rieg.  (Sin  f)albe§  ^fi^^^w^^^^t  ^itt  !Deutfc^* 
lanb  unter  biefem  ^(enb,  nnb  e^  bauerte  ^trei^unbert  ^a^vt, 
U^  e^  fid)  t)on  ben  golgen  biefe^  ^riegee  er^olt  ^at 

Syntax. 

177.  Verbals  in  -ing.  —  English  verbals  in  -ingi  are 
translated  in  German  by  a  participle,  by  an  infinitive, 
or  by  a  clause.  The  third  use  —  clauses  —  will  be 
treated   in   the   next   chapter. 

178.  When  the  English  verbal  in  -in(/  is  a  participial 
modifier^  it  is  rendered  in  German  by  the  present  parti- 
ciple. In  English  the  verbal  (participle)  follows  its 
noun  and  is  followed  by  its  modifiers ;  but  in  German 
it  precedes  its  noun  and  is  preceded  by  its  modifiers. 
It  is  rare  in  conversation,  but  common  in  formal  Ger- 
man, especially  in  signs  and  newspapers. 

The  hook  lying  on  the  table  is  mine. 

^a^  auf  bcm  Xifd|  licflcnbc  Surf)  gcprt  mir. 

/  should  be  (as)  sounding  brass,  or  a  tinMing  cymbal. 

<Bo  ware  id)  tin  tiJncttb(ci^)  ©rj  ober  cine  fHitdenbe  ®rf)eUe. 

—  33ibc(,  1  ^or.  13,  1. 
Note.  —  (a)  This  same  order  is  followed  for  past  participles  as  well 
as  those  in  -ing. 

A  boat  made  by  a  little  boy. 

(5in  t)on  einem  fleiuen  ^^naben  gcmadjtc*  SBoot. 


Chap.  22.]  ENGLISH  VEttBALS,  141 

I  Hew  through  the  neighborhood  to  the  owner  of  the  house  Mr.  Al- 
bret  had  once  pointed  out  to  me  as  for  sale. 

3d)  flog  in  bie  -TJarfibarfc^aft  ijum  ^efi^er  beg  miv  einft  t)on  §errn 
5llbret  als  tierfaufUd)  angebeuteten  §aujeg.  —  3  f  t^  o  ^  e, 

(6)  The  English  progressive  form  in  -ing  is  rendered  in  German  by 
the  simple  verb.     See  §  227,  1. 

Are  you  coming  9    ^ommen  @ie  mit  ? 

I  was  walking  along  by  myself  in  the  wood. 

3(i)  ging  tm  SBalbe  jo  fur  mic^  ^In.  — ©oet^e. 

179.  When  the  English  verbal  in  -ing  is  not  a  parti- 
cipial modifier^  it  is  rendered  in  German  by  an  infini- 
tive or  by  a  clause.  For  the  translation  by  a  clause, 
see  Chapter  XXIII. 

180.  When  the  verbal  in  -ing  is  translated  hy  a  Ger- 
man infinitive^  gU  is  omitted  after  certain  verbs ;  after 
others  it  is  not  omitted. 

(1)  ^Vi  is  omitted  in  translating  an  English  verbal 
in  -ing  when  the  infinitive  follows  bleiben,  finben,  \)'6xtxi, 
fe()ett,  and  verbs  of  motion  when  used  with  fpajieren. 
Hear  and  see  take  either  infinitive  or  verbal  in  English  : 
/  heard  him  sing  or  singiyig.  But  in  German  they  are 
followed  only  by  the  infinitive  without  311. 

He  remained  sitting.    @r  blicb  ft^Ctt» 

Did  you  see  them  playing  (or  play)  football  f 

^aft  bit  fie  ^upaU  f^tcten  feljcn  ? 

I  heard  a  brooklet  babbling  (or  babble). 

^rf)  Ijorf  citt  a3ad)(citt  rauf d)cn»  —  9JJ  ii  U  e  r. 

/  went  riding  when  I  should  have  preferred  to  go  walking. 

^r^  rttt  f^ajicrcu,  ba  \^  bod^  licber  f^joaicrcn  gcgaugctt  marc. 

Note.  —  When  used  with  come.,  in  expressions  like  came  running, 
the  verbal  is  translated  in  German  by  the  past  participle  (fam  gclaufen) . 

A  bird  comes  flying,     ^ommt  ein  35ogeI  geflogen.  —  ^olfgUcb. 


142  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [5182. 

(2)  3^  is  used  in  translating  an  English  verbal  in 
■4nff  after  anfangen,  to  begin;  fortfa^ren,  to  continue; 
auf^Oren,  to  stop;  gelingen,  to  succeed.  The  first  two 
may  also  be  used  with  the  infinitive  in  English,  as  well 
as  with  the  verbal  in  -ing :  I  began  reading  or  to  read. 
But  in  German  they  are  followed  only  by  the  infinitive 
with  gu. 

She  began  singing  (or  to  8ing).    Sic  ftng  an  jtt  ftttgcn» 

He  continues  whispering  (or  to  whisper).     @r  ftt^rt  fort  JU  flttftcm. 

Did  you  succeed  in  getting  tickets  f 

Sft  c§  ^^nctt  flclungctt,  Garten  ju  tief omtnen  ? 

Now  when  he  had  left  speaking  he  said  unto  Simon. 

Itnb  aljg  tx  Ijrtttc  auf gcl^brt  ju  vt^tn,  ^pxad\  cr  ^u  Simon. 

—  33ibet,  $!uc.  5,  4. 

181.  Ol^nc,  without,  and  anftatt,  instead  of,  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  infinitive,  when  English  without  and 
instead  of  are  followed  immediately  by  the  verbal  in 
-ing.  Cases  where  a  modifier  intervenes  —  as  without 
MY  seeing  —  are  treated  in  the  next  chapter. 

I  turned  round  without  seeing  him. 

Sd|  manbte  tnid)  urn,  oljnc  \\)\\  ju  fc^ctt. 

Instead  of  coming  in,  he  walked  calmly  on. 

^n^itttt  ^eretnsufommcn,  gtng  er  rut^ig  lociter. 

O,  do  not  go  without  blessing  me. 

O  gct)t  nid)t,  oljnc  mt(^  $n  f egnen.  —  1 1  o  p  ft  o  cf . 

Notes. 

182.  Historical  Note.  —  The  two  immediate  successors  of 
Charles  V  were  more  liberal  and  not  inclined  to  wage  religious 
wars,  and  during  their  reigns  Protestantism  made  great  gains. 
A  hundred  years  after  tlie  beginning  of  the  Reformation  (1.517- 
1618)  Protestants  and  Catholics  were  about  equally  numerous  and 
equally  zealous  in  Germany.  Relations  between  them  became 
more  and  more  strained  till  in  1618  the  most  horrible  of  all  reli- 
gious wars  broke  out.     First  Denmark,  then  Sweden,  and  finally 


Chap.  22.] 


ENGLISH   VERBALS. 


143 


33.  The  Fortress  at  Coburg.  — One  of  the  strongholds  that  withstood 
the  sieges  of  the  Thirty  Years'  War.  A  later  Duke  of  Coburg 
(Saxe-Coburg-Gotha)  was  the  husband  of  Queen  Victoria. 

France  entered  Germany  under  pretence  of  helping  the  Protestants, 
and  army  after  army  harried  the  land.  The  leaders  adopted  the 
policy  of  supporting  the  army  upon  the  country.  The  peasants 
were  outrageously  plundered  and  their  lands  laid  waste ;  villages, 
even  cities  and  whole  industries,  were  wiped  out  of  existence. 
But  finally  there  came  an  Emperor  —  Ferdinand  III  (1637-1657), 
the  great-grandnephew  of  Charles  V  —  who  opposed  the  war, 
and  eleven  years  after  his  accession  it  came  to  a  close  (1648)  in 
the  Peace  of  Westphalia.  Not  till  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth 
century  did  some  parts  of  Germany  again  contain  as  many  in- 
habitants as  before  1618. 

183.  English  to  take  is  generally  nc^imen  (tia^tu,  ge^ 
nommen,  aux.  ^aben). 

(1)  To  take  time,  in  the  sense  of  to  last,  is  always  German 
bauern.(i'eg.,  aux.  ^aben),  never  ne^men. 


144  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  184. 

How  long  does  it  take  to  get  to  town  ? 

SBte  lange  bauert  cS,  \>i^  man  in  bie  Stabt  fommt  ? 

It  took  quite  awhile,  before  he  came  to  the  surface  again. 

&§  baucrtc  cine  3cttlttng,  c^c  tt  ttiicbcr  ouf  bic  Dbcrf(ad|c  fam. 

—  @torm. 

(2)  To  take  a  train  (street  car,  omnibus,  or  carriage)  is 
usually  fasten  tnit  (fut)r,  gefa^ren,  aux.  fein),  though  ne^men 
is  also  used  in  this  sense. 

Did  you  take  the  omiiibus  9    Sittb  @tc  ttiit  bcm  Omnibus  gcfa^rcn? 
No,  we  took  an  auto.    9icitt,  ttiir  fittb  tttit  cincm  5(uto  gcfttljrcu. 
Take  the  train  throiigh  Germany. 
f^a^r  bod)  mit  bcr  a3al)tt  b«rd)  2)ctttfti^Iaub.  —  2B  o  1 3  o  g  c  n. 

(3)  To  ^aZce  a  ti'ip  or  a  t'ja^A:  is  eine  9f^eife  or  einctt  (Spatter- 
gang  mac^en  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)» 

We  took  a  walk  this  morning. 

^cutc  tnorgcn  ^abcn  ttitr  cincn  S^jajicrgang  gcmad^t. 

PFe'Zi  ?a^•e  the  trip  together. 

SBir  mat^ctt  bic  S^cif c  $uf ommctt,  —  ®  c^  i  U  e  r, 

(4)  To  take  a  person  for  some  one  else  or  to  consider  as 
is  fallen  fitr  (^ielt,  gel)a(ten,  aux.  ^aben).  See  §  157,  3. 
§a(ten  is  also  used  for  to  lake  a  newspaper. 

I  took  you  for  your  brother. 

^(^  ^flbc  ®ic  fiir  S^rcit  Srubcr  gcl)o(tcn. 

What  paper  do  you  take  ? 

9®ctd)c  Bcitung  (never  ^a^icr)  ^altcn  ®ic  ? 

FoM  «aA;e  me  for  a  child. 

^tt  l|dltft  mid)  f iir  cin  ^inb.  —  (£  I)  a  m  i  f  U. 

Note.  —  To  take  pains  is  fid)  (dative)  Spfiu^c  gcbcn. 

Jfr.  Bolz,  lUl  take  pains  not  to  shoic  you  that. 

§err  Solj,  id)  tt)iU  mtr  aJ?ut)c  gcbcn,  3t)ncn  ba«  nid)t  ju  jcigen. 

—  §rfi)tag. 

184.   English  /ia//has  two  German  equivalents. 
(1)  As  a  noun  half  is  always  bie  §dlf te. 


Chap.  22.]  ENGLISH   VERBALS.  145 

ru  only  take  half,    ^d)  ncl)me  nur  bic  ^a(ftc» 

aS'o  AaZ/  of  these  purses  are  his. 

(Bo  ift  bic  ^ttlftc  bief er  S^ctttd  f ciit*  —  $?  e  f  j  i  n  g. 

(2)  As  an  adjective  or  adverb,  half  is  regularly  '^a(b. 

You  have  lost  half  a  day.    @tc  ^abctt  cittCtt  l^aJbctt  XaQ  »cr(orctt» 

/« is  only  half  as  far.    @§  tft  mir  ^a(b  fo  Wcit* 

/  did  it  with  half  a  glance. 

^r^  tttt  c§  mit  eittcm  Ijatbcu  Stirfc*  —  ^  e  U  e  r. 

185.  English  only  is  both  adverb  and  adjective. 

(1)  As  an  adverb,  only  is  (a)  nur,  except  when  it  modifies 
time-expressions  in  the  sense  oi  for  the  first  time,  not  until; 
then  it  is  (h)  erft. 

(a)   TJiere  are  only  two  seats  here,     ^xtx  fittb  ttur  5tt>Ct  ^Vi^t* 

Love  only^  love  is  life. 

2)ic Sicbc  mir,  btc  Sicb^  ift  Scbcti,  —  ganer§leben. 
(&)   The  hoy  is  only  four  years  old. 

^cr  ^nabc  ift  crft  uicr  ^al)rc  alt. 

0/^?^/  lo^e/i  he  stood  close  before  them,  did  they  start  up. 

@rft  a\2  cr  bid)t  tior  itjitcn  ftanb,  fulireii  fie  in  bic  |>iJl)c* 

—  ^iUern. 

(2)  As  an  adjective,  only  is  etttjtg. 

I  was  the  only  man  there,    ^d^  mat*  ba  bcr  cittsigc  SJlantt* 
The  poet  is  the  only  true  man,  and  the  best  philosopher  is  only  a 
caricature  beside  him.     '^tv  ^it^tcr  ift  bcr  cittsigc  toaf^rt  9Wcnf(^,  ttttb 
bcr  bcf*c  ^Ijitufo^I)  ift  nur  cine  ^arif atur  gcgen  il)tt.  —  @  d)  i  U  e  r» 

Note.  —  ©injig  also  means  single  in  the  sense  of  sole,  only :  not  a 
single  time,  !eiit  ein^ige^  Mat  See  §  9.  It  must  not  be  confused 
with  etnjetn,  single  in  the  sense  of  separate,  individual :  a  single 
(odd)  volume,  ein  eiuj^etner  iBanb ;  single  (detached)  houses,  einjeinc 
§aufer,    A  single  man  is  ein  unt)erl)eirateter  9}Zann. 

Exercises. 

186.  (a)  1.  State  the  differences  between  the  English 
and  German  uses  of  the  present  participle  as  a  modifier. 
2.    Illustrate   these    differences  by  sentences   in   each  Ian- 


146  GERMAN   COMPOSITION,  [§  187. 

guage.         3.    Do  these  differences  hold  also  for  past  parti- 
ciples when  used  as  modifiers  ?     Illustrate. 

(b)  1.  Name  the  commonest  German  verbs  which  are 
followed  by  an  infinitive  without  ju  when  translating  an 
English  verbal  in  -ing.  2.  Illustrate  their  use  in  two 
German  sentences.  3.  Name  the  commonest  German 
verbs  followed  by  an  infinitive  with  ju  to  translate  an 
English  verbal  in  -ing.  4.  What  four  verbs  (§  180, 1  and 
2)  may  have  an  English  translation  just  like  the  German  ? 
5.  Illustrate  the  uses  of  ot)ne  and  anftatt  with  gu  and  the 
infinitive. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  SSo  fittb  tDtr 
geftern  fte^en  geblieben?  (the  schoolroom  phrase  for  stop). 
2.  9^etn,  I)oren  @ie  noc^  nic^t  auf  ju  (efen!  3.  58itte, 
troKen  (Ste  fortfa^ren  gu  iiberfe^en?  4.  ^c^  I)bre  jemanb 
flUftern;  'ba^  muB  fofort  auf^oren.  5.  S§  l)at  nur  eine 
l^albe  (Stunbe  cjebauert.  6.  "^xt  erfte  @d(fte  ber  5lufgabe 
^at  er  itberfe^t,  of)ne  fic^  90^itt)e  ju  geben. 

187.  (a)  1.  Please  stop  whispering  and  begin  translat- 
ing. 2.  Instead  of  taking  a  carriage  when  you  take  a 
long  trip,  you  ought  to  take  the  train.  3.  Otherwise 
(fonft)  it  will  take  so  long  that  you  will  not  arrive  till 
(§  185,  1,  h)  the  next  day.  4.  Without  waiting  for  help, 
he  succeeded  in  translating  half  a  page.  5.  If  you  con- 
tinue working  hard,  it  will  take  only  half  an  hour.  6.  He 
didn't  see  me  coming,  so  I  found  him  lying  on  the  ground. 

(6)  1.  We  heard  the  teacher  read  the  first  half  of  the 
exercise  without  translating.  2.  That  is  the  only  mistake 
you  made.  3.  If  you  continue  whispering,  we  shall  have 
to  stop  reading.  4.  If  you  cannot  begin  translating,  you 
need  not  stand.  5.  She  read  half  a  page  without  making 
a  single  mistake.         6.    They  looked  for  him  a  long  time, 


Chap.  22.]  ENGLISH   VERBALS.  147 

and  it  took  two  hours  before  they  found  him  sleeping  under 
a  tree. 

(c)  Germany  after  the  Thirty  Yearn''  War.  —  1.  Only 
after  two  centuries  did  Germany  begin  recovering  from  the 
consequences  of  the  Thirty  Years'  War.  2.  Half  the 
country  was  devastated,  and  it  took  a  long  time  before 
we  find  Germany  thriving.  3.  Instead  of  despairing,  the 
Germans  continued  working  and  took  pains  to  develop  their 
country.  4.  That  was  the  only  way  in  which  (trie)  they 
succeeded  in  recovering  from  the  war.  5.  They  never 
stopped  working.  6.  And  to-day  we  see  Germany  thriv- 
ing and  developing  extraordinarily. 


CHAPTER   XXIII. 

ENGLISH    VERBALS    AND    INFINITIVES    TRANSLATED 
BY  GERMAN  CLAUSES. 

Der  (Sro§e  Kurfiirft. 

188.  Qm  3a^re  1640  njurbe  griebric^  St(f)elm  turfiirft 
Don  ^ranbenburg  unb  ©ergog  Don  ^reugen.  ^a  er  batnat^ 
ganj  !Deutfrf)(anb  tjon  bem  grogen  ^rieg  uertriiftet  fa^,  fo 
tDiinfc^te  er,  ba§  fein  !(etne^  §eer  fid)  ftet^  frieg^bereit  ^aUe. 
3nt  @egenfa^  gu  anberen  gitrften  jener  ^txt  beftanb  er 
barauf,  bag  [ein  ©eer  nic^t  pliinberte. 

5I(^  feine  geinbe  im  ^egrtff  traren,  in  fein  ^anb  einp^ 
bringen,  tierjagte  er  fie  mit  biefem  fleinen  §eere,  ol)ne  bag  er 
eine  ein^ige  (Bd)ia6)t  t)er(or,  (5r  ^atte  feinen  ^euten  gefagt, 
fie  fodten  bebenfen,  bag  fie  !Deutfi^e  feien.  Unb  furj  beoor 
er  feinem  (So^ne  bie  9tegiernng  itbergab,  empfa()(  er  biefem, 
fUr  ha^  So^(  feine^  3So(!e^  3n  forgen.  !Da«  tt)ar  „ber  groge 
turfiirft"  nnb  bie  T)eutfcf)en  finb  noc^  ftolj  baranf,  bag  er 
fiir  ba«  3Sater(anb  fo  oiel  getan  ^at. 

Syntax. 

189.  Verbals  rendered  by  Clauses.  —  English  verbals 
in  -ing  are  rendered  by  German  clauses  in  two  impor- 
tant cases. 

(1)  When  an  English  verbal  in  -ing  is  in  a  participial 
phrase  of  time  or  cause^  it  is  rendered  in  German  not 
by  a  participle  or  by  an  infinitive,  but  by  a  clause. 
This  clause  is  generally  introduced  by  a(^,  when^  tpftl^* 

148 


Chap.  23.] 


VERBALS  AND  INFINITIVES. 


149 


34.   Statue  of. the  Great  Elector  in  Berlin. 


renb,  while^  inbem,  at  the  moment  when,  as,  or  ba,  as,  be- 
cause. Thus  these  participial  phrases  must  be  mentally 
changed  to  clauses  before  translating. 

While  reading  I  fell  asleep. 

SBa^rcnb  (or  a\2)  id)  (a^,  fdjKcf  ic^  tin. 


150  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  191. 

Coming  around  the  corner  she  slipt. 

^nbcm  fie  urn  bic  (Srfc  fom,  gtttt  fic^u§. 

Seeing  her  fall ^  he  hurried  to  help  iver 

^a  cr  ftc  faUctt  fat),  ciltc  cr  \\\x  511  |)t(fc. 

'•'' But  ichere  are  your  strawberries? ""  she  asked  finally,  stopping 
and  taking  a  deep  breath.  '^e^.. 

„993o  biciben  bcnn  abcr  bcinc  ©rbbccrcn?"  fragtc  ftoftbUd),  tnbcm 
fie  ftcljCtt  bltcb  unb  cincn  ticf en  Sltcmsug  iai,  —  ©tor  tu( 


(2)  When  the  English  verbal  in  -ing  is  the  object  of 
a  preposition^  it  is  usually  rendered  in  German  by  a 
ba^'clause.  The  corresponding  German  preposition  is 
then  combined  with  the  particle  "bd'  and  comes  just 
before  ba§. 

We  insisted  on  his  going.    SStr  bcftrtttbcn  baraitf,  "^d^^  cr  ge^c. 
She  spoke  of  seeing  him. 
Sie  f^radi  babon,  ba^  fie  it)n  gefet)cn  Ijatte. 
Were  you  proud  of  being  there? 
aSaren  Sic  ftol^  barawf,  ^a^^  ®ie  ^a  toartn  ? 
0/(fe?i  t<?e  please  most  by  giving  others  opportunity  to  please. 
Wflan  nefaUt  oft  am  meiftcii  baburrf),  ba§  man  anbern  (Betcgctt^cit 
ju  gcf allctt  bcrf d)afft.  —  @  0  e  1 1)  e. 

190.  Dftnc  ha^  and  anftatt  baft.  —  When  a  possessive 
comes  between  without  or  instead  of  and  the  verbal  in 
-ing,  —  without  MY  seeing,  —  German  renders  this  verbal 
by  a  baft=clause.     Compare  §  181. 

Instead  of  his  doing  it,  you  ought  to. 

5lnftatt  ba^  cr  c§  tut,  foUtcu  Bk'^, 

Without  his  meaning  to,  without  his  knowing  it,  the  critic  empha- 
sizes defects  and  or.erlooks  beauties. 

Otjnc  baf?  cr  cc^  mill,  ol)itc  baf;  cr  ci<  mcif;,  Ijcbt  bcr  S^curtcirer 
f^tcrfen  !)crbor,  ilbcrfic!)t  cr  ©rt)ijnl)citen.  — 15  u  n  e  U 

191.  Infinitives  rendered  by  Clauses.  —  Some  English 
infinitives  are  translated  into  German  by  a  bafe^clause, 


Chap.  23.]  VERBALS  AND  INFINITIVES.  151 

usually  when  the  English  infinitives  follow  verbs  like 
to  tell  (fagen),  to  know  (miffen),  or  to  believe  (g(auben). 

He  told  me  to  wait.    ($r  fngtc  ttttr,  ba^  id)  itiartctt  foUtc* 
I  know  him  to  be  rny  friend.     ^(^  tuci^,  tsd^  cr  mettt  f^rcttttb  tft* 
/?i  ^/le  end  you  too  will  believe  me  to  be  such  a  bad  man.     5(m  @ttbe 
glaubft  btt  audi  m^,  bo^  trf|  folrfi  ciit  ft^tej^tcr  SKcnfr^  bin,  —  ^ i Hern. 

(1)  After  to  wish  (tDiinf(^en),  the  English  infinitive,  if 
it  has  a  subject  accusative,  I  wish  him  to  go^  is  rendered 
by  a  ba^^clause.  Otherwise  German  uses  the  infinitive 
after  trlinfc^en  just  as  English  does  after  to  wish. 

After  to  command  (befe'^len),  a  short  infinitive  phrase 
may  be  translated  into  German  by  the  infinitive  as  well 
as  by  a  bag-clause.  Longer  English  phrases  after  to 
command  are  usually  rendered  in  German  by  bag^clauses, 
not  by  the  infinitive. 

/  wish  to  go.    ^d)  ttiunfd)C  ju  jjcljctt. 

I  wish  him  (subject  accusative)  to  go. 

^d)  wunfdje,  ba^  cr  gc^c  (or  gcl|t). 

She  ordered  me  to  stay.    Sic  bcfal)I  mir,  gtt  bicibctt. 

Then  he  commanded  us  all  to  fold  our  hands. 

^ttiin  bcfa^t  cr,  ^a^  ttiir  aUc  bic  ^anbc  falktciu  — SSilbenbrud). 

Notes. 

192.  Historical  Note.  —  The  electors  were  the  seven  —  later 
nine  —  German  princes  who  chose  the  Emperor.  The  Great 
Elector  (who  reigned  1640-1688)  developed  Brandenburg  (Prus- 
sia) in  peace  and  extended  it  by  war.  He  secured  Eastern  Pome- 
rania,  Prussia's  first  seacoast.  The  Elector's  son  (1688-1713) 
raised  his  title  from  Elector  of  Brandenburg  to  "  King  in  Prussia." 
His  son  in  turn  (1713-1740),  called  the  ,,@o(batenfonig/'  developed 
the  mighty  army  which  was  to  be  used  so  magnificently  by  his  son 
Frederick  the  Great  (1740-1786).  All  these  Prussian  rulers  de- 
sired to  strengthen  their  country  by  promoting  education,  husband- 
ing their  resources,  and  developing  the  9-rmy. 


152  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§194. 

193.  English  abo^it  has  several  German  meanings. 

(1)  As  a  preposition  in  the  sense  of  around,  about  is 
translated  by  um  (§  111,  1) ;  in  the  sense  of  concerning,  by 
uber  (§  123,  2). 

(2)  As  a  limiting  adverb  about  is  rendered  in  German  by 
ttWa  or  ungefa^r*     The  latter  is  the  more  current. 

About  how  far  is  it  to  the  station  ? 

Wit  tticit  tft  t^  uttfjcfriljr  (ctttja)  ttad)  bcm  S3aI)ttl)ofc  ? 

IV s  ahout  half  a  mile.    @i§  tft  nugcfol)r  (ctwn)  ciitc  \)a\ht  SSSltWt, 

About  as  much  as  nothing.    Uiigef al)r  fo  Die(  wic  nidjti^.  —  It  I  e  i  fl. 

(3)  To  b^  about  to  do  something  is  usually  im  -^egriff  fein. 

The  two  armies  were  ahout  to  fight. 

^ic  bcibcn  ^ccre  toavtn  im  IScflrtff  %\x  ffim^fcit. 

I  was  often  ahout  to  tell  him  so  frankly. 

^c^  mar  oft  im  Scgriff,  e§  t!)m  offen  su  fageit.  — Metier. 

Note. — Other  expressions  for  to  he  ahout  to  are:  cbcn  troUen, 
gcrobc  tuoUen,  and  auf  bem  ^unfte  fte^cn,  all  of  which  may  be 
literally  translated  in  English  :  I  just  wanted  to^  was  on  the  point  of, 
and  so  on. 

194.  English  little  has  two  German  renderings. 

(1)  When  little  can  be  replaced  in  English  by  smallj 
German  uses  !(ein. 

What  a  little  house  !    SBcId)  !fctttc§  ^m^ ! 

Who  doesuH  honor  the  little  isn't  worthy  of  the  great. 

2Bcr  bai8  ^Ictnc  md)t  c\)vt  ift  bc§  ^rofecn  titt^t  mcrt.  —  ©pric^mort. 

(2)  When  English  little  can  be  replaced  by  not  much^ 
German  uses  tDetltg.     It  is  usually  indeclinable. 

I  have  little  money,    ^d)  Ijabc  mciiig  ©clb. 

(^d)  I|abc  flctttc^  OJcIb  or  5l(ctngclii  means  I  have  small  change,) 

Do  you  speak  German?    A  little. 

@^red)Ctt  8tc  Ticutft^  ?    ©in  mcmg. 

There  is  gay  life  there,  and  even  if  little  money,  still  many  Jcinds  of 
wares,  ^a  ift  froI|cS  £cbcn,  uuD  menu  and)  menig  C^c(b,  bod)  oiclerlef 
SBorc  — 3  jd)  off  c. 


Chap.  23.]  VERBALS  AND  INFINITIVES.  153 

195.  English  ready  has  two  German  renderings. 

(1)  In  the  general  sense  of  preparedness  or  mental  readi- 
ness German  generally  uses  bereit.  It  usually  looks  to  the 
future  and  is  completed  by  an  infinitive. 

Are  you  ready  to  begin  9    @ittb  @ic  bereit,  ansttfangeit  ? 
/  am  ready  to  die.      Sereit  liitt  i^  jtt  fterbett.  —  g  o  u  q  u  e. 

(2)  In  the  sense  of  physical  readiness,  ready  is  German 
ferttg,  which  also  means  through,  finished,  generally  looks  to 
the  past,  and  is  not  completed  by  an  infinitive. 

He  isn't  ready  {through)  yet.     ©r  tft  nod)  ttt(i)t  fcrttg. 
Money.,  checks  are  prepared.,  ready  as  my  nod  commands. 
(SJcJiicr,  228cd)fet  \it\)\x  bereit,  fcrtig,  ttiie  meiu  SBiitf  ^tUni. 

—  ©rittparjer, 

196.  English  self  (himself,  myself,  themselves,  yourself)  has 
two  German  renderings. 

(1)  As  the  reflexive,  self  is  fi(^  for  the  third  person  of 
both  numbers  and  for  the  polite  form  of  address.  For  the 
first  and  second  persons  the  personal  pronoun  (dative  or  ac- 
cusative) is  used. 

Did  you  cut  yourself?    |>aft  btt  bir^  (|>aben  8te  fid))  gefdjnitten  ? 

/  hurt  myself,    ^d)  l)abe  mir  wel)  getan. 

Did  I  ever  promise  myself  to  you  ? 

^ah^  id)  mid)  bir  je  berf^jroi^en  ?  —  §  e  t)  j  e. 

(2)  As  the  intensive,  self  is  [elbft  or  felber  (indeclinable). 

Did  you  write  that  yourself  f 

^oben  @ie  \>^^  felbft  (f etber)  gefd^ricbeit  ? 

The  servant  would  like  to  be  a  knight  himself. 

^er  Stmd\t  to'dv^  f clber  eiti  JRitter  gem*  —  U  t)  I  a  n  b. 

Note.  —  @etb[t  also  means  even.  Never  use  cbcn,  which  is  usually 
the  adverb  just. 

Mortal,  even  your  thoughts  are  not  your  own. 

©ctbft  bie  ©ebanfcn,  @tcrbUd)cr,  finb  nid^t  betn  eigen.  —  Slrnbt. 


154  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  198. 

197.  English  to  order  has  two  German  renderings. 

(1)  In  ordering  something  at  a  store  or  restaurant,  use 
befteKen  (reg.  insep.,  aiix.  ()aben). 

Have  you  ordered  ?    ^abcil  @ic  ftt)Ott  bcftcUt  ? 

Fes,  dear  Lottie,  I  will  attend  to  and  order  everything. 

Sa,  (tcbc  fiotte,  id)  wiU  ^\U^  bcf orgcii  unb  bcftcUcn.  —  ®  o  c  t  f)  e. 

(2)  In  the  sense  of  command,  order  is  befe()(en  (befat)I, 
befo()(en,  aux.  !^aben)  with  the  dative.  It  may  be  followed 
by  an  infinitive  or  a  clause.     See  §  191 ,  1. 

He  ordered  you  to  do  it. 

(£r  bcfal)!  ':^\)\mx,  cgs  p  twn  (or  ba^  ®ic  c^  tun). 
dmimand  therefore  that  the  sepulchre  he  made  sure. 
^rtrum  ticftcl)!,  ba^  man  ba§  Q^vah  ticrwa^rc. 

—  «ibe(,  "Matt  27,  64. 
iVbie.  —  The  phrase  in  order  to  is  um  5U  with  an  infinitive  phrase, 
or  bamit  with  a  clause  whose  verb  is  usually  in  the  subjunctive. 

We  went  early  in  order  to  get  better  seats. 

5Bir  finb  fviil)  gegannen,  um  beffere  ^ldt5e  511  befommeii  (or  baniit 
tDir  beffere  ^^(ci^^e  betcimen). 

Hans  hurried  to  meet  them,  in  order  to  hear  lohat  loas  up. 
§an8  cUtc  i!)nen  entgegen,  um  ju  l)oreu,  luaS  e^  gab.  —  ipiHeru. 

Exercises. 

198.  (a)  1.  State  the  two  cases  where  English  verbals 
in  -ing  are  rendered  in  German  by  clauses.  2.  Illustrate 
each  case  by  two  German  sentences.  3.  Translate  three 
English  sentences  into  German  to  illustrate  English  infin- 
itives rendered  by  German  clauses.  4.  What  is  the  dif- 
ference between  the  use  of  o^ne  and  attftatt  in  this  chapter 
and  in  Chapter  XXII  ?     Illustrate  each  with  a  sentence. 

(6)  1.  Which  sentences  in  §  188  may  have  English  ver- 
bals in  their  translation  ?  2.  Which  sentences  in  §  188 
may  have  English  infinitives  to  translate  their  clauses? 
3.    Give  the  rule  (§§  189,  190,  or  191)  covering  each  case. 


Chap.  23.]  VERBALS  AND   INFINITIVES.  155 

(c)  Cojiversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  5lber  ic^  ^abe 
nocf)  ntc^t  befteKt.  2.  (5r  iDar  tm  ^egriff  ab^uretfen,  aber 
feine  @ac^en  marett  nod^  nt(^t  fertig.  3.  !Du  foKft  beinen 
9^ad)ften  Itebeti  n^ie  bic^  felbft  (3  9}^o[e  19,  18).  4.  @te 
^aben  nur  ungefd^r  erne  @tunbe  gearbeitet ;  'ta^  ift  ^u  tDenig. 

5.  3fe^t  bin  tc^  berett,  tnit  ber  Uberfe^ung   fortaufa^ren. 

6.  (gr  gtng  nac^  §aitfe,  o^ne  'tia^  ber  ^e^rer  e^  bemedte. 

199.  (a)  1.  She  told  him  to  translate  without  anybody's 
helping  him.  2.  Instead  of  her  going,  I  was  about  to  go 
myself.  3.  He  ordered  a  little  chicken  (translate  little  two 
ways),  but  it  wasn't  ready  (§  62).  4.  Coming  suddenly 
into  the  room,  the  teacher  found  the  pupils  whispering. 
5.  He  scolded  the  pupils  for  (baruttt)  not  being  ready  to 
translate.         6.   He  ordered  us  to  stop  before  we  were  ready. 

(6)  1.  I  know  him  to  be  about  sixty  years  old.  2.  He 
insists   on   our   ordering   everything   that   (it)a^)   we   like. 

3.  Having  translated  all  the  exercise  without  the  teacher's 
finding  a  single  mistake,  she  was  proud  of  knowing  so  much. 

4.  I  was  about  to  say  that  about  half  the  class  is  ready  to 
translate  this  page.  5.  Dewey  ordered  Gridley  to  begin 
the  fight  when  he  was  ready.  6.  Seeing  the  little  girl 
whispering,  the  teacher  ordered  her  to  stop. 

(c)  The  Development  of  Brandenhurg-Prussia.  —  1.  Two 
hundred  and  fifty  years  ago  Brandenburg  was  a  little  coun- 
try about  one-seventh  as  large  as  the  Prussia  of  to-day. 
2.  But  it  was  about  to  become  a  great  power  by  (baburd)) 
having  great  rulers.  3.  They  ordered  their  people  (ba^ 
3SoI!)  to  .work  hard.  4.  We  know  the  Great  Elector  to 
have  been  an  extraordinary  man.  5.  He  was  always 
ready  to  fight  in  order  to  help  his  people.  6.  He  wished 
them  to  thrive,  and  Prussia  is  proud  of  having  developed 
so  well  during  his  life. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 
REVIEW. 

200.  The  particle  ja  is  used  not  only  for  the  answer  yes, 
but  in  two  other  cases. 

(1)  3^  ^^^y  strengthen  a  command.  It  is  then  empha- 
sized and  may  be  translated  by  various  emphatic  words  in 
English,  hy  all  means,  he  sure,  and  so  on. 

Come  hy  all  means !    ^omittcn  Sie  ja ! 

Be  sure  not  to  forget  it !    Scrgcffen  Sic^§  ja  m(t)t ! 

Let  me  hear  it  right  soon. 

Saffctt  @ic  mid)  e^  ja  balii  ^orcit!  — !i?eff  ing. 

(2)  Qa  may  emphasize  a  well-known  fact.  It  is  then 
unaccented  and  may  often  be  translated  by  exclamatory 
why,  I  tell  you,  you  know,  or  by  inverting  the  sentence. 

Why,  I  told  you  so  !  or  Didn't  I  tell  you  so  ! 
^a§  fagt^  id)  Sljttcn  ja ! 

Why,  Ws  nonsense  !  or  IV s  nonsense,  I  tell  you  ! 
ei§iftjaUttfitttt!  — SSilbenbrud). 

Exercises. 

201.  (a)  1.  What  is  the  difference  in  general  between  ^aben 
and  fein  as  auxiliaries  ?  2.  Illustrate  by  two  sentences 
for  each  and  explain.  3.  Give  two  sentences  illustrating 
the  use  of  !^aben  and  fein  with  the  same  verb.  4.  When 
are  o'^tie  and  anftatt  followed  by  a  phrase,  and  when  by  a 
clause  ? 

(6)  1.  Make  a  table  showing  the  different  ways  in  which 
German  may  translate  an  English  verbal  in  -ing.  2.  Illus- 
trate with  a  German  sentence  each  way  shown  in  your  t^ble» 

156 


Chap.  24.]  REVIEW.  157 

3.    What  are  the  commonest  cases  where  an  English  infini- 
tive is  translated  by   a  German  clause  ?         4.    Illustrate. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize :  1.  ^ergeffetl  (^te 
}a  nid)t,  't>(x^  h)ir  eine  lange  D^etfe  mac^en!  2.  ^d^  fage 
3()nen  ja,  ba^  ^ud)  ift  nic^t  fc^tDcr.  3.  ^er  Secret  fanb 
t^n  flitftern  unb  befall  t^m  auf^u^i^reti-  4.  :Der  (Sc^liler 
^brte  auf  ju  ftiiftern.  5.  (g^  ()at  nur  ungefa()r  eine  ^albe 
(Stunbe  gebauert.       6.  Sir  finb  ja  no(^  (ange  ntc^t  fertig. 

202.  (a)  1.  Please  stand  up  and  begin  translating. 
2.  When  you  have  stopped  reading,  please  remain  seated 
(sitting).  3.  Work  hard,  and  instead  of  its  taking  about 
half  a  day,  you  can  be  ready  in  two  hours.  4.  His  little 
boy   was   only   four  years   old;    he   was   the    only   child. 

5.  We  are  in  a  hurry  (^aben  (Site) ;  we  ordered  (§  128,  1) 
about  twenty   minutes   ago   and   we   take   the  next  train. 

6.  In  ordering,  you  should  ask  how  long  it  will  take. 

(6)  1.  It  takes  about  an  hour  before  everything  is  ready. 
2.  Seeing  the  two  men  following  the  lady,  I  was  about  to 
speak  to  (anreben)  them.  3.  Finding  half  the  class 
whispering,  the  teacher  ordered  them  to  stop.  4.  It  took 
about   half   a  minute  before  they  all  stopped  whispering. 

5.  Why,  I  tell  you,  his  only  child  is  about  fifteen  years  old. 

6.  The  teacher  will  soon  begin  taking  you  for  a  dunce  if 
you  don't  stop  making  mistakes  all  the  time. 

(c)  1.  That  is  much  too  little ;  it  is  only  about  half  as 
big  as  I  wished.  2.  I  ordered  him  to  be  ready  to  take 
the  train  at  ten  o'clock.  3.  Instead  of  his  being  ready, 
it  took  about  half  an  hour  before  he  caml.  4.  Going 
walking  yesterday  evening,  we  heard  a  nightingale  singing. 
5.  Coming  home  late,  the  man  found  his  only  child  playing 
before  the  fire.  6.  The  teacher  told  us  to  take  pains  and 
translate  half  a  page  without  anybody's  helping  us. 


CHAPTER   XXV.  ' 
THE   PASSIVE  VOICE. 

^xkbvxd}  ber  ^rofe  unb  bic  IPinbmul^Ie. 

203.  9^eben  bent  (gc^loffe  griebric^^  be^  ©rogen  ^u  ^ot^^ 
bam  ftanb  eine  Stnbmuljle,  tion  wtldjtv  bte  folc^enbe  (Skfcf)tc^te 
eqa^It  Wixh.  T)er  ^efi^er  ber  ai}?u()(e  tuoKte  fie  nic^t  uer-- 
faufen.  ^er  ^dnu],  ber  fie  cjern  faufen  moKte,  lie^  ben 
Tlixikv  fomnien,  unb  fagte :  „Sa^  foil  benn  t>a^?  3S}enn  bu 
mir  bie  Wln^k,  bie  bort  oben  ftet)t,  nic^t  uerfaufft,  fo  luerbe 
ic^  fie  btr  einf ad)  ne^nten.'' 

„Senn  Sie  ba^  tun/'  antmortete  ber  SO^ltKer,  „fo  tnenbe  id) 
mic^  ^n  ba^  Berliner  (Skrid)t.  Ser  fd)lei^t  be()anbe(t  mirb, 
!ann  bort  immer  ©erec^tigfeit  finben."  ^iefe  5Intmort  gefiet 
bem  ^bnig  fo  fe^r,  baft  er  bent  9Jlii((er  feine  Sinbntii^te  (ieg. 
Unb  neben  bem  (gc^loffe  in  ^ot^bam  ift  fie  noc^  l)eute  gu  fe^en. 

Syntax. 

204.  The  Passive  Voice.  —  German  uses  the  passive 
voice  in  several  ways  not  common  in  English.  The 
passive  auxiliary  is  ttierben,  not  fcin,  and  the  agent  is 
usually  introduced  by  Don,  hi/. 

(1)  The  jt?er8o/ia/jt>a88iv«  corresponds  to  the  English. 

Iioas  hit  by  a  ball,    ^d)  tpurbe  \>on  eincm  SSaUc  flctro^en. 
Do  you  know  the  place  where  the  treasure  of  the  house  icas  con- 
cealed by  your  husband  f    ilcuuft  bu  bctt  Drt,  ^^  bem  ber  8d|a$  be^ 
^mife^  tiott  beinem  CiJattcii  cinft  ucrliotflcu  niarb?  — (Subermaun. 

Note.  — Germans  are  very  fond  of  nsing  man  with  the  active  where 
English  often  has  the  passive.  This  is  especially  true  of  verbs  that 
take  the  dative. 

158 


Chap.  25.] 


THE  PASSIVE   VOICE. 


159 


^^......^Jl  .WIN, 

..    .    :i- ^      ■*^-                  ^ 

^^:.^        ,^                           ^                              «,.. 

"    "^BfiH^"'''' •-■-^'-^■^^mtmmmmmmam^ 

35.   The  Famous  Windmill  at  Potsdam. 


/  was  told.    Man  jagte  mir. 

She  was  helped.    Man  ^atf  i^r. 

Ifs  true  she  was  called  only  little  Mariette. 

Man  naunte  fie  ^tuar  luir  bie  tieine  9Jfariette. 


•Bfc^offe, 


160  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§205. 

(2)  The  impersonal  passive  is  very  common  in  Ger- 
man. It  cannot  be  translated  literally  into  English, 
but  must  be  rendered  like  man  with  the  active.  ^^  is 
omitted  in  the  inverted  or  transposed  order. 

There'' s  a  dance  to-night. 

eg  ttJirb  l|cutc  abenb  gctttn$t,  or  ^cutc  obcnb  toirb  ^tian^t 

What  time  do  you  dine  f    Um  ttjictiicl  U^r  ttirb  jtt  SJJittag  gcgcffcn  ? 

They  were  playing  out  there. 

eg  wurbc  ba  brau^ctt  gcf^iclt,  or  ^a  brau^cn  ttiurbc  gcf^iiclt. 

J.n  answer  is  requested  {r.s.v.p.,  r^pondez  s'il  vous  plait). 

Um  3(tttttiort  toirb  gcbctcn  (U»3l.tti.g.). 

You  canH  have  anything  charged  (chalked  up)  here. 

Stngcfrcibct  tuirb  ^icr  nit^t.  -  iB  a  u  m  b  a  d). 

iVb^e.  —  The  English  passive  infinitive  after  to  be  is  translated  into 
German  by  the  active. 

This  house  is  for  sale  (to  be  sold),     ^icg  ^ttug  ift  $u  ticrlottfen. 
She  was  nowhere  to  be  seen.     @tc  War  ntrgcilbg  5U  fctjCll. 
TAey  looked  everywhere ;  the  belt  was  not  to  be  found. 
UhevaU  mivhc  gcfuti^t ;  ^a§  Moppet  toav  nid^t  aufsufittiictt. 

—  SBitbcnbrud). 

Notes. 

205.  Historical  Note.  —  Frederick  the  Great  (reigned  1740-1786) 
is  the  most  popular  of  all  the  Prussian  kings.  As  a  youth  he  was 
abused  by  his  crusty  old  father,  who  had  no  sympathy  with  the 
poetic,  musical  boy.  As  king,  Frederick  not  only  developed  the 
army  and  won  battles,  but  patronized  music  and  literature  as  well. 
In  the  later  years  of  his  life,  after  his  wars  were  over,  he  was  affec- 
tionately called  „2)cr  altc  ^vii^/'  a  name  which  still  clings  to  him 
throughout  Germany.  He  traveled  over  Prussia,  helping  trade 
and  industry  and  seeing  that  justice  was  carried  out  in  the  courts 
he  had  established.  He  called  himself  the  first  servant  of  the 
state  and  is  said  to  have  remarked  in  regard  to  the  courts :  "  The 
rich  have  the  means  to  defend  themselves;  the  poor  have  only 
me."  Such  was  „bcr  grofee  ^bnlg/'  who  did  more  for  Prussia  than 
any  of  his  predecessors. 


Chap.  25.]  THE  PASSIVE   VOICE.  161 

206.  English  to  be  is  variously  rendered  in  German  owing 
to  German's  being  more  exact  than  English.  The  common- 
est German  renderings  of  to  be  are  (1)  in  cases  of  feeling 
and  health,  and  (2)  in  indicating  place  where. 

(1)  When  to  be  applies  to  health  German  uses  fi^  BcfittbCtt 
or  c^  gcl^t  with  the  dative.  To  say  /  am  cold,  meaning 
/  feel  cold,  German  uses  c^  tft  with  the  dative :  (S^  tft  mir 
fait.  l!^ever  say,  Q6)  bin  tait  In  the  transposed  or  in- 
verted order  e^  is  omitted  in  this  latter  construction,  but 
not  in  the  expression  e^  ^e^t. 

lam  very  well.    SWtr  gcl)t^§  fc^r  gut.    ^r^  bcftnbc  ntit^  fc^r  ttio^l. 
He  is  (feels)  cold  ;  are  you  warm  f    ^I)m  ift  !alt ;  tft  ^^ttCtt  Warm  ? 
How  is  her  ladyship  ?    2Bic  gc^t  c§  bcm  f^rdtttctn  ?  —  gre^tag. 
So  Agathon  was  happy  beyond  all  his  hopes. 
^gat^on  befanb  fi(^  atfo  iiber  alle  feine  ^offnung  gfiitflit^. 

—  SBielanb. 

(2)  In  indicating  position  (place  where)  German  is  much 
more  exact  than  English.  Wherever  in  English  a  form  of 
to  be  is  used  to  denote  position,  and  could  be  replaced  by 
a  more  specific  word,  it  is  always  best  to  use  the  specific 
word  in  German. 

The  lamp  is  on  the  table.     2)ic  Sattt^C  ftcl)t  Jiuf  bcm  Xi\(i)t* 

His  residence  was  in  the  suburbs. 

Seine  338o^ttttttg  (ag  in  ber  iBorftabt. — SBilbenbruc^. 

There  was  nothing  bad  in  the  letter. 

©jg  ftanb  ttit^t^  St^tei^tc^  ttt  iiem  Srief .  —  ^  ^  o  m  a. 

j^ote.  —  Two  other  common  translations  of  to  be  are  ange^en  with 
the  accusative,  and  !oftcn. 

Hoio  much  is  that  ?    SieDiel  foftct  bag  ? 

What  are  my  eyes  to  you  9 

iEBaS  ge^cn  bic^  meine  ^lugen  on  ?  —  @  t  o  r  m. 

207.  English  it,  when  translated  into  German,  must  take 
the  gender  of  the  noun  to  which  it  refers. 


162  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  210. 

My  watch  is  fast ;  I  must  set  it. 
aWcittc  U^r  gc!)t  ttor ;  ic^  mu^  fie  ftcttcn* 

/S'o  she  awaited  the  evening.     It  came,  but  Mirtl  did  not. 
80  crmartctc  ftc  ben  5lbcub,    Gr  fam,  abcr  aWirtl  !am  ntt^t. 

—  31 0  j  e  g  g  cr. 

iVb^e.  —  When  a  German  neuter  noun  naming  a  person  is  referred 

to  by  a  pronoun,  the  pronoun  is  usually  neuter,  though  the  logical 

gender  often  prevails.     Note  below  lt)e(d)cS  {neuter,  to  agree  with  \i(x^ 

^rdulein)  i^rcn  {her,  to  agree  with  the  logical  gender). 

^Vhat  a  pretty  girl !    Did  you  notice  her  ? 
nt\^  I)ubfc^e§  a«dbcf)en!    §aben  @ie  t%  bcmerft? 
Are  you  the  lady  who  sent  her  secretary  to  me  f 
@inb  @te  bag  grdiitein,  ireldjeg  i^rcn  @c^reiber  ju  mlr  gcjc^tdEt  ^at? 

—  ^rctjtag. 

208.  English  viho  is  both  relative  and  interrogative.  As 
a  relative  it  is  translated  in  German  by  bcr  or  toetd^er;  as 
an  interrogative  by  itJCt*  The  indefinite  compound  relative 
{lie)  who  is  also  tticr*     German  never  omits  the  relative. 

Who  is  that  9    993cr  tft  bctttt  t>a§  ? 

That  is  the  gentleman  v^ho  lives  next  door. 

^a§  tft  bcr  ^txx,  bcr  (or  mclt^cr,  never  wcr)  ncbcttttit  ttio^ttt. 

He  that  hath  ears  to  hear,  let  him  hear. 

SBcrD^rctt^t,  Stt^orctt,  bcr  l)orc!  — 33iber,  a«att.  11,15. 

209.  English  which  corresponds  exactly  to  German  Xotliin 
in  being  both  relative  and  interrogative.  But  the  English 
relative  ivhich  may  also  be  rendered  in  German  by  the 
relative  bcr,  as  well  as  by  tpetc^cr.  German  never  omits  the 
relative. 

Which  man  is  that  ?    !iB?cIrf)cr  9Waun  ift  bttS  ? 

Is  this  the  hook  {which)  you  wanted  9 

Sft  bic§  ba§  ^n^,  ha^  (or  nicldjcfii)  Sic  tnilttfdjtcn  ? 

Tliere  are  crimes  over  which  no  grass  will  grow. 

@)g  gibt  Utttotcu,  iibcr  tticld)c  fcin  ©ro^  tt»od|ft.  —  a;-)  e  b  b  c  I. 

210.  English  what  is  usually  German  ttia^,  both  for  the 
interrogative  and  the  indefinite  compound  relative  (ivhaty 


Chap.  25.] 


THE  PASSIVE  VOICE, 


163 


36.    Frederick's  Palace  at  Potsdam. 

that  which).     But  when  what  modifies  a  noun,  German  must 
use  mi^,      Wliat  kind  of  is  toa^  f  iir  (ein)* 

WliaVs  the  matter  f    295a§  ift  bctttt  Io§  ? 

What  books  are  these  9  SSctdjC  SBitt^cr  fint)  ba§  ?  (§211,  3,  ?;,  Note.) 

TF/irt«  Mwd  of  hooks  are  these  ?    ^a^  fiir  23uti^er  jtnb  ba^  ? 

itfaw  ts  toTiai  Ae  eats,    ^tx  SpfJcnf c^  ift,  ttiai§  er  \^U  —  ^  e  u  e  r  b  a  d). 

211.  English,  that  is  either  a  conjunction  or  a  pronoun, 
relative  or  demonstrative. 

(1)  As  a  conjunction,  that  is  always  German  baj  (with  ^), 
and  is  followed  by  the  transposed  order. 

I  tell  you  that  it  isn't  true,    ^ii)  fdgc  btr,  ba^  c§  xii^t  ttia^r  ift. 

T^,ai  1/0?^  have  the  rose,  you  notice  only  by  the  thorn. 

^af  Ml  bic  JRofc  t)aft,  ba^  mcrfft  bti  nur  om  ^oriu  — Wilder t. 


164  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§2ii. 

(2)  As  a  relative,  that  is  the  German  relative  ber  (or 
iDeli^er),     German  never  omits  the  relative. 

That  isrCt  the  hook  {that)  I  ordered. 
^a§  ift  ntr^t  baig  Sur^,  bog  (or  m\^t^)  \^  bcftcUt  Ijabc. 
He  had  taken  to  the  city  fish  that  that  gentlewoman  had  ordered. 
@r  l)atte  ^tfii^e  in  bte  ^i^'bt  gcbrai^t^  bie  jcne  tionte^me  '^amt 
bcftcttt  W^c.  — §ei)jc. 

iVbre.  —  When  referring  to  neuters  like  aViti,  m6)\%,  ettt)a«,  and 
so  on,  the  relative  that  or  which  islva^. 

That  is  all  that  I  have.     2)ag  ift  alleS,  traS  id)  l^abe. 

Ybw  are  right;  stick  to  that  which  is  natural  and  that  one  can  take 
hold  of.  "^u  ^aft  re(^t ;  t)altc  bici^  an  bag,  n)o8  natiirtic^  ift  unb  h)a8 
man  grcifen  !ann.  —  § i tl e r n. 

(3)  As  a  demonstrative,  that  (those)  is  the  German  demon- 
strative ber  or  jener. 

(a)  !j)er  is  also  often  used  for  the  personal  pronoun  he, 
she,  it. 

There  is  the  man  that  did  it. 

^a  ift  ber  Wlann,  ber  (relative)  tS  flctan  I|at, 

There  is  the  man  ;  he  (that  one)  did  it. 

^a  ift  ber  Waww ;  ber  (demonstrative)  I)at  c^  ^tian. 

Let  that  one  never  he  chosen  hy  you,  that  has  never  heen  his  own 
friend,  ^cr  (demon.)  tncrbc  Jiie  \i9n  bir  crlcfcn,  ber  (rel.)  nic  fein 
cigener  {^reunb  gcmef en.  —  !i?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 

(h)  When  that  points  a  contrast  with  this  or  indicates 
something  definitely  remote,  German  uses  Jener, 

This  hook  is  easy,  that  one  hard. 

^ic§  '^MiS)  ift  itx^i,  jenc§  fii^ttier. 

Who  will  bring  hack  the  heautiful  days,  those  days  of  first  love  f 

9Ber  bringt  bic  fj^onen  J^age,  jeuc  S^ogc  ber  erftcn  Sicbe,  jurilrf  ? 

—  @OCtI)C. 

Note.  —  With  jein,  \i(x^  is  used  indeclinably,  referring  to  either 
singular  or  plural  nouns. 

What  men  are  those  ?    3Bftd)c  SDldnner  finb  benn  ba8? 

Those  are  heaven's  terrihle  judgments. 

2)a8  finb  be8  $lmmet«  furditbare  @eric^tc.  —  (S(i| tiler. 


Chap.  25.]  THE  PASSIVE   VOICE.  165 

Exercises. 

212.  («)  1.  Make  a  table,  with  illustrations,  of  all  the 
uses  of  ber,  bie,  'tia^,  2.  Of  all  the  equivalents  for  Eng- 
lish that;  for  which.  3.  Write  sentences  illustrating  the 
use  of  the  German  for  our  English  indefinite  compound 
relative  (who,  he  who;  what,  that  which). 

(h)  1.  Explain  all  the  ba^'s  in  T)ag  tft  \i(i^  ^U(^,  ha^  id) 
lag,  and  :Da^  tft  bag  ^uc^ ;  \>a^  (a^  tc^.  2.  What  word 
order  follows  the  relatives  ?  Give  examples.  3.  Trans- 
late :  Those  are  the  books  I  lost,  and  Those  were  the  only  ones 
he  had.  4.  Contrast  the  German  and  English  uses  of  the 
passive. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  $Bte  ge'^t  eg 
Qljutn  ?  (Se^r  gut ;  tc^  befittbe  tnic^  fe^r  tt)oI)(.  2.  SKag 
ge^t  bag  (gie  an?  3.  Siet)te(  foftet  ber  §ut?  (Sr  tft  ^u 
flettt.  4.  3ft  3f)Ttett  fait?  ^tr  ift  fur^tbar  mxm, 
5.  (S^eftern  abettb  hjurbe  gefutigett  uttb  gef^jtelt.  6.  ;i)ag 
fittb  bie  ^taffett,  tro  atn  fleiBigfteti  geferttt  lt)irb. 

213.  (a)  1.  He  asked  her  how  she  was,  and  she  replied : 
What's  that  to  you?  2.  Those  sentences  were  written 
by  that  little  boy.  3.  Those  are  the  girls  who  believe 
everything  I  tell  them.  4.  I  do  not  know  who  wrote 
this  sentence,  but  I  know  a  pupil  who  can  correct  it. 
5.  It  is  said  that  those  are  the  largest  birds  that  have  ever 
been  caught  alive.  6.  I  was  told  that  those  were  the 
rooms  where  they  danced  (§  204,  2). 

(6)  1.  I  do  not  know  whether  those  are  ray  books ;  what 
is  it  to  you?  2.  How  much  is  that  picture  which  is  on 
the  wall,  and  this  one  which  is  on  the  table  ?  3.  What 
is  the  matter?  Are  you  cold?  4.  He  said  that  those 
were  the  best  translations  that  had  been  made  by  this  class. 
5.  When  do  you  sup,  and  do  you  ever  dance  (§  204,  2)  after 


166  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  213. 

supper  ?         6.   They  looked  for  my  hat  everywhere,  but  it 
was  nowhere  to  be  found. 

(c)  Frederick  the  Great.  —  1.  Frederick  the  Great  lived 
mostly  in  Potsdam,  a  city  which  is  on  the  Havel,  west  of 
Berlin.  2.  There  was  built  for  him  there  a  beautiful 
castle,  which  was  called  "  Sans  Souci,"  by  the  king. 
3.  Frederick  was  often  to  be  seen  in  Potsdam,  when  he 
went  walking  with  his  dogs. "  4.  He  was  so  simple  and 
friendly  that  he  was  called  "  the  old  Fritz ''  by  the  people. 
5.  Those  were  the  qualities  that  made  him  popular  among 
the  Germans.  6.  When  he  died,  his  death  was  lamented 
by  all  Germany. 


CHAPTER   XXVI. 

ADJECTIVES. 

^rtebrid?  ber  ^ro^e  unb  lDafl?tngton. 

214.  griebrit^  ber  (Bxo^t  ben^unberte  (George  SBaf^ington 
fe^r.  (Seiner  9J?etnung  nad)  ftattb  SKaf^ington  an  ber  <Bpxi^t 
aller  @enerd(e  feine^  ^dtaittv^,  -3e  me^r  griebric^  l3on 
Saf^ington  ^drte,  befto  ^o^er  ftedte  er  i^n.  5lber  bte  (Sng* 
(dnber  fonnte  er  uber()aupt  md)t  (eiben,  benn  a(^  -^unbe^^ 
genoffen  fatten  fie  i^n  einma(  im  (Btxd)  gelaffen  unb  in  bie 
grdgte  33er(egen^eit  gebrad^t. 

!De^^a(6  intereffierte  er  fic^  befonber^  fiir  ben  ^rieg  ;^rt)ifc^en 
ben  5lmeri!anern  unb  ben  ©nglcinbern.  3^m  erfd^ienen 
5Baf^ington^  ^ampfe  hd  3;:renton  tjon  ber  groj^ten  ^ebeut- 
nng,  unb  er  nannte  fie  „ben  gtcin^enbften  J^elbjug  be^J  3^a^r* 
^unbert^."  %U  Saf()ington  bie  gngldnber  feeing,  ^at  grieb^ 
ric^  feine  trieg^funft  auf^  pc^fte  getobt  unb  fpater  ^at  er 
Saf^ington  ein  (Sc^n^ert  gefc^enft,  ba^  t>k  3<nfc^rift  trug : 
„!Der  ditefte  general  bem  beften." 

Syntax. 

215.  The  Use  of  Adjectives.  —  German  adjectives  differ 
from  English  in  their  (1)  inflection^  (2)  capitalization^ 
(3)  comparison^  and  (4)  use. 

216.  Predicate  adjectives  are  uninflected.  As  modi- 
fiers, adjectives  take  a  weak  ending  when  preceded  by 
an  inflected  form  of  a  „ber"  word  or  of  an  „ein"  word. 
When  not  so  preceded  they  take  a  strong  ending. 

167 


168  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [J  218. 

7%6  spirit  is  willing,  but  the  flesh  is  weak. 

—  33 i b.e r,2« at t.  26,  41. 
-4  wo6Ze  man  attracts  noble  men. 

©in  cbtcr  9Hcttf t^  sicljt  cble  ^Kcnfc^ctt  on.  —  @  o  e  t  ()  e. 
Shared  joy  is  doubled  joy,  shared  sorrow  is  halved  sorrow. 
@etei(te  f^reube  ift  bo^^eUe  f^reube,  0etct(ter  8(^mer$  ift  l|a(tier 
6(^mcr5.  —  2;  i  c  b  g  c. 

217.  German  adjectives  are  written  with  a  capital 
when  they  are  used  as  nouns.  After  citoa^  and  nid^t^ 
adjectives  are  also  written  with  a  capital,  except  anbere^, 
else.  But  in  cases  where  English  would  use  one  after 
the  adjective  — the  new  one,  a  good  one  —  German  uses 
simply  an  adjective  written  with  a  small  letter. 

This  is  the  best  one.    'I)tc§  ift  ba§  bcftc. 

I  hear  nothing  good  of  him.    ^rff  I)Ore  ttt^t^  ^tttc§  Hon  t^m. 

The  neio  in  it  isnH  good  and  the  good  isn't  new. 

^aS  9{eue  baran  ift  nit^t  ^ni,  unb  ha§  Q^nit  baran  ift  nidit  neu. 

He  maketh  his  sun  to  rise  on  the  evil  and  on  the  good  and  sendeth 
rain  on  the  just  and  on  the  unjust. 

@r  (a^t  fctttc  Sonne  nnfflcljcn  iibcr  bic  83i)fcn  unb  iibcr  bic  (IJutcn, 
unb  Ift^t  regnen  iiber  6Jcrcd|tc  nnb  Ungcrcd^tc.  —  ^ibet,  3)iatt.  5,45. 

218.  German  comparatives  and  superlatives  correspond 
to  English,  except  the  adverbial  superlative  with  om, 
the  absolute  superlative  with  auf,  and  the  comparison 
of  long  words. 

(1)  German  adjectives  may  be  used  as  adverbs 
except  in  the  superlative,  where  the  adverb  has  the 
form  am — en;  am  beften,  am  (iebften.  This  adverbial 
form  is  used  for  a  predicate  adjective,  singular  or 
plural. 

The  strong  man  is  mightiest  alone. 

^er  Starle  tft  om  mail^tigftcn  aUcin.  — @d)  lller. 


Chap.  26.] 


ADJECTIVES. 


169 


37.    Statue  of  Frederick  the  Great  in  Berlin. 


170  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§219. 

It  is  noble  to  distress  no  one,  nobler  always  to  practise  charity,  but 
noblest  to  love  even  enemies. 

@bcl  ift^^,  tticmanb  betriibcit,  cblcr  ift^g,  im  2Bol)imtt  ftcts^  fic^  iibcn, 
bot^  om  cbclftctt,  aut^  ^ctnbc  Hcbcn.  —  .^  e  r  b  e  r. 

And  the  oldest  one,  whom  he  had  always  loved  most,  hung  on  his 
lips.  Hub  bcr  ciltcftc,  ben  cr  immcr  om  mciftcn  flcUcbt,  Ijiug  an  fciitcn 
St^^JCtt.  —  @  0  e  t  ^  e. 

(2)  The  absolute  superlative  auf^  —  -e,  auf^  befte,  auf^ 
()b(^fte,  is  always  adverbial  and  means  m  the  -est 
possible  way. 

He  gave  you  the  highest  possible  praise.     @r  lobtc  ®ic  auf^  ^dt^fte. 

They  leaped  about  and  caroused  and  sang  their  very  best. 

<Bk  f^raugctt  fret  un'o  Ijieltcu  ©t^mait^,  unb  fanjicn  auf  t>a§  bcfte. 

—  U  I)  1 0 11  b. 

(3)  Long  words  are  regularly  compared  in  German. 
Never  use  me'^r  and  meift  to  form  the  comparative  and 
superlative.  SJie^r  is  used  only  for  rather  when  two 
adjectives  are  being  compared  with  each  other ;  tneift 
for  mostly  in  the  sense  of  usually. 

She  has  the  most  wonderful  voice  ! 

@ic  \)ai  bic  wuitbcrboUftc  Stimmc ! 

He  could  easily  take  me  for  more  {rather)  vain  than  virtuous. 

&x  fouute  tni(^  Ui^i  fur  mel^r  eitel  aW  tugenb^aft  I)a(ten. 

-eeffing. 

219!  The  principal  cases  where  the  use  of  German 
adjectives  differs  from  English  are  with  personal  pro- 
nouns, and  in  a  few  special  expressions. 

(1)  The  use  (usually  substantive)  of  an  adjective 
after  a  personal  pronoun  is  much  commoner  in  German 
than  in  English.  German  usage  is  far  from  uniform, 
but  an  adjective  following  a  personal  pronoun  is  gen- 
erally strong  in  the  nominative  singular  and  accusative 
plural,  weak  in  the  other  cases. 


Chap.  26.]  ADJECTIVES.  171 

Yuu  lucky  dog!    @ic  ^liirftit^cr  !  (man) ,  ^indii^t  I  (woman). 

Woe  to  me  most  wretched !    SBelje  mir  ^Irmftett ! 

I  see  you  both.    ^^  fcl)e  @tc  bcibc. 

We  Germans  fear  God,  nothing  else  in  the  world. 

993ir  ^ctttfc^ctt  fur^ten  &oit,  f ottft  m^t§  in  bcr  SBcIt  —  53  i  g  m  o  r  cf. 

(2)  There  are  several  cases  where  an  English  ad- 
jective must  be  rendered  in  German  by  a  paraphrase. 
The  commonest  of  these  is  the  case  of  f^jdt,  which  is 
rarely  used  with  fettl  except  when  eg  is  the  subject. 

It  is  late,     e^  ift  jpdt 
He  is  late,    ©r  fommt  \pdt 
The  train  is  twenty  minutes  late. 

^cr  3«fJ  l)«it  Sttian^tg  aWimttcit  2?erf^atttttg,  or  tft  urn  ^ttJatt^tg 
aJiittutcn  bcrf^atct. 

Your  watch  is  fast  (slow).    ^I)rc  ttl)r  geljt  tior  (nadj). 
You'll  be  too  late.    '2)tt  lotttmft  511  f^at»  —  @  1 0  r  m. 

Notes. 

220.  Historical  Note.  —  Frederick  the  Great  was  the  greatest 
military  genius  of  his  age.  He  won  Silesia  (<Srf)teficn)  from 
Austria,  thus  carrying  forward  the  expansion  of  Prussia,  which 
his  great-grandfather,  the  Great  Elector,  had  begun  by  annexing 
Pomerania  (^^ommcrn).  Austria  tried  to  avenge  herself  and,  in 
the  Seven  Years'  War  (1756-1763),  —  the  French  and  Indian  War 
in  America,  —  Russia,  Sweden,  and  France  all  joined  Austria 
against  Prussia.  But  Frederick's  genius  saved  the  country  in 
spite  of  the  desertion  of  his  one  ally,  England,  and  in  1772  he  was 
strong  enough  to  annex  part  of  Poland.  Great  as  Frederick  was 
in  war,  he  was,  like  the  Great  Elector,  greater  in  peace.  See 
§§  188,  192,  and  205. 

221.  English  to  stand  has  two  common  German  ren- 
derings. 

(1)  Literally  it  is  fte^en  (ftanb,  geftattben,  aux.  ^ben). 

How  long  did  you  stand  there  f    993te  taitgc  I)aft  bu  ba  flcftttitbCtt? 

They  now  stood  right  under  the  window. 

@ic  ftottben  jc^t  gerabe  uittcr  bcm  f^cnftcr.  —  SB il b e n b r u rf). 


172  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§222. 

(2)  For  to  stand,  endure,  suffer,  German  uses  leibetl  {Wii, 
gelitten,  aux.  ^aben). 

IcanH  stand  him.     ^d^  fotttt  t^tt  ntt^t  Icibctt* 

The  professor  couldnH  stand  me. 

%tx  ^rofcffor  Uxmit  mx^  nid^t  Icibcn.  — Xtjoma. 

222.  English  to  put  has  various  German  equivalents, 
usually  more  specific  than  the  English.  Compare  to  he, 
§206. 

(1)  To  put  in  an  upright  position  is  German  fteflett  (reg., 
aux.  ]^aben).  Use  it  vrhenever  English  could  use  stand  in 
an  active  sense. 

He  put  (stood)  the  pitcher  on  the  floor. 

Q:t  ftcMtc  ben  ^rug  auf  htn  Sobcn* 

Put  the  light  on  the  table. 

©tcUctt  @tc  bo§  2i^t  ouf  ben  ^^ifd^.  — @torm. 

Note.  —  @te((en  is  used  for  to  put  questions  (^ragcn  ftcflcn,  see 
§  16,  2,  6,  Note  b)  and  also  for  to  set  clocks  or  watches. 

(2)  To  put  in  a  reclining  position  is  (egett  (reg.,  aux.  ^abeit). 
Use  it  whenever  English  could  use  lay,  laid,  laid  for  to  put. 

Put  the  book  on  the  desk,    ficgctt  (3ic  bflS  23ud^  auf  ba§  ^nlt. 
Put  every  man^s  money  in  his  sack''s  mouth. 
Sege  jeoUt^em  fein  ^etb  oben  in  fetnen  Sad. 

—  $5ibct,  1  mo\t  44,1. 

(3)  Less  definite  than  ftetten  and  legen  is  fe^en  (reg.,  aux. 
\)(ihtn).  Use  it  whenever  English  could  substitute  to  set  for 
to  put. 

He  put  his  grip  behind  the  door. 

@r  fc^tc  fcittc  Dficifctofi^c  Ijtntcr  btc  Xilr. 

Let  us  put  Germany  in  the  saddle^  so  to  speak. 

Se^en  mir  ^cntfc^Ionb,  fo  ju  fagcn,  in  ben  BatttU  —  35  i  s  m  a  r  cf. 

(4)  German  uses  ftedett  (reg.,  aux.  I^aben)  for  to  put  (com- 
pare to  stick)  when  the  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  concealed 


Chap.  26.]  ADJECTIVES.  173 

in  or  surrounded  by  the  object  of  the  preposition.     Do  not 
confuse  fted en  with  ftec^en,  to  prick,  to  sting. 

Put  the  sword  in  the  sheath. 

©tcrfcit  Sic  tsa^  ©t^nicrt  in  bic  (S(^cibc, 

Hans  put  the  key  in  his  pocket. 

|>tttt)g  ftctftc  iictt  Srffluffct  ill  bic  Xafri^c,  — ^tnern. 

(5)  German  uses  tutt  (tat,  getatt,  aux.  ^aben)  in  a  loose 
sense  for  many  uses  of  to  put,  especially  with  liquids. 

Please  put  in  some  more  milk. 

^ittt,  tun  ®ie  itoi^  etiua^  Wilti)  Ijinein ! 

So  put  it  (the  bud)  in  a  glass  of  water. 

®o  ttt^  t§  in  citta93offcrg(a)§,  — ^cud^tcrsleben. 

223.  English  the  is  not  always  the  definite  article  hct,  hit, 
bai^»  With  comparatives  —  the  more,  the  merrier  —  the  first 
the  is  German  je,  the  second  befto. 

Hie  farther  we  went,  the  hotter  it  got. 

^c  ttjcitcr  ttjir  giiigcit,  bcfto  Ijci^cr  ttJUttic  c§. 

The  more  the  body  is  hidden,  the  more  the  soul  is  disclosed. 

^c  mc^r  Her  ^J&vptv  ncrpltt  (ift),  bcfto  mtl^v  cntput  fir^  bic  Sccfc. 

—  9fiid)ter. 

Exercises. 

224.  (a)  1.  Make  an  outline  table,  showing  the  uses  of 
adjectives  treated  in  this  chapter.  2.  Illustrate  each 
use  by  a  German  sentence.  3.  Translate,  He  put  it  on 
the  table,  in  as  many  ways  as  you  can.  4.  Explain  in 
what  position  the  object  represented  by  e0  will  be  in  each 
case. 

(6)  1.  Classify  according  to  your  outline  table  the  uses  of 
adjectives  in  the  last  illustration  in  §  4,  §  9,  §  16,  1,  §  23,  1, 
§  29,  2,  §  30,  1,  Note,  §  41,  1.  2.  Also  in  §  85,  2,  Note, 
§  100,  4,  Note,  §  110,  1,  §  111,  1,  §  112,  §  113,  1,  §  119,  3. 
3.  Also  in  §  120,  3,  §  173, 1  and  2,  §  211,  3,  6.  4.  Memo- 
rize  the  last  illustrations  in  §  216  and  §  217. 


174  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§225. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^c^  fann  bie 
^naben  nic^t  (etben,  bie  bie  ^dttbe  immer  in  bie  §ofentafd)en 
ftecfen.  2.  (gie  Srmfter,  <Sie  fommen  ^u  fpiit.  3.  Qd} 
^abe  nid)t^  gatfc^e^  (wrong)  im  (Sa^e  gefe^en.  4.  Qt 
langer  tt)ir  arbeiten,  befto  beffer  luerben  unfere  5(ufgaben. 
5.  ^teden  (Sie  bie  ^(umen  in  eine  35afe,  fe^en  @ie  bie  33afe 
anf  ben  ^ifc^,  nnb  tnn  (Sie  etma^  Saffer  ^inein !  6.  !l)a«^ 
SJiabrfien  iiberfe^t  am  beften,  ob\vo\}i  fein  ^ruber  anf^  ffeipigfte 
arbeitet. 

225.    (a)  1.   The   good  do  not  always  live  the  longest. 

2.  I  can't  stand  that  man  ;  he  always  puts  (§  222,  3)  his 
hat  on  (auf),  before  he  leaves  the  house.  3.  The  longer 
we  wait  for  him,  the  later  we  shall  be.  4.  Please  put 
the  little  table  where  it  will  stand  most  firmly.  5.  The 
teacher  asked  the  boy  to  put  on  the  table  the  letter  which 
he  had  just  put  in  his  pocket.  6.  This  is  the  most 
beautiful  place  I  ever  saw;  there  can't  be  anything  more 
wonderful. 

(b)  1.  Hard  work  makes  good  pupils,  or  in  other  words, 
the  harder  one  works,  the  better  one  learns.  2.  We 
can't    stand    the    coffee   when    they   put    hot   milk   in   it. 

3.  He  stood  there  as  if  he  didn't  understand,  although  the 
teacher  spoke  most  distinctly  (§  218,  2).  4.  Please  put 
your  cane  in  the  corner  and  [put]  your  things  on  this  chair. 

5.  The  man  put  his  satchel  on  the  floor,  opened  it  most 
carefully,  took  out  something  black,  and  put  it  in  his  pocket. 

6.  You  poor  thing  {write  for  both  boy  and  girl),  you  are  late, 
and  the  best  seats  are  already  occupied. 

(c)  The  Great  King,  —  1.  Frederick  the  Great  stands  at 
the  head  ((^pi^e)  of  Prussian  rulers,  the  greatest  Hohen- 
zollern.  2.  In  his  youth  he  had  to  stand  all  kinds  of 
severity  from   his   father.         3.    But  as   king  he  showed 


Chap.  26.]  ADJECTIVES.  175 

himself  the  most  extraordinary  general  of  his  age.  4.  He 
was  always  doing  something  good  for  his  people  (^o(!). 
5.  And  of  course  (natiirUc^)  the  harder  he  worked  for  them, 
the  more  they  honored  and  loved  him.  6.  In  [the  year] 
1912  the  whole  German  people  celebrated  with  great  enthu- 
siasm the  two  hundredth  birthday  of  the  "  Great  King." 


CHAPTER   XXVII. 
USE  OF  TENSES. 

©oetl^e  unb  Sd^tUer. 

226.  ^^  fommt  nur  felten  t)or,  \>a^  bie  beiben  grbgten 
^ic^ter  eine^  i^anbe^  fo  gut  TUtteinanber  ubereinfttmmen  iDie 
©oet^e  unb  (Schiller  e§  taten.  !^ie  greunbfd^aft  gttJtfc^en 
ben  beiben  begann,  nac^bem  (Scolder  fd^on  einige  ^dt  in  3ena 
gelebt  ^atte.  (gif  3o^re  lang  (1794-1805)  ^aben  fie  aKe^, 
ira^  fie  fd^rieben,  gufantmen  bef^roc^en.  Senn  bem  einen 
ein  guter  ^ebanfe  einfiel,  fo  teitte  er  i^n  bem  anbern  mit. 

(So  fe^ten  fie  eine  greunbfc^aft  fort,  in  ber  man  feine 
(giferfuc^t  bemerft.  (Sinmal  I)at  man  ©oet^e  gefragt,  ob  er 
nic^t  gugebe,  bag  er  grciger  fei  aU  (Schiller.  „9lun,"  ant- 
mortete  er,  „anftatt  ^u  fragen,  mer  ber  grdgte  ift,  fodte  man 
@ott  banfen,  bag  e^  ^mi  fo  groge  !iDirf)ter  gibt." 

Syntax. 

227.  The  Use  of  Tenses.  —  In  general  the  use  of  tenses 
in  German  corresponds  to  that  in  English.  But  there 
are  several  exceptions. 

(1)  German   has   no  progressive  or  emphatic  forms. 

These  are  rendered  by  simple   tenses.     Never   use   a 

form  of  tun  for  the  English  emphatic  do  in  do  come  and 

so  on.     See  §  178,  Note  h. 

Do  you  like  tea  ?    Xnufctt  Sic  gcrtt  Xcc  ? 

res,  Ida.    ^a,  ir^  trinfc  i^n  gem. 

He  doesnH  see  the  rocky  reefs. 

@r  fd^ottt  ttid^t  bic  ^clf cnriffc.  —  $  e  I  n  e. 

170 


USE  OF  TENSES. 


38.   The  Statue  to  Goethe  and  Schiller  at  Weimar.  —  Note 
the  inscription. 

228.  The  German  present  is  used  not  only  for  the 
simple  English  present  and  for  the  progressive  and 
emphatic  forms  of  the  English  present,  but  also  for  the 
Englisli  future  and  with  fd^on  for  the  English  perfect. 


178  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§229. 

(1)  When  the  English  future  is  used  with  an  ad- 
verbial expression  referring  to  the  future,  it  is  rendered 
in  German  by  the  present.  German  considers  the 
adverb  sufficient  to  indicate  the  tense.  When  the 
adverbial  expression  is  omitted,  the  future  is  used. 
Avoid  fodetl  and  tt)oI(en  as  future  auxiliaries,  except  in 
the  question  shall  we?  tt)o((en  intr?     See  §  69,  3. 

I  shall  go  to  town.    ^^  ttJerbc  ttt  bic  'BicC^i  gc^cn. 

This  afternoon  I  shall  go  to  town. 

^cutc  nati^mittag  gc^c  it^  in  bic  BiatsU 

He  will  do  that.    (Sr  ttitrb  "isa^  iMn* 

He  will  do  that  to-morrow,    ^a^  twi  cr  morgen» 

Only  wait,  soon  thou  too  shalt  rest. 

SSartc  ttur,  balbc  trul^cft  bit  ami^»  —  @  o  c  t  ^  e. 

(2)  The  English  perfect  has  two  distinct  meanings. 
When  we  say,  I  have  been  there^  the  verbal  action  is 
ended.  But  when  we  say,  I  have  been  here  two  hours, 
the  verbal  action  is  still  going  on.  For  this  English 
perfect  denoting  past  verbal  action  continuing  into  the 
present,  German  uses  the  present  with  f(f)on. 

How  long  have  you  studied  German? 

9!Sic  langc  Icrttcn  (trctBen)  ®ic  fdioit  ^ctttfrf)  ? 

He  has  been  sick  a  long  time.    @r  ift  ft^oit  loitflC  fraitf. 

For  many  days  I  have  noticed  it  in  silence. 

8t^ott  titclc  Xagc  fc^  tt^^§  fd^hicigenb  an.  —  @  (f)  i  U  c  r. 

Note.  —  Similarly  for  the  English  pluperfect  denoting  verbal 
action  continuing  into  the  past,  German  uses  the  past  with  fdjon. 

How  long  had  you  studied  German  f 

SSle  tanqe  ferntcn  (trieben)  @ie  fd)on  !I)eiitfc^? 

Hans  Liefrink  had  been  in  the  church  since  daybreak. 

^an8  Sicfrtnt  n)or  fd^on  felt  XageSanbruc^  in  bcr  ^irdjc  — bittern. 

229.  For  the  English  past  (imperfect,  preterit), 
German  uses  the  past  or  the  perfect. 


Chap.  27.]  USE  OF  TENSES.  179 

(1)  The  G-erman  past  (imperfect)  is  the  tense  for 
connected  narrative.  It  is  the  regular  tense  for  all 
novels,  stories,  and  histories. 

Once  upon  a  time  there  was  a  man.    (I§  tt)ar  ctnmct  citt  9Wantt» 

/  came.,  saw,  and  conquered.     ^^  tam,  f a^,  ttttb  ficgtc* 

She  stopped  and  trembled  in  every  limb  with  fright. 

@ic  Uxtb  ftc^en  mx^  gittcrtc  tjor  St^rccf  an  aUcn  ^(tcbcrtt» 

-3lci)of!e, 

(2)  The  G-erman  perfect  is  the  tense  for  stating  facts 
or  reporting  particular,  unconnected  events.  Usually 
where  in  English  a  form  of  the  verb  with  did  is  or  can 
be  used,  German  uses  the  perfect. 

This  morning  I  bought  two  books. 

^cutc  tttorgctt  i^aht  i^  awci  Slither  gc!aiift» 

Did  you  see  the  airship  f    ^abctt  ®ic  ba§  Sttftfd^tff  gcfe!^cn  ? 

Whom  did  you  drink  to  last  f 

SBcm  \^aSsX  %\i  jutc^t  sugctrmifcn  ?  —  @  e  r  ft  a  cf  e  r. 

Note.  —  (a)  As  soon  as  an  isolated  fact  or  event  becomes  connected 
with  other  events  so  as  to  make  a  narrative,  German  uses  the  past 
instead  of  tlie  perfect.  If  in  the  first  example  above,  instead  of  re- 
porting a  particular  act,  I  were  to  narrate  what  I  did  this  morning, 
I  should  use  the  past.  This  morning  I  got  up  early,  went  to  town  and 
bought  two  books.  §eute  ntorgen  ftanb  id)  friil)  auf,  ging  in  bie  @tobt 
unb  faufte  mir  jtcei  S3ii(^er. 

(6)  On  the  other  hand,  if  in  the  midst  of  a  narrative  in  the  past 
tense  a  particular  event  is  to  be  emphasized,  it  is  put  into  the  perfect. 
For  example,  in  the  above  sentence  if  I  wanted  to  add  with  emphasis, 
And  then  I  dropped  them  in  the  mud,  I  should  say,  Utib  bie  \\aht  ic^ 
bann  in  ben  @cf)mu^  fatten  taffen. 

Notes. 

230.  Historical  iVoie.  —  Johann  Wolfgang  Goethe  (1749-1832) 
was  born  twenty  years  after  Gotthold  Ephraim  Lessing  (1729- 
1781)  and  ten  years  before  Friedrich  Christoph  Schiller  (1759- 
1805).  These  three,  especially  the  two  friends  Goethe  and 
Schiller,  are  the  lions  of  German  literature,  the  best  known,  the 


180  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [J  231. 

most  admired,  the  oftenest  quoted.  Though  German  literature 
reached  its  highest  perfection  in  Goethe  and  Schiller,  it  by  no 
means  ended  there.  The  following  brief  summary  is  meant  only 
for  reference.  It  contains  the  names  and  dates  of  Germany's  lead- 
ing literary  men  since  the  time  of  Goethe  and  Schiller,  especially 
those  most  often  quoted  in  this  book. 

With  the  new  nineteenth  century  began  the  so-called  Romantic 
School  in  German  Literature.  Its  greatest  names  are  :  the  brothers 
August  Wilhelm  Schlegel  (1767-1845)  and  Friedrich  Schlegel 
(1772-1829),  Ludwig  Tieck  (1773-1853),  Heinrich  von  Kleist 
(1777-1811),  Joseph  von  EichendorfE  (1788-1857),  and  Heinrich 
Heine  (1797-1856).  The  poets  of  the  wars  of  liberation  (bie 
53efretung8fricge),  Korner  (1791-1813),  Arndt  (1769-1860),  and 
Ruckert  (1788-1866),  were  followed  by  Uhland  (1787-1862), 
Kerner  (1786-1862),  Hauff  (1802-1827),  Moricke  (1804-1875), 
Wilhelm  Muller  (1794-1827),  Hoffmann  von  Fallersleben  (1798- 
1874),  Geibel  (1815-1884),  and  SchefEel  (1826-1886).  Baumbach 
(1841-1905)  is  best  known  in  America  for  his  SJiordjen.  Freytag 
(1816-1895),  Heyse  (1830-  ),  Keller  (1815-1890),  and  Storm 
(1817-1888)  represent  the  nineteenth  century  in  Story;  Hebbel 
(1813-1863)  and  Wildenbruch  (1845-1909)  in  the  Drama; 
Hauptmann  (1862-  )  and  Sudermann  (1857-  ),  the  so- 
called  Naturalistic  Movement. 

231.  English  to  occur  is  usually  tiorfommcn  or  cinfottcn* 

(1)  33or!ommen  (!am  Dor,  tjorgefommen,  aux.  fetn)  is 
used  in  1;he  sense  of  to  happen. 

That  often  occurs.    ^a§  fommt  puftg  tjor. 

It  wouldn't  have  occurred  again. 

@iS  laarc  ntt^t  niicbcr  tjorgcfommcn.  —  JiltHencron. 

(2)  @infa((en  (fiel  ein,  etngefatlen,  aux.  fetn)  is  used  with 
the  dative  for  to  occur  to  some  one.     See  §  41,  1,  Note. 

It  occurred  to  him  that  he  ought  to  go. 

@d  ift  i^m  etngefatten,  bn^  er  ge^en  foKte. 

It  all  only  occurred  to  me  on  the  way. 

@i^  fid  mir  attcS  crft  uutcmcoi^  ctii.  —  ^  c  t)  f  c. 


Chap.  27.] 


USE  OF  TENSES. 


181 


39.    Goethe's  "  Garden  House"  at  Weimar.  —  Here  the  poet  often 
withdrew  from  his  city  house,  to  work  in  quiet  surroundings. 

232.   English  to  agree  has  two  German  equivalents. 

(1)  To  agree  with  somebody  is  iibereinftimmetl  (reg.  sep., 
aux.  ^aben),  tnit. 

/  agree  with  you  perfectly. 

^d)  ftimmc  mtt  S^»ctt  oofifommctt  ttbcrcin. 

Their  icitness  (testimony)  agreed  not  together. 

S^r  3cttgttt§  fttmmtc  ntr^t  iibcrcin*  —  33  i  b  e  I,  90^  a  r  c  u  3  14,  56. 

(2)  To  agree  to  something  in  the  sense  of  admit  is  jugebett 
(gab  ^u,  gugegeben,  aux.  f)aben)  with  a  direct  object. 

Yes,  I  agree  to  that  (admit  it),    ^a,  bag  gcbe  td^  Jtt. 

/  agree  that  you  are  a  better  newspaper  man. 

^d)  gcbc  5tt,  tta^  ®ic  ctn  bcffcrcr  Sourttatift  ftttb.  — ^retjtag. 


182  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§234. 

233.  English  to  continue  has  two  common  German  ren- 
derings. 

(1)  When  used  intransitively  or  with  an  infinitive,  to 
continue  is  fortfa^reti  (fu^r  fort,  fortgefaftren,  aux.  i)aben). 
See  §  180,  2. 

She  continued  to  cry.    ®tc  ftt^r  fort  ju  ttictnctt. 

'■'•  Now  that  was  noteworthy^''''  he  continued. 

„9itttt  mar  basS  mcrfttmrbig,"  fu^r  cr  fort.  —  SSilbenbrurf). 

(2)  When  used  with  an  object,  to  continue  is  usually  fort- 
fe^en  (reg.  sep.,  aux.  ^bett). 

He  continued  his  work,    ©r  fc^tc  fcinc  Strbcit  fort. 

The  ship  continues  on  its  way  with  oars. 

^a§  S^iff  f c^t  feittCtt  SScfl  tnit  Dlubcrn  fort.  —  2B  i  e  I  a  n  b. 

234.  English  well  has  three  common  German  renderings. 

(1)  As  an  adverb  modifying  a  verb,  well  is  gut. 

You  did  that  well.    ^a§  Ijobctt  @tc  ^vd  gemai^t. 

That  was  well  given.    ^ttsS  War  ^\xi  gcgcbett.  —  ^  r  c  t)  t  a  g. 

(2)  As  an  adverbial  interjection,  well  is  ttutt.  It  comes 
first  in  the  sentence  and  is  set  off  by  a  comma. 

Well,  whafs  up  f    9?tttt,  ttia§  gibt^S  ? 

So  !    Well.,  good-by,  Mr.  Landlord  ! 

^a  f 0 !    9?tttt,  abictt,  ^crr  2Strt !  —  ?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 

Note.  —  When  not  set  off  by  a  comma,  nun  means  now^  the  same 
as  jetjt. 

Now  everything  must  change. 

Sf^un  ntu^  ftdi  alU9,  alleS  ttjcnbcn.  — Ul)tanb. 

(3)  As  predicate  adjective  referring  to  health,  well  is  Ger- 
man h)ol)I.     See  §  88,  Note,  and  §  206,  1. 

Now  I  am  well  again.    ^c<?t  bin  irf|  (ift  mir)  toicber  tuo^I. 

But  are  you  well^  father  ? 

Stbcr  ift  (Jttc^  aur^  too^t,  SJater  ?  ~  e  d)  I H  c  r. 


Chap.  27.]  USE  OF  TENSES.  183 

Exercises. 

235.  (a)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  showing  the  cases 
where  the  use  of  tenses  in  German  differs  from  the  English 
use.  2.  Illustrate  each  use  in  your  table  by  a  sentence. 
3.  What  is  the  difference  between  ^^c^  treibe  fc^otl  ^tt)et 
3a^re  T)eutfc^,  and  ^c^  ^abe  fdjon  jlDei  ^(i^xt  ^Deutfc^  ge* 
trieben. 

(h)  1.  Classify  according  to  your  table  the  use  of  tenses 
in  the  last  examples  in  §  5,  §  6,  1,  §  15,  1,  a,  §  29,  3,  §  62, 
§  68,  1,  §  73,  2,  §  98,  2.  2.  Also  in  the  last  examples  in 
§  111,  2,  §  147,  3,  §  157,  3,  §  167,  2,  §  185,  1,  h.  3.  Find 
in  §  231,  2  an  example  of  §  185,  1,  h. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize :  1.  SBie  (atige  tret* 
ben  (Ste  \6)oxi  !l)eutfc^?  2.  "^a^  gebe  ic^  p,  aber  e^  tft 
mir  nod)  nte  eingefaden.  3.  9^un,  fa^ren  @te  fort! 
!l)ag  n^ar  fel)r  gut  Uberfe^t.  4.  (g§  fiet  tntr  ntc^t  etn, 
bag  ba^  ^ter  oorfommen  fbnnte.  5.  Sir  finb  fdjon  (ange 
^ter,  unb  eg  gefaKt  un^  [e^r  gut,  aber  morgen  miiffen  voxx 
unfere  9?etfe  fortfe^en.  6.  9^un,  geben  @te  3U,  bag  bag 
ntd)t  t)orfomTnen  foKte? 

236.  (a)  1.  Well,  how  are  you  to-day  ?  Did  you  continue 
to  sleep  well  ?  2.  No,  I  must  agree  that  I'm  not  very 
well,  though  I  have  been  at  home  three  weeks.  3.  We 
don't  agree  with  you  that  you  should  continue  your  work 
here.  4.  It  did  not  occur  to  him  to  agree,  so  they  con- 
tinued quarreling.  5.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Ger- 
many, and  how  do  you  like  it  ?  6.  We  have  been  here 
two  months,  and  we  agree  with  you  that  it  is  a  beautiful 
country. 

(6)  1.  We  shall  continue  our  work  to-morrow  as  if  noth- 
ing disagreeable  had  occurred.         2.   It  only  (§  185,  1,  h) 


184 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§  236. 


occurred   to   me   yesterday   how   long  I   have   been   here. 

3.   If  you  agree   with  us   that   we   have   been   here  long 

enough,  we  shall  con- 
tinue our  journey  day 
after     to-morrow. 

4.  Well,  you  read  that 
page  so  well,  please 
continue      reading. 

5.  Yes,  I  agree  that  it 
often  occurs  that  he  is 
too  late.  6.  Well,  I 
have  studied  German 
for  twenty  years ;  when 
do  you  think  I  shall 
know  it  ? 

(c)  Tlie  Oerman  Clas- 
sics.—  1.   It    does    not 
often  occur  that  a  people 
knows    its    classics    as 
well   as   the   Germans. 
2.    On      the      German 
stage,   as   in   the    Ger- 
man   schools,   we   con- 
stantly hear  the  works 
of  Goethe  and  Schiller.         3.  It  never  occurs  to  the  Ger- 
mans  to   bring   up  their  children  without  teaching  them 
the   classics.  4.    Even   if   we   do  not   agree   with   the 

Germans,  we  must  agree  that  they  have  very  good  schools. 
5.  That  has  been  for  years  a  well-known  fact.  6.  And 
Germany  will  continue  to  have  good  schools  as  long  as  it 
continues  this  work. 


40.   Schiller, — The  bust  by   Daneker 
in  the  Library  at  Weimar. 


CHAPTER   XXYIIL 
REVIEW. 

237.  The  particle  hO(i),  besides  its  regular  adversative 
meaning  of  after  all,  yet,  has  other  uses.  But  in  all  of  them 
there  is  an  adversative  idea. 

(1)  In  giving  an  affirmative  answer  to  a  negative  question 
or  statement,  German  uses  boc^  for  yes,  instead  of  ja.  It 
contains  a  suggestion  of  contradiction,  Oh,  yes,  but — . 

Can''t  you  see  9  —  Oh,  yes,  I  can.    ^omten  @ie  nit^t  f  c^cn  ?  —  ^OJ^, 
/  donH  think  he'' II  come.  —  Oh,  yes,  he  will. 
^^  gtaubc  tttj^t,  bfl^  cr  tommt  —  ^ot^. 

You  wouldnH  have  recognized  your  father  again,  would  you? —  Oh, 
yes,  I  would.    ^VL  pttcft  bcittcn  3?atcr  nti^t  tuicbcr  crfannt  ?  —  ^ot^, 

—  @  c^  i  n  e  r. 

(2)  ^q6)  may  be  used  to  add  emphasis  to  a  sentence.  It 
is  then  unaccented,  and  may  be  translated  in  many  ways. 

Do  come  in !    ^ontmcn  @ic  J>ot^  herein ! 
Well,  iVsfine  that  you  are  coming  ! 
^a§  ift  boc^  nett,  tsa^  8tc  fommcn. 
Do  calm  yourself.    Scru^igc  bir^  bo(^  !  —  25i(benbru(^. 

Note. — The  English  repetition  of  the  auxiliary  —  isnHitf  donH 
they  f  has  he  9  and  so  on  —  is  rendered  in  German  by  nid)t  or  nid)t 
ft)af)r  for  the  negative,  by  bod^  for  the  affirmative. 

Ifs  warm,  isnH  it  f    (Ss  ift  tDorm,  nid^t?  (or  nic^t  iDa'^r?) 
It  isn't  warm,  is  it  f    @g  ift  bod)  ntd)t  rt)arm  ? 
You  arenH  going  to  start  out  again  to-day,  are  you? 
®ie  toerben  ^eute  bod)  nid)t  trteber  oufbrec^eti?  — i^ejjing. 
186 


186  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§239. 

Exercises. 

238.  (a)  1.  Explain  and  illustrate  with  sentences  the 
chief  differences  between  the  use  of  the  passive  in  German 
and  English.  2.  Explain,  with  examples,  the  uses  of 
the  German  equivalents  for  that,  well,  who,  to  put,  which. 

3.  In  what  respects  does  the  use  of  adjectives  in  German 
differ  from  English  use  ?     Illustrate  with  sentences. 

(h)  1.  What  is  the  difference  between  auf^  befte  and  am 
beften?  2,  What  English  tenses  may  be  represented  by 
the  German  present?  3.  Illustrate  each  use  with  a  sen- 
tence. 4.  Explain  fully,  with  illustrations,  the  difference 
between  the  use  of  the  German  past  (imperfect,  preterit) 
and  perfect  tenses. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^a§  '^at  er 
iDO^I  noc^  ntc^t  itberfe^t.  —  X)oc^.  2.  ^te  luoden  boc^  ntc^t 
jugcben,  \iCi%  @te  t^n  ni(^t  leiben  fontien?  3.  2S?a^  fdtlt 
3^nen  ein  (§  41,  1,  Note)?    ga^ren  ®ie  bod)  fort  gu  (efen! 

4.  (Sie  @Ut(l(td)er!  @eftern  abetib  hjurbe  getanjt,  unb  (Sie 
famen  nid)t  ^u  fpcit.  5.  ^a^  gel)t  t()n  bod)  ntd)t^  an. 
6.  (gtecfen  ®ie  ee  bod)  in  bte  3:a[d)e;  e^  foftet  njenig,  nid)t 
(rt)a^r)? 

239.  (a)  1.  They  don't  agree  with  each  other  yet,  do 
they  ?  —  Oh,  yes.  2.  Oh,  don't  put  any  sugar  in  my  tea ; 
I  can't  stand  anything  (not  anything  =  ?)  sweet.  3.  After 
he  had  put  his  hat  on  a  chair,  it  occurred  to  him  that  he 
should  leave  it  outside.  4.  You'll  be  late,  and  you  know 
there's  going  to  be  a  dance  to-night  (§  204,  2).  5.  We 
like  it  so  well  here  that  we  shall  not  continue  our  journey 
till  (§  185,  1,  h)  next  week.  6.  She  continued  looking 
for  her  hat,  but  it  was  nowhere  to  be  found. 

(6)  1.  I  asked  her  how  much  the  watch  was,  and  she  told 
me  it  was  a  hundred  marks.         2.    I  asked  her  to  set  it,  and 


Chap.  28.]  REVIEW.  187 

said,  "  I  will  put  it  in  my  pocket.*'  3.  Which  watch  is  the 
one  that  you  put  on  the  table  ?  4.  You  aren't  going  to 
town  with  that  man,  are  you? — Why,  yes.  5.  They  are 
going  to  sing  this  evening  (§  204,  2) ;  I  know  I  shall  be  late, 
but  my  other  glove  is  nowhere  to  be  found.  6.  Those  are 
the  girls  who  didn't  know  the  difference  between  this  sen- 
tence and  that  one. 

(c)  1.  When  I  asked  how  much  the  hat  was,  I  was  told 
it  was  not  to  be  sold.  2.  They  couldn't  agree  with  each 
other  which  suit  looked  (au^fe^ett)  the  best.  3.  In  school 
they  were  singing,  outside  they  were  playing ;  nowhere  was 
a  quiet  place  to  be  found.  4.  Well,  shall  we  look  at 
something  else  ?  Those  are  the  cheapest  things  over  there. 
5.  I  can't  stand  this  store ;  I've  been  standing  here  since 
quarter  to  three ;  I  shall  be  late  home.  6.  Well,  if  it 
takes  so  long,  why  don't  you  take  something  expensive 
and  put  it  in  your  pocket  ?     Then  they'll  wait  on  you ! 


CHAPTER   XXIX. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Bcetl?ot?en  unb  ^oetl^e. 

240.  SBa^renb  ^oet^e  einigc  ^txt  in  SKien  toerbrac^te,  gtng 
er  etne^  Xageg  mtt  ^eet^ot)en  fpagteren.     ^ir  t)dren  oon 

^ttt1)oun  felbft,  iDte  etn= 
mat  bte  gon^e  faiferltc^e 
gamilie  ba^ergefomtnen 
tDcire,  a(^  bte  beiben  burd) 
ben  ^att  gingen.  ^ogletc^, 
fc^retbt  ber  ^omponift,  f)abe 
@oet^e  ben  §ut  abgenom* 
men  unb  fei  auS  bem  5Sege 
gegangen. 

(5r  felbft  aber,  ber  bie 
^aiferlic^en  ©of)etten  fc^on 
frnl)er  gefe^en  ^atte,  ^abe 
ben  |)ut  bt«  Uber  bte  D{)ren 
f)ernnterge^^ogen,  bte  §dnbe 
in  bte  Xafdjen  geftecft,  unb 
fei  an  ben  gitrftlic^teiten 
tjorbeigegangen.  X)a  l^abc 
i^m  er3^er3og  9^ubo(f  fc^er* 
genb  ben  §ut  abgenommen.  ^eet^oDen  woUtt  ®oet^c 
tttt^t  uxitx^tn,  bag  er  t)or  ben  gUrften  pritcfgetreten  tt)ar. 
„^5nige/'  fagte  er,  Jbnnen  Zxtd  unb  (5l)ren  t>erleit)en,  aber 
groge  ^Hanner  luie  un^  fbnnen  fie  nid)t  madjen." 

188 


41.   LuDwiG  VAN  Beethoven. 


Chap.  29.]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  189 

Syntax. 

241.  The  German  Subjunctive.  —  In  general,  the  sub- 
junctive is  the  mode  of  possibility  and  uncertainty, 
while  the  indicative  denotes  reality  and  certainty. 
The  German  subjunctive  may  be  divided  into  two  chief 
classes :  (1)  the  indirect  discourse  (or  dependent)  sub- 
junctive, and  (2)  the  unreal  (or  contrary  to  fact)  sub- 
junctive.    The  latter  is  treated  in  the  next  chapter. 

The  border  line  between  indicative  and  subjunctive 
is  often  so  uncertain  that  either  use  is  correct.  But 
there  is  always  a  difference  in  meaning,  which  should 
be  thoroughly  understood. 

242.  The  indirect  discourse  (or  dependent)  subjunc- 
tive is  used  in  subordinate  clauses  after  verbs  of  telling, 
thinking,  saving,  and  the  like.  Of  course  such  reported 
statements  cannot  be  so  real  or  certain  as  the  original ; 
hence  the  subjunctive. 

I  thought  that  I  had  the  right  book. 

Grandmother  says  you  are  a  wise  man. 

(^vo^muittx  f agt,  bu  f cift  cin  ttictf cr  Wlann,  —  ^au^tmatiti. 

243.  In  indirect  discourse  English  changes  the  present 
tense  to  past,  if  the  verb  of  the  main  clause  is  past. 
German  may  do  the  same,  but  usually  it  does  not ;  in- 
stead it  keeps  the  tense  of  the  direct  discourse.  To 
determine  what  tense  a  German  would  use,  ask  your- 
self, "  what  were  the  speaker's  exact  words  ?  " 

He  said,  ''lam  ilV    @r  frtfltc:  „^^  5in  tvanV 
He  said  that  he  was  ill.    @r  fagtc,  ba^  tv  trant  feu 
She  said,  "  /  have  a  new  hat.''"' 
(Bic  fagte :  „S(^  ^abc  cincn  ncucn  ^mV 


190 


GERMAN   COMPOSITION. 


245. 


She  said  that  she  had  a  new  hat. 

'Bit  fagtc,  ba^  fie  cincn  ncttcn  ^nt  f}aht. 

He  asked  one  of  the  bystanders  if  it  was  the  body  of  his  friend. 

6'r  fragtc  ctitcit  bcr  Umftc^cnbcn,  oh  c§  bcr  ^iir^cr  fcinc^  f^rcunbe^ 

f  ci,  —  ®  c^  i  n  e  r. 

244.    The  indicative  is  used  when  the  speaker  wishes 
to  emphasize  his  belief  in  the  truth  of  what  he  reports. 

He  said  that  he  didn't  do  it.    ($r  fagtc,  btt^  cr  c§  nit^t  Qctttn  \)at 
I  told  that  I  was  riding  on  a  narrow  Alpine  path. 
^^  er^af^Uc,  ba|  id)  auf  etuem  fdjmaleu  ^l^eu|)fab  xitt. 

—  S3i8mar(f. 

Notes. 


42.    Richard  Wagner. 


245.  Historical  Note. 
—  Ludw'ig  van  Beetho- 
ven (1770-1827)  marks 
a  turning  point  in  the 
history  of  instrumental 
music.  He  is  best  known 
for  his  symphonies, 
though  he  composed 
over  two  hundred  songs. 
During  his  lifetime  he 
was  admired  chiefly  for 
his  improvisations. 

Germany  has  always 
been  famous  for  its 
music.  Its  best-known 
composers  are  Bach 
(1685-1750),  who  com- 
posed especially  for  the 
organ;  Handel  (1685- 
1759)  and  Haydn  (1732- 
1809),  famous  for  their 
oratorios;  Mozart 
(1756-1791),   active    in 


Chap.  29.]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  191 

all  fields;  von  Weber  (1786-1826),  best  known  for  his  operas; 
Schubert  (1797-1828),  the  most  poetic  of  all  musicians,  renowned 
for  his  songs;  Mendelssohn  (1809-1847),  a  romantic  creator  of 
symphonies  and  songs;  Schumann  (1810-1856),  writer  of  songs, 
ballads,  and  symphonies;  the  famous  pianist,  Liszt  (1811-1886); 
and  last  and  greatest,  Liszt's  son-in-law,  Richard  Wagner  (1813- 
1883),  who  perfected  the  music-drama. 

246.    English  to  pass  is  variously  rendered  in  German. 

(1)  In  the  sense  of  to  hand  to,  it  is  reicf)en  (I'eg.,  aux. 
l^aben),  not  to  be  confused  with  ried)en,  to  smell. 

Will  you  please  pass  the  bread  ? 
SBottcn  ®ic  tttir,  hittt,  tta^  SBrot  rctr^cit  ? 

Without  asking  further  for  permission  he  jmssed  the  glass  to  him, 
too.    O^wc  iacttcr  nm  (^vlanhni^  gu  fraflcit,  reit^tc  cr  an^  i^in  ba^ 

OJta^.  — SSilbeubrud). 

(2)  As  a  neuter  verb,  in  speaking  of  time  —  as,  the  time 
passes  —  to  pass  is  tjerge^en  (merging,  tiergangen,  aux.  fein). 

The  time  passes  slowly,    ^tc  ^t\i  tiergc^t  langfam. 

The  night  has  now  passed,    '^ic  9?ac^t  ift  tttttt  tJergattgcit*  —  3(  r  n  b  t. 

(3)  As  an  active  verb,  in  speaking  of  time  —  as,  he  passed 
the  time  —  to  pass  is  usually  ferbntigen  (tjerbrac^te,  tjerbrac^t, 
aux.  ^aben). 

How  shall  loe  pass  the  time?    298tc  tjcrfirtugen  tutr  bic  S^it ? 

He  looked  for  a  protecting  tree,  to  pass  the  night  there. 

(£r  fttt^tc  cinctt  ft^it^cnbcit  S3aum,  i»ic  '^a6)i  bort  p  tjcrfinttflcn, 

—  @  e  r  ft  a  d  e  r. 

(4)  In  the  sense  of  to  go  hy,  to  pass  is  usually  an  etlDa^ 
(dative)  t)orbeige^en  (gtng  Dorbei,  Dorbetgegangen,  aux.  fein). 
33orbet  (t)oritber)  here  means  past,  and  is  used  with  different 
verbs  of  action,  walk,  ride,  drive.  English  uses  to  pass  for 
all  these  meanings ;  German  must  be  more  specific  and  use 
ge^en,  reiten,  or  fasten,  according  as  the  subject  walks, 
rides,  or  drives.     Compare  §  206,  2  and  §  222. 


192  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§248. 

Yesterday  loe  passed  your  house  {on  foot^  on  horseback^  in  a  car- 
riage:), ©cftcrufinb  toxx  an  ^^rcm  ^aufc  tiorbciflcgangcn,  toorbcige^ 
x'xiitw,  tJorbcigcfa^rctt, 

He  shook  hands  with  everybody  who  passed  him. 

©r  ft^iittcttc  jcbcm  bic  ^a\\t>,  bcr  an  i^m  tiorbcifam,  —  X  ^  o  m  a. 

//e  looks  past  others. 

3ttt  auberen ft^ttut  cr  tiorbct.  —  ®ubermonn. 

iVb^e.  —  To  pass  in  the  sense  of  to  he  promoted  is  Derfc^t  ttJcrbcn. 

Did  you  pass  ?    @inb  @ie  berfet3t  trorben? 

The  juniors,  who  in  time  passed  into  the  senior  class. 

2)ie  ©cfunbaner,  bie  nun  in  ber  3«it  noc^  ^rima  oerfc^t  hjurben. 

—  SBilbenbrud). 

247.  English  along  has  two  different  German  meanings. 

(1)  In  the  sense  of  along  the  street,  it  is  etlttattg,  or  balder 
(^er),  following  the  accusative. 

We  went  along  the  street. 

993ir  giitgctt  bic  ®tra^e  cntlaitg  (or  ba^cr  or  l^cr). 

Bush,  river,  along  the  valley. 

maufd^c,  %ln^,  t>a§  %al  cttttang.  —  @  o  c  1 1)  c. 

(2)  In  the  sense  of  along  with  some  one,  to  denote  accom- 
paniment, German  uses  tnit  (for  mttge()en). 

May  I  go  along  f    ^arf  tji^  ittit  (gc^ctt)? 

ril  go  along  to  India,     ^d)  ^^tW  j<»  Wt*  «<tf^  ^ttbtcu»  —  ©tor  m. 

248.  English  before  has  three  common  German  ren- 
derings. 

(1)  As  a  conjunction,  before  is  usually  el)e. 

Before  I  could  speak  to  him,  he  icas  gone. 
(£!)e  id)  xi)n  anrcben  tonntc,  mar  cr  fort. 

Before  she  could  prevent  it,  Antonino  had  taken  her  in  his  arms. 
e^c  ftc  c§  ttic^rcn  fonittc,  f^aitt  Antonino  ftc  in  bic  5trmc  0cnom= 
men.  —  C^  e  t)  f  e. 

(2)  As  an  adverb,  before  is  (a)  nod)  or  (6)  frii^er  or 
tjor^er. 


Chap.  29.]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE,  193 

(a)  When  the  adverb  before  follows  a  negative,  German 
uses  tiod^.  Here  it  is  generally  indefinite,  and  means  up  to 
the  present  time. 

He  hasn't  read  that  before.     1)a§  ^ai  tx  ttOt^  tttl^t  gclefctt* 

/  never  saw  her  before.     ^^  ^afic  ftc  ttOJ^  tttc  gcf C^Ctt* 

That  was  so  splendid  and  brilliant  as  she  {Cinderella')  had  never 

had  before.    ^a§  ttiar  fo  ^rftj^ttg  unb  fjIJittSCttb,  ttJtc  c§  (5lft^en|juttcl) 

ttod^  !cttt§  gc^Bt  ^attc*  —  @  r  i  m  m. 

(5)  In  affirmative  clauses,  the  adverb  before  is  usually 
German  t)or'^er  or  fritter*  These  words  usually  refer  to  a 
more  or  less  definite  period  in  the  past. 

You  ought  to  have  done  that  before. 

^a§  ^rittcft  bit  fritter  (or  uor^cr)  tun  fottctt. 

She  no  longer  looked  as  rosy  as  before. 

Sic  fa^  ttit^t  mc^r  fo  roftg  an^  ttitc  f rii^er*  —  2B  e  r  b  e  r. 

(3)  As  a  preposition,  before  is  usually  t)or,  either  with 
the  dative  of  place  where  or  with  the  accusative  of  place 
whither.     See  §  125,  1. 

249.   English  way  is  usually  bcr  2Beg  or  bte  SScifc* 

(1)  !^er  3Beg  is  used  only  concretely  of  way  in  the  sense 
of  a  path  or  road. 

Is  this  the  nearest  way?    Sft  bic§  bcr  nat^fte  993cg  ? 

/S'a/e  ^■s  the  narrow  way  of  duty. 

Silver  tft  bcr  f t^matc  9Bcg  bcr  ^^iii)t  —  @ d)  i It c r. 

(2)  !^te  SBeife  is  used  only  abstractly  of  the  way  or  man- 
ner in  which  something  is  done. 

I  don'' t  like  the  way  he  writes. 

Wlxv  gcfattt  nit^t  btc  2Bcifc,  ttJtc  cr  f(^rcibt. 

-E^very  one  in  his  own  way.    ^cbcr  auf  fcittC  SSctfC.  —  ®pri(^tt)ort. 

iVb^e.  —  SSeife  unites  with  adjectives  to  form  adverbs  :  g(ucfti(^er= 
tt)cife,  fortunately;  mogUd)ertDeife,  possibly;  naturUd)erit)eife,  natu- 
rally ;  and  8Q  on. 


194  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  251. 

Exercises. 

250.  (a)  1.  What  are  the  chief  differences  between  Ger- 
man and  English  indirect  discourse  ?  2.  What  is  the 
difference  between  (Sr  \ac^tt,  bag  tc^  red^t  ^atte,  and  (5r  fagte, 
bag  ic^  red^t  ^atte?  3.  Is  either  sentence  wrong?  Ex- 
plain (§  244). 

(b)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  illustrating  all  the  German 
equivalents  of  to  pass  which  are  treated  in  this  chapter. 
2.  Illustrate  each  use  with  a  sentence.  3.  Translate 
in  two  ways,  That  isnH  the  right  ivay,  and  explain  both 
meanings. 

(c)  Coyiversational  Idioms.  Memorize :  1.  2Bie  fc^ttett  t)er= 
ge^t  bte  ^t\i\  {How  time  flies!)  2.  $Bo((en  tSte  mir, 
bttte,  bie  :53utter  reid)en?  3.  Sir  ge()en  morgen  in  bte 
(Stabt;  iDtllft  bu  mtt?  4.  SO^^it  ^ergnltgen,  aber  roelc^en 
SBeg  ge^t  t^r?  5.  25>ir  gel)ett  an  ber  <Sc^u(e  Dorbet  nnb 
bann  htxi  SalbtDeg  entlang  bic^  in  bte  Stabt.  6.  Da^  tft 
ber  befte  2Beg  nac^  ber  (Stabt,  unb  bad  tft  bie  befte  Seife, 
einen  geiertag  ^u  Derbringen. 

251.  (a)  1.  He  said  he  passed  three  very  pleasant 
hours  there,  before  he  continued  his  way  along  the  valley. 

2.  We  told  our  friends  how  we  had  passed  the  little 
huts  and  had  gone  along  the  narrow  way  into  the  wood. 

3.  Will  you  please  pass  me  the  sugar  ?  I  haven't  had  any 
before  (§  248,  2,  a).  4.  That  is  not  the  way  in  which 
(n)ie)  you  ought  to  ask  if  you  may  go  along.  5.  I  told 
you  before  that  the  time  would  pass  faster  than  you  ex- 
pected. 6.  They  said  that  they  had  never  passed  such 
a  pleasant  day  before. 

(h)  1.  That  boy  thinks  the  only  way  to  pass  is  to 
study  (lernen)  hard  before  the  examinations.         2.   Time 


Chap.  29.] 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


195 


passed  swiftly  before  we  reached  this  narrow  way.       3.   He 

said  that  they  would  pass  a  beautiful  waterfall,  so  we  went 

along.         4.    The  way 

led     along    the    river, 

past  the  little  village 

where  we  had  passed 

last    (t»orig)     summer. 

5.  The  girl's  father 
thought  that  she 
(§  207,  Note)  had  eaten 
enough,  and  would  not 
pass    her    the    bread. 

6.  Before  I  met  (§  171, 
2,  Note)  the  girl,  I  was 
sure  that  I  had  seen 
her  before. 

(c)  Ludwig  van  Bee- 
tlioven.  —  1.  Before 
Beethoven  became  fa- 
mous he  passed  much 
time  in  Bonn.  2.  But 
after  some  time  he  went 
to  Vienna.  3.  There 
we  hear  that  he  lived 
more  pleasantly  than  before.  4.    They  say  that  Vienna 

had    never    before    known    such    a    distinguished    artist. 

5.  There   are   many   stories   which   tell   how   he   behaved 
([ic^  benei)men)  when  he  passed  his  friends  on  the  street. 

6.  We  know  him  to  have  been  a  great  musician,  but  many 
people  think  he  was  not  a  polite  man. 


43.    Goethe.  —  From  the  bust  by  Trippel 
in  the  Library  at  Weimar. 


CHAPTER   XXX. 
SUBJUNCTIVE   AND  CONDITIONAL. 

Konigin  £utfe. 

252.  9^a(f)bem  t>k  fd)one  f  dnigtn  ^uife  ^ad}x\d)t  t)on  bem 
franco fifc^en  (Siege  bei  It^onig^berg  erl^ielt,  flo^  fie  mit 
i()ren  (S5()nen  au^  ber  (gtabt.  2l(^  fie  fic^  nad)  einer 
Seile  au^rul)en  tt)o((ten,  fa^  ^uife  einett  ^rupp  (BoU 
baten  fomtnen.  „®ott  ^elfe  nn^/'  rief  fie  aue,  ,,tt)enn 
e'g  gran^ofen  finb.^'  (Seined  entfdjiog  fic^  bie  fonigin;  fie 
iDarf  ein  Znd)  iiber  ben  ^op\,  aU  njiire  fie  etne  ^auerfrau, 
itnb  fitf)rte  bie  ^ringen  iM  ^ornfelb,  „Sad  aud)  fomme/' 
fagte  fie  ben  ^inbern,  ,,feib  rnl)ig,  biicft  end)  nieber,  unb 
pfludet  bie  l^ornblnnten." 

!Den  grangofen  fiel  eg  natiirlic^  gar  nid)t  ein,  biefe 
gran  mit  ben  tinbern  fiir  J^iirftlidifeiten  gu  ^alten  unb 
au§  biefem  @runbe  gingen  fie  rul)ig  meiter,  of)ne  3Serbad)t 
3U  fc^l3|3fen.  SBer  ^iitte  je  benfen  fdnnen,  t>a^  ber  junge 
3Si(f)e(m,  ber  auf  fo  !(uge  $3eife  t)on  feiner  SJ^utter  ge- 
rettet  tuurbe,  fec^jig  3^a^re  fpater  granfreid)  erobern  unb 
bag  neue  beutfd^e  9?eid)  griinben  iDiirbe!  Unb  wer  ()atte 
geg(aubt,  baj  eben  bie  ^ornblume  —  feine  i^ieblinggblume 
—  bie  9^ationa(b(ume  !Deutfd^(anbg  tuerben  miirbe! 

Syntax. 

253.  The  Unreal  Subjunctive. — The  unreal  subjunc- 
tive (including  the  subjunctive  contrary  to  fact)  cor- 
responds exactly  to  the  English.     It  is  used  when  no 

196 


44.   Queen  Luise.  —  From  the  painting  by  Richter  in  the  Gallery  at 

Cologne. 

197 


198  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§254. 

statement  of  fact  is  made,  and  is  sometimes  divided  into 
four  classes:  («)  the  hortative  subjunctive  (of  command), 
(5)  the  optative  subjunctive  (of  wish),  (c)  the  potential 
subjunctive  (of  possibility/'),  and  (c?)  the  subjunctive 
contrary  to  fact. 

(a)  Let  us  go  ;  let  him  come. 

©c^ctt  wir ;  fommc  cr,  or  cr  mooc  fommcit. 

God  help  me  !    OJott  Ijclf c  tttir  !  —  $?  u  1 1)  c  r. 
(6)  Were  I  only  there  !    SBSrc  tt^  ttUr  bfl  ! 

Would  that  he  would  write  !    ®c()nctiC  cr  bod^  !  —  ?  e  f  j  i  n  g. 

(c)  It  would  hardly  he  possible.    (^§  mfirc  !attm  m6g(i(j^» 
Far  away  Fd  like  to  go  I 
^tt  btc  ^critc  mot^t^  i6)  jic^eit*  —  @d)cnfenborf. 

(d!)  If  she  had  time,  she  would  be  glad  to  do  it. 
SSJctttt  fie  Bctt  f^dtitf  tote  fie  e^  gerit. 
Had  I  pinions,  had  I  wings,  I  would  to  the  hills  away. 
^UV  tt^  St^ttitttgeit,  \)M'  iH)  f^titocf,  miS)  bem  ^iigeCtt  jog* 
id^  ittt»  —  (g  c^  i  I  ( e  r. 

254.  The  conditional  mode  in  German  is  formed  by 
prefixing  forms  of  Itiiirbc,  would  (past  subjunctive  of 
tDerben),  to  the  present  infinitive.  It  is  merely  another 
form  of  the  potential  (§  253,  <?),  and  is  used  chiefly  in 
the  conclusions  of  conditional  sentences. 

It  would  hardly  be  possible. 

@)S  uiiirbe  !aum  mdgU(^  fein.    (($S  marc  !aum  mbgltd^.) 

No  one  would  speak  in  company,  if  he  realized  how  often  he  mis- 
understands the  others.  9'itemaitb  ttJitrbe  tit  OJcfcHftfjaft  fprcd^eit,  toeitn 
cr  fid^  bcttJtt^t  ttJfirc,  Wic  oft  cr  bic  rtitbcru  mi jjocrftc^t.  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e. 

How  happy  many  a  man  would  live,  if  he  bothered  as  little  about 
others''  affairs  as  about  his  own. 

993ic  flnirfltdj  ttiilrbc  tttnurfjcr  (cbeit,  nicitit  cr  fttf)  ttm  aitbcrcr  ficutc 
©at^ctt  fo  ttJctttg  bcfiintmcrtc  a\i^  urn  fctitc  ciflcncit.  —  ?id)teubf rg. 

Note.  —  The  past  subjunctive  may  be  used  for  the  conditional, 
except  with  weak  verbs  where  the  past  subjunctive  and  indicative  have 


Chap.  30]  THE  CONDITIONAL.  199 

the  same  form.  In  such  cases  the  conditional  should  be  used.  In  the 
last  two  examples  above,  Goethe  could  have  used  fpra(i)e  for  tt)iirbc 
fpred^cn,  but  it  would  have  been  bad  usage  for  Lichtenberg  to  use  kbte 
for  ttJiirbc  leben.    Why  ? 

255.  German  conditional  sentences  take  the  same  mood 
and  tense  as  the  English.  In  fact,  they  are  just  like 
the  English,  except  in  their  inversion  of  the  conclu- 
sion when  the  condition  precedes  (§  2,  2),  and  in  the 
two  cases  below  where  the  condition  may  be  inverted. 
Remember  that  when  the  condition  precedes,  German 
usually  begins  the  conclusion  with  the  adverb  fo.  This 
has  no  English  equivalent,  though  it  may  sometimes  be 
rendered  by  then. 

(1)  German  can  invert  a  present  condition,  while 
English  cannot. 

If  he  comes,  I  shall  go.    ^otttmt  cr,  fo  gc^c  it^» 

If  it  rains  to-morrow,  we  shall  stay  at  home. 

JRcgnct  c§  ntorgctt,  fo  fitctbcit  ttitr  p  ^a«fc» 

And  ifyou^re  not  willing,  I  shall  use  force. 

Uttb  fitft  btt  ttit^t  ttiaig,  fo  braitd^^  tr^  ^cttiatt  —  ®  o  e  t  ^e. 

(2)  In  comparative  conditions^  introduced  by  as  if.,  as 
though.,  and  so  on,  German  may  omit  trentl  or  ob  (in  a(^ 
lt)enn,  a(^  ob)  and  invert  the  sentence.  English  of 
course  cannot  do  this. 

You  look  as  if  you  had  been  sick. 

%\x  fic^ft  axi^f  a(^  o6  bu  !rant  gctticfctt  toarcft  (or  al^  warcft  bu 
franf  gcttJcfcu), 

Pray  as  though  no  work  would  help  ;  work  as  if  no  prayer  would 
help.  S3ctc,  ai§  ptfc  (past  subj.  of  ^etfctt)  fcitt  3trbcttctt ;  arbcitc, 
aiS  l^illf c  f cttt  Sctett,  —  ©pric^mort. 

The  wood  rustles  mysteriously,  as  if  it  ivould  like  to  confide  some- 
thing to  me.  ©§  raufi^t  bcr  933a(b  gc^cimnt^ooll,  a(§  m'6ti}f  cr  ttttr 
toa^  atttJcrtrrittCtt.  —  ?  e  n  o  u. 


200  GEBMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§258. 

Notes. 

256.  Historical  Note.  —  Frederick  the  Great  was  succeeded  by 
his  nephew,  Frederick  William  II  (1786-1797),  an  unimportant 
monarch.  His  son,  Frederick  William  III  (1797-1840),  was  a 
patron  of  art  and  learning  —  he  founded  the  University  of  Berlin 
and  built  the  Royal  Theatre  and  the  Old  Museum  —  rather  than 
a  statesman  and  soldier.  His  wife  Luise  had  much  more  firmness 
of  purpose  than  he,  but  she  died  in  1810,  the  idol  of  her  people 
then  and  now.  It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  the  German  Empire, 
which  Napoleon  abolished  during  the  reign  of  Queen  Luise,  was  to 
be  reestablished  some  sixb^  years  later  by  her  son.  And  it  was 
the  irony  of  fate  that  the  J)roclamation  of  the  New  Empire  should 
be  made  in  the  Royal  French  palace  at  Versailles  while  the  victo- 
rious German  army  was  besieging  Paris. 

257.  English  ever  is  variously  rendered  in  German. 

(1)  When  referring  to  indefinite  time,  past  or  future, 
ever  is  usually  }e. 

Will  he  ever  come  ?    SSSirb  cr  |c  !ommen  ? 

Have  you  ever  been  in  Germany  f    SBarcil  ©ic  jc  ttt  ^eutf^Iaitb  ? 

And  wilder  than  ever  began  the  dance. 

Uttb  ttJilbcr  a\^  jc  ficgamt  bcr  Xanj.  —  @  e  r  ft  d  cf  c  r. 

Note.  —  For  ever  is  (auf)  ctt>ig,  less  often  auf  immer. 
Zeus'' s  decision  stands  for  ever. 
(5tt)ig  ftet)t  ber  BdjU^  bcS  3eu«.  —  @(f) liter. 

(2)  In  expressions  like  wherever,  whatever,  and  so  on,  ever 
is  usually  German  aud^.  It  follows  the  subject.  For  wheti- 
ever,  see  §  84,  2,  b. 

Wherever  you  go,  you  meet  friends. 

So  man  au(f|  Qcf^t,  ha  tnfft  man  ^reitnbe. 

Then  I  shall  hunt  up  the  Emperor,  wherever  he  may  he. 

%am.  ftti^c  irf|  belt  ^aifcr  auf,  mo  cr  a\x&\  fci.  —  >>  i  1 1  e  r  n. 

258.  English  to  decide  is  used  with  or  without  a  direct 
object. 


Chap.  30.]  THE  CONDITIONAL,  201 

(1)  When  Englisli  uses  to  decide  with  a  direct  object, 
German  uses  entfc^eibeti  (entfd)teb,  entf(f)teben,  aux.  ^aben). 

Will  you  decide  this  case  f    SSottctt  @ic  bicfctt  f^'fttt  Ctttfti^cibCtt? 
You  come  at  just  the  right  time,  major,  to  decide  our  controversy. 
®ic  fommcit  thtn  rci^t,  ^crr  SJlajor,  unfcrcu  ©trcit  5tt  cutft^ctbctt. 

—  @oetl)e. 

(2)  When  English  uses  to  decide  for  to  reach  a  decision^ 
especially  when  followed  by  a  prepositional  phrase,  German 
uses  \\d}  entfd^Ite^en  (entfc^tog  fi(^,  \id)  entfd)(offen,  aux. 
^abeti),  or  befd)(iegen  (befc^(o§,  befc^loffen,  aux.  f)aben). 
They  may  be  used  interchangeably,  but  entfd)(ie§en  is 
always  reflexive. 

/  have  decided  to  go  abroad  next  year. 

^ti)  f^aht  m\^  eutft^loffcn  (or  f^ahc  ficfdjloffcn),  nai^fte^  ^a^r  nuf 
9Jctfcn  5U  oc^cn. 

I  have  determined  there  to  winter. 

^afctbft  f^aht  td|  bcft^loffcn,  bctt  SBrntcr  ju  btcibcn. 

—  33ibel,  2:itug  3,  12. 

259.  English  after  has  two  German  renderings. 

(1)  As  a  conjunction,  after  is  German  nad)bem  with  the 
transposed  order. 

We  arrived  at  the  station  after  the  train  had  left. 

9Bir  famcn  am  SBa^n^ofc  an,  uoj^bcm  bcr  3tt9  nbgcfa^rcn  mar. 

After  the  child  is  drowned,  the  well  is  covered. 

9la^^tm  ba^  ^inb  crtrunfett  ift,  tttdt  man  ben  Srunncn  ju. 

—  @^ric^lDort. 

(2)  As  a  preposition,  q/i'er  is  German  na6),  (See  §  97,  2.) 
The  adverb  afterward  is  nac^^er. 

260.  English  ?-eason  is  bcr  ©runb  (bic  ©riittbc),  which 
rarely  means  ground  except  in  a  figurative  sense. 

Those  are  my  reasons  {grounds),     '^a^  ftttb  tttetttc  ©ritttbe. 

Well,  haven'' t  Treason  enough  to  be  angry  ! 

Silti,  i(^  ^ttbc  ^ruttb  gcmig,  orgcrtit^  jtt  f citt !  —  ^^  r  e  t)  t  a  g. 


202  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§263. 

Note. — English  ground  is  usually  bcr  S3obcn,  which  also  means 
floor,  bottom,  and  attic. 

The  richer  the  ground  (soil),  the  thicker  the  weeds. 

3e  fetter  ber  S3oben,  je  fetter  ba8  Unfraut.  — @^rtc^tt)ort. 

261.  English  to  receive  has  commonly  two  German  render- 
ings :  cr^altcn  and  cm^fangcn* 

(1)  When  the  object  is  a  thing,  to  receive  is  nsually  er- 
i)a(ten  (erl)ie(t,  erl)a(ten,  aux.  ^aben). 

I  haven't  received  any  answer,     ^ttf  f^aht  fcittC  ^llttwort  cr^altCtt, 

lieinhardt  had  received  no  further  letter  from  her. 

JHein^arbt  ^ttttc  tion  i^r  feiucn  JBricf  mc^r  er^altcn.  —  @  t  o  r  m. 

(2)  When  the  object  is  a  person,  to  receive  is  em|)fangen 
(empfing,  empfangen,  aux.  ^aben).  It  may  be  used  of  things, 
but  in  a  more  formal  sense  than  er()alten. 

How  did  she  receive  you  9    933tc  ^at  fie  bit^  em^fanflcii  ? 
The  cousin  looks  after  the  house,  receives  the  guests. 
2)cr  SBcttcr  bcforgt  bosg  ^ou^mcfctt,  cm^jfottgt  bic  (iJaftc. 

—  33  e  n  e  b  i ;:. 

262.  English  of  course  is  usually  natitrltc^. 

Of  course  PR  go.     'UaiViXlx^  fiC^C  tJ^. 

Of  course  the  affair  could  now  no  longer  remain  concealed. 

9{un  fonnte  bie  ^cfi^ti^tc  natilrlit^  ntt^t  linger  tierborgcn  blei^en. 

—  SBilbenbruct). 

Exercises. 

263.  (a)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  showing  the  different 
classes  of  unreal  subjunctives  in  German.  2.  Illustrate 
each  class  by  a  sentence.  3.  Are  there  any  cases  where 
German  use  differs  from  English  ?  If  so,  name  them.  (In 
answering  these  questions  remember  that  the  same  form 
often  serves  as  indicative  or  subjunctive,  both  in  English 
and  German.)  4.  How  is  the  German  conditional  formed, 
and  how  does  its  use  differ  from  that  of  the  past  subjunctive  ? 


Chap.  30.]  THE  CONDITIONAL.  203 

(h)  1.  In  what  cases  do  German  conditional  sentences 
differ  from  English?  2.  Illustrate  each  case  by  a  sen- 
tence. 3.  Classify  and  explain  the  subjunctives  and  con- 
ditionals in  §  252  and  in  the  last  example  in  §  49,  2,  §  69,  3, 
§  113,  2,  §  150,  3,  §  222,  3. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^ettt  fet,  tDte 
t^m  tt)o((e !  {Be  that  as  it  may!)  2.  ^diit  x6)  \i(x^  getDU^t, 
fo  mare  tc^  fritter  fertig  gemorben.  3.  9^atitr(icf)  ^aben 
<Sie  guten  @runb,  \>a^  ju  fagen.  4.  §aben  ^ie  je  etnen 
fotc^en  ^rtef  er^alten?  5.  9^ac^bem  er  'ba^  fagte,  \)ai  fie 
ftc^  entfd)(oBen,  i^n  nte  iDieber  ju  em)3fangen.  6.  (5^  gibt 
90^enfd)en,  bte  ^bfltc^  empfangen  merben,  ido  fie  auc^  ^tn* 
ge^en. 

264.  (a)  1.  Were  he  more  polite,  he  would  of  course  be 
better  received.  2.  After  they  had  decided  to  stay,  we 
had  no  reason  to  go.  3.  If  you  ever  receive  such  a  let- 
ter from  him,  you  must  decide  not  to  receive  him  again. 
4.  It  would  be  decidedly  easier  to  write  these  exercises,  if 
you  worked  harder.  5.  If  he  ever  had  to  decide  anything, 
of  course  he  would  do  it  in  the  easiest  way.  6.  Whatever 
we  decide,  you  will  have  no  reason  to  complain  (fid)  beflagett). 

(&)  1.  Of  course,  if  I  had  ever  received  a  letter  from 
you,  I  should  have  been  glad  to  answer  it.  2.  She 
couldn't  decide  to  receive  him  after  he  had  been  so  impo- 
lite. 3.  After  this  outing  the  pupils  will  decide  if  they 
are  ever  going  to  have  another.  4.  Had  I  only  worked 
harder,  I  should  have  passed.  5.  He  wouldn't  do  such  a 
thing  (fo  etttia^)  without  having  a  good  reason.  6.  Were 
she  able  to  decide,  of  course  she  would  receive  him. 

(c)  Queen  Luise.  —  1.  If  you  asked  who  was  the  most  pop- 
ular queen  that  Prussia  had  ever  had,  you  would  of  course 
receive  the  answer :  Queen  Luise.         2.   And  the  Prussians 


204  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§264. 

have  good  reason  to  say  so  (ba^).  3.  Had  everybody 
decided  to  work  as  much  for  Prussia  as  Queen  Luise  did 
[it],  Prussia  would  have  been  decidedly  stronger  after  the 
wars  against  Napoleon.  4.  She  went  to  Napoleon  and 
he  received  her,  but  he  decided  not  to  let  himself  be  influ- 
enced by  her.  5.  If  he  had  done  so,  it  would  have  been 
better  for  Prussia.  6.  But  Napoleon  did  not  care  about 
Prussia,  and  of  course  he  did  as  he  pleased. 


CHAPTER   XXXI. 


SPECIAL  SUBJUNCTIVES. 

Pas  ^ranffurter  Parlament. 

265.  Qm  Sa^re  1848  tagte  in  granffurt  ba^  erfte  t)om 
SDeutfc^en  55o(!  ern)a{)(te  ^ortament,  um  bte  beutfc^en  (Staaten 
gu  etnem  9^eic^e  p 
tieremigen.  !Da^ 
•parlament  beftanb 
au^  t)te(ett  gele^r- 
ten  SJ^dnnern,  be- 
nen  pra!tifd)e  (5r= 
fa^rung  fe()(te. 
(Sie  rebeten  ju 
t)te(.  @te  l^citten 
etttja^  (eiften  !dn== 
nen,  iDenn  fie  ge^ 
I)anbe(t  Ijatten, 
anftatt  fo  t)ie(  ju 
fpred^en.  (Sie  be^ 
ftanben  itnmer  auf 
i^ren  3^^^^r  ^^^^ 
renb  fie  pireifen 
ptten  nad)geben 
foffen.  ^^  war  ein 
feltfame^  parla- 
ment, mie  man  noc^  !ein§  in  :Deutf{^(anb  gefe^en  ^atte. 

(5nb(id),  um  T)eutfii)(anb  ju  einigen,  hot  man  bem  ^5nig 
t)on  ^reugen  bie  ^aiferlrone  an.    5lber  er  tuagte  nid)t,  fie  an* 

205 


45.   St.  Paul's  Church  at  Frankfort,  where 
the  famous  Frankfort  Parliament  met. 


206  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§266. 

junef)Tnen,  wdi  er  auf  tie  ^uftimtnung  ber  beutfc^en  giirften 
nic^t  rec^nen  fonnte.  „(S:mt  folc^e  ^rone  moc()te  ic^  nidjt 
tragen/'  fagte  er.  Unb  fo  ift  ber  Dom  beutfrf)en  ^olf  gemad)te 
33erfuc^,  ein  neue^  Dfleid)  gu  griinben,  j^uerft  cjefc^eitert.  ^Man 
mu^te  auf  einen  ftarfen  git^rer  it)arten. 

Syntax. 

266.  Special  Subjunctives.  —  Two  kinds  of  expressions 
which  usually  make  trouble  for  Americans  are  should 
(or  would)  like,  and  ought  to  have,  might  have,  coutd  have, 
and  so  on. 

(1)  The  expression  should  or  would  like  is  always 
mbc^te,  the  past  subjunctive  of  mogen,  with  or  without 
(jern.     See  §  76,  1. 

Would  you  like  to  hear  "  Lohengrin  "  ? 

9Jloj^tcn  @ie  (gcrit)  ^iio^cugnn"  Iiijrcu? 

He  would  like  to  very  much,     ^n^  mbd)te  cr  \t\)t  gcm. 

I  should  like  to  go  to  Nuremberg  to  Barer. 

'^aii)  9'iiirttbcrg  jum  ^ilrcr  mod^t^  ic^  fc^ou.  —  §  i  U  e  r  n. 

(2)  The  expressions  could  have,  might  have,  ought  to 
have,  and  so  on  are  rendered  in  German  by  the  pluper- 
fect subjunctive.  The  expression  begins  with  a  form 
of  I)atten,  then  comes  the  main  verb  in  the  infinitive, 
and  finally  the  infinitive  of  the  modal.  This  order 
should  be  practised  so  thoroughly  that  the  student 
loses  all  tendency  to  use  the  English  order  when  put- 
ting his  thoughts  into  German. 

(Soden  and  fbnnen  are  commonest  in  this  construc- 
tion ;  burfen  is  sometimes  used ;  mbc|en,  miiffen,  and 
U)o((en  are  rare.  For  the  position  of  l)atte  in  dependent 
clauses,  see  §  73,  2. 


Chap.  31.] 


SPECIAL   SUBJUNCTIVES. 


207 


I  could  not  have  done  it.     ^6)  pttc  C§  Jtic^t  ttttt  fottttCtt, 

You  ought  to  have  seen  us  !    @ic  ptteit  tttti^  fc^Ctt  fottctt ! 

/  ought  not  to  have  accepted  so  quickly. 

^^  'i)Uit  bo(^  nit^t  fo  fd^itctt  anne^mcu  fottcn*  —  ^r  e  tj  t a g. 

I  could  not  have  been  horn  here. 

^^  ptf  ^icr  m^t  gcfiorctt  tucrbcn  fottttCtt»  —  §  e  b  b  e  I. 


Notes. 

267.  Historical  Note.  —  Frederick  William  III  reigned  thirty 
years  after  the  death  of  his  queen,  Luise,  and  was  succeeded  in 
1840  by  his  son,  Frederick 
William  IV.  During  all  the 
first  half  of  the  nineteenth 
century,  national  feeling  had 
been  gi- owing  stronger 
throughout  the  many  German 
states.  But  when  the  Frank- 
fort Parliament  met,  the  great 
question  was,  who  should  lead 
the  new  Empire,  Austria  or 
Prussia.  Austria  had  the  most 
prestige,  but  refused  to  join  the 
new  Empire  without  bringing 
in  Hungary  as  well,  and  this 
the  other  German  states  did 
not  want.  They  desired  only 
Austria  proper  —  the  German 
part  of  the  Austrian  Empire. 
As  Austria  remained  firm,  the 
Parliament  finally  decided  to 
leave  her  out  entirely.  So  it 
was  not  only  distrust  of  this 
parliament,  but  fear  of  a  war 
with  Austria,  that  led  Fred- 
erick William  IV  to  refuse  the  imperial  crown.  He  also  wished  to 
consider  the  princes  of  Germany,  and  they  were  not  represented 
at  the  Frankfort  Parliament. 


46.  Ernst  Moritz  Arndt.  —  Poet 
and  patriot,  one  of  the  members 
of  the  Frankfort  Parliament. 


208  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [5  269. 

268.  English  Jirst  is  usually  rendered  in  German  by  crft 
or  5ucrft» 

(1)  As  an  adjective^  Jirst  is  generally  erft.  For  erft  as  an 
adverb  see  §  185,  1,  b. 

Did  you  guess  it  the  Jirst  time  ? 
^afictt  @ic  c§  ba^  crftc  Wlai  crrotcit  ? 

But  many  that  are  first  shall  be  last,  and  the  last  shall  be  first. 
5(bcr  Hide,  bic  ha  finb  bic  crftctt,  ttierben  bic  Ic^tcn,  unb  bic  tc^tctt 
ttcrbctt  bic  crftcn  f cin.  —  33  i  b  e  I,  2Jiatt.  19,  30. 

(2)  As  an  adverb,  Jirst  (at  Jirst)  is  guerft. 

I  saw  it  first,    ^d)  f^aht  c§  jucrft  gcfc^cn. 

They  thought  first  of  the  old  caretaker. 

Wan  bat^tc  sucrft  an  bcit  alttn  ^lufwartcr.  —  2B  i  I  b  e  n  b  r  u  d). 

269.  German  Bcftcf|cn  (beftatib,  beftanbett,  aux.  ^aben)  has 
two  very  different  meanings,  depending  upon  the  preposi- 
tion with  which  it  is  used. 

(1)  When  followed  by  au^  with  the  dative,  befte^en  means 
to  consist  of. 

The  German  Empire  consists  of  twenty-six  states. 

^a§  ^cutfc^c  9?ctt^  bcftc^t  an^  fcti^^uttbjWttnjig  Staatcn. 

This  {crowd)  consists  of  people  of  all  ranks. 

^tcfc  (2Jlctt0c)  bcftc^t  an^  9Kcttf(^cu  boit  attcn  Statibcn.  —  §f  inc. 

(2)  When  followed  by  auf  with  the  dative,  befte^en  means 
to  iyisist  upon. 

linsist  upon  my  rights.  ^6)  Bcflc^c  auf  tncinctt  JWcdjtcii. 
But  he  insisted  on  seeing  the  Colonel.  (§  270,  1,  Note.) 
5lbcr  cr  bcftanb  barauf,  bcit  ^crrii  Obcrftcit  ju  f^ircr^ctt. 

—  grcqtag. 
Note.  —  When  followed  by  a  direct  object  bcftel^cn  means  to  with- 
stand; of  examinations,  to  pass. 

He  couldn't  pass  the  examination. 

(Sr  l)at  bic  ^riifimg  nidjt  bcftc{)en  fbnnen. 

I  am  still  alive  and  icill  withstand  him. 

3c^  kbc  nod)  unb  luiU  tljn  bcftdjcn.  — Slrnbt. 


Chap.  31.]  SPECIAL   SUBJUNCTIVES.  209 

270.  English  to  speak,  to  talk,  is  usually  f^red^Ctl  or  rebctl* 
They  are  generally  interchangeable,  except  as  shown  below. 

(1)  The  common  word  for  to  speak  is  fprec^en  (fprac^, 
gefproc^en,  aux.  !^aBett).  It  refers  usually  to  short  talks  or 
to  the  power  of  speech.  So  it  could  be  used  of  babies  or 
parrots,  where  rebett  could  not. 

At  the  age  of  one  year  the  child  began  to  talk. 

^m  %\itx  t»ott  einem  ^a^rc  ftttg  btt§  ^iitb  an  gu  f^jrct^ctt. 

The  mother  speaks :   To-morrow'' s  a  holiday. 

^tc  Wuittx  f^rtj^t :  Wlox^txx  ift^§  l^ciertag.—  @  d)  to  a  b. 

Note.  —  ®^rcd)cn  is  always  used  (followed  by  the  accusative)  where 
English  uses  to  see  in  the  sense  of  visit  with  or  speak  to.  Where  Eng- 
lish says  :  Is  Mr.  Brown  at  home?  May  I  see  him  a  moment?  Ger- 
man always  says :  2)arf  id)  i^n  etnen  Slugenblicf  fprec^en? 

(2)  Usually  reben  (reg.,  aux.  ^aben)  refers  to  the  content 
of  a  more  extended  talk  or  speech.  It  is  a  trifle  more  for- 
mal than  fiprec^en  and  often  contains  a  suggestion  of  speechi- 
fying. 

He  spoke  {talked)  for  a  whole  hour.    @r  rcbctc  cinc  onnje  (Stttttbc* 

You  speak  with  much  deliberation. 

®tc  rcbctt  mit  utclcr  Uftcrlcgung*  —  $?  e  f  f  i  n  g. 

I  cannot  speak  as  I  should  like  to. 

^^  Itum  nit^t  rcbctt,  njtc  tj^  mo(i^tc»  —  ^thhtt 

Note.  —  To  make  a  speech  is  eine  9tebe  fatten ;  to  speak  to,  in  the 
sense  of  address,  is  anrebeit  with  the  accusative. 

He  made  a  Jine  speech.    @r  ^at  elite  fc^bne  9?ebe  gel^atten. 

It  is  they  ;  I  will  speak  to  them. 

@ie  fmb'g ;  ic^  WiU  fie  onreben.  —  @  (^  1 H  e  r. 

271.  English  strange  is  generally  fcltfam  or  frcttlb* 
(1)  (Settfam  means  strange  in  the  sense  of  odd,  queer. 

That's  a  strange  bird.     ^a§  tft  citt  fcttfaittcr  BoQti. 

How  strangely  this  sign  affects  me  ! 

235te  fcltfam  mirft  btc§  3^^c«  <i»f  w*^  cin !  —  @  o  e  1 1)  e . 


210  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§273. 

(2)  f^retnb  means  strange  in  the  sense  of  foreign,  unac- 
quainted, a  total  stranger. 

Excuse  we,  /  am  a  stranger  here. 

SBcrsci^ctt  @ic,  x^  hm  \)xtx  frcmb. 

How  do  you  feel  in  the  strange  woods  ? 

aSic  tt»iri)^)8  ctt(^  vx  ben  frcmbcit  SBalbcrit ?  —  greiltgrat^. 

Exercises. 

272.  (a)  1.  In  translating  into  German  an  English  ex- 
pression like  could  have,  slioidd  have,  and  so  on,  with  what 
kind  of  a  form  must  we  always  start?  2.  What  is  the 
order  of  the  other  verb  forms?  3.  How  is  shoidd  or 
would  iike  always  rendered  in  German  ? 

(b)  1.  Explain  the  different  uses  of  strange  in  German. 
2.   Write  three  sentences  illustrating  three  uses  of  befte^ett. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  iBer  juerft 
fommt,  ma^It  ^Uerft.  (First  come,  first  served;  i.e.  his  corn 
is  first  ground.)  2.  Qii)  m5d)te  i^n  gem  etnen  ^lugenblicf 
fprecf)ett.  3.  (Bit  fatten  barauf  befte^en  foden.  4.  SBir 
ptten  un6  nic^t  beffer  amltfieren  fdnnen.  5.  (5g  ift  bo(^ 
fettfam,  ha^  (Sie  bte[e^  (S^'amen  tttdjt  beftel)en  !onnten. 
6.  !^er  erfte  ®(f)ii(er,  ber  ferttg  ift,  barf  fprerf^en. 

273.  (a)  1.  That  is  a  strange  way  to  pronounce  that 
word.  2.  She  insists  upon  it  that  you  ought  to  have 
spoken  louder.  3.  I  should  like  to  pronounce  that  word 
so,  but  it  is  quite  strange  to  me.  4.  Then  I  insist 
upon  it  that  you  couldn't  have  pronounced  it  right  at  first. 

5.  You  ought  to  have  punished  the  first  one  who  spoke. 

6.  He  talked  a  whole  hour  without  saying  anything;  all 
his  speech  was  only  flattery. 

(b)  1.  I  should  like  to  see  Mr.  Brown ;  is  he  here 
(§  17,  2)  ?        2.  She  insists  [upon  it]  that  we  couldn't  have 


Chap.  31.] 


SPECIAL   SUBJUNCTIVES. 


211 


passed   an   examination   that   consisted   of    ten   questions. 

3.    That  is  a  strange  sentence ;  would  you  like  to  translate 

it?         4.    At  first   he   insisted   that  he   wouldn't  like  to 

speak ;  then  he  made  a  long 

speech.        5.    If  you  would 

like  to  speak  German  well, 

you  ought  to  talk  as  much 

as  you  can.       6.  You  ought 

to  have  had   a   book  that 

consisted     of     [a     great] 

many  exercises. 

(c)  The  First  German 
Parliament.  —  1.  It  seems 
strange  to  us  that  the  first 
German  Parliament  took 
place  only  about  sixty  years 
ago.  2.  It  consisted  of 
many  learned  men,  who 
ought  not  to  have  talked 
so     much.  3.    They 

couldn't  have  accomplished 
(teiften)  anything  without 
first  winning  [over]  the 
princes.  4.     But     they 

insisted  on  holding  firmly 

to  (an)  their  ideas  and  continued  making  speeches. 
5.  It  is  not  strange  that  Bismarck,  who  would  have  liked 
to  see  a  united  Germany,  afterward  made  his  famous  re- 
mark. 6.  He  said  the  unification  of  Germany  was  not 
a  question  which  could  be  solved  with  speeches,  but  with 
blood  and  iron. 


47.  LuDwiG  Uhland. — One  of  Ger- 
many's best-known  and  most 
loved  poets,  a  member  of  the 
Frankfort  Parliament. 


CHAPTER   XXXII. 

REVIEW. 

Stoat.    5(ttcrbm0i§* 

274.  The  English  concessive  phrases  it  is  true,  to  be  sure, 
may  be  rendered  in  German  by  ^toat,  or  atterbing^«  These 
are  usually  interchangeable,  but  as  an  independent  word, 
answering  a  question  or  statement,  only  attetbtngS  can  be 
used  for  to  be  sure.     StOClt  is  never  used  alone. 

Why,  to  he  sure  I    9?nit,  aflcrbttig^ ! 

IVs  true  he  was  sick,  hut  still  he  came. 

@r  mar  jttiar  (attcrbitioiS)  fraitf,  o6cr  cr  ift  borfi  gctommen. 

To  he  S2ire  I  know  her.     5tttcrbing^  fcitif  it^  fie.  —  ^  r  e  I)  t  a  g. 

Ifs  true  I  know  much,  hut  I  should  like  to  know  everything. 

Stottv  ttJcij?  id)  titcJ,  bor^  m'6d)V  \^  aUc^  wiffcn.  —  @  o  c  t  ^  c. 

Exercises. 

275.  (rt)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  of  the  subjunctives 
treated  in  the  last  three  chapters.  2.  Show  by  transla- 
tions that  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  is  similar  in  both 
languages,  except  in  indirect  discourse.  3.  Give  the 
order  of  the  parts  of  the  verb  in  the  German  translation  of 
He  could  have  done  it.  4.  What  is  the  order  when  the 
sentence  is  put  into  a  subordinate  clause  ? 

(b)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  5?un,  allcr* 
bings!  2.  3tDar  \)(xttt  id)  e§  tun  fotten,  aber  id)  fonntc 
nicl)t.  3.  9^?atUrUc()  tuiirbe  id)  nirf)t  barauf  beftel)en,  menn 
id)  ntc^t  red)t  l)dtte.  4.  gmar  iDeig  id)  tiel,  bod)  m5c^t'  id) 
a((e§  miffen.       5.  (g^  njilrbe  ent|d)ieben  beffer  fitngen,  menu 

212 


Chap.  32.]  REVIEW,  213 

(Ste  lauter  f^jrac^en.  6.  §aben  @ie  je  etnen  fo  fett[amen 
^rtef  er^alten? 

276.  (a)  1.  If  you  had  spoken  like  that  (fo)  before,  we 
should  have  thought  that  it  was  decidedly  impolite.  2.  I 
should  like  to  see  the  [Mr.]  professor,  if  he  will  receive 
me  before  he  goes  out.  3.  It's  true  he  had  no  reason  to 
speak,  yet  he  insisted  on  talking  a  whole  hour.  4.  After 
the  teacher  had  showed  us  how  we  could  have  translated 
the  sentence,  we  were  of  course  ready  to  try  the  next  one. 

5.  Wherever  Mary  went,  the  lamb  went  along.  6.  I  should 
like  to  see  those  newspapers  you  just  received ;  please  pass 
them  to  me. 

(h)  1.  After  they  had  decided  to  pass  the  summer  in 
Europe,  they  ought  not  to  have  talked  about  it  so  much. 
2.  I  should  like  to  follow  this  way  along  the  river  past  the 
wood.  3.  After  he  had  been  so  well  received,  he  ought 
not  to  have  insisted  on  speaking  first.  4;  It's  true  the 
examination  which  we  could  not  pass  could  not  have  con- 
sisted of  harder  questions.  5.  He  would  like  to  hear  the 
first  way  you  ever  pronounced  that  word.  6.  She  said 
that  the  days  passed  very  slowly  before  she  met  those 
interesting  strangers. 

(c)  1.  It's  true  she  spoke  as  if  the  time  passed  slowly, 
but  she  had  no  reason  to  say  so  ():i(x^).  2.  I  could  have 
passed  the  examination,  if  the  teacher  had  not  asked  so 
many  hard  questions.  3.  Did  you  ever  see  an  exercise 
that  consisted  of  such  hard  sentences  ?  4.  We  should 
like  to  see  Miss  Smith,  but  she  may  decide  not  to  receive 
us  till  (§  185,  1,  h)  after  supper.  5.  The  time  passed  so 
slowly   that    it    seemed    as    if    he    would    speak    forever. 

6.  The  boy  said  that  he  hadn't  translated  the  sentence 
before,  because  so  many  words  were  strange  to  him. 


CHAPTER   XXXIII. 
REVIEW  OF  CHAPTERS  I-VIII. 

3\smavd  unb  bas  Deutfd?e  Ketd?. 

277.  ^i^marcf,  her  in  feinen  D^eben  bie  :Deutf(fien  gem  aU 
:53eifpiet  anfii^rte,  fagte  eitimat:    „^ir  T)eutfi^en  finb  mie 


^       .JBKS;' 

-iJaLte^        '"^<]V^HBHk^ 

J 

F    ^i^:*-.fi 

bj 

r 

■-^0- 

' 

tnM 

*^ 

<,S«IMW«»>' 

'xMKd 

J 

^n 

^^^^^^pppijiiiy™^*^ 

48.    Statue  of  Young  Bismarck  at  the  Rudelsburg. 

ein  (5^e)3aar.  Senn  a(te«  ru^ig  unb  ftitt  ift,  janft  man  fic^ 
n)o^(  ein  ttjentg  ;  n)enn  aber  ein  3'?arf)bar  fid)  einmifdjt,  fatten 
aJiann  unb  grau  Dereint  iiber  i()n  l)er."    ^Jlod)  Dor  ber  4Be* 

214 


Chap.  33.]  REVIEW.  215 

gritttbuncj  be^  je^tgen  T)eut[(^en  9f^et(^§  tuar  ^i^mar(f  !(ug 
genug,  btefe  Xatfac^e  ^u  erfennett  unb  gu  benu^en,  um  bie 
beutfc^en  (Staaten  ^u  t)ereintgen. 

T)ie  gro^e  3}?acf)t,  bie  t^m  ^ontg  Sil^elm  gegeben  ^tte, 
gebraud^te  er,  um  ba^  ipreu^ifdje  §eer  ju  ftdrfen,  !l)ann  bet'- 
brangte  er  Sfterreid)  au^  bem  beutfc^en  :Q3unbe  (1866)  unb  im 
Qa^xt  18*10  —  al^  bie  !l)eutfcf)en  genitgenb  geritftet  Waxen  — 
txat  er  t)or  ben  !Dro^uugeu  ber  grau^ofen  ui^t  ^uritcf,  fo  ha^ 
granfreic^  ben  ^rieg  erftiirte.  9^orbbeutf(^e  unb  (Sitbbeutfc^e 
tjereinten  fic^  gegen  htn  gemeinfanten  geinb,  unb,  nac^bem  fie 
bie  grau^ofen  befiegt  i)atttn,  Dereinigten  fie  fid)  pm  neuen 
!l)eutfc^en  D^eid). 

Notes. 

278.  Historical  Note.  — In  1861  Fredeiick  William  IV  died 
and  was  succeeded  by  his  brother  William.  The  new  king  tried 
to  increase  the  strength  and  efficiency  of  the  army,  but  his  reforms 
were  unpopular,  the  Prussian  House  of  Representatives  voting 
against  them  308  to  11.  William  then  made  Otto  von  Bismarck 
prime  minister,  and  together  they  worked  grimly  for  the  unifica- 
tion of  Germany  under  Prussia's  leadership.  After  strengthening 
the  army  —  against  the  determined  opposition  of  a  people  who 
hated  him  —  Bismarck  put  it  to  excellent  use  against  Denmark, 
Austria,  and  finally  France.  Bismarck  came  out  of  these  success- 
ful wars  the  idol  of  the  German  people,  the  man  of  blood  and  iron 
who  had  welded  Germany  into  an  Empire,  after  the  people  them- 
selves had  failed. 

Exercises. 

279.  (a)  1.  Apply  the  General  Principle  for  Order  (§  37, 
Note)  to  the  cases  of  word  order  treated  in  Chapters  I,  II, 
and  III.  2.  Do  the  same  for  Chapters  V,  VI,  and  VII. 
3.  Find  in  §  277  illustrations  of  inverted  order,  transposed 
order,  position  of  nic^t,  and  position  of  objects. 


216  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§280. 

(b)  1.  Put  the  sentence,  I  told  my  little  sister  a  long  story 
several  hours  ago,  into  the  inverted  order,  writing  it  in  three 
ways.  2.  Write  the  same  sentence  twice  in  the  normal 
order:  (1)  to  emphasize  what  was  told  to  the  sister,  and 
(2)  to  emphasize  to  whom  the  story  was  told.  3.  Trans- 
late the  sentence,  You  arenH  working  very  hard  to-day,  and 
then  put  it  into  the  proper  order  following.  It  seems  to  me  that. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  (Stuttbettfang 
l^abe  \6)  auf  bid^  getmrtet!  2.  ^ein  SO^enfc^  t)erftel)t,  \oa^ 
(Ste  ba  fragen.  3.  ^a,  eben;  ba^  f)ab'  id)  ^i)ntn  ge[agt. 
4.  (g^  fd((t  mir  gar  nic^t  ein,  ba^  4Buc^  gu  ^o(en.  5.  SSte 
nennen  @te  bie^S  auf  beutfd)?  6.  5lber  h)ie  laxm  man  ba« 
toiffen? 

280.  (a)  1.  Three  weeks  ago  she  wasn't  married,  so  far 
as  I  know.  2.  At  any  rate  they  said  that  her  name  was 
still  Schmidt,  and  we  all  called  her  Miss  then.  3.  For 
years  we  looked  for  a  comfortable  house  in  which  we  could 
live  in  peace.  4.  I  asked  for  a  gray  hat,  but  the  man 
didn't  get  me  the  one  I  wished,  but  a  brown  one.  5.  Then 
I  told  him  that  I  could  not  wait  for  him  any  longer,  but 
would  get  the  hat  another  time.  6.  And  then  (§  17,  1) 
the  man  got  angry  and  said  he  couldn't  help  it. 

(6)  1.  What  are  you  thinking  of  (§  41,  1,  Note)  to  ask 
such  a  question,  when  you  ought  to  get  a  dictionary  and 
look   it   up  yourself!  2.   One  never  knows   how   one 

should  call  people  who  have  been  married  several  times. 
3.  Sometimes  I  can't  help  wishing  that  we  lived  in  a 
bigger  house.  4.  As  you  had  such  a  good  time,  don't 
you  want  to  sit  down  and  tell  us  about  it?  5.  He  can 
ask  such  strange  questions  that  no  human  being  can 
answer  them.  6.  That  was  a  long  time  ago,  and  since 
that  time  1  have  never  thought  of  those  days. 


Chap.  33.] 


REVIEW, 


217 


49.    Bismarck,  the  Iron  Chancellor. 


(c)  A  Visit.  —  '*  Come  in  and  sit  down ;  I  am  glad  that 
you  are  here  again." 

"  Thank  you !  May  I  ask  you  about  Mr.  Miiller,  who 
lives  with  you  ?  " 

"  Certainly,  ask  as  many  questions  as  you  want  to." 

"  Some    time  ago    that    man  who  lives    here  with  you 


218  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§280. 

asked  me  for  my  German  grammar.  Now  I  wish  it  again. 
I  have  asked  him  three  times  why  I  have  to  wait  so  long 
for  it.     Will  you  please  look  for  it  in  his  room  ? '' 

"  No,  it  is  not  there.     Pm  very  sorry.'' 

"  Thank  you  very  much." 

"  You're  very  welcome." 

"  May  I  ask  you  what  time  it  is  ?  " 

"  Certainly,  it  is  quarter  to  five.  Don't  you  want  to  wait 
for  your  friend  ?  " 

^'  No,  thank  you !  I  shouldn't  think  of  (§  41,  1,  Note) 
waiting  longer  for  him.  I  can  get  the  grammar  another 
time." 


CHAPTER   XXXIV. 
REVIEW  OF  CHAPTERS  IX-XVI. 

Katfer  IDtll^elm  ber  ^rof  e»  . 

281.  m^  ^aifer  mi^dm  ber  (grfte  tm  ^a^xt  1871  au« 
bem  fran^ofif^en  ^>iege  ^uru(f!ef)rte,  ftanb  er  fc^on  in  fetnem 


50.    Monument  to  Emperor  William  I  at  Coblentz.  — On  the  point 
where  the  Moselle  flows  into  the  Rhine. 

t)terunbftebjtgften  ^eben^ja^re.  !Da  erfanb  fitr  t^n  ba§  3SoI! 
ben  9^amen  „§e(bengreig."  ^en  ritfttgen,  frdftigen  ^aifer 
cirgerte  bie^;  er  ^t  nie  ^ugeben  tDoIIen,  ha^  er  alt  fet. 

219 


220  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§283. 

„3Ba§  ^abe  irf)  \)a  er^d^ten  fjUvtn?  Sa«  woikn  benn  btc 
Seute  mtt  i^rem  §elbengreife  ?"  f ragte  er.  „Um  ©elbengrei^ 
^u  fein,  mu§  man  boc^  t)or  alien  ^Dingen  etn  @reig  fein,  unb 
ba«  bin  tc^  noc^  (ange  nic^t."  Unb  \>a^  er  n)ir!ad)  nidjt  ait 
toav  getgt  fic^  barin,  ha^  er  noc^  fiebae^n  .ga^re  itUt  unb 
regterte. 

Notes. 

282.  Historical  Note.  —  William  I,  though  unpopular  early  in 
his  reign,  was,  as  founder  of  the  new  German  Empire,  much 
admired  and  loved.  Memorials  to  him  are  found  all  over  Ger- 
many, usually  flanked  by  statues  of  Bismarck  and  Moltke.  Each 
of  these  three,  the  king,  the  statesman,  and  the  general,  was  indis- 
pensable in  building  the  new  empire.  Later,  the  old  Emperor 
used  to  appear  every  day  about  one  o'clock  at  the  corner  window 
of  the  old  palace,  when  the  guard,  tie  2[Ba(J)e,  marched  by.  People 
came  in  crowds  to  see  him.  When  he  became  feeble  his  family 
tried  to  persuade  him  not  to  stand  at  the  window,  but  he  insisted 
with  characteristic  energy  and  wit :  "  I  must  do  it ;  it  says  in 
Baedeker  [a  well-known  guide  book]  that  I  am  to  be  seen  here." 
He  died  March  9,  in  1888,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  son.  Kaiser 
Friedrich  III  [so  called  because  he  was  King  Friedrich  III  of 
Prussia,  not  because  he  was  the  third  Emperor  Friedrich.]  After 
a  brief  reign  of  ninety-nine  days,  the  popular  Friedrich  III,  known 
to  the  people  as  „Unfcr  %xii}/'  died,  and  the  present  Kaiser,  Wil- 
helm  II,  came  to  the  throne. 

Exercises. 

283.  (a)  1.  The  auxiliary  always  precedes  "two  infini- 
tives." Then  what  is  the  difference  between  the  position 
of  the  auxiliary  with  "  two  infinitives  "  in  independent  sen- 
tences and  in  subordinate  clauses  ?  2.  Apply  the  General 
Principle  for  Order  (§  37,  Note)  to  the  position  of  prepo- 
sitional phrases.  Do  they  differ  in  position  from  adverbs  ? 
3.  Find  in  §  281  illustrations  of  modals  in  simple  and 
compound  tenses,  of  "  two  infinitives  "  with  other  verbs,  of 


Chap.  34.]  REVIEW.  221 

prepositions  with  the  dative,  with  the  accusative,  and  with 
dative  or  accusative. 

(6)  1.  Translate  the  sentence,  He  JiasnH  been  able  to  do 
it  to-day,  and  then  put  it  into  the  proper  order  after  /  know 
that.  2.  What  is  the  difference  between  ^a^  ^'inb  lief 
in  ba«  3ttttmer,  and  !t)a^  ^inb  lief  in  bem  ^tmmer. 
3.  What  is  the  difference  between  ®e^en  ^k  in  hit  @C^u(e? 
and  @e^en  <Bxt  gnr  @rf)n(e  ?  (§  121,  Note).  4.  Between 
SoUen  k>it  ba  fein  ?  and  SBerben  (Sie  ba  fein  ? 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  Sa§  \>a^  fein; 
i^a^  barfft  bu  nic^t  tun.  2.  3<m  (Sommer  ge^e  ic^  gem 
o()ne  ^od  aber  mit  btden  (Sttefeln  f^ajieren.  3.  SBoIten 
iDir  fe^en,  n)a§  e^  tm  anbern  3^^^^^  9^^^?  '^-  ^^^ 
ganjen  3)2orgen  l)abe  i^  fe()en  tuollen,  ob  id^  mol^t  unter 
biefen  ^(umen  ein  3$ei(d)en  finben  !onnte.  5.  Serben  xvxx 
in  fo  !urj;er  ^tit  eine  fo  (ange  5lufgabe  fc^retben  ntiiffen? 
6.  Qti^t  ^abe  id)  miv  einen  ^Injug  au^  (Seibe  mad)en  laffen. 

284.    (a)  1.   Haven't  you  had  that  new  suit  made  yet? 

2.  Yes,   I    had    it    made   (§   128,   1)   several   weeks   ago. 

3.  Have  you  met  my  brother?  I  am  sure  you  will  like 
him.  4.  After  supper  we  shall  have  to  look  for  all  the 
balls  we  lost  while  (§  95,  2)  playing.  5.  There  are  more 
mistakes  in  this  exercise  than  you  have  ever  made  before. 
6.  In  summer  when  I  can  go  to  school  through  the  wood, 
I  like  it  better  than  in  winter,  when  the  ways  are  cov- 
ered with  snow. 

(b)  1.  May  I  ask  you  when  you  can  do  this  for  me? 
2.  When  I  saw  him  sitting  by  the  window,  I  ought  to  have 
gone  across  the  street  to  speak  with  him.  3.  Beside  an 
old  tree  in  the  valley  there  is  a  beautiful  little  house  with 
many  windows  which  look  toward  the  east.  4.  When 
you  saw  the  pupils  going  home,  why  didn't  you  go  home, 


222 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§284. 


51.   Count  von  Moltke. — The  military  genius  who  guided  Emperor 
William's  campaigns. 


too  ?  5.  There  is  no  place  where  I  should  like  to  live  so 
well  as  in  that  pretty  house  by  the  lake.  6.  I  am  really 
more  interested  in  such  things  than  my  sister,  but  she  raves 
(fcf)tparmen)  about  them  more  than  I. 


Chap.  34.]  BE  VIEW.  223 

(c)  In  the  Garden.  —  "  Good  morning  !  May  I  come  into 
your  garden  and  sit  down  on  this  bench  under  your  shady 
oak  tree  ?  " 

"  Yes,  please  [do].  There  is  njothing  that  I  should  like 
better  than  to  talk  with  you." 

"Were  you  able  to  get  everything  you  wished  at  the 
market  in  the  city?" 

"  In  this  weather  I  did  not  want  to  go  to  town.  I  didn't 
like  all  those  clouds.     What  did  you  see  in  town  ?  " 

"I  had  to  stay  at  home,  too.  Two  days  ago  my  uncle 
came  with  my  little  cousin  whom  I  haven't  been  able  to 
visit  since  last  summer." 

"  Is  that  the  one  I  met  (§  171,  2,  Note)  two  years  ago, 
the  little  one  with  brown  hair  ?  " 

"  Yes,  when  I  have  nothing  else  to  do,  I  am  teaching  him 
to  play  ball.     We  have  a  fine  time  together." 

"  I  should  like  to  see  him  again.  Won't  you  bring  him 
along  next  time  you  come  ?  " 

"  Gladly  !  But  I  fear  I  shall  have  to  be  going  now.  I 
ought  to  have  gone  home  before,  but  it  looked  so  pleasant 
here  in  the  garden." 

"Good-by.  Give  your  cousin  my  regards  (gritgen  @ie 
3^ren  SSetter  t)on  mir).     And  come  again  soon." 

"  Thank  you.     5luf  Steberfef)en !" 


CHAPTER   XXXV. 


REVIEW  OF  CHAPTERS  XVII-XXIV. 


Deutfd}e  IPiffenfd^aft. 

285.  3luf  ben  beutfc^en  UniDerfitciten  gtbt  e^  feinen  3^^^9' 
5tnftatt  bag  man  bte  3$or(efungen  regelmdgtg  befu(f)en  mu§, 

ftnbiert  man  fo  Diet 


ober  fo  tt)enig,  n^ie 
man  will  (5^  murbe 
einmat  bariiber  ge* 
tia^t,  bag  bie  galfte 
ber  'Stnbenten  nic^t^ 
tange;  ba  l)at  :^i^= 
marcf  ftolj  an^geru- 
fen :  „Qa,  aber  e^  ift 
ber  anbern  ^dlfte  ge^ 
hmgen,  bte  SBelt  ju 
be^errfdjen." 

9^atur(id)  barf  man 
bte«  ntd)t  3U  trdrtlid) 
nel)men,  aber  and) 
ol)ne  e«  gan;;  njdrttic^ 
3U  faffen,  mng  man 
bod)  jugeben,  bag  et- 
xoa^  35}al)re^  barin 
liegt,  benn  in  ber 
SBiffenfd)aft  finb  bte 
T)tnt\^tn  ben  meiften  anberen  335(!ern  iiberlegen.  'Der 
^rei^  ber  berii()mten  beutfc^en  ®e(el)rten  umfagt   9^amen 

224 


52.    Roentgen. — The  discoverer  of  the 
X-ray. 


Chap.  35.]  REVIEW.  225 

H)te  ^ant,  ?^tc^te,  ©egef,  ®^o)3en^auer,  SJiotnmfett,  (^ritnttt; 
^eltn^ol^,  tod),  unb  Df^dntgen. 

Notes. 

286.  Historical  Note.  —  German  scholars  and  scientists  have 
long  been  famous,  and  —  since  the  establishment  of  the  Empire, 
and  especially  since  the  accession  of  the  present  Emperor  —  schol- 
arship and  science  have  been  applied  to  the  industrial  world  with 
astounding  results.  In  the  realm  of  theoretical  and  applied  science 
the  Germans  have  become  the  teachers  of  the  world,  drawing  to 
their  universities  students  from  every  land. 

Exercises. 

287.  (a)  1.  Give  full  synopses  of  the  verbs  in  the  fol- 
lowing sentences :  ^d)  uberfe^e  ba^  ^uc^,  3rf)  fe^e  metnen 
greunb  iiber,  and  ^^  fe^e  metnen  greunb  iiber  ben  g(ug. 
2.  Make  an  outline  table  by  moods  and  tenses,  showing  all 
the  differences  between  simple  verbs  and  verbs  w4th  com- 
mon prefixes.  3.  Make  an  outline  table  showing  the 
commonest  German  renderings  of  the  English  verbal  in  ing. 
4.  Find  in  §  285  examples  of  the  use  of  separable  verbs, 
inseparable  verbs,  common  prefixes,  ^aben  and  fetn  as  a.ix- 
iliaries,  English  verbals  translated  by  infinitives  and  by 
clauses. 

(6)  1.  Translate :  He  has  driven  to  toivn,  and  He  has 
driven  badly.  Explain.  2.  Translate  @r  fa^  mtc^  !om= 
men,  two  ways  in  English.  Do  both  ways  mean  the 
same  thing?  3.  Translate,  He  came  without  seeing  me, 
and  He  came  without  my  seeing  him.  Explain  the  transla- 
tions of  the  verbals. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  (Sie  fagen,  e§ 
mac^t  nid)tg  au^ !  ^^la,  ba^  fommt  barauf  an!  2.  (gobalb 
ic^  eingefrf)tafen  mar,  niac^te  ic^  gtetc^  H)ieber  auf.  3.  ^c^ 
bin  ben  beiben  iiberad  gefolgt.       4.  (^(auben  (Ste,  ba^  ber 


226 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION. 


[§  288. 


(Ba^  rid^ttg  tft?  5.  5lnftatt  fortgufa^ren  ju  uberfe^en, 
{)brte  er  auf,  6.  (5^  tft  mir  gelungen,  ungefd^r  eine  f|albe 
(Seite  3U  iiberfe^en,  o^ne  einen  getter  gu  mac^en. 

288.    (a)  1.   You  might  have  translated  the  whole  exer- 
cise right,  if  you  hadn't  misunderstood.         2.    He  looked 

hither  and  thither  for  his 
watch,  but  it  was  (§  206, 
2)  under  a  newspaper  on 
the  table.  3.  How  long 
will  it  take  if  we  take  a 
carriage  ?  4.  I  haven't 
seen  the  boys  playing 
football;  they  may  have 
stopped  playing  before 
we  arrived.  5.  If  you 
wished  me  to  go  and  or- 
der dinner,  instead  of  con- 
tinuing  to  play  [the] 
piano,  why  didn't  you  tell 
me  so  (e^)?  6.  Find- 
ing the  children  playing 
in  the  garden,  I  succeeded 
in  making  them  stop  with- 
out their  getting  angry. 

(6)  1.  I  have  followed 
you  hither  and  thither  for 
a  whole  hour,  without  being  able  to  speak  a  word  with  you. 
2.  I  think  there  is  more  (§  30,  2)  room  here;  you  can 
sit  down  without  disturbing  us.  3.  Seeing  the  boys 
sitting  at  the  desk  without  doing  anything,  I  told  them  to 
begin  writing  their  exercises.  4.  They  continued  writ- 
ing for  half  an  hour ;  I  thought  it  would  take  longer  before 
they  were   ready.         5.   When  we  met  the  two  brothers, 


53.    MoMMSEN. — One  of  Germany's 
greatest  historians. 


Chap.  35.]  :REVIEW,  227 

they  entertained  us  a  long  time  by  telling  all  kinds  of  (alter* 
lei)  funny  stories.  6.  Hearing  the  children  making  such 
a  noise,  instead  of  continuing  to  work  without  their  noticing 
you,  you  ought  to  have  ordered  them  to  stop. 

(c)  In  the  Parlor.  —  "  Do  you  know  those  two  men  I  met 
at  [the]  Mtillers'  yesterday  ?  Well,  I  think  I  see  them  com- 
ing.    Will  you  help  me  entertain  them  ?  " 

"Instead  of  receiving  them  like  this  (fo),  we  ought  to 
stop  sewing  and  change  our  clothes.  Don't  you  think  so  ? 
We  can  let  them  wait  for  us." 

"Oh,  no!  Then  they  will  hear  us  running  hither  and 
thither  trying  to  get  ready.  I  think  we  shall  succeed  in 
entertaining  them  very  well." 

"  May  I  keep  on  (continue)  sewing  ?  Vm  about  to  finish 
this  pattern,  and  it  won't  take  long.  Of  course,  if  you  order 
me  to  stop,  I  will  (fo  in'  i^'^)"  ^ 

"Oh,  no,  only  I  wish  you'd  make  a  little  room  on  the 
sofa.  I  don't  like  to  see  your  things  lying  there,  for  you 
know  it  is  the  seat  of  honor." 

"Of  course  not.  You  are  right,  as  always.  Well,  now 
everything  is  in  order,  and  we  are  ready  to  receive  the 
gentlemen.'' 


CHAPTER   XXXVI. 
REVIEW  OF  CHAPTERS  XXV-XXXII. 

Deutfd?er  ^anbeL 

289.  (geit  ber  ^egritnbung  beg  !Deutfd)eti  D^etc^eg  ^aben 
bie  ^Deutfc^en  ©rogeg  geletftet.  @te  mdc^ten  ben  §anbe( 
unb  3Ser!e^r  ber  Sett  be^errfc^en.    (Sie  glauben,  bag  i^nen 


54.   The  Docks  at  Hamburg. 

bieg  gelingen  tann,  njenn  fie  in  ber  ^^^iiftt'ic  Dertuerten,  \va^ 
fie  auf  ber  Unit)erfitot  lernen.  Unb  fie  fdnnten  in  ber  Zat 
nid)t§  ^effereg  tun;  mon  fie^t  in  faft  jebem  Sanbe  bie  be* 
fannte  3J?ar!e  "  made  in  Germany." 

228 


Chap.  36.]  REVIEW,  229 

!iDer  ^alaft  be^  (Suttan^  p  ^onftantmopel  njtrb  burc^ 
beutfc^e  (Sleftri^itat  erleut^tet,  unb  ^riiden  unb  ^ifenba^nen 
in  ^(einafien  unb  @ubameri!a  n)erben  t)on  beutfc^en  ®efe((* 
f(^aften  erbaut.  T)te  @cf|tffe  be^  9^orbbeutfc^en  !2(ot)b§,  unb 
ber  @amburg*3lmerifa=Sinte,  ber  beiben  grCgten  ^antpfer- 
linten  ber  Sett,  tragen  beutfc^e  gabnfate  in  alle  Seltteile, 
Unb  ba^  a((eg  gef(f)ie^t  erft,  feit  bie  beutfc^en  <Btaattn  \id)  ^um 
beutfc^en  ^tid)  jufammengefc^foffen  ^aben. 

Notes. 

290.  Historical  Note.  —  The  development  of  German  industry 
and  commerce  is  little  short  of  marvelous.  The  capital,  Berlin, 
has  become  the  leading  industrial  center  of  Europe,  while  in 
foreign  commerce  —  imports  and  exports  —  Germany  excels  the 
United  States.  The  latest  available  figures  show  Germany's  com- 
merce to  be  worth  four  billions  ($4,000,000,000)  a  year,  while  that 
of  the  United  States  is  worth  about  three  and  a  quarter  billions 
($3,250,000,000). 

Exercises. 

291.  (a)  1.  Write  short  sentences  illustrating  all  the 
German  equivalents  for  English  that.  2.  What  impresses 
you  as  the  most  difficult  peculiarity  of  German  adjectives  ? 
Illustrate  it  in  a  sentence.  3.  Outline  the  chief  dif- 
ferences between  German  and  English  in  their  use  of 
(1)  moods  and  (2)  tenses.  4.  Find  in  §  289  illustrations 
of  (1)  both  kinds  of  conjunctions,  (2)  different  adjective 
peculiarities,  and  (3)  uses  of  the  subjunctive. 

(6)  1.  Translate,  The  boy  I  mean  is  not  the  one  you  know, 
and  comment  on  the  insertion  of  German  words  not  needed 
in  English.  2.  Write  three  German  sentences,  seeing 
how  many  infinitive  forms  you  can  put  at  the  end,  like 
(Bit  ptten  i^n  nic^t  fingen  lernen  faff  en  f  often.  3.  After 
which,  of  the  two  sentences,  §eute  giug  ic^  in  bie  Btaht  and 


230 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION, 


[§  292. 


geute  bin  ic^  in  bie  (Stabt  gegangen,  do  you  expect  me  to  go 
on  and  tell  what  I  did  in  the  city  ?     Explain. 

(c)  Conversational  Idioms.  Memorize:  1.  ^a^  finb  bie 
fc^bnften  ^(umen,  bie  id)  je  gefe^en  ^be.  2.  ^^e  fleigiger 
tDir  arbeiten,  befto  nte^r  (ernen  n)ir ;  ba^  mitffen  <Bk  ^ugeben. 
3.  (Bit  fjahtn  tttoa^  SBei^e^  in  bie  Za\(i}t  geftedt;  reic^en 


55.   The  Suspended  Tramway  at  Barmen-Elberfeld.  —  One  of 
Germany's  engineering  triumphs. 

(^ie'S  ntir.  4.  ^r  ^attt  onf  a((ent  befte!)en  fotten,  rra^  er 
befc^Ioffen  t)atte.  5.  1)er  ^e^rer  ^ag^tc,  er  ^)abe  perft  ge* 
bac^t,  bag  ber  (Safe  ric^tig  fei.  6.  9^un,  ba^  l^atten  Bit 
frii^er  tun  fdnnen. 

292.    (a)  1.   After  he  had  decided  to  pass  the  summer  in 
Berlin,  he  ought  to  have  insisted  on  going  there  (§  149,  1). 


Chap.  36.] 


REVIEW. 


231 


2.  Did  it  ever  occur  to  you  that  you  might  not  pass  the 
examination?  3.  We  have  been  here  all  summer;  but 
next  year  we  shall  pass  in  Germany.  4.  Did  you  ever 
see  a  girl  who  could  speak  so  fast  ?  5.  She  insisted  that 
there  was  no  reason  why  she  should  receive  her  oldest  friends 
first.         6.    Well,  isn't  that  the  best  way  to  decide  it  ? 


56.  A  German  Warship  in  the  Kiel  Canal.  —  This  canal  connects  the 
North  Sea  and  the  Baltic,  making  it  unnecessary  for  German  ships 
to  sail  around  Denmark. 

(&)  1.  Those  are  not  the  handkerchiefs  I  ordered ;  mine 
were  not  so  large  as  these.  2.  There  was  something 
strange  in  the  speech  he  made,  but  of  course  we  had  to 
agree  that  it  was  good.  3.  You  ought  to  have  put  your 
book  on  the  table  where  the  lamp  was ;  then  you  could  have 
continued  your  story.         4.   He  spoke  as  if  he  didn't  know 


232  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§292. 

a  shorter  way  through,  the  wood.  5.  After  we  had  all 
decided  that  there  was  no  reason  why  he  should  speak,  he 
insisted  on  making  a  speech.  6.  It  is  true  he  was  a  good 
speaker,  but  his  speech  consisted  of  nothing  but  philosophy 
and  we  did  not  like  it  very  well. 

(c)  Before  the  Tennis.  —  "  What's  the  matter  ?  I've  been 
standing  here  a  whole  hour.    Why  didn't  you  come  before  ?  " 

"  I  should  think  it  would  have  occurred  to  you  that  I 
might  be  late.  Did  you  ever  come  the  long  way  past  the 
old  school  ?  " 

"  It's  true  I  never  came  that  way,  but  that  is  no  reason 
why  I  should  have  to  wait  for  you  forever.  Nej^t  time  I 
won't  wait." 

"  Oh,  yes,  you  will  (§  237,  1) !  It  seems  strange  to  me 
that  you  should  be  so  angry  at  me  the  first  time  I  am  late. 
You  speak  as  if  you  had  never  done  anything  bad  yourself." 

"  Well,  I  agree  that  I  did  not  speak  courteously  at  first, 
but  I  was  tired,  and  I  didn't  like  the  way  you  kept  me 
waiting  (let  me  wait)." 

"  I  agree  with  you  that  I  ought  to  have  come  a  shorter 
way,  but  half  an  hour  pS-ssed  before  I  noticed  how  late  it 
was.     Excuse  me  this  time  and  I'll  never  do  it  again." 

*'  All  right !     Shall  we  begin  our  game  ?  " 


PART   IL 


PART  II. 

CHAPTER  I. 
COMPOSITION  OF  LETTERS. 

293.  Introduction.  —  As  to  content^  German  letters  are 
like  English :  one  writes  what  one  wishes  to  say.  As 
to  form^  the  Germans,  like  the  Americans,  break  all 
rules  for  date,  address,  and  ending,  in  letters  to  inti- 
mate friends.  But  when  writing  to  acquaintances,  and 
especially  to  strangers,  one  should  follow  the  rules. 

Below  are  given  the  commonest  forms  of  dating, 
addressing,  and  closing.  They  range  from  the  most 
intimate  to  the  most  formal.  Illustrations  of  these 
styles  may  be  seen  in  the  German  letters  on  pages  236, 
238,  and  241.  The  one  on  page  236  is  intimate ;  on 
page  238,  friendly ;  on  page  241,  business.  Germans 
usually  write  the  German  script,  although  they  can 
all  read  English  script. 

Note.  —  Many  American  students  have  found  pleasure  and  profit 
in  corresponding  with  German  students.  Those  who  wish  to  exchange 
letters  in  this  way  (each  writing  in  the  language  of  the  other,  or  each 
using  his  native  tongue)  can  make  arrangements  by  having  their 
teachers  write  to  Professor  Dr.  Martin  Hartmann,  Fechnerstr.  6, 
Leipzig,  Germany.  The  conditions  under  which  the  correspondence 
is  arranged  are  contained  in  the  "  Rules  for  Scholars'  International 
Correspondence,"  copies  of  which  may  be  had  gratis  from  AUyn  and 
Bacon,  Boston,  New  York,  or  Chicago. 

294.  The  Date.  —  German  dates  always  follow  the 
order:  day, month,  year.  §attnot)er,  14.  2.  1912;  ^txlxn, 
13.  IV.  1918;  :Dre^ben,  b.  18.  SJlai  1914;  (E^icago,  ben  It. 

235 


236  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§294. 


/ 


^l^A^. 


/^^&^€^  -^^^^f^***^^-; 


>,^>4»'*i*-f&^t^^*-r^i^^<^*v^  ua^^^^^.^'P^^^^^^ 


Chap.  1.]  LETTER    WBITING.  237 

3an.  1915;  ^o^ton,  ben  23ften  S^otJ.  1916,  Germans  very 
rarely  write  the  day  of  the  week,  nor  do  they  usually 
spell  the  name  of  the  month  in  full. 

295.  The  Address. — The  common  address  between 
friends  is:  li^ieber  ^axi,  ^iebe  5tnna,  more  rarely,  Wtxxi 
Ueber  or  3J?eine  (tebe.  Then  follow,  increasing  in  for- 
mality:  i^teber  §err  :53raun !  Steber  §err  ^oftor!  (always 
address  a  German  by  his  title);  @e^r  geel)rter  §err 
(Scf)mibt  (gee^rter  alone  is  bad  form);  (Se^r  gee^rte  gna* 
btge  grau!  @e^r  gee^rte  grau  ^rofeffor!  (to  the  wife  of 
a  professor);  (Se^r  gee^rter  §err!  (the  commonest  form 
of  address);  33ere^rter  §err  !Direftor!  S^ere^rter  ^err! 
(very  respectful). 

In  business  letters  it  is  sufficient  to  write  the  name  of 
the  person  or  firm,  followed  on  the  same  line  by  in  and 
the  name  of  the  city.  Then  comes  the  body  of  the 
letter  without  the  equivalent  of  our  Dear  Sir: 

mm^tn,  15.  6.  1914. 
§errn  51.  SS^ertf)eim  in  Berlin! 

Qn  :^eanttt)ortung  Q^xt^  tperten  @c^retben^  t)oni  12.  b.  Wl* 
(§  365)  teile  id)  3*^nen  ergebenft  mit,  ba§,  etc. 

goc^ac^tung^tioK 

296.  The  Close.  —  There  are  many  wai/s  of  closing  a 
letter.  For  intimate  friends,  '^etn  or  !Deine  suffices; 
for  less  intimate  friends,  -3^r  or  3^re;  for  acquain- 
tances, §orf)ac^tung^t)o((,  ^oi^ac^tung^tJoK  unb  ergebenft, 
and  Wlit  tjorjuglidjer  goc^ac^tung  form  a  series  ranging 
from  respectful  to  very  respectful.    No  comma  or  other 


238  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§296. 


AaM^^  oi,/9zuc.  JU^y^/i 


J^\^^i^t.^-^e.^e^    ' 


..t^  ^,.C^l.u,,^^^€^<c..^     U-t^  JjfLoijLP ^^tZ^^a.    ^^^^^^ 


Chap.  1.]  LETTER    WRITING.  239 

punctuation  follows  these  words,  even  though  the  name 
is  written  on  the  line  below. 

Note.  —  Germans  rarely  send  love  ;  instead  they  prefer  greetings, 
@rii^e.  In  signing  a  letter  Your  loving  son,  the  participle  in  German 
must  have  an  object :  2)etn  2)icf)  tiebenber  @oI)n.  In  a  letter  the 
singular  2)u,  2)ettt,  S)i(f),  and  the  plural  3^r,  @uer,  and  @U(i),  must 
always  be  written  with  a  capital,  as  well  as  the  formal  @ie  and  3^r, 

297.  Summary.  —  In  writing  to  intimate  friends  the 
form  makes  little  difference,  except  that  all  pronouns 
of  the  second  person  must  be  capitalized.  With  ac- 
quaintances and  strangers,  when  in  doubt  about  the 
form,  use  the  following : 

^etD^or!,  b.  10.  Oft,  1917. 
@e^r  gee^rter  §err! 

§oc^ad)tung^t)o(l 

298.  The  Envelope. — -  On  the  envelope  the  word  (5ln) 
§erm,  grau,  or  grciutein  is  usually  written  above  and  a 
bit  to  the  '3ft  of  the  name.  Always  give  titles,  but 
they  may  be  abbreviated  with  the  exception  of  §errn, 
grau,  and  grciulein:  Qtxxn  ^xol  ^r.  griebric^  ^(uge, 
§errn  ©e^eimrat  *^rof.  ^r.  (grtc^  ©c^mtbt.  Germans 
usually  underscore  the  name  of  the  city,  and  write  the 
street  followed  by  the  number  on  the  line  below, 
instead  of  using  the  opposite  English  arrangement. 

»gerrn  ©e^eimrat 

^erttn  SS.  30. 

3(ug^burger  ®tr.  39". 


240  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§299. 

In  the  upper  left-hand  corner,  or  on  the  back  of  the 
envelope,  may  be  put  the  writer's  name  and  address 
preceded  by  the  letters  5(bf.  for  ber  2lbfenber  (sender}. 
In  large  cities  the  name  of  the  subdivision  and  sub- 
station are  usually  given.  Thus  the  address  above 
means  that  Dr.  Lenz  lives  near  Substation  "  30  "  of 
Subdivision  "  West,"  in  Berlin.  Sometimes  the  num- 
ber of  the  story  is  added  as  a  little  Roman  exponent 
to  the  street  number,  45"  and  68"^  meaning  up  two 
and  three  flights  respectively  ("second"  or  "third 
flat"). 

299.  The  Street.  —  German  street  names  deserve  special 
attention,  although  German  use  is  far  from  uniform.  ^ 
At  the  corners  of  Liitzow  and  Potsdamer  streets  in 
Berlin  are  four  signs ;  two  read  Sii^ott)  ®tr.  and  two 
read  )^ti^ott)ftr.  This  same  condition  is  true  on  count- 
less corners  in  nearly  all  large  German  cities,  as  the  Ger- 
mans seldom  follow  the  rules  consistently.  The  rules 
are  as  follows  :  (1)  When  the  name  of  a  street  is  a  single 
noun,  the  word  (Strafe  or  ^(a^  is  united  with  it  without 
a  hyphen :  griebrid)ftra5e,  3[Bin)e(tnp(afe.  (2)  When  the 
name  is  a  compound  noun,  its  different  parts  are  joined 
by  hyphens  and  it  is  also  joined  by  a  hyphen  to  the 
word  (Strafe  or  ^(a^,  which  is  then  written  with  a  capi- 
tal :  a«artin=gut()er-@tra6e,  S^tftoria^Suife^'ipia^.  (S)  When 
the  name  is  an  adjective,  the  word  (Strafe  or  "^iai^  is  writ- 
ten separate  :  J^eipjiger  (Strage,  ^otSbamer  '^iai^.  (4)  But 
when  the  adjective  modifies  a  noun,  the  adjective  is  writ- 

1  For  discussions  of  street  names,  see  Duden's  "  Orthographisches 
Worterbuch,"  p.  xi ;  Wustmann's  "  Allerhand  Sprachduinmheiten," 
pp.  176-182. 


Chap.  1.]  LETTER    WRITING.  241 


^..CC^C^^J^  , 


/ 


^^«^^  x^t>^  ^i^x^T^r^  yt^yt^ec^^t-e^?^  i^t<^^ 


''^^^'^'C^^i<Z<^A/OC€'^'t^^^ 


'^^ 


^.  t^*^^jez^.<^^Ccc^ -  i^^y^'4*. 


ten  separate,  while  noun  and  street  are  written  as  in 
(1);  9^eue  S^iinterfetbftraf^e.  The  approved  abbreviation 
for  (Strafe  is  (Str.,  not  @t.,  and  for  '^\^%,  ^L 


CHAPTER  11. 


COMPOSITION  OF  WORDS. 


300.  Introduction.  —  German  is  the  richest  of  all  lan- 
guages in  compound  words.  Not  only  does  it  compound 
many  words  which  in  English  are  written  separate,  as 
bit  §auptfarf)e,  the  main  thing^  bie   !^uftf(^tfffa^rt^afttenge* 

o,^feIIfci^aft,  the  airship  passage  stock  company^  and  so  on, 
but  it  is  particularly  varied  in  its  roots,  prefixes,  and 
suffixes. 

Germans  are  also  fond  of  coining  words  for  new  ideas 
out  of  German  roots,  prefixes,  and  suffixes,  where  Eng- 
lish Anglicizes  a  foreign  word.  Sometimes  this  new 
coinage  is  accepted  by  the  people  :  ber  gernf^red)er  is  as 
common  as  ba^  ^l^elep^on,  bte  ga^rfarte  is  as  common  as 
ba^  billet,  ticket.  Sometimes  it  is  rejected:  efforts  to 
introduce  bit  Xutife  for  bte  (Sauce,  sauce,  and  ba«  SO^unb* 
tuc^  for  bie  @ert)tette,  napkin,  seem  to  have  failed.  When 
a  foreign  word  insists  on  keeping  its  individuality,  it 
is  often  Germanized  by  force :  ber  3^'^'^^^/  circus,  bte 
^e!«,  cakes. 

Roots. 

301.  Ablaut.  —  German  roots  often  vary  their  vowel 
sounds  so  that  it  is  hard  to  identify  the  original  root : 
fcfiltegett,  ba§  ^^U^,  ber  (Sc^tug;  ber  :53uttb,  bte  ^ittbe,  ba« 
^anb.  This  altering  of  the  root  vowel,  called  Ablaut, 
is  the  most  important  change  that  can  take  place  in  a 
root.  English  has  it  too  ;  sing,  sang,  sung  ;  swim,  swam^ 
swum, 

242 


Chap.  2.]  COMPOSITION  OF  WORDS.  243 

Note. — Besides  der  Umlaut  and  der  Ablaut,  German  has  three 
other  convenient  words,  relating  to  the  position  of  a  vowel  in  a  word 
or  syllable  :  der  Anlaut,  the  beginning  sound,  der  Inlaut,  the  middle 
sound,  and  der  Auslaut,  the  end  sound,  referring  respectively  to  the 
beginning,  middle,  and  end  of  a  word  or  a  syllable.  It  is  much  shorter 
to  say  that  certain  things  are  true  of  vowels  "im  Anlaut,  im  Inlaut, 
or  im  Auslaut,^^  than  "  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable,''''  and 
so  on. 

302.  Derivation  of  Nouns  from  Verb  Roots.  —  Nouns  de- 
rived from  verb  roots  are  usually  of  one  of  three  kinds  : 

(1)  an  active  object^  performing  the  action  of  the  verb ; 

(2)  a  passive  object^  on  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
performed ;  or  (3)  an  abstract  noun^  denoting  the  con- 
dition or  action  of  the  verb. 

(1)  ^(x^  ^anb  (binben),  something  that  binds. 
^er  ^ogen  (btegen),  something  that  bends. 
>Der  g(u§  (fitejen),  something  that  flows. 

(2)  !Der  ^ruc^  (brec^en),  something  that  is  broken. 
!Der  ^unb  (binben),  something  that  is  bound. 
T)er  ^ran!  (trinfen),  something  that  is  drunk. 

(3)  !Der  g(ug  (fliegen),  action  or  condition  of  flying. 
!l)er  ®ang  (ge^en),  action  or  condition  of  coino. 
^tx  Xrun!  (trinfen),  action  or  condition  of  drink- 


303.    Below  are  given  the  commonest  verbal  roots 
from  which  nouns  are  derived  by  root  changes  (3(blaut) . 

^tegen,  to  bend ;  ber  ^ogen,  bow^  arch;  bte  ^u^t,  bay. 
53inbett,  to  bind;   ber   iBattb,  bound  volume;   ba^  ^anb, 
ribbon ;  bte  -53tnbe,  bandage ;  ber  :^unb,  bond^  union. 
^rec^en,  to  break ;  ber  :^ru(^,  breach. 


244  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§303. 

ginben,  to  find  ;  ber  ^Viw!^,  find,  cache. 

gUegen,  to  fly;  ber  ^inq,  flight;  ber  gliigel,  wing, 

glie^en,  to  flow ;  ber  glug,  river ;  \ia^  glo^,  ra/if. 

(^thtn,  to  give  ;  bie  @abe,  ^^/i(;  (ba^  @tft,  poz807i). 

©e^ett,  to  go ;  ber  ®ang,  ^ai^,  «^'a?A:. 

©iegen,  to  pour  ;  ber  (^^^  casting  (of  metal}. 

@raben,  to  dig;  ba^  @rab,  grave;  bie  @rube,  grotto;  bie 

®ruft,  r;aM?^ ;  ber  ©raben,  c?i^(?A. 
@reifen,  to  grasp  ;  ber  ®riff,  handle. 
.^Ungen,  to  sound;  ber  ^(ang,  sound;  bie  £(ingel,  bell. 
Siegen,  to  lie;  bie  ^age,  situation,  the  wag  a  thing  lies. 
OJ^effen,  to  measure  ;  bai5  Wa^,  measure  ;  bie  9}?a§,  (quart) 

measure. 
(Sc^iegen,  ^o  s^oof ;  ber  ^i^ug,  s^o^;  ber  (Scf)o§,  shoot,  twig. 
@d)(ageu,  ^o  stWA^e  ;  ber  (2d)(ag,  stroke  ;  bie  (^c^tad^t,  5af?/6j. 
(Sd)Iie§en,  ^o  shut;  ^a^  (S^Io§,  Zoc^;  cas^/e;  ber  ^d)lu^, 

end ;  ber  (Scl)Iitffe(,  key. 
©c^neiben,  to  cut ;  ber  (Sd)nitt,  c^wf;  ber  ^d)ni^,  slice. 
(Set)en,  ^o  see ;  bie  @id)t,  sight. 
<Se^en,  to  set ;  ber  ^(x%f  sentence. 
©ingen,  to  sing ;  ber  (Sang,  ber  @efang,  song. 
iSi^en,  to  sit;  ber  (B\^,  seat. 
S^rec^en,  to  speak;   bie  (gprat^e,  language;   ber  (Sprud), 

saying ;  ba^  @efprdd),  conversation. 
(Springen,  <o  spring ;  ber  (S^jrung,  Zea/?. 
(Ste()en,  ^o  s^aric? ;  ber  @tanb,  standing  ;  bie  (^tunbe,  Aowr. 
Xreiben,  to  drive ;  ber  !Xrieb,  impulse. 
Slrinfen,  ^o  c?Wn^;  ber  Xran!  and  ber  Xrunf,  (^Ww^. 
SSerfen,  to  throw;  ber  Surf,  the  throw(ing'). 
SBiegen,  (1-)  to  weigh,  (2)  to  rock;  (1)  bie  !ifi}age,  scaZe; 

ba«    ®emid)t,   weight;    (2)  bie    Siege,  cradle;   bie 

SBoge,  ?^ai;e. 


Chap.  2.]  COMPOSITION  OF  WORDS.  245 

3te^en,  to  draw;    ber   3^9r  train;  feature;    bte   Qnd)t, 

hreed(^ing^. 
3tt»tngen,  to  compel ;  ber  3^^^^9r  compulsion. 

Prefixes. 

304.  German  prefixes  may  be  divided  into  two  classes, 
verbal  and  general.  The  verbal  prefixes  may  also  be 
classed  as  inseparable  prefixes,  which  were  treated  in 
Lesson  XVII  (p.  106),  and  separable,  which  were 
treated  in  Lesson  XVIII  (p.  114).  Of  the  general 
prefixes  the  most  important  are  :  erj^,  ge-,  tnt^-,  un-,  ur-. 
They  are  used  chiefly  with  nouns. 

(1)  (5r3=  (English  arch-^  means  leader^  chief;  ber  (Sr^- 
bifc^of,  archbishop  ;  ber  (gr^^erjog,  archduke  ;  ber  ^r^litgner, 
arch-liar  ;  ber  ^r^f c^ettn,  arrant  hnave. 

(2)  @e=  (no  English  equivalent)  forms  (a)  collectives 
out  of  noun  stems,  or  (6)  verbal  nouns  from  verb  stems. 

(a)  T)a^  (^ebirge,  mountain  chain  (ber  ^erg);  bie  @e* 
•Britber,  brothers  (ber  iBruber) ;  ba^  @efteber,  plumage  (bie 
geber) ;  'iia^  (^ejubel,  jubilation  (ber  3:ube() ;  ba^  (^emauer, 
t^aZ/s  (bte  ^Jlauer);  bie  @ef(f)tt)ifter,  pi.,  brothers  and  sisters 
(bie  (Srf)tt)efter). 

(5)  Da§  @ebel(,  barking  (belteti);  ba^  (Bthti,  prayer 
(beten);  ber  @eban!e,  thought  (benfen);  "^a^  (^t\>\d)i,  poem 
(btcf)ten) ;  ba^  ©e^eul,  howling  (f)eulen) ;  ba^  ®e(dute,  rm^- 
m^  (tauten);  ba^  @ef^en!,  present  (fc^enfen). 

(8)  Wl\\\(ty  (English  mis-  or  dis-)  means  wrong.  It 
has  been  treated  with  verbs  in  §  139.  It  is  also  used 
regularly  with  nouns  from  which,  together  with  their 
verbal  roots,  adjectives  are  sometimes  formed.  Thus 
we  see  also  adjectives  with  the  prefix  tni^. 


246  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§306. 

!Dte  SJitffetat,  misdeed  (bte  Xat);  bie  20^t§c\unft,  envi/ 
(hit  @unft,  favor) ;  miBQiinfttg,  envious ;  ba§  ajJigtrauen, 
distrust  (ba^  23ertrauen);  migtrautfc^,  distrustful;  bie 
SO^ipanblung,  27^  usage;  bag  SJitgtjergniigen,  displeasure 
(bag  ^ergniigen) ;  Tni§t)ergnugt,  displeased. 

(4)  Utt'  (English  zm-  or  m-,  sometimes  mis-')  usually 
reverses  the  meaning  of  a  word :  unanftdnbig,  improper 
(anftanbig) ;  unarttg,  naughty  (arttg);  unbequem,  uncom- 
fortable (bequem);  unbeftimmt,  indefinite  (beftimmt);  ber 
Unban!,  ingratitude  (ber  ^an!);  unenblic^,  infinite  (enb* 
Itc§);  ber  \Xn\\xin,  nonsense  (ber  (Sinn);  ber  Unfriebe,  dis- 
cord (ber  griebe);  bie  Ungebulb,  impatience  (bie  ©ebulb); 
ha^  Ungliid,  misfortune  (bag  ©(lief), 

(5)  Ur-  (no  English  equivalent)  comes  from  the 
Gothic  us^  ur^  meaning  out,  and  denotes  origin  or  source. 
It  may  also  intensify  the  meaning  of  a  word  :  Uralt,  very 
old  (alt);  bie  Ural^ne,  great-grandmother  (bie  5l^ne);  ur* 
fomifrf),  very  funny  (fontifc^) ;  urplij^lic^,  all  of  a  sudden 
(plo^(ic^);  ber  Urfprung,  source  (ber  (Sprung);  ha^  l\xm% 
original  or  primitive  people  (bag  3SoIf) ;  ber  Uriualb,  pri- 
meval forest  (ber  ^a(b). 

Suffixes. 

305.  A  great  many  German  words  are  formed  by 
adding  suffixes  to  various  roots.  The  most  important 
groups  of  wowds  formed  in  this  way  are :  (1)  nouns, 
(2)  adjectives,  and  (3)  verbs. 

Derivation  of  Nouns  by  Suffix.  — Nouns  formed  by  suffix 
may  be  divided  into  two  classes :  concrete  and  abstract. 

306.  The  commonest  suffixes  by  which  concrete 
nouns  are  formed  are :  c^en,  (ein,  er,  in,  and  ting. 


Chap.  2.]  COMPOSITION  OF  WORDS,  247 

(1)  a^tn  and  Itin  form  neuter  diminutives  out  of 
other  nouns :  ba^  ^cium^en,  little  tree  (ber  ^aum) ;  \>a^ 
(So'^nc^en,  little  son  (ber  (So^n);  ba^  3}?ab(i)en,  Zz^j^Z^  ^zW 
(bte  SJ^agb);  ba§  ^ac^tein,  ^rooHe^  (ber  ^a(^);  t>a^  grau* 
letn,  Mss,  Z^f^/g  woman  (bte  grau);  ba^  ^iic^tein,  little 
book  (ba^  ^u^). 

Note  that  the  root  vowel  takes  Umlaut  when  possible. 

(2)  (Ex  forms  masculine  agents  from 

(«)  Nouns :  ber  gletft^er,  butcher  (\>a^  S^^ifc^) ;  bet 
(partner,  gardener  (ber  ©arten) ;  ber  2:bpf er,  potter  (ber 

(5)  Verbs :  ber  gu'^rer,  guide  (fii^ren) ;  ber  Sefer, 
reader  (lefen);  ber  (g^reiber,  clerk  (fc^reiben). 

Note  that  the  root  vowel  usually  takes  Umlaut. 

(3)  ^n  forms  feminines  from  masculines  :  bte  ^otttgtn, 
queen  (ber  ^iitttg) ;  bte  Se^rerin,  ladg  teacher  (ber  !Oe!^rer) ; 
bte  SotDitt,  lioness  (ber  ^ott)e). 

(4)  Sittg  forms  masculines  with  varying  meaning  from 

(a)  Nouns:  ber  (Blittftttttg,  favorite  (bie  (SJuttft);  ber 
(gprogltttg,  scion  (ber  8pro6,  sprout)  ;  ber  !l)dutttlittg,  hop- 
o'-my-thumb  (ber  ^autrtett,  thumb). 

(5)  Adjectives :  ber  gremblittg,  stranger  (fremb) ;  ber 
grit^Uttg,  spring  (fritJ));  ber  ^iittgUttg,  youth  (iuttg). 

(c)  Verbs :  ber  ginbttttg,  foundling  (fttibett) ;  ber  Se^r- 
littg,  apprentice  (le^reti):  ber  @auglittg,  suckling  (faugett). 

((?)  Numerals:  ber  (grftUttg,  first  fruits  (erft);  ber 
3tt)i(ItTtg,  twin  (^ttJet);  ber  !5)ri((tttg,  triplet  (bret)» 

Note  that  the  root  vowel  takes  Umlaut  when  possible. 


248  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§307. 

307.  The  commonest  suffixes  by  which  abstract  nouns 
are  formed  are  :  e,  ei,  \)txt,  !ett,  f(f)aft,  and  ung. 

(1)  a  forms  abstract  feminines  from 

(a)  Adjectives :  bte  §arte,  hardness,  cruelty  (^art) ; 
bie  @rd§e,  size  (grog);  bie  Sixnge,  Zer^^^A  (lang). 

(h)  Verb  Roots  :  bie  ^xiit,  request  (bitten);  bie  Siebe, 
love  (lieben);  bie  Sitge,  lie  (liigen). 

Note  that  the  root  vowel  takes  Umlaut  when  possible. 

(2)  (St  forms  feminines  of  various  meanings  —  many 
have  become  concrete  —  from 

(a)  Nouns:  bie  :53dcferei,  bakery  (ber  Q3acfer);  bie 
gifdjerei,  fishery  (ber  gifc^er);  \ixt  (gflaoerei,  slavery  (ber 
e!Iat)e). 

(5)  Verbs :  bie  9^e(f  erei,  chaffing  (neden,  to  tease') ;  bie 
^(auberei,  chattering  (p(aubern) ;  bie  (S(^meid)elei,  flattery 
(fc^meic^etn). 

(3)  §eit  forms  abstract  feminines  from 

{a)  Nouns  :  bie  ®ottI)eit,  godhead  (ber  @ott) ;  bie  ^inb* 
^eit,  childhood  (ba^  ^inb);  bie  3JZenfcf)^eit,  humanity  (ber 
mtxx\^). 

(b)  Adjectives  :  bie  ^Dumm^eit,  stupidity  (bumm) ;  bie 
^in^eit,  unity  (ein);  bie  SKei^^eit,  wisdom  (iveife). 

(4)  ^eit  forms  abstract  feminines  from  adjectives 
which  have  endings  like  ig,  lid),  fant,  bar,  etc. :  bie  ^Dan!* 
barfeit,  gratitude  (banfbar);  bie  greunblid)!eit,  kindness 
(freunblic^);  bie  '^Vi{'b\(xmit\i,  patience  (bulbfam). 

(5)  @d)aft  forms  abstract  feminines,  chiefly  from 
nouns  denoting  persons :    bie  :59iirgerf^aft,  citizens  (ber 


Chap.  2.]  COMPOSITION   OF  WORDS.  249 

^itrger) ;  bie  ^Dienerfc^aft,  servants  (ber  !l)iener) ;  bie  ^nec^t* 
fd)aft,  serfdom  (ber  ^nec^t). 

(6)  Ung  forms  abstract  feminines,  chiefly  from  verbs  : 
bie  (gr^ci^Iung,  stori/  (erja^ten) ;  bie  ^(eibung,  clothing 
(!(eiben);  bie  Qtidjuun^,  drawing  (jeic^nen). 

308.  Derivation  of  Adjectives  by  Suffix.  —  The  com- 
monest sufifixes  by  which  adjectives  are  formed  are : 
bar,  en,  l^aft,  ig,  x\ii),  (ic^,  and  fam. 

(1)  ^ar  forms  adjectives  from 

(a)  Nouns :  battfbar,  grateful  (ber  X)an!) ;  e^rbar,  hon- 
orable (hit  (S^re);  furc^tbar,  terrible  (hk  gurc^t). 

(5)  Verbs:  'bxand)haY,  usable  (hxand)en);  t^hav,  eatable 
(effen);  (e^bar,  legible  (lefen). 

(2)  (Sn  forms  adjectives,  usually  of  material,  from 
nouns:  ei(J)en,  oaken  (bie  (Sid^e);  golben,  golden  (ba^ 
®oIb);  iroKen,  woolen  (bie  Sol(e). 

(3)  §aft  forms  adjectives  from 

(a)  Nouns:  ddl)a^t,  disgusting  (hex  (iM^;  meifter^aft, 
masterful  (ber  30^eifter);  fiinb^aft,  sinful  (bie  (giinbe), 

(5)  Adjectives :  bo^^aft,  malicious  (bdfe,  bad)  ;  tvanh 
l^aft,  sicklg  (!ran!);  tua^r^aft,  real  (iDa^r,  true). 

(4)  3^g  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  nouns  :  gunftig, 
favorable  (bie  ®unft) ;  mutig,  courageous  (ber  3}?ut) ;  f on- 
nig,  sunny  (bie  @onne), 

(5)  3^f(i)  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  proper  nouns: 
omerifanifc^,  J.meWm/i  (ber  5lmeri!aner) ;  ^xanio\i^ii},  French 
(ber  granjofe);  ^onterifc^,  Homeric  (ber  §omer> 


250  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§309. 

(6)  2x6)  forms  adjectives  from 

(a)  Nouns:  gliidHc^,  happt/  (\>a^  ®(u(f);  menfrf)(ic^, 
human  (ber  Tltn\d}');  taglicf),  daili/  (ber  Xag)* 

(5)  Adjectives:  ^xo^ixd),  joi/ous  (^xof)};  VdnQlid},lengtht/ 
(lang);  rat(i(^,  reddish  (rot). 

((?)  Verbs  :  begretfltc^,  comprehensible  (begretfen) :  frag* 
Itc^,  questionable  (fragen);  Ij'd^iiii),  hateful,  ugli/  (^affen). 

(7)  (Sam  forms  adjectives  from 

(a)  Nouns:  furc^tfam,  timid  (bie  gurc^t);  getualtfam, 
violent  (bie  ^eiDalt);  fittfatn,  modest  (bie  (Sitte,  usage^. 

(5)  Verbs  :  btegfam,  pliable  (biegen) ;  gef)orfam,  obedi- 
ent (ge^ord)en);  ftrebfam,  assiduous  (ftreben,  to  strive^, 

309.  Derivation  of  Verbs  by  Suffix.  —  The  commonest 
suffixes  by  which  verbs  are  formed  are :  en,  em,  ieren, 
and  igen. 

(1)  (5n  forms  verbs  from 

(a)  Nouns:  biirften,  to  brush  (bie  :53iirfte);  fifc^en,  to 
fish  (ber  gifrf));  fiiffen,  to  kiss  (ber  ^ug). 

(6)  Adjectives:  f)arten,  to  harden  (^art);  flatten,  to 
iron  flat  (piatt,  flat}  ;  ftarfen,  to  strengthen  (ftarf). 

((?)  Roots  of  other  verbs:  brdngen,  trans.,  to  crowd 
(bringen,  intrans.,  to  force  one's  way);  fatten,  to  fell 
(fallen);  XxdxiXtXi,  to  water  (trinfen). 

(2)  (5rn  forms  verbs  chiefly  from  adjectives.  With 
comparatives  it  may  be  considered  as  simply  ?n  added 
to  the  comparative  root.  A  prefix  —  commonly  Der*  — 
often  precedes  the  root :  Derbeffern,  to  correct  (beffer) ; 


Chap.  2]  COMPOSITION  OF  WORDS.  251 

berlangern,   to  prolong  (tcinger);    t)ergrogern,   to   enlarge 
(9t:og). 

(3)  ^eretl  forms  verbs,  chiefly  from  foreign  words : 
amufiereti,  to  entertain  (French,  amuser)  ;  beflinteren,  to 
decline  a  word  (French,  dediner)  ;  regieren,  to  rule  (Latin 
regere). 

(4)  ^o^tn  forms  verbs  from 

(a)  Nouns  :  ^ulbigen,  to  do  homage  (bie  §u(b,  grace)  ; 
freu^tgen,  to  crucify  (ba^  ^reu^);  ftetntgen,  to  stone  (ber 
(Stein). 

(5)  Adjectives  (when  an  adjective  has  the  ending 
tg,  this  class  of  verbs  is  not  to  be  distinguished  from 
that  in  1) :  Befeftigett,  to  fasten  (feft) ;  befc^bnigen,  to  beau- 
tify (fc^btt);  fattigen,  to  satisfy  (fatt). 

Compound  Words. 

310.  German  compounds  always  consist  of  two  main 
parts :  (1)  the  modifying  element  and  (2)  the  basic 
word.  The  basic  word  comes  last :  blaugriin,  bluish 
green;  griinbtau,  greenish  blue.  Either  element  may 
belong  to  almost  any  part  of  speech  :  ^au^l^altett,  to  keep 
house;  ber  9^immerf att,  glutton.  And  both  elements 
may  themselves  be  compounds :  bie  SBagenbautDerfftatt, 
workshop  for  building  wagons. 

Compounds  may  be  any  part  of  speech ;  (nouns 
take  their  gender  from  the  last  element) :  ba^  S^ifc^bettt 
(noun),  table  leg  ;  ba^felbe  (pronoun),  the  same  ;  ^edblau 
(adjective),  light  blue;  tt)a^rfagen  (verb),  to  prophesy ; 
bergan  (adverb),  uphill;  anftatt  (preposition),  instead 
of;  na(f)bem  (conjunction),  after;  |30^taufenb  (interjec- 


252  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§  312. 

tion)  Great  Scott!  While  there  are  compounds  in  all 
parts  of  speech,  the  most  important  are  (1)  Nouns, 
(2)  Adjectives,  and  (3)  Verbs. 

311.  Nouns.  —  A  noun  may  be  compounded  with 

(1)  Nouns:  ba^  i^tbtvhttt, feather  bed ;  ber  J^inger^ut, 
thimble;  ha^  (^olb^tM,  gold  piece ;  bie  ^auptiiaht,  capital 
city, 

(2)  Pronouns,  usually  felbft :  ber  (Selbfttnorb,  «mW(fe; 
ber  <Se(bft(aut,  vowel;  bie  (gelbftfuc^t,  selfishness. 

(3)  Adjectives :  ber  :53Ibbfinn^  nonsense;  t>a^  ;Deutfd)= 
lanb,  Germany ;  bie  ^ro^mutter,  grandmother. 

(4)  Verbs:  ha^  J^a^rrab,  bicycle;  bie  i^M^thtv,  foun- 
tain pen;  bie  SBanberluft,  love  of  travel. 

(5)  Adverbs:  bie  2luf^enfeite,  outside;  ha^  (5benbilb, 
image;  bie  3^e^t^eit,  the  present  time. 

(6)  Prepositions:  ba^  TOtleib,  jt?^Y^/;  hk  ^ladjUvtit,  pos- 
terity;  ber  Umtueg,  roundabout  way. 

312.  Adjectives.  —  An  adjective  may  be  compounded 
with 

(1)  Nouns :  bi(bfrf)bn,  pretty  as  a  picture;  feefrattf,  sea- 
sick; \iihtx^tUf  clear  as  crystal. 

(2)  Adjectives:  Utttx\n^,  bitter  sweet ;  c^utmntxc^,  good- 
natured;  griinblau,  greenish  blue. 

(3)  Verbs:  bemerfen^tuert,  worthy  of  note;  (ernbe= 
gierig,  eager  to  learn  ;  merfttJilrbig,  remarkable. 

(4)  Prepositions :  aufred)t,  upright;  au^erorbentlid), 
extraordinary  ;  t)or(aut,  forward,  pert. 


Chap.  2.]  COMPOSITION   OF  WORDS.  253 

313.  Verbs.  —  A  verb  may  be  compounded  with 

(1)  Nouns:  ^U^^alten,  to  keep  house;  ftattfinben,  to 
take  place  ;  tettne'^men,  to  take  part. 

(2)  Adjectives:  grogtmt,  to  swagger;  liebaugetn,  to 
ogle  ;  tioKenbett,  to  finish. 

(3)  Adverbs  :  ^tnge()en,  to  go  away ;  wieberfommen,  to 
come  again;  guriidfe'^ren,  to  turn  hack. 

(4)  Prepositions:  anjte^eti,  to  put  on;  mttge^en,  to  go 
along  with;  nac^fi^en,  to  stay  after  school. 

Derivations  through  the  Latin. 

314.  Students  of  Latin  may  be  interested  in  compar- 
ing certain  English  words,  derived  from  Latin,  with 
their  German  synonyms.  For  many  English  words 
derived  directly,  prefix  and  root,  from  the  Latin,  the 
German  equivalent  may  be  found  by  translating  the 
Latin  word,  part  by  part,  into  German.  A  few  illus- 
trations are  given  below ;  students  should  be  on  the 
watch  for  others. 

(1)  Nouns : 

Attraction,  bie  5ln^ie{)un9  (ad,  an  -f-  trahere,  ^tefieti). 
Benefit,  bie  SBo^Uat  (bene,  tr)o!)(  +  facere,  tun). 
Eruption,  ber  ^lu^brui^  (e,  au^  H-  rumpere,  bre(f)en)/ 
Pretence,  ber  3Sorit)anb  (prae,  t)or  -f-  tendere,  tt)enben). 
Resonance,  ber  SBtber^tt  (re,  iriber  -f  sonare,  fatten). 

Note.  —  Examples  from  the  Greek  are  rare.  The  best  one  is  sym- 
pathy, \ia%  2)lit(eib  {abv,  tnit  +  Trd^os,  bag  i?eib). 

(2)  Adjectives: 

Accessible,  ^ugciuglicf)  (ad,  3U  4-  cedere,  gel^en). 
Illicit,  unerlaubt  (in,  un  +  licere,  eriaubt  fein). 


254.  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§  314. 

Immortal,  unfterbltc^  (in,  un  +  mori,  fterben). 
Retrograde,  riidgangig  (retro,  luxM  +  gradi,  ge^en). 
Subsequent,  nac^fotgenb  (sub,  nac^  +  sequi,  fo(gen). 

(3)  Verbs: 

Compose,    pfammenfe^en    (con,    gufammen  +  ponere, 

fe^en). 
Contract,    jufammenjte^en   (con,   jufamtnen  +  trahere, 

gie^en). 
Exclude,  aMfrfiUe^en  (ex,  au6  +  claudere,  fd^Uegen). 
Expel,  aMtreiben  (ex,  aM  +  pellere,  tretben). 
Extract,  au^jie^en  (ex,  aM  +  trahere,  gte^en). 
Import,  einfii^ren  (in,  ein  +  portare,  fii^ren). 
Prescribe,  t)or('c^rteben  (prae,  tior  +  scribere,  fc^retben). 
Remit,  jurlicff^tcfen  (re,  ^uriicf  +  mittere,  fc^icfen). 
Retract,  guriicfjte^ett  (re,  guriid  +  trahere,  gie^en). 
Survive,  iiberleben  (super,  uber  +  vivere,  leben). 


CHAPTER   III. 

COMPOSITION  OF  SOUNDS.    PRONUNCIATION  AND 
PHONETICS. 

Introduction. 

315.  A  German  Accent.  — When  we  hear  newly  arrived 
Germans  speaking  English,  we  are  often  amused  at 
what  we  call  their  "  broken  "  speech.  Do  we  ever  stop 
to  think  that  our  German  is  just  as  broken  and  amusing 
to  them?  When  we  speak  German  readily  or  recite 
a  poem  glibly,  it  rarely  occurs  to  us  that  a  German 
would  probably  have  difficulty  in  understanding  us. 
To  acquire  a  correct  German  accent,  we  must  study  and 
imitate  the  very  peculiarities  of  enunciation  which  make 
a  German's  broken  English  sound  so  quaint  to  us. 

The  simplest  way  to  approach  a  good  German  accent 
is  to  make  believe  we  are  telling  a  German  dialect  story, 
and  to  do  this  when  we  read  or  speak  German,  We  must 
also  get  rid  of  all  false  modesty,  for  trying  to  mimic 
German  sounds  is  not  half  so  ridiculous  as  giving  Ger- 
man letters  their  American  sounds. 

Several  years  ago  an  American  student  in  Germany 
tried  one  day  to  make  fun  of  the  speech  of  his  German 
fellow-students,  rolling  his  r's,  hissing  his  «'s,  and  jerk- 
ing out  the  separate  words,  instead  of  speaking  in  his 
former  careful,  easy,  American  way.  He  threw  himself 
into  the  German  with  might  and  main,  just  to  show 
them  how  queer  it  sounded  to  him.     To  his  surprise  he 

255 


256  GERMAN   COMPOSITION,  [§  317. 

was  complimented  upon  his  progress  in  pronunciation. 
The  Germans  had  noticed,  not  that  he  was  exaggerating, 
but  that  he  was  approaching  a  good  German  accent. 

316.  The  Best  German.  —  There  is  as  much  difference 
in  the  speech  of  natives  of  Berlin,  Hanover,  Dresden, 
and  Munich,  as  in  that  of  natives  of  New  York,  Boston, 
Chicago,  and  New  Orleans.  It  is  not  desirable  to  imi- 
tate any  one  too  closely.  In  German,  as  in  English, 
those  who  speak  best  are  those  whose  speech  cannot  be 
identified  with  any  particular  city  or  province.  The 
following  hints  are  based  upon  observation  of  various 
accents  —  especially  those  of  North  Germany.  They  are 
meant  for  conversational  German,  not  for  declamation. 

These  hints  treat  German  "as  she  is  spoke"  by  cultivated  Ger- 
mans to-day,  not  as  one  hears  it  in  formal  declamation.  For  formal 
German,  see  Benedix^  2)er  ntunb(id)e  33ortrag,  published  by  Weber, 
Leipzig,  and  Siehs^  !^cutfci)c  S3iil)nenaucfprad)c,  published  by  Ahn, 
Cologne.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  language  of  the  stage,  even  in 
heroic  pieces,  is  much  nearer  colloquial  German  than  Siebs'  book  indi- 
cates. Teachers  wanting  a  more  detailed  discussion  of  pronunciation 
than  that  given  here  are  referred  to  :  ViUor's  ^{)oncttf  and  '!pi)onetifd)c 
©tubien,  Sievers'  ^t)onetif,  Hoffmann'^s  ^autlx)iffenfd)aft,  Bremer's  %\)q> 
netif,  KlinghardV s  2{rtifuIatton§ilbungen,  and  the  similar  works  of 
Trautmann  and  Beyer.  Not  only  are  these  books  too  detailed  for 
pupils,  but  they  were  written  for  Germans,  not  for  Americans. 

317.  The  Chief  Difficulties.  —  As  a  rule,  German  sounds 
for  which  English  lias  nothing  to  correspond  —  like  6)f 
d,  and  tt  —  are  well  mastered  by  American  pupils.  The 
chief  difficulties  are  with  sounds  like  (,  r,  and  long  C, 
because  we  wrongly  assume  that  these  letters  represent 
English  sounds.  Pupils  prepare  themselves  for  the 
difficulties  offered  by  such  words  as  \iCi^  ^ud),  bie  9Jilt^e, 
or  fd^iJn,  and  take  pains  in  pronouncing  them.     The 


Chap.  3.1  PRONUNCIATION.  257 

result  is  that  they  are  pronounced  much  nearer  the 
true  German  way  than  words  which  are  thought  to  offer 
no  difficulty,  like  ade,  (e^reti,  or  bie  @eele. 

The  things  that  are  most  distinctively  German  — 
neglect  of  which  marks  an  American  most  clearly  when 
he  speaks  with  a  German  —  are  :  (1)  pure  vowel  sounds^ 
especially  D  and  c,  §§  318  ff. ;  (2)  the  diphthongs,  §§  323- 
324  ;  (3)  the  glottal  catch,  §§  326  ff. ;  (4)  the  consonants 
i  and  X,  §§  336-337;  (5)  syllable  stress,  §§  338  ff.; 
and  (6)  the  ending  Ctt  in  certain  special  cases,  §  343. 

Note.  —  Read  §  344,  Conclusion.  It  is  not  intended  that  teachers 
shall  present  this  whole  chapter  to  their  pupils.  It  is  best  to  treat 
only  such  parts  as  teachers  feel  will  be  most  readily  grasped. 

Vowels. 

318.  Quality  of  Sound.  —  German  vowels  are  simple, 
pure ;  American  vowels  are  usually  slurred.  There  is 
almost  always  an  i^A-sound  after  an  American  vowel. 
This  is  caused  by  the  moving  of  the  tongue  or  the 
lower  jaw.  We  pronounce  6  as  o-oo,  while  a  German 
keeps  tongue,  lips,  and  lower  jaw  in  exactly  the  same 
position  throughout  the  entire  sound.  We  pronounce 
art,  school,  rose,  a-ert,  sehoo-ul,  ro-ooze,  where  a  German 
makes  pure,  simple  sounds  of  bie  5lrt,  bie  @c^u(e,  'tixt  9f^o[e, 
The  English  sounds  are  of  course  exaggerated  here,  the 
better  to  illustrate  the  tendency. 

319.  Position  of  Tongue  and  Lips.  —  In  order  to  learn 
to  keep  tongue,  lips,  and  lower  jaw  rigid  during  the 
sound  of  German  vowels,  it  is  important  to  know  the 
exact  position  of  these  parts  for  the  making  of  the  vari- 
ous vowel  sounds.     Articulate  carefully  the  vowels  in 


258 


GERMAN   COMPOSITION. 


[§  319. 


Fig.  1. — The  Tongue-position  for  u 


Fig.  2.  —  The  Tongue-position  for  a. 


feed,  far,  food.  For 
the  vowel  sound  in 
feed  the  lips  are 
drawn  back  as  in  a 
smile;  in  far  they 
are  in  their  normal 
position  of  rest ;  in 
food  they  are  (or 
should  be)  thrust 
forward  as  in  a  pout. 
And  the  tongue  is 
raised  and  thrown 
forward  in  feed,  is 
normal  in  far,  and  is 
d  rawn  back  in  food. 
These  positions  are 
illustrated  in  Fig- 
ures 1,  2,  and  3. 

The  German  vowel 
sounds  form  a  se- 
quence t,  tf  a,  0,  Uf 
beginning  with  a 
sound  in  the  front 
of  the  mouth  and 
running  to  the  back. 
Notice  the  position 
of  the  tongue  for  the 
series  as  graphically 
shown  in  Figure  4, 
and  remember  that 
it  must  not  change 
position  during  eacli 


Chap.  3.] 


PBON  UNCI  A  TION, 


259 


sound.  A  good  way  to  keep  the  tongue  steady  is  to 
rest  its  tip  consciously  against  the  base  of  the  lower 
teeth.  A  good  way 
to  keep  the  lower 
jaw  steady  is  to  hold 
a  lead  pencil  be- 
tween the  teeth. 

320.  Length  of 
Sound.  —  Unlike 
English  vowels,  each 
German  vowel  has 
only  one  kind  of 
sound.  This  sound 
varies  in  length. 
The  five  German 
vowels  may  be  long 
or  short.  (1)  They 
are      usually      short 

when  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants  or  a  double 
consonant :  ^a^  Staffer,  ba^  ^ttt,  ber  gif^,  bie  ^olk,  ber 
§unb.     (2)   Otherwise  they  are   lon^^  especially  when 
doubled  or  followed 
by  fj :  ber  SSater,  ha^ 
^eet,  i^nen,  h)o^(,  tun. 
(3)  Some   monosyl- 
lables, mostly  inde- 
clinable, have  a  short 
vowel  before  a  single 
consonant:  an,  ab,  man,  in,  e^,  ob,  ber,  be^. 

The  chief  difference   between   the    pronunciation    of 
long  and  short  vowels  in  German  is  that  long  ones  are 


The  Tongue-position  for  tt. 


Diagram  of  the  Tongue-positions 
for  German  vowels. 


260  GERMAN   COMPOSITION,  [§32l. 

pronounced  less  vigorously  than  the  short.  The  short 
vowels  are  uttered  with  a  tenseness  —  they  are  almost 
coughed  —  which  clips  them  short  and  carries  the  sound 
immediately  to  the  following  consonant.  This  will 
be  more  thoroughly  treated  under  "syllable  stress," 
§§  338-340. 

321.  Pronunciation. — If  we  remember  not  to  move 
tongue  or  lower  jaw  during  vowel  sounds,  German 
vowels  offer  little  difficulty,  except  in  the  case  of  long  e* 
(1)  The  two  sounds  of  a  are  like  the  English  a's  in  aha 
(never  as  in  fat  or  fate};  (2)  the  two  t  sounds  like  i  in 
pin  and  machine  (never  as  in  fine};  (3)  the  two  u  sounds 
like  u  in  put  and  trul^/  (never  as  in  mule  or  fun};  (4)  the 
two  0  sounds  like  the  two  o's  in  oho. 

Note.  —  In  the  best  German  schools  pupils  learning  to  pronounce 
English  long  o  are  made  to  give  a  long  oo-sound  after  the  o-souud. 
They  are  made  to  say  ho-oom  (^home),  wo-oo  (woe),  and  so  on,  be- 
cause they  naturally  make  a  pure  o*sound  with  no  motion  of  tongue 
or  jaw. 

(5)  German  e  has  three  sounds :  short,  obscure,  and 

long.     When  short  it  is  like  e  in  met^  when  obscure 

like  e  in  golden.     But  long  c  makes  trouble,  as  it  has 

no  English  equivalent.     It  is  between  a  in  mate  and  ee 

in  meet.     It  is  made  with  the  teeth  almost  together,  the 

lips  drawn  back  as  in  a  smile,  and  the  tongue  almost  as 

high  as  in  the  i  position  (Fig.  1).     It  is  a  pure  sound 

and  has  not  the  slur  usually  following  English  long  a, 

as  when  we  pronounce  name.,  nd-im.     Pronounce  (^ffXt 

(not  S^re),  (Seele  (not  (Sa(e),  me^ren  (not  9}2d{)ren),  fe^e 

(not  fdl)e). 

Note.  —  For  the  sound  of  e  in  the  unaccented  syllable  er,  see  r, 
§  3S7,  Note. 


Chap.  3.]  PBONUNCIATION.  261 

Vowels  with  Umlaut. 

322.  Umlaut.  —  When  in  Old  and  Middle  High  Ger- 
man (see  §§  354-355)  a  stem  whose  vowel  was  a,  o,  n, 
or  an  was  followed  by  a  suffix  containing  the  vowel  i 
(later  c)  the  sound  of  the  stem  vowel  ^  was  modified, 
becoming  more  like  the  vowel  in  the  ending ;  thus 
a,  0,  Uf  or  au  came  to  be  spoken  a,  '6,  %  or  an  (O.H.G. 
fallu,  fellis,  fellit ;  M.H.G.  valle,  vellest,  vellet ; 
N.H.G.  fafle,  fdKft,  fcillt).  This  change  of  sound  was 
called  Umlaut  by  Klopstock,  and  the  great  German 
philologist,  Jakob  Grimm,  made  this  term  current. 
Below  are  given  the  sounds  of  these  Umlaut  vowels : 

(1)  Short  a  is  like  e  in  met;  long  a  is  properly  the 
same  quality  of  sound,  only  longer.  It  is  a  pure  sound, 
not  like  a  in  late,  but  more  like  the  first  e  in  there,  or 
ai  iu  faith  when  spoken  with  Irish  brogue.  In  North 
Germany,  however,  it  is  coming  to  be  spoken  more  and 
more  like  long  e  except  to  distinguish  similar  forms 
(see  §  321,  5).  Pronounce:  bte  Wdnntv,  bte  Sa(ber; 
ga^nen,  tpa^ten.  Distinguish  carefully  :  t^re,  ^^re  ;  fti^e, 
fe^e. 

(2)  Short  0  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  o  and  the 
tongue  in  the  position  for  short  e  (g  in  met};  long  ii  has 
the  lips  rounded  in  the  position  for  long  o  (whistling 
position)  and  the  tongue  in  the  position  for  long  c 
(SJ^e^l).  Pronounce :  bte  §dl(e,  bffnen,  bte  §i5^(e,  bte 
Ofett.  Distinguish  carefully  :  §o((e,  ^e((e ;  fdtttten,  fett- 
ttett;  §d^teti,  ^el^Ien. 

1  The  best  English  illustration  of  Umlaut  is  the  difference  we  make 
in  pronouncing  the  o  in  wovian,  when  we  speak  the  plural  form,  women. 
The  change  in  the  last  vowel  affects  the  sound  of  the  first. 


262  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§323. 

(3)  Short  it  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  u  and 
the  tongue  in  the  position  for  short  i  (i  in  pin);  long 
ii  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  long  u  (whistling  position) 
and  the  tongue  in  the  position  for  long  i  (i  in  machine). 
Pronounce:  bie  giitte,  fiitten,  bte  §iite,  fit^ten.  Distin- 
guish carefully  :  tUffen,  .^iffen ;  tUfte,  tifte ;  tniiffen, 
miffen. 

(^4)  The  diphthong  (iu  is  pronounced  just  like  cu» 
See  §  323,  3. 

(5)  Notice  that  in  every  case  an  Umlaut- vowel  has 
the  same  lip  position  as  the  corresponding  non-umlauted 
vowel,  but  the  tongue  is  raised  nearer  the  position  for  t 
(Fig.  1).  As  this  t  was  originally  the  sound  of  the 
following  syllable,  we  may  say  that  the  tongue  began  to 
prepare  for  the  ending  while  pronouncing  the  vowel  of 
the  stem.  Thus  Umlaut  may  be  called  an  assimilation 
of  the  stem  vowel  to  the  vowel  of  the  ending. 

Diphthongs. 

323.  Nature  of  the  Diphthongs.  —  A  diphthong  is  — 
properly  speaking  —  a  double  sound.  But  we  often 
speak  of  two  vowels,  when  written  together,  as  a  diph- 
thong, even  when  they  are  spoken  as  a  single  sound: 
each^  hearty  heard.  Below  are  treated  the  three  genuine 
diphthong  sounds :  at  (ci),  dVif  and  cu  (hx), 

German  diphthongs  differ  from  English  chiefly  in 
having  the  main  emphasis  on  the  second  sound  where 
English  has  it  on  the  first.  But  there  are  also  differ- 
ences in  the  quality  of  the  sounds. 

(1)  The  diphthongs  d  and  at  are  historically  the 
same  sound  and  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in  Ger- 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION.  263 

man.  Their  sound  is  nearly  like  that  of  English  i  in 
mine^  but  English  long  i  is  a  long  a^-sound  followed  by 
a  short  ee-sound  (a'-ee),  while  German  at  (ci)  is  a  short 
a-sound  followed  by  a  longer  c-sound  (a=cc')*  In  Ger- 
man, after  the  short  a-sound,  the  tongue  does  not  bother 
to  climb  clear  to  the  imposition  (Fig.  1),  but  stays  for 
the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the  e-position 
(Fig.  4)  :  T)a^  di,  tnetn,  ber  ©ain,  bte  (Satte. 

(2)  The  diphthong  an  is  nearly  like  English  ow  in 
how^  but  English  ow  is  a  long  a^-sound  followed  by  a 
short  i^-sound  (a'-ob^^  while  German  au  is  a  short  a=sound 
followed  by  a  longer  (J=sound  (a=ot)')*  In  German, 
after  the  short  a=sound,  the  tongue  does  not  bother  to 
go  way  back  into  the  u=position  (Fig.  3),  but  stays  for 
the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the  opposition 
(Fig.  4)  :  !t)a^  ©aug,  ber  $Raub,  'tia^  ^aut,  au§. 

(3)  The  diphthongs  CU  and  au  are  historically  the 
same  sound  and  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in  German. 
Their  sound  is  nearly  like  that  of  English  oy  in  hoy^  but 
English  oy  is  a  short  a^^'-sound  followed  by  a  shorter 
2-sound  (aw-i^.  German  CU  (du)  is  a  short  o-sound  fol- 
lowed by  a  longer  ii-sound  (o=iiiJ')*  In  German,  after 
the  short  0-sound,  the  lips  keep  the  same  rounded 
position  and  the  tongue  does  not  bother  to  climb  clear 
to  the  imposition  (Fig.  1),  but  stays  for  the  longer  part 
of  the  diphthong  in  the  exposition  (Fig.  4)  :  !Dte  Seute, 
^eute,  bte  §aute,  bte  @au(e. 

324.  Summary  of  the  Differences.  —  Thus  we  see  not 
only  that  German  diphthong-sounds  have  the  emphasis 
on  the  second  part,  where  English  emphasizes  the  first 
element,  but  that  the  second  (longer)  element  of  the 


264  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  [§326. 

German  diphthong  is  not  so  different  from  the  first 
(short)  element  as  in  English.  In  other  words,  both 
the  lip-  and  the  tongue-positions  for  the  second  element 
of  the  German  diphthong  are  nearer  those  of  the  first 
element,  than  in  English.  German  diphthongs  are  also 
of  shorter  duration  than  English.  They  are  not  so  long 
as  a  long  vowel. 

If  we  want  to  emphasize  a  claim  to  something  we 
say :  "  That's  mine "  (^madda'een),  where  a  German 
says :  „T)a0  tft  mein"  (maeen').  When  we  are  hurt,  we 
say:  "  Ow  "  (dddd'ob)^  but  a  German  says :  „5lu"  (aoo')« 
.We  also  call :  "  Ship  ahoy "  {aw'i)^  but  a  German  in 
calling  out  the  word  for  Aay,  says :  „ba^  ©eu"  (o5B'). 
The  best  way  to  say  this  right  is  to  think  mainly  of  the 
second  sound ;  the  first  will  take  care  of  itself. 

Digraphs. 

325.  In  English  we  have  many  double  vowels  for 
single  sounds,  as  in  the  words,  each^  hearty  heard^  believe^ 
receive^  and  so  on.  German  has  but  few  of  these  di- 
graphs. They  are  te,  pronounced  like  long  i ;  oa,  pro- 
nounced like  long  a;  ce,  pronounced  like  long  e;  oo, 
pronounced  like  long  0*  All  these  digraphs  are  used 
merely  to  show  by  the  spelling  that  a  sound  is  long. 
They  are  employed  usually  where  a  simple  vowel  would 
naturally  be  short.  (Bit,  t)ie(,  bie  <Baat,  ber  (Baal,  ba^ 
^ctt,  bag  Wlttv,  bag  ^oot. 

The  Glottal  Catch. 

326.  The  "  Catch "  Proper.  —  Most  Germans  speak 
with  the  muscles  of  the  chest  and  diaphragm  tense. 
They  seem  to  be  holding  their  breath,  as  it  were ;  there 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION,  265 

is  always  pressure  upon  the  bellows  which  furnishes  the 
motive -power  for  speech.  This  tenseness  or  pressure 
accounts  not  only  for  the  staccato  effect  and  the  impres- 
sion of  vigor  and  speed  given  by  most  spoken  German, 
but  also  for  the  greater  explosiveness  of  many  German 
sounds.  It  is  also  the  foundation  of  what  is  called  the 
glottal  catch. 

When  we  say,  "  pooh! "  the  breath  bursts  through  our 
lips  in  a  little  explosion.  If  we  close  our  vocal  chords, 
as  we  do  our  lips  in  "pooh,"  and  then  let  the  breath 
pop  through  them,  we  have  what  is  known  as  a  "  glottal 
catch."  There  is  nothing  like  it  in  English  ;  the  near- 
est approach  is  when  we  whisper  "  uh-uh  "  for  "no." 
It  is  a  little,  jerky  cough. 

327.  After  a  Consonant.  —  When  we  hear  a  German 
learning  English  the  most  striking  thing  about  it  is  the 
choppy  way  he  bites  off  the  various  syllables,  especially 
those  beginning  with  a  vowel.  In  English  conversation 
we  carry  over  a  consonant  to  a  following  vowel,  even 
when  they  are  in  separate  words  :  not  at  all,  odd  or  even. 
A  German  comes  to  a  full  stop  —  closing  his  vocal 
chords  —  before  words  or  syllables  beginning  with  a 
vowel.  The  sound  of  the  vowel  is  then  preceded  by 
the  little  jerky  cough  —  the  "  glottal  catch  "  —  caused 
by  the  sudden  bursting  open  of  the  vocal  chords :  odd  \ 
or  I  even,  not  \  at  \  all. 

Pronounce  the  following  w^ords,  making  a  complete 
closure  of  the  vocal  chords  after  the  prefix,  and  begin- 
ning the  basic  word  with  a  glottal  catch  :  ent|e'^ren, 
er|innern,  mi^lac^ten,  t)er|einen,  ur|att.  Also:  d^  \  ift  | 
ein  I  augerjorbenttic^  I  un|artige^  tinb. 


266  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§329. 

328.  After  a  Vowel.  —  When  in  English  a  vowel  sound 
precedes  an  initial  vowel  —  whether  this  begins  a  word 
or  a  syllable  —  we  join  the  two  by  the  sound  of  w  (after 
0  or  u)  or  of  ?/  (after  e  or  i).  In  rapid  speech,  through- 
out^ see  it^  I  am  are  pronounced  through-wout^  see  yit^  I 
yam.  But  a  German  comes  to  a  full  stop  before  the 
initial  vowel  sound,  which  he  pronounces  with  a  glottal 
catch:  throughout,  see\it,  I\am, 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  making  a  complete 
closure  of  the  vocal  chords  after  the  prefix  and  begin- 
ning the  basic  word  with  a  glottal  catch:  be|ob|ac^ten, 
belac^ten,  ge|enbet,  gelarbettet.  Also :  ^6)  \)aht  \  eine  |  un|* 
angene^me  |  5lnttDort  |  er()a(ten. 

329.  Rule  for  the  Glottal  Catch. —  It  is  hard  to  lay 
down  an  absolute  rule  for  the  glottal  catch,  as  much 
depends  upon  individuals.  In  very  rapid  speech,  espe- 
cially in  unaccented  words  and  syllables,  the  glottal 
catch  is  sometimes  omitted.  But  as  such  fluency  is  not 
acquired  till  after  years  of  practice,  it  is  best  to  follow 
the  rule.  Except  after  the  particles  mentioned  below,  a 
glottal  catch  should  precede  every  word  or  root  syllable  be- 
ginning with  a  voweL 

When  a  German  speaks  English  with  a  glottal  catch 
it  sounds  queer  to  us,  but  no  queerer  than  it  sounds  to 
a  German  when  we  say:  be-yo-bachten,  be-yachten,  ge- 
yendet,  and  ge-yarbeitet  instead  of  be|ob|oc^ten,  be|ac^ten, 
0e|enbet,  and  ge|arbettet.  Much  of  the  difficulty  Germans 
have  in  understanding  our  pronunciation  of  their  lan- 
guage is  due  to  our  omission  of  the  glottal  catch.  An 
illustration  of  this  is  the  fact  that  an  American  was 
once  obliged  to  pronounce   the  word    „erinttern"    five 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION.  267 

times  before  her  German  teacher  could  tell  what  word 
she  was  trying  to  say.  The  difficulty  lay  partly  in  the 
drawling  of  the  American  r,  partly  in  the  omission  of 
the  glottal  catch  after  the  first  cr*  The  American  said 
e-rinnurn  instead  of  er|tnnertt. 

330.  Omission  of  the  Glottal  Catch.  —  In  the  case  of 
words  compounded  with  the  particles  ^ter,  ^tn,  '^er,  bar, 
XoaXf  trior,  t)or,  irieber,  and  after  %  there  is  no  glottal  catch. 
Thus  ^inaM,  herein,  barunter,  tuarum,  inoran,  boriiber,  tt)ie= 
berum,  t)o((enben,  are  easy  for  Americans,  as  they  are 
pronounced  without  the  glottal  catch. 

Consonants. 

331.  Identical  Consonants. — The  German  consonants 
f,  \)f  t,  m,  u,  and  5  are  pronounced  as  in  English. 

(1)  German  f,  ^  has  three  pronunciations  just  like 
tlie  three  of  English  s.  When  at  the  end  or  next  to 
tlie  end  of  a  syllable  it  is  like  s  in  see :  e§,  lt)a^,  bift,  ^aft. 
When  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  it  is  like  s  in  rose  : 
fe^en,  ber  (Saa(,  bie  9^ofe,  ber  Unfinn.  When  f  begins  an 
accented  syllable  whose  second  letter  is  t  or  ^,  it  is 
like  s  in  sugar:  fte(}en,  fprerfien  are  pronounced  as  if 
spelled  fc^te^eti,  fd)prec^en. 

Note.  —  It  is  almost  as  hard  for  Americans  to  give  initial  f  a  5;-sound 
as  for  Germans  to  give  our  final  s  a  ;2-sound.  We  think  it  sounds  funny 
to  hear  a  German  say,  "  It  iss  hiss  turn,"  but  it  sounds  just  as  funny 
to  a  North  German  when  we  say,  „<Bie.  iiberfe^te  feeing  @eiten/'  giving 
the  initial  f  s  the  sound  of  s  in  hiss,  as  it  is  our  natural  tendency  to  do. 

(2)  The  consonants  p,  t,  h,  b  are  uttered  with  greater 
explosiveness  than  in  English,  owing  to  the  greater 
lung-pressure  in  German  (§  326).     In  b  and  t  the  tip 


268  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§334. 

of  the  tongue  should  be  against  the  upper  teeth  at  the 
beginning  of  the  sound.  At  the  end  of  a  syllable  h 
and  b  are  pronounced  like  p  and  t :  Xoh  like  tot,  ^Ibfic^t 
like  5l|)ftrf)t,  fiibltc^  like  flttUt^,  ob  like  op. 

332.  Equivalent  Consonants.  —  The  consonants  c,  j,  q,  t>, 
to,  5,  have  equivalent  sounds  in  English,  but  these  are 
not  represented  by  the  corresponding  English  letters.^ 
^  occurs  mostly  in  rf,  pronounced  like  f,  and  in  df 
(§  334).  3  is  like  y  in  ^ear  (in  North  Germany  it 
tends  towards  rff,  §  334,  2)  ;  qu  like  kv;  t)  like/;  to  like 
V ;  5  like  tz. 

333.  Dissimilar  Consonants.  —  The  consonants  which 
have  sounds  not  found  in  English  are  d^,  Q,  (,  and  r» 
Naturally  they  make  the  most  trouble  for  Americans. 

334.  The  Sound  c^. —  (1)  In  pronouncing  ci^  after  a,  o, 
Uf  or  OU,  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised  and  drawn 
back  toward  the  soft  palate  so  that  a  scraping  sound  is 
made  as  the  breath  is  forced  through.  It  is  like  the 
Scotch  ch  in  loch.  The  nearest  equivalent  English 
sound  is  the  rasping  we  sometimes  make  at  the  end 
of  a  long  yawn  or  the  sound  some  people  utter  when 
breathing  on  their  eye-glasses  before  cleaning  them. 
Pronounce  :  ad),  ba«  ^uc^,  i>a^  ^od),  and). 

(2)  After  all  other  sounds  —  that  is,  after  consonants 
or  tf  if  tUf  or  the  umlauted  vowels  —  d^  has  a  sound  re- 
sembling the  noise  made  by  a  spitting  cat.     Raise  the 

1  For  foreign  words  a  pronouncing  dictionary  must  be  consulted. 
Some  French  words  are  pronounced  as  in  French,  as  ""^enfion,  3ourna« 
lift;  some  are  half  Germanized:  (gaucc,  pronounced  @o§e. 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION.  269 

tongue  to  the  position  for  long  i  (Fig.  1)  and  holding 
it  there,  stop  the  vowel  sound  and  breathe  out.  Pro- 
nounce :  'txi^  ^t6),  ha^  ^\6)i,  tyx6),  W  Z'^6)itx,  bte  ©iic^er, 
bie  Z\i6:)tx,  bte  (Sc^lciuc^e,  \m\6),  manc^. 

It  is  plain  that  the  guttural  d^=sound,  made  in  the 
back  of  the  mouth,  goes  naturally  with  the  vowels  a,  0, 
and  VLf  which  are  formed  in  the  middle  or  back  of  the 
mouth  (see  Fig.  4).  The  palatal  (i^=sound,  made  against 
the  front  part  of  the  palate,  goes  naturally  with  the 
vowels  formed  in  the  front  of  the  mouth  (Fig.  4)  or 
with  \  or  n,  both  of  which  are  articulated  with  the 
tongue  against  the  front  of  the  palate  (Fig.  5). 

(3)  At  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  ^  is  pronounced 
as  in  (2)  before  e  and  i :  (S^emte,  (S^ttia.  Before  other 
vowels  or  consonants  it  is  pronounced  like  (  :  (S^or,  Shrift, 
(^^arafter,  guc^2i,  trac^fen. 

335.  The  Sounds  of  g.  —  (1)  German  g  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word  or  syllable  is  like  English  g  in  go. 
(2)  At  the  end  of  a  syllable  it  is  like  k  except  (3)  in 
the  ending  tg,  when  it  is  like  6)  in  irf). 

Thus  d^  and  g  in  rti^ttg  are  pronounced  alike.  But  as 
soon  as  inflectional  endings  are  added  to  final  g,  so  that 
g  becomes  the  first  letter  in  the  following  syllable,  g  is 
pronounced  like  g  in  go.  Pronounce:  (1)  gut,  griin; 
(2)  ber  Xag,  ber  @teg ;  (3)  ru^ig,  rid^ttg ;  but  (1)  bie  Xage, 
bie  ®tege,  ru^iger,  ric^tiger. 

Note.  —  There  is  less  uniformity  in  Germany  for  the  pronunciation 
of  g  than  for  any  other  letter.  Probably  half  the  people  in  Germany 
pronounce  final  g  like  final  6),  as  in  §  334, 1  or  2.  But  the  best  author- 
ities are  now  agreed  upon  the  pronunciation  as  given  .above.  See  Vie- 
tor's  S)ie  2(u§fprad)e  beg  @(^riftbeiitjd)en,  7th  edition,  O.  R.  Riesland, 
Leipzig  ;  also  Siehs'*  2)eutf(i)e  iBu^nenau§f|3rad^e,  Ahn,  Koln.  See  §316. 


270 


GERMAN  COMPOSITION, 


[8  337. 


336.    The  Sound  of  L  —  German  (  is  pronounced  with 

the  tongue  pressed  against  the  front  of  the  palate,  like 
III  in  million  (Fig.  5).  The  sound  of  ^  in  i/ear  seems 
interwoven  with  the  I,  which  is  made  in  the  very  front 
of  the  mouth,  not  at  the  back  as  English  I.  One  might 
say  that  German  l  has  an  ee-shade  (Fig.  1),  while  Eng- 
lish I  has  an  oo-shade 
(Fig.  3).  Pronounce: 
Mi^e^mann,aire^AH!. 

337.   The  German  r* 

—  There  are  two  dis- 
tinct German  r's ;  the 
tongue-tip  (trilled)  r, 
and  the  uvula  (rolled) 
r»  Both  differ  from 
the  American  slurred 
r  of  the  East  and 
South,  and  from  the 
drawled  r  of  the 
West. 

(1)  In  the  trilled 
t  (Fig.  6),  the  tongue- 
tip  is  vibrated  against  the  palate  just  behind  the  front 
teeth.  This  is  not  only  the  easier  of  the  two,  but  it  is 
the  one  approved  on  the  stage. 

(2)  The  uvula  or  throat  t  (Fig.  7)  is  made  by  the 
vibrations  of  the  uvula  upon  the  back  of  the  tongue. 
It  is  more  distinctively  German,  but  is  usually  difficult 
for  Americans  to  acquire.  In  a  way  it  resembles  a 
gargle  and  it  may  best  be  developed  from  the  guttural 


Fig.  5.  —  The  Tongue-position  for  U 


Chap.  3.] 


PRONUNCIA  TION, 


271 


6),  §  334,  1.  In  fact, 
many  Germans  pro- 
nounce r  as  d^  when 
speaking  rapidly ; 
they  give  SJiart^a  and 
3}^agba  almost  the 
same  sound.  The 
physiological  expla- 
nation of  this  is  that 
in  very  rapid  speech 
the  uvula  fails  to 
vibrate  when  the 
breath  is  forced  out, 
thus  making  only  the 
scraping  sound  of  6)f 
§  334,  1.  For  this 
uvula  r  the  front  of 
the  tongue  must 
never  be  raised  as  in 
the  drawled  r  of  the 
West.  The  back  of 
the  tongue  is  raised 
so  that  the  uvula  is 
forced  to  vibrate 
when  we  breathe  out 
(see  Fig.  7). 

Note.  —  In  conversation 
the  r  in  the  unaccented 
syllable  er  is  not  rolled. 
The  uvula  touches  the 
tongue  just  once,  but  does 
not  vibrate.  This  makes  a 
very  short  ato-sound,  akin 


Fig.  6, — The  Tongue-position  for  trilled  r. 


Fig.  7. — The  Tongue-position  for  uvula  X* 


272  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§339. 

to  0  in  short.  Thus  3)er  SSatcr  \)at  e8  ocrgeffen  is  spoken  almost  like 
Daw  fahtaw  hat  es  fawgessen.  The  sound  here  represented  by  aw  is 
as  short  as  it  can  possibly  be.  It  is  not  at  all  like  the  aw  in  "  See^  saw, 
Marjorie  Daw,''^  but  on  the  contrary  so  brief  as  to  be  practically  only 
a  grace  note. 

Syllable  Stress. 

338.  Syllable  Bearers.  —  In  English  the  vowels  are 
the  important  parts  of  the  syllables.  They  may  be 
called  the  "syllable-bearers."  A  short  vowel  like  a  in 
hand  may  receive  as  much  emphasis  as  long  a  in  tame. 
In  German  this  is  strikingly  different.  Long  vowels 
are  longer  than  in  English,  and  short  ones  shorter. 
After  a  short  vowel  in  German  the  following  consonant 
bears  a  large  part  of  the  burden  of  the  syllable.  A 
consonant  following  a  short  vowel  in  German  is  much 
longer  than  the  same  consonant  when  following  a  long 
vowel. 

339.  Long  and  Short  Consonants.  —  Thus  German  has 
long  and  short  consonants  as  well  as  long  and  short 
vowels.  A  short  vowel  is  so  short  that  it  is  almost 
coughed  out ;  the  sound  springs  from  it  immediately  to 
the  following  consonant,  which  is  held  much  longer 
than  the  vowel.  Graphically  the  difference  between 
the  English  and  German  way  of  saying  hand  may  be 
represented :  -• 

M^  bie  ©a|^^^ 

A  long  vowel  followed  by  a  short  consonant  offers  no 
difficulty,  as  that  is  a  frequent  combination  in  English. 
But  care  must  be  taken  to  prolong  a  consonant  follow- 
ing a  short  vowel.  Remember  to  hold  tongue  and  jaw 
still  during  a  German  vowel-sound,  and  to  jump  without 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION.  2,1  B 

any  slur  from  a  vowel  to  the  following  consonant,  espe- 
cially when  the  vowel  is  short.  Compare  ber  ^fcintg  and 
fdttnen.  Pronounce  ^o  o  ij  5  nig  and  !5n  n  n  n  nen.  In 
the  same  way  pronounce  hit  @(f)ule  and  t>k  (S^ulb 
((Sc^uuuule  and  @^u(nib).  Also  ber  Dfen  and  offen 
(O  0  0  0  fen  and  offfffen).  Be  careful  always  to  jump 
without  any  slur  from  the  vowel  to  the  consonant.  Do 
not  say  ^'6\uh\n\qf  !d|wA|nnen,  (Bd)n\uh\it,  (Bd)n\uh\it), 
£)\uh\^tn,  o|wA|ffen. 

340.  Practice  Pairs.  —  This  is  one  of  the  most  char- 
acteristic features  of  German  and  one  of  the  easiest  to 
learn.  Just  remember  to  put  on  extra  lung-pressure 
for  short  vowels  and  then  to  hold  the  following  conso- 
nant. If  we  admire  something  very  much,  we  say  it  is 
'-'•  wo  0  0  nderfuV  ;  a  German  says  „tDunnnbert)ot(."  The 
best  English  illustration  of  this  is  the  way  ng  is  pro- 
longed in  the  American  slang  expression:  "Stung!" 
This  length  of  consonants  is  especially  easy  to  get  with 
If  vXf  and  tt.     Try  these  first. 

A  few  good  pairs  with  which  to  practise  these  short 
vowels  followed  by  long  consonants  and  to  compare 
them  with  similar  long  vowels  followed  by  short  con- 
sonants are :  'btvx  (So'^ne,  bte  (Sonne ;  fii^ten,  flillen ;  !o* 
mifc^,  fontmen ;  ber  (Sta'^t,  ber  (Stall ;  tuo^ltDotten ;  ber 
^allfaal ;  §a(Ie  an  ber  (gaale ;  ben  (S^afen,  fc^affen ;  fam, 
ber  f  amm ;  Iat)nt,  'aa^  Samm. 

341.  Change  of  Pitch.  —  In  English  words  the  vowel 
carries  the  changes  in  pitch.  When  we  say  "  Oh,  come 
on  "  in  a  pleading  tone,  the  o  in  on  slides  several  notes 
down  the  scale,     If  German  were  to  use  the  same  ex- 


274  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§343. 

pression  „^omm  an"  in  the  same  tone,  the  n  in  an  would 
carry  this  change  in  pitch.  Graphically  this  may  be  rep- 
resented by  English  "  Come  o^j^"  ;  German  „^omnt  anj^  •" 

In  German  any  change  in  pitch  is  carried  by  the  long 
element  in  the  syllable,  whether  vowel  or  consonant. 
Of  course,  to  carry  change  in  pitch  a  consonant  must 
be  voiced^  that  is,  the  vocal  chords  must  vibrate  when 
it  is  pronounced.  Thus  change  of  pitch  cannot  be  car- 
ried by  fnutes  like  p,  h,  t 

342.  Sentence  Accent.  —  In  general,  German  sentence 
accent  follows  the  same  rules  as  the  English,  but  it  is 
more  emphatic.  The  two  may  be  compared  to  German 
and  English  script;  the  one  goes  straight  and  is  sharp; 
the  other  glides  and  curves ;  one  is  angular,  the  other 
round.  And  so  with  the  sentence  accent :  in  English 
it  slurs,  in  German  it  jumps.  The  extent  of  this 
change  (greater  than  in  English),  coupled  with  the 
greater  lung-pressure  in  German  and  the  glottal  catch 
(§  326),  give  spoken  German  a  much  more  vigorous 
and  staccato  effect  than  English. 

Aside  from  these  considerations  the  chief  difference 
between  English  and  German  sentence  accent  is  in  com- 
plex sentences.  In  German  complex  sentences  —  those 
with  a  main  and  a  subordinate  clause  —  the  tone  begins 
at  normal  and  rises  till  it  comes  to  the  junction  of  the 
two  clauses  ;  then  it  declines.  This  is  the  case  whether 
the  main  clause  or  the  subordinate  comes  first. 

Assimilation. 

343.  The  Ending  en.  —  The  Germans  speak  not  only 
with  more  vigor  than  we  Americans,  but  with  more 


Chap.  3.1  PKONUNCIATtON,  276 

speed.  Much  of  this  speed  is  due  to  their  clipping  the 
ending  en.  An  enormous  number  of  German  words  end 
in  en,  the  sound  of  which  is  shortened  in  various  ways. 
In  conversation  the  c  in  en  is  always  silent.  The  n  then 
undergoes  various  changes,  called  assimilation^  depend- 
ing upon  the  preceding  or  following  consonant.  Chief 
of  these  are :  (1)  next  to  16  or  |J ;  (2)  after  g ;  and  (3) 
after  n  or  ng. 

(1)  When  the  ending  en  comes  just  after  or  just  be- 
fore a  B  or  a  ^)  sound,  it  is  pronounced  like  nt*  The  sen- 
tence Sir  1;)ahtn  thtn  fieben  ^naben  gefe^en  is  pronounced, 
3Ktr  ^abm  ebm  fiebm  ^nabm  gefe^n.  ^fc^enbac^  and  Sol- 
fenbitttet  are  pronounced  (5f(J)mbad)  and  Solfmbitttet.^ 

1  This  stg,tement  and  several  of  the  following  are  at  variance  with 
Siehs  and  with  German  pronunciation  as  formally  taught,  but  they 
are  consistent  with  the  practice,  even  of  teachers.  The  author  once 
heard  a  professor  in  the  University  of  Berlin  —  a  man  well  known  in 
America  — say  in  a  lecture:  3)ie  (Snbung  ,en'  nm^  immer  t^oHn  %ou 
I)abm!  Advocates  of  stage  German  insist  that  en  should  have  its 
regular  sound,  but  even  on  the  stage  b  and  ^  usually  attract  n  to  m. 
For  instance,  ^iepenbrint  (in  Freytag's  „3ournQ(tften")  is  never  pro- 
nounced according  to  the  stage  rules.  Actors  always  say  ^tepmbrinf. 
This  is  a  practically  universal  law,  which  the  Greeks  and  Romans 
embodied  in  their  written  language:  iv -\- ^dWcj — i/jL^dWu  (en + 
ballo  —  emballo)  ;  con  +  prehendo  —  comprehendo.  In  speaking  hur- 
riedly we  say  "  0pm  the  door,"  for  "Open  the  door." 

Professor  Victor  of  Marburg,  who  has  written  more  extensively  on 
Phonetics  than  any  one  else,  does  not  assimilate  the  ending  en  after 
h,  p,  and  so  on,  and  he  combats  such  assimilation  in  his  writings.  But 
in  conversation  with  the  author  he  admitted  the  tendency  (which  he 
said  came  from  Prussia)  and  confessed  that  his  youngest  son  assimi- 
lated en,  while  the  other  members  of  the  family  did  not.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  most  able  and  scholarly  phoneticist  in  Germany,  Professor 
Sievers  of  Leipsic,  advocates  the  teaching  of  assimilation  from  the 
beginning.     He  told  the  author  not  only  that  en  should  be  assimilated 


276  GERMAN   COMPOSITION,  [§343. 

If  we  notice  carefully  how  h  and  p  come  to  attract  n 
to  m,  we  shall  see  that  it  is  all  done  by  the  soft  palate. 
For  the  sounds  h  and  p  the  lips  are  closed  and  the  soft 
palate  cuts  off  the  nasal  passage.  For  the  following 
n=sound  it  is  much  easier  to  keep  the  lips  closed  and 
simply  to  let  the  soft  palate  down,  thus  opening  the 
nasal  passage,  than  it  is  to  open  the  lips  and  raise  the 
tongue  to  the  n=position.  This  opening  of  the  nasal 
passage  gives  a  nasal  sound,  and  the  only  nasal  sound 
possible  with  the  lips  closed  is  m* 

(2)  A  similar  process  to  that  just  described  takes 
place  when  en  follows  fi*  In  the  sound  of  g  in  ge^en 
(§  335,  1)  the  nasal  passage  is  closed  by  the  soft  palate 
and  it  is  easier  to  lower  the  soft  palate  than  to  raise  the 
tongue  to  the  tt=position.  The  result  is  that  the  follow- 
ing ti'sound  becomes  nasal  (like  ng  in  sing}.  SBtr  tragen 
l^o^e  tragen  is  pronounced  2Bir  tragng  l^o^e  ^ragng. 

(3)  When  the  ending  cn  follows  n  or  ng  it  is  indicated 
simply  by  a  change  of  pitch.  The  change  may  be  up 
or  down.  In  other  words  the  tongue  remains  in  the 
n^position  while  the  vocal  cords  alter  the  pitch.  This 
may  be  graphically  indicated  thus :  5Btr  fonnen  etnen 
fc^bnen  (S^agiergang  madden —  trir  fbnn"^  ein^  fc^bn'JJ\  (Spa* 

giergang  mat^n,  or  iDir  f5nn5etn]}/fc^i3n5'(2pa^iergang  mac^n. 

(Sie  fingen  an,  p  fingen  — fie  fing^  an,  3U  fing^or  fie 
fing^^^an,  au  fing^;^. 

in  the  cases  mentioned  in  the  text,  but  that  in  a  sentence  like  SSlr 
fommen  nid^t,  the  m  attracts  the  cn  to  m  even  when  the  next  word 
begins  with  n.  It  is  not  the  aim  of  this  book  to  go  into  so  much  de- 
tail, but  this  statement  is  interesting,  coming  from  Germany's  leading 
authority. 


Chap.  3.]  PRONUNCIATION.  217 

Conclusion. 

344.  The  previous  rules  and  suggestions  are  meant 
to  explain  in  some  measure  the  greatest  difficulties  that 
confront  an  American  trying  to  speak  German.  Teach- 
ing pronunciation  from  a  book  is  a  thankless  job,  but 
even  from  a  book  some  hints  may  be  gleaned.  If 
teacher  or  pupil  can  get  from  this  chapter  some  helpful 
hint  or  inspiration,  it  will  have  amply  served  its  purpose. 


CHAPTER   IV. 
COMPOSITION  OF  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 

An  Outline  Sketch. 

345.  Introduction.  Indo-European. — The  English  word 
night  is  in  German  bie  9^arf|t,  in  Latin,  nox^  noetis^  and 
in  Greek  wf,  vvkto^  (nux,  nuktos).  In  studying  the 
roots  of  these  words  {nighty  Naoht,  nokt,  nuhf)  and  oth- 
ers, scholars  were  long  ago  struck  by  their  similarity. 
They  seemed  to  be  in  some  way  related,  probably  to 
have  a  common  origiil. 

Indo-European  is  the  name  generally  given  to  those 
languages  of  Europe  and  Western  Asia  which  have 
certain  roots  in  common.  They  are  supposed  to  come 
from  a  parent  language,  which  is  also  called  Indo-Euro- 
pean. The  original  form  of  this  language  is  unknown, 
as  is  the  home  of  the  people  who  spoke  it.  But  we 
suppose  they  spread  throughout  Europe  and  Asia,  and 
as  they  scattered,  the  parent  language  changed.  Out 
of  it  developed  most  of  the  languages  of  Europe. 

Note.  —  The  Indo-European  languages  may  be  classified  roughly  as 
follows : 

I.   Asiatic  Languages. 

1.  Indic^  including   (a)  the  language  of  the   Vedas,    (6)   Sanskrit, 

(c)  Modern  Indian,  and  (d)  the  language  of  the  Gypsies. 

2.  Iranic,  including  (a)  Old  Persian,  (6)  Modem  Persian,  (c)  Old 

Baktrian,  and  {d)  Afghan. 

3.  TochariCj  a  language  in  Central  Asia,  recently  discovered  to  be 

Indo-European. 

4.  Phrygian- Armenian. 

278 


Chap.  4.1 


THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 


279 


Fig.  8. —  Diagram  illustrating  the  Development  of  the  Indo-European 
Languages. 


280  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§348. 

II.   European  Languages. 

1.  Albanic,  including  the  languages  of  the  Balkan  States. 

2.  Balto- Slavic^  including  («)  Russian,  (6)  Polish,  (c)  Bohemian,  and 

(d)  Bulgarian. 

3.  Germanic,  including  (a)  Gothic,  (b)  Anglo-Saxon,  (c)  German, 

(d)  English,  (e)  Dutch,  and  (/)  the  Scandinavian  tongues. 

4.  Celtic^  including  (a)  Gaelic,  (6)  Gallic,  and  (c)  Welsh. 

6.   Bomanic,  including  (a)  Latin,  (6)  Italian,  (c)  French,  (d)  Span- 
ish, and  (e)  Portuguese. 
6.   Hellenic,  including  (a)  Ancient  and  (6)  Modem  Greek. 

No  two  classifications  of  the  Indo-European  languages  agree.  See 
the  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  or  Schrader's  "  Die  Indo-Germanen. " 

346.  The  First  Sound-Shift.  Grimm's  Law.  —  These 
languages  all  branched  off  or  grew  out  of  the  original 
Indo-European  by  the  changing  or  shifting  of  certain 
sounds.  In  the  case  of  the  Germanic  languages,  this 
is  called  the  first  sound-shift  Qik  erfte  ii^autoerfcftiebung). 
The  change  took  place  during  a  long  period  of  years 
and  according  to  certain  fixed  principles.  These  prin- 
ciples were  first  worked  out  by  the  great  philologist 
Jakob  Grrimm^  and  are  known  as  Grimm's  Law. 

347.  Greek  and  Latin  as  illustrating  Indo-European.  — 

As  the  parent  language  has  disappeared,  we  can  illus- 
trate Grimm's  Law  only  by  comparing  the  Germanic 
languages  with  Indo-European  languages  which  did  not 
take  part  in  the  first  sound-shift.  Of  these,  Latin  and 
Greek  are  the  best  known,  just  as  Gothic  is  the  best 
known  early  Germanic  language.  So  we  usually  com- 
pare Latin  or  Greek  words  with  Gothic  to  illustrate 
Grimm's  Law  of  the  First  Sound-Shift. 

348.  Statement  and  Illustration  of  the  Law.  —  In  its 

simplest  form  the  law  of  the  first  sound-shift  is  that: 


Chap.  4.] 


THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE, 


281 


(1)  5,  d,  g,  become  respectively  p,  t,  Jc;  (2)  p,  t,  Jc,  be- 
come respectively  /,  th^  h ;  and  (3)  /,  th,  A,  become 
respectively  b,  c?,  g. 


(1)  d-^t 

C^}l>^f 

(3)/->5 

Greek 

DeJca  (8e/ca) 

Pous  (ttoi)?) 

Prater  (^cjypaTrjp) 

Latin 

Decern 

Pes 

Prater 

Gothic 

Taihun 

Fotus 

Brothar 

English 

Ten 

Foot 

Brother 

Thus  approximately  the  same  sounds  continued  in 
the  language  in  spite  of 
the  shifting.  For  while 
5,  (?,  and  g  were  shifting 
to  JO,  f,  and  Ar,  these  three 
were  shifting  to/,  th^  and 

A,    which    in   turn    were      [  /  \P. 

shifting  to  5,  c?,  and  g. 
This  may  be  shown 
graphically  in  Figure  9. 


Fig.  9.  —  Illustration  of  the  way  the 
same  sounds  continued  in  the 
language  in  spite  of  the  sound- 
shifts  shown  in  Grimm's  Law. 


Note.  —  The  details  of 
Grimm's  Law,  many  of  which 
have  been  worked  out  since  his 
death  (1863),  are  much  too 
complex  for  any  but  advanced 
students.  The  present  treat- 
ment touches  only  a  few  phases 

which  may  help  students  to  understand  the  history  of  the  German 
language  and  the  relation  of  many  English  words  to  the  German. 

349.  Gothic.  —  As  Germanic  branched  off  from  Indo- 
European  through  the  first  sound-shift,  this  shift  may 
be  said  to  have  made  the  various  Germanic  languages. 
Of  these  the  oldest  that  is  known  is  the  Gothic,  which 


282  GERMAN   COMPOSITION.  t§  350. 

died  out  about  the  seventh  century  a.d.  It  has  been 
preserved  for  us  chiefly  through  the  Gothic  Bible  of 
Ulfilas^  a  bishop  of  the  West  Goths  (Visigoths)  in 
the  fourth  century  a.d.  On  page  287  will  be  found 
the  Lord's  Prayer  in  Gothic,  so  that  those  who  are^ 
interested  can  compare  it  with  later  German. 

350.  The  Second  Sound-Shift.  —  Just  as  the  Germanic 
languages  branched  off  from  the  Indo-European  through 
the  first  sound-shift,  so  High  German  branched  off  from 
the  other  Germanic  tongues  (Low  German,  English, 
and  so  on)  through  the  second  sound-shift.  This  shift- 
ing took  place  in  Southern  Germany  from  the  sixth  to 
the  eighth  centuries.  It  worked  its  way  gradually 
northward,  stopping  short  of  the  low,  northern  part  of 
Germany.  Thus,  because  it  took  place  in  Upper  Ger- 
many (see  Map),  the  second  sound-shift  is  also  called 
the  High-  German  Sound-Shift, 

Note.  —  High  German  is  so  called  because  it  developed  in  the  high 
land  of  Upper  Germany.  There  is  a  common  misapprehension  that  it 
was  spoken  by  the  upper  classes,  while  Low  German  was  spoken  by 
the  lower  classes.  This  is  not  the  case.  High  German  was  spoken  by 
all  classes  in  Upper  Germany,  Low  German  by  all  classes  in  Lower 
Germany.     (See  Map. ) 

Low  German,  commonly  called  ^lQtt*!I)cutf(i)  (from  ptatt,  flat^  re- 
ferring to  the  nature  of  the  country  where  it  is  spoken),  did  not 
take  part  in  the  High-German  Sound-Shift,  and  so  has  remained  in 
some  regards  nearer  than  High  German  to  the  original  Germanic. 
English  (Anglo-Saxon)  was  also  unaffected  by  the  High-German 
Sound-Shift,  so  in  many  respects  Low  German  resembles  English  more 
than  it  does  High  German.    Below  are  a  few  illustrations : 

High  German  ots  Ift  ticf  ^er.j  ba^  l)attc  .^^imntcl  stuanjlg 
Low  German  a8  i«  bee))  ^art  bat  l)abb  ipeben  tiucntig 
English  as     is     deep     heart     that    had       heaven     twenty 


Longitude         10 


East  1 


Chap.  4.]  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE.  283 

351.  Gothic,  English,  and  High  German.  —  The  changes 
made  by  the  second  sound-shift  are  best  illustrated  by 
comparing  Gothic,  English,  and  High  German.  Thus 
we  see  in  the  Gothic  the  condition  of  certain  consonants 
in  an  old  Germanic  language  before  the  second  sound- 
shift.  In  the  English  we  see  these  consonants  in  a  new 
Germanic  language,  but  in  one  not  affected  by  the  second 
sound-shift.  And  finally  in  High  German  we  see  these 
consonants  in  a  new  Germanic  language  which  has  been 
affected  by  the  second  sound-shift. 

352.  Statement  and  Illustration  of  the  Law.  —  The  law 
for  the  second  sound-shift,  also  worked  out  by  Jakob 
Grimm,  is  less  regular  than  the  first  (see  §  348,  Note). 
In  general  its  simplest  form  is:  p  becomes/  or  pf;  t 
becomes  a,  2,  or  «8 ;  d  becomes  t. 


Gothic 

Fund 

Taihun 

Bags 

English 

Pound 

Ten 

Day 

High  German 

^funb 

3et)tt 

^ag 

353.  High  German.  —  Ever  since  the  second  sound- 
shift.  High  German  has  been  the  literary  language  of 
Germany.  From  the  second  sound-shift  till  about 
1100  A.D.  it  is  called  Old  High  Grerman^  from  1100 
till  about  1350  Middle  High  Q-erman.  Then  came  a 
period  of  transition  till  the  Reformation  (1517),  when 
the  spread  of  Luther's  writings  made  his  language  (that 
of  the  Saxon  Chancery)  the  standard  for  Germany. 
This  is  called  New  High  German.  When  we  speak  of 
G-erman^  we  usually  refer  to  New  High  German,  as  that 
is  the  language  written  and  spoken  by  most  Germans 
to-day.     The  next  paragraphs  trace  its  development. 


284  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§354. 

354.  Old  High  German.  — The  period  of  Old  High 
German  extends  roughly  from  750  to  1100.^  This  was 
the  time  of  the  Carolingian  (768-911),  Saxon  (919- 
1024),  and  Frankish  (1024-1125)  Emperors.  Latin 
was  in  the  main  the  written  language  ;  the  people  spoke 
Old  High  German.  The  chief  Manuscripts  that  have 
come  down  to  us  are  the  Hildebrandtalied^  the  WeBSo- 
hrunner  Q-eheU  the  Evangelienhuch  of  Otfrid  von  Wets- 
senburg^  the  ffeliand,  and  the  MuspiUi  (End  of  the 
World).  On  page  287  is  the  Lord's  Prayer  in  Old 
High  German  as  it  was  written  at  the  end  of  the  eighth 
century  a.d.  and  again  as  at  the  end  of  the  tenth.  It 
is  interesting  to  compare  these  with  the  Gothic. 

It  was  during  this  period  (in  the  reign  of  Charle- 
magne) that  the  word  came  into  existence  from  which 
the  present  word  beutf(!^  was  derived.  The  Old  High 
German  word  diot  means  people.  To  this  was  added 
the  ending  {so  (German  ifc^,  English  ish}.  The  word 
then  developed  :  diutisc,  diutsk^  tiutsch^  teutsch.  This 
latter  form  was  current  in  High  German  as  late  as  the 
eighteenth  century.  At  first  it  was  used  only  of  the 
language  spoken  by  the  people,  but  later  it  came  to  be 
applied  to  the  people  themselves. 

1  Dates  referring  to  general  language  changes,  just  as  the  boun- 
dary lines  between  different  dialects  (see  Map,  p.  282),  must  not  be 
interpreted  too  exactly.  The  Germans  did  not  go  to  bed  New  Year's 
Eve,  1100,  speaking  Old  High  German,  and  wake  up  the  next  morning 
speaking  Middle  High  German,  any  more  than  a  High  German  who 
moved  across  the  line  into  Lower  Germany  would  immediately  begin 
to  speak  Low  German.  So,  too,  during  the  different  periods  changes 
were  constantly  going  on,  just  as  they  are  in  the  language  to-day. 
Dates  and  boundary  lines  are  necessary  for  a  clear  understanding,  but 
in  the  case  of  linguistic  movements  they  are  flexible  and  must  bQ 
understood  as  such. 


Chap.  4.]  THE  GEBMAN  LANGUAGE.  286 

355.  Middle  High  German.  —  Gradually  Old  High 
German  changed  into  what  we  call  Middle  High  Ger- 
man. An  idea  of  the  amount  of  the  change  can  be  had 
by  looking  at  the  Middle  High  German  Lord's  Prayer, 
page  288,  and  by  comparing  it  with  the  Old  High 
German.  Middle  High  German  coincides  with  the 
rule  of  the  Hohenstaufen  Emperors  (1138-1254)  and 
the  next  hundred  years,  when  the  Emperors  were 
chosen  from  various  families  (till  1350). 

The  first  well-known  works  in  Middle  High  German 
were  Heroic  Poems  by  unknown  writers,  the  9fitbe(ungen= 
Iteb,  ®ubrun,  the  poems  of  the  !Dietrt(^fage,  and  others. 
The  Court  Epics,  D^olanb^Iteb  and  3ltepnber(ieb,  were  both 
written  by  priests.  The  (Sneit  (^neid)  was  written 
by  Reinrich  von  Veldehe^  ^ar^ttial,  by  Wolfram  von 
Uschenbach,  ^riftan  unb  3foIt,  by  Gottfried  von  Strass- 
hurg,  !Der  virtue  §etnrt(^,  by  Hartmann  von  Aue,  Most 
of  these  Minnesingers  also  wrote  lyrics,  though  the  chief 
lyric  poet  was  Walther  von  der  Vogelweide. 

Middle  High  German  was  at  its  best  about  1200. 
For  the  next  century  and  a  half  it  declined,  and  then 
for  nearly  two  centuries  (1350-1534)  till  the  completion 
of  Luther's  translation  of  the  Bible  came  the  period  of 
transition  to  New  High  German.  This  transition  is 
shown  in  the  official  documents  of  the  different  govern- 
ments (chanceries)  in  Germany,  those  of  the  cities,  of 
the  bishops,  of  the  Emperor. 

As  long  ago  as  in  the  time  of  Rudolph  of  Hahshurg 
(1273-1291)  official  decrees  began  to  be  made  in  Ger- 
man rather  than  in  Latin.  These  decrees  were  issued 
by  the  chancellors^  hence  we  hear  of  the  language  of  the 
chancery    (^atijleifprac^e).     The    different    chanceries 


286  GEBMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§356. 

wished  to  be  understood  as  widely  as  possible,  so  they 
adopted  the  language  of  the  people.  Out 'of  the  decrees 
of  the  different  chanceries  —  those  of  the  cities,  dukes, 
bishops,  and  so  on  —  developed  an  official  language 
which  was  understood  by  all.  But  it  was  not  as  yet 
widespread  among  the  common  people.  This  was  to  be 
accomplished  by  Martin  Luther. 

356.  New  High  German.  —  Long  before  Luther,  there 
existed  the  language  he  used,  just  as  there  were  Ger- 
man translations  of  the  Bible  before  his.  Luther's 
great  service  to  the  German  language  lies  not  in  his 
invention  of  something  new,  but  in  his  spreading  and 
popularizing  what  was  already  at  hand.  (See  §  155.) 
An  idea  of  the  impetus  which  he  gave  to  reading  may  be 
secured  from  the  following  figures.  For  the  ten  years 
preceding  the  Reformation  (1517),  the  yearly  output  of 
German  books  had  averaged  about  110.  The  numbers 
for  the  next  six  years  were  roughly  :  1518  — 150  ;  1519 
—  260;  1520—570;  1521  —  620;  1522  —  935. 

Luther's  language  is  shown  in  the  Lord's  Prayer 
given  bn  page  288,  which  it  is  interesting  to  compare 
with  those  of  other  periods.  Since  Luther's  time  Ger- 
man has  been  constantly  developing.  Goethe  and  Schil- 
ler wrote  Tnei)n,  fe^n,  and  so  on,  as  well  as  inein  and  fein. 
This  absence  of  uniformity  has  caused  a  certain  official 
orthography  to  be  adopted  in  the  schools  of  Germany. 
But  many  learned  men,  including  some  college  profes- 
sors, are  out  of  sympathy  with  the  new  rules,  which 
are,  it  must  be  confessed,  peculiar  and  inconsistent. 
The  leading  authority  on  this  subject  is  the  Drt^ogra* 
p^ifc^e^  SBdrterbud)  of  Konrad  Duden,  Leipzig. 


Chap.  4.]  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE.  287 

The  Lord^s  Prayer. 

357.  Gothic,  from  the  Bible  of  TJlfilas  (fourth  century 
A.D.).  —  The  character  p  is  pronounced  like  English  th; 
jah  means  and. 

Atta  unsar  pn  in  himinam,  weihnai  namo  fein ;  qui- 
mai  fiudinassus  peins ;  wairjjai  wilja  feins,  swe  in 
himina  jah  ana  airfai ;  hlaif  unsarana  fana  sinteinan 
gif  uns  himma  daga;  jah  aflet  uns  ]?atei  skulans  si- 
jaima,  swaswe  jah  weis  afletam  faim  skulam  unsaraim 
jah  ni  briggais  uns  in  fraistubnjai,  ak  lausei  uns  af 
famma  ubilin ;  (unte  J)eina  ist  fiudangardi  jah  mahts 
jah  wulfus  in  aiwins).     amen. 

358.  Old  High  German  (eighth  century).  —  Notice  the 
double  u  for  w. 

Fater  unser,  thu  in  himilom  bist,  giuuihit  si  namo 
thin,  queme  richi  thin,  uuerdhe  uuilleo  thin,  sama 
so  in  himile  endi  in  erthu.  Broot  unseraz  emezzigaz 
gib  uns  hiutu.  endi  farlaz  uns  sculdhi  unsero,  sama  so 
uuir  farlazzem  scolom  unserem.  endi  ni  gileidi  unsih 
in  costunga.     auh  arlosi  unsih  fona  ubile. 

359.  Old  High  German  (tenth  century).  — 

Fater  unser  du  in  himele  bist.  Din  namo  uu6rde 
geheilig6t.  Din  riche  chome.  Din  uuillo  gesc^he  in 
erdo,  also  in  himele.  Unser  tagelicha  brot  kib  uns 
hiuto.  Unde  unsere  sculde  belaz  lins,  also  ouh  uuir 
belazen  unseren  sculdigen.  Unde  in  chorunga  ne  lei- 
test  du  tinsih.     Nube  lose  unsih  fone  tibele. 


288  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [5  362. 

360.    Middle  High  German  (thirteenth  century). — 

Vatir  unsir  der  da  bist  in  den  himelen.  Geheiliget 
werde  din  name.  Zu  kume  dtn  riche.  Din  wille  der 
werde  alse  in  dem  himele  und  in  der  erden.  Unsir 
tegeliche  brot  gip  uns  hute.  Und  vorgip  nns  unsir 
schulde,  alse  ouch  wir  vorgebin  unseren  schuldigeren. 
Und  in  leite  uns  nicht  in  bekorunge.  Sundern  lose 
uns  von  ubele.     amen. 


361.  New  High  German.    Luther's  Translation  (1522).— 

Unfer  t)ater  tjun  bem  ^i)tneL  T)t\)n  name  fel)  ^etjlig. 
!t)et)n  rei)(^  !ome,  !Det)n  tvxik  gef(i)e^e  auff  erben  it)ie  tjtn 
IjtjvxtL  Unfer  teglic^  brob  gib  nn§  ^ent,  nnb  Dergtb  nn^ 
nnfere  fc^nlbe,  rvk  n)tr  unfern  fc^ulbigern  toergeben,  nnb  fnre 
nn^  ntc^t  t)nn  tjerfnc^nng,  fonbern  erldfe  nn^  Don  bent  nbet. 
(^enn  bei)n  ift  ba^  rei)d),  nnb  bie  frafft,  nnb  bie  t)erU(fei)t 
^n  en)ig!ei)t.)    Slmen. 

362.  New  High  German.     Modern  Version.  — 

33ater  nnfer,  ber  bn  bift  in  bent  gintntel!  ®e]^ei(iget 
n)erbe  bein  ^^^ante ;  bein  9?eirf)  fontnte ;  bein  SBiHe  gefcfte()e, 
n)ie  int  gintntel,  alfo  and)  anf  (Srben;  nnfer  tdglic^  :^rot 
gib  un^  l)ente ;  nnb  t^ergib  nn^  nnfere  (Sc^ulben,  n?ie  tt)ir 
tjergeben  nnfern  (Sc^nlbigern ;  nnb  fii^re  nn^  nid)t  in  33er* 
fnd)nng ;  fonbern  eridfe  nn§  Don  bent  Ubel ;  benn  bein  ift 
ba^  9^eic^  nnb  bie  ^'raft  nnb  bie  $err(id)teit  in  @tt)igteit. 
5lnten. 


CHAPTER   V. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

363.  There  are  three  things,  not  usually  treated  in 
textbooks,  which  often  make  trouble  for  Americans. 
They  are  (1)  words  whose  form  is  almost  the  same  in 
both  languages,  but  whose  meanings  differ ;  (2)  abbre- 
viations, of  which  the  Germans  are  very  fond;  and 
(3)  expressions  not  found  in  the  best  literature,  but 
common  in  everyday  speech. 

364.  Similar  Words.  —  Many  of  these  similar  words 
have  been  treated  in  Part  I.  A  few  of  the  commonest 
not  there  treated  are  given  below. 

Sllfo  (therefore)  does  not  mean  aho  (aud^). 

"^Da^  S&tti  (floiverhecT)  does  not  mean  heet  (bte  ^iibe). 

!5)a^  ^oot  (boat)  does  not  mean  boot  (ber  (Sttefet). 

^rat)  (good^  well-behaved)  does  not  mean  brave  (tapfer). 

:Q3e!ommen  (get)  does  not  mean  become  (tDerben). 

gaft  (almost)  does  not  mean/as^  (fi^tiett). 

T)a^  @i)mnaftum  (high  school)  does  not  mean  gymnasium 

(bte  ^urnt)a((e). 
§a(tett  (hold)  does  not  mean  halt  (ati^Iten). 
!Der  ^0^1  (cabbage)  does  not  mean  coal  (bie  ^o^Ie). 
!l)er  SO^tmfter  (minister  of  war)  does  not  mean  minister 

(preacher,  ber  '^rebtger). 
jDte  §0(f)fc^ule  (college)  does  not  mean  high  school  (^a^ 

©ijmnafium), 

289 


290  GERMAN  COMPOSITION.  [§366. 

!Der  ^^otograp^  (^photographer^  does  not  mean  photograph 

(bie  "ip^otograp^ie). 
T)tx  ^la^  (seat)  does  not  mean  place  (ber  Crt). 
!iDer  9^e!tor  (principal)  does  not  mean  rector  (ber  '^farrer). 
!r)er  (Sinn  (sense)  does  not  mean  «m  (bie  Siinbe). 
(Ste'^en  (stand)  does  not  mean  s^a?/  (bleiben). 
T)tx  (Stu^l  (chair)  does  not  mean  8^ooZ  (ber  S^entel). 
33or  (in  front  of)  does  not  mean /or  (fiir). 

365.  Abbreviations.  —  Germans  are  very  partial  to 
abbreviations.  We  find  them  not  only  on  signs  and 
notices,  but  in  books  as  well.  And  they  always  obscure 
the  sense  unless  we  know  what  words  they  stand  for. 
Except  in  the  case  of  weights  and  measurements,  a  Ger- 
man abbreviation  should  always  be  followed  by  a  period. 

Some  abbreviations  are  common  to  both  languages : 
p.p.c.  (pour  prendre  conge,  to  take  leave),  cf.  (confer, 
compare),  etc.  (et  csetera,  and  so  forth),  i.e.  (id  est, 
that  is),  N.B.  (nota  bene,  note  carefully),  sc.  (scilicet, 
namely),  and  so  on.  But  in  most  cases  German  prefers 
abbreviations  of  its  own  words,  and  uses  for  the  first 
four  above :  U.l.j.n.  (Um  ^Ibfd^teb  ju  ne^men),  tjgl.  (t)er= 
^\t\6)t),  uftt).  (nnb  fo  treiter),  b.^.  (bag  ^eigt).  Below  are 
given  some  of  the  commonest  abbreviations  with  their 
full  meaning  in  German  and  in  English. 

^b.,  ^anb,  volume,  vol, 

b^h).,  bejtet)unggn)eife,  or  (literally,  respectively), 

bgL,  bergleic^en,  of  the  same  hind. 

b.^.,  ba«  ^eigt,  that  is,  i.e. 

b.  ^.,  biefe«  3at)re«,  of  this  year. 

b.  a??.,  biefe«  aJ^^onat^,  of  this  month,  inst. 

(Stt).  (iu.,  (5uer  (S^gellenj,  your  excellency. 


Chap.  5.]  MISCELLANEOUS,  291 

geb.,  geboren,  born^  (*). 

geft.,  geftorben,  died,  (f). 

@.  m»  b.  §.,  (^efellfc^aft  mtt  bef^riinfter  gaftung,  Company 

with  limited  liability,  Ltd. 
9)^,  3J^ar!,  quarter,  about  twenty-four  cents. 
m,  Tltttv,  meter,  a  measure  of  length, 
n.  (St)r.  ®.,  nad)  ^^riftt  ©eburt,  a/ifer  ^^e  birth  of  Christ,  A.D. 
^ap.,  ^apttel,  chapter.  Chap. 
t.  ^v  tdntgltc^  taiferlic^,  Eoi/al  Imperial;  ^qL,  ^dnigUc^, 

Royal. 
refp.  (ref))ectit)e),  beguglic^ertDeife,  m^A  regard  or  r^/er- 

f.,  fie^e,  see,  vid. 

fog.,  fogenannt,  so- called. 

u.,  unb,  a9^c?,  &. 

U.  51.  ti).  g.,  Um  3lTith)ort  tt)trb  gebeten,  a?2  answer  is  requested, 

please  reply,  r.s.v.p.  (repondez  s'il  vous  plait). 
uftP.,  2C.,  unb  fo  ireiter,  and  so  forth,  etc. 
t).  ^^r.  ®.,  Dor  (^^rifti  ©eburt,  5g/org  the  birth  of  Christ, 

B.C. 
tjgL,  t)erg(et(^e,  compare,  cf. 
0.  3.,  tjerfloffenen  3^a^re^,  Zasf  ?/ear. 
t).  3J^.,  oergangenen  3}Zonat^,  Zas^  month,  ult. 
3.  ^.,  ^um  ^t\\)^xt{,for  instance,  e.g.  (exempli  gratia). 

366.  Colloquial  German.  —  There  are  many  expres- 
sions in  German  which  seldom  find  their  way  into  books, 
but  which  are  very  common  in  everyday  speech.  Some 
of  them  are  perfectly  good  German,  while  others  border 
on  slang.  They  need  not  be  learned,  but  people  who 
visit  Germany  will  hear  them  often  and  will  feel  more 
at  home  for  having  seen  them  in  print. 


292  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§366. 

Below  are  given  about  a  hundred  of  the  commonest 
of  these  expressions.  It  is  impossible  to  translate  most 
of  them,  but  an  effort  has  been  made  to  give  as  nearly 
as  possible  their  American  equivalent,  even  when  they 
are  slang. 

^IbtDCirt^!     Going  down!  (of  an  elevator). 

Q^  ^abe  fetne  b(affe  5l^nung,  fetnen  (Scf)imtner.    I  haven't 

the  dimmest  idea,  not  an  inkling. 
T)ie  2^inte  tft  aik.     The  ink  is  gone  (used  up}. 
T)ie  5lngftrt)^re,  stove-pipe  hat  Q'tiW). 
m\6)\  (or  etfc^!)     I  told  you  so!     What  did  I  tell  you! 

Serves  you  right ! 
5luf tDcirt^ !     Going  up!  (of  an  elevator). 
!Der  :53a(ffifrf),  young  girl. 

^iiffeln,  o^fen,  to  grind,  to  ''hone''  (of  students), 
^ocf  ig,  pigheaded. 
^ummeln,  to  loaf.,  to  gad  about. 
!l)a§  T)ing^,  what- do- you- call-it  (used  when  one  cannot 

think  of  the  name  of  something), 
gatno^'!  fine  Q' great"). 
gibeC,  freugftbet,  cheerful,  a  '^  good  fellow." 
gijr  unb  fertig,  all  ready ;  fitn!,  quick. 
glbten  ge^en,  to  disappear,  get  lost. 
gron!  unb  fret,  free  as  air. 
^tx  %Vi^i,  freshman  (student). 
Jutfd),  gone,  disappeared. 
©ang  unb  gcibe,  customary,  the  regular  thing. 
X)te  ®efd)icf)te,   thing,  business.     3e^t  ift  bie  ganje   ©e- 

fd)ic^te   laput'!    Now  the   whole   thing  (business)  is 

busted! 
X)a^  ©igerl,  fop,  dude. 


Chap.  5.]  MISCELLANEOUS,  293 

T)er  ®(tmmftenge(,  cigar  ("weed''}. 

jDer  (^rof rf)en,  rdckel  (a  ten  Pfennig  piece} . 

§a(t,  just.    30^an  nennt  fie  ^a(t  nur  (Sc^tt)abenftret(^e.     We 

just  call  them  ^^ Swahian  strokes.''  —Vi^Xau'a, 
§anbel  unb  Sanbet,  ^r«c?e. 

(Sr  ^at  ®e(b  tuie  §eu  (hay}.     He's  got  money  to  hum. 
§mfe|en!    Down  in  front!  (in  a  grandstand). 
3n  giille  unb  giiKe,  m  abundance. 
3^,  iDo!  (eittja^!)   TFeZZ,  2^'e^Z/    or  What  do  you  think  of 

that!    Also,   Not  by  a  long  shot!     The   meaning 

varies  with  the  intonation. 
^a«  ift  jammerfc^abe !     That's  a  burning  shame  ! 
Sir  trotten  i^n  !a(t  ftellen.      TTe'ZZ  ^t^^  Am  on  the  shelf. 
(5r  ift  etn  ^ameeC !    He's  an  ass  ! 
^apnt',  smashed  ("-busted"). 
^te!  'mat  or  gucf'  mal!    e7ws«  ?oo^/  ("pipe  "). 
3J^it  ^inb  unb  ^egel,  with  bag  and  baggage. 
Mxpp  unb  flar,  clear  as  day. 
^natt  unb  gad,  suddenly^  slam-bang  ! 
^te  ^nei:pe,  co/^^   or  meeting  place.,  or  meeting  "joint" 

(student), 
^nipfen,  to  photography  to  "  snap." 
^oloffaC   or  riefig,   huge,    "great."     Un^etmlic^   is   used 

mostly  with  t)te(,  an  awful  lot. 
^(Jnnen  oor  i^ad^en!    Yes,  if — /    Like  ducks! 
(gr  ^at  etnen  ^orb  (basket:)  befommen!     He  got  the  mitten! 
®er  ^ijter,  dog,  cur. 
^riegen,  to  get.    SBarte  nur,  tc^  !rteg'  i^n  fc^on !    Just  wait, 

I'll  get  him  /  —  @  o  c  t  ^  e. 
iDte  ^anbratte,  landlubber;  bte  SSafferratte,  sailor,  "tar." 
Cebern,  dry,  wooden  (of  stories), 
geiber  ®otte^ !     More's  the  pity  ! 


294  GERMAN  COMPOSITION,  [§366. 


• 


S'^un,  man  log !    Well,  go  ahead  ! 

'^SRxtlt,  Wlklt !     Kitty,  kitty  ! 

:Dag  ift  ja  9}^umpi^!    or   Quatfc^!    also,    ^apperlapapp! 

Stuff  and  nonsense  !     Tommy  rot!    9f?ebe  fein  ^(ed^ ! 

BonH  talk  nonsense  ! 
S^lanu'!     Well,  what' s  up  ! 
^ee,  no  Q'nit''}.     '^i^  (for  nt^t^),  nothing. 
T)er  ^ec^oogel,  jooor  tZmZ/    (Ste  armer   "iped^tjoget,  Aarc? 

?2^cAr,    oZcZ  man!     The   opposite   of   ber  ©(ud^pilg, 

lucky  dog. 
T)er  ^l^iUfter,  any  one  not  a  student. 
•iPumpen,  to  borrow  or  Zew(7.     ^utnp'  mir  'ne  SJiarf !     Zewc? 

me  a  mark! 
jDer  9?abau',  racket,  noise. 
9^ouf,  raug,  rein,  rum,  runter  (for  ^erauf,  etc.),  up,  out,  in, 

around,  under, 
'^k  alte  (Sc^acf)te(,  old  maid. 
@cf)(ecl)t  unb  rec^t,  simple  and  straightforward. 
Sie  ein  (Sc^Io^unb  ^eulen,  to  yell  like  fury. 
©alt  ben@c^nabe(!  galt'^ay^auU    Shut  up! 
(S(i)neiben,  to  cut  (^an  acquaintance'). 
(Sc^tDcinjen,  to  cut  (a  lecture  or  lesson). 
T)a^  ift  mir  gan^  ©c^nuppe!    Idont  care  a  hang! 
T)tx  (S^tDipS,  jag. 

SSoKen  iDir  h)a§  fteigen  laffen?    iS'AaZ?  we  start  something? 
Uber  (Stod  unb  Stein,  off  the  beaten  path,  up  hill  and 

down  dale. 
T)er  UI!,  joke  ;  ulfig,  funny  ;  Oerulfen,  to  make  ridiculous. 
Unl^eimlirf),  uncomfortable,  gloomy,  used  chiefly  with  t)ie(, 

an  awful  lot. 
Un'folib,  sporty,  fast,  leading  a  gay  life.     jDer  St^ttjipg, 

jag. 


Chap.  5.]  MISCELLANEOUS,  295 

3SerbummeIn,  to  blow  in,  to  squander. 

^Serbuften,  to  sneak  off^  disappear. 

(5r  ift  in  fie  oernarrt!     lies  dippy  about  (in  love  with') 

her. 
3Serfo^(en,  to   thrash,   ''lick.'"      Also  buri^^auen,    buri^= 

priigein,  and  burc^^o(3en. 
T)tv  So(!en!ra^er,  skyscraper. 
Surft  tt)iber  Surft!    Tit  for  tat.     '^a^  ift  mir  Surft! 

That's  all  the  same  to  me  !    I  dont  care  a  rap  ! 
!Da^   ^tVi^,  stuff  (contemptuous);  bummed   3^^9^    Stuff 

and  nonsense  ! 
^\t   ^Xoxt^ti,  watch    Q' turnip'').     ^Vox^^'dUf   to  plague, 

bother. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 
AND  INDEX. 


%aii)tn,  bag,  Aachen,  Aix-la-Cha- 
pelle,  the  capital  of  Charle- 
magne's Empire. 

tt&bringctt,  brocf)tc  ab,  abgebrac^t 
(^aben),  to  dissuade. 

Stbcnb,  ber,  bie  -e,  evening  ;  writ- 
ten without  a  capital  with  ad- 
verbs :  geftcrn  abenb. 

abcr,  but,  §  43, 1. 

ttlbgcnommcn,  see  abne^men. 

$[b(aut,  ber,  bic  -e,  ablaut,  change 
in  the  root  vowel  of  a  word. 

alitte^mett,  na^m  ah,  abgenommen 
(^aben),  er  nimmt  ah,  to  take 
off. 

afircifctt,  reg.,  sep.  (fein),  to  go 
away,  depart. 

a6fc^Ctt,fa^  ab,  abgefel)en  (l^aben), 
er  fie^t  ab,  to  look  aside  ;  abge- 
f e^eti  t)on,  aside  from . 

ah^kf\in,  jog  ab,  abgejogen 
(tiaben),  to  go  off  or  away. 

alisubringen,  see  abbringeii. 

ttb3«rcifcn,  see  abreifen. 

tt(^,  oh,  ah. 

a^tf  eight ;  niorgen  iiber—  Sage,  a 
week  from  to-morrow. 

3tgcnf ,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  agent. 

^Ihvt^tf  ber,  Albert;  Albrecht 
Durer,  Germany''s  great  artist, 
§  116  and  §  144. 


aU,  all,  §  113,  2 ;  alle  beibe,  both, 

§  170,  2,  Note  b. 
aUtin',  alone. 
aUtvt^iUQ^',  to  be  sure ;  it  is  true, 

§274. 
al»,  when,  §  84,  1 ;  as,  §  83,  2 ; 

correlative,  than,  as,  §  83,  1. 
al^Of  so,  then,  §  26,  2 ;  sometimes 

omitted  in  translating. 
ali,  otter,  otteft,  old,  older,  oldest. 
wxif   see  an  betn;    with  superl., 

§  119,  3,  Note,  and  §  218,  1. 
5(merifa,  ba^,  America. 
Stmcrifa'ttcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  Ameri- 
can. 
amufic'rctt  fic^,   amiifierte,   amu= 

fiert'  (^aben),  to  have  a  good 

time,  §  50,  5. 
ttn,  prep.,  at,  to,  in,  on,  §  119,  1  ; 

of  (benfeit  an),  to  (gett)o^nt  an), 

§  119,  2 ;  with  adjs.,  §  119,  3  ; 

special  uses,  §  119,  3,  Note ;  — 

etn)ag  oorbei,  past ;  sep.  prefix, 

as  in  anbieten,  angretfen,  h\ 
onbictctt,  bot  an,  angeboten  (^a= 

ben),  to  offer. 
anbcr,  other,  §  30,  1. 
ttttfangctt,    fing    an,    angefangen 

(t)aben),  er  fdngt  an,  to  begin, 

§  180,  2. 
anfii^rcn,  reg.,  sep.    (^aben),  to 

bring  in,  use  as  an  illustration. 
ange^en,  ging  an,  angegangen  (^a* 


297 


angelai^t 


298 


an^ 


ben),  with  ace,  to  be  to,  §  206, 
2,  Note. 

angclat^t  (anlac^cn),  smiled  at. 

aitgcttc^m,  agreeable,  §  171,  2, 
Note. 

angcfc^cn  (anfc^en),  respected. 

tttigretfcn,  griff  an,  angegriffen 
(^aben),  to  attack. 

antommtn,  tarn  an,  angefommcn 
(fein),  to  arrive ;  ha^  fommt 
barauf  an,  that  depends. 

anla^tn,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben),  to 
smile  at. 

3tttlattt,  ber,  tie  -e,  anlaut,  the  be- 
ginning sound  of  a  word  or 
syllable. 

ttnncl^mcn,  nal^m  an,  angenom* 
men  (^aben),  er  nimmt  an,  to 
accept. 

Stnrcbc,  bie,  bie  -en,  address. 

ttnfc^Ctt,  \a\)  an,  angefe^en  (t)aben), 
er  fiet)t  an,  to  look  at ;  angeje* 
l^en,  looked  up  to,  respected. 

an^aitf  instead  of;  with  gu,  §  181 ; 
with  ta%  §  190. 

5(ttton,  ber,  Anton,  Antony. 

^nttoovif  bte,  bie  -en,  answer, 
reply. 

antwortcn,  reg.  (tjabcn),  to  an- 
swer, reply,  to,  anf  with  ace. 

anjubictcn,  see  anbieten. 

anjufangcn,  see  anfangen. 

5(n5Mfl,  ber,  bie  3lnjiige,  suit. 

ntt-^ttttcljmcii,  see  annel)men. 

on5ufcl)cn,  see  anjel)en. 

5(rbcit,  bie,  bie  -en,  work,  la- 
bor. 

otbcitcn,  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  work. 

rivgcru,  reg.  (t)aben),  to  anger, 
irritate. 


arm,  poor;  ®ie  ^rnifte(r),  you 
poor  thing ! 

3(rmtttiu§,  ber,  Armin  or  Her- 
mann, the  German  leader  (chief 
of  the  Cherusker)  who  won  the 
battle  of  the  Teutoburg  Forest, 

§1. 

ttttl^,  also,  too,  §  100,  4,  Note  ; 
ever,  257,  2. 

anf,  prep.,  on,  upon,  §  120,  1  ;  at, 
to,  §  120,  3,  Note  a  ;  for,  §  8  ; 
with  verbs,  §  120,  2  ;  toith  adjs., 
§  120,  3 ;  in  idioms,  §  120,  3, 
Note  b  ;  —  bem  2Jior!te,  in  the 
market  (place)  ;  —  beutfd),  — 
engUfd),  in  German,  in  Eng- 
lish ;  —  bem  ^ogelfang,  fowling 
("bird-shooting");  —  biefe 
SSeife,  in  this  way;  aufS  -ftc 
(superl.),  in  the  -est  way, 
§  218,  2  ;  sep.  prefix,  as  in  auf= 
boren,  anfmac^fen,  etc. 

3(ufgabc,  bie,  bie  -n,  exercise. 

aufge^ijrt,  see  aufl)oren. 

oufgcnommen,  see  aufne^mcn. 

auf^iircit,  reg.,  sep.  (^abcn),  to 
stop,  §  180,  2. 

aufnc^men,  nal)m  anf,  aufgenom« 
men  (l)aben),  er  nimmt  auf,  to 
take  up,  receive. 

auftreten^  trat  auf,  oufgctreten 
(jein),  er  tritt  auf,  to  step  up, 
appear  (on  the  stage). 

aufwad)cn,  reg.,  sep.  (jein),  to 
wake  up. 

auf^u^iircn,  see  aufl)i3ren. 

^luflCttblirf,  ber,  bte  -e,  moment. 

5(ii0ttftuc(,  ber,  Augustus,  Roman 
Emperor. 

Ott^,  prep.,  out  of,  from,  §  94,  1  ; 


duSbred^en 


299 


Scgriff 


of,  §  94,  2  ;  —  btefem@runbp,  for 
this  reason  ;  oon  iro  aug,  (from) 
where,  §  46  ;  sep.  prefix^  as  in 
ougbre(i)en,  augrufen,  etc. 

au^brcj^cn,  brac^  au«,  oitgge= 
bro(i)en  (fetn),  er  bri(^t  au§,  to 
break  out. 

iltt^gerufctt,  see  augrufen. 

auggcjeic^ttct  (ougjeic^nen),  dis- 
tinguished. 

9(tt!§Iattt,  ber,  bie  -e,  auslaut,  «/ie 
end  sound  of  a  word  or  syllable. 

Ott^mai^Ctt,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben),  to 
make  a  difference. 

au^^tuttbcrtt,  reg.^  sep.  (^abcit), 
to  rob,  pillage. 

au^riifcn,  rief  ou8,  au§gerufen 
(f)aben),  to  call  out,  cry  out. 

ttU^ru^Ctt  fit^,  re/?.,  res'.,  «e/).  (I)a^ 
ben),  to  rest. 

tttt^fc^Ctt,  fa^  au8,  auggefel)en 
(l^abcn),  to  look,  appear, 

au^ttiattbcrii,  reg.,  sep.  (fetn),  to 
emigrate,  go  to. 

tttt§5Ct(^ttCtt  ft(^,  re^.,  regr.,  sep. 
(^aben),  to  distinguish  one- 
self; anggej^eid^net,  distin- 
guished. 

ttu^Stt^tttttbent,  see  augplunbern. 


Baben,  reg.  (^aben),  to  bathe. 

6alb,  soon. 

S3anb,  bag,  bie  '^er,  ribbon,  band. 

\s(ii,  see  bitten. 

bauctt,  reg.  (t)abcn). 

JBaucr,  ber,  beg  -g  or  -n,  bie  -n, 

peasant. 
Saucrfratt,   bie,  bie  -en,  peasant 

woman. 


23autc,  bie,  bie  -n,  building. 

SBcantttJortUttg,  bie,  bie  -en,  an- 
swer (to),  reply  (to). 

ficbaucn,  reg.,  insep.  (tjaben),  to 
till  (the  soil). 

Bebcttfctt,  beboc^te,beboc^t(f)aben), 
to  consider ;  to  remember. 

bcbCtttCtt,  reg,,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
mean ;  bebeutenb,  important, 
prominent. 

S3cbctttttng,  bie,  bie  -en,  impor- 
tance ;  meaning. 

S3cbtCttttttg,  bie,  bie  -en,  service. 

^CCt^otJCtt,  ber,  Beethoven,  one 
of  Germany''s  greatest  musi- 
cians, §  240  and  §  245. 

bcfttttb,  see  befinben. 

bcfc^tctt,  befal)(,  befol)ten  (tjaben), 
er  befie^It,  with  dat.,  to  com- 
mand, order,  §  197,  2. 

Bcftnbctt  ft(^,  refl.,  befanb,  be= 
fnnben  (l)aben),  to  find  oneself, 
to  be,  to  do,  §  206,  1  ;  2Bie  be- 
finben  3te  fid)?  How  do  you 
do? 

befrcictt,  reg.,  insep.  C^aben),  to 
free,  set  free. 

ftcganit,  see  beginnen. 

fiegC0ttCtt,  reg.,  insep.  (jein),  with 
dat.,  to  meet,  come  upon,  §  166, 
Note,  and  §  171,  2. 

BcotttttCtt,  begann,  bcgonnen  (^a= 
ben),  to  begin,  §  146. 

bcgniigctt,  reg.,  insep.  (f)aben),  to 
satisfy ;  fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  con- 
tent oneself,  to  be  content. 

Bcgralbctt,  begrnb,  begraben  (l)o- 
ben),  er  begrcibt,  to  bury,  inter. 

SBcgrtff,  ber,  bie  -e,  idea;  int  — 
fein,  to  be  about  to,  §  193,  3. 


Scjjrftnbung 


300 


bcjfcr 


Scgriittbttttjj,  tie,  bic  -en,  estab- 
lishing, establishment. 
begrit^en^  reg.,  insep.  (Ijaben),  to 

greet. 
bc^aJtctt,  bcl)ielt,  bc^altcn  (^aben), 

cr  bel^cilt,  to  keep,   retain ;  to 

remember. 
Be^anbeln,  regr.,  insep.  (^abcn), 

to  treat,  to  use. 
hcf^auptttlf   reg.,  insep.    (^aben), 

to  maintain  ;  ftd^  — ,  reflex. ,  to 

maintain  oneself. 
Bc^crrfl^Ctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^abeit), 

to  rule,  be  ruler  of. 
bci,  prep.^  near,  by,  beside,  §  96, 

1  ;  with,  §  95,  3  ;  to  denote  cir- 
cumstances^ §  95,  2  ;  sep.  prefix 

as  in  beifiigen. 
Bctbe,  both,  170,  1 ;  neuter,  §  170, 

2;   bie  -n,  the   two,    §  170,  2, 

Note    a;    aiie    —,    §    170,    2, 

Note  6. 
bcifitgctt,  regr.,  sep.    (tjaben),  to 

include  in,  add  to. 
bcim,  see  bet  bem. 
bcitttt^C,  almost. 
SBctf^icI,    bag,  bie   -e,   example; 

jum  — ,  for  instance. 
bcipfilflCtt,  see  betfiigen. 
befannt,  well-known. 
befanntHi!^,  adv.^  as  is  well  known, 

you  know. 
befommen,  betom,  bcfommcn  (l^a= 

ben),  to  get,   secure,   procure, 

§  42,  1. 
bcraflcrn,  reg.^  insep.  (^aben),  to 

besiege. 
Sclaflenmg,  bic,  bie  -en,  siege. 
beltebt,   beliebteft,  popular,  most 

populfvr  {not  beloved,  gcUcbt). 


bcmcrfctt,  reg.^  insep.  (^aben),  to 
notice. 

^trmi^tn  or  benii^cn,  reg.,  insep. 
(^abcn),  to  use,  make  use  of. 

bcrcti^crn,  reg.,  insep.  (^abcn), 
to  enrich. 

bcreit,  ready,  §  195,  1. 

Scrg,  ber,  bie  -c,  mountain. 

Scrlittcr,  adj.  (of)  Berlin. 

Sern,  ba«,  Verona  {when  used 
icith  Dietrich,  not  modern 
Bern) . 

Scruf,  ber,  bie  -e,  calling,  trade. 

bcrii^mt,  famous, 

befa^,  see  beftl^en. 

befd^aftigen,  reg.,  insep.  (I)aben), 
to  employ;  ftd^ — tnit,  reflex., 
to  busy  oneself  with. 

S3cfi^oftigutt{|,  bte,  bic  -en,  busi- 
ness, occupation. 

bcfd^Hc^ctt,  befrf)Ioft,  befrf)Ioffen 
(^aben),  to  decide,  §  268,  2. 

bcfi^loffctt,  see  bef(^Uc^en. 

bcficgctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
conquer,  loith  obj.,  §  135,  3; 
ber  S3efiegte,  be§  -n,  bte  -n,  the 
conquered  one,  the  vanquished. 

befi^cn,  befog,  befeffen  (ijahen), 
to  possess. 

S3cfi^cr,  ber,  bie  — ,  owner,  pos- 
sessor. 

befonber,  adj.,  especial,  particu- 
lar. 

befonberiS^  adv.,  especially. 

befpred^en,  befpradj,  befproci)en 
(^aben),  cr  befpridjt,  to  talk 
over. 

befprof^en,  see  bcfprecl)cn. 

beffcr,  better,  compar.  of  gut, 
good. 


deft 


301 


bmgen 


Beft,   best,  am  beften,  superl.  of 

gut,  good. 
bcftanb,  see  befte^en. 
bcftc^ett,   beftanb,    beftanbcn  (^a* 

ben),  to  consist,  of,  au8,  §  269, 

1 ;  to  insist,  on,  auf,  §  269,  2  ; 

to  pass  {an  examination),  §  269, 

2,  Note. 
ficftcltctt,  regr.,  insep.  (I^aben),  to 

order,  §  197,  1. 
defttt^en,  regr.,  iwsep.  (^aben),  to 

visit ;  to  attend. 
htiomn,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

emphasize. 
23cdi)Ifcrttttg,  bte,  bie  -en,  popula- 
tion. 
IbctJor,  con;.,  before. 
ficwunbcrn,  regr.,  insep.  (^aben), 

to  admire. 
ht^at^httf  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

pay. 
mM,  bie,  bie  -n,  Bible. 
bictcn,   bot,  geboten  (^aben),  to 

offer,  see  also  anbteten. 
bin,   am,  see  fein. 
S^ittbe,  bie,  bie  -n,  bandage. 
hi§,  conj.,  till,  until ;  prep.,  till, 

§  107,  1 ;  as  far  as,  §  107,  2. 
U^cv',  previously,  up-  till  now, 

or  then. 
Si^marrf,     ber,    Bismarck,     the 

^^ Iron    Chancellor'^    of    Wil- 
liam 7,  §§  277  and  278. 
hiiit,     please;   you're    welcome, 

§  15,  1,  Note,  see  bitten. 
bitten,   bat,   gebeten  (t)aben),  to 

ask,  §  15,  1. 
blciben,  btieb,  geblieben  (jein),  to 

stay,  remain,  §  180,  1. 
hlo^i  adv.,  just,  only. 


blii^cn,  reg.  (t)aben),  to  bloom, 
blossom. 

Stttmc,  bie,  bie  -n,  flower. 

Soben,  ber,  bte  —  and  "■,  bottom  ; 
floor ;  ground,  §  260,  Note. 

S3ogen,  ber,  bte  — ,  sheet  {of  pa- 
per) ;  arch  {of  building)  ;  bow 
{in  archery). 

bijfc,  angry,  at,  auf  with  ace. 

J8o^ton,  bag,  Boston. 

bot,  see  bieten. 

S3otc,  ber,  be8  -n,  bie  -n,  mes- 
senger. 

Sotfd^aft,  bte,  W  -en,  message; 
embassy. 

brad^,  see  breci)en. 

brar^te,  see  bringen. 

S3ranbcttbnrg,  ba«,  Brandenburg, 
the  province  from  which  the 
modern  kingdom  of  Prussia 
has  developed. 

S3ratttittrftgIorfIcin,  t>a^,  the  Brat- 
wurstglocklein,  a  famous  little 
eating  place  in  Nuremberg,  lit., 
roast  sausage  little  bell. 

brant^cn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  need. 

braun,  brown. 

Sraut,  bte,  bie  53rdute,  fiancee 
{not  bride). 

brc(^en,  brac^,  gebrod)en  (^aben), 
er  bri(i)t,  to  break,  see  also 
augbred^en,  to  break  out. 

S5rcmcn,  bag,  Bremen,  a  North 
German  city. 

23rief,  ber,  bte  -e,  letter. 

S3neff(^rciben,  "iia^,  beg  -g,  letter 
writing,  correspondence. 

bringen,  hxa^^it,  gebract)t  (^aben), 
to  bring,  see  also  un'ter= 
bringen,  to  shelter. 


^tntS^ 


302 


benett 


^vntS)f  ber,  bic  H,  breach. 

a3rurfc,  bie,  btc  -n,  bridge. 

S3rttbcr,  ber,  ble  ",  brother. 

S3rttft,  bie,  bic  H,  breast. 

2Jui^,  bag,  bie  Hx,  book. 

S3ut^bnirfcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  printer. 

S3ut^brucfcrfttttft,  bie,  ber  — ,  art 
of  printing. 

S3ttci^^attbc(,  ber,  beg  -8,  book 
business,  book  trade. 

Sut^ftafic,  ber,  beg  -n,  or  -ng,  bie 
-n,  letter  (of  the  alphabet). 

Bilrfctt,  reg.  (^abett),  to  bend,  bow. 

S3ttnb,  ber,  bie  H,  alliance. 

93ttniic§genoffc,  ber,  bie  -n,  ally. 

83nrg,  bie,  bie  -en,  fortress,  strong- 
hold, castle. 

SBitrgcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  citizen, 
burgher. 

S3ttrgcr!rtcg,  ber,  bie  -e,  civil  war. 

S3iir0crf(i^u(e,  bie,  bie  -n,  public 
school. 


(S^araftcr,  ber,  bie  dljorafte're, 
character. 

6l)nftctt^cit,  bie,  ber  — ,  (the  peo- 
ple of)  Christianity. 

e^rifttt^,  ber,  (beg)  ei)rtftl,  Christ. 

ba,  conj.,  as,  §  17,  8  ;  adv.,  there, 

§  16,  2 ;  and  then,  §  17,  1  and 

§69,3;  here,  §17,2. 
barfjtc,  see  benfen. 
bdfiir,   for  it;  in  it  (with  to  be 

interested);  help  it,  §  39,  2. 
banCfiCtt,    against    it ;     etluag  — 

I)Qben,  to  have  any  objections. 
bo^cr,  along,  §  247,  1. 


baljcrgcfommcn,  see  ba^erfommen, 
ba^erfommctt,   fam  ba^er,  bat)cr» 

gefommeu     (fein),     to     come 

along. 
ba^tn,  along,  thither, 
ba^ittflie^cn,  f(o^  ba^in,  bo^ingc^ 

ftoffen  (fetn),  to  flow  along. 
bamal^,  at  that  time,  then,  §  59,  2. 
^am^fcrli'nic,  bie,  bie  -n,  steam- 
ship line. 
^ttttfbarfctt,   bie,   ber   — ,   grati- 
tude. 
ban!en,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat.,  to 

thank. 
bttttlt,  then,  next,  §  59,  1. 
baran',  of  it. 
barauf,  upon  it ;  of  it  (ftolj);  to 

it  (antraorten)  ;  bag  fommt  — 

on,  that  depends. 
hatavL^',  out  of  that,  from  that, 

or  it. 
barf,  barfft,  may,  see  biirfen. 
bargcftcttt,  see  barftellen. 
barill',  therein,  in  the  fact  that. 
barftcttctt,   reg.,  sep.  (t)aben),  to 

represent. 
bariibcr,  about  it. 
t^aSf  the,  that,  which,  see  ber. 
bafe,  conj.,  that,  §  211,  1. 
bottcrn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  take,  to 

last,  §  183,  1. 
bation',  of  it,  from  it,  from  there  ; 

away. 
batiottfommen,  fam  baton,  bat)on< 

gcfommen  (fein),  to  get  away, 

escape. 
bcttt,  your  (bu). 
bcm,  dat.,  see  ber. 
ben,  ace,  see  ber. 
benett,  dat.  pi.,  see  ber. 


bcttfctt 


303 


burc^naffctt 


beitleti,  bod)te,  geba(i)t  (^aben),  to 
think,  of,  an,  §  41, 1,  Don,  §  41, 
2. 

'^tnlmaif  i^a^,  ble  ''er  and  -t, 
monument. 

benn,  conj.^  for  with  the  normal 
order ;  particle  to  be  omitted  in 
translating,  §  33 ;  7ioi  then, 
§59. 

bcr,  bie,  bo8,  article,  the,  §  223  ; 
demonstrative,  that,  gen.,  beffen, 
beren,  beffen,  §  211, 3  a  ;  relative, 
who,  which,  that,  gen.,  beffen, 
beren,  beffen,  §  208. 

bcs*,  gen.,  see  ber. 

be^^atb,  therefore,  for  that  rea- 
son. 

beffen,  gen.  of  ber,  or  n^etrfier, 
whose,  of  which. 

befto,  correl.  of\e,  the,  §  223. 

beutetn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  explain 
away,  quibble  over. 

beutft^,  German  ;  auf  — ,  in  Ger- 
man ;  ber  ®eutfc!^e,  be8  -n,  bie 
-n,  the  German  (citizen)  ;  ta^ 
S)entfc^(e),  be§-n,  German  (lan- 
guage) ;  cr  fprid^t  2)eutfc^,  he 
speaks  German  ;  in8  2)eutfd^e, 
into  German  ;  tnt  ®eutfd)en,  in 
German,  §  156 ;  origin,  §  354. 

^eutfd^tattb,  ta^,  Germany. 

bicfj,  you,  yourself  (familiar),  see 
bu. 

^iti^ter,  ber,  bie  — ,  poet. 

^tt^tfuttft,  bie,  bie  "e,  poetry,  art 
of  making  verse. 

bitf,  thick. 

bie,  see  ber. 

btefer,  biefe,  btefeg,  or  bie«,  this ; 
pi.,  these.  • 


'J)tetri«^,  ber,  Dietrich,  Theodoric. 
^xnQ,  bag,  bie  -e,  thing ;  Dor  alien 

-en,  above  all. 
btr,  you,  to  you,  dat.,  see  bn. 
^ivtt'ioVf    ber,    bie   S)ire!tor'en, 

director,  principal. 
bod^,    yet,    but,    after    all ;    yes, 

§  237, 1 ;  pray,  with  the  impera- 
tive, §  237,  2  ;  is  it,  etc.,  §  237, 

2,  Note. 
^ohnetfr^er,   ber,   bie  — ,    inter- 
preter. 
bort,   there,  yonder,  over  there, 

§  16,  1. 
'^V,f  abhrev.  for  S)o!tor,  Dr. 
^rat^e,  ber,  be^  -n,  bie  -n,  dragon. 
^rnt^enblut,  ba§,  beg -eg,  dragon's 

blood. 
^rang,  ber,  beg  -eg,  impulse. 
brc^eit,  reg.  (^aben),  to  twist. 
brct,  three. 
brei^tg,  thirty. 
bret^igja^rtg,   lasting  30  years ; 

ber  -e  ^rieg,  the  Thirty  Years' 

War. 
britt,  third. 

^ro^ttttg,  bie,  bie  -en,  threat. 
bnirfcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  print. 
^rurferet,  bie,  bie  -en,  printing, 

printing  office. 
bit,  you,  thou  ;  used  with  intimate 

friends. 
burt^,  through,  §  108  ;  by. 
burt^'fit^ren,   reg.,  sep.  (^aben), 

to  put  through,  carry  out. 
burc^'fommen,  tarn  bnrd),  burc^ge- 

fommen  (fein),  to  come  through, 

get  through,  pass. 
burd^ttaffett,  reg.,insep.  (l)aben), 

to  soak  through,  wet  through. 


burt^reifctt 


804 


tmpot 


burc^rci'fcn,  reg.^  insep.  (Ijaben), 
to  travel  through,  to  "do." 

^iircr,  bcr,  Albrecht  Diirer,  Ger- 
many'^s  leading  artist  in  the 
sixteenth  century^  §  116  and 
§144. 

biirfctt,  burfte,  geburft  (I)abcn),  cr 
barf,  may,  to  be  permitted, 
§  75,  1. 

burfte,  see  biirfen. 


cbcn,   so,   §  26,    2,   Note;    just, 

§  196,  2,  Note. 
cficnfo,  just  so. 
cbcl,  ebter,  noble,  nobler. 
t\)t,  before,  §  248,  1. 
@^c^aar,    bag,    bie  -e,    married 

couple. 
6^rc,  bie,  bic  -tt,  honor. 
e^ren,  reg'.  (l)aben),  to  honor. 
(Sid^ftr.  /or  (Sidjftra^c,  Oak  St. 
^tfcrfttd^t,  bic,  ber  — ,  jealousy. 
cifrifl,  eager(Iy). 
cigcn,  (one's)  own. 
ciflCtttlit^,  really,  §  33. 
citcii,  reg.  (^aben),  to  hasten. 
cin,  a,  an ;  one ;  ber  eine,  the  one, 

§  29,  2 ;  sep.  prefix  as  in  ein= 

fatten,  etc. 
Ctnanber,  each  other,  one  another ; 

combines  loith  prepositions  as 

one  word :  tniteinanbcr,  etc, 
einbriugctt,     braiij]    cin,    einge- 

brungen  (^abcn),  to  press  into ; 

to  invade. 
cinfrtd^,  simple,  simply. 
©infttit,  ber,  bie  ''e,  idea. 
cittfattctt,    fiel    ein,     eingefatten 

(jeln),  to  occur  to,  loith  dat., 


§  231,  2  ;  I  shouldn't  think  of, 
e8  fottt  ntlr  nid^t  ein,  §  41,  1, 
Note. 

cittftcl,  see  einfatten. 

eingefalten,  see  cinfaUen. 

cittgcfd^tafctt,  see  einfdjtafen. 

ctttig,  pron.,  some ;  toor  einiger 
3eit,  some  time  ago  j  ad;., 
united. 

etuigen,  reg.^  (i^aben),  to  make 
one,  unite. 

einnta(,  once,  once  upon  a  time. 

eitt'mifd^cn,  reg.^  sep.  (^aben),  to 
mix  in  ;  fid)  — ,  reflex..,  to  "  butt 
in." 

ctnfd^Iafctt,  fd^tief  ein,  eingefd)fafen 
(fein),  er  fc^Idft  cin,  to  go  to 
sleep,  fall  asleep. 

Ctnft,  once  (upon  a  time). 

cintraf,  see  cintreffen. 

ciittrcffctt,  traf  ein,  eingetroffen 
(fein),  to  arrive. 

Ctttjtg,  single,  §  9 ;  only,  §  185,  2. 

ciitjubringcn,  see  einbrtngen. 

©ifcttba^tt,  bie,  bie  -en,  railroad. 

©Icftrijitat',  bie,  bic  -en,  elec- 
tricity. 

^Icttb,  ba8,  beS  -S,  misery, 

c(f,  eleven. 

cmpftt^r,  see  empfet)(en. 

cm^fnnb,  see  empfinben. 

empfriugcit,  enipfing,  cmpfangen 
(Ijaben),  cr  cmpfdngt,  to  re- 
ceive, §  261,  2. 

empfe^fen,  empfal)t,  cmpfo^fen 
(Ijaben),  ev  empfie^tt,  to  recom- 
mend. 

cmpfittbctt,  cmpfanb,  empfunben 
(^aben),  to  feel,  experience. 

empor,  up,  aloft. 


cmportttgctt 


305 


crtrtttfctt 


tmpov'vaQtn,  reg.,  sep.  (^abcn), 
to  loom  up,  to  jut  out. 

©ttbc,  bog,  bie  -n,  end. 

Cttblid^,  finally. 

©ttgtanbcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  English- 
man. 

englif^,  English  ;  auf  — ,  in  Eng- 
lish. 

tnttv'hcn,  reg.,  insep.  (^abcn),  to 
disinherit. 

Ctttrattg',  along,  §  247,  1. 

cntfj^ctbctt,  cntfd)ieb,  entfc^ieben 
(^aben),  to  decide,  §  258,  1  ; 
entf(i)ieben,  adv.,  decidedly. 

Ctttfli^Kc^Ctt  ft(i^,  rejl.,  tw\.\6)\Q% 
entf(i)toffen  (^aben),  to  decide, 
§  258,  2. 

Ctttft^Io^,  see  cntf(^Iie§cn. 

Ctttftanb,  see  entftel)en. 

Ctttftc^en,  cntftanb,  cntftanben 
(feiii),  to  arise,  have  its  start ; 
to  begin. 

cr,  \\t,  c8,  he,  she,  it,  §  207, 
Note. 

crbottCtt,  reg.,  insep.  (f)aben),  to 
erect,  build. 

crfilcffcn,  reg.,  insep.  (fein),  to 
grow  pale,^^.,  to  die. 

©rfa^rung,  bie,  bie  -en,  experi- 
ence. 

crfattb,  see  erfinben. 

crftttbctt,  erfanb,  erfunben  (^aben), 
to  invent. 

etgangen,  see  crgef)en. 

crgcBctt  m,  refl.,  ergab,  ergeben 
(f)aben),  er  ergibt  fid),  to  sur- 
render; adj.,  respectful;  erg 6=" 
benft,  very  respectfully. 

crgc^cn,  ergiiig,  ergangen  (fein), 
impers.    with  daL,    to    go,   to 


fare ;     ebenfo  ift   es   if)m   mit 

feinem  9ietc^e  ergongcn,  just  so 

he  fared  in  regard  to  his  realm, 
cr^ttftctt,  er^ielt,  ert)alten  (Ijabeti), 

er  ert)dlt,  to  keep ;  to  receive, 

§  261,   1;    ft(^  — ,  reflex.,   to 

maintain  oneself. 
er^telt,  see  erl^alten. 
cr^olctt  fi(^,    reflex.,  reg.,    insep. 

(i)oben),  to  recover. 
crittttcrit,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

remind ;  fid)  — ,  reflex.,  with  gen. 

or  an  and  ace,  to  remember. 
crfcttttCtt,       erfonnte,       erfannt 

(baben),  to  recognize. 
crflarctt,  reg.,  insep.  (J^ahtn),  to 

explain;   .frieg  — ,  to  declare 

war.  • 

crlaubctt,    reg.,    insep.    (baben), 

with  dat.,  to  allow. 
crtcttJ^tctt,  reg.,  insep.  (f)abeit),  to 

light,  illumine. 
croficrit,  reg.,  insep.  (I)obeii),  to 

conquer. 
crri^tctt,  reg.,  insep.  (t)aben),  to 

erect,  put  up. 
crf^cittCtt,     erf  rf)  ten,      erfd^ienen 

(fein),  to  appear. 
crf(^icn,  see  erf(^einen. 
crft^tagctt,      erf(f)tug,     erfc^tagen 

(^aben),  er  erfd)tagt,  to  kill. 
erf(i^(u0,  see  erfd)tagen. 
crftcr  -C  -C§,  adj.,  first,  §  268,  1 ; 

adv.,  for  the  first  time  ;   only, 

just,  not  till,  §  185,  1,  6. 
crfttt^Ctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

request,  beg. 
tvivanlf  see  ertrinfen. 
ertnn!ctt,  ertranf,  ertrunfen  (fein), 

to  drown,  be  drowned. 


crttiaj^ctt 


806 


fid 


crttJa^cn,  regr.,  insep.  (fcltt),  to 
awake. 

erWtt^tcn,  reg.,  insep.  (^aBcn),  to 
choose. 

tr^afjhn,  reg.^  insep.  (f)aben),  to 
tell,  relate,  §  28,  1. 

©rs'^crjog,  ber,  bie  -e  and  '^e, 
archduke. 

tS,  it ;  there  (or  omit),  §  85,  1,  2 
and  Note  ;  loi^A  feitt  aiid  plural 
attribute,  they,  those,  §  211,  3, 
6,  Note. 

tttoa,  about,  §  193,  2. 

ettttaS,  something,  anything;  a 
following  adjective  is  written 
with  a  capital:  ettt)a8  @uteg, 
§217. 

tn(lf)f  dat.  and  ace.  of  U)x,  you. 

ttttv,  your. 

(^nvopa,  ba«,  Europe. 

©jarncn,  ba«,  bic  (Sjamina,  ex- 
amination. 

Q^trnplav',  bag,  bic  -e,  copy,  sam- 
ple. 

f^ttftrifat',  ba8,  bic  -c,  manufac- 
ture. 

fa^rcn,  fu^r,  gefa^ren  (fein  or 
ijahtn,  §  167),  er  fd^rt,  to  drive, 
ride,  go  (by  train)  ;  see  also 
fortfa^ren,  to  continue. 

^aU,  htx,  bic  "c,  case ;  auf  fctncn 
— ,  by  no  means,  under  no  cir- 
cumstances ;  Quf  allc  ^aUe,  at 
any  rate,  anyway. 

faHctt,  fict,  flefallen  (fein),  cr  faEt, 
to  fall ;  see  also  ciufollcn,  ^cr* 
fatten,  jufammcnfatten. 

falls,  conjunc,  in  case. 


fattt,  see  fallen. 

falfd^,  wrong ;  false. 

^amilic,  bie,  bie  -n  (four  sylla- 
bles), family. 

^ang,  ber,  bie  H,  catch. 

fangcn,  fing,  gefangen  (l^aBen),  er 
fangt,  to  catch ;  see  also  an* 
fangcn,  to  begin. 

faffctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  take;  to 
interpret. 

faft,  almost. 

^cd^tCtt,  baS,  be8  -8,  fencing, 
sword  play. 

IJcbcr,  bie,  bie  -n,  pen. 

fc^tcn,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat,  to 
lack;  benen  prattijd)e  ©rfal^* 
rung  fel)tte,  who  lacked  prac- 
tical experience. 

%t\)Ux,  ber,  bie  — ,  mistake. 

f^ctcrtag,  ber,  bie  -c,  holiday. 

fcttt,  delicate,  fine. 

f^Ctttb,  ber,  bic  -c,  enemy,  foe. 

I^ctb^crr,  ber,  bes  -n,  bic  -en, 
general. 

i^clbsujj,  ber,  bie  H,  campaign. 

f^crbittoub,  ber,  Ferdinand. 

§crufprc(^cr,  ber,  bic  — ,  tele- 
phone. 

fertiji,  ready ;  through,  finished, 
§  196,  2. 

fcft,  firm(ly),  thoroughly. 

^cft,  bag,  bic  -c,  celebration,  fes- 
tival. 

^cftuitflSflraficn,  ber,  bie  gcftuno^' 
grnben,  moat. 

S^cftttUfl^maucr,  bic,  bic  -n,  forti- 
fied wall. 

^\ii)it,  ber,  Fichte,  the  great 
German  philosopher, 

fid,  see  fallen. 


ftnbett 


307 


Prfttt(^fcit 


ftttbcn,  tonb,  gefunben  (l^aben),  to 

find,  §  180,  1. 
ftngcn,  see  fangen. 
%\tdf  ber,  bie  -e,  spot  {of  ink  or 

dirt,  etc.). 
ffet^ig,     industrious  (ly);     hard, 

§  173,  3  ;  am  -[ten,  218,  1 ;  aufg 

-fte,  §  218,  2. 
fltcl^en,  f(o!),  gefloljen  (jein),  to  flee. 
fltc^Ctt,   f(oB,  gefloffen   (jein),  to 

flow. 
flo!^,  see  ftic^en. 
I^Ittg,  hex,  bie  "c,  flying,  flight. 
f^(u§,  ber,  bie  ^e,  river. 
flitftcrn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  whisper. 
f^otgc,  bie,  bie  -n,  consequence. 
folgcn,  re^.  (fein),  with  dat.,  to 

follow,   §  166,   Note;    fotgenb, 

following, 
fjorm,  bie,  bie  -en,  form. 
fort,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  away. 
fort'ftt^rcn,  futir  fort,  fortgefal)ren 

(^aben),  to  continue,  §  233,  1 

and  §  180,  2. 
fort'ge^cn,  ging  fort,  fortgegangen 

(fein),  to  go  away. 
fort'fc^Ctt,  reg.,  sep.  (l^aben),  to 

continue,  §  233,  2. 
fortjttfa^rctt,  see  fortfa!)ren. 
^ragc,  bie,  bie  -n,  question. 
fragctt,  reg.  (tjaben),  to  ask,  §  15, 

2. 
f^ranffurt,  bo8,  Frankfort  (on  the 

Main) . 
%xani^ilvitVf      prop.      adj.    (of) 

Frankfort. 
^vantvdiS),  ba^,  beg  -8,  France. 
fjransofe,    ber,    beg   -n,    bie  -n, 

Frenchman. 
fransiifift^,  French. 


i^vaUf  bie,  bie  -en,  woman ;  wife ; 

Mrs. 
^xtinltin,  bag,  bie  — ,  lady ;  Miss. 
^rct^cit,  bie,  bie  -en,  freedom. 
frcmb,    strange,    §  271,  2;    ber 

^rembe,  beg  -ti,  bie  -it,  stranger. 
f^rcttttb,  ber,  bie  -e,  friend. 
^rcunbitt,   bie,  bie  -nen,   friend 

(woman). 
frcilttbltt^,  friendly;  kind. 
^reuttbft^aft,  bie,  bie  -en,  friend- 
ship. 
^riebrtt^,  ber,  Frederick. 
^rifi^c,    bie,    ber  — ,    freshness, 

vigor. 
frii^,  early,  soon ;  fritter,  sooner, 

before,  §  248,  2,  b. 
^vni)UnQ§Unmt,  bie,  bie  -n,  spring 

flower. 
fit^rctt,  see  fai)ren. 
fiil^rcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  lead  ;  of 

arms  (3Saffen),  to  bear,  wield  ; 

of  war  (^rieg),  to  wage ;   see 

also  burc^fiitjren,  to  put  through, 

carry  out. 
^ii^trcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  leader. 
fiinf,  five  ;  fiinft,  fifth, 
fiir,  for,  §109,  1;  hj,  etc..  §109, 

2. 
furt^tfiar,  fearful  (ly),  terribly. 
fiirj^tcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  fear ;  fic^ 

— ,  refl,ex.,  to  be  afraid,  of,  ttor 

with  dat. 
fitrd^tcrtiti^ft,  mos^-  terrible. 
^iirft,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  prince 

(appointive,    as    distinguished 

from  ber  ^rinj,  the  son  of  a 

king) . 
f^ilrftlit^feit,  bit*,  bie  -en,  prince, 

royalty. 


3ftt« 


308 


gelungen 


^tti  ber,  bic  "e,  foot ;  gu  — 
foot,  afoot. 


ga6,  see  gebcn. 

(^atcric',  bie,  bie  -n,  gallery. 

^ang,  ber,  bie  "e,  gait,  pace,  rate. 

gattj,  all,  whole,  entire,  §  113,  1. 

qaVf  at  all ;  in  fact. 

^avtcn,  ber,  bic  %  garden. 

^aftfrci^cit,  bie,  ber  — ,  hospi- 
tality. 

Qtathtittt,  see  arbeiten. 

gcbttbct,  see  Baben. 

©cftiittbc,  bog,  bie  — ,  building. 

gcficn,  Qah,  gegeben  (^aben),  er 
gibt,  to  give ;  eg  glbt,  there  is, 
§  85,  1 ;  njog  gtbt'g,  what's  up  ; 
see  also  gugeben. 

Qthxaii)t,  see  brlngen, 

gcfirauc^Ctt,  reg.,  insep.  (l)aben), 
to  use,  make  use  of. 

(SJeBuft^,  ha^f  bie  -e,  bushes. 

gcbat^t,  see  benfen, 

©cbanfc,  ber,  beg  -tig,  bie  -n, 
thought,  idea. 

gebaucrt,  see  bauern, 

(^t^l^t,  bog,  bie  -e,  poem. 

gcbrurft,  see  brudfeti. 

gccl^rt,  honored,  see  e^ren. 

gcfatten,  gefiel,  gefaUen  (I)aben), 
eg  gefaUt,  iciY^  dat.,  to  please  ; 
to  like,  §  76,  3. 

gcftcl,  see  gcfaUcn. 

gcfolgt,  see  folgen. 

gcfrttgt,  see  fragen, 

gcgaugctt,  see  ge^etx, 

gcgcficu,  see  geben. 

gcgcn,  against,  §  110,  1;  to, 
toward,  §  110,  2. 


©cgcttfa^,  ber,  bie  "e,  contrast. 

gcgtaubt,  see  glauben. 

gegritnbet,  see  griinben. 

gc^anbclt,  see  ^anbeln, 

©c^ctmrat,  ber,  bie  '^e,  secret 
councillor,  a  common  German 
title. 

gc^Ctt,  ging,  gegangen  (fein),  to 
go ;  eg  gef)t,  to  be,  §  206,  1 ;  see 
also  angel)en,  §  206, 2,  Note  and 
Oorbeige^en,  §  246,  4 ;  bag  ®e= 
^en,  going,  gait;  gum  gleid^en 
rid)tigen  ©e^en  gu  bringen,  to 
get  them  to  keep  together  cor- 
rectly. 

gc^ijrctt,  reg.,  insep.  (i)aben), 
loith  dat.,  to  belong  to. 

gcPrt,  see  \)'6xen  and  gepren. 

gcHagt,  see  flagen. 

gcfommctt,  see  fommen. 

Qttomii,  see  fonnen. 

gctangcn,  reg.,  insep.  (fein),  to 
arrive,  come. 

gclaffctt,  see  taffeii. 

^clb,  bag,  bie  -er,  money. 

gcfcfit,  see  leben. 

QtU^vtf  learned,  see  le^rett ;  ber 
®tU\)xtt,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  learned 
man. 

gelciftct,  see  letften. 

gclcrnt,  see  lerncn. 

QtVicht,  see  Ucben. 

gclingctt,  gctang,  gelungen  (fein), 
impers.  with  dat.,  to  succeed, 
§  180,  2. 

Qtlohtf  see  loben. 

gcltcn,  gait,  gegolten  (tjoben),  e« 
gilt,  usually  impers. ,  to  be  a 
question  of. 

gelungcu,  see  gcUngen. 


^tmaifit 


309 


fitctt^ 


^tmati)t,  see  mad)en. 

©cmalbe,  bag,  bie  — ,  painting. 

gemcinfain,  common. 

gcttttttttt,  see  nettnen. 

(DcttcraC,  ber,  bie  -e,  or  "e,  gen- 
eral. 

gcttttg,  enough. 

fiCttttgCtt,  reg'.,  ms^ip.  (^aben),  to 
suffice ;  geniigenb,  sufficient(ly). 

dJcorgc,  ber,  George  (in  German 
usually  @eorg')« 

gcrabc,  afZj.,  straight;  adv.,]\ist, 
exactly. 

gcraten,  gertet,  geraten  (feiu),  to 
get ;  ill  3orn  — ,  to  get  angry. 

©crei^tig^cit,  bie,  ber  — ,  justice. 

gcrcttct,  see  retten» 

(^tvi^tf  ba«,  bie  -e,  court  (of 
judgment). 

gcrirfjtct,  see  rirf)ten,  to  direct. 

gcrict,  see  geraten. 

gcrit,  Ueber,  am  liebften,  gladly, 
to  like  to,  §  76,  2  and  1. 

gcriiftct,  see  riiften. 

gcfagt,  see  fagen. 

OJcfattbtc,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -it, 
envoy,  ambassador. 

gcft^affctt,  see  fd^affen. 

gcft^c^ctt,  gefcf)a^,  gefc^e^eu  (fein), 
eg  geidjie^t,  im'th  dat.,  to  hap- 
pen;  eg  gef(i)ie^t  il)m  rec^t,  it 
serves  him  right. 

gcfd^citcrt,  see  jc!)eitern. 

gcft^Cttft;  see  fc^enfen. 

©cfc^ic^tc,  bie,  bie  -n,  story  ;  his- 
tory. 

gcfd^Iagcn,  see  f(i)tagen. 

©cfi^tci^t,  bag,  bie  -er,  race,  gen- 
eration. . 

gcfc^Ctt,  see  je^en. 


^cfcttc,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  jour. 

neyman,  companion. 
@cfcMf(^aft,  bie,  bie  -en,  company. 
C^cfc^,  bag,  bie  -e,  law. 
gcficgt,  see  ftegen. 
gef^Jtelt,  see  fpielen. 
geftcrft,see  ftecfen. 
gcftcrit,  yesterday ;    a  following 

noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 

without  a  capital :  geftern  abenb, 

geftern  nac^mittag. 
gcftorbctt,  see  fterben. 
gcMt,  see  jndjen. 
gcfwttgett,  see  fingen. 
getan,  see  tun. 
gctricbctt,  see  treiben. 
gemalttg,  mighty. 
gcttiartet,  see  n^arten. 
gettiijl)nctt  ftd^,  reflex.,  reg.,  insep. 

(Ijaben),  to  get  used,  to,  an  with 

ace;  getro^nt,  accustomed,  to, 

an  with  ace. 
gcttJO^ttt,  see  njo^nen. 
gcttJorbctt,  see  n)erben. 
gettiu|t,  see  rt)iffen. 
gift,    M    sing,     imperative,    see 

geben. 
Qlhtf  eg  — ,  there  is,  §  85,  1 ;  see 

geben. 
gilt,  see  gelten. 
gtttg,  gingen,  see  ge^en. 
gtangcttb,      gldnjenbft,    brilliant, 

most  brilliant. 
gJaufictt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  believe, 

think,    §  157,   1  and  Note  ;  to 

believe  in,  an  with  ace,  §  157, 

1,  Note  c. 
gleic^,  adj.,  alike,  equal,  the  same ; 

^u  -er  3^itf   ^*  o"®  ^^^  ^^^ 

same  time  ;  adv.,  at  once. 


gletfi^en 


310 


^au9 


with  dat.,  to  resemble,  §  76,  3, 
Note. 

glttrfltd^,  happy,  fortunate. 

gnabtg,  gracious ;  common  term 
of  address  to  ladies :  gnabigc 
grau,  gnobigeg  i^raulein. 

&ottt\C,  ber,  Goethe,  Germany's 
greatest  genius. 

gotbCtt,  golden. 

(^ott,  ber,  bie  ^er,  God,  god. 

^vamma'titf  bie,  bie  -en,  gram- 
mar. 

^xan,  gray. 

grcifctt,  griff,  gegriffen  (^abett), 
to  grasp ;  see  also  angreifen,  to 
attack. 

@rcti§,  ber,  be«  -eg  or  -en,  bie  -e 
or  -en,  the  old  man,  gray- 
beard. 

@ric(^if(i^(c),  bag,  beg  -en,  Greek. 

griff,  see  g  re  if  en. 

©rimm,  ber,  prop,  name,  Jakob 
Grimm,  probably  the  greatest 
philologist  Germany  ever  pro- 
duced. 

gro^,  grij^er,  grftfet/  large,  big, 
great,  greater,  greatest;  as 
noun,  @ro§eg,  great  things. 

(SJruft,  bie,  bie  H  (burial)  vault. 

^runb,  ber,  bie  H,  reason,  §  260. 

grilttbctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  estab- 
lish, found. 

^vn%  ber,  bie  "c,  greeting. 

grii^Ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  greet, 
send  regards  to,  with  ace. 

&nt,  bag,  bie  "er,  property ; 
estate. 

gut,  adj.,  good  ;  adv.,  well,  §  234, 
1. 


Gutenberg,  ber,  Gutenberg,   the 

inventor  of  printing,  §  131. 
gut'tnittig,  good-natured. 


ffahen,  ^atte,  gel)abt  (^abcn),  er 
^at,  to  have ;  often  translated 
by  English  past  when  used  as 
auxiliary;  see  §§  164,  165,  and 
167. 

^aI6,  half,  §  184,  2. 

^atftc,  bie,  bie  -n,  half,  §  184,  1. 

Ijaltcn,  ^ielt,  ge^alten  (l^aben),  er 
i)alt,  to  hold,  to  keep ;  fic^  — , 
reflex. ,  to  keep  oneself  ;  —  fiir, 
to  consider,  take  for,  §  157,  3 
and  §  183,  4  ;  to  take  (a  news- 
paper), §  183,  4. 

Hamburg,  bag,  Hamburg,  the 
second  largest  city  in  Germany. 

^0ttttittrg=5tmcrifa=fiinic,  bie,  the 
Hamburg-America  Line,  the 
world's  largest  steamship  com- 
pany. 

^anb,  bie,  bie  "e,  hand. 

^anbcl,  ber,  U^^  -g,  trade. 

^anbcltt,  reg.  (I)aben),  to  act. 

^anS,  ber,  John ;  Hans  Sachs, 
Germany's  greatest  master- 
singer,  §  116. 

^art,  hard,  §  173,  1. 

I^artttotfig,  obstinate. 

^offcn,  reg.  (^abcn),  to  hate. 

\)(ii,  see  fjaben. 

^ttttc,  I^Qtten,  see  ^abcn  (past 
subj.). 

^auftg,  frequent(ly). 

^tkxx^,  bag,  bie  ^ciufer,  house  ;  ju 
-e,  at  home ;  nad^  -c,  (to) 
home. 


^ebttiig 


311 


l^itt 


^cbttJtg,  bic,  Hedwig. 

^ccr,  ta^,  bie  -e,  army. 

^ccrfii^rcr,  hex,  bie  — ,  leader, 
general. 

^Cftig,  severe  (ly),  heavy. 

^cgel,  ber,  Hegel,  one  of  Ger- 
mcmy^s  greatest  philosophers, 

^CtKg,  holy. 

^timatf  bie,  bie  -en,  home. 

l^cimKi^,  secret(ly). 

^cittfiri^,  ber,  Henry. 

^ciratctt,  reg.  (i)ahen),  to  marry, 
§  51,  2. 

l^ci^Ctt,  ^ie^,  ge!^ei^en  C^aben),  to 
be  called,  §  49,  2  ;  to  be  (trans- 
lated), §  49,  2,  Note. 

l^ettcr,  cheerful  (ly). 

^clb,  ber,  bc8  -en,  bie  -en,  hero. 

^c(bcttgrei§,  ber,  beg  -eg  or  -en, 
bie  -e  or  -en,  heroic  old  man, 
old  hero. 

^clfcn,  ^alf,  gel^otfen  (^aben),  er 
I)itft,  with  dat.,  to  help,  §  39,  1. 

^clm^ol^,  ber,  Helmholtz,  one  of 
Germany'' s  great  physicists. 

l^er,  hither ;  denoting  motion 
toward  the  speaker,  not  trans- 
lated, §  149,  1  and  §  149,  2, 
Note  ;  following  an  ace,  ago, 
§  4,  Note  ;  ^in  unb  — ,  hither  and 
thither,  to  and  fro ;  see  also 
^erfaUen. 

^erangcttiod^fctt,  see  !^eranit)a(^fen. 

^cranttJat^fctt,  njud^S  Ijeran,  I^eran^ 
geh)ac{)fen  (fein),  er  n)d(i)ft 
l)eran,  to  grow  up. 

l^crattiSgcbctt,  gab  l^erong,  l)eraug= 
gegeben  (l)oben),  er  gibt  ^eroug, 
to  publish. 

^crau^gcgeficn,  see  ^erauggeben. 


l^eretn,  in  {toward  the  speaker)  ; 
— !  come  in  !  {in  answer  to  a 
knock  at  the  door). 

l|crcitt!ommctt,  font  tjerein,  ^erein^ 
gefomnten  (fein),  to  come  in. 

^crfattctt,  fiet  §er,  ^ergefaffen 
(fein),  er  foEt  l^er,  to  fall ;  iiber 
jentanb  ^erfaEen,  to  come  down 
hard  upon,  to  attack  severely. 

^ermatttt,  ber,  Hermann,  Ar- 
minius. 

^crmann§fd^(ad^t,  bie,  Hermann's 
Battle,  name  given  to  the  fight 
in  the  Teutohurg  Forest,  where 
Hermann  defeated  the  Eomans 
in  9  A.D. 

^txv,  ber,  beS  -n,  bie  -en,  gentle- 
man ;  sir ;  Mr.  ;  —  @ott.  Lord 
God,  the  Lord. 

^errfi^Ctt,  reg.  (^oben),  to  rule, 
reign. 

^crtttttcrgcjogctt,  see  ^ernnter* 
jie^en. 

^cruntcrstc^cn,  ^og  ^erunter,  f)er^ 
untergegogen  (^aben),  to  pull 
down. 

^crjog,  ber,  bie  -e  and  "e,  duke. 

^tMitf  to-day ;  a  following  noun 
is  written  as  an  adverb  without 
a  capital:  ^ente  abenb,  ^ente 
morgen. 

^tclt,  see  ^alten. 

^icr,  here  ;  compare  ha,  §  16,  2. 

^tc^,  see  ^ei^en. 

^itbcguttb,  bie,  Hildegund. 

^t(f,  pi'es.  imperative  from  \:)tU 
fen. 

I^itt,  denoting  motion  away  from 
the  speaker,  §  149,  1  and  §  149, 
2,  Note,  usually  not  translated  ^ 


!^tttabf(f)auen 


312 


^taKett 


—  unb  l^er,  to  and  fro,  hither 
and  thither,  §  149,  2. 

^tnab'ft^aucn,  reg.,  sep.  (l)abcn), 
to  look  down. 

Ijina^'ftciflCtt,  fticg  ^inab,  I)inab= 
gefticgcn  (fcin),  to  go  down,  de- 
scend. 

^tnettt,  in. 

^incinttttt,  tat  l^inein,  ^iticingctati 
(I)abeu),  to  put  in. 

^tngc^ctt,  gtng  I/in,  t)ingegangcn 
(fcln),  to  go  (away)  from  the 
speaker. 

^tttf^d^cn,  reg.,  sep.  (^abcn  or 
fcin),  to  spatter. 

l^inten,  at  the  back  or  rear,  be- 
hind. 

Winter,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  be- 
hind. 

l)ttttttt'tcrfiU(fctt,  reg.,  .sep.  (t)a- 
ben),  to  look  down. 

,^iftori!cr,  ber,  bie— ,  historian. 

l\oti),  {declined,  ^o^er),  \)'t\)tx,  am 
t)Oci)[tcn,  high,  higher,  highest. 

^or^a^tung,  bie,  bcr  — ,  esteem. 

I)od)a(l^tuttg§t)ott,  with  great  es- 
teem. 

^offctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  hope,  for, 
auf  with  ace. 

Pfltrf),  l)bflid^ft,  polite(ly),  most 
politely. 

^of)cit,  btc,  ber  — ,  highness; 
^aifcrlic^e  — ,  Imperial  High- 
ness. 

l^olctt,  reg.  (t)abcn),  to  get,  fetch, 
§  42,  2 ;  see  also  nod)l)olcn,  to 
make  up. 

^oljfc^mtt,  bcr,  bie  -e,  wood- 
cut. 

Pren,    reg.    (^aben),    to   hear, 


§  180,  1 ;  see  also  Quf^orcn,  to 

stop. 
^ofcntafrfjc,  bie,  bie  — ,  trousers 

pocket. 
^ottV,  ba8,  bie  -%,  hotel. 
^unbert,  hundred. 
^nt,  ber,  bie  H,  hat. 


^bcc,  bie,  bie  -n,  idea. 

t^m,  to  him  or  it,  dat.  of  er  or 
eg. 

t^tt,  him,  it  (9'iamen),  ace.  of  ex. 

^f^ntn,  you,  dat.  of  (Sic. 

i^nen,  to  them,  dat.  of  jie. 

S^r,  your. 

t!^r,  her,  their  ;  to  her,  dat.  of  fie, 
she  ;  you,  pron.  of2dpers.  plu. 

tm,  see  in  bem. 

tmmcr,  always. 

in,  in,  into,  to,  §  121. 

tnbem^  while  ;  for  English  verbal, 
§  189,  1. 

^nbttfhric',  bie,  bie  -n,  industry. 

^n(aut,  bcr,  bie  -e,  inlaut,  the 
middle  sound,  that  is,  not  at 
either  end,  of  a  word  or  syl- 
lable. 

xn^,  see  in  ba8. 

^nfrfirift,  bie,  bie  -en,  inscription. 

tutcrcffnut',  interesting. 

Siitcrcf fc,  ba«,  bie  -n,  interest, 
in,  fiir  with  ace. 

itttcrcffic'rcit  S^^t  reflex.,  interef= 
fiev'te,  intercjfiert'  (l)aben),  to  be 
interested,  in,  fiir  with  ace. 

intim',  intimate,  friendly. 

tft,  see  jein. 

^talien,  bas,  Italy. 


i« 


313 


mnxq 


fa,  yes  ;  by  all  means,  §  200,  1 ; 

why,  you  know,  §  200,  2. 
Stt^r,  bag,  bie  -e,  year. 
3>tt^r!^Utt'bcrt,  ta^,  bie  -e,  century. 
|c,  ever,  §  257,   1 ;  correl.,  jc  — 

befto,  the  —  the. 
jcbcr,  jebe,  itht^,  every,  each. 
jebod^,  yet,  but,  nevertheless. 
^tna,  ha^,  Jena. 

jcncr,  jene,  jeneg,  that,  §  211,  3,  b. 
jc^ig,   adj.,   of  now,   of  to-day, 

present. 
ft^tf  now. 
^o^amt,  ber,  John. 
Sugenb,  bie,  ber  — ,  youth. 
inm,  young. 
Sungling,  ber,  bie  -e,  young  man, 

youth. 


^atfcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  emperor, 
kaiser. 

^aiferfro«c,  bie,  bie  -it,  imperial 
crown. 

faifcrlid^,  imperial. 

tali,  cold. 

tam,  fomen,  see  fomnten. 

^am^f,  ber,  bie  H,  combat,  fight. 

fam^fcn,  reg.  (I)aben),  to  fight. 

^am^ff^tcl,  ta^,  bie  -e,  combat, 
gladiatorial  games. 

tanxif  can,  see  tonnen. 

tannttf  see  fennen. 

^atlt,  ber,  Kant,  one  of  Ger- 
many''s  greatest  philosophers. 

^avi,  ber,  Charles ;  —  ber  Oro^e, 
Charlemagne. 

^arlftra^c,  bie,  ber  — ,  Charles 
St. 


fttttfctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  buy. 

tanm,  hardly. 

fc^rtc,  see  juriicffeljren. 

feitt,  not  a,  not  any,  no,  none, 
§9. 

fcttttcn,  !annte,  gefannt  (^aben), 
to  be  acquainted  with,  know, 
§  58,  2 ;  to  get  acquainted 
with,  meet,  §  171,  2,  Note. 

^ittb,  ba^,  bie  -er,  child. 

^irt^c,  bie,  bie  -n,  church. 

tiaQtn,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  complain. 

Piaffe,  bie,  bie  -n,  class. 

^latt,  prop,  name,  Klatt. 

tkixtf  small,  little,  §  194,  1. 

^(ctttafictt,  ha^,  beg  -g,  Asia 
Minor. 

ftittgctt,  Hang,  geflungen  (tjaben), 
to  sound. 

^loftcr,  t>a^,  bie  ",  convent. 

tiUQ,  clever. 

^nahc,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  boy. 

^Obcrgcr,  bft:,  Anton  Koberger, 
a  printer  of  Nuremberg . 

^Od^,  ber,  Koch,  the  great  German 
scientist. 

^oltc'gin,  bie,  bie  -nen,  colleague 
(lady). 

^otoffcum,  ta^f  beg  -g,  colosseum, 
the  huge  amphitheatre  in  Borne, 
where  the  games  and  gladiato- 
rial combats  were  held. 

fomtncn,  tam,  gefommen  (fein), 
imperative,  fomni,  to  come  ;  to 
be  (fpcit,  late),  §  219,  2;  see 
also  anfommen,  to  arrive,  tjor* 
fomnteiT,  to  occur. 

^otn^ottift',  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en, 
composer  (of  music). 

^oniQ,  ber,  bie  -e,  king. 


^iJnigitt 


314 


laffeit 


^iltttgttt,  ble,  blc  -nen,  queen. 

^Ottig^&crg,  bag,  Konigsberg,  a 
city  in  northeast  Germany. 

fiittttcn,  fonntc,  gefonnt  (I)oben),  er 
fann,  to  be  able,  can,  §  76,  2 ; 
to  know  (how  to  do),  §  58,  3. 

fonntc,  fonute,  could,  see  tJ5n= 
neit. 

^onrab,  ber,  Konrad  or  Conrad, 
name  of  (1)  the  Franconian, 
the  predecessor  of  Henry  the 
Fowler,  §  54,  and  (2)  of  the 
Hohenstaufen  king  who  took 
Weinsberg,  §  91. 

^Ottftantino'licl,  ba^,  Constantino- 
ple. 

^oMcxiation^'hnti),  ba^,  bie  "er, 
conversational  manual. 

^opl  ber,  bie^e,  head. 

^ornbtnme,  ber,  bie  -n,  corn- 
flower, the  national  flower  of 
Germany;  a  conventionalized 
form  of  it  is  the' cover  design 
of  this  hook. 

^ornfclb,  bag,  bie  -er,  cornfield, 
field  of  grain.  ( Corn,  that  is, 
Indian  corn,  is  little  known  in 
Germany.) 

foften,  reg.  C^aben),  to  cost;  to 
be,  §  206,  2,  Note. 

fraftig,  strong. 

^tti^f  ber,  bie  -e,  circle. 

^reuj,  bag,  bie  -e,  cross. 

^rcujjng,  ber,  bie  ^reujjiige,  cru- 
sade. 

^ricg,  ber,  ble  -e,  war ;  —  fat)ren, 
to  wage  war  ;  —  erfldren,  to  de- 
clare war. 

fricg^bcrcit,  ready  for  war. 

^ricgiifuttft,  bie,  ble  H,  strategy. 


^rtcgSfd^au^ta^,  ber,  ble  H,  scene 
of  war. 

^ricm^tlbc,  bie,  Kriemhilde. 

^ronc,  bie,  bie  -n,  crown. 

fiimmcm,  reg.  (^aben),  to  bother ; 
fid^  — ,  reflex.,  to  care,  about, 
um  with  ace. ;  3Bag  fiimmert 
mid)  ble  9lul)e  ber  Soten?  What 
do  I  care  about  the  peace  of 
the  dead  ? 

^tnft,  ble,  ble  "e,  art. 

Mnfttcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  artist. 

fiinfttcrifd^,  artistic. 

^nnftfinn,  ber,  beg  -g,  artistic 
sense. 

^n^fcrftii^,  ber,  ble  -e,  etching. 

^nrfttrft,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en, 
elector,  §  192. 

fnrj,  short  (ly). 

^Ijff^ttttfer,  ber,  KyfEhauser, 
m,ountain  in  Thuringia,  where 
Barharossa  is  said  to  he  sleep- 
ing and  where  Germany  has 
erected  a  huge  monument  to 
Emperor  William  I,  who  re- 
stored the  German  Empire. 


labctt,   lub,   getaben  (l)aben),   er 

labet  or  Icibt,  to  load. 
Snnb,  bag,  bie  "er,  land,  country ; 

anf  bem  -e,  in  the  country. 
Sanbgraf,   ber,  beg  -en,  ble  -en, 

count. 
lang,   adj.,  longer,  long,  longer ; 

for,  §  6 ;   long  ere  ^tit,  rather 

long,  quite  a  while. 
lauge,   adv.,  a  long  time,  long, 

§  60,  2,  Note. 
laffctt,   Ile^,  gelafjen  (^aben),  er 


(aufett 


315 


mam 


la^t,  imperative^  ta^,  to  let ;  to 
have  (made  or  done),  §  68,  4. 

laufcti,  Uef,  gelaufen  (jein),  er 
Iduft,  to  ran. 

(ttttt,  lautcr,  loud,  louder. 

tcfictt,  reg.  (!^aben),  to  live,  exist, 
§  6,  2. 

ficbcn,  t>a^,  bic  — ,  life. 

2tbtn§iaf\t,  bag,  bic  -c,  year  of 
(his)  age. 

Icb^aft,  lively. 

Icgcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  lay ;  to 
put,  §  222,  2. 

ficgiott',  bic,  bic  -en,  legion,  a 
Boman  regiment. 

Scorer,  ber,  bie  — ,  teacher. 

ficid^c,  bie,  bic  -n,  corpse,  (dead) 
body. 

IctJ^t,  light,  easy. 

letb,  c8  tut  tnir  tcib,  I  am  sorry  ; 
tat'  mtr  leibc,  I  should  be  sorry 
for. 

(cibctt,  litt,  gctittcti  (^abcn),  to 
suffer;  to  stand,  §  221,  2. 

(ciftctt,  reg.  (^abcn),  to  accom- 
plish ;  SBibcrftanb  — ,  to  offer 
resistance. 

(crnctt,  reg.  (l^abcn),  to  learn, 
§  81 ;  to  study  {except  in  ad- 
vanced work,  when  ftubicren  is 
used) . 

Icfcn,  to8,  gclcfcn  (^abcn),  cr  Ucft, 
to  read. 

Ic^t,  last. 

2cittc,  bic  (pi),  people. 

Keb,  dear. 

Itcbctt,  reg.  C^abctt),  to  love. 

iithtx,  rather,  see  gent. 

fiicbnitg^bfume,  bic,  bie  -it,  favor- 
ite flower. 


Itcbtctt,  see  Uebctt. 

fiicb,  ha^,  bic  -er,  song. 

lief,  see  laufeit. 

Itcgctt,  lag,  gctcgcit  (^abeit),  to  lie ; 
to  be,  §  206,  2. 

lic^,  see  laffeit. 

Jitubcn,  ta^f  Linden,  a  city  near 
Hannover. 

Sinie,  bic  (three  syllables),  line. 

Sift,  bic,  bie  -en,  trick,  subter- 
fuge. 

litt,  see  Iciben. 

Slot)b,  ber,  Lloyd,  North  German 
Lloyd,  name  of  a  large  German 
steamship  company  with  head- 
quarters in  Bremen. 

lobctt,  reg.  (^abcn),  to  praise. 

lubett,  see  laben. 

Sttifc,  bie,  Luise,  Louise. 

Sutler,  ber,  Luther,  pronounced 
with  short  u  in  German. 

m 

tnar^Ctt,  reg.    (^aben),  to  make  ; 

to  do,  §  77,  1 ;  to  take,  §  183, 

3  ;  see  also  auSntac^en. 
9Wtt(^t,  bie,  bie  H,  power. 
SWabt^clt,  bag,  bic  — ,  girl. 
mag,  see  mogen. 
ma^lctt,  ma^lte,  gema'^len  (t)aben), 

to  grind  {of  corn). 
WaX,  ha^,  bie  -c,  (point  of)  time, 

§  50,  3. 
ntalctt,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  paint. 
SJlalcr,  ber,  bic  — ,  painter. 
9Jlalcm',  bie,  bic  -en,  (the  art  of) 

painting. 
man,  one,  they,  you,  we,  §  57. 
'Maww,  ber,  bie  "er,  man,  husband, 

§  19,  2. 


^atcnS 


316 


9Kitttcr 


9Jlorcu§,  ber,  Mark. 

Wlavte,  bie,  bic  -n,  sign,  trade- 
mark. 

Warttf  ber,  bic  "e,  market  (place) . 

mavitpla^,  ber,  bie  aJiarftpm^e, 
marketplace. 

aJlartitt,  ber,  Martin. 

2)lfl^,  bag,  bie  -e,  measure. 

9Watt*,  for  3Rott^au«,  ber,  beg 
SRatt^cii,  Matthew. 

SlflagiinUiatt,  ber,  Maximilian. 

mcl^r,  more  ;  rather,  §  218,  3. 

mcitt,  my,  mine ;  —  §err,  sir. 

mcittCtt,  reg.  (I)aben),  to  mean 
(of  persons) ;  to  think,  §  157, 1. 

^Jlctttttttfl,  bie,  bie  -en,  opinion ; 
mciner  —  nad),  in  my  opin- 
ion. 

mcift,  mo8t(ly)  ;  am  mciften, 
most(ly). 

mciften^,  mostly,  usually. 

SKciftcrfaitflcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  master- 
singer. 

5Jlcttfji^,  ber,  be8  -en,  bie  -en, 
man,  §  19,  1. 

mxtt\,  me,  see  id). 

SJltnncfdttncr,  ber,  bie  — ,  minne- 
singer, troubador. 

9Jltnutc,  bie,  bie  -n,  minute. 

mir,  to  me,  see  id). 

tttt^tjcrftaitbctt,  see  mi{3t)erfte^en. 

ttti^ucvftc^cn,  migDcrftanb,  mtB= 
oerftanben  (l)aben),  to  misun- 
derstand . 

tnit,  prep.,  with,  §  96;  adv., 
along  ;  §  247,  2 ;  sep.  prefix  as 
in  mitgeT)en,  mittcilcn. 

mitctttan'bcr,  with  one  another  or 
each  other. 

mttgc^cii,  fling  mil,  nutgegangen 


(fein),  to  go,  to  go  along  or 
with. 

mttnc^mcn,  na^m  mit,  tnitgenom^ 
men  (l)aben),  er  nimmt  mit,  to 
take  along. 

mtttetlen,  reg.,  sep.  (^abcn),  imth 
dat. ,  to  inform  ;  to  share  with. 

dMttiaUcv,  bag,  beg  -g,  the  Mid- 
dle Ages, 

tnittCtt,  adv.,  in  the  middle;  right 
(into,  etc.). 

mttjunc^mctt,  see  mitnef)men. 

m'6ii)tt,  should  or  would  like, 
§  266,  1,  see  mogen. 

monctt,  moc^te,  gemod)t  (t)aben), 
er  mag,  may,  §  76,  2 ;  to  like, 
§76,1. 

ntogltf^,  possible. 

^ommfen,  ber,  Mommsen,  one 
of  Germany's  greatest  histo- 
rians. 

Wlonat,  ber,  bie  -e,  month. 

9)Zorgcn,  ber,  bie  — ,  morning ; 
written  as  adverb  tcithout  a 
capital  after  geftern,  I)eute,  etc. 

morgen^  adv.,  to-morrow ;  auf  — , 
for  to-morrow. 

3Wofc,  ber,  Moses  ;  1  3D^ofe,  Gene- 
sis ;  2  Tto]e,  Exodus;  3  3Wofe, 
Leviticus  ;  4  SSflok,  Numbers  ; 
5  9)lofe,  Deuteronomy. 

9)l3fcr,  ber,  prop,  name,  Moser. 

^OHl)(c,  bie,  bic  -n,  mill. 

aWiiUcr,  ber,  bic  — ,  miller ;  prop. 
name,  Miller. 

miiffen,  mujjte,  gcmuf?t  (I)aben), 
cr  mu§,  to  have  to,  must,  §  68, 
3. 

mu^te,  see  milffcn. 

SRutter,  bic,  bic  ",  mother. 


na 


317 


of^nt 


n 

tttt,  excL,  well. 

nari^,  prep.,  after,  §  97,  2  and 
§  259,  2  ;  to  (of  places),  §  97,  1 ; 
according  to,  by,  §  97,  8  ;  sep. 
prefix,  Ttaci)^o(en,  to  make  up. 

^la^hav,  ber,  bc8  -§  ancZ  -n,  bie  -n, 
neighbor. 

nat^bem,  co/y.,  after,  §  259,  1. 

itttd^gcficn,  gab  ttad),  nadjocgeben 
(^aben),  er  gibt  noc^,  to  give  in, 
yield. 

na^^oUttf  reg.,  sep.  (t)aben),  to 
make  up  (work,  etc.). 

Ma(i)xx^t,  bie,  bie  -en,  news,  re- 
port. 

9?ot^ftc,  ber,  be8  -n,  bie  -n,  neigh- 
bor, superl.  of  na^,  near. 

tta(^'ff^(agcn,  fci)Uig  narf),  na(f)ge^ 
jd^lagen  (^aben),  er  f(f)tagt  nad), 
to  look  up  (zn  a  book,  etc.). 

^a^t,  bie,  bie  "e,  niglit. 

9?ac^ttgatt,  bie,  bie  -en,  nightin- 
gale. 

9lnrijtticft,  bie,  ber  — ,  posterity. 

nad)5U^oIcn,  see  Tiocl)t)oten. 

ttd^crn  fit^,  reflex.,  reg.  (^oben), 
with  dat.,  to  approach. 

9iamc,  ber,  beg  -ng,  bie  -n,  name. 

^^attott',  bie,  bie  -en,  nation. 

^Jationat'fittttttC,  bie,  bie  -n,  na- 
tional flower. 

natiir'ttji^,  of  course. 

'UaiMX'txtvit,  bie,  ber  — ,  natural- 
ness ;  exactness. 

ncfictt,  by,  beside,  §  122. 

9?cffc,  ber,  be8  -n,  bie  -n,  nephew. 

ncl^mctt,  na^m,  genommen  (^aben), 
er  nimmt,  to  take,  §  183  and  2, 
from,  dat. 


new,  no. 

ttcnnctt,  nannte,  genannt  (l^aben), 
to  call,  to  name,  §  49,  1. 

ItCtt,  new,  anew. 

tttJ^t,  not;  position  of,  §  37. 

ntd^tS,  nothing ;  a  following  ad- 
jective is  written  with  a  capital : 
nid)tg  @d)Ie(f)teg,  §  217. 

nic,  never. 

tticbcr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  down. 

tlic'bcrbiirfctt  fit^,  reflex.,  reg.  sep. 
(i)ahtn),  to  bend  down. 

ttic'bcrJnictt,  reg.,  sep.  (jein),  to 
kneel  down, 

ntcbcrfanf,  see  nieberfinfen. 

nicbcrfittfctt,  fan!  nieber,  nieber= 
gefnnfen  (jein),  to  sink  down. 

tticmatig,  never. 

no^f  yet,  still,  as  yet ;  more, 
another,  §  30,  2  ;  —  t»or,  even 
before  ;  sometimes  not  trans- 
lated, §  62  ;  before,  §  248,  2,  a. 

^onnc,  bie,  bie  -n,  nun. 

norbbcutft^,  adj.,  North  German  ; 
ber  9^orbbentfd}e,  be§  -n,  bie  -n. 
North  German  (man). 

mitt,  well,  §  234,  2  ;  now,  §  234,  2, 
Note. 

ttttt,  only,  §  185,  1,  a. 

'^ttvnhcvQ,  ta^,  Nuremberg. 


ohf  if,  whether. 
obcn,  above ;  upstairs. 
o^ttJOj)!,  although. 
obcr,  or. 

iJffttCtt,  reg.  (Ijaben),  tb  open. 
oft,  often. 

O^ttC,  without ;  with  infin. ,  §  181 ; 
with  clause,  §  190. 


o^ntnSd^tig 


318 


rcifctt 


ol^n'mad^ttg,  fainting,  uncon- 
scious. 

Ofjv,  bag,  bie  -en,  ear. 

Ovt,  ber,  bie  -e  or  Hx,  place,  §  150, 
1. 

Dftcrrct(^,  bag,  Austria. 

Otto,  hex,  Otto.     / 

* 

^aia^t',  ber,  bie  ^alcifte,  palace. 

^-Pa^Jtcr',  bag,  bie  -e,  paper. 

^avf,  ber,  bie  -e,  park. 

^orlamcttt',  ba^,  bie  -e,  parlia- 
ment, congress. 

^ani,  ber,  Paul. 

^JjSegni^,  bie,  Pegnitz,  the  river  on 
which  Nuremberg  lies. 

^ctriftr.,  ^:petriftra^e,  bie,  Petri  St. 

))flilrfctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  pluck, 
pick. 

^^itipp',  ber,  Philip. 

^ia\t,  ber,  bie  H,  plan. 

^la^,  ber,  bie  ^  square,  §  160,  2, 
a ;  room,  §  150,  2,  b ;  seat, 
§  160,  2,  c. 

^Iftnbcrn,  reg.  (I^aben),  to  plun- 
der, pillage. 

^JOli'tifrfi,  political. 

^^oftnat^na^mc,  unter  — ,  to  be 
collected  by  the  post  office, 
"C.  O.  D." 

^ot^bam,  baS,  Potsdam. 

pva^tt>oUf  splendid(ly),  magnifi- 
cent(ly). 

prnftifc^,  practical. 

^-Prcbiflcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  preacher; 
—  @aIomoni8,  (Bible),  Ecclesi- 
astes. 

^rcti8,  ber,  bie  -e,  price  ;  prize. 

^rcffc,  bie,  bie  -n  (printing)  press. 


^rcu^cn,  bag,  Prussia. 
^Jrcu^ift^,  Prussian. 
^rinj,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  prince, 
^rofcf'for,   ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ^ro- 
feffo'ren,  professor. 

a 

CueUe,    bie,  bie  -n,  spring  (of 
water). 

?fiat,  ber,  bie  "e,  advice. 
JHat^au^,  bag,  bie  "er,  city  hall. 
O*ioubcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  robber. 
rct^nctt,  reg.   (^aben),  to  count, 

on,  auf  with  ace. 
fUtiiftf  bag,  bie  -e,  right,  privilege. 
Vt^t,  right  (morally),  §  172,  1 ; 

red^t  I)aben,  to  be  right,  §  172, 

1,  b. 
D^lcbc,   bie,  bie  -n,  speech;   9Jebe 

baften,  to  make  a  speech.    . 
rcbcn,    reg.     (I)aben),    to    talk, 

speak,  §  270,  2. 
Dlcgcl,  bie,  bie  -n,  rule. 
rcgdma^ig,  regular. 
rcgic'rctt,   regier'te,  regiert'   (^a» 

ben),  to  rule,  reign. 
9{egterung,  bie,   bie  -en,  govern- 
ment. 
dtcxtf^,  bag,  bie  -e,  empire. 
rei(^en^  reg.  (l^aben),  to  pass,  to 

hand  to,  §  246,  1. 
9{ei(^tum,    ber,    bie  "ex,   wealth, 

richness. 
^tif^t,    bie,    bie  -n,  row ;    line ; 

turn;   an  tnern   ift    bie    9Jeil)e, 

whose  turn  is  it  ? 
JRcifc,  bie,  bte  -n,  trip,  journey. 
rei^en,   ri^,  geriffen  (^aben),  to 

snatch,  tear. 


dttittn 


319 


Sj^ittcr 


^IcitCtt,  bag,  be§  -§,  riding. 

ditliQion',  bie,  bie  -en,  religion. 

Otcft,  ber,  bie  -e,  rest,  remainder. 

rcttCtt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  rescue, 
save. 

rtc^tcn,  reg.  (()aben),  to  direct. 

rid^tig,  riglit,  correct,  §  172,  2. 

ricf,  see  rufen. 

Sfiicfc,  ber,  be^  -n,  giant. 

CiiefcttftonbBttb,  bie  -er,  gigantic 
or  colossal  statue. 

I^tefig,  gigantic. 

dtltttVf  ber,  bie  — ,  knight. 

dlod,  ber,  bie  "e,  coat. 

91o(anb^  ber,  Roland,  nephew  of 
Charlemagne  ;  Roland  column, 
emblem  of  civic  liberty,  §  72. 

Ofiolttttbfatttc,  bie,  bie  -n,  Roland 
column,  §  72. 

9?o(attb§6o8cn,  ber,  be6  -8,  Ro- 
land's arch,  a  ruin  on  the 
Bhine. 

Siom,  ha^,  Rome. 

OfJiimcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  Roman. 

riimifrfl,  Roman. 

JKontgctt,  ber,  Rontgen,  one  of 
Germany'' s  great  scientists^  dis- 
coverer of  the  X-ray. 

voi,  red. 

O^iotbart,  ber,  Redbeard,  Barba- 
rossa. 

dtMcn,  ber,  bie  — ,  back. 

dtMhllV,  bie,  ber  — ,  return. 

D^lubotf,  ber,  Rudolph. 

riifctt,  rief,  gerufen  (^aben),  to 
call,  cry  out ;  see  also  ougnifen, 
to  cry  out,  call  out. 

JRttljC,  bie,  ber  — ,  rest,  peace. 

ru^en,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  rest. 

xn\}XQ,  calm(ly),  quiet(ly). 


ruftCtt,   reg.  (^aben),  to  prepare 

for  war. 
riifttg,  hearty,  hale. 

<B 
®a(^C,    bie,    bie   -n,    affair;    pi. 

things. 
(Ba^^,  ber,  Hans  Sachs. 
©at^fett,  bag.  Saxony. 
Sage,   bie,   bie  -n,  saga,  saying, 

myth,  tale. 
fagctt,   reg.  (^aben),  to  say ;    to 

tell. 
fa^,  jal)en,  see  fe!)ett. 
®ttIomo,  ber,  Solomon ;   ^rebiger 

-nig,  Ecclesiastes. 
fanbtc,  see  fenben. 
fangctt,  see  fingen. 
©anger,  ber,  bie  — ,  singer. 
SangcrJrieg,  ber,  bie  -e,  singer's 

contest. 
©attltcmann,  prop,  name,  Sanne- 

mann. 
fa^,  faffen,  see  fi^en. 
<Ba^f  ber,  bie  "e,  sentence. 
ft^affctt,  jrf)nf,  gefd)affen  (^aben), 

to  accomplish  ;  to  create. 
©d^attctt,  ber,  bie  — ,  shadow. 
f(^a^Ctt,  reg.  (!)aben),  to  esteem, 

to  rate. 
fri^ettcrtt,  reg.  (!)aben  and  fein),to 

shipwreck,  to  founder. 
fj^Ctt!ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  give,  to 

present. 
ft^cr^cn,   reg.   (!)aben),  to  joke ; 

fci)er;5enb,  joking(ly). 
ft^Cttd^cn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  frighten 

away,  scare. 
@t^iff,  bag,  bie  -e,  ship. 
©J^ittcr,  ber,  Schiller,  07ie  of  Ger- 


<B^latiit 


320 


feniH 


many'^s  greatest  poets  and 
dramatists. 

©c^tat^t,  bie,  tie  -en,  battle. 

©d^taf,  ber,  beg  -e8,  sleep. 

ft^tafcn,  fci)Ucf,  gcjdjiafen  (^abcn), 
er  fc})(dft,  pas«  sm6j.,  jd^ticfe,  to 
sleep. 

fe^lagctt,  fcf)tug,  gefdilagen  (t)abcn), 
er  f(J)(agt,  to  beat,  defeat ;  to 
strike,  hit ;  see  also  iiad)fd^ta= 
gen,  to  look  up  {in  a  book). 

f(^Iattf,  slender. 

f(^tcr^t,  bad(ly). 

fj^Kcfe,  see  jd)Iafen. 

fti^lic^cn,  f^to^,  gejd)(offen  (l)a= 
ben),  to  shut. 

ft^ttcf?at^,  finally. 

©t^tofe,  t)a^,  bie  "er,  castle  ;  lock. 

f(^(ug,  see  fci)Iagen. 

©i^Iu^,  ber,  bie  "e,  end,  close. 

ft^mad)tCtt,  reg.  (^aben),'to  pine, 
for,  nad)  with  dat. 

fc^ncH,  fast,  swift(ly),  quick (ly). 

f(^iJn,  fc^bnft,  beautiful,  most 
beautiful. 

f(i^on,  already ;  all  right,  never 
fear,  §  128,  2;  sign  of  con- 
tinued action,  §  228,  2  and 
Note ;  sometimes  omitted  in 
translation,  §  128,  1. 

©(^O^JCn^ttttcr,  ber,  Schopenhauer, 
one  of  Germany'' s  great  philoso- 
phers. 

fr^iJpfCH,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  drink, 
quaff ;  i^erbac^t  fd)opfen,  to  en- 
tertain suspicion. 

ft^rcibcn,  fd)rieb,  gefd)riebcn  (l)a-- 
ben),  to  write ;  ba^  @d)reiben, 
be8  -«,  writing  (of  a  letter, 
etc.). 


^ttjvkh,  see  f(^retben. 

©thrift,  bie,  bie  -en,  (hand)writ- 

ing,  script. 
Sti^ttl^,  ber,  bie  -e,  shoe. 
St^ulc,  bie,  bie  -n,  school. 
©(filler,  ber,  bie  — ,  pupil. 
fr^Wrirmen,  reg.   (t)aben),  to  be 

enthusiastic,  to  be  wild,  about, 

fiir. 
fc^ttiars,  black. 
^djWtv,    heavy ;    of  work,   hai'd, 

§  173,  2. 
(Sd^tticrt,  bag,  bie  -er,  sword. 
ft^ttior,  see  jc^rtJoren. 
fr^ttiijrcn,  jd)tt)or,  gefc^moren  (t)a- 

ben),  to  swear,  to  take  oath. 
fcd)5ig,  sixty. 
fe^en,  fa^,  gejetjen  (^aben),  er  jte^t, 

to  see,  §  180,  1 ;  gn  fe^en,  to  be 

seen,  §  204,  2,  Note. 
fe^nen  fic^,  reflex.,  reg.  (l)aben), 

to  long,  for,  nad^  with  dat. 
fcl^r,    very,    much;    jo    je^r,    so 

much. 
fci,  feien,  pres.  subj.  of  feln  ;  jeib, 

imperative  second  plural  of  fein. 
(Scibc,  bie,  bie  -n,  silk. 
jcin,  wax,  gewefen  (jein),  id)  bin, 

to  be  ;  as  aux.,  to  have,  §§  164, 

166,  and  167;   eS   ift,  there  is, 

§  85,  2. 
fcitt,  his,  its. 
fcit,  prep.,  since,  §  98,  1 ;  for,  in, 

§  98,  2  ;  conj.,  since. 
fcttbem,  adv.,  since  (then). 
Scitc,  bie,  bie  -n,  side ;  jur  @eite, 

by,  at  one's  side,  aside  ;  page 

{of  a  book). 
fclbcr,  self,  selves,  §  196,  2. 
fclbft,  intensive pron..,&Q\i,  selves, 


fcftctt 


321 


ftanb 


§  196,  2  ;  adv.,  even,  §  196,  2, 
Note. 

fdtCtt,  seldom. 

fettfam,  strange,  §  271,  1. 

Scna'tor,  ber,  bie  ©enato'rcn,  sen- 
ator. 

fcttbctt,  fanbtc,  gcfanbt  (^aben),  to 
send;  it  is  a  bit  more  formal 
than  fdjicfen. 

fc^Ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  set;  to 
put,  §  222,  3  ;  fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to 
sit  down,  §  18,  2  ;  see  also  fort= 
fe^en,  to  continue,  §  233,  2. 

fcttfjctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  sigh. 

fid),  reflex,  pron.  dat.  or  ace, 
self,  selves,  §  196,  1  ;  sometimes 
omitted  in  translation,  §  12, 
line  4. 

ftc,  she  ;  they. 

<Bk,  you. 

ftcbctt,  seven. 

ficbjC^^tt,  seventeen. 

®icg,  ber,  bie  -e,  victory. 

fiegen^  reg.  (^aben),  to  conquer, 
intrans. 

Stcgfricb,  ber,  Siegfried,  the 
young  hero  of  German  myth. 

ficgrcij!^,  rich  in  victories,  victo- 
rious. 

fic^t,  see  fc^en. 

fittb,  see  fein. 

fingcit,  jong,  gejungen  (^aben),  to 
sing. 

(Sitttt,  ber,  bie  -e,  sense  ;  thought, 
idea. 

SinnbUb,  ta^,  bie  -er,  emblem, 
token. 

fi^Ctt,  \a%,  gefeffen  (l)oben),  to  sit, 
§  18,  1. 

fo,  so,  then,  §  26,  1  ;  omitted  in 


translation  ichen  at  the  begin- 
nitig  of  a  conclusion,  §  255. 

fobalb',  conj.,  as  soon  as. 

<Bo(ttif  ber,  bie  — ,  base,  pedestal. 

fogar',  in  fact. 

fuglci^',  at  once. 

@o^tt,  ber,  bie  -e,  son. 

fold^,  such ;  so. 

©otbat',  ber,  be«  -en,  bie  -en,  sol- 
dier. 

foHctt,  reg.  (^oben),  ic^  foil,  ought 
to;  shall,  should,  §  69,  2 ;  to 
be  (about)  to  ;  Sag  foil  benn 
ta^-?  What  do  you  mean  by 
that  ? 

<Sotnmcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  summer. 

fonbcrtt,  but  (rather),  §  43,  2. 

fonft,  else,  besides,  §  30,  1,  Note. 

forgcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  care,  for, 
fiir. 

S^anictt,  bag,  Spain. 

f^arfamcr,  more  saving. 

\pdt,  fpdter,  late,  later,  §  219,  2. 

fpOJtcrctt  gc^Ctt,  to  go  walking; 
f^oj^ieren  fal^ren,  to  go  driving, 
§  180,  1. 

Bpitlf  bag,  bie  -e,  play. 

f^tclcn,  reg.  (t)oben),  to  play ;  to 
play  the  part  of. 

@pi^c,  bie,  bie  -n,  point ;  an  ber 
— ,  at  the  head, 

Bpva^Cf  bie,  bie  -n,  language. 

f^jrat^ctt,  past  subj.  of  fprecl)en. 

f^rct^ctt,  fprac^,  gefprod)en  (^a- 
ben),  er  fpric!^t,  to  speak,  talk, 
§  270,  1 ;  to  see,  §  270,  1,  Note. 

Biaat,  ber,  bie  -en,  state. 

<Btaht,  bie,  bie  H,  city  ;  in  bie  — , 
to  town. 

ftanb,  see  fte^en. 


<Stonb6i(b 


322 


tattnioS 


Stanbbtib,  bag,  bie  -cr,  statue. 

ftaxhf  see  fterben. 

ftarf,  adj.,  strong;  adv.,  hard, 
§  173,  4. 

ftarfctt,  reg.  (^abeit),  to 
strengthen. 

©tattc,  bie,  bic  -it,  locality. 

ftcrfctt,  reg.  (t)abcn),  to  put,  stick, 
§  222,  4. 

fte^ctt,  ftattb,  gcflonben  (t)abcn),to 
stand,  §  221,  1  ;  to  be,  §  206,  2. 

©tcHe,  bie,  bie  -n,  place,  passage, 
§  150,  3. 

ftcHcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  put  (up- 
right), stand,  §  222,  1  ;  to  ask 
(questions),  §  15,  2,  Note  ;  to 
set  (clocks),  §  222,  1,  Note  ;  to 
place,  rank,  §  214,  line  4. 

Stcttung,  bie,  bie  -en,  place,  posi- 
tion, §  150,  4. 

ftcrbctt,  ftarb,  geftorben  (fein),  er 
ftirbt,  to  die. 

ftctig,  always. 

<Btiii),  ber,  bie  -e,  sting,  prick ;  im 
@ti(i)(e)  laffcn,  Ue^,  gelaffen 
(^aben),  er  Id|3t,  to  leave  in  the 
lurch. 

Sttcf e(,  ber,  bie  — ,  boot ;  shoe. 

fttW,  still,  quiet. 

ftimmen,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  be  in 
tune  ;  ba«  ftimmt,  that's  right, 
§  172,  2,  Note. 

ftotj,  proud,  of,  auf  with  ace. 

(Stra^c,  bie,  bie  -n,  street;  see 
§  299. 

ftrcitctt,  [tritt,  geftritteu  (l)aben), 
to  quarrel. 

Stro^mitwc,  bie,  bie  -n,  grass 
widow. 

Stttbent',   ber,  be«  -en,  bie  -en, 


student,  at  a  college  or  univer- 
sity. 

flttbic'ren,  ftubter'te,  ftubicrt'  (t)a^ 
ben),  to  be  a  student,  to  study 
(advanced  work);  compare 
ternen. 

Stuttbc,  bie,  bic  -n,  hour ;  lesson, 
§  109,  2,  Note. 

ftunbenlang,  for  hours. 

fttt^cn,  reg.  (^oben),  to  seek,  to 
look  for,  §  7  ;  to  try. 

Subomcrifa,  ba§.  South  America. 

fiibbctttf(^,  South  German ;  ber 
©iibbeutfd^e,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  the 
South  German  (citizen). 

©ttlttttt,  ber,  bie  -e  (both  syllables 
accented  equally),  sultan. 


^actttt§,  ber,  Tacitus,  a  Boman 
historian,  who  wrote  a  work^ 
Germania,  on  the  Germans  of 
his  time. 

Xag,  ber,  bie-e,  day  ;  iiber  a(f)t  -e, 
a  week  from. 

tagctt,  reg.  ({)abcn),  to  meet  in 
council ;  compare  ber  ^ieic^ftog, 
meeting  of  the  council  of  the 
realm,  parliament,  congress. 

Xannpufer,  ber,  Tannhauser,  an 
opera  by  Wagner. 

ta^fcr,  brave,  bold. 

Xnfc^c,  bie,  bie  -n,  pocket. 

Xnt,  bie,  bic  -en,  deed  ;  in  ber  — , 
in  fact. 

totcn,  tcite,  past  ind.  and  subj.  of 
tun. 

taitnio&f  without  deeds,  imprac- 
tical ;  ber  latcntofe,  visionary, 
dreamer. 


tatcttretd^ 


323 


ii^ercmftimittcn 


tattnvd^,  rich  in  deeds;  ber 
2:atenrei(!)e,  be§  -u,  bic  -n^  man 
who  has  accomplished  much. 

Satfa(^c,  bie,  bie  -n,  fact. 

taugCtt,  reg.  (^oben),  to  amount 
to. 

icitcn,  see  mittcilen. 

tctlna^m,  see  teilne^mcn. 

tcitttc^mctt,  nal)m  teit,  tei(genom= 
men  (Ijaben),  er  nimmt  teit,  to 
take  part,  in,  an  with  dat. 

^cle^^Ott,  bag,  bie  -e,  telephone. 

%t\iamtni,  'ba^,  bte  -e ;  bag  yjene 
— ,  the  New  Testament. 

tcttcr,  tencrfte,  precious,  valuable  ; 
most  precious. 

%t\x\z\,  ber,  bie  — ,  devil. 

^^cutofiurgcr,  adj.,  (of)  Teuto- 
burg. 

%y)*f  abbreviation  for  Thomas  or 
Theodor. 

%\)taitx,  t>a^,  bie  — ,  theater. 

%ii)vn}X,  ber,  bte  -e,  throne. 

^^iirtttgctt,  \iCi^,  Thuringia,  a 
group  of  small  states  in  the 
most  picturesque  part  of  cen- 
tral Germany. 

ticfficttJCgt,  deeply  moved. 

%\\xit,  bte,  bte  -n,  ink. 

S^ttttcnfa^,  ^a^,  bte  ''er,  inkstand, 
inkwell. 

%\\^,  ber,  bte  -e,  table. 

Xitel,  ber,  bte  — ,  title. 

%9'^,  ber,  bte  -e  or  jlobegfoEe, 
death. 

ioi,  dead  ;  bte  jToten,  the  dead. 

tiitcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  kill. 

tragctt,  trug,  getragen  (^aben),  er 
trcigt,  to  bear,  carry  ;  to  wear. 

%xa\\l,  tix,  bte  H,  potion,  drink. 


txdi,  see  treten. 

iX(iMX\%  sad(ly). 

ttreffctt,  traf,  getroffen  (^aben),  er 
trtfft,  to  meet,  §  171,  1 ;  to  hit. 

trcifiett,  trteb,  getrteben  (^aben), 
to  drive  ;  to  work  at,  study. 

trcnncn,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  separate, 
divide. 

2^rcttt0tt,  ha%,  Trenton. 

treten,  trat,  getreten  (jetn),  er 
trttt,  to  go ;  to  step ;  see  also 
anftreten,  to  step  up,  to  appear 
{on  the  stage) ;  juructtreten, 
to  step  back. 

treu,  faithful. 

Xrcue,  bte,  fidelity. 

trotfcil,  dry. 

trug,  see  tragen. 

Xrugbtlb,  ^^a^,  bte  -er,  illusion, 
phantasy. 

%x\xni,  ber,  bte  H,  drinking. 

Xrup^,  ber,  bie  -g,  troop  {of  sol- 
diers). 

%\x6)f  )ia^,  bte  "er,  cloth. 

ttttt,  tat,  getan  (^aben),  to  do, 
§  77,  2;  to  put,  §222,  5;  Uxh 
tun,  with  dat.,  to  hurt ;  tdt' 
mtr  tetbe,  I'd  be  sorry  for. 

U 

iiben,  reg.  (^aben),  to  practise. 

iifeer,  over,  above,  §  123,  1 ;  about, 
§  123,  2  and  §  193,  1 ;  by  way 
of,  §  123,  2,  Note;  from  {to- 
day, etc.),  §  123,  2,  Note. 

ttbcraH',  everywhere,  all  over. 

iificrar'bcitett  fid),  reg.,  insep.  (^o^ 
ben),  to  overwork. 

ilberftringcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  bearer. 

iifiercitt'ftimmeit,  reg.,  sep.    (^a= 


ikhtvqab 


324 


tierbrai^te 


ben),    to    agree,    with,    mit, 

§  232,  1. 
iibcrgab',  see  iibergeben. 
U'ficrgafic,  bie,  bie  -ti,  surrender. 
itbcrgc'ftcn,  iibergab',  iiberge'ben 

(^aben),  er  iibcrgibt',  to  give 

over,  intrust. 
&htv\}anpt'f  at  all,  anyv^^ay,  §  160. 
iibcrlc'gctt,  adj.,  superior,  to,  dat. 
iibcrfct'jcn,  reg.,  insep.  (t)aben), 

to  translate,  §  154,  2,  Note. 
ii'bcrfc^cn,  re^.,  scp.  (^aben),  to 

ferry  over,  put  across,  §  164,  2, 

Note. 
flficrfct'Sttttg,  bie,  bie  -en,  transla- 
tion. 
il6crtrcf'fcn,  iibertraf,  iibertrof':= 

fen   (Ijaben),    er  iibertrifft',  to 

surpass,  excel. 
iificrtrifft',  see  iibertref'fen. 
iiBcrsctt'gcn,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 

to  convince. 
Ufcr,  bag,  bie  — ,  shore. 
U^r,  bie,  bie  -en,  watch,  clock, 

§    169,    1;    time,   §   50,  4  and 

§  169,  2 ;  o'clock,  §  50,  4  and 

§  169,  2. 
ttW,  around,  about,  §  111,  1  and 

§193,  1;  for,  §111,  2;  at,  §111, 

3 ;  with  infin.  and  gu,  in  order 

to,  §  197,  2,  Note. 
umfttf  feu,  reg.,  insep.  (i)aben),  to 

include. 
umgc'ben,  umgab',  umge'ben  (^o- 

ben),  er  umgibt,  to  surround. 
ttmftrirf'Ctt,  reg.,  insep.   (l)aben), 

to  insnare. 
Umlaut,  ber,  bie  -c,  umlaut,   as- 
similation   of    a    vowel    to   i, 

§  322  ;  usually  represented  by  ". 


uut'sic^cn  fic^,  gog  fid)  nm,  ftd)  um» 
gegogen  (^aberi),  to  change  one's 
clothes. 

uubcficgt,  unconquered. 

uub,  and. 

uugcfa!l)r,  about,  §  193,  2. 

uugcftraft,  unpunished. 

Ituiwcrfitiit',  bie,  bie  -en,  univer- 
sity ;  auf  ber  — ,  at,  of  students  ; 
an  ber  — ,  at,  of  professors. 

ttumijg'ltj^,  impossible. 

uui^,  us,  see  njir. 

uufcr,  our. 

UUtcr,  under,  among,  §  124. 

uu'tcrbriugcu,  bracf)te  unter,  un- 
tergebrac^t  (^aben),  to  shelter, 
protect. 

nnitvntf)'mtn,  unternat)m',  nnter- 
nom'men  (t)aben),  er  unter= 
nlmmt,  to  undertake. 

uutcrftiit'jcu,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
to  support,  help. 

uuterttJcr'fcu,  nntermarf,  unter» 
iuor'fen  (l)aben),  er  unterhjirft', 
to  subjugate,  subdue,  conquer. 

UUtJCrttJUUb'bttr,  invulnerable. 

Uttiuibcrftc^'Iit^,  irresistible. 

S^ttru^,  ber.  Varus,  a  Boman  gen- 
eral binder  Augustus. 

i<afc,  bie,  bie  -n,  vase. 

SJtttcrlaub,  ba<^,  bie  iiJaterlonber, 
fatherland,  native  land. 

^cili^cu,  ta^,  bie  — ,  violet. 

tjcrau'ftnltcu,  reg.,  insep.  (1)0^ 
ben),  to  get  up,  plan,  arrange, 
§  103. 

Ucrbiublit^,  obliging,  courteous. 

ucrlirad)te,  see  uerbringen. 


ticrBrcttcn 


32e5 


uerjct^ctt 


tJerBrciten  fiti^,  reflex.,  reg.,  insep. 

(^aben),  to  spread. 
ticrfiritt'gctt,  tjcrbrodj'te,  t)erbracf)t' 

(^aben),  to  pass  (time),  §  246, 

3. 
S^erbat^t,  ber,  beg  -S,  suspicion ; 

— ^  fi^opfen,  to  entertain  suspi- 
cion. 
tierbcrbctt,  oerbarb,  oerborben  (f)a> 

ben),  cr  uerbtrbt,  to  spoil. 
tjerbrangctt,  re^.,  msep.  (^aben), 

to  crowd  out. 
tJcrc^rctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^oben),  to 

honor     exceedingly ;     tiere^rt, 

most  honored,  revered. 
tJCrcittCtt  fi(^,  reg.,  insep.  (fjabcn), 

to  unite ;  bereint,  united. 
ticrcintgcn,  reg.,  insep.   (^aben), 

to  unite,  join  together  ;  fid)  — , 

reflex.,  to  join  hands,  unite. 
ttcrfolgctt,  reg.,  insep.  (t)aben),  to 

persecute. 
ticrgaffc,  past  subj.  of  ocrgeffen. 
ttcrgcBcn^,  in  vain^ 
tie^cfctt,      Derging,      tjergangcn 

(fein),  to  pass  (of  time),  §  246, 

2 ;  fief)  — ,  reflex. ,  to  go  astray  ; 

ftd^  —  gcgcn,  to  insult. 
ticrgcffcn,  tjerga^,  oergcffen  (^a* 

ben),  er  t)ergi^t,  to  forget. 
titVQitiQf  see  t)erge^en. 
SJcrgnitgctt,  ha^,  bic  — ,  pleasure. 
tjcr^eiratctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 

to    marry,   give    in    marriage, 

§  51,  1 ;  firf)  — ,  to  get  married. 
tierjagen,  reg.,  insep.  (I)aben),  to 

drive  out,  expel,  repel. 
ticr!attfctt,  reg.,  insep.  ({)aben),to 

sell. 
25cr!c^r,  ber^  bc8  -8^  traific. 


tJcrfaffen,  berlie^,  tocrloffen  C^a* 
ben),  er  bertci^t,  to  leave  (ac- 
tive); fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  rely, 
upon,  auf  with  ace. 

^erlcgcttl^eit,  bte,  ber  — ,  embar- 
rassment. 

ticrtet^ctt,  dertie^,  berlieljen  (^a= 
ben),  to  bestow. 

S^crlcumbcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  calumni- 
ator. 

tjerltc'rett,  bertor',  t)erlo'ren  (^a-- 
ben),  to  lose. 

SBcrloBtc,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n, 
fianc6. 

ticrlorfcnb,  enticing. 

ticrlor,  see  tjertieren. 

ticrtttt^tctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
to  destroy,  wipe  out. 

tJcrft^trfctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
to  send  (away). 

Dcrfd^ttiattb,  see  oerfi^rtiinben. 

Ucrfd^ttJtttbctt,  oerjc^rt)anb,  ber- 
fd^njnnben  (fein),  to  disappear. ' 

ticrfcl)Ctt,  berfat),  t)erfe^en  (^aben), 
er  berftel)t,  to  supply. 

Derfpreri^en,  Derjprad^,  berjprodien 
C^aben),  er  oerf|)rirf)t,  to  prom- 
ise ;  ftd)  — ,  reflex. ,  to  misspeak. 

t>crftcI)Ctt,  Derftanb,  berftanben  (^a^ 
ben),  to  understand. 

Serftti!^',  ber,  bie  -e,  attempt. 

ticrMctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
try,  attempt. 

tJCrtticrtcn,  reg.,  insep.  (baben), 
to  apply,  put  to  use. 

ticrttittftctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
to  lay  waste,  devastate. 

dcrjct^Ctt,  tjerjie'^,  tterjiel^en  (l)a:= 
ben),  with  dat.,  to  pardon,  for- 
give. 


tjcrsmctfclt 


326 


aSartburg 


dcr^hJCifctt,    in   despair,    desper- 

ate(ly). 
titer,  much  ;  pl.^  many. 
tJtcttcid^t',  perhaps ;  may,  §  75,  3. 
SJtcrtct,  hCL^,  bie  — ,  quarter;  brct 

33ierte(  etn8,  quarter  to  one. 
titcrttttbftcfisigft,  seventy-fourth. 
tiicruttbjrtianstg,  twenty-four. 
^OflCl,  bcr,  bie  '^,  bird. 
Sogclfnttg,    ber,  bie   SSogelfcinge, 

bird  snaring ;  auf  bent  — ,  fowl- 
ing. 
S^ogclttictbc,  bie,  prop,  noun,  Vo- 

gelweide,  Walter  von  der. 
^ofltcr,  ber,  bie  — ,  fowler ;  §ein= 

rid)  ber  — ,  Henry  the  Fowler. 
SoH,  bag,  bie  ''er,  folk,  people, 

nation. 
tjom,  see  t)on  bem. 
tJOn,  from,  §  99,  1  ;  of,  §  99,  3  ; 

by,  with  passive^  §  99,  2  ;  omit- 
ted, §  99,  3,  Note  a. 
t)or,  before,  in  front  of,  §  125,  1 ; 

§  248,  3  ;  ago,  §  4 ;  of,  §  25 ; 

with  states  of  mind,  §  125,  2. 
tiorbet,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  past, 

§  246,  4. 
tJorbctgcgattgctt,  see  borbeigetjen. 
t»orlict'flcl)Ctt,  ging  oorbei,  t)orbei= 

gegangen   (fein),  with  an  and 

dat.,  to  go  past,  to  pass,  §  246,  4. 
Iior^cr,  adv.,  before,  §  248,  2,  6. 
tjorfommcn,   fam  uor,  Dorgefom- 

men  (fein),  to  occur,  §  231,  1. 
SPorlcfnufl,  bie,  bie  -en,  lecture. 
8?urHctJC,  bie,  ber  — ,  preference, 

fondness. 
HorftcUcn,   reg.,  sep.   (I)abcn),  to 

introduce,    present' ;     fid)    — , 

rejlex.,  to  imagine. 


tJor^iiglid^,     excellent ;     especial 
(§ocl^ad)tnng). 


tuat^cn,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  watch, 
lie  awake ;  see  also  aufmad^en, 
to  wake  up. 

^affc,  bie,  bie  -n,  weapon,  arm. 

ttiaffttCtt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  arm; 
fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  arm  oneself, 
take  up  arms. 

luagen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  dare. 

^al)l,  bie,  bie  -en,  choice,  election. 

ttia^r,  true;  nic^t  — ?  isn't  that 
so? 

ma^ren,  reg.  (^aben),  to  observe, 
keep. 

tualjrenb,  con}.,  while  ;  prep,  with 
gen.,  during. 

993alb,  ber,  bie  "er,  forest,  wood. 

SBoIbttiefi,  ber,  blc  -c,  wood  path, 
forest  path. 

njattctt,  reg.  (fein),  to  journey  (as 
a  pilp-im). 

gSalt^cr,  ber,  Walter. 

aSttnb,  bie,  bie  "e,  wall  (of  a 
room);  compare  bie  iDJauer, 
wall  of  a  garden  or  city. 

toanbcrtt,  reg.  (fein),  to  wander; 
see  also  anSmanbern,  to  emi- 
grate, go  to. 

ttjann,  when,  §  84,  3. 

t«flr,  ttiftrc,  see  fein. 

STl^arc,  bie,  bie  -n,  ware. 

ttJarf,  see  twerfen. 

Warm,  waim. 

SS^artburfl,  bie,  Wartburg,  the 
most  interesting  castle  in  Ger- 
many, situated  at  Eisenach  in 
Thuringia. 


toavitn 


327 


toitt>itl 


ttmrtctt,    reg.    (tjoben),   to   wait, 

for,  ouf  loith  ace. ,  §  8. 
toa^,  interrog.  and  compound  rel., 

what,  §  210 ;  rel.  after  neuter, 

which,  §  211,  2,  Note. 
SSaf^tttgtOtt,    ber,  George  Wash- 
ington. 
SScg,    ber,    bie    -e,   way,     path, 

§  249,  1. 
tticg,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  away. 
toegen^  prep,  with  gen.,  because 

of,  on  account  of. 
ttlcgfj^Ctt^Ctt,  reg.,  sep.  (^abeit),  to 

scare,  frighten  away. 
SBcifi,      ta^,     bie    -er,     woman 

(poetic). 
SBci^crtrcitc,      bie,      fidelity    of 

women  ;      Weibertreu,     name 

given  the  fortress  near  Weins- 

berg. 
mctl,  because. 

2Bci(c,  bie,  bie  -n,  while,  time. 
ttictlcn,    reg.    (t)aben),    to    stay, 

while  away  time. 
833cin§berg,    ta&,    Weinsberg,    a 

city  in  Wurttemherg,  §  91. 
SScife,  bie,  bie  -n,  way,  manner, 

§  249,  2;  auf  biefe  — ,  in  this 

way. 
\0t\%  white  ;  also  pres.  of  tt)i[[en. 
ttJCtt,  far  {not  wide,  breit). 
tOCttcr,  sep.  prefix  and  adv.,  fur- 
ther. 
ttJCttcrgcl^ett,  ging  njeiter,  rt)eiter= 

gegangen  (jein),  to  go  on,  pass 

along,  move  on. 
toietd^,  rel.  and  interrog.,  which, 

§   209;     what,    §    210;     that, 

§211,2. 
SBeCc,  bie,  bie  -u,  wave. 


99Sc(t,  bie,  bie  -ett,  world. 

2!6eltgcfc^t(^tc,  bie,  ber  — ,  world's 
history. 

SBclttcit,  ber,  bie  -e,  part  of  the 
world,  quarter  of  the  globe. 

tticm,  dat.  of  roer,  to  whom. 

iDCttbett,  tuattbte,  getuanbt  or  reg. 
(I)oben),  to  turn  ;  fic^  — ,  refiex., 
to  turn,  appeal,  to,  an  with  ace. 

mctttg,  little,  §  194,  2;  pi.,  few. 

nienn,  if  ;  when,  §  84,  2,  a  ;  when- 
ever, §  84,  2,  h. 

tucr,  who,  he  who,  §  208. 

mcrbcn,  raurbe,  gettjorben  and 
itiorben  (fein),  er  trirb,  to  be- 
come, get,  §  42,  3 ;  as  future 
auxiliary  with  infin.,  shall,  will, 
§  69,  1  ;  as  passive  auxiliary 
icith  perfect  participle,  am,  are, 
is,  §  204. 

ttJcrfett,  ttjarf,  gemorfen  (Ijabett), 
er  trirft,  to  throw,  cast. 

SBcrf,  t)a^,  bie  -e,  work  (books, 
etc.). 

mcrt,  valued,  valuable;   worth. 

SBcttcr,  ba^,  bie  — ,  weather. 

ttJibcr,  against,  §  112. 

SSStbcvftrtttb,  ber,  beg  -eg,  resist- 
ance ;  —  teiften,  to  offer  resist- 
ance. 

ttJtc,  as ;  how  ;  trie  tfti^t,  what  is 
(the  name  of). 

ttitcbcr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
again. 

ttJicbcrfotttntett,  font  tDieber,  tt)ie= 
bergefommeit  (fein),  to  come 
again,  return. 

SSiCtt,  ha^,  Vienna. 

ttiictitcJ,  how  much  ;  —  U^r,  what 
time. 


ttiUb 


328 


Stterfit 


totib,  wild. 

aSil^cIm,  ber,  William. 

ttiitt,  ttJiEft,  see  irollen. 

9BinbmuI)(e^  tie,  bic  -n,  wind- 
mill. 

ttitr,  we. 

ttiirb,  see  trerbcn. 

ttltrfHl^,  real(ly). 

ttiiffcn,  tru^te,  geitjufet  (^aben),  cr 
trci^,  to  know,  §  58,  1. 

9Biffcttf(^aft,  btc,  bie  -eit,  science. 

2Bittcn6cr0,  ba«,  Wittenberg. 

ttJO,  where. 

ttio^t,  perhaps,  probably,  I  think, 
§  88  ;  well  {of  health),  §  88, 
Note,  §206,  1,  §  234,  3. 

SBol^I,  "tiCi^,  bc§  -e,  welfare. 

mo^ttClt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  live, 
dwell,  reside,  §  6,  1. 

moCctt,  re</.  (l)aben),  cr  h)tll,  jpres. 
sM&j.,  iDoUe,  to  want  to,  §  40,  1 ; 
will,  §  69,  3. 

ttJoKtc,  see  h)otIen. 

ttJorfluf,  for  what. 

ttiorbcii,  see  iDcrben ;  sign  of  pas- 
sive. 

933ort,  bo8,  word ;  pL,  ble  SBortc, 
words,  in  connected  discourse; 
btc  2Bbrtcr,  separate  words,  as 
in  a  dictionary. 

2B3rtcrbtt(^,  bag,  bic  ''cr,  diction- 
ary. 

iDdrtltt^,  literal  (ly). 

tuorum,  for  which. 

motion,  of  which. 

munbcrOoO,  wonderful. 

miinff^cn,  reg.  (tjaben),  to  wish, 
§  40,  2  ;  with  phrase  or  clause, 
§  101,  1. 

ttiurbe,  wttrbc,  see  trerbcn. 


9Biirttettt6crg,  ba^,  Wurttemberg. 
Wttfetc,  see  it)  iff  en. 


^antttt,  reg.  (tiaben),  to  quarrel ; 

fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  quarrel  with 

one  another. 
jc^n,  ten. 
^eii^nen,  reg.  (boben),  to  draw; 

to  sign  {a  letter)  ;  see  also  au«= 

jetdf)neti,  to  distinguish. 
Seigett,   reg.    (babcn),  to    show; 

fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  show  oneself. 
3eit,  bic,  bic  -en,  time,  '§  60,  1 ; 

pi.,  times,  all  time. 
Stiialttv,  ba§,  bie  — ,  age,  period, 

epoch. 
3cit(tttt0,  cine,  for  a  time,  §  50,  2. 
jcugctt,  reg.  (^abcn),  to  bear  wit- 


5tc^cn,  3og,  gcjogen  (!)aben),  to 
draw;  (jetn),  to  go  (of  troops, 
etc.). 

^intmcr,  ba§,  bic  — ,  room. 

5og,  see  jietien. 

3ortt,  ber,  be8  -S,  anger ;  in  — 
geraten,  to  get  angry ;  tjor  — , 
with  anger. 

5tt,  prep.,  to,  §  100,  1 ;  at,  §  100, 
2  ;  for,  §  100,  3  ;  too,  §  100,  4, 
Note  ;  in  idioms,  §  100,  4  ;  as 
sign  of  infin.,  to  ;  —  fet)en,  to 
be  seen,  §  204,  2,  Note  ;  omitted 
in  English  translation  with 
verbs  of  choosing,  etc. ;  sep. 
prefix,  in  jufel^en,  to  look  on, 
jugeben,  to  admit,  etc. 

■^tt'erfcnncn,  erfanntc  gu,  jucr* 
!annt  (I)aben),  to  award. 

jucrft;  at  first,  §  268,  2. 


5uge(en 


329 


SWiirft 


Stt'gcaen,  gab  git,  jugegeben  (l)a= 
ben),  er  gibt  311,  to  agree,  con- 
cede, §  232,  2. 

Sttriirf'gctrctcn,  see  jurucftreteti. 

gururf'gcsogcn,  see  jurucfjie^en. 

^nvM'hf^vtrtf  reg.,  sep.  (fciti),  to 
return. 

guriirf'trctctt,  trat  ^mud,  jurud^ 
getreten  (jein),  er  tritt  suriicf, 
to  step  back;  to  yield,  give 
in. 

3urii(f'5te!^cn,  gog  guriicf,  ^urucf= 
gejogen  (^abeit),  to  draw  back ; 
fid)  — ,  reflex.,  to  retire. 

Sufam'mctt,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
together. 

§ttfam'mcnfattcn,  fiet  ijujammen, 
jufatnmengefoUen  (fetn),  er  fftllt 
gujammeiT,  to  fall  down  (to- 
gether). 

Sufaw'mcttgefd^loffcn,  see  gufatti^ 
inenf(^(ie§en, 

Sufarn'mcttft^lic^cn  fid),  fd)to6  fid) 
gujammen,     fid)     jufammetigc- 


fc^Ioffen  (^aben),  to  join  them- 
selves together. 
Stt'fcl)en,  fo^  5U,  3iigejel)en  (Ijaben), 

er  fiel)t  gu,  to  look  on  at,  with 

dat. 
Bu'fttmttttttig,  bie,  bie  -en,  consent, 

indorsement. 
SttttJCt'Ieit,    sometimes,    §  50,    3, 

Note. 
Stt'fcttbctt,    fanbte    ju,    ^ugefanbi 

(I)aben),  to  send  to. 
5tt'5itfcnbctt,  see  gufenben. 
3tt»ang,  ber,  be§  -e§,  compulsion. 
jttiang,  see  gtoingen, 
jttiar,  it  is  true,  to  be  sure,  §  274. 
Sttict,  two. 

^Weifcl,  ber,  btc  — ,  doubt. 
JttJCi^Uttbcrt,  two  hundred. 
jttJingen,   jtuatig,  geshjungen  {\)a- 

ben),  to  compel. 
5tt)if^cn,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace, 

between,  §  117. 
jttJOlf,  twelve. 
5ttJ0(ft,  twelfth. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 
AND   INDEX. 


a,  ein ;  not  a,  fein,  §  9. 

Aachen,  bo§  5tad)en,  the  capital  of 

Charlemagne'' s  Empire. 
able,  to  be  — ,  fiinnen,  §  58,  3  and 

§  75,  2,  Note. 
about,  urn,  §  111,  1  and  §  193,  1 ; 

iiber,   §  123,   2  and  §  193,  1 ; 

ungefciljr,  dwa,  §   193,  2;   im 

iBegriff,  §  193,  3  ;  round  — ,  urn 

—  ^erum ;  what  — ,  iDoriiber, 

§  127,  a,  3 ;  other  expressions, 

§  193,  3,  Note. 
above,   ilber,    §   123,    1  ;  —  all 

things,    oor    alien    2)ingen    or 

t)or  aUem. 
accomplish,  teiften,  reg.  (^aben)  ; 

OoUbrtngen,     DoUbraci^te,     DoU^ 

bracl)t  (Ijaben). 
according  to,  nac^,  §  97,  3. 
acquainted,  to  get  —  with,  fenneu 

lerticn,  reg.  {\)Q.\)in) ,  with  ace, 

§  171,  2,  Note. 
across,  iiber,  §  123,  1 ;  ferry  — , 

ii'berfe^en,  reg.,  sep.    (^aben), 

§  154,  2,  Note. 
advice,  bcr  3?at,  bic  9?dte  or  9Jat» 

jd)lage. 
afoot,  gu  ^VL%  §  100,  4. 
afraid,   to   be   — ,    [id)   filrc^ten, 

reg.  (l)abeu),  §  25,  of,  nor  icith 

dat. 
after,  prep,   wad),   §  97,    2  and 


§  259, 2  ;  C071J.  naci)bem,  §  259, 1  ; 
day  —  to-morrow,  iibermorgeiu 

afterward,  nac^^er,  §  259,  2. 

again,  mieber. 

against,  gegen  with  ace,  §  110,  1 ; 
irtber  with  ace,  §  112. 

age,  of  people,  baS  Stltcr,  bic  — ; 
period,  baS  ^eitaltex,  bic  — ; 
the  Middle  Ages,  ba&  2)Uttcl= 
alter. 

ago,  tior  zoiY^  dat.,  §  4 ;  tjer  fol- 
lowing ace,  §  4,  Note. 

agree,  iiberein'ftimmen,  reg.,  sep., 
§  232,  1 ;  gu'geben,  irreg.,  sep., 
§  232,  2. 

all,  ganj,  §  113,  1;  aU,  ^  113,2; 
—  right,  f(f)on,  §  128,  2,  gut, 
fci)ou;  —  kinds  of,  allerlei,  in- 
decl. 

almost,  bcinal^e. 

along,  entlang,  bal)er,  §  247,  1 ; 
mit,  §  247,  2,  as  sep.  prefix  in 
mitgel)Vii,  mitbringen,  etc. 

already,  fd)on,  §  128;  not  trans- 
lated, §  228,  2. 

although,  obmo^l,  with  transposed 
order. 

always,  inimer. 

am,  bin,  see  fein. 

among,  nnter,  §  124. 

an,  ein ;  not  an,  fein,  §  9. 

and,  unb ;  —  then,  ta,  §  17,  1. 

anger,  ber  3oni,  beS  -(e)«. 


330 


angry 


331 


back 


angry,  bofe,  at,  auf  with  ace, 
§120,3;  gornig. 

annihilate,  Dernid^tcn,  reg.,  insep. 
(^aben). 

another,  ein  aiiber,  §  30,  1;  nocf) 
ein,  §  30,  2. 

answer,  intrans.,  ontlrorten,  reg. 
(t)aben);  trans.,  beanttnorten, 
reg.,  insep.  (t)aben),  §  135,  3; 
noun,  bie  Stnttrort,  bie  -en. 

Anton,  prop,  name,  ber  Slntott. 

any,  irgenb  ein ;  not  — ,  fetn,  §  9 ; 
at  —  rate,  jebenfattg,  auf  jeben 
■  %aU,  auf  oEe  galte ;  often  omit- 
ted as  in  §  35,  a,  sentence  5. 

anybody,  (irgenb)  jemanb. 

anything,  etlrag,  a  following  adj. 
capitalized,  §  217;  not  — , 
nic^tg,  a  folloioing  adj.  capi- 
talized, §  217. 

anyway,  iiber^ou^t,  §  160 ;  jeben^ 
faU§. 

are,  ftnb,  see,  fetn ;  there  — ,  eg 
finb,  §  85,  2 ;  see  also  progres- 
sive form,  §  178,  Note  b. 

aren't,  see  are  not. 

arise,  entfte^en,  entftonb,  entftan= 
ben  (fein). 

arm,  ber  Slrm,  bie  -e;  armchair, 
ber  !i?cf)nftii^(,  bie  ""e. 

army,  bag  §eer,  bie  -e ;  bie  5lrmee, 
bie  -n. 

arose,  past  of  arise. 

around,  urn,  §  111,  1 ;  go  — ,  litei^- 
ally,  itm'get)en,  ging  um,  umge= 
gangen  (jein);  get  — ,  avoid, 
umge'fien,  umging,  umgangen 
(^aben).. 

arrive,  anfomnten,  fam  an,  ange^ 
fommen  (fein). 


art,  bie  ^unft,  bie  ''e ;  —  of  print- 
ing, bie  33u(i)bru(fer!unft ;.  — 
exposition,  bie  ^unftaugftettung, 
bie  -en. 

artist,  ber  liinftter,  bie  — . 

as,  conj.;  of  reason,  ha,  §  17,  3  ; 
of  time,  al§,  Xo'xt,  §  83,  2  ;  first 
correlative,  jo,  §  26,  1 ;  second 
correlative,  mie,  §  26,  \  and 
§  83,  1 ;  as  if,  alg  ob  with  trans- 
posed order,  or  a(§  with  inverted 
order,  §  255,  2. 

ask,  bitten,  §  15,  1 ;  for,  um  with 
ace;  fragen,  §  15,  2,  after, 
narf)  with  dat.  ;  —  questions, 
fragen  ftetten,  reg.,  §  15,  2,  h, 
Note  h. 

at,  3U,  §  100,2;  an,  §119,1 ;  auf, 
§  120,  3,  Note  a;  um,  §  111,  3; 
—  all,  iibert)aupt,  §  160;  — 
school,  in  ber  @d)ule ;  —  home, 
ju  §aufe. 

attack,  augreifen,  griff  an,  auge* 
griffeu  (I)abeu). 

attention,  bie  5ld)t ;  pay — ,  arf)t= 
gebeu,  gab  ad)t,  ac^tgegeben  (^a* 
ben),  to,  auf  with  ace. 

Augustus,  prop,  name,  ber  Stugu^ 
\iVi^  {of  ancients)  ";  of  moderns, 
ber  2(u'guft. 

away,  in  eg  ;  get  — ,  eutf  omnten, 
entfam,  entfommen  (fein). 

6 

back,  noun,  ber  9?ii(fen,  bie  — ; 
adv.,  juriicf  ;  to  come  — ,  gurii(f= 
fommen,  fam  juriicf,  juriidge^ 
fommen  (fein);  give  — ,  suriid- 
gebeu,  gab  ^uriid,  ^uriidgegeben 
(^aben). 


bad 


332 


blue 


bad,  badly,  fc^tec^t. 

ball,  ber  iBolI,  bie  "f . 

Barbarossa,  ber  5Rotbart,  ^ricbric^ 
SBarbaroffa. 

bathe,  baben,  reg.  (l)aben). 

be,  fctn,  rt)ar,  getncfen  (fein),  id) 
bin,  bu  bift,  cr  ift,  voix  finb,  it)r 
feib,  fie  fmb ;  suhj.,  i6)  fei,  etc. ; 
of  health,  fic^  befinben,  befanb, 
bcfunbcn  (^aben) ,  or  e§  ge^t  with 
dat.,  §  206,  1 ;  to  —  translated, 
I)ei^en,  l)icf^,  gel)ei|3en  (^aben), 
§  49,  2,  Note.;  to  —  late,  f^at 
Fommen,  fam,  gcfommen  (fcin), 
§  219,  2;  to  —  to  (affect),  an= 
ge^cn,  giug  an,  angegangen 
(jein),  §  206,  2,  Note;  to  — 
{cost),  foften,  reg.  (^aben), 
§  206,  2,  Note ;  progressive 
form,  §  178,  Note  h  ;  specific 
uses,  liegcn,  ftctjen,  ^angeu,  eic, 
§  206,  2. 

beautiful,  fd)bn. 

became,  past  of  become. 

because,  tt)eit,  with  transposed 
order. 

become,  njcrben,  tuurbe,  gcttjorbeit 
(fein),  §  42,  3. 

bed,  ba«  i8ett,  bie  -en  ;  to  — ,  ju 
33ett. 

been,  gciucfcn,  see  fein ;  see  also 
progressive  form,  §  178,  Note  b. 

Beethoven,  ihiblDig  ban  33ectl)o= 
»eu. 

before,  conj.,  t^e,  §  248,  1 ;  prep., 
bor,  §  126,  1  and  §  248,  3  ;  adv., 
noii),  §  248,  2,  a,  frtt^er,  Dormer, 
§  248,  2,  6. 

began,  past  o/ begin. 

begin,  onfangcH;  firtg  an,  angefan= 


geVt  (^abcn),  cr  fdngt  an,  with 
ju  and  infin.,  §  180,  2 ;  more 
formal,  beginnen,  begann,  ht' 
gonnen  (f)aben). 
behave,  ftd)  benetjmcn,  bcno!)m, 
bcnommcn  (f)abcn),  er  bcnimmt 

believe,  gfouben,  reg.  (^abcn), 
§  167,  1 ;  in,  an  with  ace,  §  167, 
1,  Note  c ;  —  a  person,  dat., 
§  157,  1,  Note  a;  —  a  thing, 
ace,  §  157,  1,  Note  b. 

belong,  gpI)orcn,  reg.,  insep.  (^a^ 
ben),  with  dat. 

bench,  bie  S3anf,  bie  -e. 

Berlin,  (bag)  Berlin. 

beside,  neben,  §  122. 

besides,  au^er  with  dat. 

besiege,  belagern,  reg.,  insep.  (^a* 
ben). 

best,  beft,  am  beften;  to  like  — , 
am  liebften  mogen,  §  76,  2. 

better,  beffer ;  to  like  — ,  liebcr 
mogen,  §  76,  2. 

between,  jjnjijdjen,  icith  dat.  or 
ace,  §  117. 

bible,  bie  33ibel,  bie  -n;  transla- 
tion of  the  — ,  bie  33ibeliiberjet^» 
nng. 

big,  bigger,  biggest,  grog,  grower, 
grbgt,  am  grb^ten. 

bird,  ber  i^ogel,  bie  ". 

birthday,  ber  ©ebnrtv^tag,  bie  -e; 
for  your  — ,  gum  @eburt«tag. 

Bismarck,  (ber)  S3i«mar(f. 

black,  jrfjmar^. 

blame,  bie  (S(!)utb;  to  be  to  — , 
®d)ulb  baran  feiii. 

blood,  ba«  iBlut. 

blue,  blaiu 


body 


333 


chancery 


body  {alive),  ber  ^'or^jer,  bie— ; 
{dead)  bie  ^t\6)t,  bie  -it. 

Bonn,  {'tio.^)  iBonn. 

book,  ba§  S3ucl^,  bie  ""er. 

both,  beibe,  §  170. 

boy,  ber  ^'nabe,  beg  -n,  bie  -n. 

Brandenburg,  {\>a%)  S3ranbenburg. 

Bratwurstglocklein,  ha^  33rat= 
rourftgiocflein. 

brave,  ta^fer. 

bread,  bag  33rot,  bie  -e. 

break,  gerbrec^en,  gerbrad),  gerbro^ 
c^en  (t)aben),  er  gerbrid^t. 

bring,  bringeu,  brad)te,  0ebrad)t 
(^abett) ;  to  —  up,  erjie^en, 
erjog,  ergogen  (^aben);  to 
—  together,  jufantmenbringen, 
brac^te  jufammen,  jiifammcnge- 
brad^t  (^aben);  to — (to  fetch), 
I)oIen,  reg.  (^aben),  §  42,  2. 

broad,  breit. 

brother,  ber  33ruber,  bie  ''er. 

brought,  past  and  participle  of 
bring. 

brown,  braun;  Brown,  prop, 
name,  33raun. 

build,  bauen,  reg.  (^aben). 

building,  bag  ©ebciube,  bie  — ;  bie 
^aute,  bie  -n. 

buried,  past  o/bury. 

bury,  begraben,  begriib,  begraben 
(^aben),  er  begrcibt. 

busy,  to  —  oneself,  fid)  befc^aftigen 
(t)aben),  reg.,  insep. 

but,  conj.,  aber,  §  43,  1 ;  fonbern, 
§  43,  2;  adv.,  nur ;  nothing — , 
nid)tg  a(g,  §  43,  1,  Note. 

buy,  faufen,  reg.  (^aben). 

by,  ncben,  §  122 ;  bei,  §  95,  1  ; 
noc^,  §  97,  3 ;   fiir,  §  109,  2  j 


with  passive,  toon,  §  99,  2 ;  — 
means  of,  burc^  ;  with  verbal, 
baburrf)  ha^ ;  to  sit  down  by, 
fic^  3U  jemanb  fe^en,  reg.  (l)a= 
ben). 


call,    nennen,    nannte,    genannt 

(t)aben),  §  49,  1 ;  to  be  called, 

^ei^en,  I)ie§,  geljei^en  (^aben), 

§  49,  2. 
came,  past  of  come. 
campaign,  ber  getbpg,  bie  "e. 
can  (to  be  able),  fonnen,  fonnte, 

gefonnt  (^aben),  er  fanti,  §  75, 

2,  Note. 
cane,  ber  @to(f,  bie  '^e, 
cannot,  see  can  not. 
care,  fid)  fiimmern,  reg.  (t)aben), 

about,  urn  with  ace. 
careful  (ly),  forgfcittig  ;  most  — , 

§  218,  2. 
carriage,  bie  3)rof(^fe,  bie  -n  ;  ber 

3Bagen,  bie  — . 
carried,  past  of  carry, 
carry,     tragen,     trug,     getragen 

(^aben),    er    tragi;     bringen, 

brad)te,  gebrad)t    (tjaben) ;    to 

—  out,    burc^'fe^en,    reg.,  sep. 

(l)oben). 
castle,  bog  ®d)(o^,  bie  "er. 
catch,  fangen,  fing,  gefangen  (t)a= 

ben),  er  fcingt. 
caught,  past  o/ catch. 
celebrate,  feiern,  reg.  (i)aben). 
century,  bag  3al)rt)unbert,  bie  -e. 
certainly,  getni^', 
chair,  ber  @tu^(,  bie  H  ;  armchair, 

ber  ^e^nftu^I,  bie  H. 
chancery,  bie  ^anglei',  bie  -en. 


change 


334 


country 


change,    wed)\dn,   reg.    (l)oben); 

to  —  clothes,  fid)  um'^iel)en,  gog 

fic^  um,  \\6)  umgegogen  (t)abcn). 
Charlemagne,     (bcr)      Staxi    ber 

©ro^e,  tarl8  beg  ©ro^en. 
Charles,  (ber)  tart. 
cheap,  billig. 

chicken,  ba§  §u^n,  bie  "er. 
child,  children,  't^a^  f  inb,  bie  -er. 
choose,     tt)Qt)(en,    reg.    (l)aben) ; 

to  elect,  ertuii^ten,  reg..,  insep. 

Christmas,  bie  2Beit)ua(^ten  (pZ.)  J 

for  — ,  ju  2Seil)nad)ten. 
church,  bie  tircf)e,  bie  -n. 
city,  bie  @tabt,  bie  H, 
claim,  bel)aupten,  reg.^  insep.  (l)a= 

ben), 
class,  bie  tiaffe,  bie  -n. 
classic,  ber  tlajfifer,  bie  — . 
clever,  flug. 
climb,  intrans.,  fteigen,  ftieg,  ge- 

ftiegen  (jein);  trans.,  befteigen, 

beftieg,  beftiegeu  (l)oben). 
clock,  bie  Ul)r,  bie  -en,  §  169, 1  ; 

o'clock,  Ul)r,  §  50, 4  and  §  169,  2. 
clothes,    bie    tleiber    (pL);    to 

change  — ,   fid)   um^ie^en,   jog 

ftd)  um,  fid)  umgejogen  (I)abcn). 
cloud,  bie  SBotfe,  bie  -n. 
coat,  ber  9tocf,  bie  "e. 
coffee,  ber  t^affee,  bie  -e. 
cold,  fait. 

Colosseum,  bag  totoffeum,  beS  -8. 
combat,  baS  tampffpiet,  bie  -e. 
come,    fommen,   fam,    gefommen 

(feiu);    to  —  back,   juriicffom^ 

men,  sep.  (fein);  to  —  in,  herein- 

fommen,  sep.  (fein). 
comfortable,  bequem. 


command,  befel)ten,  befal)t,  be- 
fo^len  (I)aben),  er  befict)It,  with 
dat.,  §  190,  1  and^  197,  2. 

common,  gemeinfam. 

competition,  bie  .^onfurrenj',  bie 
-en. 

complain,  fic^  beflagen,  reg., 
insep.  (^oben);  to  —  of,  to 
lament,  beflagen,  reg.,  insep. 
(l)aben)  with  ace. 

complicated,  oertt)icfe(t. 

conquer,  intrans.,  fiegen,  reg. 
(tjaben),  §  27  ;  trans.,  befiegcn, 
reg.,  insep.  (f)aben),  §27;  to 
subdue,  nntermer'fen,  unter= 
marf,  untermor'fen  (^aben),  er 
untermirft. 

consequence,  bie  ^olge,  bie  -n. 

consist,  beftef)en,  beftanb,  beftan* 
ben  (Ijaben),  of,  aug  with  dat., 
§  269,  1. 

constantly,  fortmal)renb. 

contest,  ber  tampf,  bie  H  ;  singers' 
— ,  ber  ^cingerfrieg,  bie  -e. 

continue,  fortfal)ren,  fut)r  fort, 
fortgefa^ren  (baben),  er  fdl)rt 
fort,  with  ju  and  injin.,  §  180,  2 
and  §  233,  1 ;  fortfe^cn,  reg., 
sep.  (f)aben),  with  direct  obj.  in 
ace,  §  233,  2. 

convent,  baS  tlofter,  bie  ". 

convince,  iiberjeu'gen,  reg.,  imep. 
(l)aben). 

corner,  bie  ©cfe,  bie  -n. 

correct,  rid)tig  ;  to  — ,  oerbeffern, 
reg.,  insep.  (l)aben). 

could,  fonnte,  fonnte,  see  can, 
fbnnen. 

countless,  5al){lo8. 

country,  ba6   i!anb,   bie   "er ;    to 


couple 


335 


do 


the  — ,  auf  bo8  $?anb,  §  120,  3, 

Note  a. 
couple,  bag  ^aar,  bie  -e ;  in  adj. 

sense,  a  — ,  ein  paax, 
course,  of  — ,  notiirUc^,  §  262. 
court  {of  law),  bag  ®txi&ji,  bie  -e. 
courteous (ly),  ^oftic^. 
cousin  (male),  ber  S5ettcr,  bie  — . 
cover,  bebecfen,  reg.,  insep.  (^a= 

ben). 
crowd,  ha$  ©ebrange,  beS  -8. 
crown,   bie  ^rone,  bie  -n ;  to  — 

with  a  wrfeath,  befranjen,  reg., 

insep.  (f)aben). 
cup,  bie  Soffe,  bie  -n. 


dance,  ber  Xan^,  bie  H;  to  — , 
tan^en,  reg.  (l)aben) ;  there's 
going  to  be  a  dance,  eg  tt)irb  ge= 
tanst,  §  204,  2. 

daughter,  bie  2;oc^ter,  bie  ^ 

day,  ber  2^ag,  bie  -e ;  market  — , 
ber  3Rarfttag,  bie  -e ;  —  after 
to-morrow,  iibermorgen. 

dead,  tot. 

deal,  a  great  — ,  Diet. 

dear,  lieb  ;  (costly)  teuer. 

death,  ber  Xob,  bie  -e. 

decide,  entfc^eiben,  entfd^ieb,  ent:^ 
fcfjieben  (^aben)  ivith  direct  obj., 
§  258,  1 ;  fid)  entfdiaeBen,  ent= 
jrfiroB  fid),  ftrf)  entfd)Ioffen  (()a= 
ben),  §  258,  2;  befrf)aeBen, 
bej(^Io^,  befd)(offen  (^aben), 
§  258,  2. 

decidedly,  entfc^ieben,  past  part, 
of  entfc^eiben,  used  as  adv. 

deep,  tief. 

depend,  fid)  t)ertaffen,  Derlie^  fid^. 


ftd^  bertaffen  (f)aben),  er  berla^t 
fid^,  upon,  auf  with  ace;  that 
depends,  bag  fommt  barauf  an. 

desk,  bag  ^ult,  bie  -e  (at  school); 
ber  ®(^reibtifd),  bie  -e  (a« 
A-owie). 

despair,  bergftjeifeln,  reg.,  insep. 
(^aben). 

devastate,  bern)uften,  re^.,  twsep. 
(t)aben). 

develop,  enttt)i(feln,  regr.,  insep. 
(f)aben). 

development,  bie  Snttt)i(felnng, 
bie  -en. 

Dewey,  (ber)  2)en)el). 

dialect,  bie  SiJiunbart,  bie  -en. 

dictionary,  bagSSbrterbud),  bie^er. 

did,  tat,  see  do,  tun ;  emphatic 
form,  §  77, 2,  Note  ;  often  !^aben, 
§  229,  2. 

didn't,  see  did  not. 

die,  fterben,  ftarb,  geftorben  (fein), 
er  ftirbt. 

Dietrich,  (ber)  S)ietrid^. 

difference,  ber  Unterfci^icb,  bie  -e. 

difficulty,  bie  ©c^ftiierigfeit,  bie 
-en. 

dinner,  bag  9Kittageffen,  bie  — . 

disagreeable,  un'angene^m. 

distinct  (ly),  beuttic^  ;  most  — , 
§  218,  2. 

distinguish,  aug5eid)nen,  reg.,  sep. 
(^aben);  to  —  oneself,  fid)  aug* 
3eid)nen. 

disturb,  ftbren,  reg.  (^aben). 

do,  tun,  tat,  getan  (^aben),  §  77, 
2 ;  mac^en,  reg.  (i)aben),  §  77, 
1 ;  to  emphasize  imperative, 
bod),  §  77,  2,  Note;  for  em- 
phatic indicative  pres.  or  past 


dog 


336 


excel 


use  simply   German  pres.    or 

past,  §  77,  2,  Note,  and  §  227, 1. 
dog,  ber  §unb,  bie  -e. 
done,  getan,  see  do,  tun. 
don't,  see  do  not. 
down,  nieber,  ^tnunter ;  to  sit  — , 

fi(^  fe^en,  reg.  (t)aben),  §  18,  2; 

to   sink  — ,   Tiieberfinfen,   fan! 

ttlebcr,    nicbcrgefunfen    (fein) ; 

—  town,  in  ber,  or  bie  @tabt, 

§121. 
Dresden,  (ha^)  S)regben. 
dress,    ba8    ^teib,   bie  -er  (also 

clothes). 
drive,  fo^ren,  fu'^r,  gcfa'^ren  (l)a= 

ben  or  fein,  §  167  and  Note),  er 

fa^rt. 
drown,    be    drowned,    ertrinfen, 

ertranf,  ertrunfen  (fein). 
dunce,  ber  2)ummfopf,  bie  "e. 
during,  ti3af)renb,  prep,  with  gen. 

E 

each,  jeber,  jebe,  iebe€ ;  —  other, 
when  ohj.  of  verb,  ^id},  un«,  eud^, 
etc.;  when  ohj.  of  prep.,  einan= 
ber,  written  with  prep. :  auSein- 
anber,  niiteinanber. 

eagerly,  eifrig. 

early,  friil). 

easier,  comparative  ofe^Lsy. 

east,  ber  Often,  be«  -8 ;  for  adj., 
Oft,  usually  uniting  with  a  fol- 
lowing noun;  east  wind,  ber 
Oftiuinb. 

easy,  easily,  easier,  easiest,  leirfjt, 
Ieid)ter,  leic^teft,  ant  leid)teften. 

eat,  eaten,  effen,  o^,  gegeffeu  (l)a- 
ben),  er  i^t. 

eight,  Qd)t. 


elector,  ber  turfiirft,  be8  -en,  bie 

-en. 
else,  anberg,  §  30,  1,  Note;  fonft, 

§  30,  1,  Note. 
emperor,  ber  ^aifer,  bie  — . 
empire,   "ba^  9^eic^,   bie  -e ;    ba8 

^'aiferreid),  bie  -e. 
enemy,  ber  geinb,  bie  -e. 
enough,  genng. 
entertain,  unter^at'ten,  untert)ielt', 

unter^al'ten  (i)aben),  er  unter= 

^olt'. 
enthusiasm,  bie  53egMfterung,  bie 

-en. 
entire(ly),  gan?,  §  113,  1. 
envious,  neibifd^,  of,   anf;   eifer= 

fiidjtig  (jealous). 
escape,  entfom'men,  enttam',  ent* 

fom'men  Cfein),  from,  au«  with 

dat. 
especially,  befonberS. 
Europe,  (bag)  ©uropa. 
even,  fetbft,  §  196,  2,  Note, 
evening,  ber  ^benb,  bie  -e;  in  the 

— ,  abenbg,  am  3lbenb ;  written 

small  as  an  adv.  in  this  evening, 

to-morrow  evening,  ^eute  abenb, 

ntorgen  abenb. 
ever,  je,  §  257,  1;  and),  §  257,  2; 

for  — ,  (anf)  emig,  §  257,   1, 

Note. 
every,  jeber,  jebc,  jebcg. 
everybody,  jebermann. 
everything,  alle^. 
everywhere,  iiberaU. 
exactly,  gonan. 
examination,    baS    ©j.amen,    bie 

C£janiina  ;  bie  '^^riifnng,  bie  -en. 
excel,  iibertref'fen,  iibertraf,  ilber- 

trof'fen  (l)aben),  er  iibertrifft'. 


337 


French 


excuse,  cntf(f)utbigcn,  reg.^  insep. 

(I)oben). 
exercise,  bie  2lufgabe,  bie  -n. 
exhibition,  bie  2tu8ftcEung. 
expect,  crJtJarten,  reg.^  insep.  (^a= 

ben). 
expensive,  teuer. 
extraordinary,  au^eror'bentUd). 


fact,  W  %Cii'\a6)t,  bie  -n. 

fainting,  adj..,  o^nmdc^tig. 

fall  {of  the  year).,  ber  ^erbft,  bie 

-e. 
fall,   foUen,   fief,    gefollen   (jein), 

er  fallt. 
famous,  berii^mt. 
far,  ireit ;  as  —  as,  bi^,  §  107,  2. 
fast,  faster,  fastest,  fd)neir,  fc^nef^ 

ler,  am  fcf)uell[ten. 
father,  ber  ^ater,  bie  ^ 
fear,  fiird)ten,  reg.  (t)abeu);  never 

-,  fd)on,  §  128,  2. 
feel,  empfinben,  em^fanb,  empfun= 

ben  (t)aben). 
ferry,    to  —  across,    ii'berfe^en, 

reg..,   sep.   (^aben),    §    154,  2, 

Note. 
fidelity,  bie  Streue. 
fifteen,  fiinfje^n. 
fifth,  fiinft. 
fifty,  fiinf^ig. 
fight,   ber  tatn^f,  bie  H ;  to  — , 

fompfen,  reg.  ({)aben). 
finally,  enblic^,  fditte^lic^. 
find,  finben,  fanb,  gefnnben  (^a= 

ben),  §  180,  1. 
fine,  ^ra(^ti)oll. 
finish,  t)oEenben,  reg.,  insep.  (^o= 

ben). 


fire,  bog  ^euer,  bie  — . 

firm,  feft ;  firmer,  most  firmly, 
fefter,  am  fefteften. 

first,  adj..,  crft,  §  268,  1 ;  adv., 
juerft,  §  268,  2. 

Fisher,  prop,  name,  (ber)  ^ifd)er. 

five,  fitnf. 

flattery,  bie  @(f)meid)e(ei,  bie  -en. 

floor,  ber  S3oben,  bie  —  or  "■. 

flow,  ftei^en,  flo^,  gefloffen  (jein). 

follow,  fotgen,  reg.  (fein),  with 
dat.,  §  166,  Note  ;  befolgen,  reg., 
insep.  (^aben),  with  ace,  §  166, 
Note. 

fly,  fUegen,  flog,  geflogen  (jein) ; 
of  time,  fd)nell  Derge^en,  Der= 
ging,  Dergangen  (fein),  §  246,2. 

football,  ber  t^nfiball^  bie  ^e. 

for,  fiir,  §  109 ;  feit,  §  98,  2  ;  nm, 
§  111,  2 ;  ace.  sometimes  loith 
tang,  §  5  and  Note;  look  — , 
furf)en,  §  7  ;  wait  — ,  marten  anf, 
§  8;  what  — ,  mofiir,  moranf ; 
—  your  birthday,  gum  @eburt«= 
tag  ;  —  to-morrow,  auf  morgen, 
§  120,  3,  Note  h. 

foreign,  fremb. 

forest,  ber  2BaIb,  bie  ''er. 

forever,  (auf)  emig,  §  257, 1,  Note. 

forget,  bergeffen,  oerga^,  bergeffen 
(^aben),  cr  Dergi^t. 

forgot,  past  of  forget. 

fortress,  bie  53urg,  bie  -en. 

fought,  past  of  fight. 

found,  past  o/find. 

four,  Dier. 

Fowler,  (ber)  35ogfer. 

Frederick,  (ber)  ^riebrtd). 

freedom,  bie  ^rei^eit. 

French,    adj. ,    franjbfifci) ;     the 


friend 


338 


guest 


French  language,  ba8  f^ran^b* 
ftf(^(e) ;  in  French,  auf  fran30=^ 
ftfd). 

friend,  bcr  ^reunb,  bic  -c. 

friendly,  freunbUd^. 

Fritz,  (bcr)  ^rife. 

fro,  to  and  — ,  l)in  unb  t)er,  §  149,  2. 

from,  oon,  §  99,  1. 

front,  in  —  of,  tior,  §  125,  1. 

funny,  !omifrf). 


gallery,  bte  ©atcrie',  bic  -n ;  pic- 
ture — ,  bic  ©cmal'bcgatcric'. 

game,  bag  @^iel,  bic  -c ;  bo8  SSctt* 
fpict,  bic  -c. 

garden,  bcr  ©ortcn,  bic  ^ 

gate,  ba§  Xox,  bte  -e. 

gave,  gab,  see  give,  gcbcn. 

general,  bcr  gclbljcrr,  bic  -en  ;  ber 
©encrat',  bie  -e  or  '^e. 

gentleman,  bcr  §err,  bc8  -n,  bic 
-en. 

German,  adj.,  bcutfrf) ;  —  man, 
bcr  2)cutfc^c,  beg  -n  ;  the  —  lan- 
guage, bag  3)cutfcf)e  (3)ciitj(^) ; 
to  speak  — ,  2)cutfc^  fpred^en, 
fprad^,  gefpro(i)en  (^abcn),  cr 
j^ric^t;  in  — ,  auf  bcutfd),  im 
2)eutfd)cn,  §  156. 

Germany,  ba^  ^cutfc^Ianb. 

get,  befommen,  betam,  bcfom* 
men  (l)aben),  §  42,  1 ;  l)oIcn, 
reg.  (l)abcn),  §  42,  2  ;  luerbcn, 
h)urbe,  flctnorben  (jctn),  er  uUrb, 
§  42,  3  ;  to  —  away,  cntfom'= 
men,  entfam',  entfom'men 
(jetn)  ;  to  —  around  (avoid), 
umgc'{)en,  umgtng',  umgangeit 
(^abcn). 


getting,  see  get. 

ghost,  bcr  ®cift,  bic  -er. 

girl,  bag  9JJcibd)en,  bic  — . 

give,  geben,  gab,  gcgeben  (^abcn), 
cr  gibt ;  to  —  back,  jururf gcben, 
irreg.,  sep.  (t)aben);  to  —  re- 
gards to,  grii^en,  reg.  (t)abcn) 
with  ace. 

glad,  fro^ ;  I  am  — ,  eg  freut  mid) ; 
to  be  —  to  do  something,  cttt)ag 
gem  tun  ;  gladly,  gern,  §  76,  2. 

glove,  bcr  §anbfd)u^,  bie  -c. 

go,  gelien,  ging,  gegangen  (fein) ; 
^ingc^en,  irreg.,  sep.  (fein)  ; 
(of  army)  giclicn,  jog,  gcjogcn 
(fein) ;  to  —  around,  um'ge^en, 
irreg.,  sep.  (fein) ;  to  be  going 
to,  pres.  tense,  §  228,  1 ;  to  — 
walking,  or  for  a  walk,  fpajie* 
ren  ge^en,  §  180,  1. 

Goethe,  (ber)  ®octf)c. 

gone,  gegangen,  see  go,  gc'^cn. 

good,  gut ;  to  have  a  —  time, 
fid)  (gut)  amiificrcn,  amiificrtc, 
amiificrt  (baben),  §  60,  6. 

good-by,  abicu. 

got,  see  get. 

grammar,  bic  ©ramma'tif,  bic  -en. 

grass  widow,  bic  ©tro^njitroe, 
bie  -n. 

gray,  grau. 

great,  greater,  greatest,  gro§; 
grower,  grb§t,  am  grbfetcn. 

Gretchen,  (bag)  ©retdjen. 

Gridley,  prop,  name,  (ber)  ®rib» 
let). 

ground,  bcr  S3oben,  bic  —  and  «, 
§  260,  Note;  (reason),  bcr 
©runb,  bie  "c,  §  260. 

guest,  bcr  ®aft,  bic  "e. 


Gutenberg 


339 


hot 


Gutenberg,  prop,  name,  (ber)  ©u^ 
tenberg. 


had,  I)atte,  see  have,  l^aben, 

hair,  'iia^  §aar,  bie  -e. 

half,   ^alb,  §  184,  2;  bie  §atfte, 

bie  -n,  §  184,  1  j  —  past  ten, 

\)a\h  elf. 
hall,  ber  @aal,  bie  @ate;  bie  §alle, 

bie  -n. 
hand,  bie  §anb,  bie  H, 
handkerchief,     'Qa^     %a\6)txiiVL6), 

bie  "er. 
Hanover  or  Hannover,  {tiOi^)  §an» 

no'oer. 
happen,  gefc^e^en,  gefdja^,  gejcl^e= 

Ijen  (fein),  e8  gefc^ie^t. 
hard,     harder,    fc^raer,    fd)tt)ercr, 

§173,2;f(eiBig,freiBiger,§173, 

3 ;  ^art,  §  173,  1 ;  ftarf,  §  173, 

4  ;  ^eftig. 
hardly,  !oum. 
Harvard,  prop,   name.,   §art)arb, 

bie  §aroarb=Unit)erfitat. 
hat,  ber  §ut,  bie  ^e. 
have,  ^oben,  ^otte,  ge^abt  (^aben), 

er  ^at,  §  68,  1,  §§  164,  165,  167  ; 

with  some  verbs  (fein),  §  68,  2, 

§§  164,  166,  167  ;  to  —  to,  miif- 

fen,  §  68,  3;  to  — made,  ntad)en 

laffen,  §  68,  4. 
Havel,  prop,  name  of  a  river  near 

Berlin,  bie  §at)el. 
haven't,  see  have  not. 
having,  see  have. 
he,  er. 
head,  ber  ^opf,  bie  ^e ;  at  the  — , 

an  ber  @pi^e. 
health,  bie  ©efunb^eit,  bie  -en. 


hear,  l^oren,  reg.  (Ijabcn),  §  180, 1. 

heard,  past  of  hear. 

heaven,    ber    ^immel;    for  — 's 

sake,  urn  (be8)  ^immetS  inillen, 
help,   bie  §itfe,  bie  -n ;   to  — , 

^elfen,  ^a(f,  gei)otfen    (^aben), 

39,  1 ;  to  —  it,  bofiir  fonnen, 

§  39,   2;    can't  help,   miiffen, 

§  39,  2,  Note. 
Henry,  (ber)  §einri(^. 
her,  i^row.,  fie,  ace,  i^r,  dat.;  it)nt 

or  e§,  §  207,  Note;  adj.,  i^r. 
here,  ^ier;  (hither)  ^ier^er;  tio., 

§  17,  2. 
Hermann,  (ber)  Hermann. 
hero,  ber  §etb,  beg  -en,  bie  -en. 
high,  ^oc^,  declined  l^o^er,  ^o^e, 

i)ol)e8. 
Hildegund,  bie  §i(begunb. 
him,  i^n,  ace,  i^m,  dat. 
himself,  fid),  reflex,  pron. 
his,  fein. 
history,  bie  @efrf)i(i)tc,  bie  -n ;  bie 

Seltgef(f)i(^te. 
hither,     ^er,     l^ier^er;    —   and 

thither,  ^in  unb  Ijer,  §  149,  2. 
Hohenstaufen,  prop,  name,  (bie) 

§oI)enftau'fen  (pi.),  §  82. 
Hohenzollern,  prop,  name,  (bie) 

^o^enjol'lern  (pL),  §  192. 
hold,  fatten,  l^ielt,  getjalten   (t)a= 

ben),  er  pit. 
holy,    ^eitig;    Holy    Land,    bag 

§eilige  !i;anb. 
home  (to),  noc^  §oufe ;  at  — ,  gu 

§aufe. 
honor,  bie  (S^re,  bie  -n ;  seat  of 

— ,  ber  (S^renpto^,  bie  -e ;  to  — , 

Deref)ren,  reg.,  insep.  (pben). 
hot,  ^ei^. 


hotel 


340 


July 


hotel,  bag  §oteI',  tie  -«. 

hour,  bie  @tunbe,  bie  -n,  §  169,  2, 

Note. 
house,  bag  §au8,  bie  §dufer, 
how,  tt)ie. 
human  being,  ber  9Kenj(^,  beg -en, 

bie  -en,  §  19,  1. 
hundred,,  ^unbert. 
hundredth,  ^unbertfl. 
"hurry,  eilen,  reg.  (^aben) ;  to  be 

in  a  — ,  eile  ^oben. 
husband,  ber  3J?ann,  bie  "er,  §  19, 2. 
hut,  bie  ^iitte,  bie  -u. 


I,  Id). 

idea,  bie  3bee,  bie  -n. 

if,  XotmiiWUh  transposed  order; 
after  words  of  asking^  ob  ;  as 
— ,  alg  ob,  with  transposed  or- 
der^ §  255,  2,  or  alg,  loitfi  in- 
verted order,  §  265,  2. 

I'm,  see  I  am. 

impolite,  un'^of(icl). 

importance,  bie  53ebeutung. 

in,  in,  §  121 ;  —  it,  barin  (rest), 
I)ineiu  (motion) ;  bei,  §  95,  2 ; 
jeit,  §98,2;  an,  §  119,  3;  — 
the  evening,  abenbg  or  am 
5tbenb;  —  German,  auf  bentfd), 
§  120,  3,  Note  6,  §  156,  or  im 
2)eutfd)en,  §  156 ;  to  come  — , 
l)ereinfommen,  tarn  l)erein,  l^tv- 
eingefommen  (fein)  ;  Come  in  ! 
(in  answer  to  a  knock  at  the 
door),  l)erein! 

include,  umfaj'jen,  reg.,  insep. 
(^aben). 

influence,  beein'fluffen,  reg.,  in- 
sep. (Ijaben). 


ink,  bie  Xinte,  bie  -n. 

inn,   bag  ^irtg^aug,  bie  2Btrtg» 

^cinjer. 
insist,  befte^en,  beftanb,  beftanben 

(^aben),    on,    anf    with    dat., 

§  269,  2. 
instead  of,  anftott  with  gen.  ;  with 

a    verbal,    infinitive,     §    181, 

clause,  §  190. 
interest,  bag  3interej'^e,  bie  -n,  in, 

fiir  with  ace. 
interested,  to  be  — ,  fid)  intereffte'« 

ren,  intereffier'te  fid),  fid)  interef* 

fiert'  (l)aben),  in,  fiir  loith  ace. 
interesting,  intereffant'. 
interrupt,    nnterbred)'en,     unter- 

brad)',  nnterbrod^'en  (t)abcn),  er 

nntevbridjt'. 
into,  in  with  ace. ;   —  German, 

ing  'Dentfd)e,  §  156. 
invent,  erfinben,  erfanb,  erfunben 

(i)aben). 
invention,  bie  ©rfinbnng,  bie  -en. 
iron,  bag  (Sifen,  bie  — . 
is,  ift,  see  fein;  that —  {to  say), 

bog  ^ei^t :  that  —  (translated), 

bag  l)eiBt,  §  49,  2,  Note ;  there 

— ,  eggibt,  §85, 1,  egifl,§85,2. 
isn't,  see  is  not. 
it,  eg,  er,  fie,  §  207  ;  help  —  (after 

negative),  bofiir,  §  39,  2  ;  with 

prepositions,  ba(r),  §  106,  1. 
Italian,  ber  3taUe'ner,  bie  — . 
Italy,  bag  Stalien. 
it's,  see  it  is. 

J 

John,  (ber)  3ol)ann. 
journey,  bie  9Jeife,  bie  -n. 
July,  (ber)  Suti. 


just 


341 


Linden 


just,  when  qualifying  another 
icord,  g  era  be ;  of  time,  eben, 
§  196,  2,  Note. 


keep,  ht^aiten,  be^iett,  bel^altcn 
(^aben),  er  bebcilt;  —  up,  uer- 
forgen,  reg.,  insep.  (t)aben);  — 
one  waiting,  UJorten  laffen,  Ue^, 
gefaffen  (^aben),  er  Ici^t. 

kept,  past  of  keep. 

kind,  bie  @orte,  bie  -n;  be  so  — , 
jeien  @te  jo  freunblid) ;  all  — s 
of,  attertei. 

king,  ber  tonig,  bie  -e. 

kingdom,  ba^  ^onigreid),  bie  -e. 

knew,  past  of  know. 

knife,  ta^  SJJeffcr,  bie  — . 

knight,  ber  Splitter,  bie  — . 

know,  n)iffen,  itjuf^te,  gett3uj?t  (Ca- 
bell), er  tt)etf^,  §  58,  1,  with 
ta^^^clause  for  English  infini- 
tive, §  191 ;  feunen,  fannte,  ge= 
famit  (Ijaben),  §  58,  2  ;  tonnen, 
fomite,  gefonnt  (^aben),  er  !ann, 
§58,  3;  well-known,  adj.,  be= 
fanttt. 

Koberger,  prop,  name,  (ber)  ^o= 
berger. 

Konrad,  prop,  name,  (ber)  ^on= 
rab. 

Kriemhilde,  prop,  name,  (bie) 
^riem^ilbe. 


lady,  bie  2)ame,  bie  -n. 
lake,  ber  @ee,  bie  -n. 
lamb,  bag^amm,  bie  "er. 
lament,    bemeinen,    reg.,    insep. 
(^aben). 


lamp,  bie  ?am^e,  bie  -n. 

land,  bo8  2anb,  bie  "er ;  the  Holy 
Land,  bag  §eiUge  !Banb. 

language,  bie  ©prat^e,  bie  -n. 

large,  larger,  largest,  gro^,  grower, 
gro^t,  ant  grb^ten. 

last,  (e^t;  —  summer,  borigen 
©ommer. 

late,  later,  latest,  f^ot,  f^ater,  am 
jpdteften,  §  219,  2. 

laugh,  (ad)en,  reg.  (fjaben), 

lay,  past  of  lie. 

lead,  fiit)ren,  reg.  (^aben). 

leader,  ber  ^ii^rer,  bie  — . 

learn,  (erneit,  reg.  (l)aben) ;  with 
infin.,  §  81. 

learned,  adj.,  getel)rt. 

least,  am  it»enigften. 

leave  (depart  from),  tjerlaffen, 
tjerltc^,  toerlaffen  (^aben),  er 
Dertcif^t ;  (let  alone  or  fail  to 
take),  tafjctt,  liefi,  gelaffen  (l)a=^ 
ben),  er  tdj^t. 

led,  past  o/lead. 

lesson,  bie  @tunbe,  bie  -n,  §  169, 
2,  Note. 

letter,  ber  33rief,  bie  -e. 

liberator,  ber  ^efreier,  bie  — . 

library,  bie  S3ibtiot^ef',  bie  -en. 

lie,  liegen,  kg,  gdegen  (^aben). 

life,  'i^a^  ?eben,  bie  — . 

like,  mogen,  mod)tc,  gemod)t  {\)a- 
ben),  er  mag,  §  76,  1 ;  gefat* 
ten,  gefief,  gefatten  (^aben),  er 
gefciEt,  §  76,  3 ;  gem,  §  76,  2 
and  1 ;  to  look  — ,  gteid^en, 
glid^,  geglic^en  (^aben),  with 
dat.,  §  76,  3,  Note  ;  —  that,  fo. 

Linden,  prop,  name,  (ba«)  ^inben, 
a  city  near  Hanover. 


line 


342 


messenger 


line  (on  a  page),  bie  ^dU,  blc  -n ; 
bic  ^eilje,  bie  -n. 

listen,  Ijord^cn,  reg.  (l)aben),  to, 
auf  with  ace. 

little,  flein,  §  194, 1 ;  tvenig,  §  194, 
2. 

live,  njo^nett,  reg.  (t)oben),  §  6, 1 ; 
leben,  reg.  C^aben),  §  6,  2. 

long,  longer,  longest,  adj.,  lang, 
Icinger,  am  (angftcn;  adv.,  a  — 
time,  longe ;  no  longer,  ntrf)t 
me^r  ;  as  —  as,  conj.,  fotangc. 

look,  fe^cn,  ja§,  gefc^en  (l)abcn), 
ex  ftc^t ;  oh,  look  !  fiet)  tod} ! 
in  sense  of  to  appear,  au8= 
fel)en, irregr.,sep.  (I^abcn);  to  — 
at,  anfel)en,  irreg.,  sep.  (^aben); 
to  —  for,  juci)cn,  reg.  (l)aben), 
§  7  ;  to  —  like,  gleic^en,  glic^, 
gcgUd)cn  (t)oben),  with  dat., 
§  76,  3,  Note  ;  to  —  through, 
burd)'je^en,  irreg.,  sep.  (^oben); 
to  —  up  (in  dictionary),  nad^'- 
frf)tagen,  fd)fug  naci),  nadjgc- 
fc!)lagcn  (^aben),  er  fd^Icigt  naci). 

lose,  tocrtieren,  bcrlor,  Dcrloren 
(I)aben). 

loss,  ber  SSertuft,  bic  -e. 

lost,  past  of  lose. 

loud,  louder,  loudest,  lout,  tauter, 
am  lauteften. 

love,  licben,  reg.  C^aben)  ;  loving, 
Itebenb. 

Ludwig  (Louis),  (ber)  ?ubung. 

Luise  (Louise),  (blc)  ?utje. 

lying,  see  lie. 

M 
made,  past  of  make, 
maintain,  betjaupten,  reg.,  insep. 


(l^obcn) ;  to  —  oneself,  ftd)  be* 

^au^ten. 
make,  madden,  reg.  (t)aben) ;  to 

—  a  speech,  cine  9^ebc  tjaltcn, 

Ijielt,  ge^alten  (l)abcn),  er  ^dlt, 

§  270,  2,  Note. 
man,  ber  9J?ann,  bie  "er,  §  19,  2 ; 

ber  2Rcnf(^,   beS  -en,    bic  -en, 

§  19,  1. 
many,  pi.,  biete. 
Margaret,  (bie)  2Rargarc'te. 
mark  (German  coin  icorth  24  f), 

bie  9Rarf,  used  in  the  singular 

with  numerals:  groanjig  9Jiarf. 
market,  ber  9JJarft,  bie  "e;  —  day, 

ber  SJ^arfttag,  bic  -c. 
married,  see  marry, 
marry,    toerl^etraten,    reg.,   insep. 

(l)aben),  §  51,  1 ;  ^eiraten,  reg. 

(Ijaben),  §  61,  2. 
marrying,  see  marry. 
Mary,  (bie)  9J?arie'. 
matter,  what's  the  —  ?    SSa«  ifl 

log? 
Maximilian,  (ber)  SD^ayimiliau. 
may,  biirfen,  burfte,  geburft  (^a- 

ben),  er  barf,  §  75,  1;  fbnnen, 

fonnte,  gcfonut  (^aben),  er  faun, 

§  75,  2  ;  uicUeic^t,  §  76,  3. 
me,  mir,  dat.,  mid),  ace. 
mean,  of  things,  bebcuten,  reg., 

insep.    (babcn)  ;     of  persons, 

meinen,  reg.  (^aben). 
meet,  begcgnen,  reg.,  insep.  (fein), 

with  dat.,    §  171,    2;     treffen, 

traf,  gctroffen  (^aben),  er  trifft, 

§   171,   1  ;    feunen  Icrnen,  reg. 

(I)aben),  §  171,  2,  Note. 
message,  bie  ^otfd^aft,  bic  -en. 
messenger,  ber  ©otc,  bc8  -n,  bie  -n. 


met 


343 


noise 


met,  see  meet. 

middle,  bie  Mittt ;  Middle  Ages, 
bag  mitteMtev. 

midnight,  bie  Mxttexnadjt,  bic  H, 

might,  see  may. 

milk,  bie  SJJitd),  ber  — . 

mine,  mein,  ber  meme,  ber  meinige. 

minnesinger,  ber  3Jlinnejdnger, 
bie  — . 

minute,  bie  9JJtnu'te,  bie  -n. 

Miss,  (bag)  grduteitt,  bie  — . 

misspeak,  fid)  Derfpred)en,  Der= 
]pxadi  ft(^,  ftc^  berf^roc^en  (^a= 
belt),  er  Derfprid^t  fid). 

mistake,  ber  %d)Ux,  bie  — . 

misunderstand,  mi^Derfte'ljen, 
mi^oerftanb,  tni^t)erftanben  (I)a= 
ben). 

misunderstood,  see  misunder- 
stand. 

moat,  ber  ^eftuttgggraben,  bie  ^eft* 
nngggrciben. 

Moltke,  (ber)  ^oUte. 

moment,  ber  Slugenbtid,  bie  -e. 

Monday,  ber  SD^ontag,  bie  -e. 

money,  bog  @elb,  bie  -er. 

month,  ber  9}ionat,  bie  -e ;  for — s, 
monotelang. 

more,  niel)r ;  nod),  §  30,  2,  §  62; 
comparative,  §  218,  3. 

morning,  ber  2Rorgen,  bie  — ;  in 
the  — ,  am  9Jiorgen,  morgeng  ; 
written  small  as  an  adverb  when 
used  with  another  abverb  :  ^ente 
morgen,  geftern  morgen. 

most,  ttteift,  am  meiften  ;  superla- 
tive, §  218,  3  ;  mostly,  meifteng. 

mother,  bie  HJJntter,  bie  ^ 

mountain,  ber  53erg,  bie  -e. 

Mr.,  (ber)  §err,  beg  -n,  bie -en. 


much,  'out,  usually  not  declined; 

as  adv.   often  fe^r ;   how  —  ? 

irietjiel? 
Miiller,  prop,  name,  (ber)  9}luIIer. 
Munich,  (bag)  9}Jiinc^en. 
musician,  ber  2)'?u[tfer,  bie  — . 
must,  miiffen,  mu^te,  gemn^t  (l)a- 

ben),  er  mu^,  §  68,  3. 
my,  mein. 
myself,  reflex.,  mtr,  mi(^,  §  196, 

1 ;  intens.,  felbft,  §  196,  2. 

N 
name,  ber  '^ame,  beg  -ng,  bie  -n  ; 

my  —  is,  ic^  f)ei^e,  §  49,  2. 
named,  genannt,  see  nennen,  §  49, 

1 ;   to  be  — ,  t)ei^en,  f)ie§,  ge= 

^eif^en,  §  49,  2. 
Napoleon,  (ber)  9fJapoteon. 
narrow,  eng. 
near,  adj.,  na'^e  (not)er,  am  ndc^= 

ften)  with  dat. ;  prep.,  bei,  with 

dat.,  §  95,  1. 
nearly,  beina^e. 
need,  brand)en,  reg.  (^aben). 
nephew,  ber  9^effe,  beg  -n,  bie  -n, 
never,    nie,    niemalg;    —   fear, 

jdion,  §  128,  2. 
new,  neu. 

news,  bie  9^ad)ric^t,  bie  -en. 
newspaper,  bie  3fitung,  bie  -en. 
next,  ndrf)ft. 
night,  bie  9^a^t,  bie  H. 
nightingale,  bie  Sfla^ix^oM,  bie -en. 
nine,  neun. 
nineteen,  neunje^n. 
no,  adv.,  nein ;  adj.,  fein,  §  9. 
noble,  adj.,  ebet;  noun,  ber  2lbtige, 

bie  -n. 
noise,  ber  ?drm,  beg  -g. 


not 


344 


Otto 


not,  ttlrf)t ;  —  a,  fein,  §  9, 

nothing,  nid^tS ;  a  following  ad- 
jective is  written  with  a  capital : 
mdltg  @c^ted)teg,  §  217. 

notice,  bemerfen,  reg.,  insep.  (^a* 
ben). 

now,  je^t ;  less  often,  nun. 

nowhere,  nirgenb^. 

number  (of  a  house),  bie  ^fJum* 
nter,  bie  -n ;  (figure),  bie  ^a\)l, 
bie  -en. 

Nuremberg,  (bag)  ^Jiirnberg. 


oak  (wood),  baS  6i(f)en^ot5,  bie 
^er ;  —  tree,  bie  (Sic^e,  bie  -n. 

objection,  to  have  any  — ,  ettnaS 
bagegen  t)aben,  I)atte,  ge^abt 
(l)aben),  er  ^at. 

occupy,  befe^en,  reg.,  insep.  (()a> 
ben). 

occur,  Dorfommen,  fam  toor,  »or= 
gefommen  (fein),  §  231,  1  ;  ein= 
fallen,  fiet  ein,  eingefallen  (fein), 
to,  with  dat.,  §  231,  2. 

0^ clock,  U^r,  omitted  as  in  Eng- 
lish, except  when  exact  hour  is 
spoken  of,  §  50,  4  and  §  169,  2. 

of,  Don,  §  99,  3  ;  ait8,  §  94,  2  ; 
omit,  §  99,  3,  Note  a ;  gen., 
§  99,  3,  Note  h ;  —  course, 
natilrlid),  §  262 ;  to  be  afraid 
— ,  fid)  fiird)ten,  reg.  (^aben), 
Dor,  §  26  ;  to  think  — ,  benfen, 
bac^te,  gebad)t  (t)aben),  an  or 
Don,  §  41  (baran  or  baoon). 

office,  ba«  @efcl)dft,  bie  -e. 

often,  oftener,  often  est,  oft,  bfter, 
am  ofteften. 

oh,  o\)\  o!  al)!  ad)\ 


old,  older,  oldest,  alt,  alter,  am 
otteften,  olteft. 

on,  anf,  §  120 ;  on  Hermann 
street,  in  ber  ^ermannftra^e ; 
—  foot,  5U  ^u^;  to  read  — , 
n)eiterlefen,  lo8  n»eiter,  tt)eitcr» 
getefen  (t)aben),  er  Ueft  tt)eiter. 

once,  einmal. 

one,  ein;  man,  §  57  ;  not — ,  fein, 
§  9;  no  — ,  nicmanb;  one's, 
fein ;  the  — ,  ber  eine,  §  29,  2 
or  ber  (berjenige),  §  29,  1  and 
Note,  or  translated  by  an  adjec- 
tive, §  29,  3  and  §  217. 

only,  adv.,  nur,  §  185,  1,  a  ;  erft, 
§  185, 1,6;  adj.,  einjig,  §185,2. 

onto,  anf  toith  ace. 

open,  bffnen,  reg.  (^abcn) ;  anf* 
madden,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben) ; 
§146. 

opera,  bie  Oper,  bie  -n. 

opinion,  bie  9TJeinung,  bie  -en;  in 
my  — ,  meiner  2)ieinung  nac^, 
§  101,  c,  2. 

or,  ober. 

order,  bie  Orbnung,  bie  -en ;  to 
put  in  — ,  in  Orbnung  bringen  ; 
to  — ,  beftellen,  reg.,  insep.  (\)a- 
ben),  §  197,  1 ;  befel)ten,  befaljt, 
befol)len  (baben),  er  befiet)lt, 
§  191,  1  and  §  197,  2  ;  in  —  to, 
um  with  infin.  or  bamit  with 
clause,  §  197,  2,  Note. 

other  (different),  anber,  §  30,  1; 
(more),  noc^,  §  30,  2  ;  each  — , 
ohj.  of  verb,  fid);  obj.  of  prep.  ^ 
einanber,  written  together  with 
preposition :  mitclnanber. 

otherwise,  fonft. 

Otto,  (ber)  Otto. 


ought 


B45 


play 


ought,  jollen,  reg.  (^abcn),  idf)  fott, 

§  69,  2  and  4,  c. 
out  of,  au8,  §  94,  1 ;  — it,  borauS ; 

to  carry  — ,   burrfj'fe^en,  reg.^ 

sep.  (^aben);  to  go — ,  augge^en, 

ging  au«,  auSgegongcn  (fein). 
outing,  ber  2tugfhig,  bie  ^ilu^fliige. 
outside,  adv.,  brau^en. 
over,    adv.,    l^iniiber ;    —  there, 

bort(^in),  §  16,  1 ;  prep.,  iiber, 

§  123,  1. 
overwork,  jtrf)  iiberor'beiten,  reg., 

insep.  (t)oben). 
owe,   to  —  to,    oerbanfen,    reg., 

insep.  (tjahen),  with  dat. 
own,  adj.,  eigen. 


page,  bie  @eite,  bie  -n. 

paid,  see  pay. 

pains,  bie  3}?u^e,  bie  -n  ;  to  take 
— ,  fid^  9)iii^e  geben,  gab,  gegeben 
(t)aben),  er  gibt,  §  183,  4,  Note. 

painting,  ba§  ©emalbe,  bie  — . 

paper,  bag  ^^apier',  bie-e;  news — , 
bie  3eitung,  bie  -en. 

parents,  bie  ©(tern  {pi.). 

park,  ber  ^^arf,  bie  -e. 

parliament,  \ia<i  ^arlament',  bie 
-e. 

parlor,  ber  @aIon',  bie  -8. 

part,  ber  ^^eil,  bie  -e ;  to  take  — , 
teiine^men,  nat)m  teil,  teilge= 
nomnten  (^aben),  er  nimmt  teil, 
in,  an  with  dat. 

particular,  bcfonber. 

pass,  reic^en,  reg.  (^aben),  §  246, 
1 ;  {time)  ucrge^en,  ijerging,  t)er= 
gangen  (fein),  §  246,  2;  t)er= 
bringen,    berbradite,    oerbrad)t 


(^aben),  §  246,3;  {to  go  by) 
an  etraaS  {dat.),  borbeige^en, 
irreg.,  sep.  (fein),  §  246,  4  ;  {in 
school,  intrans.)  tierfe^t  toerben, 
ftjurbe,  gettjorben  (fein),  er  iDirb 
ijerfe^t,  §  246,  4,  Note;  {in 
school,  trans.)  be[tel)en,  beftattb, 
beftanben  (^aben),  §  269,  2, 
Note. 
past,  see  pass ;  half  —  ten,  ^alb 

etf. 

path,  ber  ^fab,  bie  -c. 

pattern,  ba§  SJiufter,  bie  — . 

pay,  bejaf)len,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben); 
to  —  attention,  od^tgeben,  gab 
ac^t,  ac^tgegeben  (^oben),  er  gibt 
ad)t,  to,  auf  with  ace. 

peace,  ber  griebe,  beg  -ng. 

pen,  bie  ^ebev,  bie  -n. 

pencil,  ber  33leiftift,  bie  -e. 

people,  bie  l^ente  {pL);  bie  3JJen* 
fd)en,  §  19,  1 ;  man,  §  57  ;  nation 
or  race,  bag  ^olf,  bie  ""er. 

perhaps,  l)ieUeici)t. 

person,  ber  9}?enfd),  beg  -en,  bie 
-en,  §  19, 1 ;  bie  ^erfon',  bie  -en. 

philosophy,  bie  ^t)i(ofop^ie'. 

piano,  bag  Glacier',  bie  -e. 

picture,  bag  iBilb,  bie  -er ;  bag  @e= 
mcilbe,  bie  —  {painting);  — 
gallery,  bie  ©emcilbegolerie',  bie 
-en. 

picturesque,  ntalerifd). 

piece,  bag  @tiic!,  bie  -e. 

place,  ber  Ort,  bie  -e  and  "er, 
§  150,  1;  bie  @teUe,  bie  -n, 
§  150,  3;  bie  ©teEung,  bie  -en, 
§  150,  4 ;  to  take  — ,  ftattfinben, 
fanb  [tatt,  ftattgefunben  (^aben). 

play,  bag  2>pid,  bie  -e;  bag  @c^au= 


pleasant 


346 


rave 


fplel,  ble  -e ;  to  — ,  j^ielen,  reg. 

(l^abcTi). 
pleasant(ly),  angenc^m. 
please,    gefallen,    gefiel,    gefaHen 

(Ijaben),  er  gefciUt,  with  dat.; 

as  he  — d,  tt)ie  eS  i^m  gefiet ;  if 

you  — ,  bitte,  §  15,  1,  6,  Note. 
pocket,  bie  XaS^t,  bie  -en. 
polite(ly),  I)ofIi^. 
poor,  orm. 
popular,  beliebt. 
post  office,  bie  ^^oft,  bie  -en ;  to  the 

— ,  auf  bie  ^oft,  §  120,  3,  Note  a. 
Potsdam,  {^^a^)  ^otSbam. 
power,  bie  50Jac^t,  bie  "^t ;  a  great 

— ,  eine  @ro§morf)t. 
present',    {introduce),  Dorftellen, 

reg.,    sep.    (l)aben),   with  two 

objects,  ace.  and  dat. 
pres'ent,  ba'i  @cfci)enf,  bie  -e, 
pretty,  ^iibfd^. 
prince  (appointed),  ber  ^^iirft,  bc8 

-en,  bie  -en;  young  son  of  a 

king,   ber  ^ring,  be8   -en,    bie 

-en. 
printing,  bie  2)rucferei',  bie  -en; 

art  of  — ,  bie  S3nd)brn(ferfunft. 
print  shop,  bie  2)ru(!erei',  bie  -en. 
prison,  ba8  ©cfangni^,  beS  -ffe8, 

bie  -f[e. 
prisoner,  ber  ©efangene,  be«  -n, 

bie  -n. 
prize,  ber  ^rei«,  bie  -e. 
probably,    n)al)rfd)einUci) ;    tt)ol)t, 

§88. 
professor,  ber  ^^rofef'for,  be«  -8, 

bie  ^^rofeffo'ren. 
pronounce,  angfpred)en,  jprad)  au8, 

au«gcfprod)en  (l)aben),  er  jpric^t 


proud,  ftolg,  of,  ant  with  ace. 
Prussia,  (bag)  ^reufeen. 
public,  ta^  ^nblitum,  beg  -8. 
punish,  beftrafen,  reg.,in8ep.  (l)a» 

ben). 
pupil,  ber  @d)u{er,  bie  — . 
put,  fteUen,  reg.    (t)aben),  §  222, 

1;  Iegen,re9f.  (l)aben),  §  222,  2; 

fe^en,  reg.  (^aben),  §  222,  3; 

fteden,  reg.  (fjaben),  §  222,  4  ; 

tun,  tat,  getan  (t)aben),  §  222, 5 ; 

to  —  on  (a  hat),  auffe^en,  reg., 

sep.  (I)aben) ;   (clothes),  anjie* 

I)en,  jog  an,  angejogen  (^aben). 


quality,  bie  (Sigenfc^aft,  bie  -en. 
quarrel,    ganfen,    reg.    (f)aben) ; 

ftreiten,  ftritt,  geftritten  (t)aben); 

quarrelling,  jan!enb. 
quarter,  ba^  35iertet,  bie  — ;  (of 

money),  eine  Tlaxt ;  — to  three, 

brei  3>iertel  brei. 
queen,  bie  ^onigin,  bie  -nen. 
question,  bie  ^rage,  bie  -n ;  to  ask 

(put)  —a,  ^ragen  ftellen,  reg. 

(t)aben). 
quiet,  rnl)ig. 
quite,  ganj. 

R 

rain,  ber  5Regen,  bie  — ;  to  — , 

regnen,  reg.  (tjaben). 
rapidly,  jc^neU. 
rate,  at  any  — ,  jebenfaUS,  auf  je- 

ben  gaU,  auf  alle  '^dUe. 
reach,  erreic^en,  reg.,  insep.  (^a» 

ben). 
rave,    jdjnjcirmcn,    reg.    (^aben), 

about,  fttr. 


read 


347 


sank 


read,  tefen,  tag,  gelcfen  (^aben),  er 

Ueft. 
ready,    bereit,   §   195,   1 ;    fertig, 

§  195,  2. 
really,  tt)ir!(ict). 

reason,  ber  ®runb,  bie  ''t,  §  260. 
receive,  empfongen,  em^fing,  tmp= 

fangeit   (^obcn),    er   em)3fangt, 

§  261,  2 ;  er^alten,  er^ielt,  ert)al= 

ten  (^aben),  er  er^alt,  §  261,  1. 
recognize,  erfennen,  erfannte,  er- 

fannt  (^aben). 
recommend,    em^fel)(en,   empfa^t, 

empfo^len  C^aben),  er  empfiel)It. 
recover,  fid)  er^olen,  reg.,  insep. 

(^aben). 
red,  rot. 
redbeard,     (ber)   5Rotbart;    (ber) 

S3arbarof[a. 
regards,  to  give  —  to,  grii^en,  reg. 

(^aben),  with  ace. 
remain,   bletben,  btieb,   gebfteben 

(fetn),  §  180,  1. 
remark,  bie  S3emer!itng,  bie  -en. 
remember,  fic^  erinnern,  reg.,  in- 
sep. (\}ahen),  with  gen.  or  an 

with  ace. 
remind,  erimtern,  reg.,  insep.  (f)a= 

ben),  of,  an  with  ace. 
reply,  antlDorten,  reg.  (^aben). 
resound,  ertbnen,  reg.,  insep.  (^a= 

ben) ;  er^allen,  reg.,  insep.  (ija-- 

ben). 
rest,  to  —  thoroughly,  fid)  augru= 

^en,  reg.,  sep.  (\)ahen). 
restore,  ttJieberl^er'ftetten,  reg.,  sep. 

(^aben). 
retire,  fic^   ;mrucf';5ief)en,  jog   ftc^ 

juriicf,   fid)   guriid'gejogen   (t)a^ 

ben). 


return,    i^uriid'febren,    reg.,    sep. 

(jein). 
right,  bo6  5fte(^t,  bie  -e ;  to  be  — , 

rec^t  :^aben,   §  172,   1;    ric^tig 

fein,  §  172,  2 ;  ba§  ftimntt,  §  172, 

2,  Note  ;  all  — ,  frf)on,  gut. 
river,  ber  ^tu^,  bie  "e. 
rock,  ber  ^ets,  beg  -en,  bie  -en. 
Roland,  (ber)  ^olanb. 
roll  (bread),  ba^  S3rbtd)en,  bie  — . 
Roman,  ber  Stomer,  bie — ;  adj., 

romifd). 
Rome,  (ba^)  9fiom. 
room,   bag  3itttmer,  bie  — ;   ber 

fla^,  §  150,  2,  b ;    ber  9^aum, 

§  150,  2,  c,  Note. 
round,  prep.,   um,   §  111,  1;  — 

about,  utn  .  .  .  I)erunt. 
ruin,  bie  'Stui'ne,  bie  -n. 
rule,   bie   9lege(,   bie  -n;    to  — , 

regieren,  regierte,  regiert    (^a= 

ben). 
ruler,  ber  §errfc^er,  bie  — . 
run,  laufen,  lief,  gelaufen  (fein),  er 

Iciuft. 


sadly,  traurig. 

saga,  bie  @age,  bie  -n. 

said,  see  say. 

sake,  WiUen ;  for  my  — ,  um  mei=- 

nettt)itten ;  for  heaven's  — ,  um 

§imttte(8  raillen. 
same,  fetb ;  the  — ,  berfelbe,  bie- 

felbe,  bagfelbe,   gen.,    begfelben, 

etc. 
sandwich,     bag    iButterbrot,     bie 

-e;   ham   — ,    33utterbrot    ntit 

@d^infen. 
sank,  see  sink. 


Sans  Souci 


348 


sitting 


Sans  Souci,  (bag)  @an«  @ouci, 

(bo8)  0{)ne  @orge. 
sat,  see  sit. 

satchel,  bie  3^cifetojrf)e,  bic  -n. 
saw,  see  see. 
say,  fagen,  reg.  (^aben). 
Schiller,  (bcr)  @(i)iUer. 
Schoneberg,  (ha^)  (Sc^oneberg. 
school,  bic  <S(i)ii(c,  bie  -n ;  to  — , 

in  bie  ©djule,  §  121,  jur  @ci)u(c, 

§  121,  Note. 
scold,    fdjelten,    fc^att,    gefc^olten 

(^abcn),  er  fd)i(t. 
seat,  ber  ^(a^J,  bie  ""e,  §  150,  2,  c; 

—  of  honor,  ber  (S^ren^ta^,  bie 

seated,  to  remain  — ,  fl^en  bfeibcn, 
biteb,  gebUeben  (fein),  §  180,  1. 

see,  feben,  fat),  gejet)eu  (babeu), 
§  180, 1 ;  (to  look  at),  an'fet)en, 
irrcg.y  sep.  (babeu)  ;  (to  inter- 
view), fpred)eu,fprarf),  gef)3rod)eu 
(tjaben),  er  fprid)t,  §  270,  1, 
Note. 

seem,  jd^einen,  fc^ien,  gefc^ienen 
(^aben). 

self,  reflex,  (him,  her,  them,  etc.), 
fid),  §  196,  1 ;  my—,  mid^  ;  thy 
— ,  bid) ;  intens.,  felbft,  felber, 
§  196,  2. 

sell,  toerfaufen,  reg.,  insep.  (j:)a^ 
ben). 

senator,  ber  @ena'tor,  bic  @enato'* 
ren. 

'send,  fd)icfen,  ref7.  (boben);  fenben, 
fonbte,  gefanbt  (babeu). 

sentence,  bcr  <Sa^,  bie  "e. 

set,  fetjen,  reg.  (babeu);  of  a 
watch,  ftellen,  reg.  (^aben), 
§  222,  1,  Note, 


seven,  fieben. 

seventh,  bag  @ieb(eu)tel,  bic  — . 

several,  (pi.)  me^rere. 

severity,  bie  ©trenge,  ber  — . 

sew,  nd^en,  reg.  (^aben). 

shady,  fd)attig. 

shall,  merben,  §  69, 1 ;  foUen,  §  69, 

2  ;  rt)olIen,  §  69,  3,  and  Note, 
she,  fie ;  c8,  §  207,  Note. 
sheet    (of  paper),    bcr    33ogcu, 

bic  — . 
short,    shorter,    shortest,     fnrg, 

furijcr,  am  fiirjeften. 
should,  foUtc,  see  foUen,  §  69,  2. 
shouldn't,  see  should  not. 
show,  geigen,  reg.  (i)abcn) ;  to  — 

oneself,  ftd^  geigen ;  (to  prove) 

beineifeu,  bettjieg,  bett)iefcn  (I)a- 

beu). 
sick,  frant. 

siege,  bie  33elageruug,  hie  -en. 
Siegfried,  (ber)  @iegfrieb. 
silk,  bie  @cibc,  bic  -u ;  of  — ,  uon 

@eibe,  feibcn. 
simple,  ciufad). 
since,  prep.,  feit,  §  98,  1 ;  conj., 

feitbem  icith  transposed  order. 
sing,  ftugcn,  fang,  gefungeu  (ba= 

\iex(), 
singer,  ber  (Sanger,  bic  — ;  — 's 

contest,  ber  (Saugcrfrieg,  bic  -c. 
single,  cinjig,  §  9. 
sink,  finfen,  fanf,  gefunfeu  (feiu) ; 

to  — down,  nie'berfiuten,  irreg., 

sep.  (feiu). 
sister,  bic  @d)mcfler,  bic  -n. 
sit,  fi^en,  fafj,  gefeffcu    (babeu), 

§  18,  1 ;  to  —  down,  fic^  fc^cn, 

reg.  (bobcu),  §  18,  2. 
sitting,  see  sit ;  was  sitting,  fa§. 


sixty 


349 


study 


sixty,  jcd^sig, 

sleep,  fc^kfen,  fc^Iief,  gefc^tafcn 
(^aben),  er  fd)(oft 

slept,  see  sleep. 

slowly,  langfam. 

Smith,  @d)mibt. 

snow,  ber  ©c^nee,  be§  -g. 

so,  jo,  §  26,  1 ;  alfo,  §  26,  2  ;  fo 
jc^r,  §  35,  a,  sentence  4 ;  to 
think — ,  e§,  ba?,  or  omit,  §  157, 
1 ;  eben,  §  20,  2,  Note. 

sofa,  ba^  ®ofa,  bic  -§. 

sold,  see  sell. 

solve,  lofen,  reg.  (l)aben). 

some,  etnig ;  often  omitted;  — 
more,  nod),  §  30,  2  ;  —  bread, 
ettt)a§  SSrot. 

someone,  jentanb, 

something,  ettDOS;  a  foUomng 
adjective  is  written  with  a  cap- 
ital:  etttjag  @ute«,  §  217. 

sometimes,  juttjeileu,  §  50,  3,  Note. 

son,  ber  ®o^n,  bie  "e. 

song,  ber  ©efang',  bie  "e ;  ba«  !?ieb, 
bie  -er. 

soon,  balb. 

sorry,  leib  tun,  tat,  getaii  C^oben), 
with  dat. ;  I  am  — ,  e8  tut  mir 
leib. 

soul  (person),  ber  9}ienfd),  beg 
-en,  bie  -en ;  {spirit),  bie  @ee(e, 
bie  -n» 

Spain,  (bag)  @^anten. 

speak,  ipxe6)tn,  fprad),  gefprod^en 
(^aben),  er   f|3rtd)t,  §  270,  1 
reben,  reg.  c!)aben),  §  270,  2 
to  —  German,  3)eutf(^  fpred)en 
to  —  to,  ajtreben,  reg.,  sep.  (^a= 
ben),  with  ace. 

speaker,  ber  9?ebner,  bie  — . 


speech,  bie  9?ebe,  bie  -n  ;  to  make 
a  — ,  eine  dttht  ^alten,  ^iett,  ge= 
l)alten  ({)aben),  er  pit. 

spend  (time),  Derbringen,  Der= 
brac^te,  tierbrod^t  (Ijaben). 

spread,  fid^  Oerbreiten,  reg.,  insep. 
(baben). 

spring  (season),  ber  ^riitjling,  bie 
-e ;  (water),  bie  OueEe,  bie  -u. 

square,  ber  ^ta^,  bie  H,  §  150,  2,  a. 

stage  (theatre),  bie  S3iif)ne,  bie  -n. 

stand,  fte^en,  ftanb,  geftanben  (ba= 
ben),  §  221,  1 ;  tetben,  litt,  ge= 
atten  (l^aben),  §  221,  2 ;  to  — 
up,  anf  fteljen,  irreg.,  sep.  (fein), 

stay,  bteiben,  blieb,  geblieben 
(fein\ 

still  (of  time,  yet),  nod). 

stop,  aufpren,  reg.,  sep.  (I)aben), 
with  ju  andinfin.,  §  180,  2  ;  (o/ 
pupils  in  the  class)  [tel)en 
bleiben,  bUeb,  geblieben  (fein). 

store,  ber  i^aben,  bie  —  and  \ 

story,  bie  ®ej(^id)te,  bie  -n;  bie 
Sr^ci^tung,  bie  -en. 

strange,  fremb,  §  271,  2  ;  jettfani, 
§  271,  1;  stranger,  noun,  ber 
grembe,  beg  -n,  bie  -n. 

street,  bie  @tra^e,  bie  -n ;  icith 
prop,  nouns,  §  299. 

strike,  fd)ta gen,  jd^tug,  gefd^Iagen 
(baben),  er  fd)Iagt. 

strong,  stronger,  strongest,  [tarf, 
ftarfer,  ftdrfft,  om  ftarfften. 

struck,  see  strike. 

study,  lernen,  reg.  (pben) ; 
treiben,  trieb,  getrieben  (pben); 
to  do  advanced  — ,  to  be  a  stu- 
dent, ftubie'ren,  [tubier'te,  ftu= 
biert'  (Ijaben). 


subjugate 


350 


that 


subjugate,    unterrt)er'fen,    untcr= 

tt)arf' ,  untemor'fen  (^aben),  er 

unteririrft'. 
succeed,    getingen,    gelong,     gc= 

lungen  (fetn),  with  dat.,  §  180, 

2  ;  I  — ,  eg  gelingt  mir. 
such,   fold),  fo  ;    had  —  a  good 

time,  fo  gut  amiifiert ;  —  a  good 

man,  ein  fo  guter  2Jiann. 
suddenly,  ptotjUci^. 
sugar,  ber  ^ndex,  be8  -«. 
suit,  ber  ^Ingug,  bie  ^Injiige. 
summer,  ber  @ommer,  bie  — . 
Sunday,  ber  ©onntag,  bie  -e. 
sunset,    ber    ©on'nenun'tergattg, 

bie  (Son'nenuTi'tergange. 
sup,  5u  3tbenb  effen,  a^,  gegeffen 

(^oben),  er  i^t. 
supper,  bag  5lbenbe[fen,  bie  — . 
support,  unterftut'jen,  reg.,  insep. 

(^aben), 
sure,  [ic^er. 
surrender,  fi(^  ergcbcn,  ergab  ftd^, 

ftd^  crgcben  (l)abcn),  er  ergibt 

sweet,  fii^. 

swiftly,  frf)neU. 

sword,  bag  <Bd)Wext,  bie  -er. 


table,  ber  Xifrf),  bie  -e. 

tailor,  ber  @d)neiber,  bie  — . 

take,  net)men,  ual)in,  genommcn 
(^aben),  er  nimmt,  §  183 ; 
(of  time)  bauern,  reg.  (Ijabeu), 
§  183,  1 ;  (a  train)  fal)ren  mit, 
fu^r,  gefaljren  (jein),  er  faljrt  mit 
with  dat.,  §  183,  2;  (trip),  ma-^ 
d)en,  reg.  (l)aben),  §  183,  3 ;  to 
—  for,  l)alteu  filr,  l)ielt,  gel)alten 


(^aben),  er  I)alt  fflr  with  acc.^ 
§  183,  4 ;  to  —  out,  \)evavi^ne\)-' 
men,  irreg.,  sep.  (^aben);  to  — 
part,  teilnel)men,  irreg.,  sep. 
(^aben);  to  — place,  [tattfinben, 
fanb  ftott,  ftattgefunben  (^aben) ; 
to  —  pains,  fid^  (^dat.),  2}JuI)e 
geben,  gab,  gegeben  (Ijabcn), 
er  gibt  ftd)  miilje,  §  183,  4, 
Note. 

talk,  fpred)en,  fprad),  gefprorfjen 
(fiaben),  er  ]pvid}t,  §  270,  1; 
reben,  reg.  (^aben),  §  270,  2. 

Tannhauser,  (ber)  S^ann^dufer. 

tavern,  ta^  BirtS^aug,  bie  2Birtg= 
pufer. 

tea,  ber  Xttj  beg  -g,  bie  -e  or  bie 
-g. 

teach,  lebren,  reg.  (^aben),  with 
infln.,  §  81. 

teacher,  ber  !?el)rer,  bie  — ; 
(woman)  bie  ^el)rerin,  bie  -ncn. 

tear,  rei^en,  ri0,  gerifjen  (^aben) ; 
to—  up,  jerrei^en,  irreg.,  insep. 
(^abeu). 

Tell,  (ber)  Sett. 

tell,  erjdliten,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
§  28,  1 ;  fagcn,  reg.  (^abcn), 
§  28,  2  ;  with  ta^-^clause,  §  191. 

ten,  5el)n. 

tennis,  bag  Xennig,  beg  — . 

than,  alg,  §  83,  1. 

thank,  banfeu,  reg.  (l)aben),  with 
dat.  ;  —  you  1  banfe  I 

that,  con}.,  ba^  loith  transposed 
order,  §  211,  1  ;  demonstrative, 
ber,  bie,  bag,  §  211,  3,  a,  or 
jcner,  §  211,  3,  b  ;  relative,  ber 
or  n)clrf)er,  §  211,  2,  or  \va9, 
§  211,  2,  Note  ;  like  — ,  fo. 


the 


351 


together 


the,  art.,  hex,  bie,  ba§;  correL, 
the  .  .  .  the,  jc .  . .  befto,  §  223. 

theatre,  baS  2;^eater,  bie  — » 

their,  i^r, 

them,  dat.,  il^nett;  ace.,  jte,  biefe(= 
ben  ;  with  preps.,  ba(r),  §  106, 1. 

themselves,  fid^, 

then,  bann,  §  59,  1 ;  bamalg,  §  59, 
2  ;  and  — ,  ta,  §  17,  1  and  §  59, 
3. 

there,  bort,  §  16,  1 ;  ba,  §  16,  2  ; 
—  is,  e8  gibt,  §  85,  1  or  e«  ift, 
§  85,  2  ;  omitted,  §  85,  2,  and 
Note. 

these,  see  this. 

they,  fie ;  man,  §  57. 

thief,  ber  S)ieb,  bie  -e. 

thing,  bag  3)ing,  bie  -e;  — s, 
bie  @ad^en. 

think,  benfen,  bocf)te,  gebac^t  (^a= 
ben),  of,  an,  §41, 1  or  don,  §41, 
2 ;  gtauben,  reg.  (^aben),  §  157, 
1,  and  Note ;  meinen,  reg.  (^o- 
ben),  §  157, 1 ;  ein'faUen,  fiet  ein, 
eingefallen  (jein),  eg  fcittt  ein, 
with  dat.,  §  41,  1,  Note  ;  finben, 
fanb,  gefunben  (^aben)  or  fatten 
fiir,  ^ielt,  gel)a(ten  (i^ahen),  er 
l^alt  fiir  with  ace,  §  157,  3. 

thirty,  brei^ig. 

this,  these,  biefer,  biefe  ;  —  even- 
ing, l^eute  abenb. 

thither,  l^in,  §  149,  1 ;  hither  and 
— ,  ^in  unb  ^er,  §  149,  2. 

thorough,  tiidjtig ;  thoroughly 
convinced,  feft  iiberjengt ! 

those,  see  that ;  —  are,  ha^  fmb, 
§211,3,  Note, 

though,  obtDO^t  with  transposed 
order. 


thought,  see  think. 

thousand,  taufenb ;  — s,  bie  %a\X' 
fenbe. 

three,  bret;  —  times,  breimal, 
§  50,  3,  Note. 

thrive,  gebei^en,  gebie^,  gebie^en 
(fein). 

throne,  ber  2::t)ron,  bie  -e. 

through,  burc^  ivith  ace. ;  to  look 
— ,  bnrrf)'fel)en,  fa^  burc^,  burd^':= 
gefe^en  (^aben). 

till,  conj.,  big  icith  the  transposed 
order ;  prep.,  big,  §  107,  1. 

time,  bie  ^eit,  bie  -en,  §  50,  1 ; 
eine  3^it(ang,  §  50,  2 ;  a  long 
— ,  lange,  §  50,  2,  Note  ;  bag 
ma\,  bie  -e,  §  50,  3 ;  three  — s, 
etc.,  breimal,  §  50,  3,  Note; 
sometimes,  juttjeiten,  §  50,  3, 
Note ;  how  many  times,  lt)ie  oft, 
§  50,  3,  Note ;  what  —  is  it  ? 
iDieoiet  U^r,  §  50,  4  and  §  169, 
2,  or  tt)ie  f|3at,  §  50,  4 ;  to  have 
a  good  — ,  fid)  (gut)  antiifie'ren, 
amiifier'te,  amiifiert  (^aben), 
§  50,  5. 

tired,  niiibe,  of,  gen.,  §  99,  3, 
Note  h. 

to,  nac^,  §  97,  1  ;  ju,  §  100,  1 ; 
auf,  §  120,  3,  Note  a ;  gegen, 
§  110,  2;  in,  §  121  ;withinfin., 
gn  or  nm  ju ;  —  and  fro,  l)in 
nnb  l^er,  §  149,  2 ;  sometimes 
dative;  sometimes  a  clause 
after  to  tell,  as  in  §  32,  6,  1 
and  c,  2. 

to-day,  adv.,  i^ente ;  adj.  (of)  — , 
^entig,  Prussia  of  — ,  bag 
^eutige  ^^reu^en. 

together,  sufammen. 


told 


352 


voice 


told,  see  tell. 

to-morrow,  tnorgen;  for  — ,  auf 

morgen;    day   after  — ,    uber= 

morgen. 
to-night,  ^eutc  aBcnb. 
too,  gu,  aud),  §  100,  4,  Note. 
took,  see  take. 
top,    bie    ®pifec,    bie  -n ;    {of  a 

mountain),  ber  ©i^fel,  bie  — ; 

on  —  of,  auf,  §  120,  1. 
toward,  gegen  with  ace,  §  110. 
town,  bie  @tabt,  bie  ^e ;  down  — , 

in  ber  or  bie  @tabt;  to  — ,  in 

bie  @tabt. 
train,  ber  3ug,  bie  "e. 
translate,  iiberfet'i^en,  regr.,  insep. 

(^aben),  see  also  §  164,  2,  Note ; 

{in  class)  to  be  translated,  t)ei= 

J3en,  ^ie^,  ge^ei^en  (^aben),  §  49, 

2,  Note. 
translation,   bie    Uberfe^ung,   bie 

-en ;  —  of  the  Bible,  bie  ^i'be(= 

iiberfe^ung,  bie  -en, 
travel,  reifen,  r^'gf.  (l)aben  or  jein), 

§  107,  1  and  2. 
tree,  ber  S3auin,  bie  53anme. 
tremble,  gittern,  reg.  (i)aben). 
trip,  bie  5Reife,  bie  -n. 
true,  tt)a\)v ;  it's  — ,  I'max,  aller= 

bing«,  §  274. 
try,   t)erfud)en,  reg.,   insep.   (l^a» 

ben). 
twelve,  gnjolf. 
twenty,  jman^ig. 
twenty-five,  funf'unbjinan'jlg. 
twice,  jiueimal. 
twist,  DerbreMjen,  reg.,  insep.  (^a« 

ben). 
two,  jttjel ;  the  — ,  bie  beiben,  170, 

2,  Note. 


uncle,  ber  Onfet,  bie  — . 

unconscious,  ot)nmdd)tig. 

under,  unter  with  dat.  or  acc.^ 
§124. 

understand,  tjerfte^en,  tjerftanb, 
berftanben  (l)aben). 

undertake,  unternei)'men,  unter= 
na^m',  nnternom'men  (^ben), 
er  nnternimmt'. 

unhappy,  nn'gtiicflid). 

unification,  bie  Sinigung,  bie  -en. 

unite,  oereinen ;  united,  einig. 

until,  conj.,  big  with  the  trans- 
posed order;  prep.,  biS,  §  107, 
1. 

up,  oben  {rest);  entpor  {motion); 
to  bring  — ,  erijietjen,  ergog,  er» 
jogen  (I)aben) ;  to  keep  — ,  oer= 
forgen,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben) ; 
to  tear  — ,  jerrci^en,  gerri^,  ger= 
ri^en  (^aben). 

upon,  an^with  dat.  or  ace,  §  120, 1. 

us,  un«. 

used,  adj.,  gettjo'^nt,  to,  an  with 
ace. 

usually,  gett)ol}ntic^. 


valley,  baS  %a\,  bie  «cr. 

van    {Dutch),   Dan ;     {German) 

Don. 
Varus,  (ber)  9?arn«. 
vault,  bie  ©ruft,  bie  "e. 
very,  ic{)r. 

Vienna,  (baS)  SSicn. 
village,  boe  ^orf,  bie  «er. 
visit,   ber  33ejnd),  bie  -c;  to  — , 

befuci)en,  reg.,  insep.  (l)abcn). 
voice,  bie  ®ttmnie,  bie  -n. 


vote 


353 


William 


vote,  ftintnten,  reg.  (^aben),  for, 
fiir  with  ace. 

W 

wager,  bie  SBettc,  bie  -n ;  for  a 
— ,  urn  bie  2Bettc,  §  111,  2,  Note. 

Wagner,  (ber)  Sogner. 

wait,  trarten,  reg.  (^aben),  for, 
auf,  §  8 ;  to  —  on,  bebienen, 
reg..,  insep.  (^aben). 

waiter,  ber  ^eltner,  bie  — . 

walk,  to  go  — ing,  or  for  a  — , 
j^agierett  gel)en,  ging,  gegangen 
(fein),  §  180,  1. 

Walter,  (ber)  SBatt^er. 

want,  to  —  to,  rtJoUen,  iDoIIte,  ge= 
tDottt  (^aben),  er  triU,  §  40,  1. 

war,  ber  ^rteg,  bie  -e. 

warm,  iDarm. 

Wartburg,  bie  SBartburg. 

was,  see  be. 

wasn't,  see  was  not. 

watch,  bie  Ut)r,  bie  -en,  §  169,  1. 

waterfall,  ber  SSafferfoII,  bie  ^aU 
jerfdUe. 

way,  ber  2Beg,  bie  -e,  §  249,  1 ; 
bie  SSeife,  bie  -n,  §  249,  2 ;  in 
this  — ,  aitf  biefe  SBeife ;  by  — 
of,  iiber,  §  123,  2,  Note. 

we,  tt)ir;  man,  §  57. 

weather,  ba«  ^Better,  bie  — . 

week,  bie  3Bocf)e,  bie  -en. 

Weinsberg,  (bag)  2Bein8berg, 

welcome,  you're  — ,  bitte,  §  15, 1, 
&,  Note. 

well,  noun,  ber  S3runnen,  bie  — ; 
adv.,  gut,  §  234,  1  ;  nun,  §  234, 
2  ;  adj.,  rt)o^I,  §  206,  1,  and 
§  234,  3  ;  see  also  §  88,  Note  ; 
—  known,  betannt. 


went,  see  go. 

were,  see  be. 

west,  adj.,  njefttic!^. 

what,  Ujag,  n)elc^,  §  210;  —  kind 
of,  rt)aS  fiir  (ein),  §  210  ;  —for, 
ujarum,  h)ofiir;  tnorauf  (n)ar= 
ten) ;  —  of,  njoran  (benfen), 
§  41,  1 ;  —  is  your  name  ?  2Bic 
^ei^en  @te  ?  §  49,  2  ;  —  time, 
iDieDiet  U^r,  §  50,  4. 

whatever,  tt)a8  and),  §  257,  2. 

when,  atg,  §  84,  1 ;  njenn,  §  84,  2 ; 
rtjonn,  §  84,  3. 

whenever,  tt)enn,  §  84,  2. 

where,  tt)0  ;  n)ol)in  (whither), 

wherever,  wo  audj. 

whether,  ob  with  the  transposed 
order. 

which,  rel.,  ber,  totldjn,  §  209; 
interrog.,  n^eld^er,  §  209  ;  with 
preps.,  tt)o(r),  §  106,  2. 

while,  n)al)renb  with  the  trans- 
posed order ;  bei,  §  95,  2. 

whisper,  fUiftern,  reg.  (!)aben). 

who,  rel.,  ber,  ttJeld^er,  §  208  ;  in- 
terrog., rt)eld)er,  votx,  §  208. 

whole,  ganj. 

whom,  see  who. 

why,  tnarum ;  ja,  §  200,  2. 

wide,  breit  {not  n^eit,  far). 

widow,  bie  3Bittt)e,  bie  -n ;  grass 
— ,  bie  ® tropin itnje. 

wild,  n)i(b ;  to  be  —  about,  fd)tt)ar^ 
men  fiir,  reg.  (I^aben),  §  109,  2. 

will,  ber  SBitte,  beg  -nS ;  against 
my  — ,  miber  meinen  2Bitten; 
verb  {future),  luerben,  §  69,  1 ; 
{wish),  moEen,  §  40,  1,  and 
§  69,  3. 

William,  (ber)  SBit^elm. 


354 


youth 


win,  intrans.^  ftegcn,  reg.  (^oben), 
§  27  ;  trans. ^  to  —  over,  gett)in= 
ncn,  gcnjann,  gchjonncn  (^a* 
ben). 

window,  bag  ^enfter,  bie  — . 

winter,  ber  SBinter,  bic  — . 

wish,  miinfd^en,  reg.  (^aben),  §  40, 
2  ;  with  phrase  or  clause.,  §  191, 
.1 ;  njollen,  tDottte,  gettJoUt  (^a^ 
ben),  er  tt)iU,  §  40,  1. 

with,  mit,  §  96  ;  bet,  §  95,  2  and  3. 

without,  o^nc,  with  ace. ;  with 
injin.,  §  181 ;  with  clause,  §  190. 

woman,  bie  ^rau,  bie  -en  ;  (po- 
etic), bag  SSeib,  bie  -er;  the 
women  of  Weinsberg,  bie  2Bei* 
ber  bon  SBcinSberg. 

won,  see  win. 

wonderful,  tt)unberbott ;  more  — , 
§  218,  3. 

won't,  see  will  not. 

wood,  (forest),  ber  SSatb,  bic  "er; 
(for fire),  bag  ^ot^,  bie  "er. 

word,  bag  SSort,  bie  SSorter  (sep- 
arate words,  as  in  bag  2Borter= 
buc^,  dictionary),  or  bie  SBorte 
(connected  discourse). 

work,  bie  Slrbeit,  bie  -en  (labor) ; 
bag  SSerf,  bie  -e  (the  results  of 
labor,  as  a  book,  statue,  etc. ) ; 
to  — ,  orbeiten,  reg.  (^aben). 


Worms,  (bag)  SBormg. 

would,   iDiirbe,   n)oUte ;    see  also 

subj.,  §  254. 
wreath,    ber    ^ranj,   bic  "t;    to 

crown  with    a   — ,    befronsen, 

reg.,  insep.  (^aben). 
write,  fd)reiben,  fd)ricb,  gcjrfjrieben 

(^aben). 
writing,  bie  @d)rift,  bie  -tn. 
written,  see  write. 
wrong,  fa(jd),  un'ric^tig. 
wrote,  see  write. 


year,  bag  3al^r,  bie  -e ;  for  — s, 
jia^retang. 

yes,  ja,  jan)ot)t ;  answering  a  neg- 
ative, bod^,  §  237,  1. 

yesterday,  geftern;  a  following 
noun  is  written  small  as  an  ad- 
verb :  —  evening,  geftern  ahmh, 

yet,  (time),  nod) ;  (adversative), 
bod). 

you,  ®ic  (formal)  ;  bu  (inti- 
mate) ;  man,  §  57. 

young,  younger,  youngest,  jung, 
jiinger,  am  jiingften. 

your,  3^r,  bein. 

yourself,  ftd),  §  196,  1;  (etc) 
felbft,  §  196,  2. 

youth,  bic  3ugenb. 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-studies^  see  Vocabularies. 


Aachen 
burial    place    of    Charlemagne, 

§  65 ;  of  Otto  III,  §  65. 
Cathedral,  picture  of,  page  30. 
Coronation  chair,  picture  of,  page 
49. 
'  Abbreviations 

German  partiality  to,  §  365. 
list  of,  §  365. 
Ablative  of    "attendant  circum- 
stance,"    rendered    by     hzi, 
§  95,  2. 
Abstract  nouns,  §  307. 
Accent 
correct  German  accent,  see  Pro- 
nunciation. 
in  inseparable  verbs,  §  132. 
in  sentences,  §  342. 

Accusative 
in  expressions  of  time 
in  eine  3stt^«ng/  §  50,  2. 
to  translate /or  in  for  years,  §  5. 
with  ^cr,  §  4,  Note, 
with  adverbs  baljer  and  cnltang, 

§  247, 1. 
with  prepositions,  §  104,  §§  106- 
112;  §  117,  §§  119-125. 
figurative  use,  §  117,  1. 
regular  use,  §  104. 
to  show  motion  toward,  §  117. 
to  show  mental  motion  toward, 
§  119,  2. 
with    fc^cn    \\6)    to    show   place 
where,  §  18,  2. 

356 


with  t)or,  §  125,  1. 
with  certain  verbs 
anrcben,  §  270,  2,  Note. 
6ttten,  §  15, 1. 
bitten  um,  §  15,  1,  a. 
benfcn  an,  §  41, 1. 
fragcn,  §  15, 2 ;  §  15,  2  6,  Note  a. 
in  idiom,  eg  gibt,  §  85,  1. 
glauben    (of   things),  §  157,    1, 

Note  &. 
glauben  an,  §  157, 1,  Note  c. 
fagcn,  §  28,  2. 
fud^en,  §  7. 

jprcc^en,  §  270,  1,  Note, 
tear  ten  auf,  §  8. 
tjergeben,  §  140,  3,  Note. 
Sugeben,  §  232,  2. 
Active  Voice 
man  with  active  instead  of  Eng- 
lish passive,  §  204,  1,  Note, 
passive  infinitive  active  in  Ger- 
man, §  204,  2,  Note. 
Adjectives 
as  nouns,  capitalization  of,  §  217 ; 
§  219,    1 ;     after    ettoaS    and 
nic^tg,  §  217. 
comparison  of,  §  218. 
of  long  words,  §  218,  3. 
superlative  with  am,  §  218,  1. 
superlative  with  auf,  §  218,  2. 
difference  between  English  and 
German,  §  215. 
with  personal  pronoun,  §  219, 1. 
untranslatable  adjectives, 

§219,2. 


356 


INDEX, 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Adjectives—  Continued 
inflection  of,  §  216. 
predicate    adjectives    never    in- 
flected, §  216. 
adverbial  superlative,  §  218,  1. 
with  genitive,  §  99,  3,  Note  h. 
Adverbs 
adjectives    used    for,    except    in 

superlative,  §  218,  1. 
superlative    with    am,    §  218,   1 ; 

with  auf,  §  218,  2. 
compounded,     to    express    time, 
§  5,  Note ;  to  express  manner, 
compounded     of     adjectives 
and  hjcifc,  §  249,  2. 
independent,    as     ^in    unb    l^cr, 

§  149,  2. 
numeral,  §  50,  3,  Note. 
position    in    sentence,  §  47 ;    see 
also  Word  Order. 
Affirmatives 
bod^  in  answer  to  negative,  §  237, 1. 
repetition  of  question,  §  237,  2, 
Note, 
ja,  §  200. 
Appositives,  §  99,  3,  a. 
Arzninius,  Latin   name   for    .^cr* 

ntann. 
Amdt,  Ernst  Morltz  (1769-1860), 
§  230. 
quoted,  §  109,  2;   §  196,  2,  Note; 

§  246,  2 ;  §  269,  2,  Note, 
picture  of,  page  207. 
Art     gralleries    of     Germany, 

§  152,  c. 
Article,  the  definite,  §  29,  3. 
Asia    Minor,    German    trade    in, 

§  289. 
Augrustus,  Roman  Emperor,  §  1. 
Austria 
Habsburg  rulers  of,  §  133;  §  148; 
§168. 


in  Seven  Years'  War,  §  220. 

rivalry  with  Prussia  for  leader- 
ship, §  267. 

expelled  from  Germany,  §  277  and 
§278. 
Auxiliary 

emphatic,  do,  by  simple  verb, 
§  77,  2,  Note. 

simple  future,  hjcrben,  §  69,  1  and 
4,  a  ;  desire,  tDoUen,  §69,  3; 
intention,  §  69,  4,  h ;  obliga- 
tion, foacn,§  69, 2  and  §  69,  4, 
6,  c  ;  substitutes  for,  §  228, 1. 

]^ai>en 
used  with  all  transitives,  all  re- 
flexives, all  modals  and  all 
impersonals  (except  three), 
§  164  and  §  165;  used  with 
certain  intransitives,  indicat- 
ing verbal  action,  §  167,  2; 
with  any  intransitive  when 
used  transitively,  §  167,  2, 
Note;  with  certain  verbs 
(inseparable)  when  used  fig- 
uratively, §  154,  2. 

of  mode,  see  MoJals. 

of  passive  voice,  tocrbcn,  §  204. 

position  of 
in  simple  sentence,  §  2. 
in  compound  sentence,  §  23. 
for  emphasis,  §  23,  1. 

repetition  of,  in  English,  ren- 
dered by  nid^t  or  nic^t  toai)v, 
§  237,  2,  Note. 

fein,  use  of,  with  certain  intrans- 
itives, impersonals,  jctn  and 
btcibcn,  §  166 ;  with  follow  and 
meet,  §  166,  Note ;  with  cer- 
tain intransitives  indicating 
the  goal  of  the  act,  §  167,  1. 

follcn,  to  express  obligation,  §  69, 
2 ;  §  69,  4,  6,  c ;  to  be  avoided 
for  simple  futurity,  §  228,  1. 


INDEX. 


357 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Rudolf   (1841-1905), 
§  204,  2. 


Auxiliary  —  Continued 
tooUen,  to  express  desire,  §  69,  3 ; 
to  be  avoided  as  future  auxil- 
iary, §  228,  1. 

Bad  Reichenhall,  picture  of  Bar- 

barossa  sculpture  at,  page  70. 

Bach,  Johann  Sebastian  (1685- 

1750),  composer,  §  245. 
Baedeker,    guide    book    to    Ger- 
many, §  282. 
Barbarossa,   see  Frederick  I,  of 

Hohenstaufen. 
Barmen-Elberfeld,  picture  of  the 
Hanging    Railway    in, 
230. 
Baumbach, 
§230. 
quoted,  §  166, 
S3c-,  §  135. 

Beethoven,  Ludwig*  van  (1770- 
1827) 
anecdote  of  Goethe  and  — ,  §  240. 
sketch  of,  §  245,  §  251,  c. 
picture  of,  page  188. 
Benedix,  Roderick  (1811-1873) 

quoted,  §  261,  2. 
Berlin,  capital  of  German  Empire 
industrial  center  of  Europe,  §  290. 
picture       of       9fici(^§tag8gebaubc 
(House    of    Parliament)    in, 
Frontispiece ;        statue       of 
Great     Elector,     page     149; 
Frederick  the  Great,  page  169. 
Bern,    Verona,    Italy    (not  Bern, 
Switzerland),  capital  of  The- 
odoric  the  Great,  §  22,  §  24. 
Bible,  translation  of  New  Testa- 
ment by  Luther,  §  153. 
quoted,  §  6,  2 ;  §  15,  2,  a  ;  §  43,  1 ; 
§  69,    2;     §  77,  2;    §85,    2; 


§  107,  2;  §112;  §124;  §  132 
§149,1;  §  172,  1,  a;  §180,2 
§  197,  2;  §  198,  c;  §  208 
§216;  §  217;  §  222,  2;  §232, 
1;  §  258,  2;  §268,  1. 

Bismarck,    Count     Otto     von 
(1815-1898) 
anecdote  of,  §  277 ;  §  285. 
work    for  Germany,  §  277   and 

§278. 
quoted,  §  13;  §  75,  3;  §  77,  1; 
§  150,  1;  §  150,  4;  §  219,  1; 
§222,  3;  §  244. 
picture  of  statue  in  front  of  Par- 
liament Building,  Frontis- 
piece ;  as  a  student,  page  214 ; 
picture  from  a  photograph, 
page  217. 

Blankenburg,  picture  of  ruined 
castle  at,  page  44. 

B5rne,  Ludwigr  (1786-1837) 
quoted,  §  140,  2. 

Brandenburg,  see  Brandenburg- 
Prussia. 

Brandenburg- Prussia  [Brand- 
enburg **  mark  "  (frontier) 
against  Slavs  in  10th  cen- 
tury ;  in  1150,  first  "  mar- 
grave";  1415,  bought  from 
Emperor  by  Hohenzollerns, 
who  become  Electors ;  1618, 
Elector  inherits  Duchy  of 
Prussia  —  hence  Branden- 
burg-Prussia],  §188;  §192; 
§  199,  c;  1648,  acquisition 
of  Pomerania,  §  192;  elector 
becomes  King  (1701),  §  192; 
[thenceforward  Prussia,] 
1748,  acquisition  of  Silesia, 
§  220;  1772-1795,  Poland, 
§  220.  For  later  history,  see 
Prussia. 


358 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Bremen,  picture  of  the  "  Roland  " 

at,  page  57. 
Bryce,  James,  quoted,  §  93. 
BUrgrer,       Gottfried       August 

(1747-1821) 
quoted,  §  28,  1;  §95,2 

Capitalization 
of  adjectives  as  nouns,  and  after 

ettuaS  and  nic^t^,  §  217. 
of  names  of  streets,  §  299. 
Case,    see  Nominative,   Genitive, 

Dative,  Accusative. 
Castles,  pictures  of,  pages  8, 44,  53, 
74,  77,  82,  84,  87,  124,  143,  163. 
Catholics,  in  1018,  §  182. 
Chamisso,  Adelbert  von  (1781- 
1838) 
quoted,  §  126,  2;  §  140,  1 ;  §  170, 1 ; 
§  183,  4. 
Charlemagne,     ^arl    ber    @ro§e 
(reigned,  768-814) 
anecdote  of,  §  3() ;  §  45,  c. 
as  ruler,  §  30. 

division  of  his  empire,  §  56. 
picture  of,  from  painting  by  Al- 
brecht  Diirer,  page  24. 
Charles  the   Great,  see  Charle- 
magne. 
Charles  V 
anecdote    of,    §  163;    sketch    of, 
§   168,   §   175,    c;    death    of, 
§176. 
picture    of,    from    painting    by 
Titian,  page  131. 
Classics,  the  German,  §  236,  c ;  see 

also  Literature. 
Clauses 
always  periodic,  §  23,  1. 
English    verbals    translated   by, 
§  189,  land  2;  §  190;  §191. 


indirect  discourse,  §  242. 

order  of  verbs  in,  §  13;  §  23;  §  73, 

1  and  2. 
used  after  fragen  o6,  §  15,  2,  a. 
Coblentz,  picture  of  monument  to 

William  I,  page  219. 

Coburgr,  picture  of  the  castle,  page 
143. 

Cogrnates,  §  348 ;  §  350,  Note ;  §  352 ; 
§364. 
-Collective  nouns,  §  304,  2,  a. 
Cologrne,  portrait  of  Queen  Luise 

in,  page  197. 
Colosseum,  §  12. 
Commerce 
of   Hanseatic   League,    §  74 ;    of 
modern  Germany,  §  290. 
-<3ommon   prefixes  (that  is,  sep- 
arable and  inseparable) 
as  separable,  §  154,  1 ;  as  insepa- 
rable, §  154,  2. 
illustrations  of  use,  §  154, 2,  Note. 
Comparatives,  see  Comparison. 
Comparison 
use  of  al«,  §  83,  1;    fo,  §  26,  1; 

tt>k,  §  83,  1. 
jc  —  befto,  §  223. 
of  adjectives,  see  Adjectives. 
of  adverbs,  see  Adverbs. 
Composers,  musical,  of  Grerraany, 

§  245. 
Composition     of     Words,     see 

Words. 
Compound  words,  §  310 ;  adjec- 
tives, §  312;  nouns,  §  311; 
verbs,  §  313;  Latin  deriva- 
tives, §  314.  See  also  Words, 
Composition  of,  Part  II,  Chap- 
ter II. 

Ooncesslves,  §  274. 


INDEX. 


359 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Concrete  nouns,  §  306. 
Conditional  Mode 
contrasted  with  English,  §  255. 
formation  and  use  of,  §  254. 
inversion  of  conditional  in  Ger- 
man, §  255,  1 ;  of  comparative 
conditional,  §  255,  2. 
substitution  of  past  subjunctive, 
§  254,  Note. 
Conjunctions 
coordinating,  hut,  abcr,  §43,  1; 

fonbern,  §  43,  2. 
correlatives,  §  83,  1. 
subordinating,  §  13;    with  past, 
al«,  §  83,  1,  §  84, 1 ;  with  pres- 
ent and  future,  h)cnn,  §  84,  2 ; 
it){c  with  present,  §  83,  1;  ba, 
§17,3;  that,  ^2n,  1. 
Conrad 
the  Franconian  (reigned  911-918), 

§  54,  §  61,  c. 
the  Hohenstaufen  (reigned  1138- 
1152),  §91;  §102,  c. 
Conradin,  §  82. 

Contrasts,  §  29,  2;  §  43,  1,  Note. 
Consonants,  see  Pronunciation. 
Conversation 
bcnn  in  questions,  §  33. 
use  of  inseparable  verbs  in,  §  132. 
rare  uses  in,    bcricntgc,  §  29,  1, 
Note ;  participles,  §  178;  h)iin== 
fc^en,  §  40,  2. 
Correspondence,    International, 
for  pupils,  §  293,  Note.    See 
also  Letter- Writing. 
Courts,  establishment  in  Prussia 

by  Frederick  II,  §  205. 
Cranach,  Lucas  (also  Kranach), 
painter  of  Luther's  portrait, 
page  127. 
Crusades,  §  48. 


Dach,  Simon  (1605-1659),  quoted, 

§  70,  3. 
Dahn,  Felix  (1834-1912),  quoted, 

§19,2;  §  150,2,  c.  Note. 

Dative  case 
with   certain    prepositions,   §  92, 
§§94-100;    §117,   §§119-125; 
after  fi^cn,  §  18,  1 ;    to  show 
place  where,  §  117 ;  with  »or 
{ago),  §  4. 
after  certain  verbs 
fcefe^Ien,  §  197,  2. 
begcgncn,  §  166,  Note, 
beftctjen  auf  or  au«,  §  269, 1  and  2. 
benten  s?on,  §  41,  2. 
emfatlen,  §  41,  1,  Note,  §  231,  2. 
fragen  nac^,  §  15,  2,  h. 
\\^  fiirc^ten  t)or,  §  25. 
glaubcn   (with  persons),  §  157, 

1,  Note  a. 
fjelfcn,  §  39,  1. 

fagcn,  §  15,  2,  h,  Note  a;  §  28,  2. 
ijcrgebcn,  §  140,  3,  Note. 
.  Demonstratives 

the    one,    §  29,    1 ;     that,    those, 

§  211,  3. 
to   show  contrast,  jcncr,  §  211, 
3,6. 
Denmark,  in  Thirty  Years'  War, 
§  182;    defeated  by  Prussia, 
§278. 
Dependent  clauses,  see  Clauses. 
Dependent  order  of  sentence, 

see  Word  Order. 
Derivation,  see  Words,  Composi- 
tion of. 
2)cutfd^,  origin  of  the  word,  §  354. 
Dialects,     attempts     to      unite, 
§  159,  c. 
See  German  Language,  Part  II, 
Chapter  IV. 


360 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-studien,  see  Vocabularies. 

2)ietric^  ioon  33crn  (Theodoric  the 
Great,  died  526),  §22,  §24, 
§  32,  c ;  decline  of  his  king- 
dom, §  38 ;  legends  of,  §  48 ; 
see  also  Theodoric  the  Great. 

Digraphs,  §  325. 

Diminutives,  §  306,  1. 

Diphthongs,  §  323. 
different    from    English,    §  323 ; 


§324. 

ai  Cc{),§  323,  1. 

ou,  §  323,  2. 

m  {iv),  §  323,  3. 
Discourse,   direct,   tense   of,   re- 
tained in  German  in  indirect, 
§243. 

indirect,  §  241 ;  §242;  §243. 
Dud  en,    Konrad,    authority    on 

German  spelling,  §  356. 
Diirer,  Albrecht  (1471-1528),  citi- 
zen of  Nuremberg,  §  116. 

sketch  of,   §  144;   patronized  by 
the  Kaiser,  §  148. 

picture  of,  from  painting  by  him- 
self, page  114. 

picture  of  his  house  in  Nurem- 
berg, page  117. 

painting    of    Charlemagne    by, 
page  24. 

Eichendorff,  Joseph  von  (1788- 
1857),  §  2.'K). 
quoted,  §1)9,  1;  §  121. 

Eisenach,  see  Wartburg. 

Elector,   the   Great   (bcr  @ro^c 
.^urfiirft),  see  Frederick  Will- 
iam of  Brandenburg. 
picture  of  statue  in  Berlin,  page 
149. 

Electors,  seven  (later  nine)  rulers 
who  chose  the  German  Em- 
perors, §  192. 


em^=,  §  136,  2,  Note. 
Emphasis 
in  sentence,  see  Word  Order. 
ja,  §200,  2;  boc^,  §  237,  2. 
change    of    tense    for,  §  229,  2, 
Note  b. 
Emphatic  form  of  verb 
rendered  in  German  by  simple, 
verb,  §  77,2,  Note;  §227,  1. 
Empire,  the  (in  full, "  Holy  Roman 
P'mpire  of  the  German  Na- 
tion,"  800-1806),  §38;    §56; 
§61,c;  §67;  §74;  §82;  §93; 
§  133;  §  148;  §  163;  §  168. 
the  new  German  Empire,  §  277 ; 

§278;  282. 
See  also  Germany  and  German 
Empire. 

Engel,  Karl,  quoted,  §  190. 
England,  ally  of   Frederick   the 

Great,  §214;  §220. 
ent>,  §  136. 
(Sr.,  §  137. 
eg,  in  c«  gtbt  and  c«  tft,  §  85,  2. 

as  grammatical  subject  of  other 
verbs,  §  85,  2,  Note. 

in  c«  gcH  §  206,  1. 
Exclamations,  see  §  366. 

Factitive,  there,  in  c«  gibt,  §  85,  1; 

ccl  ift,  §  85,  2;    distinguished 

from  ba,  and  bcrt,  §  16. 
Fallersleben,    Hoffmann    von 

(1798-1874),  §230. 
quoted,    §   100,  4,    Note;    §  185, 

l,a. 

Ferdinand  I  (reigned  1556-1564), 
Holy  Roman  Emperor  of  the 
Habsburg  line,  successor  to 
Charles  V,  §  163;  §  168. 


INDEX. 


361 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Ferdinand  III  (reigned  1637-1657) , 

Holy  Roman  Emperor,  grand- 
nephew  of  Charles  V,  §  182. 
Feuchtersleben,      Ernst      von 

(1806-1849),  quoted,  §  222,  5. 
Feuerbach,    Ludwig-    Andreas 

(1804-1872),  quoted,  §  210. 
Fichte,  Johann  Gottlieb  (1762- 

1814),  §285. 
Folksongs    (iBoIfSIieber) ,  quoted, 

§81;  §  117;  §  180,1,  Note. 
Fouqu^,  Friedrich  Karl  Hein- 

rich,  Freiherr  de  la  Motte 

(1777-1843),  quoted,  §  147,  1; 

§  195,  1. 
France 
in  Thirty  Years'  War,  §  182 ;   in 

Seven  Years'  War,  §  220 ;  in 

Napoleonic      Wars,      §  252; 

§    256;     in    Franco-Prussian 

War,  §  277,  §  278. 
Franks,  conquests  of,  §  24 ;   §  38 ; 

§48. 
Frankfort,  parliament  of,  §  265; 

§  267 ;  §  273,  c. 
picture  of  St.  Paul's  Church  at, 

page  205. 
Frederick       I,       **  Barbarossa " 

(reigned  1152-1190) 
Emperor    of    the    Hohenstaufen 

line,  §  80;  §  82;  §  86,  c. 
contemporary  sculpture  of,  page 

70. 
idealized  figure  of,  at  Kyffhauser, 

page  67. 
Frederick   II,  grandson  of  Bar- 

barossa.  Emperor  (1212-1250), 

§  105,  §  118. 
Frederick    I,    King    in    Prussia 

(1701-1713),     (elector,     1686- 

1701),  §  192. 


Frederick  II,  the  Great,  King  of 
Prussia  (1740-1786) 

descent  from  the  "  Great  Elector," 
§192. 

establishment    of    Berlin    courts 
(windmill  legend),  §  203. 

sketch  of  life  and  work,  §  205. 

life  in  Potsdam,  §  213,  c. 

admiration  for  George  Washing- 
ton, §  214. 

military  operations  of,  §  220, 

great  popularity,  §  205 ;  §  225,  c. 

descendants    of,    §  256;    §  267; 
§282. 

picture    of    palace    at    Potsdam 
(Sans  Souci),  page  163. 

picture  of  statue  in  Berlin,  page 
169. 
Frederick  III,  German  Emperor 
and  King  of  Prussia  (reigned 
99  days,  1888),  „Unfcr  ^x\%," 
§  282  (called  "the  third" 
because  he  was  the  third 
King  Frederick  of  Prussia. 
There  was  an  Emperor  Fred- 
erick III  of  the  *'Holy  Ro- 
man Empire,"  1440-1493.). 
Frederick  William,  "the  Great 
Elector"  (bcr  groge  ^urfitrft), 
Elector  of  Brandenburg  and 
Duke  of  Prussia  (1640-1688), 
§  188 ;  §  192 ;  §  199,  c ;  §  220. 

descendants  of,  §  192. 

picture  of  statue  in  Berlin,  p.  149. 
Frederick  William  I,  King  of 
Prussia  (1713-1740),  „@oIba* 
tenfontg/'  father  of  Frederick 
the  Great,  §  192. 
Frederick  William  II,  King  of 
Prussia,  nephew  and  succes- 
sor of  Frederick  the  Great 
(1786-1797),  §265. 


362 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-sttidies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Frederick  William  III,  King  of 
Prussia  (1797-1840),  husband 
of  Queen  Luise;  patron  of 
art  and  of  learning,  §  256; 
§  207. 

Frederick  William  IV,  King  of 
Prussia  (184(>-18(jl) ,  offered 
imperial  crown,  §  265;  re- 
fuses, §  267 ;  death,  §  278. 

Free  cities  Oi  the  Empire,  §  74. 

Freiligrath,  Hermann  Ferdi- 
nand (1810-1876),  quoted, 
§  19,  2 ;  f;  271,  2. 

Freytagr,     Gustav     (1816-1895), 

§230. 
quoted,  §15,  1,  6;  §41,  2;  §  47; 

§55;  §69,2;  §75,2;  §84,3; 

§99,2;  §149,2;  §150,  3;  §157, 

3;  §171,1;  §183,4;  §206,1; 

§207,  Note;  §232,2;  §234,1; 

§2(>0;  §266,2;  §  2()9,  2. 
Future  tense,  see  Tense. 

Galleries,    of   art,    in  Germany, 

§  152,  c ;  §  144. 
@c=,  §  138. 
Geibel,  Emmanuel    (1815-1884), 

§  230;  quoted,  §  50,  3,  Note 

a. 
Gellert,  Christian  FUrchtegrott 

(1715-1775),    quoted,    §  138; 

§165. 
Gender,  §  207,  Note. 
Genitive,  special  use  of,  §  99,  3, 

Note  b. 

German  Empire 
restoration  of   the  Roman  Em- 
pire   in    the    west    as    the 
German  Empire,  by  Charle- 
magne (800  A.D.),  §  38. 


revived  by  Otto  I,  as  "  the  Holy 

Roman  Empire  of  the  German 

nation,"  §  56. 
decline  of,  §  67. 
glory  revived  by  the  Hohenstau- 

fen  line,  §  82. 
condition  in  the  Middle  Ages,  §  93. 
under  the  Habsburg  family,  §  133, 

§148. 
importance    under   Charles    V, 

§168. 
weakened  by  division,  §  163,  §  168, 

and  by  religious  war,  §  182. 
title  of  **  Holy  Roman  Emperor  " 

abandoned  1806,  §  256. 
crown  of  proposed  new  German 

Empire   offered   to  King  of 

Prussia   and  refused,  §  265 ; 

§267. 
proclamation  of  the  new  German 

Empire  (1871),  §277;   §  278; 

§282. 
See  also  Germany. 
©crmanen,  technical  Grerman  name 

for  the  "early  Germans,"  §  3. 
Germania,  the  Roman  province, 

§14. 
of  Tacitus,  §  14. 
Germanicus,  Roman  general,  §  3. 
German  language 
abbreviations  in,  §  365. 
colloquialisms   (2llltag«bcutfd)), 

§.366. 
development    of,   as    shown    in 

Lord's  Prayer,  §§  357-362. 
historical  sketch  of,  §§  345-362. 
Indo-European,      the      parent 

language,  §  345;  drawing  of, 

page  279. 
first  sound  shift,  §  346. 

Grimm's  law  of,  §  346,  §  347, 
§318. 


INDEX, 


363 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


German  language  —  Continued 
Gothic,    oldest    known    Ger- 
man,     §     349;       Lord's 
Prayer,  §  357. 
second  sound  shift,  §  350. 
High  and  Low  German   and 
English,     §   350,     Note, 
§351. 
Grimm's  law  of,  §  352. 
High  German,  §  353. 
Old  High  (750-1100  a.d.) 
writings  in,  §  354. 
Lord's  Prayer  in,  §  358; 
§359. 
Middle  High  (1100-1350) 
writings  in,  §  355. 
Rudolph    of    Habsburg's 

influence,  §  133. 
Lord's  Prayer  in,  §  360. 
New    High    (1534-present) 
(after    transition     pe- 
riod, 1350-1534) 
Lord's  Prayer  in,  §  361, 

§362. 
modern  German,  §  356. 
influences  upon 
Rudolph  of  Habsburg,    §   133, 
§  355 ;  the    Reformation   and 
Printing,  §  35() ;    Maximilian, 
§  155 ;  §  159,  c ;  Luther,  §  155 ; 
§  159,  c;  §356. 
name  „beut|c^/'  §  354. 
official      orthography,      Duden, 

§356. 
See  also  Composition  of  Words, 
Pronunciation. 
Germans,    the    early,    §  3 ;    §  12 ; 

§14;  §20,  c. 
Germany- 
appreciation  of  German  classics 

in,  §  286,  c. 
artistic  centre  of,  in  Middle  Ages 
(Nuremberg),  §  118. 


cities  of  Middle  Ages,  §  72 ;  "  free 
cities,"  §  74. 

growth  of  national  feeling  in 
nineteenth  century,  §  267. 

history  of,  in  Roman  times,  §  1 ; 
§  3;  province  "  Germania," 
§  14;  under  the  Goths,  Lom- 
bards and  Franks,  §  38 ;  em- 
pire of  Charlemagne,  §  38; 
work  of  Henry  the  Fowler, 
§  56;  empire  of  Otto  the 
Great,  §  56;  decline,  §  67; 
§  82;  glory  of  Hohenstaufen, 
§82;  under  the  "robber 
barons,"  §  93;  under  the 
Habsburgs,  §  133;  §  148; 
failure  of  Maximilian  to  mod- 
ernize Germany,  §  148 ;  union 
with  Spain,  §  163;  abdication 
of  Charles  V,  §  168 ;  suc- 
cessors of  Charles  V,  §  182; 
Thirty  Years'  War,  §  176; 
Treaty  of  Westphalia  (1648), 
§182;  the  "Great  Elector," 
§  188  ;  §  192 ;  under  Frederick 
the  Great,  see  Frederick  II 
of  Prussia;  Seven  Years' 
War,  220;  Queen  Luise, 
§  252 ;  §  256 ;  the  Napoleonic 
period,  §  256 ;  growth  of  na- 
tional feeling,  §  267 ;  Frank- 
fort Parliament,  §  265;  §  267; 
founding  of  the  new  German 
Empire,  §  277;  §  278;  §  282. 

invention  of  printing  in,  §  131; 
§133. 

literature  of,  §  230. 

musicians  of,  §  245. 

national  flower  of,  §  252. 

parliament  (first  elected)  of, 
§265;  §267. 

scieucein,  §285;  §286. 

trade  of,  §289;  §290. 


364 


INDEX, 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Gerstacker,  Friedrich  (1816- 
1872),  quoted,  §  8;  §  17,  3; 
§  76,  1;  §  77,  2,  Note;  §111, 
3;  §  122;  §  229,  2;  §  246,  3; 
§  257,  1. 
Goethe,  Johann  Wolfgangr  von 
(1749-1832) 

anecdotes  of  —  and  Beethoven, 
§  240 ;  of  —  and  Schiller,  §  226. 

place  in  literature,  §  230. 

picture  of  bust    in  Weimar    Li- 
brary, page  195. 
of  house  in  Weimar,  page  181. 
of  statue  "  Dichterpaar,"  page 
177. 

quoted,  §  7 ;  §  19,  1 ;  §  26,  1 ;  §  30, 
2;  §41,1,  Note;  §58,  3,  Note 
6;  §68,3;  §75,1;  §  81 ;  §  83, 
2 ;  §  99,  3,  Note  6 ;  §  100,  1 ; 
§  108;  §  119,  1;  §  120,  3; 
§  123, 1 ;  §  132 ;  §  147,  2 ;  §  156 ; 
§157,2;  §  167,2;  §  178,  Note 
6;  §  189,  2;  §  197,  1;  §211, 
3,6;  §216;  §218,1;  §228,1; 
§  247,  1;  §  254;  §  255,  1 ; 
§258,1;  §271,1. 

Goslar,  picture  of  Palace  of  Ger- 
man Emperors,  page  53. 

Gothic,    earliest   known    German 
language,  §§  347-352. 
Lord's  Prayer  in,  §  357. 

Goths,  East,  see  Ostrogoths ;  West, 
see  Visigoths. 

Great  Elector,  see  Frederick  Will- 
iam. 

Grillparzer,  Franz  (1791-1872), 
dramatist,  quoted,  §  2{),  1; 
§  58,  3,  Note  c;  §  169,  1; 
§  196,  2. 

Grimm,  Jakob  (1785-1863),  phi- 
lologist, §  285. 


adoption    of     term     "umlaut," 
§  322 ;  discoverer  of  Grimm's 
Laio,  §§  346-352. 
Grimm,  Wilhelm  (1786-1859) 
Grimm   Brothers    (btc    @c6riibcr 
©rimm),    Jakob     and    Wil- 
helm 
quoted,  §23,  1;  §42,  2;  §50,  3; 
§  170,  2,  Note  a ;  §  248,  2,  a. 
Grtin,    Anastasius,    pseudonym 
for    Anton   Alexander,  Graf 
von    Auersperg    (1806-1876), 
quoted,  §  18, 1. 
Gutenberg,   Johann   (1400-1468) 
inventor  of  printing,  §  131 ;  §  133 ; 

§  143,  c. 
picture  of   statue   in    Mayence; 
page  105. 

as  auxiliary,  see  Auxiliary. 
used  with  rcc^t,  to  be  right,  §  172, 
1,6. 

Habsburgr  (less  correctly,  Haps- 
burg),  the  ruling  line  of  the 
Holy  Roman  Empire  during 
most  of  the  period  1273- 
1740.  [Descendants  through 
female  line  (Maria  Theresa), 
German  Emperors,  1745-1806 ; 
emperors  of  Austria,  1806  to 
present  time.] 
founding  of,  §  133;  fortunes  of, 
§  148;  under  Charles  V  and 
descendants,  §  163 ;  §  168. 

Halle,  picture  of  the  "  Roland  "  at, 
page  61. 

Hamburg",  picture  of  the  harbor 
of,  page  228. 

Hamburg- America,       line       of 
steamships,  §  289. 


INDEX, 


365 


For  special  word-studi, 

Handel,  Georg  Friedrich  (1685- 
1759);  German  composer, 
§  245.' 

Hansa,  see  Ilanseatic  League. 

Hanseatic  League,  §  74. 

Hauff,  Wilhelm  (1802-1827), 
quoted,  §  119,  2. 

Hauptmann,  Gerhart  (1862 — ), 
§  230;  quoted,  §  29,  1;  §40, 
1;  §49,  1;  §  76,  1;  §  85,  1; 
§95,  3;  §  135,  2;  §  136,  2; 
§157,  1;    §172,  1,  6;   §242. 

Haydn,  Johann  Michael  (1732- 
1809),  Germau  composer, 
§245. 

Hebbel,  Friedrich  (1813-1863), 
German  dramatist,  §  230; 
quoted,  §  9;  §  17,  2;  §58,  3; 
§76,2;  §  170, 2,  Note 6 ;  §209; 
§  266,  2 ;  §  270,  2. 

Hegel,  Georg  Wilhelm  Fried- 
rich (1770-1831),  German 
philosopher,  §  285. 

Heine,  Heinrich  (1799-1856) , 
German  poet,  §  230;  quoted, 
§2,2;  §16,  1;  §  58,1;  §76, 
3,  Note ;  §  94, 1 ;  §  98, 1 ;  §  99, 
3,  Note  a ;  §  227,  1 ;  §  269,  1. 

Heinrich  der  Vogler,  see  Henry 
the  Fowler. 

Helmholtz,  Hermann  Ludwig 
Ferdinand  von  (1821-1894) , 
German  scientist,  §  285. 

Henry  the  Fowler  (reigned  919- 
936) ;  "  King  of  Germany," 
§54;  §  56;  §61,  c;  "Builder 
of  Cities,"  §  74;  picture  of  his 
tomb,  page  39 ;  one  of  his  cas- 
tles, page  44. 


?,  nee  Vbcahularies. 

Herder,  Johann  Gottfried  (1744- 

1803),  quoted,  §  97,  1;  §  110, 

2;  §218,1. 
Hermann   the    Liberator,   §  1; 

§  3;  picture  of  monument  to.. 

page  2. 

Hermann,    Count    of   Thuringia, 
§103. 

Hermannsschlacht    (battle) ,    in 
Teutoburger  Forest,  §  1. 

Heyse,    Paul    (1830 ),    §   230 

quoted,  §  6,  1;  §  13;  §  25 
§33;  §39,1;  §51,  1;  §  59,  2 
§68,2;  §84,2,a;§88;  §110 
1;  §111,2;  §  135, 1 ;  §  150, 2,  6 
§  196,  1;  §  211,  2;  §  231,  2 
§  248,  1. 

High  German,  see  German  Lan- 
guage. 

Hildegund,  the  betrothed  of  Ro- 
land, §  46. 

Hillern,  Wilhelmine  von  (1836- 

);    quoted,   §  2,  2;   §  16, 

2;  §  50, 2,  Note ;  §  84, 1 ;  §139; 
§  185,  1,  &;  §  197,  2,  Note; 
§  211,  2,  Note  ;  §  222,  4 ;  §  228, 
2,  Note ;  §  257,  2 ;  §  266,  1. 

Hohenstaufen  line  of  emperors 

(reigned     1138-1254),     §    82; 
§105. 
See  also  Frederick  I  and  II,  and 
the  German  Empire. 

Hohenzollern  line,    §   192.    See 

individual  names  below, 
(a)  Electors      of      Brandenburg 

(1415-1701),  §  188,  §  192;  see 

Great  Elector. 
(6)  Kings  of  Prussia  (1701-1871), 

§  192;    §205;    §  220;    §  256; 

§267;  §278. 


366 


INDEX, 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 

HohenzoUern  line —  Continued. 
Frederick  I  (1088),  1701-1713. 
Frederick  William  1, 1713-1740. 
Frederick  II,  the  Great,  1740- 

1786. 
Frederick    William    II,    1786- 

1797. 
Frederick  William  III  (Queen 

Luise),  1797-1840. 
Frederick    William   IV,    1840- 

1861. 
(c)  German  Emperors  and  Kings 

of    Prussia  (1871 ) ,  §  278 ; 

§  281 ;  §  282. 
William  I  (1861),  1871-1888. 
Frederick  III,  1888. 
William  11,  1888 . 


Holderlin,  Priedrich  (1770-1843) , 
quoted,  §  84,  2,  6. 

Holy  Roman  Empire  (962-1806), 
see  German  Empire. 

Hungarians,    repulsed    by    Ger- 
mans, §  56. 

Imperative  sentence 
inverted  order  in,  §  2. 
use  of  bo(f>  in,  §  77,  2,  Note ;  of  \a, 
§  200,  1. 

Imperfect,  see  Tense,  imperfect. 

Imperial  chancery,  §  155. 

Impersonals,  "  there  is,"  §  85,  1 
and  2 ;  "  they  say,"  §  57. 
See  also  Verbs. 

Indefinite  article,  negative,  §  9. 

Indefinite    pronouns,   see   Pro- 
nouns. 

Indicative  Mode 
contrasted      with      subjunctive, 
§  241 ;  special  use  in  indirect 
discourse,  §  244. 


r  Indirect  discourse 

rule  for  use  of,  §  242 ;   tenses  of, 
§  243. 
Indo-European  languag'e,  par- 
ent of    German,    §  345;    see 
German  language. 
drawing  of,  page  279. 
Industry,  growth  of,  in  German 

Empire,  §  290. 
Infinitives 
after  laffcn,  §  68,  4,  Note, 
after  o^ne  and  anftatt,  §  181. 
omission  of  ju,  §  180,  1 ;   use  of 

SU,  §  180,  2. 
order  of,  in  sentence  with  medals, 

§66. 
passive  in  English,  active  in  Ger- 
man, §  204,  2,  Note, 
translations  of  English  infinitive 
into    German,    §191,    1;     of 
German  infinitive  into  Eng- 
lish (verbals)  ,§  180. 
"  two  infinitives,"  with  modals, 
§  73,  1 ;  without  modals,  §  81. 
Inflection  of  adjectives,  §  216, 
-  Inseparable  prefixes 

discussion  of,  §  132 ;  meanings  of, 
§  134;  U>,  §  135;  ent*  (cmH, 
§136;    CX';  §137;    gc*,  §  138; 
mif;-',  §  139;  ux^,  §  140;    jcr», 
§141. 
for  prefixes  that  are  both  sepa- 
rable   and    inseparable,   see 
Common  prefixes. 
Interjections,  see  §  3(k). 
International  correspondence 

for  pupils,  §  293,  Note. 
Interrogrative    pronouns,   w/io, 
§208;     which,    §209;    what, 
§  210;  what  kind  of,  §  210. 
sentences,  inverted  order  in,  §  2; 
use  of  n^ann  in,  §  84,  3. 


INDEX. 


367 


For  special  word-studiea,  see  Vocabularies. 


Intransitive  verbs 
with  fjaben,  §  165 ;  witli  fetn,  §  166 ; 
in  German  become  transitive  in 

English,  §  166,  Note, 
with  l^abcn  or  fcin,  §  167,  1  and  2. 

Introduction,  forms  of,  §  171, 
2,  Note. 

Inverted  order  of  sentence, 
see  Word  Order. 

Italy,  under  the  Ostrogoths,  §  24; 
under  Charlemagne,  §  38 ;  un- 
der the  Ottos,  §  56 ;  quarrels 
of  the  emperors  with,  §  67 ; 
§  82;  change  of  policy  to- 
ward, §  133. 

Kaiser  Karl  der  Grosse,  see 
Charlemagne. 

Kaiser  Karl  V,  see  Charles  V. 

Kaiser  Maximilian,  see  Maxi- 
milian. 

Kaisers,  see  German  Empire. 

Kant,  Imanuel  (1724-1804) ,  §  285. 

Keller,  Gottfried  (1815-1890), 
§  230;  quoted,  §  6,  2;  §  88, 
Note;  §  111,  1;  §  173,  3; 
§184,2;  §193,3. 

Kerner,  Andreas  Justinus  (1786- 
1862),  §  230;  quoted,  §  119,  3. 

Kiel,  picture  of  canal  at,  page  231. 

Kleist,  Heinrich  von  (1777- 
1811),  §230;  quoted,  §30,  1, 
Note ;  §  193,  2. 

Klopstock,      Priedrich      Gott- 
fried (1724-1803) 
quoted,  §  181. 
influence  on  language,  §  322. 

Koberger,  Anton,  printer,  §  131 ; 
§  143,  c. 

Koch,  Robert  (1843-1910),  §  285. 


Konrad,  see  Conrad. 

Konradin  (Conradin),  the  last  of 

the  Hohenstaufen  line,  §  82. 
Korner,     Theodor     (1791-1813), 

§  230;  quoted,  §42,   3;    §  %; 

§  147,  1. 
Kranach      (Cranach) ,     Lucas, 

German  painter  of  Luther's 

portrait,  page  127. 
Kriemhilde,  §  22. 
Kyffhauser,  legend  of,  §  80. 
picture  of  monument  to  William 

I  at,  page  65. 
of  Barbarossa  statue  at,  p.  67. 

Latin 
language  of  courts  in  the  Middle 

Ages,  §  105. 
derivation     of     German     words 
from,  §  314. 
Legrends 
See    Barbarossa,     Dietrich    von 
Bern,     Roland,     Hildegund, 
and  Siegfried. 
Lenau,  pseudonym  for  Nikolaus 
Niembseh     von     Strehlenau 
(1802-1850),  quoted,  §  255,  2. 
Lessing,     Gotthold      Ephraim 
(1729-1781) ,  §  230 ;  quoted,  §  4 ; 
§23,  1;    §33;    §43,  1,  Note; 
§49,2,  Note;  §68,4;  §77,2, 
Note ;  §  97,  2 ;  §  113,  2 ;  §  149, 
2,  Note  ;    §  172,  2 ;    §  184,   1 ; 
§  200,1;  §211,3,  a;  §218,  3; 
§  234,     2,     §  237,    2,     Note ; 
§  253,  h. 
Letter- Writing,  Part  II,  Chapter  I 
general  rule  for,  §  293. 
examples  of 
business,  page  241. 
friendly,  page  238. 


368 


INDEX, 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies 

Letter- Writing  —  Continued 
intimate,  page  236. 
exchange  of  letters  between  Ger- 
man   and    American    pupils, 
§  293,  Note, 
proper  forms  to  use  in 
the  date,  §  294 ;  address,  §  295 ; 
the  close,  §  2f>6;  the  envelope, 
§  298 ;  address  of  sender,  2lb- 
fenbcr,  §  298 ;  rules  for  names 
of  streets,  §  299. 
summary,  §  297. 
Licbtenberg-,  Georg  Christopb 
(1742-1799),  quoted,  §  83,  1  ; 
§254. 
Liliencron   Detlev    von 


(1844- 

1909),  quoted,  §  50,  4;    §  169, 
2;  §231,1. 
Liszt,  Franz  (1811-1886),  §  245. 
Literature,  German 
periods  of,  §  230. 
popularity  of  classics,  §  236,  c. 
Logau,    Friedricb    von    (1604- 
1055),  quoted,  §47,  1;  §135, 
3;  §156. 
Lombards,  §  24. 
Lord's  Prayer,  in  German,  §  356- 

§  362. 
Low  German,  see    German  lan- 
guage. 
Luise,     or    Louise,    Queen     of 
Prussia, 
story  of,  §  252. 
work  for  Prussia,  §  256;   §  264, 

c. 
picture    of  portrait    in  Cologne, 
page  197. 
Luther,  Martin  (1483-1546) 
anecdote  of,  §  153 ;  influence  on 
the  German  language,  §  133 ; 
§   155;  169.  c;   §363;    §356; 


translations  of  the  New 
Testament,  §  153;  §355. 

picture  of  Luther's  room  at  Wart- 
burg  Castle,  page  121;  of 
the  court  at  the  Wartburg, 
showing  location  of  Luther's 
room,  §  124. 

painting  of  Luther  by  Lucas 
Kranach,  page  127. 


Mastersingers,  §  116 ;  §  118. 
Maximilian,  Emperor  of  Germany 
(1493-1519),    grandfather    of 
Charles  V ;  §  168 ;  influence  on 
the  German  language ;  §  148 ; 
§155;  §159,  c. 
Mayence,  statue  of  John  Guten- 
berg and   the  Cathedral  at, 
page  105. 
Measure,  expressions  of,  §  99,  3, 

Note  a. 
Mendelssohn,    Felix    Mendels- 
sohn-Bartholdy  (1809- 

1847),  §245. 
Middle  Age« 
growth  of  the  towns  in,  §  74. 
history  of  Germany  during,  see 

Qermany. 
language  of,  see  German,  Middle 
High, 
•  mastershigers  of,  §  118. 
minstrel  poets  of,  §  103 ;  §  105. 
Nuremberg  in,  §  116;  §  118. 
robber  barons  of,  §  93. 
"  Roland,"  symbol  of  civic  liberty 
in,  §  72;  §  74. 
Middle  High  German 
discussion  of,  see  German,  Mid' 

die  High. 
language    of    the    Minnesingers, 
§    105;      of     Mastersingers, 
§116;  §118. 


INDEX. 


3^9 


For  special  icord 
Minnesingers,  §  103;  §  105. 
^   mih  §  139. 

x^   Modals,  in  simple  tenses,  §  66 ;  in 

compound  tenses  alone,  §  73; 

with  other  verbs,  §  73,  1 ;  in 

dependent  order,  §  73,  2. 

German  and   English  compared, 

§  66,  Note, 
subjunctive,  §  266. 

—  Mode,    see    Conditional,  Impera- 

tive, Indicative,  Subjunctive. 

Mohammedans    (Moors),  driven 

out  by  Franks,  §  48. 
Moltke,   Graf   Hellmuth    Karl 
Bernhard  von  (1800-1891) 
chief  of  staff  of  the  German  army, 

§282. 
picture  of,  page  222. 
quoted,  §  180,  1. 
Mommsen,  Theodor  (1817-1903), 

§  285  ;  picture  of,  page  226. 
Morike,      Eduard      (1804-1875), 
§  230 ;  quoted,  §  170,  2. 

—  Motion,  direction  of 

away  from  the  speaker  (^tn),  §  18, 

2;     §    149,    1;    toward     the 

speaker  (^cr),  §  149,  1. 
definite  purpose  or  no  motion,  ^u, 

§  100,  1. 
difficulty  with  l^in  and  i)tx,  §  149, 

2,  Note, 
prepositions  showing  motion  or 

place  where,  §  117. 
toward  or  to  a  place  (nac^),  §  97, 1. 
Mozart,    Wolfgang    Amadeus 

(1756-1791),  §245. 
Miiller,     Wilhelm      (1794-1827), 

quoted,   §   100,  2;    §  125,   1; 

§  180,  1. 

Music  of  Qermany,  §  245. 


see  Vocabularies. 

Narrative,  use  of  imperfect  tense 

in,  §  23,  1 ;  §  229,  1. 
National  flower  of  Germany, 

§252. 
Neg-atives 
bod^  in  answer  to,  §  237,  1. 
tein,  §  9. 
ntc^t    irafjr,    for     repetition  of, 

§  237,  2,  Note, 
noc^,  §  62 ;  §  248,  2,  a. 
position  of  nid^t,  see  Word  Order. 
Netherlands,  part  of  "the  Em- 
pire "  under  Charles  V,  §  168. 
Neuter    gender,    §    207,    Note. 
Verbs,    see    Verbs,   intransi- 
tive. 

New  Testament,  translated    by 

Luther,  §  153 ;  §  159,  c. 
Nominative,  with  c^  tft,  §  85,  2. 
Normal  order  of  sentence,  see 

Word  Order. 
North    German  Lloyd,   line  of 

steamships,  §  289. 
North  Germans 
accent  of,  §  316. 
in  Franco-Prussian  War,  §  277. 
Nouns 
abstract,  §  307. 
collective,  §  304,  2,  a. 
concrete,  §  306. 

derivation  from  verb  roots,  §  302. 
Novalis,  pseudonym  for  Friedrich 
von  Hardenberg  (1772-1801), 
quoted,  §  136,  2,  Note. 
Nuremberg    (9^i:rnbcrg),    §   116; 
§118. 
home  of  Diirer,  §  144;  of  Hans 
Sachs,   §  116;    of  Koberger, 
§131;  §143,  c. 
influence  on  printing,  §  131. 


370 


INDEX, 


For  special  tcord-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Nuremberg"  —  Continued 
picture  of  the  river  Pegnitz  and 

the  walls  of,  page  92. 
picture    of    the    Woman's    Gate 

(O^raucntor)  at,  page  100, 
statue  of  Hans  Sachs  at,  page  97. 
house  of  Albrecht  Diirer,  page  117. 
Numeral  adverbs,  see  Adverbs. 

Objects,  order  of,  see  Word  Order. 

Order  of  sentence,  see  Word 
Order. 

Orthography,  authority  on  Ger- 
man, Duden,  §  356;  names  of 
streets,  §  299. 

Ostrogoths,  §  24. 

Otto  I,  the  Great  (936-973),  re- 
storer of  the  Holy  Roman 
Empire,  §56;  §61,  c;  §67. 

Otto  III   (983-1002),  anecdote  of, 
§  65;  sketch  of,  §67;  71,  c. 
decline  of  Empire,  after,  §  82. 

Parliament  at  Frankfort,  §  2(i5; 
§267;  picture  of  meeting 
place,  page  205;  of  members, 
Arndt,  page  207;  Uhland, 
page  211. 

Particles 
at(crbing«,  §  274 ;  bcnn,  §  33 ;  boc^, 
§  237 ;    ja,  §  200 ;    no(^,   §  62 ; 
fc^on,  §  128 ;  ilfccr^au^^t,  §  160 ; 
h)o()t,  §  88 ;  jh)or,  §  274. 

Participles 
present 
used  to  translate  English  verbal 
In  ing,  §  178 ;  in  English 
rendered  in  German  by  infini- 
tive, §  180,  §  181 ;  by  clause, 
§  189 ;  by  German  past  par- 
ticiple  {came   running,  tarn 


gclaufcn),  §  180,  1,  Note ;  ob- 
ject required,  §  296,  Note; 
English  progressive,  §  178, 
Note  b  ;  §  227,  1. 
past,  §  178,  Note  a. 
of  inseparable  verbs,  §  132; 
order  of  in  sentence,  §  23 ; 
prefix  gc=  in,  §  138;  used  to 
translate  English  verbal, 
caine  running,  §  180,  1, 
Note. 

Passive  Voice,  formation  and 
peculiarities  of,  in  German, 
§  204 ;  use  of  bon  to  tell  the 
agent,  §99,  2;  §204;  per- 
sonal passive,  §  204,  1 ;  Eng- 
lish passive  infinitive,  active 
in  German,  §  204, 2,  Note ;  the 
impersonal  passive,  §  204,  2 ; 
German  substitutes  for  (man 
with  the  active),  §  204,  1, 
Note. 

Past  Participle,  see  Participles. 

Past  Tense,  see  Tense. 

^aiMliv(i)c,  at  Frankfort,  picture 
of,  page  205. 

Peace  of  Westphalia,  §  182. 

Pegnitz,  river,  §  116;  picture  of, 
page  92. 

Perfect  Tenses,  see  Tense. 

Person,  capitalization  of  second 
person  pronouns  in  letter- 
writing,  §  2i^i,  Note. 

Personal  pronouns,  see  Pro- 
nouns. 

Philip,  son  of  Charles  V,  §  163. 

Phrases 
after  bitten,  §15,  1,  b;  after  to 

command,  §  191, 1. 
concessive,  §  274. 


INDEX. 


871 


For  special  word-Htudies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Phrases  —  Continued 
order  of,  §  47 ;  §  92,  Note, 
participial  phrase  becomes  clause 

in  German,  §  189,  1. 
position  of  n^t  in,  §  37. 
um  ju  with  an  infinitive  phrase, 
§  197,  2,  Note. 
Platt-Deutsch,  §  350,  Note. 
Pluperfect  Tense,  see  Tense. 
Plural 

with  ba8,  §  211,  3,  6,  Note ;  eg, 

§  85,  2. 

Poland,  annexation  of  part  of,  to 

Brandenburg,  Prussia,  §  220. 

Pomerania   (^ommern),  won    by 

the  "  Great  Elector,"  §  192. 
Position,  "  place  where" 
greater  exactness  of  German  in 
expressing,  §  206,  2. 
Potential 
form  of   the  conditional,  §  254 ; 
of  the  subjunctive,  §  253,  c. 
Potsdam,  §  203 ;  §  213,  c. 
picture  of  the  windmill  at,  page 
159;     of    the    palace,    Sans 
Souci,  page  163. 
Predicate,   adjective,  §216;    am 
with  the  superlative,  §  218, 1 ; 
order  in,  §  37,  Note;  see  also 
Word  Order. 
Prefixes 
general,  §  304 ;   ers»,  §  304,  1 ;  ge=, 
§  304,  2,  a  and  6 ;  m\^',  §  304, 
3;  un^,  §304,4;  ur=,  §304,5. 
verbal 
separable,   see    Separable  pre- 
fixes. 
inseparable,    see     Inseparable 

prefixes. 
common,    see     Common    pre- 
fixes. 


Prepositions 
with  accusative,  §  104;  §  106- 
§  112;  accusative  or  dative, 
§  117;  §§  119-125;  with  da- 
tive, §  92;  §§  94-100;  with 
inanimate  objects,  bfl(r),  §  106, 
1 ;  h)o(r),  §  106,  2 ;  with  the 
genitive,  §  99,  3,  Note  b. 

Present  participles,   see  Parti- 
ciples. 

Present  tense,  see  Tense. 

Preterit  (Imperfect),  see  Tense. 

Printing",     invention     of,     §  131 ; 
§133;  §143,  c. 

Progressive  form  of  verb,  ren- 
dered by  present,  §  178,  Note 
b ;  §  227,  1. 
Pronouns 
capitalization    in    letter-writing, 

§  296,  Note, 
demonstratives,  §  29, 1,  and  Note ; 

§211,  3;  other,  §  30. 
impersonal,  bag,  211,  3,  6,  Note; 

C«,  §  85. 
indefinite,  §  29,  §  30. 
order    of     pronominal    objects, 

§55. 
personal,  bcr,  §  211,  3,  a. 
use  of  adjectives  with,  §  219, 

1. 
congruence  of  it,  §  207. 
reflexive,  §  196,  1. 
relative  (conjunctive), 
not  to  be  omitted  in  German, 
§29,  1;  §208;  §209;  §211,2. 
regular  relatives,  who,  §  208 ; 
that,  §211,2;  that  referring 
to   neuters,   §  211,  2,   Note; 
compound    {Jie   who),  §208; 
indefinite     compound     {Jihat 
which) ,  §  210. 


372 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Pronunciation 
accent 
the  best  German,  §  315,  §  316. 
authority  on,  §  316,  Note ;  §  343, 

footnote, 
in  sentence,  §  342. 
assimilation,  §  343. 
consonants 
identical,  §  331, 1  and  2;  equiv- 
alent, §  332. 
dissimilar,   §  333;  d),  §  334;  g, 
§335;  I,  §  336;  r,  §  337,  land 
2. 
quantity  of,  §339;  §340. 
difficulties  of,  §  317. 
digraphs,  §  325. 
diphthongs,  §  323,  §  324. 
glottal  catch,  §§  326-330. 
syllable  bearers,  §  338. 
pitch,  §  341. 
sentence  accent,  §  342. 
syllable  stress,  §§  338-341. 
Proper  names,  of  streets,  §  299. 
Protestant     Reformation,     in- 
fluence on  German  language, 
§133;  gains  of  ,§  182. 

Proverbs  (^^rtt^iuortcr),  quoted, 
§19.1;  §26,1;  §30,1;  §37; 
§50,  3,  Note;  §50,5;  §69,3; 
§113,2;  §119,  3,  Note;  §140, 
2;  §  147,2;  §147,  3;  §  154,2; 
§  157,  1;  §  194,  1;.§  249,  2; 
§  255,  2 ;  §  259, 1 ;  §  m),  Note. 

Prussia,  kings  of,  §192;  §  256; 
§  267 ;  §  278 ;  §  282 ;  establish- 
ment of  courts,  §  205;  gains 
of  territory,  §  220;  in  the 
Napoleonic  era,  §  256;  ri- 
valry with  Austria  for  leader- 
ship of  Grerman  states,  §  2(>7; 
wars  for  primacy  in  Ger- 
many, §  278. 


Pure    vowels,    characteristic 
German,  §  318. 


oi 


Quantity  of  consonants,  §  338- 

§340;  see  also  Pronunciation. 
Quantity  of  vowels,  §§  320-322 ; 

see  also  Pronunciation. 
Quedlinburgr,  picture    of   burial 

place  of  Henry  the  Fowler  at, 

page  39. 
Queen  Louise,  see  Luiae,  Queen 

of  Prussia. 
Questions 
answer  to  negative,  §  237, 1 ;  beun, 

in, §  33. 
See  Interrogative  pronouns  and 

sentences. 

Ramler,  Karl  Wilhelm  (died 
1798) ;  quoted,  §  92 ;  §  104. 

Ravenna,  capital  of  Theodoric, 
§  24;  picture  of  Theodoric's 
tomb  at,  page  15. 

Reflexive  verbs,  see  Verbs. 

Reg-enstein,  picture  of,  page  44. 

Reichenhall,  sculpture  of  Barba- 
rossa  at,  page  70. 

Reichstag^sg-ebELude  (House  of 
Parliament) ,  picture  of,  Fron- 
tispiece. 

Relative  (Conjunctive)  pro- 
nouns, see  Pronouns. 

Rlchter,  Johann  Paul  Fried- 
rich,  commonly  called  Jean 
Paul  (1763-1825),  quoted, 
§223. 

Robert,  Ludwigr  (1778-1832) ; 
quoted,  §  68,  3,  Note  a. 

Roentgren,  Wilhelm   (1^5 ), 

§  285;  picture  of,  page  224. 


INDEX, 


373 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Roland,  nephew  of  Charlemagne, 
§  46 ;  §  48 ;  §  53,  c ;  as  symbol 
of  civic  liberty  in  Middle 
Ages,  see  Bolandsdule. 

Roland's  Arch,  §  46;  picture  of, 
page  33. 

Rolandsaule,  symbol  of  civic  free- 
dom ;  §  72 ;  §  74 ;  picture  of 
Roland  at  Bremen,  page  57; 
at  Halle,  page  61. 

Romans 
in  Germany,  §  1 ;  §  3 ;  §  14. 
picture  of  remains  of  palace  at 
Trier   (Treves),    page  8;    of 
Porta  Nigra,  page  13. 

Romantic  school  of  German 
literature,  §  230. 

Roncesvalles,  important  battle  in 
medieval  legends,  §  48. 

Rosegger,      Peter      (1843 ), 

quoted,  §51,  2;  §68,4;  §  173, 
2;  §207. 

Rotbart,  see  Frederick  II,  Barba- 
rossa. 

Rothenburg,  picture  of,  page  139. 

Ruckert,  Priedrich  (1788-1866), 
§  2.30;  quoted,  §94,  2;  §  113, 
1 ;  §  117,  1 ;  §  211,  1. 

Rudelsburgr,  statue  of  Bismarck 
at,  page  214. 

Rudolph  of  Habsburg,  emperor 
of  the  Holy  Roman  Empire 
(127^-1291),  influence  on  the 
German  language,  §  133; 
§  355 ;  death  of,  §  148. 

Russia,  in  Seven  Years'  War, 
§220. 

Sachs,  Hans  (1494-1576),  "Mas- 
tersinger,"  §  116;  picture  of 
statue  in  Nuremberg,  page  97. 


(Sangcrfrieg      at      the      Wartburg 

(Singers'    Contest),    §    103; 

§  105;  §  115,  c. 
Sans  Souci,  picture  of   mill  at, 

page  159;  of  palace,  page  163. 
Saxon,  line  of  German  kings  and 

emperors,  §  56. 
Scheffel,  Josef  Viktor  von  (1826 

-1886),  §  230;  quoted,  §  140,3. 
Schenkendorf,  Max  von  (1783- 

1817),  quoted,  §  253,  c. 
Schiller,    Friedrlch    Christoph 

(1759-1805) 
account  of,  §  230. 
anecdote  of  —  and  Goethe,  §  226. 
picture  of  statue  of  the  „T)id)tev^ 
paat/'  page  177. 
of    bust    of    Schiller    in 
Weimar  Library,  page 
184. 
quoted,  §  5;  §  15,  1,  a;  §  26,  2; 

§27;  §41,1;  §49,2;  §58,2; 

§  68,  1 ;  §  85,  2 ;  §  97,  3 ;  §  100, 

8;  §  107,  1;  §  132;  §  150,  2,  c. 

Note;  §  167,1;  §183,3;  §185, 

2;  §211,3,  b,  Note;  §218,  1; 

§  228,  2;  §  234,  3;   §  237,  1; 

§  243 ;  §  249,  1 ;  §  253,  d ;  §  257, 

1,  Note ;  §  270,  2,  Note. 
Schleg-el,  August  Wilhelm  von 

(1767-1845),    §  230;    quoted, 

§  157, 1,  Note  c. 
Schlegel,  Friedrlch  von  (1772- 

1829),  §230;   quoted,  §95,1; 

§  98,  2. 
Schopenhauer,   Arthur    (1788- 

1860),  §285. 
Schubert,     Franz     (1797-1828), 

§245. 
Schumann,  Robert   (1810-1856), 

§245. 


874 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabulariea. 


Schwab,      Gustav     (1792-1850), 

quoted,  §  270,  1. 
Science,  German   superiority  in, 

§  285,  §  286. 
Script,  illustrations  of,  pages  236; 

238;  241. 
(Setn 
as  auxiliary,  see  Auxiliary. 
more  exact  use  of,  than  in  English, 

§206. 
use  of  fic^  fccftnbcn  and  c«  gc(;t  or 

of  fein  with  the  dative,  §  206, 

1. 
"  place  where  "  demands  specific 

term,  §  206,  2,  and  Note, 
with  bag,  §  211,  3,  6,  Note. 
Sequence  of  tenses,  §  243. 
Seven  Years'  War,  §  220. 
Siegfried,  §  22;  §  32,  c, 
Silesia,    won    by    Prussia    from 

Austria,  §  220. 
Singular  with  plural  verb,  §  85, 

2;  §211,  3,6,  Note. 
South    America,  German   trade 

in,  §  289. 
South     Germans     in    Franco- 
Prussian  War,  §  277. 
Spain,  crusades  against  Moors  in, 

§48. 
part   of   "the   Empire,"    §163; 

separated  from,  §  168. 
Steamship  lines,  §  289. 
Storm,      Theodor      (1817-1888), 

§230. 
quoted,    §9;    §  18,    2;    §28,    2 

§42,1;  §50,2;  §57;  §69,1 

§109,1;  §123,1;  §137;  §171 

2;    §183,  1;    §206,2,    Note 

§219,  2;    §222,  1;    §  247,  2 

§  261,  1. 


Streets,  names  of,  §  299. 
Students   of   German  Univer. 

slties,    §  285. 
Subject 
accusative   with     infinitive    be- 
comes German  clause,  §  191, 1. 
grammatical,  „t^,"  §  85,  2,  and 

Note, 
place  in  sentence, §  2. 
Subjunctive 
conditional  mode  with  subjunc- 
tive  of    tDcrbcn,    §  254    and 
Note.    See  Conditional. 
distinguished     from    indicative, 

§241. 
divisions 

(a)  of   indirect   discourse    (de- 
pendent), §  242,  §  243. 
(6)  unreal   (contrary  to  fact), 
§253. 
(tt)  hortative,  §  253,  a. 

(b)  optative,  §  253,  b. 

(c)  potential,  §  253,  c. 

(d)  contrary  to  fact,  §  253,  d. 
special  uses  of 

"should  like,"  "could  have," 

§  266,  1  and  2. 
past  for  conditional,  §  254,  Note, 
pluperfect,  §  266,  2. 
Subordinating:     conjunctions, 

see  Conjunctions. 
Substantive  adjectives,  §  217. 
Sudermann,    Hermann     (1857- 

),  §230;  quoted,  §49,  1; 

§  59,  1;    §  157,  1,   Note    a; 
§  204,  1 ;    §  246,  4. 
SufElzes 
formation  of  nouns 
concrete,  =(^cn,   4ctn,    *er,    aw, 

»Itng,  §  30(i. 
abstract,  ^,  -^x,  A^ziif  .fett,  »fc^tt, 
=ung,  §  307. 


INDEX. 


375 


For  special  word-studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


SuflBxes  —  Continued 
formation  of  adjectives 
=bar,  =en,  ^aft,  =tg,  4^6),  4i^,  ^fam, 
§  308. 
formation  of  verbs 
-en,  =crn,  Acven,  =tgcn,  §  309. 
Superlative,  see  Comparison. 
Sweden,  in  Thirty  Years'   War, 
§  182;  in  Seven  Years'  War, 
§220. 
Syllable  stress,  see  under  Pro- 
nunciation. 

Tacitus,  Roman    historian,   §  12 ; 

§14. 
Tense 
present 

used  in  German  for  the  future, 
§  228,  1 ;  for  the  progressive 
and  emphatic  forms,  §  227, 1 ; 
§  228 ;  with  f(f)on  for  the  per- 
fect, §  228,  2 ;  in  indirect  dis- 
course, §243;  use  of  ttjcnn 
with,  §  84,  2. 
past  (preterit,  imperfect) 

in  connected  narrative,  §  229, 1 ; 
change  from  perfect  to  past, 
§  229,  2,  Note  a ;  past  to  per- 
fect, §  229,  2,  Note  b  ;  with 
fd^on  for  past  perfect  (pluper- 
fect), §  228,  2,  Note;  for  pro- 
gressive and  emphatic  forms, 
§  178,  Note  h  ;  §  227, 1 ;  use  of 
aU  with,  §  84,  1. 
future 

general  rule,  §  69,  4,  a,  b,  c. 

simple  auxiliary,  toerbcn,  §  69,  1 
and  4,  a ;  to  express  desire, 
hjoacu,  §69,  3;  intention, 
§  69,  4,  i ;  obligation  (foHen), 
§69,2;  §69,4,  6  and  c. 

substitute  for,  §  228,  1. 


perfect 
general  rule  for  use  in  German, 
§  229,    2 ;     change    to    past, 
§  229,  2,  Note  a ;  for  empha- 
sis, §  229,  2,  Note  b ;  German 
present  with  fdjon  for  English 
perfect,  §  228,  2. 
pluperfect 
German    past   with   fci^on    for 
English,     §     228,     2,     Note, 
subjunctive,  §  266,  2. 
Teutoburger  Forest,  §  1 ;  §  3. 

picture  of  monument  in,  page  2. 
Theodoric  the  Great,  §  22 ;  §  24 ; 
§  38;    see  also  Dietrich  von 
Bern;    picture  of   tomb    at 
Ravenna,  page  15. 
There,    adverb,    §  16,    1    and    2; 
"factitive,"    §    16;   e§    gibt, 
§85,1;  cSift,  §85,  2. 
Thirty  Years'  War,  §  176 ;  §  182 ; 

§  187,  c. 
Thoma,  Ludwigr,  quoted,  §  30,  1, 
Note;    §    206,    2;    §  221,    2; 
§  246,  4. 
Thuring-ia  (Xfjiirtngcn),  §  103. 
Thusnelda,  wife  of  Hermann,  §  3. 
Tieck,       Ludwigr,       (1773-1853), 
§  230;  quoted,  §  120,  2. 
-^ime 

accusative  of ,  §  5 ;  §  50,  2. 
adverbs  of,  §  5,  Note, 
duration  of,  §  50,  1  and  2. 
extent  of ,  §  5 ;  §  98,  2. 
particular  point  of ,  §  50,  3 ;  §  98, 1. 
telling  time    (of   day),  §  50,   4; 
§  169,  2. 
Titles,  §  295 ;  §  298. 
Tours,  battle  of,  §  48. 
Towns,  growth  of,  in  Middle  Ages, 
§  72,  §  74. 


876 


INDEX. 


For  special  word  studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Trade,  growth  in  German  Empire, 

§289;  §290. 
Transitive  verbs,  see  Verbs. 
Transposed  order  of  sentence, 

see  Word  Order. 
Trier  (Treves),  Koman  remains  at, 
§14. 
picture  of  Roman  palace  at,  page 
8. 

of  tlie  Porta  Nigra  (Black 
Gate),  page  13. 
Two   infinitives,  §  73,  1  and  2; 
§81. 

Uhland,      Ludwig     (1787-1862), 
§230. 
picture  of,  page  211. 
quoted,  §15,  2,  &;  §29,3;  §40,  2; 
§47;  §99,  3;  §100,  4;  §119, 
3;  §  141;  §  147,  3;  §  150,  2,  a ; 
§  154,  2;    §173,   1;  §196,   2; 
§  218,  2 ;  §  234,  2,  Note. 
Ulfllas,  translator  of  the  Bible  into 

Gothic,  §349;  §357. 
Umlaut 
derivation  of,  §  322 ;  sounds  of, 

§  322,  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5. 
used    with    suffixes,    »c^en,   4dn, 
§  30(),  1 ;  ^er,  §  306,  2,  6 ;  4ing, 
§306,  4,  d;  ^,§307,1,  b. 
Universities,  discipline  in,  §  285. 

Varus,  Roman  general,  §  1. 
SSeX'^,  §  140. 
Verbals 
English  verbal  in  ing 
1.  When  not  participial  modi- 
fier 
(a)   as     clauses,     when     in 
phrase  of    time   or  cause, 
§  189,  1 ;  or  the  object  of  a 


preposition,    §  189,    2;    or 
when  the  verbal  after  with- 
out or  instead  of  is  modified 
by  possessive,  §  190. 
(6)   as  infinitives 
omission  of  ju,  §  180, 1 ;  use 

of  5U,  §  180,  2. 
verbals  after  instead  of  or 

without,    if    unmodified, 

§181. 

2.  When  participial  modifiers 
(a)   present  participles,  §  178. 
(6)   past    participles,    §  178. 

Note  a. 
(c)   predicate    verbal,    came 
running,  §  180,  1,  Note. 

3.  Progressive  form,  §  178,  Note 

6 ;  §  227,  1. 
verbal  nouns,  §  304,  2. 
Verbs 
transitive 
with  ^abcit,  §  165;  §  167,  2,  and 
Note ;  follow  and  meet  intran- 
sitive in  German,  §  l<i6.  Note, 
use  of  he^  to  make  transitives, 
§  135,  3. 
intransitive  (neuter) 

with  f)ahcn,  §  165;   with  fcin, 

§  166;    with    ^abcn   or   fein, 

§  167,  1  and  2. 

fccgcgncn  and  folgcn,  §  166,  Note. 

separable,  see  Separable  prefixes. 

inseparable,  see  Inseparable  pre- 

fixes. 
common,  see  Common  prefixes. 
impersonal 
with  i^aben,  §  165;  exceptions, 

§166. 
c«  gibt,  §  85,  1. 

impersonal  passive,  §  204,  2. 
reflexive 
with  ^a6cn, §  165. 
iid)  bcfinbcn,  §  206, 1. 


INDEX. 


377 


For  special  word -studies,  see  Vocabularies. 


Verbs  —  Continued 
emphatic    form,  §    77,  2,  Note; 

§  227,  1. 
progressive  form,  §  178,  Note  h ; 
§  227,  1. 
Verona   (Bern),   capital  of    Tlie- 

odoric,  §  22;  §24. 
Vienna,  Beethoven  and  Goethe  in, 

§240. 
Visigoths,  Bishop  Ulfilas  of,  §  349. 
■  Voice,  see  Active  and  Passive. 
Voss,   Johann   Heinrich   (1751- 

1826),  quoted,  §  217. 
Vowels,  see  Pronunciation. 

Wagner,    Richard     (1813-1883), 

§  245 ;  picture  of,  page  190. 
Walther  von  der  Vogelweide, 

§  103;  §  105. 
Wartburg  Castle  at  Eisenbach, 
§  103 ;  Luther  at,  §  153. 
picture  of  the  castle,  page  87. 

of  the  inner  court,  page 

124. 
of  Luther's  room,  page  121. 
of  the  Singers'  Hall  in  the 
castle,  page  84. 
Washington,    George,    admired 

by  Frederick  II,  §  214. 
Weber,  Karl  Maria  von  (1786- 

1826),  §245. 
Weibertreu,  fortress,  see  Weins- 

berg. 
Weimar 
picture  of  Goethe  in  library  at, 
page  195.    , 
of    Goethe's    Garden    in, 

page  181. 
of  „S)ic^ter^aar/'  page  177. 
of  Schiller  in  library  at, 
page  184. 


Weinsberg,  siege  of,  §  91 ;  §  93. 
pictures  of  fortress,  pages  74  and 

79. 
the  octagonal  tower  at,  page  82. 

SScrbcn,  see  Auxiliaries. 

Werder,  Karl,  quoted,  §  248, 
2,  b. 

Westphalia,  Peace  of  (1648), 
§182. 

Wieland,  Christoph  Martin 
(1733-1813),  quoted,  §  120,  3, 
Note  b  ;  §  157, 1,  Note  6 ;  §  206, 
1 ;  §  233,  2. 

Wildenbruch,  Ernst  von  (1845- 
1<K)9),  §  230;  quoted,  §  4, 
Note ;  §  29,  2 ;  §  39,  2 ;  §  120, 
1;  §123,2;  §  128,  1;  §  136,  1 ; 
§  150,  2,  c;  §  160;  §  166,  c, 
Note;  §169,  2,  Note;  §173,4; 
§  191,  1;  §  200,  2;  §  204,  2, 
Note;  §206,2;  §221,1;  §233, 
1;  §237,2;  §246,  1;  §246,4, 
Note ;  §  262 ;  §  268,  2. 

William  I,  German  Emperor  and 
King  of  Prussia    (1871-1888) 
(King,  1861-1871) 
anecdote  of  Kornblumen,  §252; 

of  Heldengreis,  §  281. 
appoints  Bismarck  prime  minis- 
ter, §  277 ;  §  278. 
historical  sketch  of,  §  278 ;  §  282. 
later  years  of,  §  281 ;  §  282. 
picture  of    monument    at    Kyff- 
hauser,  page  65. 
at  Coblentz,  page  219. 

William  II  (born,  1859,  crowned, 
1888),  present  emperor,  §  282. 

Windmill,  legend  of  the,  at  Sans 
Souci,  §  203. 

Wolfram  von  Eschenbach, 
§105. 


878 


INDEX. 


For  special  word-atudies,  see  Vocabularies, 


Henriette,  Frei- 
von  (1745-1788), 
183,  2. 


Wolzogren, 

frau 
quoted 

Word  composition 
German  rich  in  compound  words, 

§300. 
roots,  §  301. 
miaut  (Sanlaut,  ^nlaut,  2tu81aut), 

§  301  and  Note, 
derivation  of  nouns  from  verbs, 
§  302, §  303. 
prefixes 
verbal 
See    Separable,  Inseparable, 
and  Common. 
general 
ers^,  §  304,  1;    gc,  §  304,  2; 
mi^^,  §  304,  3 ;   un=,  304,  4 ; 
ur=,  §  :«)4,  5. 
suffixes,  §§  305-309,  see  also  Suf- 
fixes. 
compound  words,  §  310;  German 
partiality  to,  §  300. 
adjectives,  §  312. 
nouns,  §  311. 
verbs,  §  313. 
derivation    through    the   Latin, 
§314. 

Word  formation,  see  Word  com- 
position. 

Word  Order 
normal 
emphatic  position  in   German 

sentences,  §  37,  Note, 
position  of 
adverbs,   §  47 ;   §  47,  1 ;    ad- 
verbial phrases,  §  47. 
infinitives  with  modals,  §  66; 
"two  infinitives,"  §  73,  1. 


nic^l,   modifying   the  whole, 

§37;  special  word,  §  37,  1. 
objects,  direct  and  indirect, 
§  55;    for  emphasis,  §  55, 
Note, 
prepositional   phrases,  §  47 ; 

§  92,  Note, 
separable   prefixes,   §  147,  1 

and  3. 
special  subjunctive,  §  266,  2. 
verbals  as  participles,  §  178, 
and  Note  a. 
inverted 
general  rule  for,  §  2 ;  after  sub- 
ordinate clause,  §  2,  2. 
German  partiality  to,  §  2,  1. 
omission  of   e3  in  impersonal 

passive,  §  204,  2. 
inversion  of  conditional,  §  256, 
1  and  2. 
transposed 
in  simple  tenses,  §  14 ;  in  com- 
pound, §  23. 
after  ba,  §  17,  3. 
omission  of  c«    in  impersonal 

passive,  §  201,  2. 
of    modals,   §73,   2;    of  "two 

infinitives,"  §  73,  2. 
of  special  subjunctive    (^Stte), 
§266,2. 

3cr",  §141. 

Zschokke,  Heinrlch  (1771-1848) 
quoted,   §  17,    1;    §43,  2;    §66; 

§  178,  Note  a ;  §  194,  2 ;  §  204, 

1,  Note;  §229,1. 

omitted  after  certain  verbs,  §  180, 

1 ;  with  modals,  §  66. 
not  omitted,  §  180,  2. 


ALLYN  AND  BACON'S  SERIES  OF 
GERMAN   TEXTS 

i€mo,  cloth.    With  Introduction,  Notes,  Vocabulary,  and 
Exercises  for  Retranslation  into  German. 


IMMENSEE.  By  Theodor  Storm.  Edited  by  E.  A.  Whitenack. 
1 1 5  pages. 

HOHER  ALS  DIE  KIRCHE.  By  Wilhelmine  von  Hillern. 
Edited  by  J.  B,  E.  Jonas,        1 50  pages. 

L'ARRABBIATA.  By  Paul  Johann  Ludwig  Heyse.  Edited  by 
Paul  V.  Bacon.     128  pages. 

GERMELSHAUSEN.  By  Friedrich  Gerstacker.  Edited  by  R.  A, 
von  Minckwitz.     122  pages. 

DER  ZERBROCHENE  KRUG  and  DAS  WIRTSHAUS  ZU 
CRANSAC.  By  Johann  Heinrich  Daniel  Zschokke.  Edited 
by  Edward  Maniey.     1 69  pages. 

DER  SCHWIEGERSOHN.  By  Rudolf  Baumbach.  Edited  by 
W.  W.  Florer  and  E.  H.  Lauer.     264  pages. 

DAS  EDLE  BLUT  and  DER  LETZTE.  By  Ernst  von  Wilden- 
bruch.    Edited  by  W.  W.  Florer  and  M.  R.  Shelly.    238  pages. 

DIE  JOURNALISTEN.  By  Gustav  Freytag.  Edited  by  Edward 
Maniey.    272  pages. 

DER  NEFFE  ALS  ONKEL.  By  Friedrich  von  Schiller.  Edited 
by  C.  F.  Raddatz.     147  pages. 

GRIECHISCHE  HEROENGESCHICHTEN.  By  Barthold  Georg 
Niebuhr.     Edited  by  George  E.  Merkley.     128  pages. 

MARCH  EN.  By  Jakob  and  Wilhelm  Grimm.  Edited  by  George 
E.  Merkley.     140  pages. 

WILHELM  TELL.  By  Friedrich  von  Schiller.  Edited  by  Carl 
Schlenker.    000  pages. 


GERMAN 


A  German  Grammar  for  Beginners 

By  Paul  V.  Bacon.     Revised  Edition.     i2mo,  cloth,  448  pages. 
Price,  $1.25. 

THIS  is  a. beginning  book  which  introduces  easy  reading  from 
the  first,  along  with  the  usual  drill  in  grammar.  The  object 
is  to  stimulate  interest,  to  economize  vocabulary,  and  to  give 
unity  to  the  first  year  work. 

Distinguishing  features  of  the  Grammar  are :  — 

I.  Complete  stories,  full  of  interest,  connected  with  the  gram- 
matical exercises  and  using  the  same  words.  The  first  is  about 
the  school,  the  second  about  the  home,  and  so  many  cognates 
are  used  that  reading  may  be  begun  as  soon  as  the  alphabet  is 
learned.  There  are  105  pages  of  this  reading  matter,  including 
poems  from  Goethe,  Heine,  and  Uhland,  The  stories  are  sim- 
ple and  delightful  and  make  use  of  every-day  words.  They  will 
attract  the  young  pupil  and  enliven  the  grammar  drill.  The  cor- 
relation of  stories  and  grammar  makes  possible  a  small  working 
vocabulary. 

II.  Systematic  drill  on  grammar,  each  topic  being  treated  in 
a  group  of  five  lessons.  The  language  of  the  rules  is  especially 
simple. 

III.  Every  fifth  lesson  is  a  review,  and  in  addition  three  com- 
plete lessons  are  devoted  to  a  review  of  the  first  half  of  the  book 
and  seven  to  tht;  whole  book.  These  reviews  are  twenty-three 
in  number. 

IV.  Attractive  material  for  memorizing.  Each  lesson  begins 
with  a  proverb,  idiom,  or  short  poem,  to  be  committed  to  mem- 
ory. These  include  selections  from  Goethe,  Schiller,  Heine, 
RUckert,  SchefFel,  Muller,  and  many  others. 

The  New  Edition  contains  at  the  back  of  the  booK  a  complete 
Summary  of  Inflections  arranged  for  ready  reference.  This,  with 
the  Index  to  Syntax,  makes  the  book  suitable  for  a  reference 
grammar  as  well  as  for  a  beginning  book. 


66 


GERMAN 


Im  Vaterland:  A  Reader  for  Pupils  in  their  First  oi 
Second  Year  of  German 

By  Paul  V.  Bacon.    lamo,  cloth,  430  pages.    Price  $1.2^ 
w'T'O  give  the  American  student  a  better  understanding  and 

1  appreciation  of  Germany  and  the  Germans  ;  to  furnish  him 
with  an  adequate  vocabulary  of  colloquial  idioms ;  to  point  out 
and  explain  differences  between  German  and  American  customs  ; 
In  short,  to  broaden  and  deepen  the  American's  knowledge  and 
love  of  the  German  language,  music,  poetry,  and  people ;  these 
are  the  aims  of  /m  Vaterland.'''^ 

Distinctive  features  of  this  remarkable  book  are : 

I,  Dialogues  on  thirty-six  different  subjects  (such  as  the  Ger- 
man Empire,  The  Imperial  Family,  In  School,  At  a  Store,  Berlin 
University,  The  Army,  The  Hotel,  In  a  Theatre,  At  a  Station,  In 
a  Train,  etc.)»  These  give  the  pupil  a  knowledge  of  German 
customs  and  prepare  him  for  appreciative  and  intelligent  travel  in 
Germany. 

II.  Illustrations  from  photographs  of  German  scenes,  build- 
ings, paintings,  churches,  and  castles.  Besides  forty-nine  of 
these  illustrations  there  are  six  maps,  including  a  two-page 
colored  map  of  the  German  Empire, 

.  III.  Songs,  with  music  arranged  for  high  school  pupils. 
There  are  twenty-seven  characteristic  German  songs  from  sixteen 
different  composers. 

IV.  Poems  —  thirty-six  of  them  —  ranging  from  the  thirteenth 
to  the  twentieth  century,  especially  adapted  for  memorizing. 

V.  Notes  on  all  idioms  and  grammatical  difficulties.  They 
serve  also  to  supplement  the  text.  For  example,  they  contain  a 
complete  list  of  the  German  States,  an  outline  of  a  gymnasial 
course  of  study,  biographies  of  the  authors  mentioned  in  the 
book,  and  kindred  matters. 

VI.  Composition  exercises  on  each  chapter  of  the  dialogues. 

VII.  A  vocabulary  made  with  unusual  care,  and  including  aU 
the  idioms  used  in  the  book. 

VIII.  A  full,  practical  index  of  persons  and  of  topics. 

56 


FRENCH 


ChardenaPs  Complete  French  Course 

New  Edition,  revised  and  rewritten  by  Maro  S.  Brooks,  of  the  Brook* 
line  High  School.    i6mo,  cloth,  437  pages.    Price,  $1.20. 

FOR  many  years  ChardenaPs  Course  has  been  the  most  popu- 
lar book  for  beginners  in  French.  Its  success  is  largely 
due  to  its  simplicity,  thoroughness,  and  the  care  with  which  the 
lessons  are  graded.  In  revising  the  book  for  a  new  edition  the 
editor  has  retained  these  excellent  qualities  and  has  endeavored 
to  give  the  book  even  wider  vogue  by  the  following  changes  and 
additions : 

I.  The  order  of  presentation  has  been  so  altered  as  to  secure 
greater  variety  in  the  exercises  from  the  outset.  To  this  end 
pronouns  have  been  introduced  earlier,  and  the  most  common 
tenses  of  the  verb  in  all  conjugations. 

II.  The  practical  value  of  the  vocabulary  has  been  increased 
by  the  insertion  of  many  words  and  phrases  of  frequent  occur- 
rence in  ordinary  conversation. 

III.  The  sentences  for  translation  have  been  made  lively 
and  colloquial.  In  most  of  the  English  exercises  of  the  first 
twenty-four  lessons  there  are  series  of  questions  which  cannot  be 
answered  by  yes  or  no,  and  in  many  lessons  after  that  point 
whole  exercises  consisting  of  such  questions  only  have  been 
added.  These  questions  are  intended  as  a  basis  for  conversa- 
tional work  in  the  classroom  and  may  all  be  answered  from 
material  already  provided.  To  stimulate  conversation  still  fur- 
ther a  list  of  expressions  for  classroom  use  has  been  prepared. 

While  most  of  the  subjects  have  been  presented  one  topic  at  a 
time  as  in  the  former  edition,  every  subject  will  be  found  sum- 
marized in  a  single  lesson. 

A  feature  of  the  book  is  the  appendix,  which  contains  the  ir.ost 
necessary  rules  of  grammar,  notably  those  for  the  formation  of 
the  plural  and  feminine  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  There  are 
complete  tables  of  the  conjugations  of  regular  and  irregular 
verbs,  and  other  useful  lists. 

The  book  has  also  several  pages  of  reading  exercises. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN     INITIAL     FINE     OF     25     CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


4UG    Q 

MAR  23  1935 

■^^p  7  ms 

^£r'  25  1935 
OCT    29  1935 
APR   XI  ^936 


1936 


MAY  21 


AUG   7     mo 


ii'^h 


JAN 


I4Nov'57CS 


lU 


LD  2lA-60m-8,*65 
(P2336sl0)476B 


General  Library     . 
University  of  Califorma 
Berkeley 


335658 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORrilA  H|RARY 


